B-63874en 11

FANUC MANUAL GUIDE +
Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System
OPERATOR'S MANUAL
B-63874EN/11
• No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.
• All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
The products in this manual are controlled based on Japan’s “Foreign Exchange and
Foreign Trade Law”. The export from Japan may be subject to an export license by the
government of Japan.
Further, re-export to another country may be subject to the license of the government of
the country from where the product is re-exported. Furthermore, the product may also be
controlled by re-export regulations of the United States government.
Should you wish to export or re-export these products, please contact FANUC for advice.
In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters.
However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be
done, because there are so many possibilities.
Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be
regarded as ”impossible”.
This manual contains the program names or device names of other companies, some of
which are registered trademarks of respective owners. However, these names are not
followed by ® or ™ in the main body.
B-63874EN/11 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
When using machines incorporating FANUC MANUAL GUIDE i, be sure to observe the descriptions
herein.
Contents
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE.........................................................................s-1

GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ............................................................................................s-1
OVERVIEW OF THIS MANUAL ............................................................................................................s-2
SYMBOLS USED......................................................................................................................................s-3
FORMAT OF PROGRAMS TO BE USED ..............................................................................................s-3
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the machine.
Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to the degree of the risk or the severity of
damage.
Also, supplementary information is described as Note.
Read the Warning, Caution, and Note thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.
WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a
damage of both the user being injured and the equipment being damaged if the
approved procedure is not observed.
CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the
approved procedure is not observed.
NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and
Caution.
- Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.
GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

To ensure safety while using a machine featuring the MANUAL GUIDE i function, observe the following
precautions:
WARNING
1 Confirm, on the screen, that the data has been entered correctly before
proceeding to the next operation. Attempting operation with incorrect data may
cause the tool to strike the workpiece or machine, possibly breaking the tool or
machine or injuring the operator.
2 Before starting the machine using the tool compensation function, carefully
determine the direction of compensation and the compensation value, and
ensure that the tool will not strike the workpiece or machine. Otherwise the tool
or machine may be damaged or the operator may be injured.
s-1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-63874EN/11
WARNING
3 When using constant surface speed control, set the maximum rotating speed of
the spindle to a value that is allowed for the workpiece and workpiece hold unit.
Otherwise, the workpiece or hold unit may be removed by centrifugal force to
damage the tool machine or injure the operator.
4 Set all necessary parameters and data items before starting MANUAL GUIDE i
operations. Note that if the cutting conditions are not suitable for the workpiece,
the tool may be damaged or the operator may be injured.
5 After creating a machining program using MANUAL GUIDE i functions, do no
run the machine on that program immediately. Instead, confirm every step of the
resultant program, and make sure that the tool path and machining operation are
correct and that the tool will not strike the workpiece or machine. Before starting
production machining, run the machine with no workpiece attached to the
machine to make sure that the tool will not strike a workpiece or the machine. If
the tool strikes the machine and/or work-piece, the tool and/or machine may be
damaged, and even injuries the operator.
CAUTION
After pressing the power-on button, do not touch any keys on the keyboard until
the initial screen appears. Some keys are used for maintenance or special
operations such that pressing such a key may cause an unexpected operation.
OVERVIEW OF THIS MANUAL

This manual describes the functions of MANUAL GUIDE i for the Series 0i-MODEL F, 0i-MODEL D,
MODEL C, Series 16i/18i/21i-MODEL B, Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A or Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL
B.
For other functions, refer to the operator’s manual for the Series 0i-MODEL F, 0i-MODEL D, MODEL C,
Series 16i/18i/21i-MODEL B, Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A, or Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL B.
The specifications and usage of MANUAL GUIDE i may vary according to the specifications of the
operator’s panel of a machine tool. Be sure to read the manual provided by the machine tool builder.
The functions of the CNC machine tool system are determined not only by the CNC, but by the
combination of the machine tool, the power magnetic circuit in the machine tool, the servo system, the
CNC, and the operator’s panel.
It is impossible to cover all possible combinations of all functions, programming methods, and operations
in a single manual.
This manual explains only the MANUAL GUIDE i operations provided for the CNC. For individual CNC
machine tools, refer to applicable manuals from the machine tool builders.
This manual explains as many detailed functions as possible. However, it is not possible to describe all of
the items which cannot be done or which the operator must not do. Therefore, please assume that
functions other than those described in this manual cannot be performed.
Detailed information and special conditions are explained in notes. The readers may encounter new
technical terms in the notes not previously defined or described. In this case, read through this manual
first, then review the details.
s-2
B-63874EN/11 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SYMBOLS USED
In this manual, the following conventions are used for keys.
(1) Function keys are represented by enclosing their names between the special characters < and >:
Example) <PROGRM>, <OFSET>
(2) The numbers to be input by Numeral keys are indicated as it is.
Example) 12.345
(3) Similarly to functions keys, the input (INPUT) and editing keys are represented by enclosing their
names between the special characters < and >:
Example) 12.345 <INPUT>, <ALTER>
(4) Soft-keys are enclosed in brackets [ ]:
Example) [LIST], [LINE]
(5) The cursor move keys are indicated by the following symbols :
Example) <↑>, <↓>, <←>, <→>
(6) The page change keys are indicated by the following symbols :
Example) <↑ PAGE>, <PAGE ↓>
Soft Keys
Numeral keys
Cursor move keys INPUT key

(or cursor keys)
Function keys
Page change keys
(or page keys)
FORMAT OF PROGRAMS TO BE USED

The ISO code format, which is in wide use for CNC machine tools, is used on machining programs used
with MANUAL GUIDE i. In addition, G4-digit machining cycles are used to implement advanced
machining operations.
G4-digit machining cycles can be input and edited easily using a menu window, which enables machining
data to be entered interactively.
When a machining program is being edited, an address at which the cursor is placed is explained at the
bottom of the screen.
s-3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B-63874EN/11
1. Word
The term “word” refers to a minimum unit in NC machining programs. It is represented using a
combination of an address (one of letters A to Z), some of digits 0 to 9, an arithmetic symbol (+ or -),
and/or a decimal point.
The “address” represents the meaning of numeric data, such as a machine movement axis
2. Cursor
The term “cursor” used with machining programs refers to a display portion where a string of
characters is shown against a yellow background. This portion is referred to as “cursor-selected
display portion”. This is the place where an actual editing action is made during machining program
editing.
Either of the following two items can be cursor-selected.
<1> 1 block
When the cursor is shifted to the beginning of the next block by pressing the cursor move key
<→>, the entire block is selected.
When the cursor is placed at the address of the beginning of a certain block, pressing the cursor
move key <←> causes the entire block to be selected.
When a block is already selected, pressing the cursor move key <↑> or <↓> causes the block,
respectively, following or preceding the block of interest to be selected.
<2> 1 word
When a whole block is selected, pressing the cursor move key <←> or <→> causes a word to
be selected. Each time the cursor move key <←> or <→> is pressed, a new word is selected.
When a word in a certain block is selected, pressing the cursor move key <↑> or <↓> causes
the same-number address in the block, respectively, following or preceding the block of interest
to be selected.
NOTE
1 On a screen where numeric data, such as offset data or cycle machining data, is
input directly, the term “cursor” refers to a data portion enclosed in a blue frame.
2 A data portion enclosed in a blue frame is referred to as “cursor-selected data
item”. Once numeric data is keyed in with numeric keys, pressing the <INPUT>
key causes the numeric data to be input as the data item of interest.
3 Pressing the cursor move key <←>, <↑>, <↓>, or <→> causes a new data item
to be selected.
s-4
B-63874EN/11 PREFACE
PREFACE
This manual is configured as follows:
Explanations about the document contents

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Describes the rules you should observe so that you can safely use machines incorporating FANUC
MANUAL GUIDE i.
PREFACE
Explains how this document is configured. It also lists applicable CNC units and related documents.
Part I, “WHAT IS MANUAL GUIDE i?”
Describes the features of MANUAL GUIDE i.
Part II, “BASIC SCREEN AND OPERATION”
Describes the configuration of the MANUAL GUIDE i screen. It also explains all basic operations,
from creating machining programs in ISO code format to running machine tools using the programs.
Part III, “CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS”
Explains convenient functions that will help create and run programs.
Part IV, “MACHINING CYCLE”
Explains how to program machining cycles offered by MANUAL GUIDE i.
Part V, “MULTI-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS (OPTION)”
Explains how to program functions for multipath lathes.
Part VI, “OTHER FUNCTIONS”
Describes the program coordinate system switching, tool management, and other functions usable
with MANUAL GUIDE i.
APPENDIX
Provides information (such as examples of creating and running programs, alarms, and parameter
setting) which machine operators can reference when operating MANUAL GUIDE i.
APPENDIX (FOR MACHINE TOOL BUILDER)
Provides information (such as MANUAL GUIDE i startup procedure and customization) which
machine tool builders will need in using MANUAL GUIDE i.
Applicable models
This manual can be used with the following models.
The abbreviated names may be used.
- FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A

Product name Abbreviation
FANUC Series 30i-MODEL A 30i –A Series 30i
FANUC Series 31i-MODEL A 31i –A
Series 31i
FANUC Series 31i-MODEL A5 31i –A5
FANUC Series 32i-MODEL A 32i –A Series 32i
- FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL B

FANUC Series 30i-MODEL B 30i –B Series 30i
FANUC Series 31i-MODEL B 31i –B
Series 31i
FANUC Series 31i-MODEL B5 31i –B5
FANUC Series 32i-MODEL B 32i –B Series 32i
p-1
PREFACE B-63874EN/11
NOTE
1 For an explanatory purpose, the following descriptions may be used according to
the types of path control used:
• T series: For the lathe system
• M series: For the machining center system
2 Unless otherwise stated, the model names Series 30i, Series 31i, and Series 32i
used in this document sometimes collectively refer to the models mentioned
above except for item 3 below.
3 Some functions described in this manual may not be applied to some products.
For details, refer to the DESCRIPTIONS (B-63942EN) related to applied CNC.
4 MANUAL GUIDE i is not available in Series 30i-MODEL A or MODEL B with 5
paths or over.
- FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is-MODEL B

FANUC Series 16i-TB 16i-TB
FANUC Series 16i-MB 16i-MB
Series 16i
FANUC Series 160is-TB 160is-TB
FANUC Series 160is-MB 160is-MB
FANUC Series 18i-MB5 18i-MB5
FANUC Series 180i-MB5 180i-MB5 Series 18i
FANUC Series 180is-MB5 180is-MB5
Series 21i
NOTE
2 Unless otherwise stated, the model names Series 16i, Series 18i, and Series 21i
used in this document sometimes collectively refer to the models mentioned
above except for item 3 below.
For details, refer to the DESCRIPTIONS (B-63532EN) related to applied CNC.
p-2
- FANUC Series 0i–MODEL F

FANUC Series 0i-TF 0i-TF
Series 0i-F
FANUC Series 0i-MF 0i-MF
- FANUC Series 0i–MODEL D

FANUC Series 0i-TD 0i-TD
Series 0i-D
FANUC Series 0i-MD 0i-MD
- FANUC Series 0i–MODEL C

FANUC Series 0i-TC 0i-TC
Series 0i-C
FANUC Series 0i-TTC 0i-TTC
FANUC Series 0i-MC 0i-MC
NOTE
2 Unless otherwise stated, the model names Series 0i used in this document
sometimes collectively refer to the models mentioned above except for item 3
below.
For details, refer to the DESCRIPTIONS (B-64112EN, B-64302EN) related to
applied CNC.
Related manuals
- Manuals related to MANUAL GUIDE i
The table below lists manuals related to MANUAL GUIDE i.
Manual name Specification Number
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System) B-63874EN *
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining Center System) B-63874EN-2
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (SET-UP GUIDANCE FUNCTIONS) B-63874EN-1
(*) In the table, this manual is marked with an asterisk (*).
- Manuals related to FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A

DESCRIPTIONS B-63942EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (HARDWARE) B-63943EN
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) B-63943EN-1
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System) B-63944EN
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe System) B-63944EN-1
MAINTENANCE MANUAL B-63945EN
PARAMETER MANUAL B-65950EN
p-3
PREFACE B-63874EN/11
- Manuals related to FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL B

- Manuals related to FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is-MODEL B

OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe System) B-63524EN
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining Center System) B-63534EN
- Manuals related to FANUC Series 0i–MODEL F

- Manuals related to FANUC Series 0i–MODEL D

START-UP MANUAL B-64304EN-3
- Manuals related to FANUC Series 0i–MODEL C

Series 0i-TC OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-64114EN
Series 0i-MC OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-64124EN
Series 0i-TTC OPERATOR’S MANUAL B-64284EN
p-4

p-5
B-63874EN/11 TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS............................................................................s-1
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE ............................................. s-1
GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS............................................................... s-1
OVERVIEW OF THIS MANUAL .............................................................................. s-2
SYMBOLS USED .................................................................................................... s-3
FORMAT OF PROGRAMS TO BE USED............................................................... s-3
PREFACE ....................................................................................................p-1
I. WHAT IS MANUAL GUIDE i?

1 WHAT IS MANUAL GUIDE i? ................................................................ 3
1.1 WHAT IS MANUAL GUIDE i?........................................................................ 3
1.2 MAIN FEATURES OF MANUAL GUIDE i ..................................................... 3
II. BASIC SCREEN AND OPERATION

1 BASIC SCREEN...................................................................................... 7
2 EDITING PROGRAMS .......................................................................... 10
2.1 PROGRAM WINDOW AND EDITING ......................................................... 10
2.2 CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS....................................................... 10
2.3 EDITING IN A PROGRAM LIST .................................................................. 11
2.3.1 Simultaneous Deletion of Multiple Programs ........................................................12
2.3.2 Managing Program List Folder (for Series 30i/31i/32i Only)................................12
2.3.2.1 What is displayed in the program list?............................................................... 12
2.3.2.2 Operations added to the program list window ................................................... 13
2.3.2.3 Supporting data server operations ..................................................................... 13
2.4 SEARCHING FOR A MACHINING PROGRAM TO BE EDITED................. 14
2.5 PROGRAM NUMBER O8-DIGIT FUNCTION.............................................. 14
2.6 BASIC EDITING OPERATIONS OF PART PROGRAM .............................. 14
2.6.1 Entering a Word (<INSERT> key) ........................................................................14
2.6.2 Modifying a Word (<ALTER> key) ......................................................................15
2.6.3 Modifying the Numeric Value of a Word (<ALTER> key)...................................15
2.6.4 Deleting a Word (<DELETE> key) .......................................................................15
2.6.5 Modifying a Block (<ALTER> key)......................................................................15
2.6.6 Deleting a Block (<DELETE> key) .......................................................................15
2.6.7 Changing the Program Number (ALTER key).......................................................15
2.7 SEARCH (FORWARD AND BACKWARD).................................................. 15
2.7.1 Simultaneous String Search Function of Multi Programs ......................................16
2.7.1.1 Mode to use this function .................................................................................. 16
2.7.1.2 Program window where search is executed....................................................... 16
2.7.1.3 Changing search mode....................................................................................... 16
2.7.1.4 Execute simultaneous string search of multi programs ..................................... 17
2.8 CUT ............................................................................................................. 17
2.9 COPY .......................................................................................................... 18
2.10 PASTE......................................................................................................... 18
2.11 DELETE....................................................................................................... 18
c-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-63874EN/11
2.12 KEY-IN PASTE ............................................................................................ 18

2.13 REPLACING WORD.................................................................................... 19
2.13.1 Replacing a Word...................................................................................................19
2.13.2 Replace All Words .................................................................................................19
2.13.3 Replaced Words .....................................................................................................20
2.13.4 Note ........................................................................................................................21
2.14 UNDO, REDO.............................................................................................. 22
2.15 MULTI PART PROGRAM EDITING FUNCTION
(For only Series30i /31i /32i /0i-F/0i-D) ...................................................... 22
2.15.1 Start of Multi Part Program Editing Function ........................................................22
2.15.2 Operation of Display Program Selection................................................................22
2.15.3 Display of Multi Part Program Editing Screen.......................................................23
2.15.4 Opening and Shutting of Program Window ...........................................................24
2.15.5 Switching Target of Editing Program.....................................................................24
2.15.6 End of Multi Part Program Editing Function of Programs.....................................25
2.15.7 Operation of Switching to CNC Screen .................................................................25
2.15.8 Operation of Changing Path ...................................................................................25
2.15.9 Operation of Changing Mode.................................................................................26
2.15.10 About the Maintenance of Displayed Program Information ..................................26
2.15.11 Restrictions.............................................................................................................26
2.16 M-CODE MENU........................................................................................... 26
2.17 FIXED FORM SENTENCE INSERTION...................................................... 27
2.17.1 Fixed Form Sentence..............................................................................................27
2.17.2 Start Command.......................................................................................................28
2.17.3 End Command ........................................................................................................29
2.18 REGISTERING FIXED FORM SENTENCES .............................................. 29
2.18.1 Registering a New Fixed Form Sentence ...............................................................30
2.18.2 Modifying a Fixed Form Sentence .........................................................................30
2.18.3 Deleting a Fixed Form Sentence ............................................................................31
2.18.4 Initialization to Standard Fixed Form Sentences....................................................31
2.18.5 Extension of Fixed Form Sentences
(For only Series 30i/31i/32i-B, Series 0i-F/0i-D)...................................................32
2.18.5.1 Parameter ........................................................................................................... 32
2.19 BACKGROUND EDITING ........................................................................... 32
2.19.1 Starting Background Editing ..................................................................................32
2.19.2 Ending Background Editing ...................................................................................32
2.19.3 Operations During Background Editing.................................................................33
2.20 NOTES ON CREATING PROGRAMS......................................................... 33
2.20.1 General Notes on Machining Programs .................................................................33
3 MACHINING SIMULATION................................................................... 34
3.1 EDITING WITH THE PROGRAM LIST........................................................ 34
3.2 SEARCHING FOR A SEQUENCE NUMBER IN A PROGRAM................... 35
3.3 SELECTING A PROGRAM FOR MACHINING SIMULATION..................... 35
3.4 REWINDING A PROGRAM ......................................................................... 35
3.5 SETTING OF DATA FOR MACHINING SIMULATION................................ 35
3.6 MACHINING SIMULATION DISPLAY ......................................................... 48
3.6.1 Machining Simulation (Tool Path) (for Series 0i-C/16i/18i/21i) ...........................48
3.6.1.1 Starting and stopping simulation ....................................................................... 49
3.6.1.2 Scaling, movement, and other operations .......................................................... 50
3.6.2 Machining Simulation (Animated Drawing) (FOR Series 0i-C /16i/18i/21i) ........50
3.6.2.1 Starting and stopping machining simulation...................................................... 51
c-2
3.6.3 Machining Simulation (Tool Path Drawing) (for Series 0i-F/0i-D/ 30i/31i/32i) ...52
3.6.4 Machining Simulation (Animated Drawing) (for Series 0i-F/0i-D/ 30i/31i/32i) ...55
3.6.5 Data Handled during Machining Simulation (for Series 0i-F/0i-D/ 30i/31i/32i) ...56
3.6.6 Functions Operating Differently between Machining Simulation and Automatic
Operation (for Series 0i-F/0i-D/ 30i/31i/32i) .........................................................57
3.6.6.1 Functions that cannot be used for machining simulation................................... 57
3.6.6.2 Functions that can be used for machining simulation (M series) ...................... 58
3.6.7 Changing Workpiece Coordinate During Machining Simulation (Animation,
Tool Path Drawing) ................................................................................................58
3.6.8 Machining Simulation Screen on 15 inch LCD (Tool Path)
(for Series 30i/31i/32i, Series 0i-F) ........................................................................59
3.6.8.1 Operations at machining simulation screen ....................................................... 59
3.6.8.2 Operations at drawing during machining screen ............................................... 59
3.7 CHECK Y AXIS VALUE AT THE MACHINING SIMULATION OF THE
TURNING CYCLE ....................................................................................... 60
3.8 A WARNING MESSAGE WHEN A RESIDUAL CUTTING PART
REMAINS .................................................................................................... 60
3.9 MACHINING SIMULATION SPEED CHANGE FUNCTION......................... 60
3.9.1 Operation on Machining Simulation Screen ..........................................................60
3.10 BLANK CUTOUT DISPLAY IN ANIMATED SIMULATION .......................... 62
3.10.1 Operation ................................................................................................................62
3.10.2 Available Blank Figures for Blank Cutout Display ...............................................62
3.11 DISPLAYING MACHINING TIME ................................................................ 63
3.11.1 Format of Machining Time Data ............................................................................63
3.11.2 Operation for Inserting Machining Time ...............................................................63
3.11.3 Display Machining Time........................................................................................64
3.12 LARGE WINDOW DISPLAY OF MACHINING SIMULATION (ANIMATED
DRAWING) (For Series 30i/31i/32i–B only) ................................................ 64
3.12.1 Changing Window Size of Machining Simulation (Animated Drawing) ..............64
3.12.2 Restrictions on Large Window Display .................................................................65
3.13 2 WINDOWS MACHINING SIMULATION
(For only Series 0i-F/30i/31i/32i–B)............................................................. 65
3.13.1 Changing Window of Machining Simulation.........................................................65
3.13.2 Selecting Active Window.......................................................................................66
3.13.3 Restrictions on 2 Windows Display .......................................................................66
3.14 NOTES ........................................................................................................ 66
3.14.1 Notes on Machining Simulation.............................................................................66
3.14.2 Tool size in Machining Simulation ........................................................................67
4 PROGRAM OPERATION...................................................................... 68
4.1 SELECTING A PROGRAM FOR OPERATION ........................................... 68
4.2 REWINDING A PROGRAM ......................................................................... 68
4.3 DISPLAYING THE DRAWING-DURING-MACHINING................................ 69
4.3.1 Program Selection Operation and Other Operations in Drawing during
Machining...............................................................................................................70
4.3.2 Selecting Whether to Display the Tool Path or Not in Drawing during
Machining...............................................................................................................70
c-3
4.3.3 Scaling, Movement, and Other Operations in Drawing during Machining............70

4.4 CHANGING THE CURRENT POSITION DISPLAY..................................... 72
4.5 PRESETTING RELATIVE COORDINATES ................................................ 72
4.6 NEXT-BLOCK DISPLAY FUNCTION .......................................................... 72
4.7 FEEDRATE DISPLAY ................................................................................. 73
4.8 DISPLAYING 3-DIMENSIONAL INTERFERENCE CHECK STATUS (FOR
Series 0i-F/30i/31i/32i ONLY).................................................................... 73
4.9 DISPLAYING THE ROTATION SPEED OF A SERVO MOTOR-DRIVEN
MILLING AXIS ............................................................................................. 73
4.9.1 Conditions for Using This Function .......................................................................74
4.9.2 About the “SPINDLE” Display Block ...................................................................74
4.9.2.1 Path 1 display window (10.4-inch screen)......................................................... 74
4.9.2.2 Path 1 display window (15-inch screen)............................................................ 75
4.9.2.3 Simultaneous multipath display window (10.4-inch screen) ............................. 76
4.9.2.4 Simultaneous multipath display window (15-inch screen) ................................ 77
4.9.2.5 Machining simulation and NC statement conversion windows
(10.4-inch screen) .............................................................................................. 78
(15-inch screen) ................................................................................................. 78
4.9.2.7 Re-threading window ........................................................................................ 78
4.9.3 “CURRENT POSITION” Display Block...............................................................79
4.9.4 “FEED” Display Block ..........................................................................................79
4.9.5 Details of Actual Rotation Speed Shown in the SPINDLE Display Block............79
4.9.6 Details of Load Ratio (%) Shown in the SPINDLE Display Block .......................80
4.10 DISPLAYING THE SPINDLE-POSITION AND STANDBY-POSITION
TOOL NUMBERS (FOR Series 30i/31i/32i ONLY) ..................................... 81
4.10.1 Displaying the Spindle-Position Tool Number ......................................................81
4.10.2 Displaying the Standby-Position Tool Number .....................................................81
4.11 G54.4 MODAL DISPLAY ............................................................................. 81
4.11.1 DETAIL..................................................................................................................82
4.11.2 NOTE .....................................................................................................................82
4.12 COMMENT DISPLAY DURING MACHINING.............................................. 83
4.12.1 Format of Comment Display G code G2900..........................................................83
4.12.2 Notes.......................................................................................................................84
4.13 OPERATION RESTART CONFIRMATION FUNCIOTN AFTER EDITING
PROGRAM (FOR Series 30i/31i/32i) .......................................................... 84
4.13.1 Operation Restart Confirmation Screen .................................................................84
4.13.2 Editing Function during Single Block Stop ...........................................................84
4.13.3 Operation Restart Confirmation in Multi Path System ..........................................85
4.13.4 Parameter................................................................................................................85
5 EDITING AND OPERATION OF MDI PROGRAMS.............................. 86

6 MANUAL OPERATION ......................................................................... 87
7 SETTING THE WORKPIECE COORDINATE DATA ............................ 88
7.1 SOFT KEY [MEASUR]................................................................................. 88
7.2 SOFT KEY [+INPUT] ................................................................................... 88
7.3 CALCULATING METHOD OF MEASURING OF SETTING WORKPIECE
COORDINATE DATA (for Series 0i-F/0i-D/30i/31i/32i)............................... 89
7.3.1 Outline ....................................................................................................................89
7.3.1.1 In case of Series 0i-D......................................................................................... 89
c-4
7.3.1.2 In case of Series 0i-F/30i/31i/32i-A/B............................................................... 90
7.3.2 Parameter Setting ...................................................................................................90
8 SETTINGS RELATED TO TOOLS........................................................ 91

8.1 SETTING TOOL OFFSET DATA................................................................. 91
8.1.1 Softkeys Icons for the Direction of the Imaginary Tool Nose ...............................91
8.1.1.1 How to specify icons ......................................................................................... 91
8.1.1.2 If program coordinate system/offset memory switching is enabled .................. 92
8.1.2 Soft Key [MEASUR] .............................................................................................92
8.1.3 Soft Key [+INPUT] ................................................................................................92
8.1.4 Soft Key [INP.C.]...................................................................................................92
8.2 SPECIFYING TOOL FIGURE DIMENSION DATA ...................................... 93
8.2.1 Overview ................................................................................................................93
8.2.2 Setting of Tool Type ..............................................................................................93
8.2.3 Editing of Tool Name.............................................................................................94
8.2.4 Setting of Tool Set..................................................................................................94
8.2.5 Setting of Tool Data ...............................................................................................94
8.2.6 Cutting Edge Angle ................................................................................................95
8.2.7 Initializing of Tool Data .........................................................................................96
8.2.8 Displaying Tool Icons ............................................................................................96
8.2.9 Shortcut to the Tool Figure Dimension Data Setting Window ..............................97
8.3 TOOL INFORMATION DISPLAY................................................................. 97
8.3.1 Displaying Screen...................................................................................................97
8.3.2 Tool Information Display .......................................................................................98
8.3.3 Notes when Commanding Offset Number by D Code ...........................................98
8.4 COMBINING A TOOL DATABASE WITH THE TOOL MANAGEMENT
FUNCTION .................................................................................................. 98
8.4.1 Tool Management Data Window ...........................................................................98
8.4.2 Tool Management Data Tab...................................................................................99
8.4.2.1 Tool management data....................................................................................... 99
8.4.2.2 Spindle rotation speed and feedrate ................................................................... 99
8.4.2.3 Tool offset........................................................................................................ 100
8.4.2.4 Customization data .......................................................................................... 100
8.4.3 Customizing Tool Management Data Displays....................................................100
8.4.4 Magazine Management Table Tab .......................................................................100
8.4.5 Tool Offset Tab ....................................................................................................101
8.4.6 Tool Information Tab ...........................................................................................101
8.4.7 Outputting Tool Management Data to the Memory Card ....................................101
8.4.8 Inputting Tool Management Data from the Memory Card ..................................101
III. CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS

1 CONTOUR PROGRAMMING.............................................................. 105
2 MEMORY CARD INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION .................................. 106
2.1 MEMORY CARD INPUT/OUTPUT OF PROGRAM................................... 106
2.1.1 Memory Card Input/Output Screen of Program ...................................................106
2.1.2 Memory Card Output Operation for Program ......................................................107
2.1.3 Memory Card Input Operation for Program.........................................................108
2.1.4 File Format Allowed for Memory Card Input/Output..........................................109
2.1.5 Notes.....................................................................................................................109
2.2 MEMORY CARD INPUT/OUTPUT OF TOOL DATA................................. 110
2.2.1 Memory Card Input/Output Screen of Tool Data.................................................110
2.2.2 Memory Card Output Operation for Tool Data....................................................110
c-5
2.2.3 Memory Card Input Operation for Tool Data ......................................................110

2.2.4 Data Format..........................................................................................................110
2.3 MEMORY CARD INPUT/OUTPUT OF OFFSET DATA (FOR Series
16i/18i/21i/30i/31i/32i)............................................................................... 111
2.3.1 Output Operation..................................................................................................111
2.3.2 Input Operation.....................................................................................................112
2.3.3 Notes.....................................................................................................................112
2.4 MEMORY CARD INPUT/OUTPUT OF FIXED FORM SENTENCES ........ 112
2.4.1 Memory Card Input/Output Screen of Fixed Form Sentences .............................112
2.4.2 Output Operation for Fixed Form Sentences........................................................113
2.4.3 Input Operation for Fixed Form Sentences ..........................................................113
2.4.4 Format of Fixed Form Sentences .........................................................................113
3 USB MEMORY INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION (for Series 0i-F/0i-D,

30i/31i/32i-B) ...................................................................................... 114
3.1 USB MEMORY INPUT/OUTPUT OF PROGRAM ..................................... 114
3.1.1 USB Memory Input/Output Screen of Program ...................................................114
3.1.2 USB Memory Output Operation for Program ......................................................115
3.1.3 USB Memory Input Operation for Program.........................................................116
3.1.4 File Format Allowed for USB Memory Input/Output..........................................116
3.1.5 Notes.....................................................................................................................117
4 PROGRAM RESTART FUNCTION..................................................... 118

4.1 RESTART METHOD ................................................................................. 118
4.1.1 Soft-key [P TYPE] ...............................................................................................118
4.1.2 Soft-key [Q TYPE]...............................................................................................119
4.2 PROGRAM RESTART IN MACHINING CYCLE (For only
Series30i/31i/32i-A/B, 0i-F/0i-D) ............................................................... 119
5 CALCULATOR FUNCTION ................................................................ 120

5.1 APPLICATIONS......................................................................................... 120
5.2 CALCULATION METHODS....................................................................... 120
5.3 TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS (SINE, COSINE, TANGENT, ARCSINE,
ARCCOSINE, ARCTANGENT).................................................................. 120
5.4 SQUARE ROOT ........................................................................................ 121
5.5 EXPONENTIAL FUNCTIONS.................................................................... 121
5.6 LOGARITHMIC FUNCTIONS (COMMON LOGARITHM, NATURAL
LOGARITHM) ............................................................................................ 121
5.7 ABSOLUTE VALUE................................................................................... 121
5.8 ROUNDING ............................................................................................... 122
5.9 DISCARDING ............................................................................................ 122
5.10 CIRCLE RATIO.......................................................................................... 122
6 SHORTCUT KEY OPERATIONS........................................................ 123
6.1 SHORTCUTS FOR VARIOUS CONFIRMATION OPERATIONS.............. 123
6.2 SHORTCUTS FOR RANGE SELECTION ................................................. 123
6.3 SHORTCUTS FOR COPY OPERATION................................................... 123
6.4 SHORTCUTS FOR CUT OPERATION ..................................................... 123
6.5 SHORTCUTS FOR THE BASE SCREEN SOFT KEYS ............................ 123
6.6 SHORTCUT FOR STARTING THE CYCLE CHANGE SCREEN .............. 124
c-6
6.7 SHORTCUTS FOR THE MENU SELECTION SCREEN ........................... 124

6.8 SHORTCUTS FOR THE REGULAR PROGRAM INSERTION SCREEN.. 124
6.9 SHORTCUTS FOR THE M CODE INSERTION SCREEN ........................ 124
6.10 SHORTCUTS FOR THE PROGRAM LIST SCREEN................................ 124
6.11 INVALIDATION OF SHORTCUT KEY OPERATIONS .............................. 125
6.11.1 Operation of Shortcut Key ...................................................................................125
6.12 SHORTCUTS FOR THE PROGRAM CREATION SCREEN ..................... 125
6.13 SHORTCUTS FOR THE COMMENT EDITING SCREEN ......................... 125
6.14 SHORTCUTS FOR THE SEARCH SCREEN ............................................ 125
6.15 SHORTCUTS FOR THE CYCLE INPUT SCREEN ................................... 125
6.16 SHORTCUT FOR THE WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM SETTING
SCREEN.................................................................................................... 126
6.17 SHORTCUT FOR THE TOOL OFFSET SETTING SCREEN .................... 126
6.18 SHORTCUTS FOR THE REGULAR PROGRAM REGISTRATION
SCREEN.................................................................................................... 126
6.19 SHORTCUTS FOR THE CREATION SCREEN FOR REGULAR
PROGRAM REGISTRATION .................................................................... 126
6.20 SHORTCUTS FOR THE ALTER SCREEN FOR REGULAR PROGRAM
REGISTRATION........................................................................................ 126
6.21 SHORTCUTS FOR THE PRESET SCREEN............................................. 127
6.22 SHORTCUT FOR THE MEASUREMENT RESULT SCREEN .................. 127
6.23 SHORTCUT FOR THE MANUAL MEASUREMENT SCREEN.................. 127
6.24 SHORTCUT FOR VARIOUS SETTING SCREENS .................................. 127
6.25 SHORTCUTS FOR THE FREE FIGURE MAIN SCREEN ......................... 127
6.26 SHORTCUTS FOR THE FREE FIGURE INPUT SCREEN ....................... 127
6.27 SHORTCUTS FOR THE FREE FIGURE CREATION SCREEN ............... 128
7 INPUT OF DIRECTION ALONG THE LAYOUT OF NUMERIC
KEYS ................................................................................................... 129
8 HELP SCREEN ................................................................................... 130
9 OPERATION NAVIGATING FUNCTION ............................................ 131
9.1 START METHOD FOR OPERATION NAVIGATING................................. 131
9.1.1 First Method of Start (“SELECT NAVIGATION” window is displayed)...........131
9.1.2 Second Method of Start (“SELECT NAVIGATION” window isn’t displayed)..131
9.2 OPERATION WHILE NAVIGATION IS EFFECTIVE ................................. 132
9.3 THE METHOD TO FINISH OPERATION NAVIGATING ........................... 132
9.4 OPERATION WHEN STANDARD OPERATION NAVIGATING DATA
ARE USED ................................................................................................ 132
10 ADVANCED GUIDANCE FUNCTION
(for only Series 0i-F/30i/31i/32i-B) ................................................... 134
10.1 DECOMPOSED CYCLE DISPLAY............................................................ 134
10.1.1 Method of Displaying the Decomposed Cycle Display Screen ...........................134
10.1.2 Condition ..............................................................................................................135
10.1.3 Restriction ............................................................................................................135
10.2 INPUT DATA CHECK BY SIMULATION ................................................... 135
10.2.1 Condition ..............................................................................................................136
c-7
10.2.2 Operational Procedure ..........................................................................................136

10.2.3 Available Screen...................................................................................................136
10.2.4 Execution Range of Input Data Check by Simulation..........................................137
10.3 HELP WINDOW ACCORDING TO EACH SCREEN ................................. 138
10.3.1 Outline ..................................................................................................................138
10.3.2 Condition ..............................................................................................................139
10.3.3 Restriction ............................................................................................................139
10.4 COOPERATION WITH ANIMATED SOFTWARE THAT IS OPERATED
WITH PANEL i........................................................................................... 139
10.4.1 Outline ..................................................................................................................139
10.4.2 Condition ..............................................................................................................139
10.4.3 Operation ..............................................................................................................141
10.4.4 Restriction ............................................................................................................142
IV. MACHINING CYCLE

1 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................... 145
1.1 SELECTING A MACHINING CYCLE TYPE .............................................. 145
1.2 ENTERING MACHINING CYCLE DATA ................................................... 146
1.3 SELECTING FIGURES ............................................................................. 147
1.4 ENTERING FIXED FORM FIGURE DATA ................................................ 149
1.5 ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURE DATA.................................................. 150
1.6 CHANGING MACHINING CYCLE AND FIGURE DATA ........................... 152
1.7 NOTES ON CREATING PROGRAMS....................................................... 152
2 TURNING CYCLE ............................................................................... 154
2.1 HOLE MACHINING (WORKPIECE ROTATION)....................................... 157
2.1.1 Machining Command ...........................................................................................157
2.1.2 Specifying Pecking Clearance of Drill Cycle for Lathe in Input Window
(for only Series 30i/31i/32i-A/B, 0i-TF/0i-TD) ...................................................163
2.1.2.1 Parameter setting to use this function .............................................................. 163
2.1.2.2 Format of drill cycle ........................................................................................ 163
2.2 TURNING .................................................................................................. 164
2.2.2 Arbitrary Figure (ZX Plane).................................................................................187
2.2.3 Conical Boring Cycle ...........................................................................................189
2.2.4 Optimization of the Cutting Direction in Finish Turning.....................................196
2.2.5 Go past amount in End Face Finishing.................................................................202
2.2.6 Continuous Machining of Roughing and Finishing .............................................203
2.2.7 Improvement of Excessive Amount of Travel in Turning Cycle .........................204
2.2.7.1 Target machining cycle.................................................................................... 204
2.2.7.2 Condition that this function is enabled ............................................................ 204
2.2.7.3 Example of machining ..................................................................................... 204
2.2.8 The Restriction of Turning Cycle When Input Values of Z-axis and X-axis
Clearances are Different .......................................................................................205
2.2.9 Restrictions...........................................................................................................205
2.3 TURNING GROOVING.............................................................................. 207
2.3.1 Machining Cycle ..................................................................................................207
2.3.2 Restrictions on Target Figures..............................................................................216
2.3.3 Fixed Form Figure (ZX Plane) .............................................................................217
2.3.4 Turning Groove Cycle by Using Button Tool......................................................223
2.3.5 Automatic Adjustment of Escape Amount for Turning Grooving Cycle.............223
2.3.5.1 Machining cycles ............................................................................................. 223
c-8
2.3.5.2 Tool path.......................................................................................................... 224
2.4 THREADING.............................................................................................. 225
2.4.2 Fixed Form Figure................................................................................................229
2.5 REAR END FACING BY TURNING........................................................... 235
2.6 RESIDUAL MACHINING BY TURNING .................................................... 236
2.6.1 Outline of the Residual Machining Cycle ............................................................236
2.6.2 Cycle Selection Screen .........................................................................................237
2.6.3 Cycle Input Screen ...............................................................................................237
2.6.4 Motion of Outer Surface Residual Roughing (G1160) ........................................238
2.6.5 Motion of Machining Other than Outer Surface Residual Roughing (G1160) ....242
2.6.6 Finish Turning Using G41/G42............................................................................242
2.7 POLYGON TURNING CYCLE................................................................... 243
2.7.1 Input Items of Polygon Turning Cycle.................................................................243
2.7.2 Inserting Polygon Turning Cycle Command........................................................244
2.7.3 Tool Path of Polygon Turning..............................................................................245
2.7.4 Tool Kind Setting .................................................................................................247
2.7.5 Direction of Imaginary Tool Nose Setting ...........................................................247
2.7.6 Simulation during Polygon Turning Cycle ..........................................................247
3 C-AXIS AND A-AXIS MACHINING CYCLE........................................ 248

3.1 C-AXIS AND A-AXIS GROOVING............................................................. 249
3.1.2 Figure Blocks for C-axis and A-axis Grooving....................................................250
3.2 CYCLE RETRACT MOTION...................................................................... 254
3.3 C-AXIS MACHINING WITH ROTATION AXIS........................................... 254
3.3.1 Support for C-Axis Machining with Rotation Axis .............................................254
3.4 C-AXIS AND A-AXIS CLAMPING M CODE OUTPUT............................... 255
3.4.1 Outline ..................................................................................................................255
3.4.2 Specifying the Clamping Method.........................................................................256
3.4.3 Value of M Code Output ......................................................................................256
3.4.4 Distinction between Main and Sub Spindle .........................................................256
3.4.5 Position of M Code Output (When Hard Clamping is Selected) .........................256
3.4.6 Position of M Code Output (When Soft Clamping is Selected)...........................259
3.4.7 Position of M Code Output (When Suppression of Clamp Output is Selected)...260
4 MILLING .............................................................................................. 261

4.1 HOLE MACHINING ................................................................................... 269
4.1.1 Machining Command (Tool Rotation: M Series).................................................269
4.1.2 Machining Command (Tool Rotation: T Series)..................................................277
4.1.3 Figure (XY Plane) ................................................................................................280
4.1.4 Figure (YZ/XC Plane) ..........................................................................................284
4.1.5 Specifying Pecking Clearance / Return Amount of Drill Cycle for Machining
Center in Input Window (for only Series 30i/31i/32i-A/B, 0i-MF/0i-MD) .........286
4.1.5.1 Parameter setting to use this function .............................................................. 286
4.1.5.2 Format of drill cycle ........................................................................................ 287
4.1.6 C axis Hole on End Face (Random Points) - Cartesian Coordinates Input
Cycle.....................................................................................................................287
4.1.6.1 Input items of C axis hole on end face (random points) - cartesian
coordinates (G1574) ........................................................................................ 287
4.1.7 C axis Hole on End face (GRID) - Cartesian Coordinates Input Cycle (For only
Series 30i/31i/32iB, 0i-F/0i-D).............................................................................288
4.1.7.1 Input items of C-axis hole on end face (Grid) – cartesian coordinates
(G1576)............................................................................................................ 288
c-9
4.2 FACING ..................................................................................................... 289

4.2.2 Fixed Form Figure Blocks (XY Plane) ................................................................292
4.2.3 Fixed Form Figure (YZ Plane, XC Plane)............................................................294
4.2.4 Arbitrary Figure (XY Plane) ................................................................................295
4.2.5 Arbitrary Figure (YZ/XC/ZC/XA Plane) .............................................................295
4.3 CONTOURING .......................................................................................... 296
4.3.2 Fixed Form Figure (XY Plane).............................................................................310
4.3.3 Fixed Form Figure (YZ/XC Plane) ......................................................................311
4.4 EMBOSS MACHINING.............................................................................. 314
4.4.3 Arbitrary Figure (YZ/XC/ZC/XA plane) .............................................................319
4.5 POCKETING.............................................................................................. 320
4.5.2 Improvement of Checking Cutting Condition for Pocketing (Rough) and
Emboss Machining (Rough).................................................................................330
4.5.2.1 PARAMETER ................................................................................................. 330
4.5.7 Pocket Residual Machining Cycle (for only Series 30i/31i/32i-B, 0i-F/0i-D).....334
4.5.7.1 Outline ............................................................................................................. 334
4.5.7.2 Condition ......................................................................................................... 334
4.5.7.3 Operation ......................................................................................................... 334
4.5.7.4 Format of pocket residual machining cycle command .................................... 335
4.5.7.5 Tool path.......................................................................................................... 336
4.5.7.6 Restrictions ...................................................................................................... 337
4.6 GROOVING ............................................................................................... 339
4.6.4 XC-plane Circumferential Groove Figure............................................................351
4.7 ENGRAVING CYCLE ................................................................................ 356
4.7.1 Operation ..............................................................................................................356
4.7.2 Input Item .............................................................................................................357
4.7.3 Enable Characters.................................................................................................359
4.7.4 Format of G4 Digit Cycle for Engraving Cycle ...................................................359
4.7.5 Tool Path of Engraving Cycle ..............................................................................359
4.7.6 Restrictions...........................................................................................................360
4.8 THREAD MILLING CYCLE........................................................................ 361
4.8.1 Screens and Operations ........................................................................................361
4.8.2 Input Items of Thread Milling ..............................................................................362
4.8.3 Specifiable Combinations of Figure.....................................................................363
4.8.4 Tool Kind .............................................................................................................363
4.8.5 Basic Motions of Tool..........................................................................................363
4.8.6 Machining Type ...................................................................................................364
4.8.7 Pattern of Tool Path..............................................................................................365
c-10
4.8.8 Tool Path (Machining Type 1) .............................................................................365
4.8.11 Machining Simulation Screen ..............................................................................368
4.8.12 Parameters ............................................................................................................368
4.9 OUTER THREAD MILLING CYCLE .......................................................... 369
4.9.1 Machining Types..................................................................................................369
4.9.2 Method of Program Creation................................................................................370
4.9.3 Outer Thread Milling Cycle Command................................................................371
4.9.4 Tool Type .............................................................................................................372
4.9.5 Machining Simulation ..........................................................................................372
4.9.6 Drawing-During-Machining.................................................................................373
4.9.7 Parameters ............................................................................................................373
4.9.8 Alarms ..................................................................................................................373
4.10 REAR END FACING BY MILLING............................................................. 375
4.10.1 Rear End Facing ...................................................................................................375
4.11 MIRROR / ROTATION / SCALING / FIGURE COPY COMMAND............. 376
4.11.1 Coordinate Conversion (Mirror Image)................................................................377
4.11.2 Coordinate Conversion (Rotation) .......................................................................377
4.11.3 Scaling ..................................................................................................................378
4.11.4 Figure Copy (Rotation Copy/ Parallel Copy).......................................................379
4.11.5 Parameter..............................................................................................................380
4.12 COORDINATE SYSTEM CONVERSION CYCLE ..................................... 381
4.12.1 Supportable Machine Configuration ....................................................................381
4.12.2 Slant Face Machining Command (Coordinate Conversion).................................382
4.13 TILTED WORKING PLANE INDEXING FUNCTION (FOR Series 30i/31i,
Series 0i-MF/0i-MD) .................................................................................. 384
4.13.1 Operation ..............................................................................................................384
4.13.2 Tilted Working Plane Input Screen by Euler’s Angle..........................................385
4.13.3 Tilted Working Plane Input Screen by Roll-Pitch-Yaw.......................................386
4.13.4 Tilted Working Plane Input Screen by Three Points............................................386
4.13.5 Tilted Working Plane Input Screen by Two Vectors ...........................................387
4.13.6 Tilted Working Plane Input Screen by Projection Angles ...................................388
4.13.7 Tilted Working Plane Input Screen by Tool Axis Direction ................................388
4.13.8 Tilted Working Plane Input Screen by Tilted Plane Cancel.................................388
4.13.9 Restriction of Machining Simulation ...................................................................389
4.14 MILLING BY ROTATING A WORKPIECE ABOUT THE Y-AXIS............... 389
4.14.1 Machining Type ...................................................................................................389
4.14.2 Figure ...................................................................................................................390
5 ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES ................................................... 393

5.1 ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURE DATA.................................................. 393
5.1.1 Arbitrary Figures for the XY Plane ......................................................................394
5.1.2 Arbitrary Figures for the YZ Plane ......................................................................399
5.1.3 Arbitrary Figures for the Polar Coordinate Interpolation Plane (XC Plane) ........400
5.1.4 Arbitrary Figures for the Cylindrical Surface (ZC Plane)....................................401
5.1.5 Arbitrary Figures for Turning (ZX Plane)............................................................401
5.2 ARC SPECIFICATION BY CENTRAL ANGLE .......................................... 407
5.2.1 Operations ............................................................................................................407
5.2.2 Input Items............................................................................................................408
5.2.3 Enable Arbitrary Figures ......................................................................................408
c-11
5.3 ENLARGEMENT AND REDUCTION ON THE ARBITRARY FIGURE

INPUT SCREEN ........................................................................................ 408
5.3.1 Machining Simulation Screen ..............................................................................409
5.3.2 Arbitrary Figure Input Screen ..............................................................................409
5.3.3 Screen for Drawing during Machining.................................................................409
5.4 GROUPING ARBITRARY FIGURE PROGRAMS ..................................... 409
5.4.1 Group Range Selection Commands......................................................................409
5.4.2 Automatic Insertion of Group Range Selection Commands ................................410
5.5 ARBITRARY FIGURE COPY FUNCTIONS............................................... 410
5.5.1 Selecting an Arbitrary Figure Copy Function ......................................................410
5.5.2 Copy Condition Input Screen ...............................................................................410
5.5.3 Executing Arbitrary Figure Copy Operation........................................................411
5.5.4 Figure after Arbitrary Figure Copy Execution .....................................................412
5.6 EDITING AN ARBITRARY FIGURE SUBPROGRAM ............................... 412
5.6.1 Editing ..................................................................................................................412
5.6.2 Warning ................................................................................................................413
5.7 SAVING SUBPROGRAMS ........................................................................ 413
5.7.1 Saving a New Subprogram...................................................................................414
5.7.2 Saving an Existing Subprogram ...........................................................................414
5.8 SELECTING A RANGE OF AN ARBITRARY FIGURE ............................. 415
5.8.1 G Code for Selecting a Range ..............................................................................415
5.8.2 Basic Operation ....................................................................................................416
5.8.3 Machining of a Divided Area ...............................................................................419
5.9 BLANK CONTOUR CHANGING FUNCTION OF TURNING FIGURE ...... 423
5.9.1 Usable Cycle.........................................................................................................423
5.9.2 Unusable Cycle.....................................................................................................424
5.9.3 Necessary Parameter Setting ................................................................................424
5.9.4 Operation ..............................................................................................................424
5.9.4.1 Window for selection of turning figure range ................................................. 424
5.9.4.2 Window for selection of blank contour range ................................................. 424
5.9.4.3 Window for specification of arbitrary point .................................................... 425
5.9.4.4 Window for specification arbitrary angle ........................................................ 425
5.9.4.5 Delete of division point and division angle of blank contour.......................... 426
5.9.4.6 Initialize of division point and division angle of blank contour ...................... 426
5.9.4.7 G-code format of division point and division angle ........................................ 426
5.9.5 Modification of Cutting Area in Machining Cycle ..............................................427
5.9.6 Restriction ............................................................................................................428
5.10 REUSING ARBITRARY FIGURES ............................................................ 432
5.10.1 Calling an Arbitrary Figure ..................................................................................432
5.10.2 Selecting a Subprogram........................................................................................432
5.11 REUSING A BLANK FIGURE AS AN ARBITRARY FIGURE .................... 433
5.11.1 Basic Operation ....................................................................................................433
5.11.2 Reusable Blank Figures........................................................................................433
5.11.3 Conditions of Blank Figure Data for Reuse .........................................................433
5.12 AUTOMATIC BLANK ELEMENT CONNECTION FUNCTION................... 434
5.12.1 Blank Element Connection Soft Key ...................................................................434
5.12.2 Soft Keys for Selecting a Blank Connection Figure ............................................434
5.13 EXPANDED ARBITRARY FIGURE ELEMENT NUMBER
(FOR Series 30i/31i/32i)............................................................................ 435
5.13.1 Restrictions...........................................................................................................435
5.14 DRAWING OF ARBITRARY FIGURE ON SUB-PROGRAM LIST
SCREEN.................................................................................................... 435
c-12
5.14.1 Display Sub-Program List Screen ........................................................................435
5.14.2 Available Drawing Figure ....................................................................................436
6 NC PROGRAM CONVERSION FUNCTION ....................................... 437

6.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 437
6.2 BASIC OPERATION.................................................................................. 438
6.3 RESTRICTIONS ........................................................................................ 439
6.4 OMITTING MODAL COMMANDS IN NC PROGRAM CONVERSION ...... 442
6.4.1 Omissible Modal Commands ...............................................................................442
6.4.2 Specifications for Omitting Modal Commands....................................................442
6.5 SUPPRESSING SUBPROGRAM EXPANSION IN NC PROGRAM
CONVERSION........................................................................................... 443
6.5.1 Restriction ............................................................................................................445
6.6 CONVERSION OF G41/G42 COMMAND BY NC PROGRAM
CONVERSION (WITH SUBPROGRAM DECOMPOSITION)
(for only Series 30i/31i/32i-B, 0i-F/0i-D).................................................... 445
6.6.1 Parameter Setting for Use.....................................................................................445
6.6.2 Restriction ............................................................................................................445
7 ADDRESS R OUTPUT FOR G02/G03 IN MACHINING CYCLE

(for Series 30i/31i/32i-A/B, 0i-F/0i-D) ............................................... 449
7.1 CONDITION .............................................................................................. 449
7.2 RESTRICTIONS ........................................................................................ 449
V. MULTI-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS (OPTION)

1 OVERVIEW ......................................................................................... 453
2 CHANGING BETWEEN PATHS ......................................................... 454
2.1 CHANGING BY A SOFT-KEY ................................................................... 454
2.2 CHANGING BY A SIGNAL ........................................................................ 454
2.3 IMPROVEMENT OF ICON FOR SELECTED PATH (Series 30i/31i/32i-B,
0i-F/0i-D) ................................................................................................... 454
2.3.1 Parameter..............................................................................................................454
3 CONCURRENT DISPLAY AND EDIT OF PROGRAMS OF ALL

PATHS................................................................................................. 455
3.1 SCREEN CONFIGURATION..................................................................... 455
3.1.1 Display Position of Each Path ..............................................................................455
3.1.2 Status Display Part ...............................................................................................456
3.1.3 Current Position Display Part...............................................................................456
3.1.4 Program Display Part ...........................................................................................456
3.1.5 Disabling the Display of a Specified Path (for Loaders)......................................456
3.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ............................................................................... 457
4 PROCESS LIST EDITING FUNCTION ............................................... 458
4.1 SCREEN CONFIGURATION..................................................................... 458
4.1.1 Cell .......................................................................................................................458
4.1.2 Current Cell ..........................................................................................................459
4.1.3 Spindle..................................................................................................................459
4.1.4 Turret ....................................................................................................................459
c-13
4.1.5 Waiting Line.........................................................................................................459

4.1.6 Transfer ................................................................................................................460
4.2 BASIC OPERATIONS ............................................................................... 460
4.2.1 Starting Process List Editing ................................................................................460
4.2.2 Exiting from Process List Editing ........................................................................460
4.2.3 Moving the Cursor in the Process List .................................................................461
4.3 EDITING OPERATIONS............................................................................ 461
4.3.1 Insertion of a Cell .................................................................................................463
4.3.2 Deletion of a Cell .................................................................................................464
4.3.3 Copying of a Cell .................................................................................................465
4.3.4 Moving of a Cell...................................................................................................466
4.3.5 Modification of Process Name .............................................................................468
4.3.6 Program Edit.........................................................................................................469
4.3.7 Assign of Waiting.................................................................................................470
4.3.8 Release of Waiting ...............................................................................................472
4.3.9 Assign of Transfer ................................................................................................473
4.3.10 Release Transfer ...................................................................................................475
4.3.11 Addition of Optional Block Skip..........................................................................476
4.3.12 Deletion of Optional Block Skip ..........................................................................477
4.4 MACHINING PROGRAM NOT USING THE PROCESS LIST EDITING
FUNCTION ................................................................................................ 477
4.5 3 TURRETS SIMULTANEOUS MACHINING PROGRAMMING
FUNCTION (FOR Series 30i/31i/32i) ........................................................ 479
4.5.1 Process List Editing Screen ..................................................................................479
4.5.2 Machining Program..............................................................................................480
4.5.3 Compatible Machine Configurations ...................................................................480
5 MACHINING SIMULATION................................................................. 486

5.1 DRAWING DURING MACHINING AND MACHINING SIMULATION
(TOOL PATH DRAWING).......................................................................... 486
5.2 MACHINING SIMULATION (ANIMATED) ................................................. 486
5.3 STARTING UP MACHINING SIMULATION FOR EACH PATH ................ 487
5.4 WARNING MESSAGE DISPLAY IN MULTI-PATH TURNING SYSTEM... 488
5.5 SPINDLE SELECTION COMMAND AND PROCESS START
COMMAND................................................................................................ 488
5.6 MACHINING SIMULATION INFORMATION SETTING FUNCTION
FOR EACH PATH (for Series 30i/31i/32i-B, 0i-F/0i-D) ............................. 489
5.6.1 Condition ..............................................................................................................489
5.6.2 Path Switching Operation.....................................................................................489
5.6.3 Parameter..............................................................................................................489
6 4 PATH SYSTEM (for only Series 30i/31i-B, 31i-B5)....................... 490

6.1 OUTLINE ................................................................................................... 490
6.2 CONDITION .............................................................................................. 490
6.3 SCREENS AND OPERATIONS ................................................................ 492
6.4 ADDED FUNCTIONS ................................................................................ 492
6.4.1 Changing Between Paths......................................................................................492
6.4.2 All Path Display / Edit Function ..........................................................................493
6.5 RESTRICTION .......................................................................................... 494
c-14
7 2 PATH MACHINING CENTER FUNCTION ....................................... 495

7.1 CONCURRENT DISPLAY AND EDIT OF PROGRAMS OF ALL PATHS.. 495
7.2 MACHINING SIMULATION ....................................................................... 495
7.2.1 Available Method for Drawing ............................................................................495
7.2.2 Available Coordinate............................................................................................496
7.2.3 Available Method for Executing ..........................................................................496
7.2.4 Available Blank Figure ........................................................................................497
7.2.5 Operation for Executing Machining Simulation ..................................................497
7.3 CHANGING BETWEEN PATHS................................................................ 498
7.4 PARAMETER SETTING ............................................................................ 498
VI. HANDLE MACHINING

1 HANDLE MACHINING (For only Series 30i/31i/32i-B) .................... 501
1.1 WORKING CONDITION ............................................................................ 501
1.2 MACHINING BY HANDLE ......................................................................... 502
1.2.1 Specification of Function .....................................................................................502
1.2.2 Example of Operation ..........................................................................................503
1.2.3 Handle Machining Screen ....................................................................................506
1.3 PROGRAMMING BY HANDLE.................................................................. 510
1.3.1 Specification of Function .....................................................................................510
1.3.2 Sample of Operation.............................................................................................514
1.3.3 Registration of Auxiliary Function Command .....................................................515
1.4 PARAMETERS .......................................................................................... 517
1.5 RELATED SIGNALS.................................................................................. 518
VII. OTHER FUNCTIONS

1 PROGRAM COORDINATE SYSTEM CHANGING FUNCTION AND
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY CHANGING FUNCTION........................... 523
1.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 523
1.2 PROGRAM COORDINATE SYSTEM CHANGING FUNCTION ................ 523
1.2.1 Coordinate System Selection Command ..............................................................523
1.2.1.1 Insert coordinate system selection command................................................... 523
1.2.1.2 Executing program........................................................................................... 524
1.2.2 Coordinate of Arbitrary Figures (XZ, ZC, ZY Plane)..........................................524
1.2.2.1 Select display coordinate system ..................................................................... 524
1.2.4 Status Display.......................................................................................................524
1.3 TOOL OFFSET MEMORY CHANGING FUNCTION ................................. 525
1.3.1 Tool Offset Data Window ....................................................................................525
1.3.1.1 Select coordinate system.................................................................................. 525
1.3.1.2 Display selected coordinate system ................................................................. 525
1.3.1.3 Setting of tool data........................................................................................... 525
1.3.2 Workpiece Shift Offset Data Window .................................................................526
1.3.2.1 Select coordinate system.................................................................................. 526
1.4 CAUTIONS ................................................................................................ 526
2 TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION .................................................... 527
2.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 527
2.2 ASSOCIATING TOOL NUMBERS WITH OFFSET NUMBERS................. 527
c-15
2.2.1 Selecting the Screen for Associating a Tool Number with an Offset Number.....527
2.2.2 Screen Display Items............................................................................................527
2.2.2.1 Display items ................................................................................................... 527
2.3 VIEWING AND SETTING TOOL OFFSET VALUES ................................. 528
2.3.1 Selecting the Tool Number-by-tool Number Tool Offset Setting Screen ............528
2.3.2 Offset Screen (on a Tool Number by Tool Number Basis) ..................................528
2.4 VIEWING AND SETTING TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA .......................... 529
2.4.1 Selecting the Tool Management Data Setting Screen ..........................................529
2.4.2 Magazine Data Screens (Magazine 1 to 4)...........................................................529
2.4.2.1 Display items ................................................................................................... 529
2.4.3 Spindle and Standby Position Tool Display Screen .............................................530
2.5 VIEWING AND SETTING LIFE MANAGEMENT DATA ............................ 530
2.5.1 Selecting the Life Management Data Setting Screen ...........................................530
2.5.1.1 Display items ................................................................................................... 530
2.5.2 Changing Tool Priority.........................................................................................531
2.5.3 Updating Life Values Displayed on the Tool Life Data Screen...........................531
2.5.4 Group Number List Display .................................................................................531
2.5.4.1 Display items ................................................................................................... 531
2.5.4.2 Display of groups sorted in the order of number or life state .......................... 532
2.5.4.3 Group selection................................................................................................ 532
2.5.4.4 Restore group life ............................................................................................ 532
2.5.5 Setting the Life Notice Flag .................................................................................532
2.6 TOOL LIFE DATA LIST SCREEN ............................................................. 533
2.6.1 Selecting the Life Management Data List Screen ................................................533
2.6.2 Life Management Data List Screen ......................................................................533
2.7 MODAL DISPLAY OF OFFSET TYPES .................................................... 533
2.7.1 Screen Display Items............................................................................................533
2.7.2 Displayed Offset Types (Set by the Machine Tool Builder) ................................534
2.8 DISPLAY TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA OF CNC STANDARD SCREEN. 534
2.9 OTHERS.................................................................................................... 535
2.9.1 Return to Menu Screen.........................................................................................535
2.9.2 Inhibition of Editing Tool Management Data at CNC Standard Screen ..............535
2.9.3 Using Tool Management Data..............................................................................535
2.10 WARNING MESSAGES ............................................................................ 536
3 SPINDLE MOVEMENT ANIMATION FOR AUTOMATIC LATHES .... 537
3.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 537
3.2 START COMMAND OF REFLECTION ..................................................... 537
3.3 END COMMAND OF REFLECTION.......................................................... 537
3.4 SIMULATION AND ACTUAL WORKING OF THE MACHINE ................... 538
4 Series 16i-MB 2-PATH FUNCTION.................................................... 541
4.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 541
4.2 DISPLAY SCREEN.................................................................................... 541
5 PROGRAMMABLE DIAMETER/RADIUS SWITCHING FUNCTION .. 542
5.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 542
5.2 BASE SCREEN DISPLAY ......................................................................... 542
5.3 MACHINING CYCLE ................................................................................. 543
5.4 NC STATEMENT CONVERSION.............................................................. 543
c-16
6 LATHE/MACHINING CENTER G CODE SYSTEM SWITCHING

FUNCTION .......................................................................................... 544
6.1 DISPLAY OF BASE SCREEN ................................................................... 545
6.2 MAKING OF MACHINING CYCLES.......................................................... 546
6.2.1 Command mode that machining cycle can be used..............................................546
6.3 EXECUTING OF MACHINING CYCLES ................................................... 547
6.4 DRAWING DURING MACHINING............................................................. 547
6.5 MACHINING SIMULATION (ANIMATED / TOOL PATH) .......................... 548
6.6 NC PROGRAM CONVERSION ................................................................. 549
6.7 SETTING OF TOOL OFFSET INFORMATION ......................................... 550
6.8 SETTING OF TOOL FIGURE INFORMATION .......................................... 551
6.9 NECESSARY OPTION / PARAMETER..................................................... 552
6.9.1 Necessary Option .................................................................................................552
6.9.2 Necessary Parameter ............................................................................................552
6.10 ALARM ...................................................................................................... 552
7 ALLOCATION SCREEN ON SMALL MDI UNIT
(FOR Series 16i/18i/21i) .................................................................... 553
7.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 553
7.2 SCREEN CHANGING ............................................................................... 553
7.3 NOTES ...................................................................................................... 553
8 USAGE IN 8.4” LCD (For only Series 30i/31i/32i-B,
Series 0i-F/0i-D) ................................................................................. 555
8.2 SCREEN DISPLAY.................................................................................... 555
8.3 RESTRICTION .......................................................................................... 556
9 19” DISPLAY UNIT (FOR Series 30i/31i/32i ONLY)......................... 557
9.1 19 INCH MODE DISPLAY OF MANUAL GUIDE i .......................................... 558
9.2 APPLICATION SELECTION TO WORK MDI KEYS AND SOFT-KEYS.... 558
9.3 PARAMETER ............................................................................................ 560
10 SETTING OF PROGRAM COORDINATE SYSTEM FOR EACH
PATH ................................................................................................... 561
10.1 AVAILABLE PROGRAM COORDINATE SYSTEM ................................... 561
10.2 SETTING OF VIRTUAL TOOL CHIP FOR EACH PROGRAM
COORDINATE SYSTEM ........................................................................... 562
10.3 SETTING TOOL FOR ATTACHMENT POSITION .................................... 563
10.4 PROGRAM COORDINATE SYSTEM FOR PROGRAM COORDINATE
SYSTEM CHANGING FUNCTION ............................................................ 563
10.5 ICON FOR REPRESENTING SELECTED PATH...................................... 564
10.6 PARAMETER ............................................................................................ 565
10.6.1 Added New Parameter..........................................................................................565
10.6.2 Relating Parameter ...............................................................................................566
11 USE WITH PERIPHERAL AXIS CONTROL

(for only Series 0i-F/30i/31i/32i-B) ................................................... 567
c-17
11.1 OUTLINE ................................................................................................... 567

11.2 CONDITION .............................................................................................. 567
11.3 MACHINING SIMULATION ....................................................................... 567
11.4 RESTRICTION .......................................................................................... 568
12 WARNING MESSAGE DISPLAY WHEN RESET KEY IS PUSHED
(for only Series 0i-F/30i/31i/32i-B, 31i-B5) ...................................... 569
12.1 NECESSARY SOFTWARE ....................................................................... 569
12.2 NECESSARY PARAMETER ..................................................................... 569
12.3 RESTRICTIONS ........................................................................................ 569
13 DISABLING MANUAL GUIDE i ................................................................. 570
14 EXTENDED AXIS NAME FUNCTION................................................. 571
14.1 CONDITIONS TO USE THIS FUNCTION ................................................. 571
14.2 AXIS NAME DISPLAY ............................................................................... 571
14.3 PROGRAM DISPLAY AND EDITING FUNCTION..................................... 571
14.4 MACHINING CYCLE ................................................................................. 572
14.5 SELECTING ROTATION AXIS IN FIGURE DATA INPUT SCREEN OF
MACHINING CYCLE ................................................................................. 573
14.6 METHOD OF CHANGE TO EXTENDED AXIS NAME IN FIGURE DATA
INPUT SCREEN OF MACHINING CYCLE................................................ 573
14.7 PARAMETER SETTING FOR EXTENDING AXIS NAME OF
WORKPIECE ROTATION ......................................................................... 573
15 DYNAMIC AXIS NAME CHANGING (For only Series 30i/31i/32i-B)574
15.2 BASE SCREEN ......................................................................................... 574
15.3 MACHINING SIMULATION SCREEN ....................................................... 575
15.4 DRAWING DURING MACHINING SCREEN ............................................. 575
15.5 NC PROGRAM CONVERSION SCREEN ................................................. 575
15.6 WORKPIECE COORDINATE DATA WINDOW......................................... 575
15.7 RELATIVE COORDINATES PRESETTING WINDOW.............................. 576
16 HIGH SPEED PROGRAM MANAGEMENT
(For only Series 0i-F/30i/31i/32i-A, B) .............................................. 578
16.1 OPERATION OF SAVING PROGRAMS ................................................... 578
16.2 STATUS DISPLAY .................................................................................... 578
17 THREAD REPAIRING ......................................................................... 579
17.1 OVERVIEW ............................................................................................... 579
17.2 TOOL PATH .............................................................................................. 579
17.3 DETAILS OF THE THREAD REPAIRING SCREEN AND OPERATION ... 580
17.3.1 Re-Machining Screen for Outer Surface General-Purpose Threads and
Operation ..............................................................................................................580
17.3.2 Re-machining Screen for Other Threads and Operation ......................................582
17.4 NOTES ...................................................................................................... 583
17.4.1 Note On Emergency Stop.....................................................................................583
17.4.2 Notes on Changing Modes (Such as MEM, EDIT, and MDI) .............................583
c-18
17.4.3 Notes on Switching to the NC Screen ..................................................................583
17.4.4 Notes on Switching Between Paths......................................................................583
17.4.5 Notes on Use Wrong Operation Prevention Functions ........................................583
APPENDIX
A EXAMPLES OF CREATING PROGRAMS FOR THE MACHINING
CENTER .............................................................................................. 587
A.1 SETTING OF TOOL LENGTH OFFSET DATA ......................................... 588
A.2 SETTING OF WORKPIECE ORIGIN OFFSET VALUE............................. 590
A.3 PREPARING OF THE FIXED FORM SENTENCE MENU......................... 591
A.4 SETTING OF THE TOOL DATA................................................................ 592
A.5 CREATING OF PART PROGRAM ............................................................ 592
A.5.1 Creating New Part Program..................................................................................593
A.5.2 Operations of “START” Menu.............................................................................593
A.5.2.1 Entering blank form data ................................................................................. 593
A.5.3 Entering Tool Changing and Spindle Rotating Blocks for Roughing Flat End
Mill .......................................................................................................................594
A.5.3.1 Entering in ISO-code form directly ................................................................. 594
A.5.3.2 Entering by fixed form sentence menu ............................................................ 594
A.5.4 Entering Outer Wall Contouring Process .............................................................595
A.5.4.1 Entering outer wall contouring (rough) cycle block........................................ 595
A.5.4.2 Entering figure for outer wall contouring (rough) ........................................... 596
A.5.5 Entering Pocket Roughing Process ......................................................................596
A.5.5.1 Entering pocket roughing cycle block ............................................................. 596
A.5.5.2 Entering figure for pocket roughing ................................................................ 597
A.5.6 Entering Tool Changing and Spindle Rotating Blocks for Finishing Flat End
Mill .......................................................................................................................601
A.5.7 Entering Pocket Bottom and Side Finishing Process ...........................................602
A.5.7.1 Entering pocket bottom finishing cycle block ................................................. 602
A.5.7.2 Entering figure for pocket bottom finishing .................................................... 603
A.5.7.3 Entering pocket side finishing cycle block ...................................................... 603
A.5.7.4 Entering figure for pocket side finishing ......................................................... 604
A.5.8 Entering Tool Changing and Spindle Rotating Blocks for Drilling .....................605
A.5.9 Entering Drilling Process .....................................................................................605
A.5.9.1 Entering drilling cycle block ........................................................................... 605
A.5.9.2 Entering hole position block............................................................................ 606
A.5.10 Operations in the “END” Menu ...........................................................................607
A.6 CHECKING OF THE PART PROGRAM.................................................... 608
A.6.1 Checking by Animation........................................................................................608
B EXAMPLES OF CREATING PART PROGRAMS FOR LATHES....... 609

B.1 SETTING TOOL OFFSET DATA............................................................... 610
B.1.1 Setting of Z-axis Offset Data................................................................................610
B.1.2 Setting of X-axis Offset Data ...............................................................................611
B.2 SETTING OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM SHIFT DATA ........ 612
B.3 PREPARING OF THE FIXED FORM SENTENCE MENU......................... 613
B.3.1 Entering the Fixed Form Sentence for Turning Machining .................................613
c-19
B.3.2 Entering of the Fixed Form Sentence for Milling Machining ..............................614
B.4 SETTING OF TOOL DATA........................................................................ 614
B.5 CREATING OF PART PROGRAM ............................................................ 615
B.5.1 Creating New Part Program..................................................................................615
B.5.2 Operations of “START” Menu.............................................................................616
B.5.2.1 Entering blank form data ................................................................................. 616
B.5.3 Entering Tool Changing and Spindle Rotating Blocks for Turning Machining...616
B.5.3.1 Entering in ISO-code form directly ................................................................. 616
B.5.3.2 Entering by fixed form sentence menu ............................................................ 617
B.5.4 Entering Outer Roughing Process ........................................................................617
B.5.4.1 Entering outer roughing cycle block................................................................ 617
B.5.4.2 Entering figure for outer roughing................................................................... 618
B.5.5 Entering Tool Changing and Spindle Rotation Blocks for Outer Finishing in
ISO-code Form .....................................................................................................621
B.5.6 Entering Outer Finishing Machining Cycle Process ............................................621
B.5.6.1 Entering figure for outer finishing cycle block................................................ 621
B.5.6.2 Entering figure for outer finishing................................................................... 622
B.5.6.3 Entering releasing motion blocks in ISO-code form ....................................... 623
B.5.7 Entering Tool Changing and Spindle Rotating Blocks for C-axis Drilling..........623
B.5.8 Entering C-axis Drilling Process ..........................................................................624
B.5.8.1 Entering C-axis drilling cycle block ................................................................ 624
B.5.8.2 Entering hole position block............................................................................ 625
B.5.9 Operations in the “END” Menu ...........................................................................625
B.6 CHECKING OF THE PART PROGRAM.................................................... 626
B.6.1 Checking by Animation........................................................................................626
C ALARMS ............................................................................................. 627

D MACHINING CYCLE PARAMETERS................................................. 633
D.1 PARAMETERS FOR MILLING CYCLE ..................................................... 633
D.1.1 Parameters Common to Milling Cycles................................................................633
D.1.2 Parameters for Facing Cycles...............................................................................639
D.1.3 Parameters for Contouring Cycles........................................................................639
D.1.4 Parameters for Pocketing Cycles..........................................................................641
D.1.5 Parameters for Grooving Cycles ..........................................................................645
D.1.6 Parameters for Hole Machining Cycles................................................................647
D.2 PARAMETERS FOR TURNING CYCLE ................................................... 649
D.2.1 Parameters Common to Turning Cycles...............................................................649
D.2.2 Parameters for Turning Cycles.............................................................................651
D.2.3 Parameters for Threading Cycles .........................................................................654
D.2.4 Parameters for Thread Repairing Cycles..............................................................657
D.2.5 Parameter for Grooving Cycles ............................................................................658
D.2.6 Parameters for Hole Machining Cycles................................................................660
APPENDIX (FOR MACHINE TOOL BUILDER)

A MANUAL GUIDE i SETUP PROCEDURE.......................................... 665
A.1 GENERAL ................................................................................................. 666
A.2 NECESSARY HARDWARE....................................................................... 666
A.3 NECESSARY SOFTWARE ....................................................................... 666
c-20
A.3.1 Machining Center (Series 0i)................................................................................666
A.3.2 Machining Center (Series 16i/18i/21i) .................................................................667
A.3.3 Machining Center (Series 30i/31i/32i) .................................................................668
A.3.4 Lathe (Series 0i) ...................................................................................................669
A.3.5 Lathe (Series 16i/18i/21i).....................................................................................670
A.3.6 Lathe (Series 30i/31i/32i).....................................................................................672
A.3.7 Lathe with Compound Machining Function (Series 16i/18i/21i).........................673
A.3.8 Note ......................................................................................................................673
A.4 SETTING THE MANDATORY PARAMETERS.......................................... 673
A.5 SETTING THE BASIC PARAMETERS...................................................... 676
A.5.1 Parameters related to the Allocation of Startup Function Keys ...........................676
A.5.2 Parameters Related to the Display Language .......................................................678
A.5.3 Parameters Related to Current Position Display ..................................................679
A.5.4 Parameters Related to Load Meter .......................................................................680
A.5.5 Parameters Related to Spindle Status Display......................................................681
A.5.6 Parameters Related to Subprogram Selection Screens .........................................681
A.5.7 Parameters Related to Arbitrary Figures ..............................................................682
A.5.8 Parameters Related to Operations in General.......................................................683
A.5.9 Parameters Related to Graphic Display................................................................692
A.5.10 Parameters Related to Tool Drawing....................................................................693
A.5.11 Parameters Related to Machining Simulation (Tool Path Drawing) ....................699
A.5.12 Parameters Related to Machining Simulation (Animation Drawing)...................700
A.5.12.1 Parameters related to AXIS of animation drawing .......................................... 700
A.5.12.2 Parameters related to animation drawing in general........................................ 703
A.5.12.3 Parameters related to machining time display ................................................. 709
A.5.12.4 Parameters related to color of animation drawing ........................................... 710
A.5.12.5 Settings for Programmable data input ............................................................. 710
A.5.12.6 Parameter related to alarms about overlap with parts or blanks ...................... 711
A.5.12.7 Parameter related to the T0 command during animation drawing................... 711
A.5.13 Parameters Related to Program Coordinate System Switching and Offset
Memory Switching ...............................................................................................712
A.5.14 Parameters Related to Tool Management Functions ............................................714
A.5.15 Parameters Related to Multi-path Lathe...............................................................716
A.5.16 Parameters Related to the Color Palette ...............................................................720
A.5.16.1 Parameters related to the color palette for screen display................................ 720
A.5.16.2 Parameters related to the color palette for icon display ................................... 722
A.5.16.3 Parameters related to the color palette for guidance display ........................... 723
A.5.17 Parameters Related to Handle Machining ............................................................725
A.5.18 Other Parameters ..................................................................................................726
A.6 PARAMETER SETTINGS DEPENDING ON THE MACHINE TYPE ......... 730
A.6.1 Machining Center .................................................................................................730
A.6.2 Other Machines ....................................................................................................734
A.6.3 Lathe.....................................................................................................................734
A.7 M CODE OUTPUT IN CYCLE EXECUTING ............................................. 739
A.7.1 M code for Rigid Tapping ....................................................................................739
A.7.2 M code for Clamping and Unclamping Rotate Axis as “C”.................................739
A.8 SETTING FOR START-UP WHEN CNC PARAMETER IS UNSET
(Only Series 0i-C/16i/18i/21i-B) ................................................................ 741
B LADDER PROGRAM CREATION ...................................................... 742

B.1 REVERSE TAP CYCLE............................................................................. 742
B.2 THREAD REPAIRING CYCLE .................................................................. 744
B.2.1 Starting Thread Repairing ....................................................................................744
B.2.2 Setting the Spindle Orientation Mode ..................................................................745
c-21
B.3 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT DATA ........................................................... 746

C CUSTOMIZATION............................................................................... 747
C.1 DISPLAYING VERTICAL SOFT KEYS FOR THE 15-INCH LCD .............. 747
C.1.1 Displaying the Setting Screen ..............................................................................747
C.1.2 Operations ............................................................................................................747
C.1.3 Changing Soft Keys..............................................................................................748
C.1.4 Memory Card Input/Output..................................................................................748
C.1.5 File Format ...........................................................................................................749
C.2 TOOL DATABASE ACCESS FUNCTION.................................................. 750
C.2.1 Basic Specifications .............................................................................................750
C.2.2 System Variables ..................................................................................................750
C.2.3 Read......................................................................................................................752
C.2.4 Write.....................................................................................................................752
C.2.5 Copy .....................................................................................................................752
C.2.6 Initialization..........................................................................................................752
C.2.7 Initializing All Tool Data .....................................................................................752
C.3 CREATING A P-CODE USER MODULE................................................... 752
C.3.1 Creation Method 1................................................................................................753
C.3.2 Creation Method 2................................................................................................753
C.3.3 Creation Procedure ...............................................................................................754
C.3.3.1 For the FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i-MB........................................................... 754
C.3.3.2 For the FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i-TB............................................................ 755
C.3.3.3 For the FANUC Series 0i-MC......................................................................... 755
C.3.3.4 For the FANUC Series 0i-TC/TTC ................................................................. 755
C.3.3.5 For the FANUC Series 0i-F/0i-D/30i/31i/32i.................................................. 756
C.3.4 Notes on Creation.................................................................................................756
C.3.4.1 For the FANUC Series 0i-MC,16i/18i/21i-MB ............................................... 756
C.3.4.2 For the FANUC Series 0i-TC,16i/18i/21i-TB ................................................. 756
C.3.4.3 For the FANUC Series 0i-F/0i-D/30i/31i/32i.................................................. 756
C.4 SOFT KEY IDS TO BE OPEN TO USERS ................................................ 756
C.5 MESSAGE FILES ...................................................................................... 760
C.6 CHANGING THE CUSTOMIZE DEFINITION FILE DURING USE OF
RETHREADING......................................................................................... 761
C.7 SOFT-KEY CUSTOMIZATION FUNCTION............................................... 762
C.7.1 Structure of Customize Data File .........................................................................762
C.7.2 Format ..................................................................................................................762
C.7.3 Note ......................................................................................................................763
C.7.4 Soft Key ID List ...................................................................................................763
C.8 MANUAL GUIDE i WINDOW CALL FUNCTION
(for only Series 30i/31i/32i-B, Series 0i-F) ................................................ 764
C.8.1 Outline ..................................................................................................................764
C.8.1.1 Available display ............................................................................................. 764
C.8.1.2 Necessary option.............................................................................................. 764
C.8.1.3 Necessary parameter setting ............................................................................ 764
C.8.2 Method of Calling ................................................................................................764
C.8.2.1 Blank figure selection window ........................................................................ 765
C.8.2.2 Blank figure data input window (Fixed form and arbitrary free figure).......... 766
C.8.2.3 Free figure input window (Free figure creation window and range selection
window) ........................................................................................................... 768
C.8.2.4 Machining simulation window ........................................................................ 770
C.8.2.5 NC program conversion window..................................................................... 770
C.8.2.6 Number of string characters to be transmitted is 256 or more......................... 771
C.8.3 Method to get return information from MANUAL GUIDE i...............................771
c-22
C.8.3.2 Blank figure data input window (Fixed form and arbitrary free figure) and
Free figure input window (Free figure creation window and range selection
window) ........................................................................................................... 773
C.8.3.5 Number of string characters to be transmitted is 256 or more......................... 775
C.8.4 Display and Operation..........................................................................................775
C.8.4.2 Blank figure data input window (Fixed form and arbitrary free figure).......... 776
C.8.4.3 Free figure input window (Free figure creation window, range selection
window) ........................................................................................................... 777
C.8.5 Method of Making User Application ...................................................................780
C.8.6 Method of Color Pallet Setting.............................................................................780
C.8.7 Restriction ............................................................................................................782
C.9 DISPLAY OF SIMPLIFIED CHINESE CHARACTERS ALARM OF USER
MACRO (for Series 30i/31i/32i-B, 0i-F/0i-D) ............................................. 782
C.9.1 Setting for Use......................................................................................................782
C.10 EXTENDED AXIS NAME FUNCTION FOR 8.4” /10.4” DISPLAY
(for only Series 30i/31i/32i-B, Series 0i-F) ................................................ 783
C.10.1 Conditions to Use This Function..........................................................................783
C.10.2 Displaying Extended Axis Name .........................................................................783
C.10.3 Editing a Program Including Extended Axis Name .............................................784
C.11 MANUAL GUIDE i CUSTOMIZATION
(for only Series 30i/31i/32i-B, 0i-F/0i-D).................................................... 785
C.11.1 Automatic Operation After Changing to MANUAL GUIDE i Screen from
User Application...................................................................................................785
C.11.2 Change to User Application Screen After Closing MAUAL GUIDE i Window.786
C.11.3 Unchange to Menu Window When Blank Figure Input Window is Closed by
Softkey [CANCEL]..............................................................................................794
C.12 OPERATION NAVIGATING CUSTOMIZATION FUNCTION..................... 794
C.12.1 Window Message Definition File ( vgamsg*u.txt ) .............................................795
C.12.2 Operation Navigating Selection Window Definition File (navilstu.txt ...............796
C.12.2.1 Specifying tab title........................................................................................... 796
C.12.2.2 Specifying item title and group ID .................................................................. 797
C.12.3 Operation Navigating Execution Definition File (navidatu.txt)...........................797
C.12.3.1 Specifying group ID ........................................................................................ 798
C.12.3.2 Specifying Navi window data.......................................................................... 798
C.12.3.3 Specifying Navi trigger data ............................................................................ 801
C.12.3.4 Specifying Navi operation code....................................................................... 801
C.12.4 Examples of Definition Files................................................................................802
C.12.5 Restriction of Customization................................................................................803
C.12.6 Available Icons.....................................................................................................804
C.12.7 Condition to Use Standard Operation Navigating Data .......................................807
D SCREEN HARD COPY ....................................................................... 808
c-23
I. WHAT IS MANUAL GUIDE i?
B-63874EN/11 GENERAL 1.WHAT IS MANUAL GUIDE i?
1 WHAT IS MANUAL GUIDE i?

1.1 WHAT IS MANUAL GUIDE i?
MANUAL GUIDE i guides you on how to operate CNC units installed on machine tools such as lathes
and machining centers. It features a single screen that can be used to create machining programs, check
them using animation, set up machining, and perform actual machining.
With MANUAL GUIDE i, the ISO code format, which is in wide use for CNC-based machine tools, is
used for machining programs and machining cycles are available to implement advanced machining
operations.
1.2 MAIN FEATURES OF MANUAL GUIDE i

By using MANUAL GUIDE i, the operator can carry out routine machining easily. It has the following
main features:
(1) Integrated operation screen that enables almost all routine machining operations
A single integrated operation screen enables routine machining operations including machining
program input/editing, animated simulation based machining program checks, production machining,
MDI operations, and manual operations with JOG and HANDLE.
(2) Machining programs in ISO code format

Using ISO code machining programs, which are in wide use, enables the operator to specify simple
operations with simple commands, such as those for straight lines and arcs, and complicated
machining operations with machining cycles easily.
(3) High affinity with CAD/CAM

ISO code machining programs created using CAD/CAM can be used without modification. Adding
advanced machining cycles to these machining programs makes them perfect machining programs.
They can be checked easily, using animated simulation.
(4) Advanced machining program editing

Using advanced editing functions, such as substring search and cut/paste via the clipboard, enables
easy editing of machining programs.
(5) Advanced machining using machining cycles

Advanced machining cycles are available which cover various types of machining including milling
and turning. With these machining cycles, it is possible to perform complex machining by creating
and running programs easily.
(6) Fixed format program menu-driven simple program entry

Register a series of frequently used machining operations previously as a menu, and select necessary
machining operations from the menu when creating a machining program. This method can
eliminate the trouble of entering similar machining operations repeatedly.
(7) M code menu

It is possible to input M codes easily by referencing explanations displayed in an M code menu.
Machine tool builders can create the explanations easily.
-3-
1.WHAT IS MANUAL GUIDE i? GENERAL B-63874EN/11
(8) Realistic animated simulation

Machining programs can be checked easily, using an animated simulation method that can
realistically show what the surface machined with a specific type of tool tip is like. In addition, you
can check a simulated workpiece as if you were seeing at a real workpiece because the animated
simulation method uses solid models for all operations, from milling to turning, for the workpiece.
(9) Advanced set-up guidance

It is possible to set up machining operations and check the precision of machined workpieces easily,
using an advanced set-up guidance function that can handle all measurements, from tool offset
measurement to the measurement of workpieces in machine tools.
(10) Supporting a wide variety of machine types including lathes and machining centers
MANUAL GUIDE i supports lathes 1 to 3, vertical and horizontal machining centers, and tilting
head-equipped machining centers with 3 + 2 axes. It also supports compound machine tools that are
capable of turning and milling.
-4-
II. BASIC SCREEN AND OPERATION
B-63874EN/11 BASIC SCREEN AND OPERATION 1.BASIC SCREEN
1 BASIC SCREEN
In MANUAL GUIDE i, basically, only one screen called the All-in-one Screen is used for all the
operations from trial machining to actual machining.
Title area CNC status area
MANUAL GUIDE i
ACTUAL POS DIST TO GO SPINDLE Program

Status indicator window number etc.
FEED MM/MIN
PROGRAM
Graphic window
Message
window
Soft keys Pop-up window Key-in buffer

Program window
(1) Title area:

The title of MANUAL GUIDE i is always displayed.
(2) CNC status area:

The following CNC statuses are displayed.
• Mode
• Alarm status
• Reset or emergency stop status
• Actual time
(3) Status indicator window:

The following information about CNC is displayed.
• Actual machine position
• Remaining moving distance of the actual block
• Actual speed and load meter (for the axis with the maximum load)
NOTE
1 It is possible to display the maximum 8 axes.
2 It is possible to display Actual speed in Feed per revolution. (Refer to the bit 0
(FDS) of parameter No.14703.)
• Spindle rotating speed and spindle load meter

• Program number and process number
• Command values during automatic operation (M,S,T,F)
-7-
1.BASIC SCREEN BASIC SCREEN AND OPERATION B-63874EN/11
• Machine status icons

(a) Direction of spindle rotation:
(Normal/vertical) (Reverse/vertical)
(Normal/horizontal) (Reverse/horizontal)
(b) Constant surface speed control mode:

(Enabled/vertical) (Enabled/horizontal)
(c) Handle mode:

(HNDL mode)
(4) Graphic window

The following graphical drawing is displayed as needed.
• Animated drawing with a solid model (machining simulation)
• Tool path drawing
(5) Program window

The machining program is displayed.
(6) Pop-up window

The following supplemental screens are displayed as needed.
• M-code menu
• Fixed format statement menu
• Set data (workpiece coordinate system, tool offset, fixed format statement registration)
NOTE
Tool offset pairs are the maximum 9990pairrs.
• Program list
• Data input window for machining cycles
(7) Key-in buffer

Comments on data and input numerical data are displayed as needed.
(8) Message window

The following messages are displayed as needed.
• Meaning of the word which a cursor is allocated (Guidance Message)
NOTE
It is possible to display two Guidance Message of M/T mode in the CNC for
compound lathe. (Refer to the bit 2 (GDM) of parameter No.14703.)
• Meaning of Machine Cycle which is executing

• Content of Warning and Alarm
(9) Soft keys

The comments on the following soft-keys are displayed as needed.
• Editing operation menu
-8-
B-63874EN/11 BASIC SCREEN AND OPERATION 1.BASIC SCREEN
• Machining cycle menu

• Pop-up window menu
Remark)
The soft keys described in this manual are specified to 12 keys placed under the screen, LCD,
as shown in the following example.
The meaning of each soft key is various by the displayed content on the screen, and will be
displayed on the relevant part for each key.
Example of soft keys)
Soft keys
-9-
2.EDITING PROGRAMS BASIC SCREEN AND OPERATION B-63874EN/11
2 EDITING PROGRAMS
2.1 PROGRAM WINDOW AND EDITING
MANUAL GUIDE i uses a program window to input and edit machining programs (in ISO code format).
The program window is operated using the following soft keys, which are displayed by pressing the
leftmost soft key [<] or rightmost soft key [>] several times.
REWIND CHSIZE LINENO SETING
[REWIND] : This soft key takes you to the beginning of the program.
[CHSIZE] : This soft key zooms the program window to full screen.
[LINENO] : This soft key selects whether to display the line number at the beginning of each block. The
line number is not memorized in the machining program.
[SETING] : This soft key opens the setting screen.
The scroll bar displayed on the right edge of the program window indicates the approximate position of
the cursor throughout the machining program.
The cursor is moved around in the program window, using the cursor keys <←>, <↑>, <↓>, and <→>.
Pressing cursor key <→> moves the cursor right in a block. To move the cursor to the next block, you
need to select the block entirely once and then select an individual address. Pressing cursor key <←> has
the same effect as for cursor key <→> except for the direction in which the cursor moves.
The program is edited using the following soft keys, which are displayed by pressing the leftmost soft key
[<] or rightmost soft key [>] several times.
NEWPRG OPEN SRCH↑ SRCH↓ O SRCH COPY CUT DELETE KEYPST PASTE
Remark)
Basically, soft keys are placed in form of 1 line. By pressing the rightmost soft key [>], the soft keys
shifted to right direction by 10 will appear. By pressing the leftmost soft key [<], the left side soft
keys shifted by 10 will appear.
NOTE
Data server device and Memory card device are not available in Series 0i-D.
2.2 CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS

NEWPRG O LIST SRCH↑ SRCH↓ O SRCH COPY CUT DELETE KEYPST PASTE
When you press the soft key [NEWPRG], the program creation window as shown below appears.
CREATE NEW PROGRAM
NEW PROGRAM NO.
KEY IN NEW PROGRAM NUMBER.
- 10 -
B-63874EN/11 BASIC SCREEN AND OPERATION 2.EDITING PROGRAMS
For the program creation window, the following soft keys are displayed.
CREATE CANCEL
In this window, enter a program number, using numeric keys, and then press soft key [CREATE].
Pressing soft key [CREATE], new program with entered program number only is created, and it is
displayed in the program window. In that case, the following soft keys for editing operation are displayed.
In addition to the above operation, you can create new part program by entering new program number
after the address “O”, and pressing <INSERT> key.
2.3 EDITING IN A PROGRAM LIST

Pressing soft key [O LIST] displays a window that lists registered machining programs.
By pressing the cursor key <←> or <→>, a sort type (sort by number, sort by date and time of updating,
or sort by size) can be selected.
The following soft keys are displayed in the window. They can be used for editing such as copying or
deleting machining programs.
NEW COPY DELETE EDTCOM SEARCH M CARD MLTDEL SRTORD OPEN CLOSE
TIME
[NEW] : This soft key displays the program creation window, in which you can create machining
programs.
[COPY] : This soft key displays the program copy window. After a program number is entered using
numeric keys, pressing soft key [COPY] copies the specified program.
[DELETE] : This soft key displays a message for asking you whether you really want to delete a
specified program. Pressing soft key [YES] deletes the specified program. Pressing soft key
[NO] cancels the request to delete the specified program.
[EDTCOM] : This soft key displays the comment (program name) edit window. If you move the cursor,
using cursor key <←> or <→>, and enter a character, using MDI keys, the character
appears at the left of the cursor. Using the <CAN> key can delete the character at the left.
Pressing soft key [ALTER] causes the comment to be changed.
[SEARCH] : This soft key displays the program search window. After entering a desired program
number in the window, using numeric keys, press soft key [SEARCH].
[M CARD] : This soft key enables input/output to and from the memory card. See Chapter 2,
“MEMORY CARD INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION”, in Part III for details of memory card
input/output.
[MLTDEL] : This soft key deletes more than one program at a time. For details, see Subsection 2.3.1,
“Simultaneous Deletion of Multiple Programs”.
- 11 -
[SRTORD] : This soft key switches the sort order for displaying programs between ascending order and
descending order.
[OPEN] : After placing the cursor on a program you want to edit, using the cursor key <←> or <↓>,
pressing this soft key selects the program and closes the list window. Then, the soft keys
described at the top of this subchapter are displayed again.
[CLOSE] : This soft key closes the program list window.
[TIME] : This soft key starts the machining time display function. For details, see Section 3.7,
“DISPLAYING MACHINING TIME”.
2.3.1 Simultaneous Deletion of Multiple Programs

In the O list window, pressing the soft key [MLTDEL] displays a window for selecting a program to be
deleted.
SELECT NOSECT AREA ALSECT DELETE CANCEL
[SELECT] : This soft key selects a program to be deleted. Place the cursor on the program to be
selected, and press the soft key [SELECT]. When the program is selected, the color of its
background changes to yellow.
[NOSECT] : This soft key deselects a program. Place the cursor on the program to be deselected, and
press the soft key [NOSECT]. When the program is deselected, the color of its background
changes from yellow back to white.
[AREA] : This soft key selects a range. Place the cursor on the first program in a sequence of
programs to be selected, press the soft key [AREA], and then move the cursor to the last
program in the sequence of programs. The color of the specified range changes to purple.
After this, press the soft key [SELECT] to assert the range. The color of the background of
the selected programs changes from purple to yellow.
[ALSECT] : This soft key can select all programs. Pressing the key selects all programs in the folder of
interest. The color of the background of the selected programs changes to yellow.
[DELETE] : This soft key deletes selected programs.
[CANCEL] : This soft key deselects all programs in the folder of interest at a time. The color of the
background of the deselected programs changes from yellow back to white.
Pressing the soft key [DELETE] displays a confirmation message in the message section of a window for
selecting programs to be deleted. The message asks whether you really want to delete the selected
programs. It also displays [YES] and [NO] as soft keys. Pressing the soft key [YES] deletes the programs.
Pressing the soft key [NO] cancels the request to delete them and displays the soft keys for range
selection again.
YES NO
2.3.2 Managing Program List Folder (for Series 30i/31i/32i Only)

Described herein is the specification of folder management in the program list window.
2.3.2.1 What is displayed in the program list?

(1) Name
Corresponds to a conventional program number.
(2) Comment
If a comment is too large to fit the display area, the portion of the comment that cannot be displayed
is represented with ellipses (…).
(3) Program update time (year, month, day, hour, minute)
- 12 -
(4) Program size (in character units)
(5) [RETURN UPPER FOLDER]
(6) Program attribute (whether the program of interest can be edited)
If a program cannot be edited, the letter “R” is displayed at the right of the program name.
2.3.2.2 Operations added to the program list window

(1) Changing a program/folder name
Pressing the soft key [RENAME] displays the [ALTER PROGRAM NAME OR FOLDER NAME]
window.
(2) Detailed program information

Pressing the soft key [DETAIL] displays the [PROGRAM PROPERTY] window, which contains
the following information.
<1> Program name (consisting of up to 32 characters) (Note)
<2> Comment (consisting of up to 48 characters) (Note)
<3> Program update time (year, month, day, hour, minute, second)
<4> Program size (in character units)
<5> Program attribute (whether the program of interest can be edited)
NOTE
For the Series 30i/31i/32i, lowercase letters can be used in program names and
comments.
(3) Changing the program/folder attribute (disabling editing)

Pressing the soft key [WRPROT] changes the attribute cyclically.
The letter “R” is displayed on the right side of programs that cannot be edited.
(4) Selecting devices

Pressing the soft key [DEVICE] displays the [SELECT DEVICE] window.
Once a device has been selected, pressing the soft key [SELECT] displays a list of programs in the
selected device.
Refer to also Section 11.1, “SELECTING DEVICES”, in Part III in the “Series 30i/31i/32i
Operator’s Manual” (B-63944EN or B-64484EN).
(5) Creating programs

Specify which to create, programs or folders, by checking the corresponding check box.
2.3.2.3 Supporting data server operations

(1) MANUAL GUIDE i supports program editing and program operations on the data server.
Switching devices in the program list window enables programs on the data server to be handled in
the same manner as for programs in program memory.
The differences are listed below. They meet the same specification as for operations on the NC
screen.
Operation Program memory Data server

Creating programs Supported Not supported
Copying programs Supported Not supported if they are already selected
Deleting programs Supported Not supported if they are already selected
Renaming programs Supported Not supported if they are already selected
Memory card input/output Supported Not supported
- 13 -
(2) The other functions (such as setting and FTP-based transfer) on the data server are performed on the
NC screen (program list window).
(3) The specification of ATA flash card that can be used by MANUAL GUIDE i and has a size that is
bigger than 2Gbyte is followings.
<1> Made by TDK
<2> The size is 4Gbyte
2.4 SEARCHING FOR A MACHINING PROGRAM TO BE

EDITED
After entering a desired program number, using numeric keys, pressing soft key [O SRCH] can select the
program.
Pressing soft key [O SRCH] without entering a program number causes the next program to be selected.
Pressing the O key on the MDI panel, the soft keys changes to the above one, so enter the program
number to be searched and press soft key [O SRCH].
And as another way, you can select the program in the program list by pressing soft key [OPEN] after
placing the cursor on the program number to be selected.
When the part program is selected, the content of the part program is displayed in the program window,
and the above soft keys will be displayed.
2.5 PROGRAM NUMBER O8-DIGIT FUNCTION

It is possible to use program number O8-digit on Series 16i / 18i/ 21i-MODEL B and Series 30i / 31i/ 32i.
On Series 16i / 18i/ 21i-MODEL B, the option “Program number O8-digit” is necessary. On Series 30i /
31i/ 32i, this function is available in case parameter No.11304#3 is set to 1.
2.6 BASIC EDITING OPERATIONS OF PART PROGRAM

Since MANUAL GUIDE i uses ISO-code form part program, editing of 1 word, minimum unit of the
program and made from address and numerical data, are available by using <INSERT>, <ALTER> and
<DELETE> keys, which are placed on the MDI panel.
2.6.1 Entering a Word (<INSERT> key)

Operation
(1) Select the word, before which you want to insert the new word, by placing the cursor. Otherwise,
select the block, before which you want to insert the new word, by placing the cursor.
(2) Enter a new word by MDI keys. Plural words can be entered at once.
(3) Press <INSERT> key.
NOTE
In the case a bit 2 (C4E) of parameter No.14852 is set to 0, when a cursor is
placed on the word in the cycle machining block and an operator is going to
insert a new word, the warning to confirm an operator whether it can be done or
not will be displayed.
- 14 -
2.6.2 Modifying a Word (<ALTER> key)

Operation
(1) Select the word to be modified by placing the cursor on the word.
(2) Enter new word by MDI keys. Plural words can be entered at once.
(3) Press <ALTER> key.
2.6.3 Modifying the Numeric Value of a Word (<ALTER> key)

Operation
(1) Select the word to be modified by placing the cursor on the word.
(2) Enter new numeric data only by MDI keys. Plural words can not be entered.
2.6.4 Deleting a Word (<DELETE> key)

Operation
(1) Select the word to be deleted by placing the cursor on the word.
(2) Press <DELETE> key.
NOTE
1 As the deleting operation in the CNC program screen, no prompting message for
deleting a word is displayed.
2 Program number, Oxxxx, and end of program, %, cannot be deleted.
2.6.5 Modifying a Block (<ALTER> key)
Operation
(1) Select the block to be modified by placing the cursor on the block.
(2) Enter a new word by MDI keys. Plural words can be entered at once.
2.6.6 Deleting a Block (<DELETE> key)

Operation
(1) Select the block to be deleted by placing the cursor on the block.
(2) Press <DELETE> key.
2.6.7 Changing the Program Number (ALTER key)

Operation
(1) Select the program number word, Oxxxx, by placing the cursor on the word.
(2) Enter the address “O” and new program number by MDI keys.
2.7 SEARCH (FORWARD AND BACKWARD)

[ ]
- 15 -
After a character string is entered using MDI keys, pressing soft key [SRCH↑] (backward search) or
[SRCH↓] (forward search) searches for the specified character string. A substring can also be searched
for.
If the character string is found, key-in buffer is cleared, but the string is displayed in the [ ] under soft
keys [SRCH↑] and [SRCH↓].
This displayed string can be used for the next time searching operation. Only pressing soft key [SRCH↑]
or [SRCH↓] without entering same string again, you can search the same string over and over.
2.7.1 Simultaneous String Search Function of Multi Programs

Simultaneous string search function of multi programs is available on multi-part program editing screen
or multi-path concurrent display screen.
2.7.1.1 Mode to use this function

This function is available on only following mode.
(1) EDIT mode

(2) MEM mode (the background edit)
2.7.1.2 Program window where search is executed

The search of this function is executed only to the following program windows.
(1) Program window of mode to use this function on multi-path concurrent display screen
(2) Program window on multi-part program editing screen
2.7.1.3 Changing search mode

By changing to multi-search mode with following operation, simultaneous string search function become
available.
(1) In order to change to multi-search mode, press soft key [M.MODE].

(In case of multi-path concurrent display screen)
REWIND M.MODE PL.EDT CHGDSP LINENO SIMLAT PRCLAT MLTWIN CHPATH
(In case of multi-part program editing screen)

NEWPRG O LIST M.MODE REWIND O SRCH ←SELE SELE→ WINOPN WINCLS PL.END
(2) The icon of the soft key [↑ search] / [↓ search] is changed as follows, when becoming multi-search
mode.
(Icon on multi-search mode)
- 16 -
(Icon on single-search mode(conventional) )
(3) In order to return to single-search mode, press soft key [S.MODE].

(In case of multi-path concurrent display screen)
REWIND S.MODE PL.EDT CHGDSP LINENO SIMLAT PRCLAT MLTWIN CHPATH
(In case of multi-part program editing screen)

NEWPRG O LIST S.MODE REWIND O SRCH ←SELE SELE→ WINOPN WINCLS PL.END
2.7.1.4 Execute simultaneous string search of multi programs

(1) When soft key [↑ search] / [↓ search] is pressed in the state of the multi-search mode, search of the
character string is executed to programs of all windows which satisfy the requirement for search.
NEWPRG O LIST ↑SRCH ↓SRCH O SRCH COPY CUT DELETE KEYPST PASTE
[ ]
2.8 CUT
Pressing soft key [CUT] displays a message that prompts you to select a range of data to be cut. First
select the cut range (by displaying it in yellow), using cursor keys, and then press soft key [CUT]. The
data cut off from the specified range is stored on the clipboard. The contents of the clipboard can be
pasted to other places in the program and to other programs.
Clip board is the memory, in which the content of part program can be stored temporary. By pressing soft
key [CUT] or [COPY], the content of the cursor selected is stored in it, then the old content is cleared.
The content of the clip board is cleared at the power off of CNC.
A clip board size can be selected using bits 4 (CLP1) and 5 (CLP2) of parameter No. 14701.
Bit 4(CLP1)= 0, bit 5(CLP2)= 0: Sets a clip board size of 1024 bytes.
- 17 -
NOTE
The contents of the clipboard are preserved until the power is shut off or other
data is stored on the clipboard. So, the clipboard contents can be used any
number of times.
2.9 COPY
Pressing soft key [COPY] displays a message that prompts you to select a range of data to be copied. First
select the copy range (by displaying it in yellow), using cursor keys, and then press soft key [COPY]. The
data copied from the specified range is stored on the clipboard. The contents of the clipboard can be
pasted to other places in the program and to other programs.
NOTE
Once a range of data to be copied has been selected, the cursor is placed back
to the first block in the selected range if parameter CEB (No.14705#1) = 0 or the
last block if CEB (No.14705#1) = 1.
2.10 PASTE
Pressing soft key [PASTE] pastes the contents of the clipboard to the place that immediately follows the
current cursor position.
The clipboard contents are preserved.
2.11 DELETE
Pressing soft key [DELETE] displays a message that prompts you to select a range of data to be deleted.
First select the delete range (by displaying it in yellow), using cursor keys, and then press soft key
[SELECT]. A message appears which asks whether you really want to delete the selected data. Pressing
soft key [YES] deletes the data.
The deleted data is not stored on the clipboard. The clipboard preserves the previous contents.
2.12 KEY-IN PASTE

- 18 -
Pressing soft key [KEYPST] copies the contents of a range selected (displayed in yellow) using the cursor
to the key-in buffer.
Using the cursor keys <←> and <→> can move the cursor around in the key-in buffer, so a character
entered using an MDI key can be placed immediately before the cursor. Pressing the <CAN> key deletes
the character at the left of the cursor.
The character strings in the key-in buffer can be used in the same manner as for ordinary editing. Pressing
the <ALTER> key, for example, replaces the cursor-selected current contents in the program with the
current contents of the key-in buffer. Pressing the <INSERT> key inserts the key-in buffer contents to the
place that immediately follows the cursor-selected contents in the program.
Pressing <CAN> after <SHIFT> clears the contents of the key-in buffer.
NOTE
Using key-in paste enables a very long comment program and part of a custom
macro program block to be changed easily.
2.13 REPLACING WORD

It is possible to search a word that includes specified characters and replace it to other specified word.
2.13.1 Replacing a Word

The operations for replacing a word are as follows.
1) The following soft keys are displayed by pressing the leftmost soft key [<] or rightmost soft key [>]
several times during EDIT mode or background editing.
G-CONT UNDO REDO REPL. WK SET T-OFS SETING
2) If [REPL.] soft key is pressed, “REPLACE WORD” window will be displayed.

3) Input characters in “SRCH. CHAR. STR.” for search and press <INPUT> key.
4) Input word in “RPLC. CHAR. STR.” for replacement and press <INPUT> key.
5) Press [SRCH↑] or [SRCH↓] soft key and the cursor will move on a word that includes the
characters specified in “SRCH. CHAR. STR.”.
6) Press [REPL.] soft key and the word will be replaced to the word that specified in “RPLC. CHAR.
STR.”. The next word will be searched automatically.
7) Press [REPL.] soft key again, if the operator wants to replace the word which is selected by the
cursor. Press [SRCH↑] or [SRCH↓] soft key, if the operator wants to search the next word without
replacing.
2.13.2 Replace All Words

After the items “SRCH. CHAR. STR.” and “RPLC. CHAR. STR.” are filled and [ALL] soft key is
pressed, the message “ARE YOU SURE TO EXECUTE REPLACE ALL?” will be displayed
If [YES] soft key is pressed during the message is displayed, all words that include characters of “SRCH.
CHAR. STR.” will be replaced to the word of “RPLC. CHAR. STR.”.
After all words are replaced, the cursor moves on the last word that is replaced.
- 19 -
2.13.3 Replaced Words

The result of replaced word format is same as altering word by [ALTER] soft key.
The following table indicates examples of replaced words.
Examples of Replaced Word

Pattern and result Search Replace Ex. of Result of
of replacement char. char. hit word replacement
Search character:
Whole word
Replace character:
Free X10. Z20. X10. Z20.
Result:
Hit word is replaced to
replace character.
Search character:
A part of a word
Replace character:
Free X1 Z20. X10. Z20.
Result:
replace character.
Search character:
Address
Replace character:
Free X Z20. X10. Z20.
Result:
replace character.
Search character:
Free
Replace character:
Value
X10. 20. X10. X20.
Result:
Only the part of value of hit
word is replaced to replace
character.
Search character:
Free
Replace character:
Plural words X10. X20. Z30. X10. X20. Z30. ;
Result:
Hit word is replaced to replace
character.
Search character:
Plural words
Replace character:
Free G0 X10. G1 Z20. G0 X10. G1 Z20. X10. ;
Result:
replace character.
- 20 -
Pattern and result Search Replace Ex. of Result of
of replacement char. char. hit word replacement
Search character:
Character in comment
Replace character:
Free COMMENT Z20. (COMMENT) Z20.
Result:
Whole hit word is replaced
replace character.
Search character:
Macro sentence
Replace character:
Free BPRNT DPRNT BPRNT DPRNT
Result:
replace character.
Search character:
EOB
Replace character:
Free ; Z20.; ; Z20. ;
Result:
replace character.
2.13.4 Note
Please take notice of the followings.
1) O number and program name can’t be replaced.

2) If the format of a word is incorrect after the operation of replacing, the operation becomes invalid.
3) If the number of characters of a block exceeds the limitation (200 characters) after the operation of
replacing, the operation becomes invalid.
4) Replacing word function isn’t executed when the items “SRCH. CHAR. STR.” and “RPLC. CHAR.
STR.” are empty.
5) The cursor don’t move during replacing all words.
6) If the mode is changed during replacing all words, it will be stop halfway. The cursor will move on
the last word that is replaced.
7) If the screen changing by pressing function key or changing the path is executed during replacing all
words, it will be executed after replacing all words.
8) “REPLACE WORD” window will be displayed at the lower right of the program window while the
program window is enlarged.
9) Replacing word function can’t be used during all path display / edit screen is displayed. The [REPL.]
soft key isn’t displayed.
10) The corresponding software version of the each function described in this part is as follows.
BX33 (Series 0i-F) : After version 01

BX32 (Series 0i-D) : After version 01
BX24/BX26/BX28/BX29 (Series 0i-C) : After version 03
BX00/BX01 (Series 16i/18i/21i-B) : After version 21
BY70 (Series 30i/31i/32i-A) : After version 26
BX71 (Series 30i/31i/32i-B) : After version 01
- 21 -
2.14 UNDO, REDO

G-CONT UNDO REDO WK-SET T-OFS SETING
Pressing soft key [UNDO] during editing in the MDI mode, EDIT mode, or MEM mode can cancel
(undo) a program editing operation using the MANUAL GUIDE i. Pressing soft key [REDO] can cancel
(redo) the cancellation of an operation. This function can be used, for example, when a block has been
deleted by mistake.
NOTE
1 Before the undo function or redo function can be used with MANUAL GUIDE i,
the size of a buffer for storing operations must be set in parameter No. 14861.
When 0 is set in the parameter, a 5-KB buffer is allocated.
2 The undo and redo functions can be used for editing operations in a selected
program. This means that the creation of a new program and the deletion of a
program cannot be undone, and the editing of the key-in buffer cannot be
undone.
3 When the screen display is switched or an operation for opening a program is
performed, the buffer is cleared.
2.15 MULTI PART PROGRAM EDITING FUNCTION (For only

Series30i /31i /32i /0i-F/0i-D)
Plural programs are displayed on one screen, and it is possible to edit them Simultaneously.
2.15.1 Start of Multi Part Program Editing Function

In the base screen of EDIT mode or the background edit screen of MEM mode, by pressing [Pl.EDT] soft
key, multi part program editing screen is displayed.
REWIND Pl.EDT CHGDSP LINENO SIMLAT PRCLAT MLTWIN CHPATH
2.15.2 Operation of Display Program Selection

(1) When screen of multi part program editing function of programs is displayed, please select the
program for display by following methods.
<1> Selection of program on [O LIST] window

<2> Selection of program by pressing [O SRCH] soft key
(2) On target of editing window, the selected program is displayed. However, only the following
programs are displayed on read only mode.
<1> Main program on selected path (the background edit screen of MEM mode)
<2> Main program on other path
- 22 -
2.15.3 Display of Multi Part Program Editing Screen

On multi part program editing function screen, plural programs are displayed on one screen, and it is
possible to edit them simultaneously.
(Example of Multi part program editing function screen(10.4inch))

MUNUAL GUIDE i. EDIT
(CNC_MEM/USER/PATH1) (CNC_MEM/USER/PATH1)
O0003 P1 R PROG←→ O3000 BG
1 O0003 ; 1 O3000 ;
2 M30 ; 2 M30 ;
3 ; 3 %
4 ;
Program Title
5 ;
6 ;
7 ;
8 ;
9 ;
0:program no
10 ;
The title of the program is displayed when entering multi part program editing function .
(1) Program window title being edited

Program window title being edited is displayed in blue.
Program path (CNC_MEM/USER/PATH1)
O0003 PROG←→
Program name
State of edited program Cursor mode
<1> Program path
The program path where the displayed program exists is displayed. When the number of
characters of program path exceeds the width of the program window title, it is omitted by
"...".
<2> Program name
Name of the displayed program is displayed. When the number of characters of program name
exceeds the width of the program window title, it is omitted by "...".
<3> State of edited program
It is an State of the displayed program in each program window. The displayed State is as
follows.
P1 : The main program selected by 1 path

BG : Program that was not selected in each path
R : read only program
(2) Program window title not being edited

Program window title not being edited is displayed in light blue.
Moreover, the cursor of the program being edited displayed in yellow, the cursor of the program not
being displayed in gray.
- 23 -
2.15.4 Opening and Shutting of Program Window

The program window is opened or shut. The program windows can be opened up to three in maximums.
(1) By pressing [WINOPN] soft key, the blank window is added. At this time, the blank window
becomes target of editing.
NEWPRG O LIST REWIND O SRCH ←SELE SELE→ WINOPN WINCLS PL.END
(Example of Screen where three programs are displayed simultaneously.)

MUNUAL GUIDE i EDIT
(CNC_MEM/XXX) (CNC_MEM/XXX)
O0003 BG O3000 BG CHR←→
1 O0003 ; 1 O3000 ;
2 M30 ; 2 M30 ;
3 ; 3 %
4 ;
5 ; No program
6 ;
7 ;
8 ;
9 ;
10 ;
(2) When three program window exist, the program window is shut by pressing [WINCLS] soft key.
The shutting program window is the program window that is target of editing.
2.15.5 Switching Target of Editing Program

Operator can switch target of editing program.(*1)
(1) By pressing [SELE→] soft key or <SHIFT> key + cursor move key <→>,the target of editing
program is switched in order of <1> → <2> → <3> → <1> on the figure below.
(2) By pressing [←SELE→] soft key or <SHIFT> key + cursor move key <←>,the target of editing
program is switched in order of <1> → <3> → <2> →<1> on the figure below.
- 24 -
MUNUAL GUIDE I. EDIT

(CNC_MEM/XXX) (CNC_MEM/XXX) (CNC_MEM/XXX)
O3000 O3000
1 O0003 ; 1 O3000 ; 1 O3300 ;
2 M30 ; 2 M99 ; 2 M99 ;
3 ;
3 % 3 %
4 ;
5 ;
6 ;
7 ;
8 ;
9 ;
10 ;
(*1) The main program being selected in the foreground was not switched.
2.15.6 End of Multi Part Program Editing Function of Programs

By pressing [PL.END] soft key, state of multi part program editing function of programs is released.
2.15.7 Operation of Switching to CNC Screen

State of multi part program editing function of programs is not released, when switching to the CNC
screen from the multi part program editing function screen.
2.15.8 Operation of Changing Path

The state of multi part program editing function is independent in each path. Therefore, when the path is
switched, if the path after switched is multi part program editing function, the multi part program editing
function screen is displayed.
(Example) When switching from path to path 2, and returning it to path again.
Multi part program editing function screen in path 1 is displayed.
Path 1 Path 2 Path 1
- 25 -
2.15.9 Operation of Changing Mode

When the mode is changed, state of multi part program editing function is released.
2.15.10 About the Maintenance of Displayed Program Information

The program that had been selected before the release is displayed, when the multi part program editing
function is released once, and the multi part program editing function is started again.
2.15.11 Restrictions
(1) The following functions cannot be used while the multi part program editing function is used. Please
release the state of multi part program editing function when you want to use their functions.
<1> Enlargement of displayed program

<2> Display of preview of arbitrary figure
<3> Simultaneous editing of multipath program
<4> Display of machining simulation
<5> Process list editing function
<6> Replacement function
(2) The following operations cannot be done to the program that has already been displayed on multi
part program editing function screen.
<1> Overwrite copy of program

<2> Delete of program
<3> Comment editing
<4> Deletion of Multiple Programs
<5> Opening program
<6> Alter program name of folder name
(3) The program displayed on the multi part program editing function screen cannot be edited on the
CNC screen. However, the main program can be edited.
2.16 M-CODE MENU

Pressing the leftmost soft key [<] or rightmost soft key [>] several times displays soft key [M CODE] as
follows:
START CYCLE END MECYC ALTER FIGURE M CODE FIXFRM
Pressing soft key [M CODE] displays the M code menu.
The following soft keys are displayed for M-code menu.

INSERT INS+; CANCEL
Select an M code group, using the cursor keys <←> and <→>, and then select an M code from the M
code group, using the cursor keys <↑> and <↓>.
- 26 -
Pressing soft key [INSERT] inserts the selected M code to the place that follows immediately the cursor
position in the program. Pressing soft key [INS+;] inserts an EOB to the place that follows immediately
the M code at the same time.
Entering M-code continuously and pressing soft key [INS+;] at last, plural M-code can be entered in one
block.
If an M-code is selected in the program window using the cursor, pressing the soft key [ALTER] displays
the M-code menu, which enables another M-code to be selected.
NOTE
1 In many cases, M codes in the M code menu are set up to a machine tool by the
machine tool builder. So, the M code menu varies from one machine tool to
another.
2 If the bit 4 (MCD) of parameter No. 14850 is set to 1, M code menu is disabled.
2.17 FIXED FORM SENTENCE INSERTION
2.17.1 Fixed Form Sentence

Pressing the leftmost soft key [<] or rightmost soft key [>] several times displays soft key [FIXFRM] for
milling or turning.
However, there is a case that either of them is displayed depending on the machine construction, so into
details, refer to the document made by machine tool builder.
If soft key [FIXFRM] is displayed together with a milling soft key menu, pressing it displays a milling
fixed form sentence menu. If soft key [FIXFRM] is displayed together with a turning soft key menu,
pressing it displays a turning fixed form sentence menu.
START CYCLE END MECYC ALTER FIGURE M CODE FIXFRM
The following soft keys are displayed for the fixed form sentence menu.
INSERT CANCEL
Select a fixed form sentence group, using the cursor keys <←> and <→>, and then select a fixed form
sentence from the fixed form sentence group, using the cursor keys <↑> and <↓>.
Pressing soft key [INSERT] inserts the selected fixed form sentence to the place that follows immediately
the cursor position in the program.
Using this function makes it easy to enter machining program patterns (fixed form sentences) that may be
used frequently.
As the following example, you can register the fixed form sentence, in which undefined data is replaced
to the special character such as “?”.
1. TOOL CHANGE
G28 G91 X0. Y0. ;
G28 Z0. ;
T? ;
M03 S? ;
- 27 -
When the fixed form sentence, in which this special character is included, is inserted to the part program,
warning to urge an operator to enter the defined data.
Entering the data that is used actually and pressing <ALTER> can make the correct part program.
This special character is displayed in red in the program window.

This special character and displaying color can be modified by setting corresponding parameters.
Set ASCII code in decimal value of the special character to the parameter No.14860. If 0 is set to this
parameter, “?” is used as the special character.
Set the color code of the displaying color to the parameter No.14480 in form of “AABBCC”. AA is red
color value, BB is green color value and CC is blue color value. If 0 is set to this parameter, the character
is displayed in red.
NOTE
1 In many cases, fixed form sentences in the fixed form sentence menu are set up
to a machine tool by the machine tool builder. So, the fixed form sentence menu
varies from one machine tool to another.
Operators can make changes and additions to the menu. For details, see the
descriptions about [SETING].
2 Start and end command fixed form sentences can be called from the fixed form
sentence group separately, using, respectively, [START] and [END].
2.17.2 Start Command

START CYCLE END MESCYC ALTER FIGURE M CODE FIXFRM
Pressing soft key [START] displays the start command fixed form sentence menu.
Select a fixed form sentence, using the cursor keys <↑> and <↓>.
the current cursor position in the program.
This operation makes it easy to enter machining program patterns (fixed form sentences) that are used
frequently at machining program start.
NOTE
In many cases, fixed form sentences in the fixed form sentence menu are set up
to a machine tool by the machine tool builder. So, the fixed form sentence menu
varies from one machine tool to another.
Operators can make changes and additions to the menu. For details, see the
descriptions about [SETING].
- 28 -
2.17.3 End Command

Pressing soft key [END] displays the end command fixed form sentence menu.
Select a fixed form sentence, using the cursor keys <↑> and <↓>.
the current cursor position in the program.
This operation makes it easy to enter machining program patterns (fixed form sentences) that are used
frequently at machining program start.
2.18 REGISTERING FIXED FORM SENTENCES

Soft key [SETING] to open the setting window can be displayed on all mode such as MEM, MDI, and
manual mode.
Pressing the leftmost soft key [<] or rightmost soft key [>] several times displays the soft-keys including
[SETING]
Example of MEM mode soft-keys)

NC CNV WK SET T-OFS SETING
Pressing soft key [SETING] displays the window of setting data.

After selecting the menu of “REGISTER FIXED FORM SENTENCE FOR MILLING” by placing the
cursor, pressing soft key [SELECT] displays the window of data setting.
By similar operations, the window for turning can be displayed.

With "FIXED FORM SENTENCE FOR MILLING," which is called by soft key [FIXFRM] displayed
together with the milling menu, you can modify the contents of a selected fixed form sentence or add a
new sentence.
Selecting “FIXED FORM SENTENCE FOR MILLING” displays the following screen.
Selecting “FIXED FORM SENTENCE FOR TURNING” displays the following screen.
NOTE
1 The fixed form sentence menu displayed in the tab of “FORM1” has same
contents with the one displayed in the “START” menu. Into detail, refer to the
Subsection 2.14.2, “Start Command”.
2 The fixed form sentence menu displayed in the tab of “FORM5” has same
contents with the one displayed in the “END” menu. Into detail, refer to the
Subsection 2.14.3, “End Command”.
3 When the bit 3 (PRT) of parameter No. 14850 is ‘1’, prohibiting registering fixed
form sentences by memory protection key will be enabled.
- 29 -
2.18.1 Registering a New Fixed Form Sentence

When the REGISTER FIXED FORM SENTENCE MILLING / TURNING window is displayed on a
screen, the following soft-keys are displayed.
NEW ALTER DELETE STAND. OUTPUT INPUT TO MNU
By pressing soft key [NEW], a window for registering a new fixed form sentence appears. At the same
time, the following soft keys appear:
See Section 2.3, “MEMORY CARD INPUT/OUTPUT OF FIXED FORM SENTENCES”, in Part III, for
explanations about the soft keys [OUTPUT] and [INPUT].
COPY PASTE INSERT ADD CANCEL
Position the cursor at the "REGISTERED NAME" item, from the MDI keyboard enter the name of the
fixed form sentence you want to register, then press the <INPUT> key to input the name.
Then, position the cursor at the "REGISTERED SENTENCE" item, enter a fixed form sentence from the
MDI keyboard, press the <INPUT> key, then press soft key [INSERT] or [ADD]. This can register the
new fixed form sentence.
[COPY] : Select all registered names or fixed form sentences and copy them to the clipboard.
[PASTE] : Paste the clip board contents. You can copy a part of a machining program being edited to
the clipboard in advance, then you can use it later to, for example, copy it in
"REGISTERED SENTENCE."
[INSERT] : Add the name of the new fixed form sentence to be registered to a location immediately
before the item positioned by the cursor when [NEW] is pressed. The menu numbers of the
subsequent fixed form sentences are all incremented by one.
[ADD] : Add the name of the new fixed form sentence to be registered to the end of the menu
already registered.
[CANCEL] : Cancel a registration operation.
NOTE
1 About the number of fixed form sentences per tab and the maximum characters
per fixed form sentence, the following settings can be selected.
<1> The number of fixed form sentences per tab is 10 and the maximum
characters per fixed form sentence is 128.
<2> The number of fixed form sentences per tab is 5 and the maximum
characters per fixed form sentence is 256.
2 The characters per fixed form sentence increase to 256 when bit 4 (CFF) of
parameter No.14852 = 1.
3 Please power on again when the above parameter is changed. And after that,
fixed form sentences will be initialized on starting the machine again.
2.18.2 Modifying a Fixed Form Sentence

Position the cursor to the name of the fixed form sentence you want to modify, and press soft key
[ALTER]. A window for modifying a fixed form sentence then appears.
- 30 -
When the above window is displayed, the following soft keys appear:
COPY PASTE ALTER CANCEL
In the "REGISTERED NAME" and "REGISTERED SENTENCE" items, the contents of the selected
fixed form sentence are displayed.
Select an item by using the cursor keys <↑> and <↓>, select the part you want to modify by using the
cursor keys <←> and <→>, then enter a new character string from the MDI keyboard. This character
string is inserted immediately before the cursor position.
With the <CAN> key, you can delete the previous character string one character at a time.
In the same way as in registration, soft keys [COPY] and [PASTE] can also be used.
When you have modified "REGISTERED NAME" and "REGISTERED SENTENCE," you must press
the <INPUT> key at the end of the modification.
Pressing soft key [ALTER] replaces the original fixed form sentence with the new fixed form sentence.
2.18.3 Deleting a Fixed Form Sentence

Position the cursor at the name of the fixed form sentence you want to delete, and press soft key
[DELETE]. Then a message for confirming a deletion operation is displayed. If you press soft key [YES],
the fixed form sentence is deleted.
Pressing soft key [NO] cancels the deletion operation.
2.18.4 Initialization to Standard Fixed Form Sentences

The machine tool builder can factory-set particular fixed form sentences as standard fixed form sentences.
For details, refer to the relevant manual issued by the machine tool builder.
In this case, the fixed form sentences are stored as initial data in a memory area in which data cannot be
deleted.
You can use soft key [STAND.] to restore the initial state factory-set by the machine tool builder.
NOTE
1 When fixed form sentences are initialized, the sentences that have been entered
or modified so far are all deleted; so, care is necessary.
2 Also when the machine tool builder reads standard fixed form sentences into
memory, initialization using [STAND.] is required first.
When soft key [STAND.] is pressed, a message for confirming initialization is displayed. By pressing soft
key [YES], initialization is performed.
Selecting soft key [NO] cancels the initialization.
- 31 -
2.18.5 Extension of Fixed Form Sentences

(For only Series 30i/31i/32i-B, Series 0i-F/0i-D)
The maximum number of the following items of fixed form sentences is extended.
Item Maximum number

The number of tabs 7
The number of fixed form sentences per tab 10
The number of characters per fixed form sentence 256
(*) Fixed form sentences in the “INSERT ENDING COMMAND FOR TURNING” window are the
same as 7th tab from the left in “REGISTER FIXED FORM SENTENCE FOR TURNING”
window.
(*) Fixed form sentences in the “INSERT ENDING COMMAND FOR MILLING” window are the
same as 7th tab from the left in “REGISTER FIXED FORM SENTENCE FOR MILLING” window.
2.18.5.1 Parameter
When the parameter No.14791#4 is set to 1, this function is available.
NOTE
Please power on again when the above parameter is changed. And after that,
fixed form sentences will be initialized on starting the machine again.
2.19 BACKGROUND EDITING

During actual machining on the machine, contents of the other part program can be edited.
2.19.1 Starting Background Editing

REWIND O LIST BGEDIT N SRCH O SRCH ACTPOS PRESET MESLST MCHDRW SIMLAT
In the MEM mode, pressing the soft key [BGEDIT] switches the screen display to the background editing
screen and displays the program list screen.
Move the cursor to a machining program to be edited, with the cursor keys, then select the machining
program by pressing soft key [OPEN].
2.19.2 Ending Background Editing

During background editing, pressing the leftmost soft key [<] or rightmost soft key [>] several times
displays the soft-keys including soft key [BGEND]
BGEND
Pressing the [BGEND] soft key ends the background editing screen and returns the screen display to the
automatic operation screen.
- 32 -
NOTE
Switching the CNC modes during background editing will result in the
background editing being terminated.
2.19.3 Operations During Background Editing

Operations during background editing are basically the same as editing operations in the EDIT mode.
Note, however, that the use of some operations is restricted.
2.20 NOTES ON CREATING PROGRAMS

The notes that should be observed when creating a program are described below. Read the notes before
creating a program.
2.20.1 General Notes on Machining Programs

(1) Use ISO code form (G code commands) basically for a machining program. Enter a command for
simple motion directly with a G code, and use cycle machining for complicated machining.
(2) Enter directly a tool change command involving the calling of the next tool by using a code such as
a T code and M code or by using a subprogram call prepared by the machine tool builder, referring
to the relevant operator’s manual of the machine tool builder.
(3) Enter directly a tool length compensation command used with a machining center by using a G code
such as G43.
(4) For changing tools or tool length compensation, a similar command is repeatedly entered. So, such a
command can be entered easily by registering a fixed form sentence beforehand.
(5) MANUAL GUIDE i cannot handle any program having a block consisting of over 199 characters.
Selecting a program having a block consisting of 200 characters or more (including space
characters) will result in the message ”BLOCK EXCEED MAXIMUM SIZE.” appearing, thus
disabling further editing.
- 33 -
3.MACHINING SIMULATION BASIC SCREEN AND OPERATION B-63874EN/11
3 MACHINING SIMULATION
Select the MEM mode on the machine operator’s panel.
When you press soft key [SIMLAT], the SIMULATE-ANIMATE screen (animation drawing) appears
with the following soft keys:
REWIND START PROCES SINGLE STOP INIT CUTDSP INTERF TLPATH GRPOFF
When you press soft key [TLPATH], the SIMULATE-TOOL PATH screen (tool path drawing) appears
with the following soft keys:
REWIND START PROCES SINGLE STOP DISP NODISP CLEAR ANIME GRPOFF
Pressing soft key [ANIME] selects the mode for machining simulation (animation drawing) again.
In machining simulation (animated tool path), pressing the soft key [GRPOFF] resumes the MEM mode
window.
3.1 EDITING WITH THE PROGRAM LIST

By pressing soft key [O LIST], a window showing a list of registered machining programs is displayed.
The following soft keys appear, allowing you to select machining programs.
SEARCH SRTORD OPEN CANCEL
[SEARCH] : A window for searching programs appears. Enter the number of the program you want to
search for with numeric keys, then press soft key [SEARCH]. The search window can be
closed using soft key [CANCEL].
[OPEN] : After performing the above search operation or moving the cursor to a desired program
number by using the cursor keys <↑> and <↓>, press soft key [OPEN]. Then the program
is selected.
[CANCEL] : Close the list window.
[SRTORD] : This soft key switches the sort order for displaying programs between ascending order and
descending order.
- 34 -
B-63874EN/11 BASIC SCREEN AND OPERATION 3.MACHINING SIMULATION
3.2 SEARCHING FOR A SEQUENCE NUMBER IN A

PROGRAM
When you enter the sequence number you want to search for by using numeric keys then press soft key
[N SRCH], you can search for the block having the sequence number.
When you press soft key [N SRCH] without entering any data, the sequence number (N) is searched for
sequentially.
If the sequence number is not found, a warning is displayed. It can be released by pressing a key.
3.3 SELECTING A PROGRAM FOR MACHINING SIMULATION

When you enter the program number you want to select by using numeric keys then press soft key [O
SRCH], the program with the program number is selected and displayed in the program window.
By pressing soft key [O SRCH] without entering any key, the next program is selected.
NOTE
If the parameter OSR is set to “1”, pressing soft key [O SRCH] without entering
any data, the next program is not selected.
The No. of the parameter OSR is as follows by the CNC type.
Series16i/18i/21i /0i-C：No.3202#3
Series30i/31i/32i/0i-F/0i-D：No.14853#2
3.4 REWINDING A PROGRAM

By pressing soft key [REWIND], you can return to the beginning of a selected program.
3.5 SETTING OF DATA FOR MACHINING SIMULATION

When machining simulation (animation drawing) can be performed, a blank figure and tool figure must
be set. Such animation data must be set in the DRAWING DEFINITION block, which is to be entered in
a machining program.
To display the window for entering DRAWING DEFINITION data, press [START] in the soft key menu
for editing machining programs.
(1) Defining materials

Select the [BLANK] tab.
- 35 -
(2) Defining tools

Select the [TOOL] tab.
(3) Selecting a spindle
Select the [SEL. SPIND.] tab.
DRAWING DEFINITION
G1902 Rectangular solid
G1900 Column
G1906 Column (around X)
Blank form block G1901 Column with a hole
G1907 Column with a hole (around X)
G1903 Polygon
G1904 Polygon with a hole
G1970 Start point
G1971 Line
G1972 Arc (CW)
Free contour cylinder
G1973 Arc (CCW)
blank figure block
G1974 Chamfering
G1975 Corner rounding
G1976 End
G1790 Start point
G1791 Line
Free contour cylinder G1792 Arc (CW)
blank figure block G1793 Arc (CCW)
(around X) G1794 Chamfering
G1796 End
G1910 General-purpose tool (turning)
G1911 Threading tool (turning)
G1912 Grooving tool (turning)
G1913 Round-nose tool (turning)
G1914 Point nose straight tool (turning)
G1921 Drill (turning, milling)
Tool definition block G1931 Counter sink tool (milling)
G1932 Flat end mill (milling)
G1933 Ball end mill (milling)
G1922 Tap (turning, milling)
G1923 Reamer (turning, milling)
G1924 Boring tool (turning, milling)
G1930 Face mill (milling)
Spindle selection
G1998 Spindle selection
block
NOTE
1 A tool figure during animation drawing is drawn by a tool definition block.
2 A blank is initialized by a blank figure block.
3 When you use ‘Tool Data Base Function’, you do not need to specify ‘Tool
Definition Block’.
4 Displaying a column around X, column with a hole, or any other blank figure
requires setting up parameter ML2 (No.27003#2) = 1.
- 36 -
(1) Input item of blank form block (rectangular solid: G1902)
WORK
Data item Meaning
B WIDTH Width of the rectangular solid blank. Length in the X-axis direction
(positive value)
D DEPTH Depth of the rectangular solid blank. Length in the Y-axis direction
(positive value)
H HEIGHT Height of the rectangular solid blank. Length in the Z-axis direction
(positive value)
I WORK ORIGIN X Distance in the X-axis direction from the lower left corner of the
rectangular solid to workpiece origin (positive or negative value)
J WORK ORIGIN Y Distance in the Y-axis direction from the lower left corner of the
K WORK ORIGIN Z Distance in the Z-axis direction from the lower left corner of the
(2) Input item of blank form block (column: G1900)
WORK
Data item Meaning
D DIAMETER Diameter of the column blank (positive value)
L LENGTH Length of the column blank (positive value)
K WORK ORIGIN Z Cutting allowance of the end face of the blank (Z-axis distance between
the end face and workpiece origin) (positive value)
W WORK ORIGIN Z (SPN 2) Cutting allowance of the back end face of the blank (Z-axis distance
between the back end face and workpiece origin) (positive value)
NOTE
The input item of “WORK ORIGIN Z(SPN 2) (W)“ is prepared for a machine with
a sub spindle, and is displayed when the bit 1 (SUB) of parameter No.14702 = 1.
(3) Input item of blank form block (column(around X): G1906)

This blank is used for the machining simulation whose workpiece rotates around X-axis in machining
centers.
Data setting is the same as the above column.
NOTE
1 There is the following limitations when the simulation whose workpiece rotates
around X axis is executed.
- This function is available in only machining centers.
- Turning cycle can’t be simulated.
- Polar coordinate interpolation can’t be simulated.
- Under simulation as workpiece rotates workpiece around X-axis, coordinate is
displayed in X, Y, -Z.
2 The following parameter setting is necessary.
- No.27003#2(ML2)=1, 27003#1(ML1)=0 and 27003#0(ML0)=0
- No.14717 : The axis number of work rotation axis
- 37 -
(4) Input item of blank form block (column with a hole: G1901)
WORK
Data item Meaning
D DIAMETER Diameter of the column blank (positive value)
E INNER DIAMETER Inner diameter of the column blank (positive value)
L LENGTH Length of the column blank (positive value)
NOTE
The input item of “WORK ORIGIN Z (SPN 2) (W)” is prepared for a machine with
(5) Input item of blank form block (column with a hole (around X): G1907)
centers.
Data setting is the same as the above column with a hole.
NOTE
- No.27003#2(ML2)=1, 27003#1(ML1)=0 and 27003#0(ML0)=0
(6) Input item of blank form block (polygon: G1903)
WORK
Data item Meaning
R NUMBER OF CORNER The number of corner
This must be a integer, larger than 2 and smaller than 100.
D DIAMETER Diameter of the polygon blank (positive value)
L LENGTH Length of the polygon blank (positive value)
A ANGLE OF ATTACHMENT The angle between a corner and X axis
- 38 -
NOTE
1 The input item of “WORK ORIGIN Z(SPN 2) (W)“ is prepared for a machine with
2 Only equilateral polygon can be displayed.
3 Angle of attachment is the angle that is formed by X-axis and one comer of blank
figure.(Refer to the following figure. )
A
Y
(7) Input item of blank form block (polygon with a hole: G1904)
WORK
Data item Meaning
R NUMBER OF CORNER The number of corner
This must be a integer, larger than 2 and smaller than 100.
D DIAMETER Diameter of the polygon blank (positive value)
E INNER DIAMETER Inner diameter of the polygon blank (positive value)
L LENGTH Length of the polygon blank (positive value)
A ANGLE OF ATTACHMENT The angle between a corner and X axis
NOTE
1 The input item of “WORK ORIGIN Z(SPN 2) (W)“ is prepared for a machine with
2 Only equilateral polygon can be displayed.
3 Angle of attachment is the angle that is formed by X-axis and one comer of blank
figure.(Refer to the following figure. )
A
Y
- 39 -
(8) Input item of free contour cylinder blank figure block (start point: G1970)
ELEMENT (INPUT DATA)

Data item Meaning
DX START POINT DX X coordinate of the start point of an arbitrary figure (positive value)
Z START POINT Z Z coordinate of the start point of an arbitrary figure
W WORK ORIGIN Z (SPN 2) Cutting allowance of a blank rear end face (distance between the rear end
face and workpiece origin in the Z-axis direction) (positive value) (Note 3)
NOTE
1 ‘INPUT DATA’ means the items, which are displayed on the input data window in
editing or altering.
This applies also for G codes G1971 to G1975.
2 Figure input is performed based on the +X-side cross section of the ZX plane of
a round rod.
3 The input item of “WORK ORIGIN Z (SPN 2) (W)” is prepared for a machine with
ELEMENT (OUTPUT DATA)

Data item Meaning
H START POINT DX X coordinate of the start point (input value)
V START POINT Z Z coordinate of the start point (input value)
W WORK ORIGIN Z (SPN 2) Cutting allowance of a blank rear end face (distance between the rear
end face and workpiece origin in the Z-axis direction) (positive value)
(input value)
NOTE
4 ‘OUTPUT DATA’ means the items, which are displayed on the program window
as creating program. It can be referenced only for program display purposes.
This applies also for G codes G1971 to G1975.
(9) Input item of free contour cylinder blank figure block (line: G1971)

Data item Meaning
D LINE DIRECTION Select a line direction from the displayed soft key menu.
DX END POINT DX X coordinate of a line end point
Remark) This item may not be displayed, depending on the input line direction
value.
Z END POINT Z Z coordinate of a line end point
value.
A ANGLE Line angle
value.
L LAST CONNECTION [TANGNT] : Contacts the immediately preceding figure.
[NOTHING] : Does not contact the immediately preceding figure. (initial value)
M NEXT CONNECTION [TANGNT] : Contacts the next figure.
[NOTHING] : Does not contact the next figure. (initial value)
- 40 -

Data item Meaning
H END POINT X X coordinate of the end point of a straight line (calculation result)
V END POINT Z Z coordinate of the end point of a straight line (calculation result)
K LINE DIRECTION The direction of a straight line is selected from a menu indicated on a soft key.
(input value)
C* END POINT DX X coordinate of the end point of a straight line (input value)
D* END POINT Z Z coordinate of the end point of a straight line (input value)
A* ANGLE Straight-line angle (input value)
L LAST CONNECTION [0] : Not in contact with the immediately preceding figure
[1] : In contact with the immediately preceding figure
(input value)
M NEXT CONNECTION [0] : Not in contact with the immediately preceding figure
(input value)
S SELECT FIG. INFO. In the case of plural intersection or contact, the operator sets a candidate.
(input value)
(10) Input item of free contour cylinder blank figure block (arc(CW): G1972)
Input item of free contour cylinder blank figure block (arc(CCW): G1973)

Data item Meaning
DX END POINT DX X coordinate of an arc end point
Z END POINT Z Z coordinate of an arc end point
R RADIUS Radius of an arc
CDX CENTER POINT CDX X coordinate of an arc center
CZ CENTER POINT CZ Z coordinate of an arc center
L LAST CONNECTION [TANGNT] : Contacts the immediately preceding figure.
[NOTHING] : Does not contact the immediately preceding figure. (initial
value)
M NEXT CONNECTION [TANGNT] : Contacts the next figure.
[NOTHING] : Does not contact the next figure. (initial value)

Data item Meaning
H END POINT X X coordinate of an arc end point (calculation result)
V END POINT Z Z coordinate of an arc end point (calculation result)
R RADIUS Arc radius (calculation result)
I CENTER POINT X X coordinate of an arc center (calculation result)
J CENTER POINT Z Z coordinate of an arc center (calculation result)
C* END POINT X X coordinate of an arc end point (input value)
D* END POINT Z Z coordinate of an arc end point (input value)
E* RADIUS Arc radius (input value)
P* CENTER POINT CDX X coordinate of an arc center (input value)
Q* CENTER POINT CZ Z coordinate of an arc center (input value)
L LAST CONNECTION [0] : Not in contact with the immediately preceding figure
(input value)
M NEXT CONNECTION [0] : Not in contact with the immediately preceding figure
(input value)
(input value)
- 41 -
(11) Input item of free contour cylinder blank figure block (chamfering:
G1974)

Data item Meaning
C CHAMFER Chamfer (radius value, positive value)

Data item Meaning
C CHAMFER Amount of chamfering (radius value, positive value)
(input value)
(12) Input item of free contour cylinder blank figure block (corner rounding:
G1975)

Data item Meaning
R CORNER RADIUS Corner R radius (radius value, positive value)

Data item Meaning
K ROTATION DIRECTION [2] : clockwise
[3] : counterclockwise
(13) Input item of free contour cylinder blank figure block (end: G1976)
This block is output at the end of a series of arbitrary figure blocks.
- 42 -
(14) Input item of free contour cylinder blank figure block (around X) (start
point: G1790)
Input item of free contour cylinder blank figure block (around X) (line:
G1791)
Input item of free contour cylinder blank figure block (around X)
(arc(CW): G1792)
(arc(CCW): G1793)
(chamfering: G1794)
Input item of free contour cylinder blank figure block (around X) (corner
rounding: G1795)
Input item of free contour cylinder blank figure block (around X) (end:
G1796)
centers.
Data setting is the same as the above free contour cylinder blank figure.
NOTE
- No.27003#2(ML2)=1, 27003#1(ML1)=0 and 27003#0(ML0)=0
- 43 -
NOTE
1 The arc commands (G1972 and G1973) and corner rounding command (G1975)
are changed to linear elements with several blocks, and then displayed.
Depending on the figure, it may require a longer time before being completely
displayed.
2 Input the end point of an free contour cylinder blank figure such that it matches
with the start point.
3 A series of arbitrary figures must be enclosed with G1970 (start point) and
G1976 (arbitrary figure end).
4 To edit an arbitrary figure, place the cursor on the block of G1970 (start point),
then press [ALTER].
5 A figure for an end face portion cannot be specified. An end face portion must
contain vertical lines only.
X
6 A figure in the Z direction from an end face portion must be a monotonously

increasing or decreasing figure.
X X
Z Z
(15) Input item of tool definition block (general tool: G1910)
TOOL
Data item Meaning
Q SETTING Tool installation direction. Select the number of an installation method
from the illustration.
Remark) To be selected visually for both vertical and horizontal lathes.
A CUT EDGE ANGLE Angle of the cutting edge (positive value)
Remark) Even when the same tool is used, the location of the cutting
edge angle varies with the cutting direction (for example, outer
surface machining and end facing).
B NOSE ANGLE Angle of the tool nose (positive value)
Remark) Generally, the nose angle remains unchanged even when the
cutting direction changes.
C TIP LENGTH Length of the tool nose portion that can actually cut (positive value)
R NOSE RADIUS Radius of the tool nose (positive value)
- 44 -
TOOL
Data item Meaning
E IMAGINARY TOOL NOSE Imaginary tool nose position. Select a number from the menu indicated
in the illustration.
Remark) To be selected visually for both vertical and horizontal lathes.
F TIP POSITION [FRONT] : Display the tip in front of the holder. (tool for forward spindle
rotation)
[REAR] : Display the tip in the rear of the holder. (tool for reverse
spindle rotation)
HOLDER
Data item Meaning
L* HOLDER LENGTH Length of the holder (positive value)
W* HOLDER WIDTH Width of the holder (positive value)
I* HOLDER LENGTH 2 When the tip is installed in the direction opposite to the holder
installation direction, the distance between the longitudinal end of the
holder and tip center (positive value)
J* HOLDER WIDTH 2 When the tip is installed in the direction opposite to the holder
installation direction, the distance between the lateral end of the holder
and tip center (positive value)
(16) Input item of tool definition block (thread tool: G1911)
TOOL
Data item Meaning
Q SETTING General-purpose tool: See the descriptions about G1910.
A TIP WIDTH Tool tip width
E IMAGINARY TOOL NOSE General-purpose tool: See the descriptions about G1910.
F TIP POSITION -
HOLDER
Data item Meaning
L* HOLDER LENGTH General-purpose tool: See the descriptions about G1910.
W* HOLDER WIDTH -
(17) Input item of tool definition block (grooving tool: G1912)
TOOL
Data item Meaning
C TIP WIDTH Tip width of the grooving tool (positive value)
H TIP LENGTH Length of the cutting portion of the grooving tool (positive value)
F TIP POSITION -
HOLDER
Data item Meaning
W* HOLDER WIDTH -
- 45 -
(18) Input item of tool definition block (round tool: G1913)
TOOL
Data item Meaning
H TIP LENGTH Length of the cutting portion of the round-nose tool (positive value)
F TIP POSITION -
HOLDER
Data item Meaning
W* HOLDER WIDTH -
(19) Input item of tool definition block (straight tool: G1914)
TOOL
Data item Meaning
A CUT EDGE ANGLE Angle of the cutting edge (positive value)
C TIP LENGTH Length of the tool nose portion that can actually cut (positive value)
F TIP POSITION -
HOLDER
Data item Meaning
W* HOLDER WIDTH -
I* HOLDER LENGTH 2 -
J* HOLDER WIDTH 2 -
(20) Input item of tool definition block (drill: G1921)
TOOL
Data item Meaning
D TOOL DIAMETER Drill diameter (positive value)
B NOSE ANGLE Drill nose angle (positive value)
H TIP LENGTH Drill length (positive value)
(21) Input item of tool definition block (counter sink tool: G1931)
TOOL
Data item Meaning
D BOTTOM DIAMETER Diameter of the end of the counter sink tool end (positive value)
E CUTER DIAMETER Diameter of the counter sink tool (positive value)
H TIP LENGTH Length of the cutting portion of the counter sink tool (tool axis direction,
positive value)
B CUTTER LENGTH Cutter length of the counter sink tool (tool axis direction, positive value)
- 46 -
TOOL
Data item Meaning
L SHANK LENGTH Entire length of the counter sink tool (positive value)
W SHANK DIAMETER Diameter of the shank of the counter sink tool (positive value)
(22) Input item of tool definition block (flat end mill: G1932)
TOOL
Data item Meaning
D TOOL DIAMETER End mill diameter (positive value)
H TIP LENGTH End mill tool length (positive value)
(23) Input item of tool definition block (ball end mill: G1933)
TOOL
Data item Meaning
H TIP LENGTH End mill tool length (positive value)
(24) Input item of tool definition block (tap: G1922)
TOOL
Data item Meaning
D TOOL DIAMETER Tap diameter (positive value)
H TIP LENGTH Tap length (positive value)
(25) Input item of tool definition block (reamer: G1923)
TOOL
Data item Meaning
D TOOL DIAMETER Reamer diameter (positive value)
H TIP LENGTH Reamer length (positive value)
(26) Input item of tool definition block (boring tool: G1924)
TOOL
Data item Meaning
D TOOL DIAMETER Boring tool diameter (positive value)
H TIP LENGTH Boring tool length (positive value)
(27) Input item of tool definition block (face mill: G1930)
TOOL
Data item Meaning
D TOOL DIAMETER Face mill diameter (positive value)
H TIP LENGTH Face mill length (positive value)
- 47 -
(28) Input item of spindle selection block: G1998
SEL. SPIND.
Data item Meaning
S SPINDLE NUMBER Spindle number of a sub spindle (positive number)
Remark) Enter 2 when the sub spindle has the spindle number 2.
Enter 3 when the sub spindle has the spindle number 3.
NOTE
The menu above is prepared for a machine with a sub spindle, and is displayed
when bit 1 (SUB) of parameter No.14702 = 1.
3.6 MACHINING SIMULATION DISPLAY
3.6.1 Machining Simulation (Tool Path) (for Series 0i-C/16i/18i/21i)

The path of the tool in a machining program can be drawn without performing actual machining operation
on the machine (machining simulation). In the case of Series 0i-F/0i-D/30i/31i/32i see Subsection 3.6.3,
“Machining Simulation (Tool Path Drawing) (for Series 0i-F/0i-D/ 30i/31i/32i)”.
NOTE
1 To perform machining simulation, select the MEM mode with the mode switch on
the machine operator’s panel.
2 If a coordinate system change is specified in the program during simulation,
simulation is performed without changing the coordinate system.
3 In the drawing during machining, when the workpiece specifying block is
executed, form of a workpiece is drawn in form of wire frame. Drawing color of
the workpiece can be specified by the parameter No.14773.
4 When a simulation window is opened, a blank figure drawing at the last drawing
is displayed. However, if bit 4 (WDK) of parameter No. 27310 is set to 1, no
blank figure is displayed when a simulation window is opened.
5 Tool path drawing with a multi-path system is performed only at the selected
path for displaying. And a simulation window is initialized if the selected path for
displaying is changed. So if the selected path for displaying is changed in
displaying a free contour cylinder blank figure, the drawing is initialized for a
column figure which encloses it.
6 Path drawing is performed using values in the workpiece coordinate system.
Coordinates that allow for tool compensation (cutter compensation, tool length
compensation, geometry compensation, and wear compensation), tool tip
control, or the like are not used for drawing.
7 Each control modes of the high-speed and high-precision functions (commands
for advanced preview control, AI advanced preview control, AI contour control,
AI nano contour control, high-precision contour control, AI high-precision contour
control, and AI nano high-precision contour control) cannot be turned ON in
machining simulation.
8 In simulation of a program having a sequence of contiguous small blocks,
drawing requires longer processing time, possibly causing machining time to
become longer than actual machining time.
To stop the machining simulation (tool path drawing), press [GRPOFF].

- 48 -
When machining simulation (tool path drawing) is selected, the soft keys shown below appear. Pressing
the leftmost soft key [<] or the rightmost soft key [>] changes the page of the soft key display to the
second, third, or fourth page.
(1) 1st page soft-keys

REWIND START PROCES SINGLE STOP DISP NODISP CLEAR ANIME GRPOFF
(2) 2nd page soft-keys

LARGE SMALL AUTO ROTATE ←MOVE MOVE→ ↑MOVE ↓MOVE CENTER
(3) 3rd page soft-keys

WK SET T-OFS SETING
(4) 4th page soft-keys

REWIND O LIST CHGDSP O SRCH ACTPOS MESLST
3.6.1.1 Starting and stopping simulation

REWIND START PAUSE SINGLE STOP DISP NODISP CLEAR ANIME GRPOFF
On the 1st page soft key, you can perform operations related to execution in machining simulation (tool
path).
For [SETING], see Chapter 10, "SETTING DATA," in Part II.
[REWIND] : Return to the beginning of the machining program selected for machining simulation.
[START] : Start machining simulation for the currently selected machining program.
[PAUSE] : Stop machining simulation temporarily.
[SINGLE] : Cause a single-block stop when machining simulation is performed in the continuous mode.
When machining simulation is in the stopped state, this soft key starts machining
simulation in the single-block mode.
[STOP] : End machining simulation.
[NODISP] : From the block immediately after this soft key is pressed, suppress tool path drawing.
Tool path drawing is not performed until soft key [DISP] is pressed next.
[DISP] : From the block immediately after this soft key is pressed, start drawing of the tool path.
Remark) Only necessary tool path portions can be drawn by using soft keys [DISP] and [NODISP].
[CLEAR] : Erase the tool path drawn so far. Tool path drawing immediately after this soft key is
pressed is displayed.
NOTE
By setting bit 0 (PRC) of parameter No. 27310 to 1, soft key [PAUSE] can be
changed to soft key [PROCES] (for temporarily stopping machining simulation at
a block specifying M01;).
- 49 -
3.6.1.2 Scaling, movement, and other operations

2nd page soft keys allow you to perform scaling and movement for machining simulation (tool path
drawing) as well as selection of a drawing coordinate system. These operations are the same as those in
drawing during machining. For details, see Subsection 4.3.3, “Scaling, Movement, and Other Operations
in Drawing during Machining”.
NOTE
1 Operations such as scaling, movement, and selection of a drawing coordinate
system must be performed before machining simulation (tool path drawing) is
started.
2 If a coordinate system change is specified in the program during simulation,
simulation is performed without changing the coordinate system.
3 Using the following parameter can change a reference position used in enlarging
or reducing drawn figures.
Parameter GCN (No.27310#1)
The reference position is the center of the:
Figure if GCN = 1
Window if GCN = 0
3.6.2 Machining Simulation (Animated Drawing) (FOR Series 0i-C

/16i/18i/21i)
Animated simulation of a machining operation by a machining program can be performed without
performing actual machining operation on the machine. In the case of Series 0i-F/0i-D/30i/31i/32i see
Subsection 3.6.4, “Machining Simulation (Animated) (for Series 0i-F/0i-D/Series 30i/31i/32i)”.
NOTE
1 To perform machining simulation, select the MEM mode with the mode switch on
the machine operator’s panel.
2 If a coordinate system change is specified in a program under simulation,
whether to perform simulation with the same coordinate system or a changed
coordinate system can be chosen using bit 1 (ACD) of parameter No. 27311.
For details, see Subsection 3.6.7, “Changing Workpiece Coordinate During
Machining Simulation (Animation, Tool Path Drawing)”.
3 When a program that is composed by repeated minute line segments like a
program outputted by CAD/CAM is executed, sometimes the speed of simulation
much slows down. In this case, please set tool motion unit to parameter No.
27323 by dot. When tool moves over the value of this parameter on screen, the
screen is updated and the speed will be accelerated. But, if the value of the
parameter is too large, the resolution will decrease.
4 A tool tip position in animated simulation has coordinates of values in the
workpiece coordinate system. Coordinates that allow for tool compensation
(cutter compensation, tool length compensation, geometry compensation, and
wear compensation), tool tip control, or the like are not used for drawing.
- 50 -
NOTE
for advanced preview control, AI advanced preview control, AI contour control,
AI nano contour control, high-precision contour control, AI high-precision contour
control, and AI nano high-precision contour control) cannot be turned ON in
To close the machining simulation (animated drawing) window, press [GRPOFF].

When machining simulation (animated drawing) is selected, the soft keys shown below appear. Pressing
(1) 1st page soft-keys

REWIND START PROCES SINGLE STOP INIT CUT DSP INTERF TLPATH GRPOFF
(2) 2nd page soft-keys :

LARGE SMALL AUTO REVERS ROTATE ←MOVE MOVE→ ↑MOVE ↓MOVE CENTER
(3) 3rd page soft-keys :

WK SET T-OFS SETING
(4) 4th page soft-keys :

REWIND O LIST CHGDSP N SRCH O SRCH ACTPOS PRESET MESLST
3.6.2.1 Starting and stopping machining simulation

REWIND START PROCES SINGLE STOP INIT CUT DSP INTERF TLPATH GRPOFF
On the 1st page soft keys, you can perform operations related to execution in machining simulation
(animated). The operations of [REWIND], [START], [PAUSE], [SINGLE], and [STOP] are the same as
the operations in machining simulation (tool path). For details, see Subsection 3.6.1, “Machining
Simulation (Tool Path) (for Series 0i-C/16i/18i/21i)”.
[INIT] : Initialize the machined blank used for animation.

[CUT DSP] : Lets you switch between 1/4 workpiece and entire periphery for rod blanks and drilled rod
blanks. Before starting animated simulation, be sure to switch if necessary.
[INTERF] : Lets you select whether to make an interference check during animated simulation. If an
interference check is enabled, a warning is displayed when the tool tip collides with a
workpiece during rapid traverse, and the portion collided with the tool tip is displayed in
the same color as that of the tool.
- 51 -
NOTE
With bit 0 (ITF) of parameter No. 27311, you can select continued operation (ITF
(No. 27311#0) = 0) or temporary stop (ITF (No. 27311#0) = 1) if tool interferes
with the workpiece during animation.

The soft keys on the 2nd page allow you to perform scaling and movement for machining simulation
(animated drawing) as well as selection of a drawing coordinate system. These operations are the same as
those in drawing during machining. For details, see Subsection 4.3.3, “Scaling, Movement, and Other
Operations in Drawing during Machining”.
[REVERS] : Change the viewpoint of the blank in animation to the exactly opposite position. You can
use this soft key when, during machining with a sub-spindle or machining with the C-axis
rotated, for example, you want to see animation from the opposite side.
NOTE
1 Although soft key [REVERS] may be used even during machining simulation,
switching will sometimes be delayed depending on the CNC status.
2 Operations such as scaling, movement, and selection of a drawing coordinate
system must be performed before machining simulation (tool path) is started.
3.6.3 Machining Simulation (Tool Path Drawing) (for Series

0i-F/0i-D/ 30i/31i/32i)
During machining, the tool path of another program can be drawn.
With Series 0i-F/0i-D/30i MANUAL GUIDE i, the terms related to operation and drawing are defined as
follows:
Automatic operation Operation performed for actual machining

Drawing during machining Tool path drawing during automatic operation
Background operation Virtual operation performed for simulation. This operation can be performed
simultaneously with automatic operation.
Machining simulation Machining simulation in background operation (generic term for tool path
drawing and animated simulation)
Tool path drawing Machining simulation for drawing the tool path in background operation
Animated drawing Machining simulation for animated simulation of background operation
With FANUC Series 0i-F/0i-D/30i MANUAL GUIDE i, machining simulation can be performed in the
MEM mode and EDIT mode. When each mode is selected, the machining simulation screen can be
displayed using the operation described below.
(1) MEM mode

REWIND O LIST BGEDIT N SRCH O SRCH ACTPOS PRESET MCHDRW SIMLAT
Pressing soft key [SIMLAT] displays the machining simulation (animated) screen and the soft keys for
- 52 -
(2) EDIT mode

REWIND CHGDSP LINENO SIMLAT
Pressing soft key [SIMLAT] displays the machining simulation (animated) screen and the soft keys for
NOTE
1 A program subject to simulation is placed in the background editing selection
state. So, if background editing is in progress when the soft key [SIMLAT] is
pressed, the simulation screen cannot be displayed. (The warning message
"CAN NOT OPERATE ON BG EDIT" is displayed.) Terminate background
editing then press the [SIMLAT].
2 A program selected when the soft key [SIMLAT] is pressed is the program being
selected in the foreground.
3 When machining simulation is terminated by pressing the soft key [GRPOFF],
the program selected for drawing is closed, and the program selected in the
foreground is placed in the foreground selection state.
4 If the screen display is switched to another screen during drawing, machining
simulation is terminated.
5 If the machining simulation screen is displayed again after the machining
simulation screen is terminated, the results of the previous simulation are
erased.
6 Animated simulation assumes that the tool tip is placed at the current position.
So, if the tool is inclined with the tool inclination axis, drawing is performed at a
position different from the actual tool position until the next move command is
specified for the tool tip. Coordinates that allow for tool compensation (cutter
compensation, tool length compensation, geometry compensation, and wear
compensation), tool tip control, or the like are not used for drawing.
for AI contour control I, AI contour control II) cannot be turned ON in machining
simulation.
To close the machining simulation (tool path drawing) window, press [GRPOFF].
When machining simulation (tool path drawing) is selected, the soft keys shown below appear. Pressing
(1) 1st page soft-keys :


- 53 -

WK SET T-OFS SETING
(4) 4th page soft-keys

REWIND O LIST ↑ SRCH ↓ SRCH O SRCH ACTPOS PRESET MESLST
NOTE
1 The data displayed on the machining simulation screen such as the current
position and remaining travel distance is not automatic operation state data but
is machining simulation data.
2 The machining simulation screen does not display spindle information and feed
information but displays the next travel distance only.
3 On the machining simulation screen, the remaining travel distance is 0 at all
times.
4 To stop machining simulation, press the soft key [STOP] soft key. If <RESET>
key is pressed, foreground operation is reset.
5 If a blank registration command is executed in tool path drawing during
machining simulation, the blank figure is displayed using a line (wire frame). Use
parameter No. 14773 to specify the display color of the blank figure.
6 When the simulation window is displayed, the blank figure data previously
displayed is used for drawing. However, when bit 4 (WDK) of parameter No.
27310 is set to 1, no blank figure is displayed if the simulation window is open.
7 In machining simulation performed with a multipath system, the tool path of the
displayed path only is drawn. If the displayed path is switched during path
drawing, the drawing screen is initialized. So, if the displayed path is switched
when an arbitrary figure blank is displayed, the blank is initialized to a round rod
figure enclosing the arbitrary figure.
8 If the animated simulation option is not selected, a blank figure command is
ignored, and no blank figure (wire frame) is displayed.
9 When simulation is started from a midway point, the modal state of the NC is not
always executed up to the midway point. So, if simulation is started from a
midway point, correct drawing operation may not be performed.
If you want to prevent the macro executor program from running during machining simulation, change its
processing according to the state of system variable #3010.
#3010 can take the values listed below.
System variable Value Executing State

1 Normal condition (Other than the following status)
#3010
-1 Executing machining simulation (animated or tool path drawing)

On the 2nd page soft key, you can perform operations related to execution in machining simulation (tool
path).
- 54 -
[REWIND] : Return to the beginning of the machining program selected for machining simulation.
[START] : Start machining simulation for the currently selected machining program.
[PAUSE] : Stop machining simulation temporarily.
[SINGLE] : Cause a single-block stop when machining simulation is performed in the continuous mode.
When machining simulation is in the stopped state, this soft key starts machining
simulation in the single-block mode.
[STOP] : End machining simulation.
[NODISP] : From the block immediately after this soft key is pressed, suppress tool path drawing. Tool
path drawing is not performed until soft key [DISP] is pressed next.
[DISP] : From the block immediately after this soft key is pressed, start drawing of the tool path.
[CLEAR] : Erase the tool path drawn so far. Tool path drawing immediately after this soft key is
pressed is displayed.
NOTE
By setting bit 0 (PRC) of parameter No. 27310 to 1, soft key [PAUSE] can be
changed to soft key [PROCES] (for temporarily stopping machining simulation at
a block specifying M01;).

The operations are the same as those operations performed with Series 0i -C/Series 16i/18i/21i-MODEL
B.
3.6.4 Machining Simulation (Animated Drawing) (for Series

0i-F/0i-D/ 30i/31i/32i)
During machining, animated simulation can be performed for another program.
The terms related to operation and drawing for tool path drawing described in Subsection 3.6.3,
“Machining Simulation (Tool Path Drawing) (for Series 0i-F/0i-D/30i/31i/32i)” are applicable. See
Subsection 3.6.3.
With Series 0i-F/0i-D/30i MANUAL GUIDE i, machining simulation (animated) can be performed in the
MEM mode and EDIT mode. The operation for displaying the machining simulation screen in each mode
is the same as for tool path drawing. See Section 9.4.
If you want to prevent the macro executor program from running during machining simulation, change its
processing according to the state of system variable #3010.

0 Normal condition (Other than the following status)
#3010
-1 Executing machining simulation (animated or tool path drawing)

REWIND START PAUSE SINGLE STOP INIT CUTDSP INTERF TLPATH GRPOFF
On the 1st page soft keys, you can perform operations related to execution in machining simulation
(animated drawing). The operations of [REWIND], [START], [PAUSE], [SINGLE], and [STOP] are the
same as the operations in machining simulation (tool path drawing). For details, see Subsection 3.6.3,
“Machining Simulation (Tool Path Drawing) (for Series 30i/31i/32i)”.
- 55 -
[INIT] : Initialize the machined blank used for animation.

[CUTDSP] : Lets you switch between 1/4 workpiece and entire periphery for rod blanks and drilled rod
blanks. Before starting animated simulation, be sure to switch if necessary.
[INTERF] : Lets you select whether to make an interference check during animated simulation. If an
interference check is enabled, a warning is displayed when the tool tip collides with a
workpiece during rapid traverse, and the portion collided with the tool tip is displayed in
the same color as that of the tool.
NOTE
With bit 0 (ITF) of parameter No. 27311, you can select continued operation (ITF
(No.27311#0) = 0) or temporary stop (ITF (No.27311#0) = 1) if tool interferes
with the workpiece during animation.

The operations are the same as those operations performed with Series 0i-C/16i/18i/21i-MODEL B.
3.6.5 Data Handled during Machining Simulation (for Series

0i-F/0i-D/ 30i/31i/32i)
During machining simulation (background operation), data is handled as indicated below.
(1) Parameter The same parameters are used for machining

simulation and automatic operation.
(2) Tool compensation value Data used for machining simulation differs from
Workpiece origin offset value data used for automatic operation.
Extended workpiece origin offset value
Macro variable
Fixture offset data
(3) Tool life management data These data items are not used for machining
Tool number offset data simulation.
3-dimensional error compensation data
(1) Parameter
The same parameters as used for automatic operation are used for machining simulation. However,
no parameter can be rewritten in background operation. (If an attempt is made to rewrite a parameter
by programmable parameter input (G10L52), machining simulation stops (in case that bit 3 (G10) of
parameter No.27310 is set to 0) or the G10 command is ignored (in case that bit 3 (G10) of
parameter No.27310 is set to 1).)
(2) Tool compensation value, workpiece origin offset value, extended workpiece origin offset value,
macro variable, etc.
Data used for background operation differs from data used for automatic operation. When
background operation is started, the data for automatic operation is copied to produce data for
background operation. Afterwards, the data for background operation and the data for automatic
operation are handled separately from each other. So, even when data is rewritten using G10, for
example, background operation and automatic operation do not affect each other. Note, however,
that data rewritten in background operation is erased without being reflected in the actual data
(foreground data).
(3) Tool life management data, tool number offset data, 3-dimensional error compensation data
These data items are not used for background operation. (If an attempt is made to rewrite data by
using G10, machining simulation stops (in case that bit 3 (G10) of parameter No.27310 is set to 0) or
the G10 command is ignored (in case that bit 3 (G10) of parameter No.27310 is set to 1).)
- 56 -
3.6.6 Functions Operating Differently between Machining

Simulation and Automatic Operation (for Series 0i-F/0i-D/
30i/31i/32i)
The functions listed below are major functions that operate in background operation and automatic
operation differently from each other. There are additional functions that operate differently.
(1) Custom macro
(a) Interface signal
#1000 to #1035 are always assumed to be 0 at all times.
(b) Message output
A message output with #3006 is not displayed but is ignored.
(c) Clock
#3001 and #3002 are ignored. So, note that if a command as indicated below is specified, for
example, drawing does not proceed:
#3001=1;
WHILE[#3001 LE100]DO1;
END1;
(d) Mirror image
#3007 is assumed to be 0 at all times.
(e) State during program restart operation
#3008 is assumed to be 0 at all times.
(f) External output command
BPRNT, DPRNT, POPEN, and PCLOS are ignored.
(2) Functions ignored
(a) G04 (Dwell)
(b) G20, G21 (Inch/metric conversion)
(c) Auxiliary function (M, S, T, B)
(d) G22,G23 (Stored stroke limit on/off)
(e) G10.6 (Tool retraction data setting)
(f) G10.9 (Programmable diameter/radius switching)
(g) G81.1 (Chopping)
(h) G25/G26 (Spindle speed fluctuation detection on/off)
(3) Functions that operate differently in part
(a) G28 (automatic reference position return) is drawn up to a midway point.
(b) G29 (automatic return from the reference position) is drawn from a midway point.
(c) G27 (reference position return check) does not make a reference position return check.
(d) Stored stroke limit checks are not made.
(e) G31 (skip function), and G31.1, G31.2, and G31.3 (multi-step skip) are drawn up to a specified
position, regardless of the skip signal.
(f) G60 (single direction positioning) is drawn directly up to a specified position at all times even
when the positioning direction is reverse.
3.6.6.1 Functions that cannot be used for machining simulation

(1) Functions that operate differently in background drawing
When the functions below are specified, the operations described below are performed.
G02.2/G03.2 : Involute interpolation
Circular interpolation is performed.
G06.1 : Spline interpolation
Linear interpolation is performed.
When the functions below are specified, the operations described below are performed.
G02.1/G03.1 : Circular threading B
Circular interpolation is performed. No rotation axis can be drawn.
- 57 -
G02.3/G03.3 : Exponential interpolation

Linear interpolation is performed for a straight line only.
G07 : Hypothetical axis interpolation
Circular interpolation is performed.
(2) Functions that disable background drawing

When the functions below are specified, an alarm (PS1080 (DUPLICATE DEVICE SUB
PROGRAM CALL)) is output, and background drawing stops.
G10 : Data setting Part of the function can be used.
M198 : External sub program call
(3) It is not possible to execute machining simulation, if the P-CODE variables #30000 and up are used
in the execution macro function of macro executor function.
3.6.6.2 Functions that can be used for machining simulation (M

series)
G00 : Positioning
G01 : Linear interpolation
G02/G03 : Circular interpolation
However, helical interpolation with the instruction axis other than basic three axes
cannot be drawn.
G17/G18/G19 : Plane selection
G33 : Threading (Drawn as linear interpolation)
G40/G41/G42 : Cutter compensation / Cancel
G52 : Local coordinate system
G53 : Machine coordinate system select
G54 to G59 : Workpiece coordinate system select
G54.1 : Extended workpiece coordinate system select
G65 : Macro call
G68/G69 : Coordinate system rotation, 3-dimensional coordinate conversion / Cancel
G90/G91 : Absolute/incremental programming
G92 : Workpiece coordinate system change
G92.1 : Workpiece coordinate system preset
G94 : Feed per minute
G95 : Feed per revolution
G96/G97 : Constant surface speed control / Cancel
M98 : Sub program call
G07.1 : Cylindrical interpolation
G12.1 : Polar coordinate interpolation
3.6.7 Changing Workpiece Coordinate During Machining

Simulation (Animation, Tool Path Drawing)
By setting parameter No.27311#1(ACD) to 1, when work coordinate system(G50(T system), G92(M
system), G54-G59) is changed during machining simulation(animation or tool path drawing), the drawing
is performed on the changed work coordinate system.
In machining simulation, work coordinate system(G50(T system), G92(M system), G54-G59) when
G1900-G1907 (drawing definition of blank form block) or G1998(Spindle definition block for drawing)
is specified is drawing coordinate system. The origin of the drawing coordinate system is the origin
specified by G1900-G1907.
In the path drawing during machining, the drawing is performed without changing the coordinate system.
- 58 -
NOTE
1 Even if the coordinate system is changed in machining simulation, the axis
drawing of coordinate system is not changed.
2 Drawing of machining simulation is performed on the premise that the top point
of tool (or the center point of tool diameter) is on a commanded point at the
workpiece coordinate system. So, there are some case where machining
simulation is different from the movement of real machining before a position
command after slanting a tool.
3 Drawing is not performed in a coordinate system where tool compensation (such
as cutter compensation, tool length compensation, geometry compensation and
wear compensation), tool nose control, and so forth are considered.
4 The rotary center of rotary axis(Cs axis) is on the origin of drawing coordinate
specified by drawing definition of blank form block. In case of column blank,
rotary axis rotates about center of the diameter. In case of rectangular solid
blank, rotary axis rotates about the axis specified in parameter No.27334.
5 If 3-dimentional coordinate conversion command is performed in slanting a tool,
the slanted angle of angular axis is made ineffective and a tool is drawn on the
slant of the coordinate system specified by 3-dimentional coordinate conversion
command.
6 If drawing of machining simulation is performed from an intermediate point of the
program, it is performed as the continuous-state workpiece coordinate system is
same as one of the last simulation.
7 Machining simulation is not available in case that C is not “0” on G12.1.
3.6.8 Machining Simulation Screen on 15 inch LCD (Tool Path)

(for Series 30i/31i/32i, Series 0i-F)
In 15-inch LCD, tool path can be drawn by full screen display.
Software BY70 (Series 30i/31i/32i-A) after version 26, Software BX71 (Series 30i/31i/32i-B) and BX33
(Series 0i-F) after version 01 are available.
3.6.8.1 Operations at machining simulation screen

(1) Press [CHSIZE] soft key on the standard mode of the tool path screen.
(2) The full screen mode of tool path is displayed. When the machining simulation stops and [CHSIZE]
soft key is pressed, the tool path is erased.
(3) When the [CHSIZE] soft key is pressed on the full screen mode of the tool path screen, the standard
mode of the tool path screen is displayed.
(4) When the [CHSIZE] soft key is pressed during executing simulation, a warning message
‘EXECUTING OPERATION’ is displayed.
3.6.8.2 Operations at drawing during machining screen

(1) In case of the operation at drawing during machining screen, it is same with the case of ‘3.6.8.1
Operation at machining simulation screen ’.
(2) When the [CHSIZE] soft key is pressed during drawing tool path, the screen is displayed as follows.
i) The size of the drawing window changes and drawn tool paths are erased.
ii) Tool paths executed after pressing the [CHSIZE] soft key are drawn in the screen.
- 59 -
3.7 CHECK Y AXIS VALUE AT THE MACHINING SIMULATION

OF THE TURNING CYCLE
If turning cycle machining simulation is started when Y axis position is not zero, then the machining
simulation stops and the warning message “Y≠0:TURN CYCLE” is displayed.
This function is enabled when the parameter No.27311#4 is set to 1.
3.8 A WARNING MESSAGE WHEN A RESIDUAL CUTTING

PART REMAINS
When a residual cutting part remains in turning cycle, a warning message ”CUTTING RESIDUE WILL
OCCUR” is displayed.
3.9 MACHINING SIMULATION SPEED CHANGE FUNCTION

It is possible to change execution speed of the machining simulation.
3.9.1 Operation on Machining Simulation Screen

1) In the machining simulation screen, it is possible to change the execution speed of the machining
simulation by the soft keys [SPEED +] and [SPEED -].
2) Up or down cursor keys allow to change the execution speed during the machining simulation
execution.
3) The yellow indicator displayed on top of the simulation window represents the actual level of
simulation speed.
NOTE
Set the execution speed of machining simulation by the following parameters.
27335 Number of speed steps for the machining simulation speed level
[Data type] Byte
[Path attribute] Common to all paths
[Valid data range] 0-9
[Standard value] 0
The number of speed steps for the machining simulation speed level can be specified
between 2 and 9.
Example) If you want to have 3 levels of simulation speed , then set parameter No.27335
to 3.
NOTE
If 0, 1, or a negative value is set in parameter No.27335, then the
function is disabled. If a value bigger than nine is set in parameter
No.27335, then it is equivalent to set parameter No.27335 to 9.
27336 Waiting time betw een blocks at low est speed of simulation
[Data type] Byte
[Unit of data] 8msec
[Standard value] 0
- 60 -
Waiting time between each block at the lowest speed of simulation. A value from 1
(8msec) to 127 (1016msec) can be specified as the waiting time between blocks at the
lowest speed
NOTE
When 0 or a negative value is set in parameter No.27336 then it is
equivalent to set parameter No.27336 to 64(512msc).
If the machining simulation is executed at the highest speed, then the waiting time
between blocks becomes “0”. It is the same execution speed as if the function is disabled.
If the machining simulation is executed at the lowest speed, then the waiting time
becomes blocks specified by the parameter No.27336.
If the machining simulation is executed in an interval between the minimum and the
maximum speed, then the waiting time is adjusted according to the selected speed step.
NOTE
If the setting value of the parameter No.27335 is bigger than the
value of the parameter No.27336, then the number of speed steps
for the machining simulation speed level is equivalent to be the
same value with the setting in No.27336.
- 61 -
3.10 BLANK CUTOUT DISPLAY IN ANIMATED SIMULATION

The beginning angle of the blank cutout display can be changed in machining animated simulation.
3.10.1 Operation
By pressing [CUTDSP] soft key the beginning angle of the blank cutout display can be changed
according to following order.
0 degree -> 90 degree -> 180 degree -> 270 degree->OFF
Cutout Display OFF
Start Angle for Cutout Display Start Angle for Cutout Display
270 degree 0 degree
Start Angle for Cutout Display Start Angle for Cutout Display
180 degree 90 degree
Beginning angle of the blank cutout and the display position is kept until CNC switching off.
3.10.2 Available Blank Figures for Blank Cutout Display

This function can be used with following blank figures.
Blank Figure G code

CYLINDER BLANK FIGURE (around Z-axis) G1900
CYLINDER BLANK FIGURE (around X-axis) G1906
CYLINDER BLANK FIGURE (around Y-axis) G1756
HOLLOW CYLINDER BLANK FIGURE (around Z-axis) G1901
HOLLOW CYLINDER BLANK FIGURE (around X-axis) G1907
HOLLOW CYLINDER BLANK FIGURE (around Y-axis) G1757
FREE CONTOUR CYLINDER BLANK FIGURE (around Z-axis) G1970
FREE CONTOUR CYLINDER BLANK FIGURE (around X-axis) G1790
FREE CONTOUR CYLINDER BLANK FIGURE (around Y-axis) G1780
- 62 -
Blank Figure G code

POLYGON BLANK FIGURE (around Z-axis) G1903
POLYGON BLANK FIGURE (around Y-axis) G1758
HOLLOW POLYGON BLANK FIGURE (around Z-axis) G1904
HOLLOW POLYGON BLANK FIGURE (around Y-axis) G1759
3.11 DISPLAYING MACHINING TIME

During machining simulation, the logical machining time of each block is calculated from feedrate and
distance for movement. And the result is displayed.
3.11.1 Format of Machining Time Data

Machining time data is inserted in program and it is conserved.
The place when the data are inserted is in the comment that is next to O number.
The format is “,T_,A_”. “,T_” is cutting time data and “,A_” is non-cutting time data.
3.11.2 Operation for Inserting Machining Time

The following soft keys are displayed on MEM mode after soft key [SIMLAT] is pushed.
REWIND START PAUSE SINGLE STOP INIT CUTDSP INTERF TLPATH GRPOFF
WK SET T-OFS
REWIND O LIST O SRCH ACTPOS INSERT
After soft key [START] is pushed and machining simulation is started, the machining time is
calculated and it is kept in the memory temporarily. After that, the color of soft key [INSERT] is
changed. If soft key [INSERT] is pushed in this state, the message “MACHINE TIME DATA IS
INSERTED. OK?” is displayed. Then, if soft key [YES] is selected, the machining time data are
inserted to the end of comment.
NOTE
1 Don’t operate the machine during inserting machining time data.
2 When the machining time isn’t kept in the memory, the machining time can’t be
inserted.
3 When the program has been protected, the machining time can’t be inserted.
4 The machining time can’t be inserted during operation.
5 All paths must be on MEM mode to insert machining time data. When at least
one path isn’t on MEM mode, the machining time can’t be inserted.
6 Even if all path is on MEM mode, if at least one path is on background editing,
machining time data can’t be inserted.
- 63 -
NOTE
7 When the machining time data are inserted on one path, the machining time
data are inserted on other paths too. But when machining simulation for each
path is executed, the machining time data are inserted on only the path in which
the machining simulation is executed.
3.11.3 Display Machining Time

The following soft keys are displayed after soft key [O LIST] is pushed.
NEW COPY DELETE EDTCOM SEARCH M CARD ALLDEL SRTORD OPEN CLOSE
TIME
If soft key [TIME] is pushed, the indication of modified date and program size are changed to machining
time as follows.
If soft key [TIME] is pushed again, modified date is displayed again.
NOTE
1 The execution time of M98, M99, and custom macro call M codes is not included
in the machining time.
2 The execution time of T and S codes used as arguments in custom macro calls
is not included in the machining time either.
3 The execution time of M00, M01, and M30 is added to the machining time.
4 The parameters about displaying machining time are from 27390 to 27392.
5 The execution time of commands only used for drawing is added to the
machining time.
3.12 LARGE WINDOW DISPLAY OF MACHINING SIMULATION

(ANIMATED DRAWING) (For Series 30i/31i/32i–B only)
Large window display of machining simulation (animated drawing) is available.
NOTE
1 One of the following hardware is necessary to use this function.
(1) CNC with 15”color LCD or 10”color LCD B
(2) CNC with Personal computer function with Windows XP
(3) CNC is connected to Personal computer with CNC display screen function.
2 Setting parameter No.27314#7=1 is necessary to use this function, in addition to
satisfying 1.
3.12.1 Changing Window Size of Machining Simulation (Animated

Drawing)
In order to change window size of machining simulation (animated drawing), press soft key [CHSIZE].
At this time, the scale magnification for drawing is not changed.
- 64 -
(Changing to large window from standard window)

SPEED－ SPEED+ CHSIZE WK SET T-OFS TOOL
(Changing to normal window from standard window)

SPEED－ SPEED＋ CHSIZE
When the machining simulation stops and soft key [CHSIZE] is pressed, the drawing result is erased.
When the soft key [CHSIZE] is pressed during executing simulation, a warning message ‘EXECUTING
OPERATION’ is displayed.
3.12.2 Restrictions on Large Window Display

(1) Soft key [O LIST]、[INSERT]、[WK SET]、[T-OFS]、[TOOL] are not available.
(2) The following information is not displayed.
- Distance to go
- Next distance
- Spindle information
- Feed information
- Program
3.13 2 WINDOWS MACHINING SIMULATION

(For only Series 0i-F/30i/31i/32i–B)
2 windows display of machining simulation is available.
NOTE
1 One of the following hardware is necessary to use this function.
(1) CNC with 15”color LCD
2 Setting parameter No.27314#3=1 and No.27314#4, #5 is necessary to use this
function, in addition to satisfying 1. About the details of setting of the
No.27314#4, #5, refer to the “A.5.12.2” of Appendix (For Machine Tool Builder).
3.13.1 Changing Window of Machining Simulation

In order to change the number of windows of machining simulation, press soft key [MLTDRW].
(Change from 1 window display to 2 windows display)

SPEED－ SPEED+ CHSIZE WK SET T-OFS TOOL MLTDRW
- 65 -
(Change from 2 windows display to 1 window display)

SPEED－ SPEED＋ WINSEL WK SET T OFS TOOL MLTDRW
When the machining simulation stops and soft key [MLTDRW] is pressed, the drawing result is erased.
When the soft key [MLTDRW] is pressed during executing machining simulation, a warning message
‘EXECUTING OPERATION’ is displayed.
3.13.2 Selecting Active Window

An active window is selected by soft key [WINSEL].
SPEED－ SPEED＋ WINSEL WK SET T OFS TOOL MLTDRW
3.13.3 Restrictions on 2 Windows Display

(1) Soft key [INSERT], [CHSIZE] are not available.
(2) The program is not displayed.
3.14 NOTES
3.14.1 Notes on Machining Simulation

(Notes for Series 0i-F/0i-D/30i/31i/32i)
Machining simulation does not support the function “Mirror Image for Double Turret”. Therefore, in case
of executing machining simulation with activating the function, the mirror image is ignored and the
display position of X-axis is not changed.
(Notes for Series 0i-C/16i/18i/21i)

During the execution of machining simulation, the system is automatically placed in the machine locked
state. During the execution of drawing, no machine control signals are output by auxiliary and other
functions, but control signals such as "OP," "STL," "SPL," "RST," and "AL" may be output. During the
execution of drawing, the drawing-in-progress signal "CKGRP," shown below, is output. If the control
signals that may be output during the execution of drawing affect machine control, the PMC Ladder
program must be modified so that these signals are ignored, by using the drawing-in-progress signal.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F62 CKGRP
CKGRP Indicates that a dynamic graphics display is being drawn for check purposes.
In addition, if you want to prevent the macro executor program from running during machining simulation,
change its processing according to the state of system variable #3010.
- 66 -

0 Normal condition (other than the following status)
#3010 1 Executing automatic operation (including drawing during machining)
4 Executing machining simulation (animated or tool path drawing)
When machining simulation for a program containing a 3- dimensional coordinate

conversion command is being performed, increasing the dry run speed (for example,
selecting a rapid traverse rate) can speed the execution.
3.14.2 Tool size in Machining Simulation

Tool in animated drawing is drawn within about quarter of the graphic window. Therefore, if the scale
magnification for machining simulation is large, a part of the tool might not be displayed.
- 67 -
4.PROGRAM OPERATION BASIC SCREEN AND OPERATION B-63874EN/11
4 PROGRAM OPERATION
When the MEM mode is selected with the machine operator’s panel, the soft keys shown below appear on
the MANUAL GUIDE i screen. Pressing the leftmost soft key [<] or the rightmost soft key [>] changes
the page of the soft key display to the second page.
NC CNV P TYPE Q TYPE WK SET T-OFS SETING
(Note) (Note)
For soft key [SETING], see Section 2.15, "REGISTERING FIXED FORM SENTENCES".
For soft key [WK SET], see Chapter 7, "SETTING THE WORKPIECE COORDINATE DATA".
For soft key [T-OFS], see Chapter 8, "SETTINGS RELATED TO TOOLS".
NOTE
When the optional function of PROGRAM RE-START, the soft keys [P TYPE]
and [Q TYPE] are displayed on the screen.
4.1 SELECTING A PROGRAM FOR OPERATION

When you enter the program number you want to select by using numeric keys then press soft key [O
SRCH], the program with the program number is selected and displayed in the program window.
By pressing soft key [O SRCH] without entering any key, the next program is selected.
NOTE
If the parameter OSR is set to “1”, pressing soft key [O SRCH] without entering
any data, the next program is not selected.
The No. of the parameter OSR is as follows by the CNC type.
Series16i/18i/21i /0i-C：No.3202#3
Series30i/31i/32i/0i-F/0i-D：No.14853#2
4.2 REWINDING A PROGRAM

By pressing soft key [REWIND], you can return to the beginning of a selected program.
- 68 -
B-63874EN/11 BASIC SCREEN AND OPERATION 4.PROGRAM OPERATION
4.3 DISPLAYING THE DRAWING-DURING-MACHINING

By pressing soft key [MCHDRW], the drawing-during-machining window can be displayed. Press soft
key [GRPOFF] to close the drawing-during-machining window.
While a machining operation is being performed on the machine, the tool path can be drawn. This
function is available also during machine lock and dry run operation.
NOTE
1 To perform drawing during machining, open the window for drawing during
machining by pressing soft key [GRP ON] before starting machining operation.
2 If a coordinate system change is specified in the program during drawing,
drawing is performed without changing the coordinate system.
3 In the drawing during machining, when the workpiece specifying block is
executed, form of a workpiece is drawn in form of wire frame. Drawing color of
the workpiece can be specified by the parameter No.14773.
4 When a simulation window is opened, a blank figure drawing at the last drawing
is displayed. However, if bit 4 (WOK) of parameter No. 27310 is set to 1, no
blank figure is displayed when a simulation window is opened.
5 Tool path drawing with a multi-path system is performed only at the selected
path for displaying. And a simulation window is initialized if the selected path for
displaying is changed. So if the selected path for displaying is changed in
displaying a free blank figure, the drawing is initialized for a column figure which
encloses it.
6 Path drawing is performed using values in the workpiece coordinate system.
Coordinates that allow for tool compensation (cutter compensation, tool length
compensation, geometry compensation, and wear compensation), tool tip
control, or the like are not used for drawing.
7 In Graphic display screen of CNC, G4-digit cycle for MANUAL GUIDE i cannot
be executed. In case of the program that G4-digit cycle is contained, use surely
the drawing-during-machining screen of MANUAL GUIDE i.
When drawing during machining (tool path) is selected, the soft keys shown below appear. Pressing the
leftmost soft key [<] or the rightmost soft key [>] changes the page of the soft key display to the second
or third page.
(1) 1st page soft-keys :

REWIND O LIST CHGDSP N SRCH O SRCH ACTPOS PRESET MESLST GRPOFF


DISP NODISP CLEAR WK SET T-OFS SETING
- 69 -
4.3.1 Program Selection Operation and Other Operations in

Drawing during Machining
REWIND O LIST CHGDSP N SRCH O SRCH ACTPOS PRESET MESLST GRPOFF
1st page Soft keys are used for operations such as selection of a program. These key operations are the
same as the operations in the MEM mode, so see the sections listed below.
To close the window for drawing during machining and stop the mode for drawing during machining,
press soft key [GRPOFF].
Section 4.1, “SELECTING A PROGRAM FOR OPERATION”

Section 4.2, “REWINDING A PROGRAM”
Section 4.4, “CHANGING THE CURRENT POSITION DISPLAY”
Section 4.5, “PRESETTING RELATIVE COORDINATES”
Section 4.6, “NEXT-BLOCK DISPLAY FUNCTION”
4.3.2 Selecting Whether to Display the Tool Path or Not in Drawing

during Machining
DISP NODISP CLEAR WK SET T-OFS SETING
2nd page soft keys mainly allow you to select whether to display the tool path or not.
For soft key [SETING], see Section 2.15, "REGISTERING FIXED FORM SENTENCES".
[NODISP] : As soon as this soft key is pressed, drawing of the tool path is stopped. The tool path is not
drawn until soft key [DISP] is pressed next.
[DISP] : As soon as this soft key is pressed, drawing of the tool path is started.
[CLEAR] : Erase the tool path drawn so far. Immediately after this soft key is pressed, tool path
drawing is displayed.
4.3.3 Scaling, Movement, and Other Operations in Drawing during

Machining
3rd soft keys allow you to perform scaling and movement of a tool path drawing as well as selection of a
drawing coordinate system.
NOTE
The operations explained below must be performed before tool path drawing is
started.
(1) Scaling and movement

[LARGE] : Increase the drawing magnification.
[SMALL] : Decrease the drawing magnification
[AUTO] : When the blank form block for animation has been input to the machining program,
perform automatic scaling so that the blank figure is fit in the window.
- 70 -
NOTE
If a blank form for animation has been entered, automatic scaling is performed
when the corresponding block is executed for the first time.
[←MOVE] : Move the viewpoint leftward. As a result, the tool path drawn moves rightward.
[MOVE→] : Move the viewpoint leftward. As a result, the tool path drawn moves leftward.
[↑MOVE] : Move the viewpoint upward. As a result, the tool path drawn moves downward.
[↓MOVE] : Move the viewpoint downward. As a result, the tool path drawn moves upward.
[CENTER] : Set the center of the tool path to the center of the window.
(2) Selecting a drawing coordinate system

[ROTATE] : Display the soft keys shown below for selecting the drawing coordinate system. A window
for describing drawing coordinate systems is also displayed.
XY ZY YZ XZ ZX ISO XY ISO XY ISO YZ OK CANCEL
↑ ↓ ← → OK CANCEL
[XY] : Select the XY plane.

[ZY] : Select the ZY plane.
[YZ] : Select the YZ plane.
[XZ] : Select the XZ plane.
[ZX] : Select the ZX plane.
[ISO XY] : Select an equiangular coordinate system with the positive direction of the Z-axis facing up.
[ISO XY] : Select an equiangular coordinate system with the positive direction of the Z-axis facing up.
But, the view point is opposed to the above one.
[ISO YZ] : Select an equiangular coordinate system with the positive direction of the X-axis facing up.
[OK] : Perform drawing in the coordinate system selected by one of the above soft keys.
[CANCEL] : Cancel the coordinate system selected by one of the above soft keys and use the original
coordinate system for drawing.
[↑] : Make a counterclockwise rotation by selecting the right direction viewed when you face
the screen as the center axis.
[↓] : Make a clockwise rotation by selecting the right direction viewed when you face the screen
as the center axis.
[←] : Make a counterclockwise rotation by selecting the upward direction viewed when you face
the screen as the center axis.
[→] : Make a clockwise rotation by selecting the upward direction viewed when you face the
screen as the center axis.
[ ] : Make a clockwise rotation by selecting the direction toward you viewed when you face the
screen as the center axis.
[ ] : Make a counterclockwise rotation by selecting the direction toward you viewed when you
face the screen as the center axis.
NOTE
A rotation is made according to the unit specified in parameter No. 14716.
- 71 -
4.4 CHANGING THE CURRENT POSITION DISPLAY

By pressing soft key [ACTPOS], the current position display in the status display window in the upper
part of the screen changes in the sequence "ACTUAL POS. (ABS)" → "ACTUAL POS. (RELATIVE)"
→ "ACTUAL POS. (MACHINE)"
If the manual handle interrupt option function is attached, the position display changes in the sequence
"ACTUAL POS. (ABS)" → "ACTUAL POS. (RELATIVE)" → "ACTUAL POS. (MACHINE)" →
“HANDLE INTER.(INPUT)” → “HANDLE INTER.(OUTPUT)”
4.5 PRESETTING RELATIVE COORDINATES

By pressing soft key [PRESET], a relative coordinates presetting window appears, allowing you to preset
relative coordinates.
When the relative coordinates presetting window is displayed, the following soft keys are displayed:
ORIGIN ALL 0 ACTPOS ALTER CANCEL
[ORIGIN] : Set the axis selected with the cursor keys to "0." At this time, no relative coordinates are
preset.
[ALL 0] : Set all axes to "0." At this time, no relative coordinates are preset.
Remark) You can set a desired coordinate value for an axis selected by the cursor by entering the
value you want to preset by using numeric keys then pressing the <INPUT> key. At this
time, as described above, the relative coordinates are not yet preset.
[ACTPOS] : Change the current position display in the status display window in the upper part of the
screen in the sequence "ACTUAL POS. (ABS)" → "ACTUAL POS. (RELATIVE)" →
"ACTUAL POS. (MACHINE)."If the manual handle interrupt option function is attached,
the position display changes in the sequence "ACTUAL POS. (ABS)" → "ACTUAL POS.
(RELATIVE)" → "ACTUAL POS. (MACHINE)" → “HANDLE INTER.(INPUT)” →
“HANDLE INTER.(OUTPUT)”
[ALTER] : Preset the relative coordinates to coordinate values set by the above operation. This soft
key also closes the relative coordinates presetting window.
[CANCEL] : Cancel presetting of coordinates and just close the window.
4.6 NEXT-BLOCK DISPLAY FUNCTION

In the MEM mode or MDI mode, the travel distance data of the block to be executed next is displayed in
status indicator window.
In DRAWING DURING MACHINING screen in MEM mode, the display can be chose between
spindle/feedrate information and distance data of the block to be executed next by a soft key [CHGDSP]
- 72 -
NOTE
1 n Series 0i-C/16i/18i/21i, set a parameter No.3106#2 to 1 in order to display
distance data of the block to be executed next for SINGLE BLOCK
OPERATION.
2 In Series 0i-F/0i-D/30i/31i/32i, set a parameter No.3106#2 to 0. The distance
data of the block to be executed next for SINGLE BLOCK OPERATION is
displayed as follows.
- While the block to be executed next is buffered, the distance data of the block
is displayed.
- While the block to be executed next is not buffered, the distance data of the
current block is displayed.
(1) In case of machining simulation nor path drawing during actual machining is not executed
The travel distance data of the next block is automatically displayed.
(2) In case of machining simulation or path drawing during actual machining is executed
Usually, the travel distance of the next block is not displayed.
Pressing soft key [CHGDSP] erases the display of spindle and actual feedrate information and displays
the travel distance data of the next block. Pressing soft key [CHGDSP] again returns the screen to the
display of spindle and actual feedrate information.
4.7 FEEDRATE DISPLAY

The actual feedrate is displayed during machining operation.
NOTE
In MANUAL GUIDE i screen, the digits in the decimal part of actual feedrate are
not displayed in feed per revolution mode, even if the following parameter is set.
Therefore, please set the following parameter to be 0.
No.3135 Number of decimal places in actual feedrate display

(Series 0i-F/0i-D/30i/31i/32i only)
4.8 DISPLAYING 3-DIMENSIONAL INTERFERENCE CHECK

STATUS (FOR Series 0i-F/30i/31i/32i ONLY)
The 3-dimensional interference check status is displayed at the bottom left corner of the MANUAL
GUIDE i screen.
4.9 DISPLAYING THE ROTATION SPEED OF A SERVO

MOTOR-DRIVEN MILLING AXIS
If an arbitrary servo motor-driven axis is used as a milling axis, its actual rotation speed can be displayed.
This function is unavailable on the Series 0i-C.
(1) The “SPINDLE” is displayed as explained below according to the setting of the parameter MSD
(No.14836#1), which is intended to specify whether to enable this function, and the setting of the
milling axis rotation speed display switching signal SDPC<Gn038#5>.
<1> If MSD (No.14836#1) = 1 and SDPC<Gn038#5> = ON:
• Actual rotation sped, load meter, and load ratio (%) of the milling axis
- 73 -
<2> If MSD (No.14836#1) = 0 or SDPC<Gn038#5> = OFF:

• Actual rotation speed, load meter, and load ratio (%) of the spindle motor axis (hereafter
called the spindle)
(2) The display of the portion A in the following figure varies as described below according to which is
displayed, the actual rotation speed of the spindle or that of the milling axis.
<1> If the actual rotation speed of the spindle is displayed, the spindle number is also displayed.
<2> If the actual rotation speed of the milling axis is displayed, a character specified in the milling
axis suffix parameter (No.14868) is also displayed.
A
SPINDLE SM
S 0
0%
Actual milling axis rotation speed, load meter, and load ratio are displayed.
Milling axis actual rotation speed display box
NOTE
This function is unavailable on the Series 0i-C.
4.9.1 Conditions for Using This Function

Using this function requires the following settings.
(1) Parameter
MSD (No.14836#1) = 1
(2) Signal
Actual milling axis rotation speed display switching signal SDPC<Gn038#5> = ON
This signal is provided for each path separately. For multipath applications, turn on the signal for a
path for which the milling axis is specified.
• Path 1: G0038#5
• Path 2: G1038#5
• Path 3: G2038#5
4.9.2 About the “SPINDLE” Display Block
4.9.2.1 Path 1 display window (10.4-inch screen)

(1) If this function is enabled and the milling axis rotation speed display switching signal is ON
(parameter MSD (No.14836#1) = 1 and signal SDPC<Gn038#5> = 1):
In the path 1 display window (10.4-inch screen), the “SPINDLE” display block shows the actual
rotation speed, load meter, load ratio (%), and suffix of the milling axis as shown below.
The following information is hidden.
• Spindle number
• Constant surface speed control icon
• Load meter
• Load ratio
- 74 -
Milling axis suffix is displayed.
SPINDLE SM
S 0
0%
Actual milling axis rotation speed, load meter, and load ratio are displayed.
Milling axis actual rotation speed display box
(a) Displaying the actual rotation speed of the milling axis when more than one spindle is available
Turning on the milling axis rotation speed display switching signal SDPC <Gn038#5> to
request to display the actual rotation speed of the milling axis when the actual rotation speed of
spindle No. n is currently being displayed causes the actual rotation speed of the milling axis to
appear and overwrite the actual rotation speed of the spindle as shown above.
(2) If this function is enabled and the milling axis rotation speed display switching signal is OFF
(parameter MSD (No.14836#1) = 1 and signal SDPC <Gn038#5> = 0):
(a) If a spindle number is selected (signals PC3SLC <Gn026#0> and PC2SLC <Gn028#7>):
In the path 1 display window (10.4-inch screen):
The “SPINDLE” display block shows the following information about the selected spindle.
• Actual rotation speed
• Load meter
• Load ratio (%)
• Spindle number
(b) If no spindle number is selected (signals PC3SLC <Gn026#0> = 0 and PC2SLC <Gn028#7> =
0):
In the path 1 display window (10.4-inch screen), the “SPINDLE” display block shows the
following information about spindle 1.
• Load meter
• Load ratio (%)
• Spindle number (that is, 1)
(3) If this function is disabled and the milling axis rotation speed display switching signal is ON
The same information as stated in item (2) is displayed.
(4) If this function is disabled and the milling axis rotation speed display switching signal is OFF
4.9.2.2 Path 1 display window (15-inch screen)

(1) If this function is enabled (parameter MSD (No.14836#1) = 1):
In the path 1 display window (15-inch screen), the following information is displayed at the same
time.
• Actual spindle and milling axis rotation speed
• Load meter
- 75 -
• Load ratio (%)

• Expanded spindle name (or spindle suffix)
• Milling axis suffix
The following information is hidden.
• Constant surface speed control icon
• Load meter
• Load ratio
Milling axis suffix is displayed. Actual milling axis rotation speed
is displayed.
SM 0
0%
Milling axis load meter and load ratio are displayed.
Milling axis information in the “SPINDLE” display (enlarged view)
4.9.2.3 Simultaneous multipath display window (10.4-inch screen)

In the simultaneous multipath display window (10.4-inch screen), the ”SPINDLE” display block of
each path shows the actual rotation speed of the milling axis.
The spindle number is hidden, and the milling axis suffix is shown.
In the simultaneous multipath display window (10.4-inch screen), the “SPINDLE” display
block shows the following information about the selected spindle.
• Spindle number
(b) If no spindle number is selected (signal PC3SLC <Gn026#0> = 0 and signal PC2SLC
<Gn028#7> = 0):
In the simultaneous multipath display window (10.4-inch screen), the “SPINDLE” display
block shows the following information about spindle 1.
• Spindle number (that is, 1)
- 76 -
4.9.2.4 Simultaneous multipath display window (15-inch screen)

In the simultaneous multipath display window (15-inch screen), the “SPINDLE” display block for
each path shows the actual rotation speed and suffix of the milling axis in the place shown below.
(a) Two-path environment

SPINDLE SM
S 0
Actual milling axis rotation speed is displayed.
“SPINDLE” display block (enlarged) in the simultaneous multipath display window
(parameter MSD (No.14836#1) = 1 and signal SDPC <Gn038#5>= 0):
In the simultaneous multipath display window (15-inch screen), the “SPINDLE” display block
shows the following information about the spindle selected for each path.
Expanded spindle name for a selected spindle is displayed.
SPINDLE S2
S 0
“SPINDLE” display block in the simultaneous multipath display window
(b) If no spindle number is selected (signals PC3SLC <Gn026#0> = 0 and PC2SLC <Gn028#7> =
0):
In the simultaneous multipath display window (15-inch screen), the “SPINDLE” display block
shows the following information about spindle 1 for each path.
- 77 -

(10.4-inch screen)
The “SPINDLE” block shows the following information no matter whether the milling axis display
function is enabled.
• The actual rotation speed, load meter, and load ratio are displayed always as “0”.
• The spindle number and milling axis suffixes are hidden.

(15-inch screen)
(1) If this function is enabled (parameter MSD (No.14836#1) = 1):
The “SPINDLE” display block shows the following information always as “0”.
• Actual spindle and milling axis rotation speed
• Load meter
• Load ratio
(2) If this function is disabled (parameter MSD (No.14836#1) = 0):
The “SPINDLE” display block shows the following information always as “0”.
• Actual spindle rotation speed
• Load meter
• Load ratio
4.9.2.7 Re-threading window

In the re-threading window, the “SPINDLE” display block shows the actual rotation speed of the
milling axis as shown below.
The spindle number is hidden, and the milling axis suffix is shown.
SPINDLE SM
S 0
“SPINDLE” display block (enlarged) in the re-threading window
In the re-threading window, the “SPINDLE” display block shows the following information
about the selected spindle.
• Load meter
• Load ratio (%)
• Spindle number (of the selected spindle)
(b) If no spindle number is selected (signal PC3SLC <Gn026#0> = 0 and signal PC2SLC
<Gn028#7> = 0):
- 78 -
In the re-threading window, the “SPINDLE” display block shows the following information
about spindle 1,
• Actual rotation speed (of spindle 1)
• Load meter
• Load ratio (%)
• Spindle number (of spindle 1)
4.9.3 “CURRENT POSITION” Display Block

Whether to show the current position of the milling axis in the following target windows depends on the
parameter NDPx (No.3115#0) and the signal NPOSn <Gn198>.
(To show)
For the target axis, set up parameter NDPx (No.3115#0) = 0 and turn off the signal NPOSn
<Gn198>.
(To hide)
For the target axis, set up parameter NDPx (No.3115#0) = 1 or turn on the signal NPOSn <Gn198>.
(1) Target windows (common to both 10.4- and 15-inch screens)

(a) One-path display window
(b) Simultaneous multipath display window (non-EDIT modes)
(c) Drawing-during-machining window
(d) Machining simulation window
(e) NC statement conversion window
(f) Re-threading window
4.9.4 “FEED” Display Block

Whether to show the load meter and load ratio (%) of the milling axis in the following target window
depends on the parameter NDPx (No.3115#0) and the signal NPOSn <Gn198>.
(To show) For the target axis, set up parameter NDPx (No.3115#0) = 0 and turn off the signal NPOSn
<Gn198>.
(To hide) For the target axis, set up parameter NDPx (No.3115#0) = 1 or turn on the signal NPOSn
<Gn198>.
(1) Target windows (15-inch screen only)

(a) One-path display window
(b) Drawing-during-machining window
(c) Machining simulation window
(d) NC statement conversion window
4.9.5 Details of Actual Rotation Speed Shown in the SPINDLE

Display Block
The SPINDLE block shows the actual rotation speed of the milling axis as explained below.
- 79 -
<1> The actual rotation speed to be displayed is obtained by multiplying the servo motor rotation speed
by the following gear ratio.
Number of gear teeth on servo motor axis (parameter (No.1896))

Gear ratio =
Number of gear teeth on milling axis (parameter (No.1897))
(The above expression applies to the Series 16i/18i/21i. For the Series 0i-F/0i-D/30i/31i/32i , the
parameter must be changed as stated in NOTE below.)
<2> The displayed actual rotation speed is up to 8 digits.
<3> The displayed actual rotation speed varies depending on what path, spindle, or servo axis is selected.
<4> If a linear motor-based control axis is specified as a milling axis by mistake, the displayed actual
rotation speed is “0”.
NOTE
The parameter used in calculating a gear ratio differs between the Series
0i-C/16i/18i/21i and Series 0i-F/0i-D/30i/31i/32i.
The parameter to be referenced for each machine model is as follows:
• Number of gear teeth on the servo motor axis
Series 0i-C/16i/18i/21i : Parameter No.1896
Series 0i-F/0i-D/30i/31i/32i : Parameter No.1898
• Number of gear teeth on the milling axis
Series 0i-C/16i/18i/21i : Parameter No.1897
Series 0i-F/0i-D/30i/31i/32i : Parameter No.1899
4.9.6 Details of Load Ratio (%) Shown in the SPINDLE Display

Block
The SPINDLE block shows the load ratio of the milling axis as explained below.
(1) The load ratio to be displayed is obtained using the following expression.
<1> - <3>
Load ratio = × 100
<2> - <3>
<1> : Digital form of servo motor load current

<2> : Digital form of rated current (parameter (No.2086))
<3> : Digital form of steady-state load current (parameter (No.14815))
NOTE
The parameter (No.14815) varies according to the servo axis number used for
the milling axis.
The parameter to be referenced for each axis is as follows:
(Common to both the Series 0i/16i/18i/21i and Series 30i/31i/32i)
Axis 1: Parameter No.14815
- 80 -
(2) The displayed load ratio is up to 3 digits.
(3) The displayed load ratio varies depending on what path or servo motor is selected.
4.10 DISPLAYING THE SPINDLE-POSITION AND

STANDBY-POSITION TOOL NUMBERS (FOR Series
30i/31i/32i ONLY)
On the NC screen, setting up parameter PCT (No.3108#2) = 1 or DHN (No.11320#0) = 1 enables HD.T
(spindle tool number) and NX.T (standby-position tool number) to be displayed.
HD.T and NX.T can be displayed also on the MANUAL GUIDE i screen.
NOTE
For details of this function, refer to the applicable “Connection Manual: Function”
(B-63943EN-1) and “PMC Programming Manual” (B-63983EN).
4.10.1 Displaying the Spindle-Position Tool Number

On the MANUAL GUIDE i screen, the modal display block shows HD.T.
O SAMPLE
N 000000000
HD.T 900
D 0 H 0
S 0 M 0
F 0
G00 17 40 54
G80 80 49 90
G00 17 40 54
4.10.2 Displaying the Standby-Position Tool Number

Pressing the soft key [<] or [>] several times causes the soft key [MODAL] to appear.
Pressing the soft key [MODAL] changes the modal information display block as shown below, thus
displaying the standby-position tool number.
Pressing the soft key [MODAL] once again resumes the previous display.
[MODAL]
Page 1 Page 2
4.11 G54.4 MODAL DISPLAY

G54.4 is displayed in the modal information when the workpiece setting error compensation is effective.
- 81 -
4.11.1 DETAIL
(1) Where screen effective invalidity of workpiece setting error compensation mode can be confirmed.
a) Modal information of base screen
b) Modal information of DRAWING-DURING-MACHINING window (Usual display)
(2) When the workpiece setting error compensation mode is effective.

The workpiece setting error compensation mode becomes effective if commanded in G54.4 P1-7.
G54.4 is displayed in the modal information.
(3) When the workpiece setting error compensation mode is ineffective.

The workpiece setting error compensation mode becomes ineffective if commanded in G54.4 P0.
G54.4 displayed in the modal information becomes non-display.
4.11.2 NOTE
(1) G54.4 is not displayed in the modal information while machining simulation.
(2) At the following screens are not display G54.4 on the modal information part.
a) All path screen display.
b) DRAWING-DURING-MACHINING window. (Usual display)
c) Machining simulation screen.(Animation)
d) Machining simulation screen. (Tool path)
- 82 -
4.12 COMMENT DISPLAY DURING MACHINING

By using G code (G2900) for comment display, it is possible to display comments on the screen during
automatic operations. When G2900 is executed during automatic operation, then the character string of
specified comment is displayed at the current machining portion on the base screen.
(Example)
Displayed comment on the base screen during execution G code “G2900 P1 (ABCDEFG)”
CURRENT MACHINING
Position of comment
ABCDEFG
display
GENARAL TOOL
4.12.1 Format of Comment Display G code G2900

The format of comment display G code G2900 is as follows.
G2900 Pp(xxxxx) ;
Address Meaning
P Display / Deletion setting
P0 : The comment is deleted from the screen

P1 : The comment is displayed on the screen
(xxxxx) Comment
The character string in round parentheses is displayed on the screen.

The string can be formed by the following set of characters:
• Only a special alphabet/figure/sign
• A special sign; The following signs except %

() ?,@#=*+[ ]& /. SP (Note)
Note) SP means space.
• The number of characters which can be displayed is 37 characters or less.

(Do not depend on the size of the indicator)
(Examples)
(1) G2900 P1 (ABC 12345)

“ABC 12345” is displayed.
(2) G2900 P0
The comment is deleted.
- 83 -
4.12.2 Notes
The notes of G2900 are as follows.
(1) In the case of specifying number for address P excluding 0 or 1, and specifying no comment, nether
comment display nor deletion are done.
(2) When there is no character string in the specified comment, the comment is erased from the screen.
(3) The name of machining cycle is not displayed during the comment display.
(4) If the G code G2900 is executed in machining simulation or machining drawing, then the character
string is not displayed.
(5) In the NC program conversion, comment display G code G2900 is output as it is into the converted
program.
(6) The comment remains on the base screen when returning from machining simulation screen or
machining drawing screen after switching to them. However, the comment is erased on the base
screen when returning from machining simulation screen after switching to them in Series
30i/31i/32i-A or Series 0i-F/0i-D.
(7) If the mode switch is done in the state of STOP or the state of HOLD then the comment remains
being displayed.
(8) When the G code G2900 is executed during the automatic operation in the RMT mode or the
subprogram is called from M198, then the comment is not displayed.
(9) If the parameter No.14700#0 is set to 1, then the comment cannot be displayed until switching to the
NC screen once and returning back to MANUAL GUIDE i.
4.13 OPERATION RESTART CONFIRMATION FUNCIOTN

AFTER EDITING PROGRAM (FOR Series 30i/31i/32i)
A confirmation message, to restart the machining, is displayed when the machining operation is restarted
after program editing in EDIT mode during single block stop.
Only when the restart is allowed by soft-key, the machining can be restarted.
4.13.1 Operation Restart Confirmation Screen

After changing EDIT mode during operation stop status or operation hold status and the amount of time
specified in parameter No.10333 is passed, if the start button is pushed, a message and soft-keys for
confirmation of machining restart will be displayed. The detail of the soft-keys to confirm machining
restart is as follows.
(1) [YES] soft-key

Machining restart is allowed. If start button is pushed again, the machining will be restarted.
(2) [No] soft-key
Operation restart isn’t allowed. If the start button is pushed again, then the message for confirmation
of machining restart will be displayed again.
4.13.2 Editing Function during Single Block Stop

All editing functions of MANUAL GUIDE i are available in EDIT mode during single block stop.
- 84 -
4.13.3 Operation Restart Confirmation in Multi Path System

The confirmation message is displayed irrespective of the selected path. For example, though the path 1 is
selected, if the machining in the path 3 is restarted, then the confirmation message will be displayed.
NOTE
If the confirmation is necessary in more than one path at the same time, the soft
-keys [YES] or [NO] operation one time is effective to all paths.
4.13.4 Parameter
Set the following parameter to use this function.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
10330 RSC

RSC If the machining is restarted after program editing during operation stop status or
operation hold status,
0: the machining is restarted. And program editing during operation stop status or
operation hold status in MANUAL GUIDE i screen is prohibited.
1: The message and soft-keys for confirmation which machining will be restarted or
not are displayed. While the soft-keys are displayed, if [YES] soft-key is pushed,
machining will be restarted after the cycle operation is started again. If [NO]
soft-key is pushed, the operation will be invalid. And program editing during
operation stop status or operation hold status in MANUAL GUIDE i screen is
allowed.
NOTE
If the amount of time that is specified in parameter No.10333 is
passed after switching to EDIT mode during operation stop status
or operation hold status, then CNC system will judge that the
program is being edited.
Amount of time that has to pass to judge that the program is being edited in OPERATION RESTART
10333
CONFIRMATION FUNCIOTN AFTER EDITING PROGRAM

[Unit of data] msec
When parameter RSC (10330#7) = 1, if the time that is set in this parameter is passed
after the mode is changed to EDIT during stop status or hold status, then the CNC system
will judge that the program is being edited.
If this parameter is set to 0, the time is set to 1000msec.
- 85 -
5. EDITING AND OPERATION
MDI PROGRAMS BASIC SCREEN AND OPERATION B-63874EN/11
5 EDITING AND OPERATION OF MDI

PROGRAMS
When the MDI mode is selected with the machine operator’s panel, the soft keys shown below appear on
the screen of MANUAL GUIDE i. Pressing the leftmost soft key [<] or the rightmost soft key [>] changes
the page of the soft key display to the second and third pages sequentially.
REWIND LINENO ACTPOS PRESET
REWIND SRCH↑ SRCH↓ CHSIZE COPY CUT DELETE KEYPST PASTE
UNDO REDO WK SET T-OFS SETING
For soft keys [ACTPOS] and [PRESET] on the first page, see the following sections:

The soft keys on the second and third pages are used for editing machining programs entered by MDI.
For details on these soft keys, see the following sections:
Section 2.1, “PROGRAM WINDOW AND EIDITNG”

Section 2.6, “SEARCH (FORWARD AND BACKWARD)”
Section 2.7, “CUT”
Section 2.8, “COPY”
Section 2.9, “PASTE”
Section 2.10, “DELETE”
Section 2.11, “KEY-IN PASTE”
Section 2.12, “UNDO, REDO”
For soft key [SETING], see Section 2.15, “REGISTERING FIXED FORM SENTENCES”.
- 86 -
B-63874EN/11 BASIC SCREEN AND OPERATION 6.MANUAL OPERATION
6 MANUAL OPERATION
When the handle or jog mode is selected with the machine operator’s panel, the following soft keys
appear on the screen of MANUAL GUIDE i:
MESURE MES LST ACTPOS PRESET SETING
REPAIR WK SET T-OFS SETING
NOTE
Soft keys [MESURE] and [MESLST] are displayed only when the Set-up
guidance optional function is attached.
By pressing soft key [MESURE], a window for set-up guidance functions that are performed in the
manual mode is displayed. By pressing soft key [MESLST], a window showing a list of measurement
results is displayed. For details of these windows, see separate Set-up Guidance manual or the manual
provided by machine tool builder.
For soft keys [ACTPOS] and [PRESET], see the following sections:
For soft key [SETING], see Section 2.15, “REGISTERING FIXED FORM SENTENCES”.
By pressing soft key [REPAIR], a window for thread re-machining menu is displayed. About the details
of the window and thread repairing functions, refer to “17.THREAD REPAIRING” in Part VII.
For soft keys [WKSET] and [T-OFS], see the following chapters:
Chapter 7 in Part II, “SETTING THE WORKPIECE COORDINATE DATA”
Chapter 8 in Part II, “SETTING RELATED TO TOOLS”
- 87 -
7. SETTING THE WORKPIECE
COORDINATE DATA BASIC SCREEN AND OPERATION B-63874EN/11
7 SETTING THE WORKPIECE COORDINATE

DATA
Soft key [WK SET] to open the workpiece coordinate data window can be displayed on all mode such as
MEM, EDIT and manual mode.
soft key [WK SET]
(Example of MEM mode soft-keys)

Pressing soft key [WK SET] displays the workpiece coordinate data window.
For compound machine tools, the workpiece coordinate setting windows for the T mode and M mode can
be selected with corresponding tabs.
For lathes, a window for setting the workpiece origin offset data and workpiece coordinate shift data is
displayed.
For machining centers, a window for setting the workpiece origin offset is displayed.
The data items to be set and displayed are common to the corresponding data items of the CNC. So, for
details, refer to the operator’s manual of the CNC.
7.1 SOFT KEY [MEASUR]

ACTPOS MEASUR +INPUT CHCURS NO.SRH CLOSE
By pressing soft key [MEASUR], the calculations below can be made.
(1) Workpiece origin offset window for M series

Current machine coordinate value - Target value of workpiece coordinate
(2) Workpiece origin offset window for T series
Current absolute coordinate value + Current setting - Target value of workpiece coordinate
(3) Workpiece coordinate system shift amount with the T series
Current setting - Current value of absolute coordinate + Target value of workpiece coordinate
7.2 SOFT KEY [+INPUT]

ACTPOS MEASUR +INPUT CHCURS NO.SRH CLOSE
By pressing the soft key [+INPUT], "current value + offset value" can be calculated.
- 88 -
7.SETTING THE WORKPIECE
B-63874EN/11 BASIC SCREEN AND OPERATION COORDINATE DATA
7.3 CALCULATING METHOD OF MEASURING OF SETTING

WORKPIECE COORDINATE DATA (for Series
0i-F/0i-D/30i/31i/32i)
7.3.1 Outline
Calculating method of measuring of workpiece origin offset value can be selected by parameter
No.27482#4 in workpiece coordinate data window.
7.3.1.1 In case of Series 0i-D

(1) No.27482#4=0 (specifications of MANUAL GUIDE i )
Method of calculation
Lathe Machining
Eq.5 Eq.4
(2) No.27482#4=1 (specifications of NC screen)

Parameter Method of calculation
No.11278#0 No.1015#6 Lathe Machining
0 Eq.2 Eq.1
0
1 Eq.2 Eq.2
0 Eq.2 Eq.4
1
1 Eq.3 Eq.3
(Equation)
No. Equation
Result = Current absolute coordinate value
1 + Workpiece origin offset value on the modal workpiece coordinate
+ External workpiece origin offset value - Target value of workpiece coordinate
(External workpiece origin offset value)
Result = Current absolute coordinate value + External workpiece origin offset value
- Target value of workpiece coordinate
2
(Workpiece origin offset value)
+ Workpiece origin offset value on the modal workpiece coordinate
Result = Current machine coordinate value
- Workpiece origin offset value on the modal workpiece coordinate
3
Result = Current machine coordinate value - External workpiece origin offset value
Result = Current machine coordinate value - Target value of workpiece coordinate
4
- 89 -
7. SETTING THE WORKPIECE
COORDINATE DATA BASIC SCREEN AND OPERATION B-63874EN/11
No. Equation
5
+ Workpiece origin offset value on the selected workpiece coordinate by cursor
7.3.1.2 In case of Series 0i-F/30i/31i/32i-A/B

(1) No.27482#4=0 (specifications of MANUAL GUIDE i )
Method of calculation
Lathe Machining
Eq.1 Eq.2
(2) No.27482#4=1 (specifications of NC screen)

Parameter Method of calculation
No.1015#6 Lathe Machining
0 Eq.3 Eq.2
1 Eq.3 Eq.3
(Equation)
No. Equation
1
+ Workpiece origin offset value on the selected workpiece coordinate by cursor
2 Result = Current machine coordinate value - Target value of workpiece coordinate
3
+ Workpiece origin offset value on the modal workpiece coordinate
7.3.2 Parameter Setting

Please set parameter CMW(No.27482#4) to 1.
- 90 -
8.SETTINGS RELATED TO
B-63874EN/11 BASIC SCREEN AND OPERATION TOOLS
8 SETTINGS RELATED TO TOOLS

8.1 SETTING TOOL OFFSET DATA
[T-OFS] to open the tool offset data window can be displayed on all mode such as MEM, EDIT and
manual mode.
[T-OFS]
Example of MEM mode soft-keys)

Pressing [T-OFS] displays the tool offset data window.
For compound machine tools, the following data items are displayed for the T mode:
(1) T: GEOMETRY OFFSET

(2) T: WEAR OFFSET
(3) T: GEOMETRY TOOL TYPE OFFSET
(4) T: GEOMETRY WEAR TYPE OFFSET
The following data items are displayed for the M mode:
(5) M: TOOL OFFSET (TOOL LENGTH COMP. / CUTTER COMPENSATION)

(6) M: TOOL TYPE OFFSET (TOOL LENGTH COMP. / CUTTER COMPENSATION)
Data for each mode can be selected with a corresponding tab.
For lathes, data items (1) to (4) are displayed. For machining centers, data items (5) and (6) are displayed.
The data to be set and displayed in (1), (2), and (5) is common to the corresponding data in the CNC. For
details, refer to the operator’s manual of the CNC.
For data items (3), (4), and (6), which are related to the tool management function, see Chapter 2, "TOOL
MANAGEMENT FUNCTION" in the Part VI.
8.1.1 Softkeys Icons for the Direction of the Imaginary Tool Nose
For the T series, it is possible to change the virtual tool tip direction input soft key icons, thus making it
possible to select icons that match the axis configuration and coordinate system of your machine tool.
8.1.1.1 How to specify icons

Setting up the parameters IN3 to IN0 (No.14857#3 to #0) appropriately enables virtual tool tip input soft
key icons to be selected.
If parameters IN3 to IN0 (No.14857#3 to #0) = 0000, virtual tool tip input soft key icons are determined
according to the setting of the parameter MT1 (No.14702#0).
- 91 -
8. SETTINGS RELATED TO
TOOLS BASIC SCREEN AND OPERATION B-63874EN/11
(1) Parameter MT1 (No.14702#0) = 0 (vertical type)
(2) Parameter MT1 (No.14702#0) = 1 (horizontal type)
8.1.1.2 If program coordinate system/offset memory switching is

enabled
If the program coordinate system/offset switching function (option) is enabled, a tool offset value can be
specified for program coordinate systems 1 and 2 separately.
If the offset switching function is enabled, it is possible to specify virtual tool tip input soft key icons
displayed in the tool offset window for program coordinate system 2, using the parameters PN3 to PN0
(No.27190#3 to #0).
8.1.2 Soft Key [MEASUR]

Soft key [MEASUR] can be used only on T series
ACTPOS MEASUR +INPUT INP.C. CHCURS NO.SRH CLOSE
By pressing soft key [MEASUR], "Current machine coordinate value - Target value of workpiece
coordinate” can be calculated.
With the [WEAR OFFSET] tab usable when tool geometry/wear compensation option is specified,
"Current machine coordinate value - Current geometry offset value - Target workpiece coordinate value"
can be calculated.
NOTE
Before starting measurement, cancel necessarily the offset value.
8.1.3 Soft Key [+INPUT]

By pressing the soft key [+INPUT] soft key, "Current value + Offset value" can be calculated.
8.1.4 Soft Key [INP.C.]

By pressing the soft key [INP.C.] soft key, "Relative coordinate value" can be entered to the offset value
directly.
- 92 -
8.2 SPECIFYING TOOL FIGURE DIMENSION DATA
8.2.1 Overview
(1) In the tool offset window, it is possible to key in tool data (such as tool diameter, type, name,
mounting, and figure data) necessary when animation is used to draw figures or perform cycle
machining.
(2) The tool diameter and the counter sink tool small diameter (tool nose radius) are input as a tool
offset value (RADIUS (lathe) or CUTTER COMPENSATION (machining center)).
(3) Selecting the TOOL DATA tab causes the TOOL FIGURE DIMENSION DATA SETTING window
to appear. Only up to 300 tools can be specified in this window.
(4) Using data specified on the TOOL DATA tab during cycle machining requires specifying its number,
using a T or D code.
(5) Cycle machining on lathes is performed by referencing the tool information having the same number
as the tool figure offset number specified using a T code. The figure offset value number can be
specified in several patterns as specified with the parameter LGN (No.5002#1) or the like. In any
pattern, the machine is operated by specifying the tool information having the same number as the
tool figure offset number. If the tool management function is available, a D code is used to specify
the offset number. The same holds true also in this case, however.
(6) Cycle machining on machining centers is performed by referencing the tool information having the
same number as a cutter compensation number specified using a D code.
(7) Either the T mode or M mode is used for compound machine tools. When the T mode is used, the
same operation as for lathes is performed. Cycle machining is performed by referencing the tool
information having the same number as for a tool figure offset value.
When the M mode is used, the same operation as for machining centers is performed. Cycle
machining is performed by referencing the tool information having the same number as a cutter
compensation number.
(8) A check is made on the relationship between specified tool types and cycles. When a drilling cycle is
executed, for example, an alarm is issued if a counter sink tool is selected. No check is made unless a
tool type has been input.
(9) A tool figure is drawn during machining simulation if a T or D code is executed.
(10) The term “tool database function” herein refers to an operation in which cycle machining and
animation are performed by inputting or referencing tool figure dimension data.
NOTE
1 This function is enabled if parameter TOL (No.14850#0) = 0.
2 Tool figures can be drawn by specifying either a tool information number
explained above or a G code. When issuing a G code-based drawing command
after tool information is specified, separate them by at least 2 blocks.
Otherwise, it is likely that G code-based tool drawing may not take place.
8.2.2 Setting of Tool Type

By placing cursor on an item for selecting kind of tool, the following soft keys appear. When appropriate
soft key is pushed, a type of tool is selected and its icon is displayed. Also tool name is displayed on the
right of the icon.
- 93 -
(1) Soft keys for selecting kind of tool for lathes or T mode of combined machine
GENERL THREAD GROOVE BUTTON STRAIT CHCURS INIT NO.SRH CLOSE
DRILL CHAMFR F END B END TAP REAMER BORING F MILL CLOSE
VRSTIL OUTPUT INPUT CLOSE
(2) Soft keys for selecting kind of tool for machining centers or M mode of
combined machine
DRILL CHAMFR F END B END TAP CHCURS INIT NO.SRH CLOSE
REAMER BORING F MILL CLOSE
8.2.3 Editing of Tool Name

To edit tool name, place cursor on tool name, change mode into character, input alphabets or numerals,
and push <INPUT>.
This function is useful to distinguish similar tools.
8.2.4 Setting of Tool Set

When a cursor is placed on tool setting number, a guidance window is automatically displayed in the right
of the screen. By inputting tool setting number and pushing <INPUT>, tool setting can be set.
8.2.5 Setting of Tool Data

By placing cursor on items of tool data, guidance window is automatically displayed. By inputting tool
data value and pushing <INPUT>, tool data can be set. Then up to three-digits integers and one-decimal
number can be inputted when unit is [deg.]. When [inch] or [mm], eight-figure number can be inputted.
But numbers that is inputted to 7 decimal places are rounded off to 6 decimal places.
The names of item and the numbers of item depend on kind of tool. See below about the detail. In this
table, tools that don’t have to set tool data are omitted.
Tool data isn’t necessary to execute milling cycle. So milling cycle can be executed though tool data isn’t
set.
Tool form data for turning

KIND OF TOOL GENERAL THREAD GROOVE
Data1 Cutting edge angle Nose angle Tip width
Data2 Nose angle Tip length (*)
- 94 -
KIND OF TOOL BUTTON STRAIGHT MULTIFUNCTIONAL

Data1 Tip length (*) Cutting edge angle Tip width
Data2 Nose angle Tip length (*)
Tool form data for milling

KIND OF TOOL DRILL CHAMFER
Data Nose angle (*) Cutter diameter (*)
(*) : Cycle can be executed if not set
8.2.6 Cutting Edge Angle

In tool figure dimension data, an angle made by a straight line in parallel with the holder width direction
and a cutting edge is defined as a cutting edge angle.
Holder Holder
Width Width
T T
An An
Aa Aa(Cutting Edge angle)
La (parallel with holder width)
<1> Draw a straight line that is parallel with holder width

<2> An angle that is made by a straight line La and a straight line T is defined as a cutting edge angle
Holder Width
Aa(Cutting edge angle)
La(parallel with holder width)
<3> In case of L form holder, the width of a part that is installed tip is defined as holder width.
A tool tip is defined by the position where the tool is mounted as shown in the following examples.
- 95 -
(Example)
(set 1) (set 2)
(set 5) (set 6)
(set 9) (set 10)
(set 13) (set 14)
8.2.7 Initializing of Tool Data

Tool data can be initialized by soft key [INIT]. When soft key [INIT] is pushed, a message for confirming
initialization is displayed. By pressing soft key [YES], initialization is performed.
But items to be initialized are only items placed in tool data tab and [INIT] has no connection with offset
value.
8.2.8 Displaying Tool Icons

If tool figure dimension data can be specified, placing the cursor on a tool offset command (for lathes
having no tool management function, T code or, for lathes having a tool management function and
machining centers, D code) causes the tool icon, tool type, and tool name corresponding to the number to
be displayed in the message window.
GENERAL TOOL (GENERAL32)
Tool icon Tool type Tool name
- 96 -
NOTE
1 For lathes, tool data registered with the same number as for the tool figure offset
command, rather than with a tool wear offset number, is displayed.
2 This function is unusable on compound machine tools.
3 This function is unusable for a machine tool having the offset memory switching
function.
4 Enabling this function requires setting the parameter TLJ (No.14705#7) to 1.
8.2.9 Shortcut to the Tool Figure Dimension Data Setting Window

If tool figure dimension data can be specified, placing the cursor on a tool offset command and then
pressing the soft key [ALTER] or the <INPUT> key displays the tool database window. In this window,
the cursor moves to the data having a tool number corresponding to the tool figure offset number (lathes)
or cutter compensation number (machining centers).
NOTE
1 For lathes, the cursor moves to the same number as for the tool figure offset
command, rather than to a tool wear offset number.
2 This function is unusable on compound machine tools.
3 This function is unusable on machine tools having the offset memory function.
4 Enabling this function requires setting the parameter TLJ (No.14705#7) to 1.
8.3 TOOL INFORMATION DISPLAY

The tool information can be always displayed referring to the modal information. The modal information
is T code in case of the lathe, and D code in case of the machining center.
8.3.1 Displaying Screen

The icon and the tool kind which corresponds to T or D codes are displayed on the base screen.
CURRENT MACHINING
GENERAL TOOL
Tool icon Tool kind
NOTE
Tool information is not displayed on the machining simulation screen, the
machining drawing screen, and the NC program conversion screen.
- 97 -
8.3.2 Tool Information Display

(1) The icon and the tool kind of the tool, which correspond to the modal information of T code for the
lathe system and D code for the milling system, are displayed. When the tool management function
is effective, this function displays the tool information referring to D code in case of milling systems
and lathe systems.
(2) Icon and tool kind, set in the tool database, are displayed.
(3) If the modal value for T or D code is 0, then the icon and the tool kind are not displayed.
(4) If in the tool database there is no tool specified, corresponding to the active modal T or D code, then
the icon and the tool kind are not displayed.
(5) If the tool database is not enabled then the icon and the tool kind are not displayed.
(6) This function shows the tool information while the base screen is displayed in the modes MDI,
MEM, RMT, HND, JOG, TJOG, THAND, and REF (Excluding the EDIT mode). Tool information
is displayed also when the CNC is not machining.
8.3.3 Notes when Commanding Offset Number by D Code

In following cases there is the possibility that it is displayed a different tool than the tool actually
selected.
(1) If T code and D code are commanded in different blocks, then the tool information corresponding to
the last commanded D code (Excluding D0) will be displayed until the D code corresponding to the
most recent T code is commanded.
(2) When D code is not commanded, as for example a drill tool, then the tool information corresponding
to the last commanded D code (Excluding D0) will be displayed. The tool information is not updated
until a different D code is commanded. (The tool information is not displayed when D code has been
not commanded yet.)
Therefore, it is advised to command a D code soon after the T code is commanded in order to have
congruous tool information displayed in respect to the selected tool.
8.4 COMBINING A TOOL DATABASE WITH THE TOOL

MANAGEMENT FUNCTION
If the tool management option is available, the tool management function data table can be displayed on
the MANUAL GUIDE i screen. In this case, a tool database setting window is added to the tool
management function table.
NOTE
1 To use this function, you require tool management function options.
2 To use this function the parameter TOL (No.14705#5) must be set to 1.
8.4.1 Tool Management Data Window

Pressing the soft key [TOOL] causes the tool management data window to appear.
In this window, it is possible to specify tool management data, magazine information, tool offset, and tool
information.
G-CONT UNDO REDO WK SET TOOL SETING
- 98 -
8.4.2 Tool Management Data Tab
8.4.2.1 Tool management data

On the tool management data tab, it is possible to specify a compensation number, tool life information,
spindle rotation speed, feedrate, customization information, and tool information.
The following data can be specified.
(1) NO. (TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA NO)

A tool management data number is displayed. It cannot be changed; it can only be displayed.
(2) TYPE-NO
A tool type number (T code) is displayed.
(3) MG (Magazine number)
A magazine number is displayed. It cannot be changed; it can only be displayed.
(4) POT
A pot number is displayed. It cannot be changed; it can only be displayed.
(5) T-INFO
The tool information consists of the 6 different pieces of information listed below, as viewed from
the right.
The 2 leftmost bits are not in use.
Tool management data : Valid (R)/invalid (-)
Tool life count type : Time (T)/count (C)
Tool type : Large-diameter (B)/regular-diameter (N) tool
Data access : Locked (L)/unlocked (U)
Whether to include the tool as a search target when its life status is ”DISABLE”
: Yes (-)/no (S)
Tool life count period : 1 second (0)/8 millisecond (1)
(6) L-COUNT
The too life count of the tool (how many times or how long has it been used) is displayed.
(7) MAX-LIFE
The maximum life value/time of the tool is displayed.
(8) NOTICE-L
The life expectancy value/time of the tool is displayed.
(9) L-STATE
The current life status of the tool is displayed. It can be one of the following:
DISABLE, ENABLE, OVER, DAMAGE
8.4.2.2 Spindle rotation speed and feedrate

Pressing the page change key <↑PAGE> or <PAGE↓> several times displays a window for setting the
spindle rotation speed and feedrate.
(1) S (SPINDLE SPEED)

The rotation speed of the spindle is displayed.
(2) F (FEED RATE)
The feedrate is displayed.
- 99 -
8.4.2.3 Tool offset

Pressing the page change key <↑PAGE> or <PAGE↓> several times displays a window for specifying a
tool offset.
(1) H (TOOL LENGTH COMPENSATION NUMBER), D (CUTTER COMPENSATION NUMBER)

The tool length compensation number and cutter compensation number are displayed except for
lathes.
(2) TG (TOOL GEOMETRIC COMPENSATION NUMBER), TW (TOOL WEAR COMPENSATION
NUMBER)
The tool geometry compensation number and tool wear compensation number are displayed except
for machining centers.
(3) GEOM, WEAR
The compensation value corresponding to a compensation number specified with H, D, TG, or TW
is displayed.
Pressing the page change key <↑PAGE> or <PAGE↓> several times displays a window for specifying
tool information.
For detailed descriptions of data, see chapters explaining the tool database.
8.4.2.4 Customization data

Pressing the page change key <↑PAGE> or <PAGE↓> several times displays a window for specifying
customization data.

(1) CUSTOM 0
This is customization information in bit format.
Either 1 or 0 can be keyed in for individual bits separately.
(2) CUSTOM 1 to 4
This is customization information.
(3) CUSTOM 5 to 20
This is customization information. It is displayed only if an option for adding customization data to
the tool management function is available.
8.4.3 Customizing Tool Management Data Displays

In the tool management data window, it is possible to specify whether to show or hide items (such as type
number, tool information, and tool life counter) and to change the position where they are displayed.
8.4.4 Magazine Management Table Tab

The magazine data tab displays the magazine, spindle, tool magazine data number and tool type number
corresponding to the pot in the standby position.
(1) POT
The pot number is displayed.
(2) NO.
The tool management data number is displayed.
(3) TYPE- NO.
The tool type number corresponding to the tool type number is displayed.
(4) SPDL
The tool management data number and tool type number for the spindle position are displayed.
- 100 -
(5) WAIT
The tool management data number and tool type number for the standby position are displayed.
8.4.5 Tool Offset Tab

The tool offset tab displays a window for specifying tool offset.
8.4.6 Tool Information Tab

The tool information tab displays a window for specifying tool figure dimension data.
8.4.7 Outputting Tool Management Data to the Memory Card

The following procedure can output tool management data.
<1> On the machine operator’s panel, select the edit mode to display a window for tool management.
<2> Press the soft key [TOOL] to display the tool management function window, and then press the
leftmost soft key [<] or the rightmost soft key [>] several times. The soft keys shown below appear.
OUTPUT INPUT CLOSE
<3> Press the soft key [OUTPUT]. The following array of soft keys appears, enabling data to be selected
for output.
TOOL MAG STATUS CSTM DSPCT P_NAME POINT CANCEL
[TOOL] : Outputs tool management information and tool database data.

[MAG] : Outputs magazine management table data.
[STATUS] : Outputs tool life status name data.
[CSTM] : Outputs customization data name data.
Displaying the following 3 items requires installing the tool management expansion option.
[DSPCT] : Outputs window customization data.

[P_NAME] : Outputs spindle and standby position name data.
[POINT] : Outputs customization data decimal point position data.
<4> Pressing the soft key corresponding to the tool management data to be output displays a
confirmation message. Pressing the soft key [YES] directs the tool management data to the memory
card.
8.4.8 Inputting Tool Management Data from the Memory Card

The following procedure can input tool management data.
<1> On the machine operator’s panel, select the edit mode to display a window for tool management.
<2> Press the soft key [TOOL] to display the tool management function window, and then press the
leftmost soft key [<] or the rightmost soft key [>] several times. The soft keys shown below appear.
OUTPUT INPUT CLOSE
- 101 -
<3> Press the soft key [INPUT]. The following array of soft keys appear, enabling data to be selected for
input.
TOOL MAG STATUS CSTM DSPCT P_NAME POINT CANCEL
[TOOL] : Inputs tool management information and tool database data.

[MAG] : Inputs magazine management table data.
[STATUS] : Inputs tool life status name data.
[CSTM] : Inputs customization data name data.
Displaying the following 3 items requires installing the tool management expansion option.
[DSPCT] : Inputs window customization data.

[P_NAME] : Inputs spindle and standby position name data.
[POINT] : Inputs customization data decimal point position data.
<4> Pressing the soft key corresponding to the tool management data to be input displays a confirmation
message. Pressing the soft key [EXEC] causes the tool management data to be input to the memory
card.
- 102 -
III. CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS
CONVENIENT
B-63874EN/11 FUNCTIONS 1.CONTOUR PROGRAMMING
1 CONTOUR PROGRAMMING
Contour programming allows arbitrary figures (contour programs) consisting of circles and straight lines,
rather than those figures handled in cycle machining, to be input.
Pressing the soft key [G-CONT] displays a window similar to one used with arbitrary figure data
described in the previous chapter. This window is used to perform all operations, from inputting figures to
writing them to a machining program, in the same manner.
In this case, the created machining program consists of G01, G02, and G03 codes in ISO code format.
NOTE
See Chapter 5, “Inputting Arbitrary Figures”, of Part IV for explanations about
contour program input data.
(1) Inputting insertion character strings

Arbitrary character strings can be input when inputting any figure block to contour programs.
The 「INS.CODE」 tab is added to the window for inputting contour program figure blocks as explained
below.
Insertion character string

Data item Meaning
F* LAST CODE Character string (up to 16 characters) to be input at the beginning (right
after an EOB) of each figure block
B* NEXT CODE Character string (up to 16 characters) to be input at the end (right before an
EOB) of each figure block
The 「INS.CODE」 described above can be used to input G codes and feedrates into figure blocks.
NOTE
The character string that can be input is only a word. It can include neither
parentheses nor space characters.
(2) Editing contour program figure blocks

Once a contour program figure block has been input, it can be re-edited by performing figure calculation
in the same manner as when it was entered.
For this reason, each figure block has the input figure data written as a comment.
The first figure block of a contour program has a G code (G1200, G1300, G1450, G1500, or G1600)
signifying a start point as a comment. Place the cursor on that block and press the soft key [ALTER].
This operation displays a window for editing contour programs. In this window, the figures can be edited
in the same manner as arbitrary figures.
(3) Select style of contour program of ZC plane

Select style of contour program of ZC plane by parameter No.27096#0.
(Parameter No.27096#0)
0 : The program for cylindrical interpolation on G18 plane is generated in Contour programming
window of ZC plane.
1 : The program for cylindrical interpolation on G19 plane is generated in Contour programming
window of ZC plane.
- 105 -
2. MEMORY CARD CONVENIENT
INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION FUNCTIONS B-63874EN/11
2 MEMORY CARD INPUT/OUTPUT

FUNCTION
2.1 MEMORY CARD INPUT/OUTPUT OF PROGRAM
2.1.1 Memory Card Input/Output Screen of Program

Select EDIT mode on the machine operator’s panel. Pressing soft key [O LIST] displays the program list
window, programs registered in the CNC. Following soft-keys are displayed.
(a) In case of Series 16i /18i /21i, 30i /31i /32i-A, 0i-F/0i-D
NEW COPY DELETE EDTCOM SEARCH M CARD MLT DEL SRTORD OPEN CLOSE
(b) In case of Series 30i /31i /32i-B, 0i-F/0i-D(with USB interface )

NEW COPY DELETE EDTCOM SEARCH IN/OUT MLT DEL SRTORD OPEN CLOSE
Pressing the soft key [M CARD] or the soft key [IN/OUT] on the program list screen displays the
[INPUT/OUTPUT PROGRAM BY MEMORY CARD] screen.
Following soft-keys are displayed.
INPUT INP.O DELETE SEARCH OUTPUT FORMAT USB RETURN
[INPUT] : Inputs a program from the memory card.

[INP.O] : Inputs a program from the memory card (by changing the O number).
[DELETE] : Deletes files on the memory card.
[SEARCH] : Searches for a file on the memory card.
[OUTPUT] : Displays the screen for output to the memory card.
[FORMAT] : Formats the memory card. (Note)
[USB] : Displays the [INPUT/OUTPUT PROGRAM BY USB MEMORY] screen. (Note)
[RETURN] : Returns the screen display to the program list screen.
In order to delete a file in the memory card, place the cursor on the file name in the above window and
press soft key [DELETE]. This soft key displays a message for checking if selected file may be deleted.
Pressing soft key [YES] deletes the file in the memory card. Pressing soft key [NO] cancels the deletion
of all programs.
YES NO
- 106 -
CONVENIENT 2.MEMORY CARD
B-63874EN/11 FUNCTIONS INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION
In case of initializing the memory card such as deleting all files in the memory card, press soft key
[FORMAT]. This soft key displays a message for checking if the memory card may be initialized.
Pressing soft key [YES] initializes the memory card and all files in the memory card are deleted. Pressing
soft key [NO] cancels the deletion of all programs.
NOTE
1 When the CNC screen display function is in use, neither of the following items is
displayed.
• Soft key [FORMAT]
• Whether the memory area is in use or not
2 Soft key [USB] is displayed for Series 30i /31i /32i-B and Series 0i-F /0i-D
only. And, in case of Series 0i-TD /0i-MD, It is necessary to meet the following
requirements.
• Using the following main boards with USB interface
<1> main board B2 ( A20B-8200-0842 )
<2> main board B3 ( A20B-8200-0843 )
• Using the following softwares
<1> 19.0th edition or more of NC basic software ( D4F1/D6F1 )
<2> 1.0th edition or more of USB software ( 659B )
<3> 12.0th edition or more of MANUAL GUIDE i software ( BX32 )
• The parameter No.14854#0=1
2.1.2 Memory Card Output Operation for Program

Pressing the soft key [OUTPUT] on the INPUT/OUTPUT PROGRAM BY MEMORY CARD screen
displays the OUTPUT PROGRAM TO MEMORY CARD screen.
The following soft-keys are displayed.

SEARCH OUTPUT MLTOUT ALLOUT SRTORD RETURN
[SEARCH] :
Searches for a program.
[OUTPUT] :
Output a selected program to the memory card.
[MLTOUT] :
Output multi programs to the memory card.
[ALLOUT] :
Output all programs to the memory card.
[SRTORD] :
Switches the sort order for displaying a program list between ascending order and
descending order.
[RETURN] : Returns the screen display to the [INPUT/OUTPUT PROGRAM BY MEMORY CARD]
screen.
Pressing soft key [SEARCH] displays the following window of program searching.
Enter the program number to be searched, then press soft key [SEARCH].
(1) Output single part program

Select the part program to be output by placing the cursor on it. Pressing soft key [OUTPUT]
displays the window for entering outputting file name.
ON OFF OUTPUT CANCEL
- 107 -
If the program number can be used as the output file name, press soft key [OUTPUT] without
entering file name.
In case that the output file name should be changed, enter the file name to OUTPUT FILE NAME
and press soft key [OUTPUT].
In order to output the selected program together with subprogram called from the program, press soft
key [ON] for OUTPUT WITH SUBPROGRAM item. If not, press soft key [OFF].
(2) Output multi part programs

Pressing soft key [MLTOUT] displays the screen for selecting a program to be output
SELECT NOSECT AREA OUTPUT CANCEL
selected, and press the soft key [SELECT]. When the program is selected, the color of
its background changes to yellow.
[NOSECT] : This soft key deselects a program. Place the cursor on the program to be deselected,
and press the soft key [NOSECT]. When the program is deselected, the color of its
background changes from yellow back to white.
programs to be selected, press the soft key [AREA], and then move the cursor to the
last program in the sequence of programs. The color of the specified range changes to
purple. After this, press the soft key [SELECT] to assert the range. The color of the
background of the selected programs changes from purple to yellow.
[OUTPUT] : This soft key outputs selected programs to memory card.
[CANCEL] : This soft key deselects all programs in the folder of interest at a time and returns the
screen display to the [OUTPUT PROGRAM TOUSB MEMORY] screen. The color of
the background of the deselected programs changes from yellow back to white.
Pressing soft key [OUTPUT] displays the window for entering outputting file name.
If the file name “PROGRAM ALL” can be used as it is, press soft key [OUTPUT] without entering
file name and selected part programs stored in the CNC, the currently selected path when multi-path
lathe, are output to the memory card with this name.
(3) Output all part programs

Pressing soft key [ALLOUT] displays the window for entering outputting file name.
file name and all part programs stored in the CNC, the currently selected path when multi-path lathe,
are output to the memory card with this name.
2.1.3 Memory Card Input Operation for Program

INPUT INP.O. DELETE SEARCH OUTPUT FORMAT RETURN
Select the file to be input by placing the cursor on it on the program input/output window.
Pressing soft key [INPUT] begins to read the part program in the file from memory card to CNC.
- 108 -
Pressing soft key [INP.O.] displays the window for changing the reading program number, so enter the
new program number and press soft key [INPUT].
When the file, in which all part program was output with file name of “PROGRAM ALL”, is read to
CNC with changing the program number by soft key [INP.O.], the program number of the 1st program is
changed to the new number.
In order to search the file to be input to CNC, press soft key [SEARCH] and the file searching window is
displayed.
Enter the file name to be searched, and press soft key [SEARCH], then the file is searched if the file is
stored in the memory card.
2.1.4 File Format Allowed for Memory Card Input/Output

Only text files can be input to and output from the memory card. The file format described below must be
observed.
(1) A file must start with "%" and "LF".
(2) A file must end with "%".
(3) For input, data read operation is skipped after the first "%" is detected until an "LF" is detected.
(4) A block must end not with a semicolon (;) but with an "LF". ("LF" is 0A of ASCII code.)
(5) When a file containing lowercase alphabetic characters, kana characters, and some special characters
(such as $, ¥, and !) is input, those characteristics are ignored.
(6) ASCII code is used as input/output code, regardless of the setting parameter (ISO/EIA).
(7) Whether to output an "LF" only or an "LF, CR, CR" as an EOB can be chosen using bit 3 (NCR) of
parameter No. 0100.
(8) Characters usable for a file name
Alphabetic characters : A to Z
Numeric characters : 0 to 9
Special characters : $ & # % ' ( ) - @ ^ { } ~ ` ! _
2.1.5 Notes
For the Series 30i/31i/32i, the current folder is treated as an input/output target.
- 109 -
2.2 MEMORY CARD INPUT/OUTPUT OF TOOL DATA
2.2.1 Memory Card Input/Output Screen of Tool Data

During displaying TOOL DATA window, the following soft-keys are displayed by pressing the leftmost
soft key [<] or rightmost soft key [>] several times.
OUTPUT INPUT CLOSE
In order to input or output the tool data between memory card, select EDIT mode on the machine
operator’s panel.
Insert the memory card into the memory card slot on the LCD/MDI panel.
2.2.2 Memory Card Output Operation for Tool Data

OUTPUT INPUT CLOSE
Pressing soft key [OUTPUT] displays the following window for entering the output file name.
Pressing soft key [OUTPUT] without entering the file name outputs the tool data with the file name
“TOOLDAB.DAT”.
In order to change the file name, enter the file name and press soft key [OUTPUT].
2.2.3 Memory Card Input Operation for Tool Data

OUTPUT INPUT CLOSE
Pressing soft key [INPUT] displays the following window of f the file list store in the memory card.
Select the file in which tool data are stored and to be read to CNC by placing the cursor by the cursor key.
Pressing soft key [INPUT] begins reading the tool data to CNC form the memory card.
2.2.4 Data Format

The following format can be input or output.
(1) Machining Center

G1980 P_ K_ T_ S_ A_ ;
P : Offset Number (1 to 999)
K : Kind of Tool
T : Name of Tool
S : Setting
A : Tool Data
- 110 -
(2) Lathe
G1981 P_ J_ K_ Q_ S_ A_ B_ ;
P : Offset Number (1 to 999)
J : Path Number (only multiple paths)
K : Kind of Tool
T : Name of Tool
S : Setting
A : Tool Data 1
B : Tool Data 2
2.3 MEMORY CARD INPUT/OUTPUT OF OFFSET DATA (FOR

Series 16i/18i/21i/30i/31i/32i)
Tool Offset data can be input or output from/to memory card.
This function is available when the parameter No.27480#4 is set to 0.
2.3.1 Output Operation

Offset data can be output by the following operation.
(1) Offset window

After changing EDIT mode, push [T-OFS] soft-key to open the tool offset window. The following
soft-keys will be displayed by pressing the [<] or [>] soft-key several times.
OUTPUT INPUT CLOSE
If [OUTPUT] is pushed, then the window for entering outputting file name will be displayed.
(a) In case of Series 16i /18i /21i

Because the outputting file name can’t be changed, push [OUTPUT] soft-key without pushing
other button. The outputting file name is followings.
TOOLOFST.DAT (When 1 path is selected)

TOOLOFST.P-2 (When 2 path is selected)
(b) In case of Series 30i /31i /32i

If [OUTPUT] is pushed without changing file name, tool offset data with default file name will
be output. Enter file name and push [OUTPUT] in case the operator wants to change outputting
file name.
(2) Tool management function integrated in MANUAL GUIDE i

After changing EDIT mode, push [TOOL] soft-key to open the tool management function integrated
in MANUAL GUIDE i. The following soft-keys will be displayed if the [<] or [>] soft-key is pushed
several times after the offset tab is selected.
OUTPUT INPUT CLOSE
From now the operation is same as the case of offset window.
- 111 -
2.3.2 Input Operation

Offset data can be input by the following operation.
(1) Offset window

After changing EDIT mode, push [T-OFS] soft-key to open the tool offset window. The following
soft-keys will be displayed by pressing the [<] or [>] soft-key several times.
OUTPUT INPUT CLOSE
If [INPUT] is pushed, then the file list in memory card will be displayed.
(a) In case of Series 16i /18i /21i
Because one of the following file name is displayed in the file list, push [INPUT] soft-key
without pushing other button.
TOOLOFST.DAT (When 1 path is selected)

(b) In case of Series 30i /31i /32i

All files in the memory card are displayed in the file list. Select the offset file by cursor and
press [INPUT].
(2) Tool management function integrated in MANUAL GUIDE i

The operation is same as the case of offset window.
2.3.3 Notes
If the operator reset the CNC or set the CNC in emergency stop during inputting or outputting operations,
the inputting or outputting will be interrupted. Then, input or output again.
2.4 MEMORY CARD INPUT/OUTPUT OF FIXED FORM

SENTENCES
2.4.1 Memory Card Input/Output Screen of Fixed Form Sentences

The following soft key is displayed after soft key [SETING] is pushed and “REGISTER FIXED FORM
SENTENCES FOR MILLING” or “REGISTER FIXED FORM SENTENCES FOR TURNING” is
selected.
Select EDIT mode on the machine operator’s panel.

Insert the memory card into the memory card slot on the LCD/MDI panel.
- 112 -
2.4.2 Output Operation for Fixed Form Sentences

Pressing soft key [OUTPUT] displays the following window for entering the output file name.
Pressing soft key [OUTPUT] without entering the file name outputs the fixed form sentences with the file
name “FIXFRM.DAT” (Output fixed form sentences for milling and turning in a lump.)
In order to change the file name, enter the file name and press soft key [OUTPUT].
2.4.3 Input Operation for Fixed Form Sentences
Pressing [INPUT] displays the following window of the file list store in the memory card.
Select the file in which fixed form sentences are stored and to be read to CNC by placing the cursor by
the cursor key.
Pressing [INPUT] begins reading the tool data to CNC form the memory card.
2.4.4 Format of Fixed Form Sentences

The following format can be input or output for fixed form sentences.
<Mode>=_,<Tab>=_,<Title>=_,<Code>=_
Mode : Setting the mode of Fixed form sentences (Milling or Turning).
1 : Fixed Form Sentence for turning mode
2 : Fixed Form Sentence for milling mode
3 : Fixed Form Sentence for milling and turning mode
Tab : The number of tab(1 - 5)
Title : Setting the name of Fixed Form Sentence
Code : Setting Fixed Form Sentence
4 words, <Mode>=, <Tab>=, <Title>=, <Code>=, can’t be input as the name of fixed form sentence or
fixed form sentence.
- 113 -
3. USB MEMORY INPUT/OUTPUT
FUNCTION (for Series 0i-F/0i-D, CONVENIENT
30i/31i/32i-B) FUNCTIONS B-63874EN/11
3 USB MEMORY INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION

(for Series 0i-F/0i-D, 30i/31i/32i-B)
3.1 USB MEMORY INPUT/OUTPUT OF PROGRAM
3.1.1 USB Memory Input/Output Screen of Program

Select EDIT mode on the machine operator’s panel. Pressing soft key [O LIST] displays the program list
window, programs registered in the CNC. Following soft-keys are displayed.
NEW COPY DELETE EDTCOM SEARCH IN/OUT MLT DEL SRTORD OPEN CLOSE
Pressing the soft key [IN/OUT] on the program list screen displays the [INPUT/OUTPUT PROGRAM
BY USB MEMORY] screen.(Note)
Following soft-keys are displayed.
INPUT INP.O DELETE OUTPUT M CARD RETURN
[INPUT] : Inputs a program from the USB memory.

[INP.O] : Inputs a program from the USB memory (by changing the O number).
[DELETE] : Deletes files on the USB memory.
[OUTPUT] : Displays the screen for output to the USB memory.
[M CARD] : Displays the [INPUT/OUTPUT PROGRAM BY MEMORY CARD] screen.
[RETURN] : Returns the screen display to the program list screen.
In order to delete a file in the USB memory, place the cursor on the file name in the above window and
press soft key [DELETE]. This soft key displays a message for checking if selected file may be deleted.
Pressing soft key [YES] deletes the file in the USB memory. Pressing soft key [NO] cancels the deletion
of all programs.
YES NO
NOTE
1 When both the USB memory and memory card are inserted, pressing the soft
key [IN/OUT] displays the [INPUT/OUTPUT PROGRAM BY MEMORY CARD]
screen.
2 The item whether the memory area is in use or not is displayed on USB memory.
- 114 -
3.USB MEMORY
CONVENIENT INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION (for
B-63874EN/11 FUNCTIONS Series 0i-F/0i-D, 30i/31i/32i-B)
3.1.2 USB Memory Output Operation for Program

Pressing the soft key [OUTPUT] on the INPUT/OUTPUT PROGRAM BY MEMORY CARD screen
displays the OUTPUT PROGRAM TO MEMORY CARD screen.
The following soft-keys are displayed.

SEARCH OUTPUT MLTOUT ALLOUT SRTORD RETURN
[SEARCH] :
Searches for a program.
[OUTPUT] :
Output a selected program to the USB memory.
[MLTOUT] :
Output multi programs to the USB memory.
[ALLOUT] :
Output all programs to the USB memory.
[SRTORD] :
Switches the sort order for displaying a program list between ascending order and
descending order.
[RETURN] : Returns the screen display to the [INPUT/OUTPUT PROGRAM BY MEMORY CARD]
screen.
Pressing soft key [SEARCH] displays the following window of program searching.
Enter the program number to be searched, then press soft key [SEARCH].
(1) Output single part program

Select the part program to be output by placing the cursor on it. Pressing soft key [OUTPUT]
displays the window for entering outputting file name.
ON OFF OUTPUT CANCEL
If the program number can be used as the output file name, press soft key [OUTPUT] without
entering file name.
In order to output the selected program together with subprogram called from the program, press soft
key [ON] for OUTPUT WITH SUBPROGRAM item. If not, press soft key [OFF].
(2) Output multi part programs ram

Pressing soft key [MLTOUT] displays the screen for selecting a program to be output
SELECT NOSECT AREA OUTPUT CANCEL
selected, and press the soft key [SELECT]. When the program is selected, the color of
its background changes to yellow.
[NOSECT] : This soft key deselects a program. Place the cursor on the program to be deselected,
and press the soft key [NOSECT]. When the program is deselected, the color of its
background changes from yellow back to white.
programs to be selected, press the soft key [AREA], and then move the cursor to the
last program in the sequence of programs. The color of the specified range changes to
purple. After this, press the soft key [SELECT] to assert the range. The color of the
background of the selected programs changes from purple to yellow.
- 115 -
3. USB MEMORY INPUT/OUTPUT
FUNCTION (for Series 0i-F/0i-D, CONVENIENT
30i/31i/32i-B) FUNCTIONS B-63874EN/11
[OUTPUT] : This soft key outputs selected programs to USB memory.

[CANCEL] : This soft key deselects all programs in the folder of interest at a time and returns the
screen display to the [OUTPUT PROGRAM TO USB MEMORY] screen. The color
of the background of the deselected programs changes from yellow back to white.
Pressing soft key [OUTPUT] displays the window for entering outputting file name.
file name and selected part programs stored in the CNC, the currently selected path when multi-path
lathe, are output to the USB memory with this name.
(3) Output all part programs

Pressing soft key [ALLOUT] displays the window for entering outputting file name.
file name and all part programs stored in the CNC, the currently selected path when multi-path lathe,
are output to the USB memory with this name.
3.1.3 USB Memory Input Operation for Program

Select the file to be input by placing the cursor on it on the program input/output window.
Pressing soft key [INPUT] begins to read the part program in the file from USB memory to CNC.
Pressing soft key [INP.O.] displays the window for changing the reading program number, so enter the
new program number and press soft key [INPUT].
When the file, in which all part program was output with file name of “PROGRAM ALL”, is read to
CNC with changing the program number by soft key [INP.O.], the program number of the 1st program is
changed to the new number.
In order to search the file to be input to CNC, press soft key [SEARCH] and the file searching window is
displayed.
Enter the file name to be searched, and press soft key [SEARCH], then the file is searched if the file is
stored in the USB memory.
3.1.4 File Format Allowed for USB Memory Input/Output

Only text files can be input to and output from the memory card. The file format described below must be
observed.
(1) A file must start with "%" and "LF".
(2) A file must end with "%".
(3) For input, data read operation is skipped after the first "%" is detected until an "LF" is detected.
(4) A block must end not with a semicolon (;) but with an "LF". ("LF" is 0A of ASCII code.)
- 116 -
3.USB MEMORY
CONVENIENT INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION (for
B-63874EN/11 FUNCTIONS Series 0i-F/0i-D, 30i/31i/32i-B)
(5) When a file containing lowercase alphabetic characters, kana characters, and some special characters
(such as $, ¥, and !) is input, those characteristics are ignored.
(6) ASCII code is used as input/output code, regardless of the setting parameter (ISO/EIA).
(7) Whether to output an "LF" only or an "LF, CR, CR" as an EOB can be chosen using bit 3 (NCR) of
parameter No. 0100.
(8) Characters usable for a file name
Alphabetic characters : A to Z , a to z
Numeric characters : 0 to 9
Special characters : $ & # % ' ( ) - @ ^ { } ~ ` ! _
3.1.5 Notes
The current folder is treated as an input/output target.
- 117 -
CONVENIENT
4.PROGRAM RESTART FUNCTION FUNCTIONS B-63874EN/11
4 PROGRAM RESTART FUNCTION

When a tool is broken, or machining is to be restarted after holidays, for example, the block number or
sequence number of a block from which machining is to be restarted can be specified using this function
to enable machining to be restarted from the block. This function can also be used as a high-speed
program check function.
Two methods of restarting are available: P type and Q type.
NOTE
To use this function, the order of movement to a program restart position needs
to be set in parameter No. 7310.
4.1 RESTART METHOD
4.1.1 Soft-key [P TYPE]
(1) When the program restart signal SRN <G006#0> turns to 0 :

Pressing the soft key [P TYPE] has no effect. (Nothing occurs.)

<1> Enter one of the following in the key-in buffer:
(a) Sequence number
(b) N sequence number
(c) B block number
(d) Nxxxyyyyy (xxx: Number of repetition (3-digit)
yyyyy: Sequence number (5-digit))
(e) xxxyyyyy (xxx: Number of repetition (3-digit)
(*) For items (d) or (e), enter an 8-digit number. For sequence number 3 for two times, for example,
enter N00200003.
<2> Press the soft key [P TYPE].
If a value entered into the key-in buffer satisfies none of the items (a) through (e), an error is
indicated.
<3> The program restart screen is displayed.
NOTE
If soft key [P TYPE] is pressed without performing an automatic operation even
once after the power is turned on, an emergency stop is reset, or alarms (PS094
to PS097) is reset, an alarm (PS097) is issued.
- 118 -
CONVENIENT
B-63874EN/11 FUNCTIONS 4.PROGRAM RESTART FUNCTION
4.1.2 Soft-key [Q TYPE]


Pressing the soft key [Q TYPE] has no effect. (Nothing occurs.)

<1> Enter one of the following in the key-in buffer:
(a) Sequence number
(b) N sequence number
(c) B block number
(d) Nxxxyyyyy (xxx: Number of repetition (3-digit)
(e) xxxyyyyy (xxx: Number of repetition (3-digit)
(*) For items (d) or (e), enter an 8-digit number. For sequence number 3 for two times, for example,
enter N00200003.
<2> Press the soft key [Q TYPE].
If a value entered into the key-in buffer satisfies none of the items (a) through (e), an error is
indicated.
<3> The program restart screen is displayed.
4.2 PROGRAM RESTART IN MACHINING CYCLE

(For only Series30i/31i/32i-A/B, 0i-F/0i-D)
Program restart can be executed on the halfway of the following machining cycles.
G code Cycle name

G1000 - G1006 Hole machining
G1020 - G1021 Facing
G1030 - G1033
Contouring
G1060 - G1071
G1040 - G1045 Pocketing
G1050 - G1059 Grooving
G1080 - G1083 Embossing
G1100 - G1105 Hole machining (Work rotation)
G1110 - G1115 Hole machining (Tool rotation)
G1120 - G1129 Turning
G1130 - G1138 Turning grooving
G1140 - G1142 Threading
G1160 - G1168 Residual machining
(Note on using)
<1> This function is not available when a machining cycle is first block of program.
<2> B block number can be entered in the key-in buffer.
- 119 -
CONVENIENT
5.CALCULATOR FUNCTION FUNCTIONS B-63874EN/11
5 CALCULATOR FUNCTION
When numeric data is input, expressions for arithmetic operations, trigonometric functions, square root
calculations, and so forth can be input for calculation.
5.1 APPLICATIONS
The fixed-point format calculation function can be used for cycle input, arbitrary figure input, contour
program input, setting of various data items (basis setting, measurement condition setting, calibration
setting), relative coordinate preset input, and the key-in buffer(*).
(*) If the calculation result becomes an integer during key-in buffer input, no decimal point is used with
it.
5.2 CALCULATION METHODS

Arithmetic operations (addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division)
Arithmetic operations are performed using the key operations described below. The result of a calculation
is displayed at the cursor position for input data.
(1) Addition : 100.+200. [INPUT]
(2) Subtraction : 100.-200. [INPUT]
(3) Multiplication : 100.*200. [INPUT]
(4) Division : 100./200. [INPUT]
Example of input
BOTTOM THICKNESS T= 20
CUT DEPTH OF AXIS J=3.
BOTTOM FINISH AMOUNT H=0.2
SIDE FINISH AMOUNT K=0.3
FEED RATE F=100
CLEARANCE OF AXIS C=200 - 180
5.3 TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS (SINE, COSINE, TANGENT,

ARCSINE, ARCCOSINE, ARCTANGENT)
Trigonometric function calculations are made using the key operations described below. The result of a
calculation is displayed at the cursor position for input data.
(1) Sin : SIN(45) [INPUT]
(2) Cosine : COS(45) [INPUT]
(3) Tangent : TAN(45) [INPUT]
(4) Arcsine : ASIN(0.5) [INPUT]
(5) Arccosine : ACOS(0.5) [INPUT]
(6) Arctangent : ATAN(20,2) [INPUT]
(Note that for an arctangent calculation, a special format using two arguments is required. Enter data
according to the format ATAN(a,b). arctan(a/b) is calculated.)
For a calculation, () is required at all times.
- 120 -
CONVENIENT
B-63874EN/11 FUNCTIONS 5.CALCULATOR FUNCTION
5.4 SQUARE ROOT

A square root calculation is made using the key operations described below. The result of a calculation is
displayed at the cursor position for input data.
(1) Square root : SQRT(45) [INPUT]
5.5 EXPONENTIAL FUNCTIONS

Exponential function calculations are made using the key operations described below. The result of a
(1) Exponential function 1 (An exponential function of e = 2.718... can be calculated.) :
EXP(4) [INPUT]
(2) Exponential function 2 ("a" raised to the power of "b" can be calculated.) :
PWR(4,3) [INPUT]
(Note that for a calculation of exponential function 2, a special format using two arguments is required.
Enter data according to the format PWR(a,b). "a" raised to the power of "b" is calculated.)
5.6 LOGARITHMIC FUNCTIONS (COMMON LOGARITHM,

NATURAL LOGARITHM)
Logarithmic function calculations are made using the key operations described below. The result of a
(1) Common logarithm : LOG(45) [INPUT]
(2) Natural logarithm : LN(45) [INPUT]
5.7 ABSOLUTE VALUE

An absolute value calculation is made using the key operations described below. The result of a
(1) Absolute value : ABS(-45) [INPUT]
- 121 -
CONVENIENT
5.CALCULATOR FUNCTION FUNCTIONS B-63874EN/11
5.8 ROUNDING
Rounding operations are performed using the key operations described below. The result of a calculation
is displayed at the cursor position for input data.
(1) Rounding 1 (rounding off to an integer) :
RND(1.234) [INPUT]
(2) Rounding 2 (rounding off "a" to the decimal places specified by "b") :
RND2(1.267,0.01) [INPUT]
(Note that for a calculation of rounding 2, a special format using two arguments is required. Enter data
according to the format RND(a,b). The value of "a" is rounded off to the decimal places specified by "b".
As "b", do not specify a value other than 1, 0.1, 0.01, and so forth.)
5.9 DISCARDING
This operation discards all decimal places. A discarding operation is performed using the key operations
described below. The result of a calculation is displayed at the cursor position for input data.
(1) Discarding : FIX(1.234) [INPUT]
5.10 CIRCLE RATIO

A circle ratio calculation is made using the key operations described below. The circle ratio 3.14... is
indicated.
(1) Circle ratio : PAI [INPUT]
(*) In the case of key-in buffer input, no decimal point is assigned when an integer is produced as the
result of a calculation. In cases other than key-in buffer input, the respective input formats are to be
followed.
- 122 -
CONVENIENT
B-63874EN/11 FUNCTIONS 6.SHORTCUT KEY OPERATIONS
6 SHORTCUT KEY OPERATIONS

On MANUAL GUIDE i, almost all the operations excepting numerical data entering are done by
soft-keys. However, if you are well experienced in those operations, you can operate more quickly by
using other key instead of the assigned soft-key. This other key operation is called shortcut key.
Pressing <HELP> key on the MDI keyboard displays the window in which explanations of shortcut key
are displayed. Into details, refer to Chapter 6, “HELP SCREEN”.
NOTE
If the small MDI key board is attached to the CNC, shortcut key operations
cannot be used.
6.1 SHORTCUTS FOR VARIOUS CONFIRMATION

OPERATIONS
Soft key Shortcut key
[ YES ] [INPUT]
[ NO ] [CAN]
6.2 SHORTCUTS FOR RANGE SELECTION

[SELECT] [INPUT]
[CANCEL] [CAN]
6.3 SHORTCUTS FOR COPY OPERATION

[COPY] [INPUT]
[CANCEL] [CAN]
6.4 SHORTCUTS FOR CUT OPERATION

[CUT] [INPUT]
[CANCEL] [CAN]
6.5 SHORTCUTS FOR THE BASE SCREEN SOFT KEYS

[<] [-]+[INPUT]
[SF1] [1]+[INPUT]
[SF2] [2]+[INPUT]
[SF3] [3]+[INPUT]
[SF4] [4]+[INPUT]
- 123 -
CONVENIENT
6.SHORTCUT KEY OPERATIONS FUNCTIONS B-63874EN/11

[SF5] [5]+[INPUT]
[SF6] [6]+[INPUT]
[SF7] [7]+[INPUT]
[SF8] [8]+[INPUT]
[SF9] [9]+[INPUT]
[SF10] [0]+[INPUT]
[>] [.]+[INPUT]
* By setting bit 1 (SFN) of parameter No. 14703 to 1, a number for shortcut operation can be
displayed under each soft key.
6.6 SHORTCUT FOR STARTING THE CYCLE CHANGE

SCREEN
[ALTER] [INPUT]
6.7 SHORTCUTS FOR THE MENU SELECTION SCREEN

[SELECT] [INPUT] or numeral +[INPUT]
[CANCEL] [CAN]
6.8 SHORTCUTS FOR THE REGULAR PROGRAM INSERTION

SCREEN
[INSERT] [INPUT] or numeral +[INPUT]
[CLOSE] [CAN]
6.9 SHORTCUTS FOR THE M CODE INSERTION SCREEN

[INSERT] [INPUT]
[CLOSE] [CAN]
6.10 SHORTCUTS FOR THE PROGRAM LIST SCREEN

[OPEN] [INPUT] or [9]
[CLOSE] [CAN] or [0]
[DELETE] [DELETE] or [3]
[EDTCOM] [ALTER] or [4]
[NEW] [1]
[COPY] [2]
[SEARCH] [5]
[M CARD] [6]
[ALLDEL] [7]
- 124 -
CONVENIENT

[SRTORD] [8]
6.11 INVALIDATION OF SHORTCUT KEY OPERATIONS

Shortcut key operation by a numeric key can be invalidated on the program list window.
6.11.1 Operation of Shortcut Key

(1) Invalid shortcut key operation
Shortcut key by a numeric key becomes invalid. In this case, <INPUT>, <INSERT>, <ALTER>, and
<DELETE> keys on the MDI keyboard can be used.
(2) Screen affected by the invalidation of shortcut key operations

The shortcut key operation becomes invalid, when the following windows are displayed
- Program list window
- Memory card list window
This function does not affect other screens. It does not affect the sub-windows opened from the Program
list and Memory card list windows, too.
6.12 SHORTCUTS FOR THE PROGRAM CREATION SCREEN

[CREATE] [INPUT]
[CANCEL] [EOB]
6.13 SHORTCUTS FOR THE COMMENT EDITING SCREEN

[CREATE] [INPUT]
[CANCEL] [EOB]
6.14 SHORTCUTS FOR THE SEARCH SCREEN

[SEARCH] [INPUT]
[CANCEL] [EOB]
6.15 SHORTCUTS FOR THE CYCLE INPUT SCREEN

[INSERT] [INSERT]
[ALTER] [ALTER]
[CANCEL] [EOB]
[SF1] [1]
[SF2] [2]
[SF3] [3]
[SF4] [4]
- 125 -
CONVENIENT

[SF5] [5]
[SF6] [6]
[SF7] [7]
[SF8] [8]
[SF9] [9]
[SF0] [0]
[>] [.]+[INPUT]
6.16 SHORTCUT FOR THE WORKPIECE COORDINATE

SYSTEM SETTING SCREEN
[CLOSE] [EOB]
6.17 SHORTCUT FOR THE TOOL OFFSET SETTING SCREEN

[CLOSE] [EOB]
6.18 SHORTCUTS FOR THE REGULAR PROGRAM

REGISTRATION SCREEN
[CLOSE] [INPUT]
[NEW] [INSERT]
[DELETE] [DELETE]
[ALTER] [ALTER]
6.19 SHORTCUTS FOR THE CREATION SCREEN FOR

REGULAR PROGRAM REGISTRATION
[INSERT] [INSERT]
[ADD] [ALTER]
[CANCEL] [EOB]
6.20 SHORTCUTS FOR THE ALTER SCREEN FOR REGULAR

PROGRAM REGISTRATION
[ALTER] [ALTER]
[CANCEL] [EOB]
- 126 -
CONVENIENT
6.21 SHORTCUTS FOR THE PRESET SCREEN

[ALTER] [ALTER]
[CANCEL] [EOB]
6.22 SHORTCUT FOR THE MEASUREMENT RESULT SCREEN

[CLOSE] [CAN]
6.23 SHORTCUT FOR THE MANUAL MEASUREMENT

SCREEN
[CLOSE] [EOB]
6.24 SHORTCUT FOR VARIOUS SETTING SCREENS

[CLOSE] [EOB]
6.25 SHORTCUTS FOR THE FREE FIGURE MAIN SCREEN

[CREATE] [INPUT]
[CANCEL] [CAN]
[DELETE] [DELETE]
[ALTER] [ALTER]
[<] [-]
[SF1] [1]
[SF2] [2]
[SF3] [3]
[SF4] [4]
[SF5] [5]
[SF6] [6]
[SF7] [7]
[SF8] [8]
[SF9] [9]
[SF10] [0]
[>] [.]
6.26 SHORTCUTS FOR THE FREE FIGURE INPUT SCREEN

[OK] [INSERT]
[CANCEL] [EOB]
- 127 -
CONVENIENT
6.27 SHORTCUTS FOR THE FREE FIGURE CREATION

SCREEN
[OK] [INSERT]
[CANCEL] [EOB]
- 128 -
7.INPUT OF DIRECTION
CONVENIENT ALONG THE LAYOUT OF
B-63874EN/11 FUNCTIONS NUMERIC KEYS
7 INPUT OF DIRECTION ALONG THE

LAYOUT OF NUMERIC KEYS
The following directions can be inputted along the layout of numeric keys of MDI unit.
(1) Direction for line in line-insert window of arbitrary figure input.

(2) Direction for division of machining range in range selection window of arbitrary figure input.
(3) Direction for line in line-insert window of free contour cylinder blank figure input
(4) Direction for line in line-insert window of contour program input
Numeric keys of MDI unit
- 129 -
CONVENIENT
8.HELP SCREEN FUNCTIONS B-63874EN/11
8 HELP SCREEN
Pressing the <HELP> key on the MDI keyboard displays the HELP window, in which explanations for
shortcut key operation are displayed.
In the window, “CONTENTS” and “TOPIC” tabs are displayed.
Moving the cursor key <↑> or <↓>, place the cursor to the item of shortcut key to display the
explanation.
Pressing the cursor key <→> displays the tab “TOPIC” tab and explanation of the selected shortcut key.
Pressing the cursor key <←> returns to “CONTENTS” tab.
Pressing [CLOSE] closes the HELP window.
- 130 -
CONVENIENT 9.OPERATION NAVIGATING
B-63874EN/11 FUNCTIONS FUNCTION
9 OPERATION NAVIGATING FUNCTION

An unaccustomed operator can program MANUAL GUIDE i program in correct order because windows
for next operation are displayed automatically.
9.1 START METHOD FOR OPERATION NAVIGATING

Operation navigating starts by one of following methods.
Refer to the manual published by the machine tool builder about which method is effective.
9.1.1 First Method of Start

( “SELECT NAVIGATION” window is displayed )
(1) Push [NAVI] soft-key.
START CYCLE END MESCYC ALTER FIGURE NAVI M CODE FIXFRM
(2) “SELECT NAVIGATION” window is displayed.

( Example of window )
SELECT NAVIGATION
TURNING MILLING
1. CREATE NEW PROGRAM

2. INSERT COMMANDS BEFORE MACHINING
3. INSERT CYCLE COMMANDS
4. INSERT COMMANDS AFTER MACHINING
5. MACHINING SIMULATION
6. PROGRAMMING TURNING
(3) Push [START] soft-key after selecting an item by MDI key and operation navigating starts.
START CANCEL
9.1.2 Second Method of Start

( “SELECT NAVIGATION” window isn’t displayed )
Push [NAVI] soft-key and operation navigating starts.
START CYCLE END MESCYC ALTER FIGURE NAVI M CODE FIXFRM
- 131 -
9. OPERATION NAVIGATING CONVENIENT
FUNCTION FUNCTIONS B-63874EN/11
9.2 OPERATION WHILE NAVIGATION IS EFFECTIVE

When a window is closed by pushing soft-key during operation navigating, the window for next operation
is displayed automatically.
And the icon of compass is displayed in the edge of left lower of MANUAL GUIDE i screen during
operation navigating.
NOTE
1 Operate by soft-keys during operation navigating. When a window is closed by
pushing other keys than soft-keys, the window for next operation is not
displayed.
2 When a window isn’t closed because a warning occurs by incorrect input data or
other causes, the window for next operation is not displayed.
3 It is necessary to set parameter No.14853#6 to 1 to use this function.
4 Operation navigating is available in only EDIT mode or MEM mode ( background
editing ).
The soft key [NAVI] is not displayed when one of the other modes is selected.
9.3 THE METHOD TO FINISH OPERATION NAVIGATING

Each of the following operations is done, operation navigating is finished.
(1) Completing operation navigating

(2) Changing to the NC screen
(3) Changing mode
(4) Changing selected path
(5) Cutting power supply
9.4 OPERATION WHEN STANDARD OPERATION

NAVIGATING DATA ARE USED
Some windows are automatically displayed along a basic flow of programming when the standard
operation navigating data are used.
< Operation in case of lathe >

(1) Push soft-key [NAVI] and the following window is displayed.
[ Displayed window ]
SELECT NAVIGATION
TURNING
1. PROGRAMMING OF TURNING
(2) Order of displaying window
- 132 -
CONVENIENT 9.OPERATION NAVIGATING
B-63874EN/11 FUNCTIONS FUNCTION
After the cursor is placed on “1. PROGRAMMING OF TURNING” and soft-key [START] is
pushed, windows are displayed in order of followings.
(a) CREATE NEW PROGRAM OR NEW FOLDER

(b) INSERT STARTING COMMAND FOR MILLING ( The menu for blanks. )
(c) INSERT STARTING COMMAND FOR MILLING ( The menu for fixed form
sentences. )
(d) INSERT MILLING CYCLE
(e) INSERT MILLING FIGURE
(f) Returning to (4). After this, the procedure is repeated.
( If [CANCEL] soft-key is pushed, the repeat is ended. )
< Operation in case of machining center >

(1) Push soft-key [NAVI] and the following window is displayed.
[ Displayed window ]
SELECT NAVIGATION
MILLING
1. PROGRAMMING OF MILLING
(2) Order of displaying window

After the cursor is placed on “1. PROGRAMMING OF MILLING” and [START] soft-key is
pushed, windows are displayed in order of followings.
(a) CREATE NEW PROGRAM OR NEW FOLDER

(b) INSERT STARTING COMMAND FOR MILLING ( The menu for blanks. )
(c) INSERT STARTING COMMAND FOR MILLING
( The menu for fixed form sentences. )
(d) INSERT MILLING CYCLE
(e) INSERT MILLING FIGURE
(f) Returning to (4). After this, the procedure is repeated.
( If [CANCEL] soft-key is pushed, the repeat is ended. )
- 133 -
10.ADVANCED GUIDANCE
FUNCTION(for only Series CONVENIENT
0i-F/30i/31i/32i-B) FUNCTIONS B-63874EN/11
10 ADVANCED GUIDANCE FUNCTION (for

only Series 0i-F/30i/31i/32i-B)
The following functions are included in MANUAL GUIDE i advanced guidance function.
(1) Decomposed display
(2) Input data check by simulation
(3) Help-window function
(4) Cooperation with animated software with PANEL i
The following option is necessary to use MANUAL GUIDE i advanced guidance function.
- MANUAL GUIDE i advanced guidance function : S774
10.1 DECOMPOSED CYCLE DISPLAY

On machining simulation screen, this function can display the program which is decomposed to move
commands during machining simulation. By this function, the operator can check details of the movement
of machining cycle easily.
Decomposed
cycle display
10.1.1 Method of Displaying the Decomposed Cycle Display Screen

Press soft key [STYLE] on machining simulation screen.
SPEED－ SPEED＋ STYLE WK SET T-OFS
- 134 -
CONVENIENT FUNCTION(for only Series
B-63874EN/11 FUNCTIONS 0i-F/30i/31i/32i-B)
10.1.2 Condition
It is necessary for this function to satisfy the following conditions.
(1) Parameter No.27313#0 = 0
(2) Foreground operation is not executed.
(3) A new program can be created.
(4) Capacity of the unused program memory is enough.
10.1.3 Restriction
(1) When the decomposed cycle display is executed during foreground operation, warning is displayed.
However, foreground operation and machining simulation are not interrupted.
(2) If a new program can not be created on machining simulation of the decomposed cycle display,
warning is displayed, when machining cycle is executed.
(3) If capacity of the unused program memory is not enough on machining simulation of the
decomposed cycle display, warning is displayed, when machining cycle is executed.
10.2 INPUT DATA CHECK BY SIMULATION

The operation of a cycle that is being edited can be checked by machining simulation (animation / tool
path drawing ) while cycle data input screen is displayed.
- 135 -
10.2.1 Condition
It is possible to use this function on the following conditions.
(1) MANUAL GUDIE i screen can be operated on only first path. Concretely, it is the case that one of
following conditions is met.
<1> “MANUAL GUIDE i Multi Path function” is invalid.
<2> Parameter No.14864 = 1 (MANUAL GUIDE i is valid on only first path.), parameter
No.27401#0 - #1 = 0 and parameter No.27402#0 - #1 = 0.(Turret 2 and 3 are unavailable.)
(2) A program can be newly made.
NOTE
In case a program can’t be made (ex. The number of registered program is
maximum), a warning is generated when this function is starting up.
(3) Available program memory size > program size of the machining simulation execution range
NOTE
If available program memory size is not enough, a warning is generated when
this function is starting up.
(4) Edit mode is selected.

(5) While multi part program editing is not used.
(6) Program window size is quarter of screen.
(7) Parameter No.27313#2 = 0
10.2.2 Operational Procedure

(1) Push [CHECK] soft-key while cycle data input screen is displayed. Then, after a message
“PREPARING” is displayed on the part of guidance, soft-keys for machining simulation
( [REWIND], [START] and so on) are displayed.
(2) Next, push [START] soft-key. Machining simulation is started and input data can be checked. And,
the following function for machining simulation can be used in this window.
<1> Rewind (Note : This is rewind function for execution pointer of machining simulation. Editing
pointer is not rewinded.)
<2> Machining simulation start, stop and pause
<3> Cut display of workpiece
<4> Rotation, scaling and movement of drawing coordinate
10.2.3 Available Screen

(1) Machining cycle data input screen
<1> Machining type
<2> Fixed form figure
(2) Measurement cycle data input screen
(3) Coordinate system conversion cycle
(4) Tilted working plane machining
(5) Mirror
(6) Rotation
(7) Scaling
(8) Figure copy
- 136 -
10.2.4 Execution Range of Input Data Check by Simulation

Execution range of input data check by simulation is as following table.
The editing cycle
Execution range
Classification 1 Classification 2 Classification 3
Possible to execute Top of program -
without figure command The editing cycle
Command of
Top of program -
machining type Impossible to execute
Machining cycle Figure command corresponding the
without figure command
editing cycle
Command of figure Top of program -
( Fixed form figure ) The editing cycle
Top of program -
Measurement cycle
The editing cycle
Coordinate system
conversion cycle
Tilted working plane
machining Top of program -
Mirror Cancel command of the mode
Scaling
Rotation
Figure copy
- 137 -
10.3 HELP WINDOW ACCORDING TO EACH SCREEN
10.3.1 Outline
Help window according to each screen is displayed by pressing <HELP> key while displaying the cycle
input window.
- 138 -
10.3.2 Condition
(1) Available display unit

PANEL i
(2) Necessary parameter setting

Please set parameter HLP(No.27313#3) to 1.
(3) Necessary software/data

Please install the following items in PANEL i.
- CNC screen display function (software : A02B-0207-K775) which supports this function.
- Displayed data in help window.
(4) Available languages

- Japanese
- English
- German
10.3.3 Restriction
(1) Even if <HELP> key is pushed while displaying input window of cycle which is not supported, Help
window is not displayed.
(2) Even if <HELP> key is pushed while selecting the language which is not supported, Help window is
not displayed.
10.4 COOPERATION WITH ANIMATED SOFTWARE THAT IS

OPERATED WITH PANEL i
10.4.1 Outline
It is possible to change from MANUAL GUIDE i screen to the screen of commercial animated software
by pressing the soft-key.
10.4.2 Condition

PANEL i
(2) Necessary parameter
Please set the following parameters.
Parameter to make this function effective
- Parameter No.27313#4 = 1
- Parameter No.14489
(3) Necessary software/data
Please install the following items in PANEL i.
- CNC screen display function (software : A02B-0207-K775) which supports this function.
(4) Necessary setting of CNC screen display function
- 139 -
Please set the execution file of activating application to the following registries.
< Registry >

Preservation of setting of
Registry key
CNC screen display function
Common HKEY_CURRENT_USER¥Software¥FANUC¥CNCScrn¥MGiAnimeLink¥
Every connection destination
HKEY_CURRENT_USER¥Software¥FANUC¥CNCScrn¥NodeX¥MGiAnimeLink¥
(Node)
(NodeX : Node0 to Node7)
< Set item >

Name Type Data
ProgramName REG_SZ Execution file of application
In the case that the argument is specified for the execution file of the application, "%d" in the
character string is replaced as the node number of CNC. When you want to represent "%" in itself,
please describe as "%%".
- 140 -
10.4.3 Operation
Commercial animated software is displayed by pressing [SIMLAT] soft-key. A machining simulation
screen of MANUAL GUIDE i is not displayed.
By pressing [SIMLAT] soft-key
Commercial animated software screen
- 141 -
MANUAL GUIDE i screen is displayed by closing commercial animated software.
Commercial animated software screen
By closing commercial animated software
10.4.4 Restriction
(1) Commercial animated software has to access the tape storage memory of CNC, and acquire to the
machining program, because MANUAL GUIDE i does not output the machining program to
commercial animated software side.
(2) When the screen of commercial animated software shuts, MANUAL GUIDE i screen is displayed.
- 142 -
IV. MACHINING CYCLE
B-63874EN/11 MACHINING CYCLE 1.OVERVIEW
1 OVERVIEW
The following shows the flow of programming a machining cycle by using MANUAL GUIDE i:
Select machining cycle
Enter machining cycle data
Select figures
Enter fixed form/arbitrary figure data
Modify machining cycle/figure data
1.1 SELECTING A MACHINING CYCLE TYPE

Press the leftmost soft key [<] or rightmost soft key [>] several times to display the machining cycle soft
key menu shown below.
There are two types of soft keys: soft keys for milling and soft keys for turning.
Press soft key [CYCLE] to display the machining cycle menu. The following soft keys are displayed:
SELECT CANCEL
Select a machining cycle using the cursor keys.

(Select a machining cycle group, using the cursor keys <←> and <→>, and then select a machining cycle
type from the machining cycle group, using the cursor keys <↑> and <↓>.
Pressing soft key[SELECT] displays the data entry window for the selected machining cycle type.
(After a menu number is inputted, it is possible that machining cycle is selected by pressing <INPUT>
key.)
- 145 -
1.OVERVIEW MACHINING CYCLE B-63874EN/11
NOTE
The scroll bar displayed on the right edge of the machining cycle menu window
indicates the approximate position of the cursor throughout the machining cycle
menu.
If the scroll bar marker is on the middle of the scroll bar, therefore, it is likely that
part of the machining cycle menu is hidden behind the window. If this is the
case, pressing the cursor key <↓> makes the hidden part visible.
1.2 ENTERING MACHINING CYCLE DATA

The machining cycle data entry window is divided into two sections, one section for cutting conditions
and the other for detailed data.
CUT COND. DETAIL
Pressing the cursor key <←> or <→> switches between the two sections and changes the displayed tab.
The character in the selected tab is displayed in blue.
(1) Selecting an input item

Pressing the cursor key <↑> or <↓> can place the cursor on a desired data input item.
Example of the machining cycle data entry window

BOTTOM THICKNESS T= 20
CUT DEPTH OF AXIS J=3.
BOTTOM FINISH AMOUNT H=0.2
SIDE FINISH AMOUNT K=0.3
FEED RATE F=100
CLEARANCE OF AXIS C=0.2
(2) Entering data

There are two types of data input items. One type includes those entered as numbers, and the other
type, those selected from a menu displayed using a soft key. For the first type, the message "KEY IN
NUMERALS." is displayed in the lower section of the window. For the second type, the message
"SELECT SOFT KEY" is displayed.
Necessary data can be entered by referencing a comment for the data input item and a guide chart
displayed in the window.
(3) Inserting entered data into the program

The following soft keys are displayed for the machining cycle data window.
CHCURS INSERT CANCEL
When completing the entry of necessary data, press soft key [INSERT] to insert the entered data
(machining cycle block) into the program.
- 146 -
NOTE
1 Among the data item displayed in the cutting condition window, there are data
should be danger if they are set automatically such as cutting amount or
feedrate. These data should be entered by an operator always. Other data are
set automatically.
2 Data items displayed in the detail window are usually set automatically by
duplicating the value entered last time. So, check these automatically set value
and modify them if necessary.
3 Executing machining cycle requires a machining cycle block and a figure block,
which will be explained later.
Once a machining cycle block has been entered, therefore, be sure to enter a
figure block in succession.
4 A data item with an asterisk displayed at its right end has a default value. You
need to enter no data if you accept the default value.
5 The [CHCURS] soft key is displayed in data entry windows for machining cycle,
figure, and contour programs.
Pressing this soft key can select whether the cursor keys <←> and <→> are to
be used for tab switching or cursor movement within the entered data. If tab
switching is selected, "Tab ←→" is displayed in the upper right section of the
window. If cursor movement is selected, "Character ←→" is displayed.
6 Initial values automatically set in the data entry window
In the data entry window for a blank figure block or tool definition block,
previously entered data is automatically set as initial values.
Therefore, the operator must enter data only once for the first time; in the second
and subsequent operations, the entered data is then set as initial values.
Because figure data depends on the drawing data, initial values are not set
automatically in the figure data entry window.
7 Automatically copied tool definition block
When the tool database function is not used, a tool definition block in the
drawing definition menu must be specified before a milling cycle or turning cycle
is specified.
Data of the tool definition block can then be copied and automatically set as
initial values of tool condition data for each cycle.
The operator therefore needs to enter only a tool definition block; the operator
need not enter tool condition data in subsequent cycle menus.
The following tool definition block data is copied:
• Milling tool
(1) Tool diameter (D)
• Turning tool
(1) Tool-nose radius (R)
(2) Tool angle (A)
(3) Tool angle (B)
1.3 SELECTING FIGURES

When a machining cycle block is entered, a machining cycle figure menu is displayed.
The menu shows only figures that can be used for the previously entered machining cycle.
The cycle figure menu window is divided into two sections, one section for selecting figure and the other
for subprogram.
- 147 -
(Example of tab for pocketing)

POCKET FIG SUBPROGRAM
(1) Selecting a figure from the figure selection window

When the figure selection window is selected, the characters of the tab are displayed in blue. Select a
desired figure by moving the cursor with the cursor keys <↑> and <↓>.
SELECT CANCEL
Pressing soft key [SELECT] displays a data entry window for the selected figure. (Figures for
machining cycles are classified into the following two major types.)
Fixed form figure :
Fixed form figure is predefined figure such as square and circle, and can be specified by
entering minimum data such as side length or circle radius.
Free form figure :
Free form figure is specified by entering figures by line or arc along the figures written on a
blue print one by one.
(2) Selecting a figure from the subprogram window
Pressing the cursor key <→> displays the subprogram window with its tab characters displayed in
blue.
The subprogram window shows a list of the subprogram numbers and names of figure blocks
registered as subprograms in advance.
Select a subprogram to be used by moving the cursor to the subprogram with the cursor keys <↑>
and <↓>.
Pressing soft key [SELECT] create the block for calling the selected subprogram as “M98 Pxxxx ;”
in the actual part program.
(It is specified by program number to be displayed in the subprogram menu or not.
For turning machining cycle figure, the minimum and maximum program number of the programs
should be used as the subprogram are set in the parameter No.14720 (TFIGSNO) and No.14721
(TFIGENO).
For milling machining cycle figure, the minimum and maximum program number of the programs
should be used as the subprogram are set in the parameter No.14722 (MFIGSNO) and No.14723
(MFIGENO).
Subprogram whose number is within these range is displayed in the subprogram menu for turning or
milling cycle figure.)
(3) Entering another figure block in succession
To enter an additional figure block after entering machining cycle and figure block data, press
[FIGURE] among the displayed soft keys shown below to display a figure menu, then select a
necessary figure.
Different from the menu displayed for entering machining cycle data, the figure menu displayed here
shows all menu items.
- 148 -
NOTE
The scroll bar displayed on the right edge of the figure menu window indicates
the approximate position of the cursor throughout the figure menu.
If the scroll bar marker is on the middle of the scroll bar, therefore, it is likely that
part of the figure menu is hidden behind the window. If this is the case, pressing
the cursor key <↓> makes the hidden part visible.
1.4 ENTERING FIXED FORM FIGURE DATA

Selecting the fixed form figure displays the data entry window for machining cycle fixed form data entry
window.
(1) Selecting a tab

A data entry window for hole positions, fixed form figures (milling), turning groove figures, or
screw figures (turning) may be extended over two pages as necessary.
Pressing the cursor key <←> or <→> switches between the two pages. It also changes the displayed
tab.
(2) Selecting an input item
Pressing the cursor key <↑> or <↓> can place the cursor on a desired data input item.
(3) Entering data
Necessary data can be entered by referencing a comment for the data input item and a guide chart
displayed in the window.
(4) Inserting the entered data into the program
The following soft keys are displayed for the fixed form figure data entry windows. For some data
items, soft keys for selection are displayed.
CONCAV NXTFIG INSERT CANCEL
When completing the entry of necessary data, press soft key [INSERT].
Soft key [INSERT] inserts the entered figure block into the program and displays the program
window.
(5) Entering another figure in succession
When another figure is to be entered in succession, press soft key [NXTFIG]. The entered figure
block is then inserted to the program, and the figure selection menu is displayed again.
NOTE
1 More than two figures can be entered in succession for a single machining cycle
type.
Machining cycle is executed for each of the specified figures sequentially.
- 149 -
NOTE
2 An ordinary ISO code block can be entered between machining cycle and figure
blocks. If this is done, no machining operation takes place in the machining cycle
block. Instead, the ISO code block entered before the figure block is executed.
Machining cycle is executed only in the figure block after the ISO code block has
been executed.
(6) Outputting entered data as a subprogram

When the entered figure data is to be output as a subprogram, follow the steps below.
(Before a fixed form figure data can be output as a subprogram, bit 1 (SBP) of parameter No. 14851
must be set to 1.)
<1> After completing the entry of necessary data, press soft key [INSERT].
CHCURS NXTFIG INSERT CANCEL
<2> A screen for selecting fixed form figure data as a subprogram is displayed as shown below.
When creating fixed form figure data as a subprogram, select "CREATE AS SUB
PROGRAM".
METHOD OF FREE FIGURE CREATION
○ INSERT IN CURRENT PROGRAM
◎ CREATE AS SUB PROGRAM
SELECT CREATIVE METHOD.
<3> If a comment is entered, the entered comment is added to the M98P**** block of the main
program and the subprogram at the time of program output.
<4> Pressing the [OK] soft key outputs a created fixed form figure program as a subprogram to the
machining program.
1.5 ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURE DATA

For machining cycle, an arbitrary figure consisting of circles and straight lines can be entered by
performing automatic calculation on entered data to obtain the end point of each figure even if no end
point is specified on the drawing.
(1) Entering start points

Be sure to enter a start point for the beginning of an arbitrary figure.
After entering necessary data, press soft key [OK].
(2) Selecting a figure
A menu for figure selection is displayed on soft keys as shown below. Select whatever is necessary.
LINE ARC ARC CR CC ALTER DELETE RECALC CREATE CANCEL
(3) Entering figure data

When a figure is selected, a figure data entry window appears. In this window, enter the figure data
specified on the drawing.
- 150 -
After entering the necessary data, press soft key [OK].
NOTE
As figures are entered, they are drawn in the figure entry window.
In the upper section of the window, symbols for entered figures are displayed
sequentially, starting at the left. The cursor key <←> or <→> can be used to
select an entered figure; the lines that correspond to the selected figure will be
displayed in yellow.
(4) Changing figure data

Place the cursor on the figure that contains the figure data you want to change, and press soft key
[ALTER]. The figure data entry window appears. In this window, place the cursor on the data input
item you want to change, and enter new data.
If you want to delete data, press the <CAN> and <INPUT> keys in the stated sequence.
Pressing soft key [OK] closes the figure data entry window. Press soft key [RECALC] to perform
calculation for all entered figures, and check drawn figures to see if the intended changes have been
made.
(5) Inserting new figures
After placing the cursor on the figure that precedes immediately the place where your want to add a
figure, select the figure to be added from the soft key menu.
In the figure data entry window that appears for the new figure, enter figure data necessary for the
figure, and press soft key [OK].
Press soft key [RECALC] to perform calculation for all entered figures, and check drawn figures to
see if the intended additions have been made.
(6) Deleting unnecessary figures
After placing the cursor on the figure you want to delete, press soft key [DELETE].
Press soft key [RECALC] to perform calculation for all entered figures, and check drawn figures to
see if the intended deletions have been made.
(7) Changing figures
If you want to change the type of an entered figure, delete it and enter a new figure.
(8) Writing entered arbitrary figures to machining programs
After all necessary figures have been entered, they can be written to machining programs.
There are two methods for writing figures to machining programs. The first method writes directly
to the currently selected machining program. The second method writes to a newly created
subprogram.
After necessary data has been entered, pressing soft key [CREATE] displays a window for selecting
one of the creation methods. Select whichever creation method you want, using the cursor keys <↑>
and <↓> .
To write to the machining program that has been selected, simply press soft key [OK].
To create a subprogram, enter a new subprogram number to the subprogram number item, and then
press the <INPUT> key. You can enter character strings as a comment if necessary. The comment is
displayed as a program name in the list window.
Pressing soft key [OK] now creates a subprogram and writes figures to the subprogram.
NOTE
See Chapter 5, "ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES," for descriptions about
data for arbitrary figures for machining cycle.
- 151 -
1.6 CHANGING MACHINING CYCLE AND FIGURE DATA

To change the contents of a machining cycle and fixed form figure, place the cursor on the related block,
and press soft key [ALTER].
To change the contents of an arbitrary figure and contour program, place the cursor at the first of the
related blocks, and press soft key [ALTER].
In any case, a data entry window for these items appears. After making the necessary data changes, press
soft key [CREATE] in the same manner as for new entry. New figures are written to the machining
program.
1.7 NOTES ON CREATING PROGRAMS

This section provides notes on creating programs. Read the notes before creating a program.
(1) Programmed commands required before machining cycle input

(a) When using a tool database with a CNC of the M series, be sure to enter a D command (offset
number).
(b) Be sure to enter a spindle rotation command. At the same time, specify whether to enable or
disable constant surface speed control.
(c) No feedrate command needs to be specified, because a feedrate command is separately entered
as a machining cycle command. However, specify a command for feed per revolution or feed
per minute as required. For example, operator know-how on executing milling in pocketing by
feed per revolution can be utilized.
(d) Enter an M code command for switching between the spindle and C-axis, and a command for
C-axis reference position return as required.
(e) Enter M codes such as for coolant ON/OFF as required.
(f) By setting bit 2 (MC2) of parameter No. 27000 to 1, a polar coordinate interpolation command
(G12.1) required for machining (polar coordinate interpolation) on the XC plane can be
automatically specified during machining cycle. Upon completion of the machining cycle,
polar coordinate interpolation is automatically cancelled.
(g) By setting bit 3 (MC7) of parameter No. 27000 to 1, a cylindrical interpolation command
(G07.1) required for machining (cylindrical interpolation) on the ZC plane can be automatically
specified during machining cycle. Upon completion of the machining cycle, cylindrical
interpolation is automatically cancelled.
(h) Upon completion of machining cycle, the tool always returns to the position before the start of
the machining cycle. By setting bit 7 (ESC) of parameter No. 27002 to 1, the tool can be
prevented from returning to the position before the start of the machining cycle.
(i) When using G code system B or C with a CNC of the T series (T mode for a CNC for complex
machining) and specifying machining cycle (turning or milling), be sure to switch to the
absolute coordinate system by specifying G90 beforehand.
(j) For the machining cycle mentioned above, a similar command is repeatedly entered. So, such a
command can be entered easily by registering a fixed form sentence beforehand.
(2) Machining cycle

(a) With a CNC of the T series as well, enter a coordinate value for milling (such as an I point
coordinate in milling-based hole machining) as a radius value even if the value is an X
coordinate.
(b) Specify an I point coordinate not as a distance from point R but as a coordinate value.
(c) Figure data should be entered as a subprogram for utilization in roughing, finishing, and
chamfering. This eliminates the need to enter figure data each time.
(d) In machining of a projected portion (island figure), efficient machining can be achieved by
using pocketing with an island instead of using contouring. In this case, specify a blank as the
outer wall of a pocket.
- 152 -
(e) In contouring (side facing), enter a start point figure and end point figure so that both figures
contact each other. This means that by starting not from a corner of a figure but from an
intermediate point on a straight line, undercutting due to approaching the figure and retraction
can be eliminated.
(f) If the C-axis operates as the hole machining axis in an attempt to execute hole machining by
using the C-axis as the positioning axis, the C-axis may be set as an axis parallel to the X-axis
with parameter No. 1022. In such a case, set the parameters below to execute hole machining in
the axis direction normal to the plane including the C-axis.
When the bit 0 (FXY) of parameter No. 5101 is set to 1 :
The hole machining axis in a hole machining canned cycle is the third axis for plane
specification.
When the bit 2 (DCY) of parameter No. 5103 is set to 1 :
If an axis normal to or parallel with a specified plane is specified during a hole machining
canned cycle, the specification is regarded as a positioning command.
(g) With a CNC of the T series as well, enter a coordinate value for milling (such as an I point
coordinate in milling-based hole machining) as a radius value even if the value is an X
coordinate.
- 153 -
2.TURNING CYCLE MACHINING CYCLE B-63874EN/11
2 TURNING CYCLE
With MANUAL GUIDE i, the machining cycles listed below are available for turning.
Hole machining (workpiece rotation)

G1100 Center drilling
G1101 Drilling
G1102 Tapping
Machining command block
G1103 Reaming
G1104 Boring
G1105 Fine boring
Turning
G1120 Outer surface roughing
G1121 Inner surface roughing
G1122 End face roughing
G1123 Outer surface semifinishing
G1124 Inner surface semifinishing
G1125 End face semifinishing
Machining command block G1126 Outer surface finishing
G1127 Inner surface finishing
G1128 End face finishing
G1129 Conical Boring
G1150 Outer surface roughing and finishing
G1151 Inner surface roughing and finishing
G1152 End face roughing and finishing
Figure for turning

G1450 Start point
G1451 Straight line
G1452 Arc (CW)
Turning figure block
G1453 Arc (CCW)
(ZX plane)
G1454 Chamfer
G1456 End
Residual machining
G1160 Outer surface residual roughing
G1161 Inner surface residual roughing
G1162 End face residual roughing
G1163 Outer surface residual semifinishing
Machining command block G1164 Inner surface residual semifinishing
G1165 End face residual semifinishing
G1166 Outer surface residual finishing
G1167 Inner surface residual finishing
G1168 End face residual finishing
- 154 -
B-63874EN/11 MACHINING CYCLE 2.TURNING CYCLE
Turning groove
G1130 Outer surface roughing
G1131 Inner surface roughing
G1132 End face roughing
G1133 Outer surface roughing and finishing
Machining command block G1134 Inner surface roughing and finishing
G1135 End face roughing and finishing
G1136 Outer surface finishing
G1137 Inner surface finishing
G1138 End face finishing
Figure for turning groove

G1470 Outer normal groove
G1471 Outer trapezoidal groove
Groove figure block G1472 Inner normal groove
(ZX plane) G1473 Inner trapezoidal groove
G1474 End face normal groove
G1475 End face trapezoidal groove
Threading
G1140 Outer surface
G1141 Inner surface
G1460 General-purpose thread
G1461 Metric thread
Thread figure block
G1462 Unified thread
(ZX plane)
G1463 PT thread
G1464 PF thread
NOTE
1 When machining cycles are input with MANUAL GUIDE i, sets of a machining
type block and figure blocks must be input in succession for all machining cycles
except turning hole machining.
For one machining type block, multiple figure blocks can be input.
However, multiple sets of arbitrary figures can be input, with one set including up
to 50 figures enclosed between a start point and end block.
2 There is no figure block for residual machining. For details, see Section 2.7,
"RESIDUAL MACHINING BY TURNING".
3 For each item marked with [*] in the tables below, a standard value is
automatically set if no value is input.
The screen displays [*] to the right of a data item.
4 In some of the input data items, the system sets the last inputted data as an
initial data. As to these input data items, the mark of “(COPY)” was described.
- 155 -
NOTE
5 The motions go back to the start point where the machining cycle started after
completing the all machining cycles.
(It is possible not to go back the start point when the bit 7 (ESC) of parameter
No.27102 is set to 1.)
6 On the CNC for lathe turning with G-code system B or C, when machining cycle
is specified, G90 must be specified in advance to make a switchover to the
absolute coordinate system. For hole machining by turning (with the tool
rotated), G98 (initial level return) or G99 (R position level return) must be
specified in advance.
7 In case that blank figure is jutting out of part figure like the following drawing,
cycle machining cannot be performed.
：Blank figure element

：Part figure element
Remarks)
Cycle retract motions
In case of bit 7 (ESC) of parameter No.27102 = 0, Retracting motions indicated as broken lines in
the following drawing will be outputted. The order of motion axis will be opposite to the approached
motions
Retracting motion of a
machining cycle Position where the
machining cycle
started
Approaching motions
of a machining cycle
In case of carrying out plural figures machining by one G4 digit cycle, such like grooving, this
retracting motions will be available at the last figure machining.
- 156 -
2.1 HOLE MACHINING (WORKPIECE ROTATION)
2.1.1 Machining Command

NOTE
Hole machining (workpiece rotation) is performed only at the center of a
workpiece. So, unlike other machining cycles, figure blocks cannot be specified.
(1) Input items of CENTER DRILLING (G1100)
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
C CLEARANCE Distance between the surface of a workpiece and point R (radius value,
positive value) (COPY)
F FEED RATE Cutting feedrate (positive value) (COPY)
P* DWELL TIME Dwell time at the bottom of a hole (in seconds, positive value) (COPY)
Z APPROCH MOTION [Z→X] : From the current position to the machining start point, the tool
moves in the Z-axis direction and then in the X-axis direction.
[X→Z] : From the current position to the machining start point, the tool
(initial value)
[2 AXES] : From the current position to the machining start point, the tool
moves simultaneously in the X- and Z-axis directions.
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
B BASE POSITION Z coordinate of the surface of a workpiece
L CUT DEPTH Hole depth (radius value, negative value)
(2) Input items of drilling (G1101)
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
Q* PECKING CUT DEPT Depth of cut per drilling operation (radius value, positive value) (COPY)
(Note)
H*/K* GO PATH AMOUNT SET One of the following is displayed according to the setting of bit 0 (HL0) of
/ GO PAST AMOUNT parameter No. 27020.
- GO PAST AMOUNT : HL0 (No.27020#0)=0
Length of the incomplete hole at the tip of the tool (radius value, positive
value) (COPY)
- GO PATH AMOUNT SET : HL0 (No.27020#0)=1
If soft key “SETING” is selected, “GO PAST AMOUNT” is displayed on the
[DETAIL] tab. In addition, input items “TOOL DIAMETER” and “NOSE
ANGLE” are displayed.
P* DWELL TIME Dwell time at the bottom of a hole (in seconds) (COPY)
Z APPROCH MOTION See CENTER DRILLING : G1100.
- 157 -
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
U TOOL DIAMETER Tool diameter
V NOSE ANGLE Tool angle
K GO PAST AMOUNT Enter the tool diameter and tool angle, then press soft key [CALC]. The value
automatically calculated is then assigned to this item.
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
A* START CUT DEPTH Cutting depth in case of cutting by changing a federate at the start of cutting
S* START FEED RATE Feedrate in case of cutting by changing a federate at the start of cutting
D* END CUT DEPTH Cutting depth in case of cutting by changing a federate at the end of cutting
E* END FEED RATE Feedrate in case of cutting by changing a feedrate at the end of cutting
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
R PECKING CLEARANCE Pecking clearance
When this item is blank, pecking clearance is value of parameter No.5115.
*) If bit 4 of parameter No. 27195, bit 2 of parameter No.5101 are set to 1,

PECKING CLEARANCE is displayed on the DETAIL tab.
NOTE
The system refers to the parameter No.5114 as the return amount. Therefore,
please set parameter No.5114 to the suitable value before machining.
(3) Input items of tapping (G1102)
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
W MACHINING TYPE Displayed when bit 0 (WRV) of parameter No. 27195 is set to 1.
[NORMAL]: Specifies normal tapping
[REVERS]: Specifies reverse tapping
R TAP TYPE [FLOAT] : Specifies the float tap.
[RIGID] : Specifies the rigid tap. (Note)
D THREAD LEAD Lead of a tapping tool (radius value, positive value) (COPY)
Z APPROCH MOTION See the descriptions about Center drilling: G1100.
S SPINDLE SPEED Spindle speed (min-1)
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
- 158 -
NOTE
1 When you use the rigid tapping M code command (bit 0 (G84) of No.5200 = 0),
the system refers to the parameter No.5210 or No.5212 as M code. Therefore,
please set parameter No.5210 or No.5212 to the suitable value before
machining.
2 Depending on whether the rigid tapping option is provided or not and on the
setting of bit 0 (G84) of parameter No. 5200, the displayed types and the initial
value vary as follows:
(1) If the rigid tapping option is provided and bit 0 (G84) of parameter No. 5200
is set to 0, FLOAT and RIGID are displayed, and the rigid tapping is set as
the initial value.
(2) If the rigid tapping option is provided and bit 0 (G84) of parameter No. 5200
is set to 1, only RIGID is displayed, and the rigid tapping is set as the initial
value.
(a) Reverse tapping

In tapping cycle machining with a lathe (tapping by rotating the workpiece or tool), reverse tapping can
be performed. This function is enabled when bits 1 (TRV) and 0 (WRV) of parameter No. 27195 are
set to 1.
To specify reverse tapping, move the cursor to “MACHINING TYPE W” in the cutting condition menu
of tapping to display soft keys [NORMAL] and [REVERS], then select one of these soft keys.
The specified machining type is programmed as follows:
G1102 W1/W2 . . . ; (workpiece rotation)
W1: Normal, W2: Reverse tap
G1112 W1/W2 . . . ; (tool rotation)
W1: NORMAL, W2: REVERSE TAP
(b) Operation of tapping by rotating the workpiece

When this function is enabled, executing G1102 specifies the commands shown below. (G-code system
A is used for coding.)
(i) Float tapping

:
M (n-th spindle reverse rotation pre-tapping command);
M (n-th spindle forward rotation command);
G0X0 ; ·· Movement to hole position
Z_ ; ····· Movement to approach point
G84 Z_ R_ P_ F_ ; Tapping command
G80 ;
:
If the parameter for an M code specifying the reverse rotation pre-tapping command is not set when
reverse rotation tapping is specified, an alarm (PS3074 “NO M-CODE BEFORE TAP CYCLE”) is
issued.
- 159 -
(ii) Rigid tapping

:
G0X0 ; ·· ········ Movement to hole position
Z_ ; ····· ········ Movement to approach point
M (n-th spindle forward/reverse rotation pre-tapping command);
M_ S_ ; · ········ Rigid tapping mode command
G84 Z_ R_ P_ F_ ; Rigid tapping command
G80;
:
issued.
For details of the parameter, see the chapter explaining parameters.
(iii) Selected spindle

As explained above, the M code for pre-tapping and the M code for forward spindle rotation must be
output according to the currently selected spindle. So, the selected spindle number is specified from
the screen as follows:
• When this function is enabled, and more than one spindle is present (bit 1 (SUB) of parameter
No. 14702 = 1), “SPINDLE Q” is displayed in the detail menu as follows:
SPINDLE Q S1
• When this function enabled, and only one spindle is present (bit 1 (SUB) of parameter No.
14702 = 0), “SPINDLE Q” is not displayed.
• When the cursor is positioned at “SPINDLE Q”, soft keys [SPNDL1] and [SPNDL2] are
displayed. When one of the soft keys is pressed, the selected spindle number is displayed in
“SPINDLE Q”.
(Spindle 1 soft key icon) (Spindle 2 soft key icon)
S1 S2
• The spindle number specified above is programmed as follows:

G1102 W1 . . . . . Qn . . . ; (Tapping by rotating workpiece)
Qn = Q1: Spindle 1 selected, Q2: Spindle 2 selected
NOTE
When this function is enabled, an attempt to execute a G1102 block results
in the following if spindle number argument Q is not specified:
•When two or more spindles are used (bit 1 (SUB) of parameter No. 14702 =
1), the alarm 3073 “WRONG SPINDLE NUMBER” is issued.
• When only one spindle is used (bit 1 (SUB) of parameter No. 14702 = 0), the
block is executed on the assumption that spindle number 1 is specified.
(When parameters to be referenced are determined by spindle number, the
parameters for spindle number 1 are referenced.)
(c) Operation of tapping by rotating the tool

When this function is enabled, executing G1112 specifies the commands shown below. (G-code system
A is used for coding.)
- 160 -
(i) Float tapping

:
M (reverse tool rotation pre-tapping command for a tool post);
M (forward tool rotation command for a tool post);
G0_ ; ···· ············ Movement to first hole position
Z_ ; ····· ············ Movement to approach point
G84/88 Z_ R_ P_ F_ ; Tapping command
___ ;····· Movement to second hole position and tapping
:
G80 ;
:
issued.
(ii) Rigid tapping

:
G0_ ; ···· ············ Movement to first hole position
Z_ ; ····· ············ Movement to approach point
M(reverse tool rotation pre-tapping command for a tool post);
M_ S_ ; · Rigid tapping mode command
G84/88 Z_ R_ P_ F_ ; Rigid tapping command
___ ;····· Movement to second hole position
:
G80 ;
:
issued.
(4) Input items of reaming (G1103)
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
- 161 -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
A* START CUT DEPTH Cutting depth in case of cutting by changing a federate at the start of cutting
S* START FEED RATE Feedrate in case of cutting by changing a federate at the start of cutting
(5) Input items of boring (G1104)
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
(6) Input items of fine boring (G1105)
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
Q SHIFT AMOUNT Shift amount at the bottom of a hole (radius value) (COPY)
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
D END CUT DEPTH Depth of cut applicable when cutting is performed by changing the feedrate
at the end of cutting
E END FEED RATE Feedrate applicable when cutting is performed by changing the feedrate at
the end of cutting
For fine-boring, the M code for stopping the spindle and the M code for orientation are set with parameter
No. 27013 and No. 27014. If the bit 2 of parameter No.27195 is set to “1”, the M code for stopping the
spindle is M05 regardless of the setting of parameter No.27013.
- 162 -
The direction in which the tool is to retract during fine boring is set in parameter No. 27020. For details of
the parameters, see the chapter explaining parameters.
2.1.2 Specifying Pecking Clearance of Drill Cycle for Lathe in Input

Window (for only Series 30i/31i/32i-A/B, 0i-TF/0i-TD)
(1) G1101 : Drill cycle (workpiece rotation)
In case of peck drill, pecking clearance R can be specified in input widow instead of parameter
No.5115.
Dn Ds C
De
F Fs
F
Fe F R
R Pecking clearance
(2) G1111 : Drill cycle (tool rotation)

Same as drill cycle (workpiece rotation).
2.1.2.1 Parameter setting to use this function

Set the following parameter to 1.
- No.27195#4
- No.5101#2
2.1.2.2 Format of drill cycle

(1) G1101 : Drill cycle (workpiece rotation) input item
The following item is added. Refer to MANUAL GUIDE i operator’s manual (B-63874EN) about
other items.
Detail
Data item Meaning
R PECKING Pecking clearance
CLEARANCE When this item is blank, pecking clearance is value of parameter No.5115.
- 163 -
(2) G1111 : Drill cycle (tool rotation) input item

The following item is added. Refer to MANUAL GUIDE i operator’s manual (B-63874EN) about
other items.
Detail
Data item Meaning
R PECKING Pecking clearance
CLEARANCE When this item is blank, pecking clearance is value of parameter No.5115.
2.2 TURNING

(1) Input items of outer surface roughing (G1120)
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
R NOSE RADIUS Tool nose radius of a roughing tool (positive value)
A CUT EDGE ANGLE Cutting edge angle of a roughing tool (positive value)
B NOSE ANGLE Tool angle of a roughing tool (positive value)
J IMAGINARY TOOL NOSE Imaginary tool nose position of a roughing tool
NOTE
1 Tab ‘TOOL COND.’ is enabled when bit 0 (TLG) of parameter No. 27102 = 1.
2 The operator ordinarily sets the above data on the tab of ‘TOOL DATA’ in Tool
Offset window. Therefore, it is not necessary to display the tab ‘TOOL COND.’
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
P CUTTING DIRECTION [-Z] : Cuts in the -Z direction.
[+Z] : Cuts in the +Z direction.
Remark) [+Z] is used for cutting in the reverse direction or for
machining with a subspindle. (COPY)
Q CUT DEPTH Depth of each cut (radius value, positive value)
H RATE OF CUT DEPTH Change rate for the depth of cut. Specify a change rate in steps of 1%.
A second depth of cut and subsequent ones are sequentially multiplied
by a specified change rate. The default is 100%, meaning that the
depth of cut remains unchanged. (1 to 200, positive value)
C* X-AXIS FINISH AMT. Finishing allowance in the X-axis direction. The blank is regarded as 0.
(radius value, positive value)
D* Z-AXIS FINISH AMT. Finishing allowance in the Z-axis direction. The blank is regarded as 0.
F CUT DIRC.FEEDRATE Feedrate applicable when the tool cuts in the workpiece radius
direction (positive value)
E CUT DEPTH FEEDRATE Feedrate applicable when the tool cuts in the Z-axis direction (positive
value)
V CUT RISE FEEDRATE Feedrate applicable when the tool cuts up in the direction of retraction
from the workpiece (positive value)
- 164 -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
K 1ST OVERRIDE Feedrate override value for the first cut. Specify an override value in
steps of 1%. The default is 100%. (1 - 200, positive value)
Remark) This data item is used, for example, to cut the black coating of
a cast workpiece.
W CUT RISE METHOD [SPEED] : The tool retracts by a distance specified with ESCAPE
AMOUNT in the XZ direction immediately after cutting.
[CUT] : The tool retracts by a "retract" distance" after cutting along
the figure.
(COPY)
U ESCAPE AMOUNT Distance by which the tool retracts from a cutting surface after each
cut (radius value, positive value)
Remark) By referring to the parameter No. 27128 (minimum clamp
value), the system sets the data as an initial value.
L X-AXIS CLEARANCE Distance between a blank and escape position in the X-axis direction
M Z-AXIS CLEARANCE Distance between a blank and machining start point (approach point)
in the Z-axis direction (radius value, positive value)
Z APPROCH MOTION [Z→X] : From the current position to the machining start point, the
tool moves in the Z-axis direction and then in the X-axis
direction. (initial value)
[X→Z] : From the current position to the machining start point, the
direction.
[2 AXES] : From the current position to the machining start point, the
tool moves simultaneously in the X- and Z-axis directions.
S CUT DEPTH DIRECTION As to X axis Cut direction,
[-X] : Cuts in the –X direction.
[+X] : Cuts in the +X direction.
Remark) This data item is enable when the bit 0 (TC0) of parameter
No.27100 = 1. (COPY)
X POCKET CUTTING [CUT] : Cuts a pocket. (initial value)
[NOTHIN] : Does not cut a pocket.
No.27100 = 1.
Y OVERHANG CUTTING [CUT] : Cuts an overhang. (initial value)
[NOTHIN] : Does not cut an overhang.
No.27100 = 1.
- 165 -
NOTE
When the conditions listed below are all satisfied, offsetting performed in tool
path creation may increase an arc radius because of the characteristics of
offsetting. If the arc radius exceeds a permissible value as a result of offsetting,
an alarm (PS003 “TOO MANY DIGIT”) may be issued. In such a case, adjust
finishing allowance values to prevent the alarm.
<1> A turned figure contains an arc and rounded corner.
<2> Finishing allowances are different in the X-axis direction and the Z-axis
direction.
<3> A value of a finishing allowance plus a tool nose radius approximates an
arc radius value.
End facing(Note)
Data item Meaning
N WT/WTOUT ED FACE MC Specifies whether to perform simultaneous end facing.
[UNAVIL]: Does not perform simultaneous end facing.
[AVAIL]: Performs simultaneous end facing.
Remark) If “AVAIL” is selected, the following input item “END FACE
REMOVAL” is displayed.
I* END FACE REMOVAL End facing allowance (radius value, positive value)
If this item is omitted, the end facing allowance is determined based
on the part figure and blank figure.
NOTE
1 The “END FACE MC” tab is displayed when bit 2 (EFM) of parameter No. 27120
is set to 1.
2 When bit 2 (EFM) of parameter No. 27120 is set to 1, end facing can be
performed at the same time in the process of outer or inner surface roughing for
bars (simultaneous end facing).
For details of simultaneous end facing, see "Simultaneous end facing" described later.
(a) Tool path
<1> The tool moves to the position "cut-in start point + clearance (M)" by rapid traverse.
<2> The tool cuts in to the entered-figure position where there is still a finishing allowance in the Z-axis
direction at the feedrate (E) specified for the cut-in direction.
- 166 -
<3> If [SPEED] is selected, the tool immediately retracts by a return clearance (U) in the X- and Z-axis
direction. If [CUT] is selected, the tool first cuts along the figure and then retracts by a return
clearance (U) in the X- and Z-axis direction.
<4> The tool moves to the cut-in start position in the Z-axis direction by rapid traverse.
<5> Steps <2> to <4> are repeated until the lowest portion in the X-axis direction is reached.
<6> If there is another pocket, the tool is positioned on the pocket, and steps <2> to <4> are repeated.
<7> Once all portions are cut, the tool retracts to the position "BLANK + clearance (L)" in the X-axis
direction at the rapid traverse rate.
NOTE
It is possible to specify "PART" and "BLANK" as "ELEMENT TYPE" for an
individual arbitrary figure.
This "BLANK" can be used to enter an arbitrary figure resembling a blank figure
to be actually machined, so any portion other than the blank portion will not be
cut. This way, optimum rough turning can be realized.
Example of outer-surface machining
Start point
: Tool path for cutting

: Tool path for
rapid traverse
: Product figure
Clearance
: Blank figure
(Distance between a blank and machining
start point in the Z-axis direction)
(b) Motion of the tool in the cutting direction on the blank element portion
When the tool advances in the cutting direction, the excessive amount of travel of the tool is as describe
below.
When bit 0 (BLN) of parameter No. 27120 is set to 0, and the tool advances in the cutting direction, the
excessive amount of travel of the tool is nose radius R if the attribute of the figure across which the tool
moves is the blank element. In this case, the excessive amount of travel is the distance from the end point
of the part figure.
Blank figure
Part figure
R
When bit 0 (BLN) of parameter No. 27120 is set to 1, and the tool advances in the cutting direction, the
excessive amount of travel of the tool is [clearance + 2 × nose radius R] if the attribute of the figure
- 167 -
across which the tool moves is the blank element. In this case, the excessive amount of travel is the
distance from the blank element.
Blank figure
Part figure
Clearance+2R
In case of satisfying the following both conditions, the excessive amount of travel of the tool is calculated
by r(1-sin θ).
* r: Nose radius R
θ: Slant of the end of part elements in tangential direction
（Conditions）
（1）No.27120#0 = 0
（2）The direction of moving in cutting federate when a tool exceeds by “clearance + nose radius*2”
is the opposite area to the cutting direction vertically shown bellow.
Cut depth direction
Cutting direction
（Explanation of the excessive amount of travel）

：part element
：blank element
：tool path in tool
center
θ
θ r
r sinθ
Excessive amount
of travel r-r sin θ
= r(1 – sin θ)
- 168 -
(c) Simultaneous end facing

If “AVAIL” is specified in the item specifying whether to perform end facing, end facing is performed
within the process of outer surface roughing for a bar (simultaneous end facing) as follows:
<Example of roughing when simultaneous end facing is used>
X
Z
End face center
End facing allowance
(The outer surface is machined after the end facing allowance is cut.)
<Example of rough machining when simultaneous end facing is not used>
NOTE
If parameter 27120#3 is set to 1, end face part can be machined without finish
amount.
(i) Setting the end facing allowance

The end facing allowance is set to “END FACE REMOVAL I”, which is entered from the screen, or the
end facing allowance determined based on the part figure and blank figure as follows:
• If END FACE REMOVAL I is not entered, the end facing allowance determined based on
the part figure and blank figure is used.
• If END FACE REMOVAL I is entered, the entered value or the value determined based
on the part figure and blank figure, whichever larger, is used.
If the end facing allowance cannot be determined, simultaneous end facing is not performed.
- 169 -
Entry of “END FACE REMOVAL I”

<If cutting direction is -Z>
Specify the length measured from the end face of the part (the maximum Z position of the part figure) as
shown in the figure.
End facing
allowance I
Part figure
+Z
End face of a part
<If cutting direction is +Z>

Specify the length measured from the end face of the part (the minimum Z position of the part figure) as
shown in the figure.
End facing
allowance I Part figure
+Z
End face of a part
End facing allowance determined based on the part figure and blank figure
<If cutting direction is -Z>
For both outer and inner surface roughing, the end facing allowance is the distance from the end face of
the part (maximum Z of the part figure) to the end face of the blank (maximum Z of the blank figure) as
shown in the following figure.
<Example of outer surface machining>

Blank figure
+X
End face of blank
+Z
Part figure
End face of a part
- 170 -
<If cutting direction is +Z>
For both outer and inner surface roughing, the end facing allowance is the distance from the end face of
the part (minimum Z of the part figure) to the end face of the blank (minimum Z of the blank figure) as
shown in the following figure.
<Inner surface machining> +X
End face of blank
(Blank figure) Part figure
+Z
End face of
a part
NOTE
The cutting direction in end facing is the outer/inner surface cutting direction.
(ii) Tool motion for cutting the end facing allowance

When outer end face roughing is performed, the tool first cuts the end face (<1>), then performs outer
surface roughing (<2>) as shown in the figure below. The tool cuts the end face always in the -X
direction.
End face cutting
<1>
feedrate
Finishing <2>
allowance Depth of cut
in end face
Z
Part figure 1
Depth of cut in end face d is automatically determined based on the end facing allowance and the depth of
cut as follows:
Number of cuts N = (end facing allowance)/(depth of cut)
N is assumed to be the result of the above division with the fractions rounded up.
Depth of cut in end face d’=(end facing allowance)/(number of cuts N)
The obtained depth of cut in end face d’ is multiplied by an override value, then the depth of cut in the
end face is calculated again as follows:
Number of cuts N’ = (end facing allowance)/[(d’) × override]
N’ is assumed to be the result of the above division with the fractions rounded up.
Depth of cut in end face d=(end facing allowance)/(number of cuts N’)
The override is set in parameter No. 27131. If 0 is set, the override is assumed to be 100%.
The end face cutting feedrate is the outer surface cutting feedrate multiplied by the override (%).
This override is specified in parameter No. 27132. If 0 is set, the override is assumed to be 100%.
Even when part figure 1 starts at a position of which X value is smaller than 0 as shown in the figure
below, the end face is cut if an end facing allowance is specified.
Even when such a part figure is defined, the end face is cut as shown below.
- 171 -
X Even when such a part figure

Finishing is defined, the end face is cut.
allowance Z
Part figure 1
Z

As explained above, when a finishing allowance is specified, the end face remains by the finishing
allowance after roughing of the outer surface and end face is completed as shown in the figure below.
Finishing allowance
Part figure 1
The end face is cut as follows:
+X
<1>
● Machining start point (Xs,Zs)
<5>
X1
Return clearance U
Depth of cut Q
(Depth of cut Q)×(Rate of cut depth H)/100
<4>
<2>
Finishing allowance W
X0 <3> +Z
Z0 Z1 (*1) Tool nose dia. + clearance L

End facing allowance I
<1> In G00, the tool moves along the Z-axis to the position "Z1 - Q".
Then, the tool moves along the X-axis to the position "X1 + clearance (L)×2".
<2> In G01, the tool cuts the workpiece along the X-axis to the position "X0 - (tool noise diameter –
clearance (L)) ×2".(*1)
<3> In G00, the tool retracts along the Z-axis to the position "Z1 + (U-Q)".
<4> In G00, the tool retracts to the position "X1 + clearance (L)×2".
<5> In G00, the tool moves along the Z-axis to the position , which is reached by moving further by
"Q×H/100" from the previous cutting position.
<6> In the subsequent steps, the tool cuts by "previous depth of cut×H/100" repeatedly until it
reaches the position "Z0 + W".
<7> In the last retract operation, the tool retracts by the amount of the return clearance in the 45°
direction, then in G00 the tool moves along the Z-axis to the position "blank end face +
clearance (M)" as shown in the figure below.
(*1) See "Excessive amount of travel when an end face is cut" in end face roughing.
- 172 -
Next, in G00 the tool moves to the position "blank outer surface point X1" in the +X direction then starts
the steps for outer surface roughing.
Depth of cut in outer

surface roughing Q Blank end face + clearance M
X1 Blank outer
surface X1
Finishing allowance
Z0
Return clearance U
(2) Input items of inner surface roughing (G1121)
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
R NOSE RADIUS See the descriptions about Outer surface roughing: G1120.
A CUT EDGE ANGLE -
B NOSE ANGLE -
J IMAGINARY TOOL NOSE -
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
P CUTTING DIRECTION See the descriptions about Outer surface roughing: G1120.
Q CUT DEPTH -
H RATE OF CUT DEPTH -
C* X-AXIS FINISH AMT. -
D* Z-AXIS FINISH AMT. -
F CUT DIRC.FEEDRATE -
E CUT DEPTH FEEDRATE -
V CUT RISE FEEDRATE -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
K 1ST OVERRIDE See the descriptions about Outer surface roughing: G1120.
W CUT RISE METHOD -
U ESCAPE AMOUNT -
L X-AXIS CLEARANCE -
M Z-AXIS CLEARANCE -
Z APPROCH MOTION Initially [X→Z] is set.
S CUT DEPTH DIRECTION -
X POCKET CUTTING -
Y OVERHANG CUTTING -
- 173 -
END FACE MC (Note)

Data item Meaning
N WT/WTOUT ED FACE MC See the descriptions about Outer surface roughing: G1120.
Remark) When an inner surface is machined, the input item for end
facing allowance is not displayed. So, specify the blank figure
of the end facing allowance part during blank figure creation.
(a) Simultaneous end facing

(i) Setting the end facing allowance
When inner surface roughing is performed, the end facing allowance cannot be entered. So, specify the
blank figure of the end facing allowance part.
If the end facing allowance cannot be determined, simultaneous end facing is not performed.
For how the end facing allowance is determined based on the part figure and blank figure, see the
explanation of outer surface roughing.
(ii) Tool motion for cutting the end facing allowance

When inner end face roughing is performed, the tool first cuts the end face (<1>), then performs inner
surface roughing (<2>). The tool cuts the end face always in the +X direction as shown in the following
figure.
X End face cutting
feedrate
Depth of cut in
Finishing end face
allowance
<1>
<2> Z

The depth of cut in the end face and the end face cutting feedrate are determined in the same way as for
outer surface roughing.
When part figure 1 starts at an X position inner from the blank outer surface, and the end face is to be cut
as shown in the following figure, be sure to define the blank figure of the end face part.
X
End facing
Part figure 1 allowance
When this end face of the part
figure shown is to be cut, blank
End facing definition for this part is
allowance Z required.
Z
When a finishing allowance is specified as shown in the above figure, the finishing allowance is left also
in the end face part after end face roughing as shown in the figure below.
- 174 -
Part figure 1
The end face is cut <1> as follows:

+X
<3>
X1 Tool nose dia. R
(Depth of cut Q)×(Rate of cut depth H)/100 Return clearance U
Depth of cut Q
<4>
Finishing allowance W <2>
Machining start point (Xs,Zs)
<5> <1>
X0
+Z
Z0 Z1
The steps for cutting the end face <1> through <5> are the same as in outer surface roughing except that
the tool moves in different directions.
Upon completion of end facing, the tool performs an approach motion to start inner surface roughing as
follows. In the same manner as for outer surface roughing, the tool retracts by the return clearance in the
45° direction then moves in G00 to the position "blank end face + clearance (M)" in the Z-axis direction.
Next, in G00 the tool moves to the position "blank inner surface point Xs" in the -X direction.
Subsequently, the tool performs the steps for inner surface roughing.
+X
Blank end face + clearance M
X1
Finishing allowance W
Blank inner surface

Xs
X0 +Z
Z0
- 175 -
(b) Tool path
<2> The tool cuts in to the entered-figure position where there is still a finishing allowance in the Z-axis
direction at the feedrate (E) specified for the cut-in direction.
<4> The tool moves to the cut-in start position in the Z-axis direction by rapid traverse.
<5> Steps <2> to <4> are repeated until the lowest portion in the X-axis direction is reached.
direction at the rapid traverse rate, then, the tool retracts to the position "BLANK + clearance (M)"
in the Z-axis direction at the rapid traverse rate.
(3) Input items of end face roughing (G1122)
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
A CUT EDGE ANGLE -
B NOSE ANGLE -
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
P CUTTING DIRECTION [-X] : Cuts in the –X direction.
Remark) [+X] is used for cutting in the reverse direction or for
machining with a subspindle. (COPY)
Q CUT DEPTH See the descriptions about Outer surface roughing: G1120.
F CUT DIRC.FEEDRATE -
E CUT DEPTH FEEDRATE -
V CUT RISE FEEDRATE -
- 176 -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
K 1ST OVERRIDE See the descriptions about Outer surface roughing: G1120.
W CUT RISE METHOD -
U ESCAPE AMOUNT -
L X-AXIS CLEARANCE Distance between a blank and machining start point (approach point)
in the X-axis direction (radius value, positive value)
M Z-AXIS CLEARANCE Distance between a blank and escape position in the Z-axis direction <1
Z APPROCH MOTION Initially [Z→X] is set.
X POCKET CUTTING -
(a) Tool path
<1> The tool moves to the position "cut-in start point + clearance (L)" by rapid traverse.
<2> After cutting in the Z-axis direction at the feedrate (F) specified for the cutting direction, the tool
cuts in to the entered-figure position where there is still a finishing allowance in the X-axis direction
at the feedrate (E) specified for the cut-in direction.
<4> The tool moves to the cut-in start position in the X-axis direction by rapid traverse.
<5> Steps <2> to <4> are repeated until the lowest portion in the Z-axis direction is reached.
<7> Once all portions are cut, the tool retracts to the position "BLANK + clearance (M)" in the Z-axis
(b) Excessive amount of travel when the end face is cut

When the end face is cut during end facing (when the tool cuts the end face to position X0 in the -X
direction), the excessive amount of travel varies depending on the setting of bit 4 (OCA) of parameter No.
27120 as follows:
Bit 4 (OCA) of parameter No.27120

=1: The excessive amount of travel is (clearance + nose R*2).
=0: The excessive amount of travel is nose R.
- 177 -
: Blank element
: Part element
: Workpiece
(0,0)
Bit 4 (OCA) of parameter No.27120=0

Bit 4 (OCA) of parameter
No.27120=1
Clearance
(4) Input items of outer surface semifinishing (G1123)
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
I INPUT TYPE [INPUT] : Directly inputs the tool nose radius of a tool used for
semifinishing. (initial value)
[REF.] : Inputs the offset number of a tool used for semifinishing to
read the offset value.
R NOSE RADIUS Tool nose radius of a roughing tool (positive value)
Remark) This data item is indicated only when [INPUT] is selected for
INPUT TYPE.
A CUT EDGE ANGLE Cutting edge angle of a roughing tool (positive value)
B NOSE ANGLE Tool angle of a roughing tool (positive value)
J IMAGINARY TOOL NOSE Imaginary tool nose position of a roughing tool
Remark) This data item is indicated only when [INPUT] is selected for
INPUT TYPE.
T OFFSET NO. Offset number of a roughing tool (positive value)
Remark) This data item is indicated only when [REF.] is selected for
INPUT TYPE.
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
F FEED RATE Cutting feedrate for semifinishing (positive value)
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
L X-AXIS CLEARANCE See the descriptions about Outer surface roughing: G1120.
Z APPROCH MOTION Initially [Z→X] is set.
X POCKET CUTTING -
- 178 -
(a) Tool path
<2> The tool cuts along the entered figure on which the finishing allowance is left uncut at the
semifinishing feedrate until the final figure is obtained.
When “SEMI FIN.FEEDRATE” is set for a figure element, the semifinishing feedrate for the
element is used for cutting.
For details on how to set “SEMI FIN.FEEDRATE” for an element, see "Specifying the
semifinishing feedrate for an arbitrary figure" in Subsection 2.2.2, "Arbitrary Figure (ZX Plane)".
direction at the cutting feedrate.
(5) Input items of inner surface semifinishing (G1124)
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
I INPUT TYPE See the descriptions about Outer surface semifinishing: G1123.
R NOSE RADIUS -
A CUT EDGE ANGLE -
B NOSE ANGLE -
T OFFSET NO. -
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
X POCKET CUTTING -
- 179 -
(a) Tool path
For details on how to set “SEMI FIN.FEEDRATE”for an element, see “Specifying the semifinishing
feedrate for an arbitrary figure” in Subsection 2.2.2, “Arbitrary Figure (ZX Plane)”.
direction at the cutting feedrate, then , the tool retracts to the position "BLANK + clearance (M)" in
the Z-axis direction at the rapid traverse rate.
(6) Input items of end face semifinishing (G1125)
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
R NOSE RADIUS -
A CUT EDGE ANGLE -
B NOSE ANGLE -
T OFFSET NO. -
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
P CUTTING DIRECTION [-X] : Cuts in the -X direction.
(COPY)
C* X-AXIS FINISH AMT. See the descriptions about Outer surface roughing: G1120.
- 180 -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
L X-AXIS CLEARANCE See the descriptions about End surface roughing: G1122.
M Z-AXIS CLEARANCE See the descriptions about End surface roughing: G1122.
Z APPROCH MOTION -
X POCKET CUTTING -
(a) Tool path
For details on how to set “SEMI FIN.FEEDRATE”for an element, see “Specifying the semifinishing
feedrate for an arbitrary figure” in Subsection 2.2.2, “Arbitrary Figure (ZX Plane)”.
(7) Input items of outer surface finishing (G1126)
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
R NOSE RADIUS -
A CUT EDGE ANGLE -
B NOSE ANGLE -
T OFFSET NO. -
- 181 -
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
P CUTTING DIRECTION [-Z] : Cuts in the -Z direction.
[+Z] : Cuts in the +Z direction.
[OPTM.-]:Performs optimization and cuts in the -Z direction.
[OPTM.+]:Performs optimization and cuts in the +Z direction.
(COPY)
Remark) When [OPTM.-] or [OPTM.+] is selected, an optimization tab is
displayed.
Under the conditions entered on the optimization tab, an
optimum cutting direction is determined automatically.
For details of optimization, see Subsection 2.2.4, "Optimization
of the Cutting Direction in Finish Turning".
F FEED RATE Cutting feedrate for finishing (positive value)
Z APPROCH MOTION -
X POCKET CUTTING -
When [OPTM.-] or [OPTM.+] is selected as the cutting direction, the following optimization tab is
displayed.
OPTIMIZE
Data item Meaning
V REVERSE FEED RATE Feedrate applicable when cutting is performed in a direction opposite to the
tracing direction
U ESCAPE AMOUNT Distance the tool retracts from the cutting surface each time a cut ends
Remark) The value of parameter No. 27128 (minimum clamp value) is
referenced as the initial value.
K LEVEL DIFFERENCE Distance along the X-axis between the start point and end point of a straight
line element to be cut in a direction opposite to the tracing direction
N LINE SCALE ANGLE Angle of a straight line element to be cut in a direction opposite to the tracing
direction, to the Z-axis
Q ARC RADIUS Radius of an arc element to be cut in a direction opposite to the tracing
direction
H ARC SLANT ANGLE Angle of the straight line connecting the start and end points of an arc
element to be cut in a direction opposite to the tracing direction, to the Z-axis
For details of optimization, see Subsection 2.2.3, "Optimization of the Cutting Direction in Finish
Turning".
- 182 -
(a) Tool path
<2> The tool cuts along the entered figure at the finishing feedrate until the final figure is obtained.
(b) Finishing with G41/42

Finishing cycles in MANUAL GUIDE i do not use G41 and G42. When bit 6 (G41) of parameter No.
27120 is set to 1, G41 and G42 can be used for these finishing cycles.
(i) Machining operation

<1> → <2> G42 G00 Z___. ; ·· Specify tool-nose radius compensation
and move the tool to <2> at rapid traverse rate
<2> → <3> → <4> → <5> ····· Cutting feed along the figure
<5> → <6> G40 G00 X___. ; ·· Cancel tool-nose radius compensation
and move the tool to <6> at rapid traverse rate
Rapid traverse
<6> Value of parameter No. 27133 Cutting feed
Start point
Clearance
<5>
<4> <3>
Clearance <1>
X <2>
Z Value of parameter No. 27133
- 183 -
NOTE
Regardless of the setting of bit 7 (ESC) of parameter No. 27102, the G40
command is output when the tool moves from <3> to <4>.
The distance the tool moves when a startup or cancel command is specified with G41 or G42 is set in
parameter No. 27133.
(ii) Restrictions
The restrictions of G41/G42 apply to the function of finish turning using G41/G42.
When optimization of the cutting direction is specified in finish turning, the function of finish
turning using G41/G42 cannot be used.
(8) Input items of inner surface finishing (G1127)
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
R NOSE RADIUS -
A CUT EDGE ANGLE -
B NOSE ANGLE -
T OFFSET NO. -
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
P CUTTING DIRECTION See the descriptions about Outer surface semifinishing: G1123.
X POCKET CUTTING -
(a) Tool path
- 184 -
direction at the cutting feedrate, then , the tool retracts to the position "BLANK + clearance (M)"
in the Z-axis direction at the rapid traverse rate.


<1>→<2> G41 G00 Z_. ; ····· Specify tool-nose radius compensation and move the tool to <2> at
rapid traverse rate
<2>→<3>→<4>→<5> ······· Cutting feed along the figure
<5>→<6> G40 G00 X_. ; ····· Cancel tool-nose radius compensation and move the tool to <6> at
rapid traverse rate
<3> <2> <1>
<4>
Clearance
Value of parameter No. 27133
<5> Clearance
<6>
X Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
Start point
Z
NOTE
(ii) Restrictions
The restrictions of G41/G42 apply to the function of finish turning using G41/G42.When
optimization of the cutting direction is specified in finish turning, the function of finish turning using
G41/G42 cannot be used.
(9) Input items of end face finishing (G1128)
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
R NOSE RADIUS -
A CUT EDGE ANGLE -
- 185 -
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
B NOSE ANGLE -
T OFFSET NO. -
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
P CUTTING DIRECTION [-X] : Cuts in the -X direction.
[OPTM.-]:Performs optimization and cuts in the -X direction.
[OPTM.+]:Performs optimization and cuts in the +X direction.
See the descriptions about Outer surface semifinishing: G1123.
L X-AXIS CLEARANCE See the descriptions about End surface roughing: G1122.
M Z-AXIS CLEARANCE See the descriptions about End surface roughing: G1122.
Z APPROCH MOTION -
X POCKET CUTTING -
(a) Tool path


<1>→<2> G41 G00 Z_. ; · Specify tool-nose radius compensation and move
the tool to <2> at rapid traverse rate
<2>→<3>→<4> ············· Cutting feed along the figure
<4>→<5> G40 G00 X_. ; ··· Cancel tool-nose radius compensation and move
the tool to <6> at rapid traverse rate
- 186 -

<1>
<2> Clearance
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
Start point
<3>
X
<4> <5>
Clearance Value of parameter No. 27133
NOTE
(ii) Restrictions
When optimization of the cutting direction is specified in finish turning, the function of finish
turning using G41/G42 cannot be used.
2.2.2 Arbitrary Figure (ZX Plane)

When an arbitrary figure is input, a function such as the automatic intersection calculation function can be
used. For details, see Subsection 5.1.5, "Arbitrary Figures For Turning (ZX Plane)".
(1) Specifying a grinding allowance for an arbitrary figure

When bit 3 (GRD) of parameter No. 27102 is set to 1, it becomes possible to set a grinding allowance for
each element.
When a grinding allowance can be used, an input item for the grinding allowance is displayed on the third
line on the screen of the “ATTRIBUTE” tab of the following figure elements:
• LINE G1451 • CHAMFER G1454
• ARC (CW) G1452 • CORNER R G1455
• ARC (CCW) G1453
(a) Outputting the grinding allowance to a program

When a figure element is output to a program, the value entered for “GRINDING AMOUNT” is
output following address X in the format shown below. When a space is set for ”GRINDING
AMOUNT”, address X is not output.
(Example: Straight line G1451 H-2. V17.5 K4. D17.5 A45. L0. M0. T1. X0.5 ; )
- 187 -
(b) Use with a finishing allowance specified for the machining type
When “GRINDING AMOUNT” is specified, the specified value is reflected in the final part figure,
and the figure is corrected. After correction, cycle machining is performed for the final part figure,
considering the values of “X-AXIS FINISH AMT.” and “Z-AXIS FINISH AMT.” specified in the
machining type block.
(c) Neck figure

“GRINDING AMOUNT” cannot be specified for neck figures. However, a created neck figure is
expanded as a combination of straight line, arc, and rounded corner elements. Therefore, it becomes
possible to enter a value for “GRINDING AMOUNT” when an element obtained by expansion is
opened with soft key [ALTER] on the arbitrary figure input screen.
(d) Figure copy

When a figure is copied, a space is set for “GRINDING AMOUNT” of all part elements of a figure
generated by the copy. When a value needs to be specified, use soft key [ALTER] on the arbitrary
figure input screen to enter the value. A figure copy replaces chamfers with straight line elements. In
this case, a space is set for “GRINDING AMOUNT”.
(e) Direction of a grinding allowance

The direction of a specified grinding allowance is normal to each element.
(2) Specifying the semifinishing feedrate for an arbitrary figure

When bit 4 (MFN) of parameter No. 27102 is set to 1, a semifinishing feedrate can be set for each
element in semifinishing in turning.
When a semifinishing feedrate can be used, an input item for the semifinishing feedrate is displayed on
the second line on the screen of the “ATTRIBUTE” tab of the following figure elements and neck figures:
• LINE G1451 • CORNER R G1455
• ARC (CW) G1452 • DIN509
• ARC (CCW) G1453 • DIN509F
• CHAMFER G1454 • DIN76
(a) Outputting the semifinishing feedrate to a program

When a figure element is output to a program, the value entered for “SEMI FIN.FEEDRATE” is
output following address B in the format shown below. When a space is set for “SEMI
FIN.FEEDRATE”, address B is not output.
(Example: Straight line G1451 H-2. V17.5 K4. D17.5 A45. L0. M0. T1. B120. ; )
When “SEMI FIN.FEEDRATE” is set to 0 or a space for an element, the element is cut at the
feedrate specified in the machining type block for semifinishing.
(b) Neck figure

As with figure elements, a semifinishing feedrate can be set also on the”ATTRIBUTE” tab of a neck
figure. The set value is automatically set for the elements (straight line, arc, and rounded corner
elements) obtained by expanding the figure. The set value of an element can be changed by using
soft key [ALTER] on the arbitrary figure input screen to open the element obtained by expansion.
(c) Figure copy

When a figure is copied, a space is set for “SEMI FIN.FEEDRATE” of all part elements of a figure
generated by the copy operation. When a value needs to be specified, use soft key [ALTER] on the
arbitrary figure input screen to enter the value.
A figure copy replaces rounded corners with arc elements, and chamfers with straight line elements.
Also in such a case, a space is set for “SEMI FIN.FEEDRATE”.
- 188 -
(d) NC program conversion
When NC program conversion is performed, the value specified for “SEMI FIN.FEEDRATE”,
following address F, is output to the cutting block obtained by the conversion.
If 0 or a space is set for “SEMI FIN.FEEDRATE”, the feedrate specified in the machining type
block for semifinishing is output.
2.2.3 Conical Boring Cycle

(1) Conical Boring cycle can be executed with the specified cutting angle.
+X
3
2
1
Cutting angle
The numerical mean the cutting procedure.
+Z
(1) Input items

Tool condition
Data item Address Meaning
NOSE RADIUS R Tool nose radius of a tool
CUT EDGE ANGLE A Cutting edge angle of a tool
NOSE ANGLE B Tool angle of a tool
IMAGINARY TOOL NOSE J Imaginary tool nose position of a tool
Cutting condition
CUTTING ANGLE I The value is 0.001°≦I≦45.000°
CUTTING DIRECTION P [-Z] : Cut in the –Z direction
[+Z] : Cut in the +Z direction
CUT DEPTH Q Depth of each cut
RATE OF CUT DEPTH H Change rate for the depth of cut.
X-AXIS FINISH AMOUNT C Finishing allowance of in the X-axis direction
Z-AXIS FINISH AMOUNT D Finishing allowance of in the Z-axis direction
CUT DIRECTION FEEDRATE F Feedrate when the tool cuts in the Z-axis direction.
CUT DEPTH FEEDRATE E Feedrate when the tool cuts in the X-axis direction.
CUT RISE FEEDRATE V Feedrate when the tool cuts in the direction of retraction.
Detail
1ST FEED OVERRIDE K Feedrate override value for the first cut.
CUT RISE METHOD W [SPEED]
[CUT]
ESCAPE AMOUNT U Distance from cutting surface after each cut.
X-AXIS CLEARANCE L Distance between a blank and escape position in the X-axis.
Z-AXIS CLEARANCE M Distance between a blank and machining start point in the Z-axis.
- 189 -
Detail
APPROACH MOTION Z [Z→X]
[X→Z]
[2AXES]
CUT SHIFT DIRECTION S [-X]
[+X]
• Cutting Edge Angle

An angle between a straight line in parallel with the cutting direction and a cutting edge is
defined as a cutting edge angle in the input item on Tool Condition TAB.
The line parallel to the cutting direction
Cut edge angle

Nose angle
The cutting direction
The line parallel to the cutting direction
Cut edge angle Nose angle
The cutting direction
(2) Tool path
<1> Cut depth

Cutting direction
Cut depth
+X
+Z
- 190 -
<2> Finish amount
+X
Finish amount X-axis finish

amount
+Z
Z-axis finish amount
<3> Cut rise method and Escape amount

Cutting motion
Cut rise motion
Escape amount
45°
Escape amount
Escape amount
<4> Clearance
+X
Z-axis clearance
X-axis clearance
+Z
- 191 -
<5> Approach motion
[Z→X] : The tool moves in the Z-axis direction and then in the X-axis direction.
[X→Z] : The tool moves in the X-axis direction and then in the Z-axis direction.
[2 Axes] : The tool moves simultaneously in the X and Z-axis directions.
<6> Cutting motion and Cut rise motion
“Cut motion in the radius direction” moves in 1 axis.

And “Escape motion after each cut” moves in 1 axis.
Cutting motion +X
Cut motion in the radius
di ti motion after each cut
Escape
Approach motion
+Z
<7> Tool path
(a) Cutting direction : -Z and Cut shift direction : +X
The tool path is as follows.

The cutting angle is 0.001°≦I≦45.000°.
Cutting motion
+X
Rapid motion
Cutting angle
4
3
2
1
+Z
The numerical is the cutting procedure.
- 192 -
(b) Cutting direction : -Z and Cut shift direction : -X

: Cutting motion
+X
: Rapid motion
+Z
1
2
3
4
+I°
(c) Cutting direction : +Z and Cut shift direction : +X

: Cutting motion
+X : Rapid motion
＋I°
4
3
2
1
+Z
- 193 -
(d) Cutting direction : +Z and Cut shift direction : -X

: Cutting motion
: Rapid motion
+X
+Z
1
2
3
4
+I°
(3) Limitation
<1> Interference check between tool and blank
1 The interference check between tool and blank is not executed. In case of the
below condition, the tool shaft collides with the blank.
+X
Collision
+Z
- 194 -
2 In case of the below part, the tool collides with the blank after the escape motion.
3
The tool collides
2
with the blank.
1
+Z
The numerical means the cutting procedures.
<2> Pocket cutting and overhang cutting
The pocket part and over hang part are not cut as below.
+X
Pocket area
Overhang part
Cut area
+Z
<3> Residual machining

Residual machining can not be executed after Conical Boring cycle.
<4> Alarm
(1) When the cutting angle is not 0.001≦I≦45.000,
the alarm “WRONG CUTTING ANGLE” occurs.
(2) When Residual machining is executed after Conical Boring cycle,

the alarm “WRONG G-CODE” occurs.
- 195 -
(3) When Conical Boring cycle can not cut the specified figure,
the alarm “WRONG CUTTING AREA” occurs.
(4) In case of the parameter No.27120#5=0, when Conical Boring cycle is executed,
the alarm “WRONG G-CODE” occurs.
2.2.4 Optimization of the Cutting Direction in Finish Turning

When optimization of the cutting direction is specified for finish turning, an optimum cutting direction
can be determined automatically based on the conditions entered from the screen.
When the function of tool-nose radius compensation using G41/G42 is enabled (bit 6 (G41) of parameter
No. 27120 is set to 1), this optimization function cannot be used.
X <6>
<4>
<2>
<5>
<3>
<1>
* <1>, <2>, <3>, <4>, ... denote the cutting order.
(Conditions for optimizing the cutting direction)

• Distance in the X direction between the start and end points of a straight line element
• Inclination of a straight line element
• Radius of an arc element
• Inclination of a straight line connecting the start and end points of an arc element
(1) Specifying optimization

<1> On the data input screen for a turning cycle, select soft key [OPTM.-] or [OPTM.+] for [CUTTING
DIRECTION].
<2> Select the [OPTIMIZE] tab, and enter the following conditions for optimizing the cutting direction.
(2) Entering conditions for optimization

(a) REVERSE FEED RATE V
Enter the cutting feedrate applicable when cutting is performed in an opposite direction.
(b) ESCAPE AMOUNT U
Enter the return clearance applicable when the cutting direction changes.
(c) LEVEL DIFFERENCE K

Enter the level difference between straight lines.
- 196 -
According to the entered line level difference, the cutting direction is determined automatically as
follows:
<1> If distance D in the direction of the level difference between the start and end points of a
straight line element equals to or longer than the setting of LEVEL DIFFERENCE K, cutting is
performed in the direction opposite to the reference cutting direction.
<2> If distance D in the X-axis direction between the start and end points of a straight line element
is shorter than the setting of LEVEL DIFFERENCE K, cutting is performed in the reference
cutting direction.
D ≥ K Direction opposite to the reference cutting direction
D < K Reference cutting direction
X
D≥K
D<K
(d) LINE SLANT ANGLE N

Enter the inclination angle of a straight line.
According to the entered line inclination angle, the cutting direction is determined automatically as
follows:
<1> If angle A between the straight line element and the Z-axis is equal to or larger than the setting
of LINE SLANT ANGLE N, cutting is performed in the direction opposite to the reference
cutting direction.
<2> If angle A between the straight line element and the Z-axis is smaller than the setting of LINE
SLANT ANGLE N, cutting is performed in the reference cutting direction.
A ≥ N Direction opposite to the reference cutting direction
A < N Reference cutting direction
X
A≥N
A
A<N
A
(e) ARC RADIUS Q

Enter the radius of an arc.
According to the entered arc radius, the cutting direction is determined automatically as follows:
<1> If radius R of the arc element is equal to or greater than the setting of ARC RADIUS Q, cutting
is performed in the direction opposite to the reference cutting direction.
<2> If radius R of the arc element is smaller than the setting of ARC RADIUS Q, cutting is
performed in the reference cutting direction.
- 197 -
R ≥ Q Direction opposite to the reference cutting direction

R < Q Reference cutting direction
X
R≥Q
R
R<Q
R
(f) ARC SLANT ANGLE H

Enter the inclination angle of an arc.
According to the entered arc inclination angle, the cutting direction is determined automatically as
follows:
<1> If angle A between the Z-axis and the straight line connecting the start and end points of the arc
element is equal to or larger than the setting of ARC SLANT ANGLE H, cutting is performed
in the direction opposite to the reference cutting direction.
<2> If angle A between the Z-axis and the straight line connecting the start and end points of the arc
element is smaller than the setting of ARC SLANT ANGLE H, cutting is performed in the
reference cutting direction.
A ≥ H Direction opposite to the reference cutting direction
A < H Reference cutting direction
A≥H
A
A<H
(3) Tool path

The tool path is outlined by using the outer surface finishing (G1126) shown in the figure below, as an
example.
<1> The tool moves to the machining start point (XS,ZS) along the axes of the approach motion (Z) in
the order as specified, at the rapid traverse rate.
<2> The tool performs cutting along the outer surface of the entered figure at the feedrate (F).
<3> The tool retracts from the cutting end position on the outer surface by a return clearance (U).
<4> The tool moves to the position "cutting start position of the end face + clearance in the X-axis
direction (L)" (Xn,Zn) along the X-axis then the Z-axis at the rapid traverse rate.
<5> The tool performs cutting along the end face of the entered figure at the reverse-direction feedrate
(H).
<6> The tool retracts from the cutting end position of the end face by the return clearance (U).
- 198 -
<7> The tool moves in the X-axis direction to the position "outer surface cutting start position +
clearance in the Z-axis direction (M)" (Xm,Zm) at the rapid traverse rate.
<8> Steps <2> through <7> are repeated.
<9> When all portions have been cut, the tool moves to the clearance position (XE,ZE) in the X-axis
direction at the rapid traverse rate, then moves to the position at which the tool was placed before the
start of machining, in the reverse order of the axis order of the approach motion (Z) at the rapid
traverse rate.
(XE, ZE)
Clearance in X-axis
direction
<9>
(Xn, Zn)
Clearance in X-axis <4> <1>
direction <7>
(Xm, Zm)
<5>
<6>
<3> <2>
(XS, ZS)
Clearance in Z-axis
direction
(4) Tool path for eliminating backlash

For more precise finishing, travel distance DETOUR can be set in parameter No. 27186 to eliminate
backlash. In this case, the tool moves as shown below to perform machining:
X
DETOUR= Travel distance for

<3> <2>
eliminating backlash
that is caused by the
re-approach motion
<1> made after the cutting
direction is changed
by optimization
- 199 -
(5) Elements for which the cutting direction cannot be optimized

The cutting direction cannot be optimized for the following elements:
(a) Element that decreases in the X-axis
(b) Element added by the tool angle check function
(c) Element added by the arbitrary figure range selection function

X
(d) When pocketing is specified not to be performed
- 200 -
(e) When overhang cutting is specified not to be performed
X
(6) Notes
(a) When a quadrant is cut in the reverse direction with a general-purpose cutting tool, its tip may come
off.
In this case, select a tool such as a round-nose tool or a point nose straight tool.
X X
Z Z
- 201 -
(b) If a clearance is smaller than a finishing allowance, an interference may occur between the
workpiece and the tool. In such a case, specify an enough clearance to prevent interference.
X
Finishing Clearance in
allowance X-axis direction
in X-axis
direction
(c) If a small return clearance is set, an interference may occur between an overhang part and the tool.
Therefore, specify an enough return clearance to prevent interference.
X
Return clearance
2.2.5 Go past amount in End Face Finishing

When a tool cuts to the center of work in end face semifinishing / finishing cycle, it is improved a tool
goes past only amount of nose radius in X minus direction.
(For only FS30i -B, FS30i -A, FS0i-F and FS0i -D)
(1) In case of the parameter No.27120#7=1

Go past amount is clearance + (tool radius * 2) (Conventional specifications)
Movement of tool
(X0)
Clearance
Tool radius * 2
- 202 -
(2) In case of the parameter No.27120#7=0
Go past amount is tool radius. (New specifications)
Movement of tool
(X0)
Tool radius
2.2.6 Continuous Machining of Roughing and Finishing

Continuous machining of roughing and finishing can be done in the below turning cycle.
(for only FS30i -B, FS30i -A, FS0i-F, FS0i -D)
G1150 : Turning (outer roughing and finishing)

G1151 : Turning (inner roughing and finishing)
G1152 : Turning (end face roughing and finishing)
(1) Order of machining

Machining is done in below order.
(a) Approach motion to roughing start position
(b) Roughing
(c) Escape motion after roughing
(d) Approach motion to finishing start position
(e) Finishing
(f) Escape motion after finishing
(2) Approach motion of roughing

Tool moves from the current position to machining start position.
Order of axis movement is specified by Input item ”approach motion (address Z)”.
(a) In case of address Z is “Z-X”, the tool moves in the Z-axis direction and then in the X-axis
direction.
(b) In case of address Z is “X-Z”, the tool moves in the X-axis direction and then in the Z-axis
direction.
(c) In case of address Z is “2 AXES”, the tool moves simultaneously in the X- and Z-axis
directions.
(3) Escape motion after roughing

The tool escapes start position of cycle after roughing independent of the parameter No. 27102#7.
(a) In case of address Z is “Z-X”, the tool moves in the X-axis direction and then in the Z-axis
direction.
(b) In case of address Z is “X-Z”, the tool moves in the Z-axis direction and then in the X-axis
direction.
directions.
(4) Approach motion of finishing

Tool moves from the current position to machining start position.
- 203 -
(a) In case of address Z is “Z-X”, the tool moves in the Z-axis direction and then in the X-axis
direction.
(b) In case of address Z is “X-Z”, the tool moves in the X-axis direction and then in the Z-axis
direction.
directions.
(5) Escape motion after finishing

The tool escapes start position of cycle after finishing when the parameter No. 27102#7 is set to 0.
(a) In case of address Z is “Z-X”, the tool moves in the X-axis direction and then in the Z-axis
direction.
(b) In case of address Z is “X-Z”, the tool moves in the Z-axis direction and then in the X-axis
direction.
directions.
(6) Note
(a) ”Optimization of the cutting direction in finish turning” can not be used in turning (roughing and
finishing).
(b) Turning (roughing and finishing) can not be available with residual machining.
2.2.7 Improvement of Excessive Amount of Travel in Turning Cycle

In finish turning cycle, in case of parameter No.27120#0=0, excessive amount of travel is changed by
parameter No.27125#5
2.2.7.1 Target machining cycle

(1) Outer surface finishing (G1126)
(2) Outer surface roughing and finishing (G1150)
(3) Inner surface finishing (G1127)
(4) Inner surface roughing and finishing (G1151)
2.2.7.2 Condition that this function is enabled

This function is enabled when the following condition is satisfied.
(1) Parameter No.27120#0=0
(2) Parameter No.27121#5=1
(3) Finishing turning (except roughing and semifinishing)
(4) The arbitrary figure range selection function is not performed.
(5) MANUAL GUIDE i for FS 30i-A is version 46.4 or later.
2.2.7.3 Example of machining

( In case of Inner surface finishing turning ( the cutting direction +Z) )
<1> The tool cuts along the entered figure at the finishing feedrate.
<2> The tool cuts to the end point of final part element.
<3> The tool moves to the position “blank + clearance (X-axis direction)” in X-axis direction at the
cutting feedrate
* The motion of <1> and <3> is the same before the improvement.
- 204 -
( In case of No.27121#5=0 ( In case of No.27121#5=1
(Conventional specification) ) (New specification) )
Nose R Nose R×2
2
residual cutting part
1 1
3
3
Blank element excessive amount of travel

Part element before offset Path of the center of nose R
2.2.8 The Restriction of Turning Cycle When Input Values of Z-axis

and X-axis Clearances are Different
The restriction that turning cycle might not be executed if input values of Z-axis and X-axis clearances
are different can be removed.
2.2.9 Restrictions
Alarm 3006 sometimes occurs in case of the machining cycle has a large figure.
CNC cannot treat a number over than eight figures as an address word of a block. Maximum figures of
address word are eight figures on the NC program format. So, in very few cases, a rounding error might
occur in address word I or J of center point of arc as the following sequence.
Example)
(1) In tuning arbitrary figure programming, a center point Z of circle element is calculated as
I1234.015959 from the input data.
(2) Because the value is over eight figures, it is rounded as a number of eight figures.
I1234.015959 => I1234.0160
(3) In machining the cycle, the tool paths are calculated by using the rounded value. And the alarm 3006
occurs, because the error is bigger than the tolerance.
Error 0.000041
Tolerance 0.00001
In the above case, please change the arbitrary figure data in order not to generate the error.
- 205 -
NOTE
In case that a rounding error exceeds tolerance(0.00001), you can see a warning
message at arbitrary figure screen by setting the parameter No.14852#3 set to be
1.
- 206 -
2.3 TURNING GROOVING
2.3.1 Machining Cycle

(1) Input items of outer surface roughing (G1130)
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
R NOSE RADIUS Tool nose radius of a grooving tool. (positive value)
B TOOL WIDTH Tool width of a grooving tool (radius value, positive value)
J IMAGINARY TOOL NOSE Imaginary tool nose position of a grooving tool.
NOTE
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
X ROUGHING TYPE This item is displayed when bit 1 (GTY) of parameter No. 27170 is set to
1, or bit 2 (LAY) of parameter No. 27170 is set to 0.
[CENTER] : Performs roughing for one side from the center then for the
other side from the center.
[LAYER] : Performs roughing for each layer.(*2)
[ZIGZAG] : Performs roughing in zigzag manner.(*1)
[SINGLE] : Performs roughing in one direction.(*1)
(*1) When bit 1 (GTY) of parameter No. 27170 is set to 1, these items
are displayed to allow turning grooving with a multi-function tool.
(*2) When bit 2 (LAY) of parameter No. 27170 is set to 0, this item is
displayed to allow turning grooving for each layer.
C* SIDE FINISH AMOUNT Finishing allowance for the side faces of a groove. The blank is regarded
as 0. (radius value, positive value)
D* BOTTOM FINISH AMT. Finishing allowance for the bottom of a groove. The blank is regarded as
0. (radius value, positive value)
F FEED RATE Feedrate for cutting in the tool axis direction (positive value)
W PECKING [NOTHIN] : Does not perform pecking in cutting for grooving (initial
value).
[PECKIN] : Performs pecking in cutting for grooving.
Q PECKING CUT DEPTH Depth of cut in the tool axis direction per pecking operation (radius value,
positive value)
Remark) This data item is indicated only when [PECKIN] is selected for
PECKING.
H RATE OF CUT DEPTH Change rate for the depth of cut. Specify a change rate in steps of 1%. A
second depth of cut and subsequent ones are sequentially multiplied by
a specified change rate. (1 to 200, positive value) (COPY)
U* ESCAPE AMOUNT Distance by which the tool retracts from a cutting surface after each cut
by pecking. (radius value, positive value) (COPY)
- 207 -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
L CLEARANCE Distance between the top surface of a groove and a machining start
point (approach point) in the X-axis direction (radius value, positive
value)
P DWELL Dwell time applicable when the tool reaches the bottom of a groove. (in
seconds, positive value)
(COPY)
(initial value)
S CUT DEPTH FOR WIDTH Depth of each cut in the grooving tool width direction (radius value,
V* ESCAPE AMOUNT Distance by which the tool retracts from a cutting surface after each cut.
The blank is regarded as 0. (radius value, positive value)
A CUT DEPTH DIRECTION As to X axis Cut direction,
No.27100 = 1. (COPY)
NOTE
When conditions <1> through <3> below are all satisfied, offsetting performed in
tool path creation may increase an arc radius because of the characteristics of
offsetting. If the arc radius exceeds a permissible value as a result of offsetting,
an alarm (PS003 “TOO MANY DIGIT”) may be issued. In such a case, adjust
finishing allowance values to prevent the alarm.
<1> The turning figure contains an arc and corner rounding.
<2> The finishing allowance in the X-axis direction and the finishing allowance in
the Z-axis direction are different.
<3> The sum of the finishing allowance and the tool-nose radius value is close to
the arc radius.
- 208 -
(a) Tool path
<2> After moving to the center of the groove (in the Z-axis direction) by rapid traverse, the tool cuts in
the X-axis direction at the feedrate (F) specified for the cutting direction. If pecking is specified, the
tool cuts a specified pecking amount while retracting in the +X-axis direction between pecking
cycles.
<3> When the tool reaches the groove bottom (but the finishing allowance) in the X-axis direction, the
tool retracts in the +X-axis direction, shifts by a cut-in amount through the width in the -Z-axis
direction, and then cuts in the X-axis direction.
<4> After step <3> is repeated until one groove wall is reached, the tool cuts another wall.
<5> After all portions are cut, the tool moves to the position "BLANK + clearance (L)" in the X-axis
direction by rapid traverse.
(b) Machining motion when a multi-function tool is used
F1 F1
Groove depth
Groove depth
F2 F2
Q Q
C* C*
D D
(Multi-function tool moving in zigzag manner) (Multi-function tool moving in single direction)
F1 : Feedrate in the depth direction

F2 : Feedrate in the width direction
D : Groove width
Q : Depth of cut in pecking (in the X-axis direction)
The minimum depth of cut is set in parameter No. 27178.
C* : Finishing allowance for side faces
- 209 -
To draw the multi-function tool in animated simulation, set the following parameters:
No.27384#0 (VRP) : Tip position of the multi-function tool in animated simulation
No.27385 : Holder length of the multi-function tool in animated simulation
No.27386 : Holder width of the multi-function tool in animated simulation
(2) Input items of inner surface roughing (G1310)
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
B TOOL WIDTH -
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
X ROUGHING TYPE See the descriptions about Outer surface roughing: G1130.
C* SIDE FINISH AMOUNT -
D* BOTTOM FINISH AMT. -
F FEED RATE -
W PECKING -
Q PECKING CUT DEPTH -
U* ESCAPE AMOUNT -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
L CLEARANCE See the descriptions about Outer surface roughing: G1130.
P DWELL -
S CUT DEPTH FOR WIDTH -
V* ESCAPE AMOUNT -
A CUT DEPTH DIRECTION -
(a) Tool path
<2> After moving to the center of the groove (in the Z-axis direction) by rapid traverse, the tool cuts in
the X-axis direction at the feedrate (F) specified for the cutting direction. If pecking is specified, the
tool cuts a specified pecking amount while retracting in the -X-axis direction between pecking
cycles.
- 210 -
<3> When the tool reaches the groove bottom (but the finishing allowance) in the X-axis direction, the
tool retracts in the -X-axis direction, shifts by a cut-in amount through the width in the -Z-axis
direction, and then cuts in the X-axis direction.
<5> After all portions are cut, the tool moves to the position "BLANK + clearance (L)" in the Z-axis
(3) Input items of end face roughing (G1132)
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
B TOOL WIDTH -
J* IMAGINARY TOOL NOSE -
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
F FEED RATE -
W PECKING -
U* ESCAPE AMOUNT -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
L CLEARANCE Distance between the top surface of a groove and a machining start
point (approach point) in the Z-axis direction (radius value, positive
value)
P DWELL -
Z APPROCH MOTION -
V* ESCAPE AMOUNT -
(a) Tool path
- 211 -
<2> After moving to the center of the groove (in the X-axis direction) by rapid traverse, the tool cuts in
the -Z-axis direction at the feedrate (F) specified for the cutting direction. If pecking is specified, the
tool cuts a specified pecking amount while retracting in the +Z-axis direction between pecking
cycles.
<3> When the tool reaches the groove bottom (but the finishing allowance) in the Z-axis direction, the
tool retracts in the +Z-axis direction, shifts by a cut-in amount through the width in the -X-axis
direction, and then cuts in the Z-axis direction.
<5> After all portions are cut, the tool moves to the position "BLANK + clearance (L)" in the Z-axis
(4) Input items of outer surface roughing and finishing (G1133)
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
B TOOL WIDTH -
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
F ROUGH FEEDRATE -
E FINISH FEEDRATE Feedrate for finishing (positive value)
W PECKING -
U* ESCAPE AMOUNT -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
P DWELL -
Z APPROCH MOTION -
K CUT END POSITION [CENTER] : Cuts both of the right and left side faces of a groove
evenly in finishing.
[CORNER] : Cuts one side face and the entire bottom successively
then cuts the other side face only in finishing.
(COPY)
V* ESCAPE AMOUNT -
(a) Tool path

Groove roughing and finishing are continued, using the same tool. See respective descriptions about the
tool path for details of roughing and finishing.
- 212 -
(5) Input items of inner surface roughing and finishing (G1134)
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
B TOOL WIDTH -
J* IMAGINARY TOOL NOSE -
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
F ROUGH FEEDRATE -
W PECKING -
U* ESCAPE AMOUNT -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
L CLEARANCE -
P DWELL -
K CUT END POSITION See the descriptions about Outer surface roughing and finishing: G1133.
V* ESCAPE AMOUNT -
(a) Tool path

(6) Input items of end face roughing and finishing (G1135)
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
B TOOL WIDTH -
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
F ROUGH FEEDRATE -
W PECKING -
U* ESCAPE AMOUNT -
- 213 -
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
P DWELL -
Z APPROCH MOTION -
V* ESCAPE AMOUNT -
(a) Tool path

(7) Input items of outer surface finishing (G1136)
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
B TOOL WIDTH -
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
F FEED RATE Feedrate for finishing in the tool axis direction (positive value)
P DWELL -
Z APPROCH MOTION -
V ESCAPE AMOUNT -
(a) Tool path
Cutting end position [CENTER] Cutting end position [CORNER]
<1> The tool moves to the position "cut-in start position + clearance (L)" by rapid traverse.
- 214 -
<2> If [CENTER] is specified as the cutting end position, the tool cuts in one of the groove walls and
continues cutting to the center (in the Z-axis direction) of the groove at the finishing feedrate. After
retracting in the X-axis direction, the tool performs the same cutting operation for the other groove
wall.
<3> If [CORNER] is specified as the cutting end point, the tool cuts in to the bottom from the wall in the
-Z-axis direction, and retracts by a return clearance in the X- and Z-axis directions and then in the
X-axis direction. After this, the tool starts cutting from the other groove wall and continues cutting
to the edge of the bottom, and then retracts by a return clearance in the X- and Z-axis directions.
<4> The tool moves to the position "BLANK + clearance (L)" in the X-axis direction by rapid traverse.
(8) Input items of inner surface finishing (G1137)
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
B TOOL WIDTH -
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
P DWELL -
V ESCAPE AMOUNT -
(a) Tool path

continues cutting to the center (in the Z-axis direction) of the groove at the finishing feedrate. After
retracting in the X-axis direction, the tool performs the same cutting operation for the other groove
wall.
-Z-axis direction, and retracts by a return clearance in the X- and Z-axis directions and then in the
X-axis direction. After this, the tool starts cutting from the other groove wall and continues cutting
to the edge of the bottom, and then retracts by a return clearance in the X- and Z-axis directions.
<4> The tool moves to the position "BLANK + clearance (L)" in the X-axis direction by rapid traverse.
<5> The tool moves to the position "cut-in start position + clearance (M)" in the Z-axis direction by rapid
traverse and then is pulled out from the workpiece.
- 215 -
(9) Input items of end face finishing (G1138)
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
B TOOL WIDTH -
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
P DWELL -
Z APPROCH MOTION -
V ESCAPE AMOUNT -
(a) Tool path
continues cutting to the center (in the X-axis direction) of the groove at the finishing feedrate. After
retracting in the Z-axis direction, the tool performs the same cutting operation for the other groove
wall.
+X-axis direction, and retracts by a return clearance in the X- and Z-axis directions and then in the
Z-axis direction. After this, the tool starts cutting from the other groove wall and continues cutting to
the edge of the bottom, and then retracts by a return clearance in the X- and Z-axis directions.
<4> The tool moves to the position "BLANK + clearance (L)" in the Z-axis direction by rapid traverse.
2.3.2 Restrictions on Target Figures

When entering groove figure data, observe the following restrictions:
(a) There is an element at the groove bottom (a sharp or round bottom is not permitted).
(b) There is an element at the groove bottom as a result of offsetting by the tool width.
(c) There is a wall on both sides of the groove (a figure with its one side open is not permitted).
- 216 -
(d) A tool with an appropriate width for cutting the groove bottom is set (a too narrow groove is not
permitted).
(e) More than one concave is not permitted.
(f) Blank element which covers groove entry shown bellow is not specified.
*Covers with the element of slant line or arc *Covers with plural elements
2.3.3 Fixed Form Figure (ZX Plane)

(1) Input items of outer normal groove (G1470 (ZX plane))
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
U BASE POINT SETTING [+Z] : Sets the base point in the +Z direction. (initial value)
[-Z] : Sets the base point in the -Z direction.
X BASE POINT (X) X coordinate of the reference position of a groove
Z BASE POINT (Z) Z coordinate of the reference position of a groove
P DEPTH DIRECTION As to X axis Depth direction,
[-X] : Depth is in the –X direction.
[+X] : Depth is in the +X direction.
No.27100 = 1.
L DEPTH Groove depth (radius value, positive value(0<L))
D WIDTH Groove width (radius value, positive value)
CORNER INFO
Data item Meaning
A CORNER TYPE-1 For corner (1) of the reference position
[NOTHIN] : Specifies neither chamfering nor corner rounding (initial
value).
[CHAMFR] : Specifies chamfering.
[ARC] : Specifies corner rounding.
B CORNER SIZE Chamfer amount or corner radius (radius value, positive value)
Remark) This data item is indicated only when [CHAMFR] or [ARC] is
selected for CORNER TYPE-1.
E CORNER TYPE-2 For corner (2)
value).
F CORNER SIZE Chamfer amount or corner radius (radius value, positive value)
I CORNER TYPE-3 For corner (3)
value).
J CORNER SIZE Chamfer amount or corner radius (radius value, positive value)
- 217 -
CORNER INFO
Data item Meaning
Q CORNER TYPE-4 For corner (4)
value).
R CORNER SIZE Chamfer amount or corner radius (radius value, positive value)
REPEAT
Data item Meaning
M GROOVE NUMBER Number of grooves of the same figure to be machined. The blank is
regarded as 1. (positive value)
S PITCH Distance between the reference positions of two adjacent grooves (radius
value, positive value)
W PITCH DIRECTION [-Z] : Places a second and subsequent grooves in the -Z direction (initial
value).
[+Z] : Places a second and subsequent grooves in the +Z direction.
(2) Input items of outer trapezoidal groove (G1471 (ZX plane))
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
C INPUT TYPE Selects the type of input data configuration.(NOTE)
[TYPE1] : Specifies the width of the groove entry and the inclination
angle of a side face to the Z-axis direction. (initial value)
[TYPE2] : Specifies the width of the groove bottom and the inclination
angle of a side face to the X-axis direction.
U BASE POINT SETTING See the descriptions about Outer normal groove: G1470.
X BASE POINT (X) -
Z BASE POINT (Z) -
P DEPTH DIRECTION -
L DEPTH -
D WIDTH -
NOTE
Even when the setting of the input type [C] is changed after the input items for the
previous input type are entered, the entered input items are all maintained. So,
when the input type [C] is changed to the previous input type again, the entered
values of the input items are restored.
CORNER INFO
Data item Meaning
A CORNER TYPE-1 See the descriptions about Outer normal groove: G1470.
B CORNER SIZE -
E CORNER TYPE-2 -
F CORNER SIZE -
I CORNER TYPE-3 -
J CORNER SIZE -
Q CORNER TYPE-4 -
R CORNER SIZE -
- 218 -
BOTTOM INFO
Data item Meaning
H BOTTOM TYPE [WIDTH] : Specifies the difference between the groove entry of each
side face and the width of the groove bottom (initial value
when type 1 is selected).
[ANGLE] : Specifies the angle of a side face of a groove (initial value
when type 2 is selected).
[BOT. WIDTH] : Specified Bottom width (when the parameter
No.27170#4=1, this item is displayed).
When “BOT.WIDTH” is specified, the item of “BOTTOM
WIDTH (N)” is displayed.
K* BOTTOM SIZE/ANGLE Difference between the groove entry of the side face on the reference
position side and the width of the groove bottom when [WIDTH] is
specified (radius value, positive value).
When [ANGLE] is specified, this item specifies the inclination angle of the
side face on the reference position side to the X-axis direction (positive
value).
When the input type [C] and bottom type [H] are set to [TYPE1] and
[WIDTH], [TYPE2] and [ANGLE], or [TYPE2] and [WIDTH], respectively,
the default width is 0 if WIDTH is specified, or the default angle is 90 if
ANGLE is specified.
When [TYPE1] and [ANGLE] are specified, the default angle is 90.
V* BOTOM SIZE/ANGLE Difference between the groove entry of the side face on the side opposite
to the reference position side and the width of the groove bottom when
[WIDTH] is specified (radius value, positive value).
Inclination angle of the side face on the side opposite to the reference
position side when [ANGLE] is specified (positive value).
When the input type [C] and bottom type [H] are set to [TYPE1] and
[WIDTH], [TYPE2] and [ANGLE], or [TYPE2] and [WIDTH], respectively,
the default width is 0 if WIDTH is specified.
When [TYPE1] and [ANGLE] are specified, the default angle is 90.
N BOTOM WIDTH Bottom width ( radius value, positive value) (when the parameter
No.27170#4=1, this item is displayed).
The groove figure is specified with WIDTH (D), DEPTH (L) and BOTTOM
WIDTH (N). The width of the bottom is centered for width in the opening.
WIDTH (D)
DEPTH (L)
BOTTOM WIDTH (N)
When the size specified for BOTTOM WIDTH is larger than the SIZE of
width or negative value, the following alarm message is displayed.
“WRONG GROOVE BOTTOM”
REPEAT
Data item Meaning
M GROOVE NUMBER See the descriptions about Outer normal groove: G1470.
- 219 -
S PITCH -
W PITCH DIRECTION -
(3) Input items of inner normal groove (G1472 (ZX plane))
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
X BASE POINT (X) -
Z BASE POINT (Z) -
P DEPTH DIRECTION -
L DEPTH -
D WIDTH -
CORNER INFO
Data item Meaning
B CORNER SIZE -
E CORNER TYPE-2 -
F CORNER SIZE -
I CORNER TYPE-3 -
J CORNER SIZE -
Q CORNER TYPE-4 -
R CORNER SIZE -
- 220 -
REPEAT
Data item Meaning
S PITCH -
W PITCH DIRECTION -
(4) Input items of inner trapezoidal groove (G1473 (ZX plane))
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
C INPUT TYPE See the descriptions about Outer trapezoidal groove: G1471.
X BASE POINT (X) -
Z BASE POINT (Z) -
P DEPTH DIRECTION -
L DEPTH -
D WIDTH -
CORNER INFO
Data item Meaning
B CORNER SIZE -
E CORNER TYPE-2 -
F CORNER SIZE -
I CORNER TYPE-3 -
J CORNER SIZE -
Q CORNER TYPE-4 -
R CORNER SIZE -
BOTTOM INFO
Data item Meaning
H BOTTOM TYPE See the descriptions about Outer trapezoidal groove: G1471.
K* BOTTOM SIZE/ANGLE -
V* BOTOM SIZE/ANGLE -
N BOTOM WIDTH -
REPEAT
Data item Meaning
S PITCH -
W PITCH DIRECTION -
(5) Input items of end face normal groove (G1474 (ZX plane))
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
X BASE POINT (X) -
Z BASE POINT (Z) -
P DEPTH DIRECTION -
L DEPTH -
D WIDTH -
- 221 -
CORNER INFO
Data item Meaning
B CORNER SIZE -
E CORNER TYPE-2 -
F CORNER SIZE -
I CORNER TYPE-3 -
J CORNER SIZE -
Q CORNER TYPE-4 -
R CORNER SIZE -
REPEAT
Data item Meaning
S PITCH -
W PITCH DIRECTION -
(6) Input items of end face trapezoidal groove (G1475 (ZX plane))
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
C INPUT TYPE See the descriptions about Outer trapezoidal groove: G1471.
X BASE POINT (X) -
Z BASE POINT (Z) -
P DEPTH DIRECTION -
L DEPTH -
D WIDTH -
CORNER INFO
Data item Meaning
B CORNER SIZE -
E CORNER TYPE-2 -
F CORNER SIZE -
I CORNER TYPE-3 -
J CORNER SIZE -
Q CORNER TYPE-4 -
R CORNER SIZE -
BOTTOM INFO
Data item Meaning
H BOTTOM TYPE See the descriptions about Outer trapezoidal groove: G1471.
K* BOTTOM SIZE/ANGLE -
V* BOTOM SIZE/ANGLE -
N BOTOM WIDTH -
REPEAT
Data item Meaning
S PITCH -
W PITCH DIRECTION -
- 222 -
2.3.4 Turning Groove Cycle by Using Button Tool

(1) Machining cycle
The following turning groove cycles can be executed by a button tool.
(a) Outer surface roughing (G1130)
(b) Inner surface roughing (G1131)
(c) End face roughing (G1132)
(d) Outer surface roughing and finishing (G1133)
(e) Inner surface roughing and finishing (G1134)
(f) End face roughing and finishing (G1135)
(g) Outer surface finishing (G1136)
(h) Inner surface finishing (G1137)
(i) End face finishing (G1138)
(2) Input items

Input items are the same as turning groove cycle with groove tool.
Input item "tool width" can be omitted.
Tool width of button tool is regarded as below.

(a) In case of displaying tool condition tab
When input item "tool width" of tool condition tab is inputted, it is tool width.
When input item "tool width" is not inputted, tool radius * 2 is tool width.
(b) In case of using tool database
Tool radius * 2 is tool width.
(3) Tool path

Tool path is the same as turning groove cycle with groove tool.
2.3.5 Automatic Adjustment of Escape Amount for Turning

Grooving Cycle
When turning grooving cycle is inputted escape amount larger than groove width, escape amount is
adjusted to prevent interference automatically.
(Parameter No. 27170#3)

When tool is likely to interfere for turning grooving cycle, escape amount is
0: adjusted automatically.
1: not adjusted automatically. (Conventional specifications)
2.3.5.1 Machining cycles

This function is available in the following machining cycles.
(1) Outer surface turning grooving cycles

Outer surface roughing(G1130), Outer surface roughing and finishing(G1133), Outer surface
finishing(G1136)
(2) Inner surface turning grooving cycles

Inner surface roughing(G1131), Inner surface roughing and finishing(G1134), Inner surface
finishing(G1137),
(3) End face turning grooving cycles

End face roughing(G1132), End face roughing and finishing(G1135), End face finishing(G1138).
- 223 -
2.3.5.2 Tool path

Roughing
When the following condition is satisfied, escape amount is adjusted as center of tool is corresponding to
center of groove width. (Refer to the fig. 1)
(Condition)
Escape amount ≧ groove width – tool width
(Expression of escape amount)

Escape amount = (groove width – tool width)÷2
(*) Groove width is not including finishing allowance.

(*) If there is chamfering or corner rounding at the groove bottom, groove width is length of straight
segment of the groove bottom. (Refer to the Fig. 2)
(*) If escape amount is lower than zero, escape is not executed.
: Finishing allowance
: Cutting feedrate
: One machining range
of cut depth
Machining range
Escape amount Escape amount Tool width

Tool width
Groove width Groove width
Fig.1. (a) Sample of ZIGZAG (b) Sample of one direction

Fig.2. (a) Groove width when there is chamfering (b) Groove width when there is corner rounding
Finishing
When the following condition is satisfied, escape amount is adjusted as side of tool do not exceed center
of groove width. (Refer to the Fig. 3)
- 224 -
(Condition)
Escape amount > (groove width÷2) – tool width
(Expression of escape amount)

Escape amount = (groove width÷2) – tool width
(*) If there is chamfering or corner rounding at the groove bottom, groove width is length of straight
segment of the groove bottom. (Refer to the Fig. 4)
(*) If escape amount is lower than zero, escape is not executed.
: Finishing allowance
: Cutting feedrate
Escape amount Tool width

Groove width
Fig.3. (a) Sample of finishing
Fig.4. (a) Groove width when there is chamfering (b) Groove width when there is corner rounding
2.4 THREADING

(1) Input items of threading (outer) (G1140)
Input items of threading (inner) (G1141)
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
R NOSE RADIUS Tool nose radius of a threading tool. (positive value)
A NOSE ANGLE Tool angle of a threading tool (positive value)
J IMAGINARY TOOL NOSE Imaginary tool nose position of a threading tool.
- 225 -
NOTE
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
W CUTTING METHOD [SING.A] : Constant amount of cut, one-edge cutting
[BOTH A] : Constant amount of cut, both-edge cutting
[STAG.A] : Constant amount of cut, both-edge zigzag thread cutting
[SING.D] : Constant depth of cut, one-edge cutting
[BOTH D] : Constant depth of cut, both-edge cutting
[STAG.D] : Constant depth of cut, both-edge zigzag thread cutting
(COPY)
B THREADING DIRECTION Thread cutting direction. This item is displayed when bit 1 (TCD) of
parameter No. 27140 is set to 1.
[-Z]: Cutting in the -Z direction
[+Z]: Cutting in the +Z direction
If bit 1 (TCD) of parameter No. 27140 is set to 0, cutting is performed in
the -Z direction.
C* FINISH AMOUNT Finishing allowance for threading in the X-axis direction. The blank is
regarded as 0. (radius value, positive value)
K* NUMBER OF FINISHING Number of finishing operations. (positive value)
(COPY)
S CUT TYPE [NUMBER] : Specifies threading by the number of cuts.
[DEPTH] : Specifies threading by the first amount of cut.
(COPY)
P CUT DEPTH NUMBER Number of cuts for rough threading (999 max., positive value)
Remark) The number of finishing cuts is not included. In the case of
both-edge zigzag thread cutting, be sure to specify an even
number of cuts. If an odd number of cuts are specified, only one
additional both-edge zigzag thread cutting operation is
performed. This data item is indicated only when [NUMBER] is
selected.
Q CUT DEPTH Depth of cut per rough threading operation (radius value, positive value)
Remark) The number of cuts is determined by the depth of cut and the
cutting method.
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
Z APPROCH MOTION [Z→X] : From the current position to the machining start point, the
direction. (Initial value for external thread)
[X→Z] : From the current position to the machining start point, the
direction. (Initial value for internal thread)
[2 AXES] : From the current position to the machining start point, the
tool moves simultaneously in the X- and Z-axis directions.
D SURFACE CLEARANCE Distance between a thread crest and machining start point (approach
point) in the X-axis direction (radius value, positive value)
Remark) The data programmed at the last time is set as an initial value.
At the time, if the initial value is less than the parameter No.27156
(minimum clamp value), it is clamped by the value of the parameter.
- 226 -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
ENTRANCE CLEARANCE Distance between a thread start point and machining start point
(approach point) in the Z-axis direction (radius value, positive value)
M EXIT CLERANCE Distance between a thread end point and threading operation end point
in the Z-axis direction. (radius value, positive value)
Y CUT DEPTH DIRECTION As to X axis Cut direction,
No.27100#0 = 1. (COPY)
(a) Tool path
External-thread cutting Internal-thread cutting
<1> The tool moves to the position "thread start point + thread surface clearance (D in the X-axis
direction)" and position thread entry clearance (L in the Z-axis direction) by rapid traverse.
<2> Threading is performed using a specified cutting method. The end point of threading in the Z-axis
direction is the thread exit clearance apart from the thread end point.
<3> If [NUMBER] is specified as a cut-in type, threading is performed as many times as the [NUMBER]
value. If [DEPTH] is specified, this amount is used in the first cut-in and threading is performed
until the specified thread figure is obtained.
<4> After all portions are cut, the tool moves to the position "cut-in start position + clearance (L)" in the
X-axis direction at the rapid traverse rate.
- See the following expansions for details of the cutting methods.
- 227 -
[SING.A] : Constant amount of cut, one-edge cutting
d1=D
dn=
Dsqrt(n) H
[BOTH A] : Constant amount of cut, both-edge cutting
d1=D
dn=
Dsqrt(n) H
H=Height of thread crest, D=Amount of cut, u=Finishing allowance
[STAG.A] : Constant amount of cut, both-edge zigzag thread cutting
d1=D
dn-2
dn-1 dn
H
dn-2 = D sqrt(n-2)
dn-1 = (D(sqrt(n-2) + sqrt(n)))/2
dn = D sqrt(n)
When the amount of cut is smaller than the minimum amount of cut (parameter No. 27145), the amount
of cut is clamped to the minimum amount of cut.
[SING.D] : Constant depth of cut, one-edge cutting
D
H
D
- 228 -
[BOTH D] : Constant depth of cut, both-edge cutting
D
H
D
[STAG.D] : Constant depth of cut, both-edge zigzag thread cutting
D
D
D
H
D
NOTE
Depending on the minimum amount of cut, the specified number of cuts may be
excessive. In such a case, threading is performed by a number of cuts less than
the specified number of cuts.
The number of cuts actually done may differ from the specified number of cuts
due to a calculation error.
2.4.2 Fixed Form Figure

(1) Input items of general-purpose thread (G1460 (ZX plane))
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
W THREAD TYPE [MALE] : To be selected when the external thread is specified as
threading type
[FEMALE] : To be selected when the internal thread is specified as threading
type
X START POINT / BASE The item name changes depending on the threading direction set by bit 1
POINT1 (X) (TCD) of parameter No. 27140.
START POINT (X): X coordinate of a thread start point (if bit 1 (TCD) of
parameter No. 27140 is set to 0)
BASE POINT1 (X): X coordinate of reference position 1 (if bit 1 (TCD) of
Z START POINT / BASE The item name changes depending on the threading direction set by bit 1
POINT1 (Z) (TCD) of parameter No. 27140.
START POINT (Z): Z coordinate of a thread start point (if bit 1 (TCD) of
BASE POINT1 (Z): X coordinate of reference position 1 (if bit 1 (TCD) of
L LEAD Thread lead (radius value, positive value)
H THREAD DEPTH Thread depth (radius value, positive value)
Remark) A thread depth is automatically calculated by pressing [CALC] after
inputting a lead.
- 229 -
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
A END POINT / BASE The item name changes depending on the threading direction set by bit 1
POINT2 (X) (TCD) of parameter No. 27140.
END POINT(X): X coordinate of a thread end point (if bit 1 (TCD) of
BASE POINT2 (X): X coordinate of reference position 2 (if bit 1 (TCD) of
B END POINT / BASE The item name changes depending on the threading direction set by bit 1
POINT2 (Z) (TCD) of parameter No. 27140.
END POINT (Z): Z coordinate of a thread end point (if bit 1 (TCD) of
BASE POINT2 (Z): Z coordinate of reference position 2 (if bit 1 (TCD) of
C MULTIPLE THREADS Method of specifying a multi-start thread (*)
INPUT TYPE [THRDS]: Specifies a multi-start thread with the number of starts (initial
value).
[PITCH]: Specifies a multi-start thread with a pitch.
N* THREAD NUMBER OF Number of starts of a multi-start thread (*)
SCREW Specifies the number of starts to be cut per lead.
Remark) This item is displayed when THRDS is selected for MULTIPLE
THREADS INPUT TYPE.
The relationship among the number of starts N, lead L, and pitch P
is expressed as follows: N=L/P
P* PITCH Pitch of a multi-start thread (*)
From the entered lead L and pitch P, the number of starts N is calculated
automatically (N=L/P).
Remark) This item is displayed when PITCH is selected for MULTIPLE
THREADS INPUT TYPE.
NOTE
The thread depth of a general-purpose thread is calculated from parameter No.
27150 (external) or parameter No. 27151 (internal) and a thread lead.
(a) Multi-start thread

(*) P and L are illustrated below. The following figure shows a concept of a four-start thread:
Lead L
Pitch P
4th start 2nd start

1st start
3rd start
When a thread figure block in a program does not contain the argument of “MULTIPLE THREADS
INPUT TYPE C” and the argument of ”THRDS N” or “PITCH P”, the following are assumed:
- 230 -
• When neither of the arguments is present

The number of starts is assumed to be 1 when threading is performed.
• When the argument of “THRDS N” or “PITCH P” is present but the argument of “MULTIPLE
THREADS INPUT TYPE” is not present
The alarm message “NO NECESSARY ADDRESS” is displayed at the time of execution.
(i) Cutting method

When a multi-start thread is cut, cutting for the first start is completed, then cutting for the second and
subsequent starts are completed sequentially.
When finishing is also to be performed, cutting and finishing for the first start is completed, then cutting
and finishing for the second and subsequent starts are completed sequentially.
An example of threading is explained below, where the cutting method is assumed to be constant amount
of cut and one-edge cutting, and the number of cuts is assumed to be 3:
Cutting is performed in the following sequence:
(1) Cut the first start from the first layer to the third layer. <1><2><3>
↓
(2) Cut the second start from the first layer to the third layer. <4><5><6>
↓
(3) Cut the third start from the first layer to the third layer. <7><8><9>
Tool tip
1st
<7> <4> <1> layer
2nd
<8> <5> <2> layer 3rd
layer
<9> <6> <3>
3rd start 2nd start 1st start
(ii) Offset by pitch at the start of cutting

To cut multiple starts, the cutting start position or start angle is offset.
One of these methods is set by bit 3 (MLT) of parameter No. 27140.
Whichever method is to be used, the figure generated by cutting does not vary.
<1> Offset start position Z by the pitch. (Bit 3 (MLT) of parameter No. 27140 = 1)
For any of straight, tapered, and reverse tapered threads, the start position is not offset in the X-axis
direction.
<2> Offset the thread start angle. (Bit 3 (MLT) of parameter No. 27140 = 0)
The thread start angle is given through argument Q of G32 or G92 (threading cycle).
The code to be used, G32 or G92, is determined by the setting of bit 0 (THO) of parameter No.
27140).
(2) Input items of metric thread (G1461 (ZX plane))

A metric thread is cut. Only one straight thread is machined. Be sure to set a tool angle of 60 degrees.
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
W THREAD TYPE [MALE] : To be selected when the external thread is specified as threading
type
type
- 231 -
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
D THREAD DIAMETER Thread diameter (positive value)
External thread
D Internal thread D
Z START POINT / BASE The item name changes depending on the threading direction specified by bit 1
POINT (Z) (TCD) of parameter No. 27140.
BASE POINT (Z): Z coordinate of reference position (if bit 1 (TCD) of
M LENGTH Thread length (radius value, positive value)
inputting a lead.
C MULTIPLE THREADS Method of specifying a multi-start thread
INPUT TYPE [THRDS]: Specifies a multi-start thread with the number of starts (initial value).
[PITCH]: Specifies a multi-start thread with a pitch.
N* THREAD NUMBER OF Number of starts of a multi-start thread
Remark) This item is displayed when THRDS is selected for MULTIPLE
THREADS INPUT TYPE.
The relationship among the number of starts N, lead L, and pitch P is
expressed as follows: N=L/P
P* PITCH Pitch of a multi-start thread
From the entered lead L and pitch P, the number of starts N is calculated
automatically (N=L/P).
Remark) This item is displayed when PITCH is selected for MULTIPLE
THREADS INPUT TYPE.
NOTE
The thread depth of a metric thread is calculated from parameter No. 27152
(external) or parameter No. 27153 (internal) and a thread lead.
(3) Input items of unified thread (G1462 (ZX plane))

A unified thread is cut. Only one straight thread is machined. For a unified thread, the "number of thread
crests/inch" is used instead of a thread lead. Be sure to set a tool angle of 60 degrees.
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
threading type
type
Z START POINT / BASE The item name changes depending on the threading direction specified by bit
POINT (Z) 1 (TCD) of parameter No. 27140.
L THREAD NUMBER Number of thread crests per inch
- 232 -
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
inputting a thread number.
NOTE
The thread depth of a unified thread is calculated from parameter No. 27152
(outer) or parameter No. 27153 (inner) and a thread number.
(4) Input items of PT thread (G1463 (tapered thread for tubes, ZX plane))
A PT thread (tapered thread for tubes) is cut. Only one tapered thread (tapered by 1.7899 degrees) is machined.
Be sure to set a tool angle of 55 degrees. The taper figure of an external thread (male thread) is such that the
end face of a blank represents a minor diameter portion. The taper figure of an internal thread (female thread)
is such that the end face of a blank represents a major diameter portion.
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
threading type
type
Z START POINT / BASE The item name changes depending on the threading direction specified by bit
POINT (Z) 1 (TCD) of parameter No. 27140.
NOTE
The thread depth of a PT thread is calculated from parameter No. 27154
(external) or parameter No. 27155 (internal) and a thread number.
(5) Input items of PF thread (G1464 (parallel thread for tubes, ZX plane))
A PF thread (parallel thread for tubes) is cut. Only one straight thread is machined. Be sure to set a tool angle
of 55 degrees.
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
threading type
type
- 233 -
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
Z START POINT / BASE The item name changes depending on the threading direction set by bit 1
POINT (Z) (TCD) of parameter No. 27140.
START POINT (Z): Z coordinate of a thread start point(if bit 1 (TCD) of
NOTE
The thread depth of a PF thread is calculated from parameter No. 27154
(external) or parameter No. 27155 (internal) and a thread number.
- 234 -
2.5 REAR END FACING BY TURNING

By setting bit 4 (TC4) of parameter No. 27100 to 1, the input item "FACE POSITION" is displayed on
the following menu. By entering this data, rear end facing is enabled.
(1) Hole machining - Center drilling : G1100

(2) Hole machining - Drilling : G1101
(3) Hole machining - Tapping : G1102
(4) Hole machining - Reaming : G1103
(5) Hole machining - Boring : G1104
(6) Turning - End face roughing : G1122
(7) Turning - End face semifinishing : G1125
(8) Turning - End face finishing : G1128
(9) Turning groove - End face roughing : G1132
(10) Turning groove - End face roughing and finishing : G1135
(11) Turning groove - End face finishing : G1138
FACE POSIT
Data item Meaning
Y FACE POSITION [+FACE ]: References the figure below (+ end face). (initial value)
[-FACE ]: References the figure below (- end face).
Reference position Reference position
(-) Depth Depth (-)
+Z +Z
(+) Height Height (+)
+end face - end face
(-) Depth Depth (-)
+Z +Z
- end face + end face
- 235 -
2.6 RESIDUAL MACHINING BY TURNING

In turning, a residual machining cycle can be used to automatically recognize a part left uncut due to the
tool nose angle interference check and cut the part with a reverse handed tool (machining a part left uncut
is referred to residual machining hereinafter). This function is enabled by setting bit 1 (CNR) of
parameter No. 27120 to 1).
2.6.1 Outline of the Residual Machining Cycle

The programming procedure is outlined below.
<1> Define a tool for outer surface machining using the tool database or on the TOOL COND. tab on the
machining cycle screen.
<2> Perform a turning (outer surface roughing) cycle.
Left uncut
<3> The execution of the turning cycle in <2> leaves a residual part as a result of a tool nose angle
interference check.
<4> With the tool database or on the TOOL COND. tab of the machining cycle screen, define an outer
surface cutting tool that cuts in the direction opposite to the cutting direction of the tool defined in
<3>.
<5> Perform a new residual machining cycle. Then, residual part information is internally generated
automatically, and a machining path is created.
- 236 -
2.6.2 Cycle Selection Screen

If bit 1 (CNR) of parameter No. 27120 is set to 1, pressing soft key [CYCLE] for lathes additionally
displays the “RESIDUAL MACHINING BY TURNING” tab.
“RESIDUAL MACHINING BY TURNING” supports the following nine machining types:
Outer surface residual roughing (G1160)

Inner surface residual roughing (G1161)
End face residual roughing (G1162)
Outer surface residual semifinishing (G1163)
Inner surface residual semifinishing (G1164)
End face residual semifinishing (G1165)
Outer surface residual finishing (G1166)
Inner surface residual finishing (G1167)
End face residual finishing (G1168)
2.6.3 Cycle Input Screen

The input items and guidance window of the cycle input screen are the same as those of the input screen
of a turning cycle that can be used together (except end facing).
Turning cycle Residual machining cycle that can be used together

Outer surface roughing (G1120) Outer surface residual roughing (G1160)
Inner surface roughing (G1121) Inner surface residual roughing (G1161)
End face roughing (G1122) End face residual roughing (G1162)
Outer surface semifinishing (G1123) Outer surface residual semifinishing (G1163)
Inner surface semifinishing (G1124) ner surface residual semifinishing (G1164)
End face semifinishing (G1125) End face residual semifinishing (G1165)
Outer surface finishing (G1126) Outer surface residual finishing (G1166)
Inner surface finishing (G1127) Inner surface residual finishing (G1167)
End face finishing (G1128) End face residual finishing (G1168)
When a residual machining cycle is displayed for creation, the following data is set as the initial values of
cutting condition data:
• The settings of a turning cycle that can be used together are all copied except tool condition data.
• As the cutting direction, the direction opposite to the direction specified in a turning cycle that can
be used together is set.
G code arguments are the same as for a turning cycle that can be used together.
In the cycle input screen of Outer surface/Inner surface/End face residual roughing and semi-finishing, in
case of the parameter No.27121#7=1, the following input items are not displayed.
- X-AXIS FINISH AMT.
- Z-AXIS FINISH AMT.
This function sets finish amounts of residual machining cycle by referring to finish amounts specified in
last turning cycle automatically.
- 237 -
2.6.4 Motion of Outer Surface Residual Roughing (G1160)

(1) A program for outer surface residual roughing is created as follows:
:
T0101; : Specify normal handed tool data
: : Insert approach command manually
G1120 P__Q__ . . . ; : Specify outer surface roughing cycle with
normal handed tool
G1450 H__V__;
G1451 H__V__ . . . ;
: : Define arbitrary figure
:
G1456;
: : Insert escape command manually
T0202; : <1>Specify reverse handed tool
: : <2>Insert approach command manually
G1160 P__Q__…; : <3>Outer surface residual roughing command
: : <4>Insert escape command manually
:
<1>
<2>
<4>
<3>
(2) If a cycle other than outer surface roughing (G1120) is used together, an alarm (PS3012 (PS3512)
“UNCOMBINED G-CODE”) is issued, and program execution stops.
(3) When more than one residual part is present, all residual parts are recorded during the previous
turning cycle, and the recorded parts are cut successively in the residual machining cycle.
- 238 -
(4) When more than one residual part is present, these parts are cut in the order from a residual part
generated first by outer surface roughing to a residual part generated last.
<2> <1>
After outer surface roughing is performed from the right to left as shown in the figure, <1> then <2>
are cut in outer surface residual roughing, regardless of the cutting direction of outer surface residual
roughing.
(5) Information about residual parts in outer surface roughing is cleared when:
• A cycle command for machining other than outer surface residual roughing is executed.
• Machining for residual parts is completed (applicable parts only).
• An alarm is issued during residual machining.
• A program is selected again.
• The reset signal is detected.
• Operation ends.
• Animated simulation ends.
• NC program conversion ends.
• The power is turned off.
(6) Definitions with different tools can be made successively.

<2> <3>
<1>
<1>
<2> <3>
- 239 -
T0101; : <1>Specify cone-point cutting tool data

: : Manually insert command for approach for next machining
G1120 P__Q__ . . . ; : Specify outer surface roughing cycle with cone-point cutting tool
G1450 H__V__;
G1451 H__V__ . . . ;
: : Define arbitrary figure
:
G1456;
: : Manually insert command for escape/approach for next machining
T0202; : <2>Specify normal handed tool
G1160 P__Q__ . . . ; : <2>Outer surface residual roughing command
: : Manually insert command for escape/approach for next machining
T0303; : <3>Specify reverse handed tool
G1160 P__Q__ . . . ; : <3>Outer surface residual roughing command
:
(7) The tool nose interference check is not performed for the rear of the tool.
Tool nose check is not performed for

the rear of the tool.
(8) When no residual part is present, an alarm (PS3003 (PS3503) “NO CUTTING AREA”) is issued,
and execution stops.
(9) When bit 1 (CNR) of parameter No. 27120 is set to 0, an attempt to execute a residual machining
cycle results in an alarm (PS3011 (PS3511) “WRONG G-CODE”), and execution stops.
(10) When outer surface residual roughing is performed alone without performing outer surface rough
turning, an alarm (PS3012 (PS3512) “UNCOMBINED G-CODE”) is issued, and execution stops.
NOTE
When the tool advances in the cutting direction, if the tool moves across a figure
with the blank element attribute, the excessive amount of travel of the tool varies
depending on the setting of bit 0 (BLN) of parameter No. 27120 as follows:
0: Nose radius R
1: Clearance + nose radius R (conventional specification)
(11) In case of the parameter No.27121#7=1, specified finish amounts are not used in residual machining
cycle.
(Example)
Address C (X-AXIS FINISH AMT.) and address D (Z-AXIS FINISH AMT.) are not used.
G1160 P_ Q_ … C_ D_ … ;
- 240 -
(12) In case of the parameter No.27121#7=1, tool path is calculated by referring to finish amounts
specified in last turning cycle.
(In case of outer surface residual roughing (X-AXIS CLEARANCE = Z-AXIS CLEARANCE))
Clearance
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed
Blank
Finish amount specified
in last turning cycle
45°
Residual part
(13) In case of omitting the finishing amount in residual roughing and semi-finishing and the parameter
No.27121#7=1, there is the following restriction.
When the all following conditions are satisfied, the following warning and alarm occur.
Turning cycle: warning“FAILED TO CREATE RESIDUAL CUTTING AREA”
Residual machining cycle: alarm“NO CUTTING AREA”
(Conditions)
(1) The parameter No.27121#7 = 1
(2) X-AXIS FINISH AMT. ≠ Z-AXIS FINISH AMT.
(3) The end point of element added by the tool angle check function is on an arc element.
(Example 1 of Conditions (3))

Cutting direction
Element added by the

tool angle check function
Blank
Residual part
- 241 -
(Example 2 of Conditions (3))
Cutting direction
Element added by the

tool angle check function
Blank
Residual part
2.6.5 Motion of Machining Other than Outer Surface Residual

Roughing (G1160)
The following residual machining cycles operate in the same manner as outer surface residual roughing
(G1160):
Inner surface residual roughing (G1161)

End face residual roughing (G1162)
Outer surface residual semifinishing (G1163)
Inner surface residual semifinishing (G1164)
End face residual semifinishing (G1165)
Outer surface residual finishing (G1166)
Inner surface residual finishing (G1167)
End face residual finishing (G1168)
2.6.6 Finish Turning Using G41/G42

When bit 6 (G41) of parameter No. 27120 is set to 1, the following machining cycles can be executed
using the G41/G42 command:
• Outer surface residual finish turning (G1166)

• Inner surface residual finish turning (G1167)
• End face residual finish turning (G1168)
The travel distance applicable when the startup and cancel commands, G41 and G42, are specified is set
in parameter No. 27133. If the parameter is set to 0, 0.1 mm or 0.005 inch is assumed by default.
For details of the machining motion, see Subsection 2.2.1, "Machining Command", in Section 2.2,
"TURNING".
- 242 -
2.7 POLYGON TURNING CYCLE

Polygon turning cycle is available. Polygon turning is a machining cycle to create polygon figure by
rotating both the workpiece and tool at a certain ratio.
NOTE
1 The option “polygon turning” or “polygon turning with two spindles” is necessary
to use this function in case of Series 16i/18i/21i-B and Series 30i/31i/32i.
2 Setting parameter No.27104#7=1 is necessary to use this function in case of
Series 0i-F/0i-D.
3 This function isn’t available in case of Series 0i-C.
4 This function is available only in lathes.
5 Polygon turning is available only on main spindle. Polygon turning is not
available on sub spindle.
6 Refer user manual of CNC to know the details of polygon turning.
2.7.1 Input Items of Polygon Turning Cycle

The input items of polygon turning are the followings.
(1) Machining command (G1145)
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
U BOTTOM THICKNESS Cutting allowance of the bottom(radius value)
T SIDE THICKNESS Cutting allowance of the side face(radius value)

H SIDE FINISH AMOUNT Finishing allowance on the side face. The blank is
regarded as 0. (radius value)
K BOTTOM FINISHI AMT. Finishing allowance at the bottom in side face machining.
The blank is regarded as 0. (radius value)
C CLEARANCE Distance between the blank and machining start point (approach point) in the
X-axis direction (radius value)
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
Q CUT DEPTH OF RADIUS Depth of cut per side face machining operation (in the tool radius direction)
(radius value)
S CUT DEPTH OF AXIS Depth of cut in the tool axis direction per cutting operation (radius value)
E FEED RATE Feed rate during cutting in the tool radius direction
V ESCAPE AMOUNT Distance by which the tool retracts from the cutting surface after each cut
(radius value)
Z APPROCH MOTION From the current position to the machining
start point, the tool moves
Z = 10 in the Z-axis direction and then in the X-axis direction.
Z = 11 in the X-axis direction and then in the Z-axis direction.
Z = 22 in the X- and Z-axis directions.
P DWELL Dwell time at the end point of cutting (in seconds)
N CUTTING ORDER N=1 type1

N=2 type2
- 243 -
NOTE
1 When feed rate data is set, take into account in which mode the federate is
programmed (feed per minute or feed per revolution) during polygon turning.
2 The cut depth during polygon turning is not the value that is inputted in the item
“CUT DEPTH OF RADIUS” and “CUT DEPTH OF AXIS”. Averaged cut depth by
following calculation is used during polygon turning.
(1) (Length of cut area) / (Inputted cut depth) is calculated. The result is then
rounded up to the next integer number. This value is let be n.
(2) (Actual cut depth) = (Length of cut area) / n
(2) Figure command (G1575)
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
B BASE POSITION Z coordinate of the bottom of a polygon or the top surface of a workpiece
subject to polygon turning
A HEIGHT/DEPTH Input by Depth:
When the top surface of the workpiece is selected as the BASE
POSITION, specify the distance to the bottom of the side face by using a
negative value (radius value).
Input by Height:
When the bottom surface of the workpiece is selected as the BASE
POSITION, specify the distance to the top surface of the workpiece by
using a positive value (radius value).
D INSCRIBED CIRC DIA. Diameter of the circle where the polygon is inscribed
P ROT RATIO(SPN) Rotation ratio of spindle motor (Workpiece side)
Q ROT RATIO(TOOL ) Rotation ratio of motor (Tool side)
R PHASE OF ANGLE Phase of angle

Note)
This item can be inputted only in case “polygon turning with two spindles” is
available.
2.7.2 Inserting Polygon Turning Cycle Command

The operations of inserting the command of polygon turning cycle are followings.
(1) Select “SPECIAL” tab in the turning cycle menu and the item “POLYGON TURNING” is
displayed.
(2) After inserting the command of machining, the figure menu “SPECIAL” is automatically displayed.
It is possible to display same screen if [FIGURE] soft-key for turning cycle is pushed and
“SPECIAL” tab is selected.
- 244 -
2.7.3 Tool Path of Polygon Turning

(1) Outline of tool path
The outline of tool path of polygon turning is showed in the following figure.
Y : Arrow of cutting
: Arrow of rapid
Workpiece Tool
X traverse
<7> <4> <1>

X
<8> <6> <2>
<5><3>
Z
Workpiece
Tool moves in following order from <1> to <8>.

<1> Approach
<2> Cutting in the direction of -X
<3> Escape
<4> After this, from <1> to <3> are repeated.
The position P showed in the following figure should become to the current potion of the selected
work coordinate in a polygon turning cycle program.
L Q
Workpiece Tool
Y X
Z
X
P (Current Position) Work Coordinate P (Current Position)
Position P is the cross point between Position P is on the tool tip.

line L between the center point of work It is not the center point Q of
rotation and the center point of tool tool rotation.
rotation and circle R drawn by the tool
tip rotation.
- 245 -
(2) Details of tool path

In case of polygon turning, it is possible to select the order of cutting from 2 types. Tool paths differ
from the types. Selection of cutting order type is specified by argument CUTTING ORDER N.
<1> Cutting order type 1
The order of the machining is following.
<3> <2> <1>
<6> <5> <4>
The tool moves in order of <1>-<8> as following.
Cut depth
of axis
<1>
Bottom finish
amount <6> <2>
Clearance
<7> <3>
<5>
Cut depth
of radius
Clearance
<8> <4>
Side
thickness
Side finish
amount
Bottom thickness
INSCRIBED
CIRC DIA. Height / Depth Escape amount
X Base position
<2> Cutting order type 2
The order of the machining is following.
<5> <3> <1>
<6> <4> <2>
- 246 -
The tool moves in order of <1>-<8> as following.
Cut depth
of axis
<1>
Bottom finish
amount <8>
<2>
Clearance
Cut depth <3>

of radius <7>
Clearance
<4>
Side <5>
thickness
<6> Side finish

amount
Bottom thickness
INSCRIBED Height / Depth Escape amount

CIRC DIA.
X Base position
2.7.4 Tool Kind Setting

It is possible to execute polygon turning cycle though any tool kind is set. And, it is possible to execute
the cycle even if tool kind is not specified.
But, if tool kind is not set, the warning “TOOL DATA ISN'T DEFINED.” is displayed during simulation.
2.7.5 Direction of Imaginary Tool Nose Setting

It is possible to execute polygon turning cycle only when following direction of the imaginary tool nose is
set.
0, 2, 3, 6, 7, 8
In the case of other direction, the alarm “WRONG VIRTUAL TOOL TIP POS” will occur.
2.7.6 Simulation during Polygon Turning Cycle

If polygon turning is executed during machining simulation (animation), then the tool disappears.
Workpiece is not cut on simulation.
After polygon turning execution, the tool is drawn again and workpiece is cut on simulation from the next
block of polygon turning cycle.
If polygon turning is executed during machining simulation (tool path), the path is drawn.
- 247 -
3. C-AXIS AND A-AXIS
MACHINING CYCLE MACHINING CYCLE B-63874EN/11
3 C-AXIS AND A-AXIS MACHINING CYCLE

MANUAL GUIDE i provides the following machining cycles for milling:
C-axis grooving
Machining block G1056 C-axis grooving
Fixed form figure block G1570 C-axis groove
(XC plane, end face) G1571 X-axis groove
Fixed form figure block G1670 C-axis groove
(ZC plane, cylindrical surface) G1671 Z-axis groove
A-axis grooving
Machining block G1058 A-axis grooving
Fixed form figure block G1770 A-axis groove
(ZC plane, cylindrical surface) G1771 X-axis groove
NOTE
1 When MANUAL GUIDE i is used to enter cycle machining data, combinations of
a machining type and a figure block must be entered in succession.
More than one figure block can be entered for one machining type block.
For arbitrary figures, however, more than one set of arbitrary figures can be
entered if one set is assumed to consist of up to 90 figures enclosed between a
start point and an end block.
2 A data item whose address is indicated with [*] in the following tables is
automatically set with a typical value unless a value is entered for it. You need to
enter no data if you accept the typical value.
On the screen, [*] is displayed in the right end of the data item.
3 For input items indicated with "(copy)", the previously entered data is
automatically set as the initial value.
4 In "APPROCH MOTION" in the cycle menu, if soft key [3 AXES] is specified
when the CNC simultaneously controls up to two axes, an alarm (PS0015) is
issued. Therefore, when using such a CNC, never specify [3 AXES].
5 When a cycle ends, the tool always returns to the position where the cycle
started.
(If bit 7 (ESC) of parameter No. 27002 is set to 1, it is possible not to cause the
tool to return to the start position when a cycle ends.)
6 In 0i -MC and 0i-MD, it is impossible to use C-axis machining cycle.
7 In 0i -MC and 0i-MD, it is impossible to use A-axis machining cycle.
8 It is possible to use A-axis machining cycle in only vertical machining center.
Remarks)
Retract motions in cycle machining
If bit 7 (ESC) of parameter No. 27002 is set to 0, a retract motion is performed as indicated by the
dashed line shown below.
When retracting, the tool moves along axes in the reverse order of the axis movements made during
the approach motion.
- 248 -
3.C-AXIS AND A-AXIS
B-63874EN/11 MACHINING CYCLE MACHINING CYCLE
Retract motion Position before cycle start

of cycle
Approach
motion of cycle
When multiple figures are machined with one 4-digit G code (such as hole machining and C-axis
grooving), the above applies only to the retract motion for the figure machined last.
3.1 C-AXIS AND A-AXIS GROOVING

(1) Input items of GROOVING (C AXIS) (G1056)
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
D TOOL DIAMETER End mill diameter
NOTE
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
J* CUT DEPTH OF AXIS Depth of cut in the tool axis direction per cutting operation. By default, one
cutting operation is used. (radius value, positive value)
F FEED RATE- RADIUS Feedrate applicable when cutting is performed in the side face direction of
the end mill
E FEEDRATE - AXIS Feedrate applicable when cutting is performed in the tool axis direction
toward the bottom of a side face being machined
C CLEARANCE OF AXIS Distance between the surface of a blank being machined and a cutting start
point (point R) in the tool axis direction (radius value, positive value)
Remark) By referring to the parameter No.27009 (minimum clamp value), the
system sets the data as Initial value.
- 249 -
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
Z APPROCH MOTION [2 AXES] : When moving from the current position to the machining start
point, the tool first moves in the machining plane in two-axis
synchronous operation and then moves along the tool axis.
(initial value)
[3 AXES] : The tool moves from the current position to the machining start
point in three-axis synchronous operation.
(2) Input items of GROOVING (A AXIS) (G1058)
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
NOTE
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
J* CUT DEPTH OF AXIS Depth of cut in the tool axis direction per cutting operation. By default, one
cutting operation is used. (radius value, positive value)
F FEED RATE- RADIUS Feedrate applicable when cutting is performed in the side face direction of
the end mill
E FEEDRATE - AXIS Feedrate applicable when cutting is performed in the tool axis direction
point (point R) in the tool axis direction (radius value, positive value)
Remark) By referring to the parameter No.27009 (minimum clamp value), the
system sets the data as Initial value.
(initial value)
3.1.2 Figure Blocks for C-axis and A-axis Grooving

As C-axis grooving figures, a "C-axis groove on the polar coordinate plane (XC plane)", "X-axis groove on
the polar coordinate plane (XC plane)", "C-axis groove on the cylindrical surface (ZC plane)" and "Z-axis
groove on the cylindrical surface (ZC plane)" are available. As A-axis grooving figures, a "A-axis groove on
the cylindrical surface (XA plane)" and "X-axis groove on the cylindrical surface (XA plane)" are available.
When any of these figures is specified, a groove with the diameter as large as the end mill diameter is cut.
In C-axis and A-axis grooving, in-feed cutting in the tool axis direction is performed, but in-feed cutting in the
width direction is not performed.
- 250 -
3.C-AXIS AND A-AXIS
NOTE
C-axis and A-axis grooving uses neither polar coordinate interpolation nor
cylinder interpolation. So, it is unnecessary to switch to the polar coordinate
interpolation or cylinder interpolation mode.
(1) Input items of C AXIS GROOVE (XC plane, end face) (G1570)
On the end face of a workpiece, circular grooves are cut by rotating the C-axis with the X-axis position of the
tool fixed. Multiple grooves of the same figure can be cut.
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
B BASE POSITION Z coordinate of the bottom of a groove or the top surface of a workpiece
subject to grooving (in the tool axis direction)
L HEIGHT/DEPTH When the top surface of a workpiece is selected as the BASE POSITION,
specify the distance to the bottom of the groove by using a negative value
(radius value). → Depth
When the bottom of a groove is selected as the BASE POSITION, specify
the distance to the top surface of the groove by using a positive value (radius
value). → Height
X X AXIS POS.(RAD.) X coordinate of the center line of a groove (radius value)
Q GROOVE ANGLE Center angle formed by the start point (tool center) and end point (tool
center) of a groove (positive or negative value)
Specify 180 degree or less when the rotary axis roll over function is available.
A START ANGLE C coordinate of the start point (tool center) of the first groove
REPEAT
Data item Meaning
C* PITCH ANGLE Center angle formed by the start points (tool centers) of two adjacent grooves
(positive or negative value)
M* GROOVE NUMBER Number of grooves to be cut (positive value)
(2) Input items of X AXIS GROOVE (XC plane, end face) (G1571)
On the end face of a workpiece, radial grooves are cut by moving the tool in the X-axis direction with the
C-axis position fixed. Multiple grooves of the same figure can be cut.
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
When the bottom of a groove is selected as the BASE POSITION, specify the
distance to the top surface of the groove by using a positive value (radius
value). → Height
X X AXIS POS.(RAD.) X coordinate of the start point of a groove (radius value)
P GROOVE LENGTH Distance between the start point (tool center) and end point (tool center) of a
groove (radius value, positive/negative value)
- 251 -
REPEAT
Data item Meaning
(3) Input items of C AXIS GROOVE (cylindrical surface) (G1670)

On the peripheral surface of a workpiece, grooves are cut by rotating the C-axis with the Z-axis position of the
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
B BASE POSITION X coordinate of the bottom of a groove or the top surface of a workpiece
value). → Height
Z Z AXIS POS. Z coordinate of the center line of a groove
Specify 180 degree or less when the rotary axis roll over function is available.
REPEAT
Data item Meaning
(4) Input items of Z AXIS GROOVE (cylindrical surface) (G1671)

On the peripheral surface of a workpiece, straight grooves are cut by moving the tool in the Z-axis direction
with the C-axis position fixed. Multiple grooves of the same figure can be cut.
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
B BASE POSITION X coordinate of the bottom of a groove or the top surface of a workpiece
value). → Height
Z Z AXIS POS. Z coordinate of the start point of a groove
- 252 -
3.C-AXIS AND A-AXIS
REPEAT
Data item Meaning
(5) Input items of A AXIS GROOVE (cylindrical surface) (G1770)

On the peripheral surface of a workpiece, grooves are cut by rotating the A-axis with the X-axis position of the
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
value). → Height
Z X AXIS POS. X coordinate of the center line of a groove
REPEAT
Data item Meaning
(4) Input items of Z AXIS GROOVE (cylindrical surface) (G1771)

On the peripheral surface of a workpiece, straight grooves are cut by moving the tool in the X-axis direction
with the A-axis position fixed. Multiple grooves of the same figure can be cut.
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
value). → Height
Z X AXIS POS. X coordinate of the start point of a groove
A START ANGLE A coordinate of the start point (tool center) of the first groove
REPEAT
Data item Meaning
- 253 -
REPEAT
Data item Meaning
3.2 CYCLE RETRACT MOTION

During cycle retract motions it is possible not to return a work piece rotation axis to the start point of
machining cycle.
3.3 C-AXIS MACHINING WITH ROTATION AXIS
3.3.1 Support for C-Axis Machining with Rotation Axis

By setting bit 0 (P0) of parameter No.27001 to 1, the input item "ROTATION AXIS NAME" is displayed
on the figure menu for milling below. By entering this data, C-axis machining using a rotation axis is
enabled.
(1) Rectangle on the polar coordinate plane: G1520

(2) Circle on the polar coordinate plane : G1521
(3) Track on the polar coordinate plane : G1522
(4) Radial groove on the polar coordinate plane : G1523
(5) C-axis groove on the polar coordinate plane: G1570
(6) X-axis groove on the polar coordinate plane: G1571
(7) C-axis hole on the polar coordinate plane (circle points) : G1572
(8) C-axis hole on the polar coordinate plane (random points) : G1573
(9) C-axis groove on the cylindrical surface : G1670
(10) X-axis groove on the cylindrical surface : G1671
(11) C-axis hole on the cylindrical surface (circle points) : G1672
(12) C-axis hole on the cylindrical surface (random points) : G1673
(13) Arbitrary-figure on the end face : G1500
(14) Arbitrary-figure on the cylindrical surface : G1600
(1) Input items of XC-C AXIS GROOVE (G1570)
ROT. AXIS
Data item Meaning
Y ROTATION AXIS NAME When bit 1 (P1) of parameter No.27001 = 1
[C]: The rotation axis is the C-axis.
[A]: The rotation axis is the A-axis.
When bit 2 (P2) of parameter No.27001 = 1
[B]: The rotation axis is the B-axis.
[E]: The rotation axis is the E-axis.
NOTE
This data item is enabled when the bit 0 (P0) of parameter No.27001 = 1.
- 254 -
3.C-AXIS AND A-AXIS
3.4 C-AXIS AND A-AXIS CLAMPING M CODE OUTPUT
3.4.1 Outline
C axis and A axis clamping and unclamping M codes are automatically output in C axis and A axis cycles
as followings, which position C axis and A axis in the machining cycle.
C-axis and A axis clamping is divided into hard clamping and soft clamping, one of which can be
specified by soft key on the figure data input screen for a cycle if bit 4 (P4) of parameter No. 27095 is set
to 1. If bit 4 (P4) of parameter No. 27095 is set to 0, soft clamping cannot be used.
• Hard clamping
Hard clamping mechanically fastens the spindle securely, and when the spindle is clamped, C-axis
and A-axis rotation is disabled.
• Soft clamping
Soft clamping mechanically fastens the spindle less securely, and when the spindle is clamped,
C-axis and A-axis rotation is possible. When machining does not require strong clamping, soft
clamp can be used to reduce machining time.
• No clamping
Clamping is not performed.
* C axis represents a rotating axis around Z axis and A axis represents a rotating axis around X axis in
this specifications.
(1) Hole machining cycles

In hole machining cycles combined with following figures, C axis clamping and unclamping M
codes are automatically output.
(a) C-axis hole on the end face (arbitrary) : G1571
(b) C-axis hole on the end face : G1572
(c) C-axis hole on the cylindrical surface (arbitrary) : G1672
(d) C-axis hole on the cylindrical surface (arbitrary) : G1673
In hole machining cycles combined with the following figures, C axis soft clamping and unclamping
M codes are automatically output.
(a) C-axis hole on the end face (circle points) : G1572
(b) C-axis hole on the end face (random points) : G1573
(c) C-axis hole on the cylindrical surface (circle points):G1672
(d) C-axis hole on the cylindrical surface (random points) : G1673
(e) A-axis hole on the cylindrical surface (circle points) : G1772
(f) A-axis hole on the cylindrical surface (random points) : G1773
(g) B-axis hole on the YB plane (circle points) : G1777
(h) B-axis hole on the YB plane (random points) : G1778
(2) Grooving cycles

In grooving cycles combined with following figures, C axis clamping and unclamping M codes are
automatically output.
(a) X-axis groove on the end face : G1571
(b) Z-axis groove on the cylindrical surface : G1671
In grooving cycles combined with the following figures, C axis soft clamping and unclamping M
(a) X-axis groove on the end face : G1571
(b) Z-axis groove on the cylindrical surface : G1671
(c) X-axis groove on the cylindrical surface : G1771
(d) Y-axis groove on the YB plane : G1776
- 255 -
3.4.2 Specifying the Clamping Method

When bit 4 (P4) of parameter No. 27095 is set to 1, the clamping method can be specified.
<1> On the figure input screen, select the [CLAMP METHOD] tab to display the screen for selecting the
clamping method.
<2> Press one of the following soft keys to select the clamping method:
HARD : Selects hard clamping.
SOFT : Selects soft clamping.
NONE : Selects suppression of output.
* When a new figure input screen is opened, HARD is set by default.

<3> Press one of the following soft keys to create a program:
INSERT : Four-digit G codes and address U are inserted to the program. The figure input
screen automatically closes. The value output following address U varies depending
on the clamping method as follows:
U1. : Hard clamping
U2. : Soft clamping
U3. : Output suppressed
NXTFIG : Four-digit G codes and address U are inserted to the program. The figure input
screen automatically appears again, allowing another figure to be entered in
succession. The value following address U is the same as in the above case.
3.4.3 Value of M Code Output

M code set in following parameters are output
When zero is set, M code is not output.
(1) M code for hard-clamping the C-axis on the main spindle side = Parameter No.27005
(2) M code for canceling hard clamping for the C-axis on the main spindle side = Parameter No.27006
(3) M code for hard-clamping the C-axis on the sub spindle side = Parameter No.27011
(4) M code for canceling hard clamping for the C-axis on the sub spindle side = Parameter No.27012
(5) M code for soft-clamping the C-axis on the main spindle side = Parameter No.27600
(6) M code for canceling soft clamping for the C-axis on the main spindle side = Parameter No.27601
(7) M code for soft-clamping the C-axis on the sub spindle side = Parameter No.27602
(8) M code for canceling soft clamping for the C-axis on the sub spindle side = Parameter No.27603
3.4.4 Distinction between Main and Sub Spindle

When an axis name “C” is specified in figure command and no axis name is specified, M code set in
parameter No.27005 or 27006 for main spindle is output.
When an axis name “A”, “B”, or “E” is specified in figure command, M code set in parameter No.27011
or 27012 for sub spindle is output.
3.4.5 Position of M Code Output (When Hard Clamping is Selected)

When hard clamping is selected, hard clamping starts each time an approach motion is made and is
canceled before the next approach motion is made.
Specifically, hard clamping is started and cancelled as explained in the following hole machining
example.
Example of hard clamping

(1) Specify the start of hard clamping at position <1>.
(2) Machine hole <1>.
- 256 -
3.C-AXIS AND A-AXIS
(3) Specify cancellation of hard clamping at position <1>.
(4) Specify the start of hard clamping at position <2>.
(6) Specify cancellation of hard clamping at position <2>.
:
:
<1>
<2> <6>
<3>
<5>
<4>
The following NC statements are actually specified:

G1000W1.I1.J10.L-20.C2.F10.Z2. Hole machining (center drilling)
G1572B0.X50.A30.C60.M6.Y1.U1. C-axis hole on the end face (circle points)
When the above cycle machining program is executed, hard clamping M codes are output at the timings
below.
(Move commands output during cycle machining)
G90
G17
Mβ…………………………M code for canceling hard clamping
G00X50.C30.
G00Z10.
G99
G81Z-20.R2.F10.Mα.….…M code for starting hard clamping
X50.C90.Mα………………M code for starting hard clamping
X50.C150.Mα……………..M code for starting hard clamping
G80
G00Z10.
Grooving Cycle
<1> X-axis groove on the end face (G1571)
G1056J10.C2.F100.E100.Z2 C axis grooving cycle command

G1571B0.L-10.X40.P20.A0.C120.M2.Z1.Y1. X-axis groove on the end face
- 257 -
In case above commands are specified, C axis unclamping M code is output at the beginning of a cycle, C
axis clamping M code is output before cutting motion, and C axis unclamping M code is output after
cutting motion during a cycle
Mβ ........ ....... .................... * 1

G17
G0X80.C0.
G0Z2.
Mα. ........ ....... .................... * 1
G1Z-10.F100.
G1X40.F100.
G1Z2.F100.
Mβ . ........ ....... .................... * 1
G17
G0X80.C120.
G0Z2.
Mα. ........ ....... .................... * 1
G1Z-10.F100.
G1X40.F100.
G1Z2.F100.
Mβ . ........ ....... .................... * 1
*1 Mα means C axis clamping M code, Mβ means C axis un clamping one.

αiβ should be set in parameters No.27005, No.27006, No.27011 and No.27012.
When value of the parameter is zero, no M code is output.
<2> Z-axis groove on the cylindrical surface (G1671)
G1056J10.C2.F100.E100.Z2...................................... C axis grooving command

G1671B50.L-10.Z-30.P20.A0.C120.M2.Y1.............. Z-axis groove on the cylindrical surface
In case above commands are specified, C axis unclamping M code is output at the beginning of a cycle, C
axis clamping M code is output before cutting motion, and C axis unclamping M code is output after
cutting motion during a cycle
Mβ . ........ ....... ....................... *1

G19
G0Z-30.C0.
G0X104.
Mα. ........ ....... ....................... * 1
G1X80.F100.
G1Z-50.F100.
G1X104.F100.
Mβ . ........ ....... ....................... *1
G19
G0Z-30.C120.
G0X104.
Mα. ........ ....... ....................... * 1
G1X80.F100.
G1Z-50.F100.
G1X104.F100.
Mβ . ........ ....... ....................... *1
- 258 -
3.C-AXIS AND A-AXIS
*1 Mα means C axis clamping M code, Mβ means C axis un clamping one.

α, β should be set in parameters No.27005, No.27006, No.27011 and No.27012. When value of the
parameter is zero, no M code is output.
3.4.6 Position of M Code Output (When Soft Clamping is Selected)

When soft clamping is selected, soft clamping starts after the first approach motion is made and is
cancelled after entire cycle machining ends.
Specifically, soft clamping is started and cancelled as explained in the following hole machining example.
Example of soft clamping

(1) Specify the start of soft clamping at position <1>.
(8) Specify cancellation of soft clamping at position <6>.
<1>
<2> <6>
<3>
<5>
<4>
The following NC statements are actually specified:

G1000W1.I1.J10.L-20.C2.F10.Z2. Hole machining (center drilling)
G1572B0.X50.A30.C60.M6.Y1.U2. C-axis hole on the end face (circle points)
When the above cycle machining program is executed, soft clamping M codes are output at the timings
below.
(Move commands output during cycle machining)
G90
G17
Mβ…………………………M code for canceling soft clamping
G00X50.C30.
G00Z10.
G99
G81Z-20.R2.F10.Mα….….…M code for starting soft clamping
X50.C90.
X50.C150.
X50.C210.
X50.C270.
X50.C330.
Mβ…………………………M code for canceling soft clamping
G80
G00Z10.
- 259 -
3.4.7 Position of M Code Output (When Suppression of Clamp

Output is Selected)
When suppression of output is selected, clamping/unclamping M codes are not output.
- 260 -
B-63874EN/11 MACHINING CYCLE 4.MILLING
4 MILLING
MANUAL GUIDE i supports the following types of milling.
(1) Hole machining
Hole machining (with the tool rotated)

G1001 Drilling
G1002 Tapping
G1003 Reaming
M series (Note 1)
G1004 Boring
G1005 Fine boring
G1006 Back boring
G1111 Drilling
Machining command block G1112 Tapping
T series (Note 2) G1113 Reaming
G1114 Boring
G1115 Fine boring
Figure for hole machining

G1210 Random points
G1211 Linear points (same interval)
G1212 Linear points (different interval)
G1213 Grid points
Hole position block (XY plane)
G1214 Rectangle points
G1215 Circle points
G1216 Arc points (same interval)
G1217 Arc points (different interval)
G1310 Random points
G1311 Linear points (same interval)
G1312 Linear points (different interval)
G1313 Grid points
Hole position block (YZ plane)
G1314 Rectangle points
G1315 Circle points
G1316 Arc points (same interval)
G1317 Arc points (different interval)
G1572 Circle points
Hole position block (XC plane, end face)
G1573 Random points
Hole position block (End face (XC plane) - G1574 Random points
Input on Cartesian coordinate) G1576 Grid points
Hole position block (ZC plane, cylindrical G1672 Circle points
surface) G1673 Random points
Hole position block (XA plane, cylindrical G1772 Circle points
surface) G1773 Random points
Hole position block (B-axis hole, cylindrical G1777 Arc points
surface(YB),) G1778 Random points
NOTE
1 Hole machining cycles for milling machines (M series) are provided. When using
a milling machine, set bit 1 (MC1) of parameter No. 27000 to 0.
- 261 -
4.MILLING MACHINING CYCLE B-63874EN/11
NOTE
2 Hole machining cycles for lathes (T series) are provided. When using a lathe, set
bit 1 (MC1) of parameter No. 27000 to 1.
(2) Facing
Facing
G1020 Roughing
G1021 Finishing
Figure for facing

G1220 Rectangle
G1221 Circle
Fixed-figure block (XY plane)
G1222 Track
G1225 Polygon
G1200 Start point
G1201 Straight line
G1202 Arc (CW)
Arbitrary-figure block
G1203 Arc (CCW)
(XY plane)
G1204 Chamfering
G1206 End
G1320 Rectangle
Fixed-figure block G1321 Circle
(YZ plane) G1322 Track
G1325 Polygon
G1300 Start point
G1301 Straight line
G1302 Arc (CW)
G1303 Arc (CCW)
(YZ plane)
G1304 Chamfering
G1306 End
G1520 Rectangle
G1521 Circle
Fixed figure block (XC plane, end face)
G1522 Track
G1525 Polygon
G1500 Start point
G1501 Straight line
G1502 Arc (CW)
Arbitrary-figure block (XC plane, end face) G1503 Arc (CCW)
G1504 Chamfering
G1506 End
G1600 Start point
G1601 Straight line
G1602 Arc (CW)
Arbitrary-figure block (ZC plane, cylindrical
G1603 Arc (CCW)
surface)
G1604 Chamfering
G1606 End
- 262 -
Figure for facing

G1700 Start point
G1701 Straight line
G1702 Arc (CW)
Arbitrary-figure block (XA plane, cylindrical
G1703 Arc (CCW)
surface)
G1704 Chamfering
G1706 End
(3) Contouring
Contouring
G1060 Outer Wall Roughing
G1061 Outer Wall Bottom finishing
G1062 Outer Wall Side finishing
G1063 Outer Wall Chamfering
G1064 Inner Wall Roughing
G1065 Inner Wall Bottom finishing
G1066 Inner Wall Side finishing
G1067 Inner Wall Chamfering
G1068 Partial Roughing
G1069 Partial Bottom finishing
G1070 Partial Side finishing
G1071 Partial Chamfering
Figure for contouring

G1220 Rectangle
(XY plane) G1222 Track
G1225 Polygon
G1200 Start point
G1201 Straight line
G1202 Arc (CW)
G1203 Arc (CCW)
(XY plane)
G1204 Chamfering
G1206 End
G1320 Rectangle
(YZ plane) G1322 Track
G1325 Polygon
G1300 Start point
G1301 Straight line
G1302 Arc (CW)
G1303 Arc (CCW)
(YZ plane)
G1304 Chamfering
G1306 End
G1520 Rectangle
(XC plane, end face) G1522 Track
G1525 Polygon
- 263 -
Figure for contouring

G1500 Start point
G1501 Straight line
G1502 Arc (CW)
G1503 Arc (CCW)
(XC plane, end face)
G1504 Chamfering
G1506 End
G1600 Start point
G1601 Straight line
G1602 Arc (CW)
G1603 Arc (CCW)
(ZC plane, cylindrical surface)
G1604 Chamfering
G1606 End
G1700 Start point
G1701 Straight line
G1702 Arc (CW)
G1703 Arc (CCW)
(XA plane, cylindrical surface)
G1704 Chamfering
G1706 End
(4) Emboss machining
Emboss machining
G1080 Roughing
G1081 Bottom finishing
G1082 Side finishing
G1083 Chamfering
Figure for emboss machining

G1200 Start point
G1201 Straight line
G1202 Arc (CW)
G1203 Arc (CCW)
(XY plane)
G1204 Chamfering
G1206 End
G1300 Start point
G1301 Straight line
G1302 Arc (CW)
G1303 Arc (CCW)
(YZ plane)
G1304 Chamfering
G1306 End
G1500 Start point
G1501 Straight line
G1502 Arc (CW)
G1504 Chamfering
G1506 End
- 264 -
Figure for emboss machining

G1600 Start point
G1601 Straight line
G1602 Arc (CW)
G1603 Arc (CCW)
surface)
G1604 Chamfering
G1606 End
G1700 Start point
G1701 Straight line
G1702 Arc (CW)
G1703 Arc (CCW)
surface)
G1704 Chamfering
G1706 End
(5) Pocketing
Pocketing
G1040 Roughing
G1043 Chamfering
Figure for pocketing

G1220 Rectangle
G1221 Circle
G1222 Track
G1225 Polygon
G1200 Start point
G1201 Straight line
G1202 Arc (CW)
Arbitrary-figure block (XY plane) G1203 Arc (CCW)
G1204 Chamfering
G1206 End
G1320 Rectangle
G1321 Circle
Fixed-figure block (YZ plane)
G1322 Track
G1325 Polygon
G1300 Start point
G1301 Straight line
G1302 Arc (CW)
Arbitrary-figure block (YZ plane) G1303 Arc (CCW)
G1304 Chamfering
G1306 End
G1520 Rectangle
G1521 Circle
Fixed-figure block (XC plane, end face)
G1522 Track
G1525 Polygon
- 265 -
Figure for pocketing

G1500 Start point
G1501 Straight line
G1502 Arc (CW)
G1504 Chamfering
G1506 End
G1600 Start point
G1601 Straight line
G1602 Arc (CW)
G1603 Arc (CCW)
surface)
G1604 Chamfering
G1606 End
G1700 Start point
G1701 Straight line
G1702 Arc (CW)
G1703 Arc (CCW)
surface)
G1704 Chamfering
G1706 End
(6) Grooving
Grooving
G1050 Roughing
Machining command block G1052 Side finishing
G1053 Chamfering
G1054 Roughing (cylindrical surface, B/Y axis)
Figure for grooving

G1220 Rectangle
G1221 Circle
G1222 Track
G1223 Radial groove
G1224 Straight line
G1225 Polygon
G1200 Start point
G1201 Straight line
G1202 Arc (CW)
Arbitrary-figure block (XY plane) G1203 Arc (CCW)
G1204 Chamfering
G1206 End
G1320 Rectangle
G1321 Circle
Fixed-figure block (YZ plane) G1322 Track
G1323 Radial groove
G1325 Polygon
- 266 -
Figure for grooving

G1300 Start point
G1301 Straight line
G1302 Arc (CW)
Arbitrary-figure block (YZ plane) G1303 Arc (CCW)
G1304 Chamfering
G1306 End
G1520 Rectangle
G1521 Circle
Fixed-figure block (XC plane, end face) G1522 Track
G1523 Radial groove
G1525 Polygon
G1500 Start point
G1501 Straight line
G1502 Arc (CW)
G1504 Chamfering
G1506 End
G1600 Start point
G1601 Straight line
G1602 Arc (CW)
G1603 Arc (CCW)
surface)
G1604 Chamfering
G1606 End
G1700 Start point
G1701 Straight line
G1702 Arc (CW)
G1703 Arc (CCW)
surface)
G1704 Chamfering
G1706 End
G1775 B axis groove
Fixed-figure block (Cylindrical surface, B/Y axis)
G1776 X axis groove
Notes on the CNC for milling

1 As hole machining enabled when a CNC for milling is used, MANUAL GUIDE i
provides hole machining (tool rotation: M series) only.
2 In the input data item of “CUT ANGLE” of Pocketing Rough (G1040) and Bottom
Finish (G1041), when the machine is 2 axes of Maximum simultaneously
controlled axes, please sure not to set the data.
(If the data is set, the alarm (PS0015) occurred during execution of Cycles.)
3 On the CNC for milling, when cycle machining is specified, a switchover to G90
(absolute command) occurs internally. Therefore, G91 must be specified if
incremental commands are used after cycle machining.
4 In 0i-MC and 0i-MD, it is impossible to use the figure that used Polar coordinate
interpolation of XC plane or Cylindrical interpolation of ZC/XA plane.
5 It is possible to use A-axis machining cycle in only vertical machining center.
- 267 -
NOTE
1 When MANUAL GUIDE i is used to enter cycle machining data, combinations of
a machining type block and a figure block must be entered in succession.
More than one figure block can be entered for one machining command block.
For arbitrary figures, however, more than one set of arbitrary figures can be
entered if one set is assumed to consist of up to 90 figures enclosed between
start and end points.
2 A data item whose address is indicated with [*] in the following tables is
automatically set with a typical value unless a value is entered for it. You need to
enter no data if you accept the typical value.
On the screen, [*] is displayed in the right end of the data item.
3 In some of the input data items, the system sets the last inputted data as an
initial data. As to these input data items, the mark of “(COPY)” was described.
4 In the input data item of “APPROCH MOTION”, when the machine is 2 axes of
Maximum simultaneously controlled axes, please sure not to specify the [3
AXES] soft-key.
(If [3 AXES] is specified, the alarm (PS0015) occurred during execution of
Cycles.)
5 When a cycle ends, the tool always returns to the position where the cycle
started.
(If bit 7 (ESC) of parameter No. 27002 is set to 1, it is possible not to cause the
tool to return to the start position when a cycle ends.)
Remarks) Cycle retract motions

In case of bit 7 (ESC) of parameter No.27002 = 0, Retracting motions indicated as broken lines in
the following drawing will be outputted. The order of motion axis will be opposite to the approached
motions
Retracting motions of a Position where the

machining cycle machining cycle started
Approaching motions of a
machining cycle
In case of carrying out plural figures machining by one G4 digit cycle, such like drilling or C-axis
grooving, this retracting motions will be available at the last figure machining.
- 268 -
4.1 HOLE MACHINING
4.1.1 Machining Command (Tool Rotation: M Series)

(1) Input items of center drilling (G1000)
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
W MACHINING TYPE [NORMAL] : No dwelling is performed. (initial value)
[DWELL] : Dwelling is performed.
I REF. PT. MODE [INIT-1] : An R position return is made in moving between holes. Finally, a
return is made to the I point. (initial value)
[INIT-2] : All movements between holes, including the last return, are made
as an I point return.
[REF.] : All movements between holes, including the last return, are made
as an R position return.
J I POINT Coordinate of the I point (COPY)
L CUT DEPTH Cut depth (radius value, negative value)
C CLEARANCE Distance between the workpiece surface and R position (radius value,
P* DWELL TIME Dwell time at the hole bottom. If omitted, 0 is assumed. (units of seconds,
Z APPROCH MOTION (Note) [2 AXES] : When moving from the current position to the machining start
(initial value)
NOTE
When the option for expanding the number of simultaneously controlled axes is
not provided, this input item is not displayed. Similarly, the input item is not
displayed for hole machining cycles G1001 to G1006.
(a) Tool path
<1> Move the tool to the position "cutting start position + clearance (C)" in rapid traverse.
<2> Move the tool to the cutting end position at the cutting feedrate (F).
- 269 -
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
W MACHINING TYPE [NORMAL] : One cut with no dwelling performed (initial value)
[DWELL] : One cut with dwelling performed
[PECK] : Peck drilling (Note 1)
[H SPED] : High-speed peck drilling (Note 2)
H GO PATH AMOUNT SET [SETTING]: GO PATH AMOUNT is entered on the DETAIL tab.
[NOTHING]: GO PATH AMOUNT is not specified.
Remark) This item is displayed when bit 0 (HL0) of parameter No. 27020 is
set to 1.
When “SETTING” is specified, GO PATH AMOUNT is displayed on
the DETAIL tab.
Q PECKING CUT DEPTH Depth of cut made by one cut (radius value, positive value) (COPY)
I REF. PT. MODE See the descriptions Center drilling: about G1000.
K GO PAST AMOUNT Length of the incomplete hole portion at the tool tip. If omitted, 0 is assumed.
(Radius value, positive value) (COPY)
Remark) This item is not displayed when bit 0 (HL0) of parameter No. 27020
is set to 1.
NOTE
1 In the case of ‘MACHINING TYPE’ = ‘PECK’, the system refers to the parameter
No.5115 as the return amount. Therefore, please set No.5115 to suitable value
before machining.
2 In the case of ‘MACHINING TYPE’ = ‘H SPED’, the system refers to the
parameter No.5114 as the return amount. Therefore, please set No.5114 to
suitable value before machining.
If bit 0 (HL0) of parameter No. 27020 is set to 1, when “SETTING” is specified for GO PATH
AMOUNT SET on the CUT COND. tab, the tool diameter, tool angle, and GO PATH AMOUNT are
displayed on the DETAIL tab.
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
A* START CUT DEPTH Depth of cut at the start time
S* START FEED RATE Feedrate at the start time
D* END CUT DEPTH Depth of cut at the end time
In a high-speed peck drilling cycle, when the depth of cut and feedrate at the start
time or at the end time are entered, the depth of cut at the end time is cut by just
one cut operation without pecking.
E* END FEED RATE Feedrate at the end time
K GO PAST AMOUNT When the tool diameter and tool angle are entered then soft key [CALC] is
pressed, an automatically calculated value is assigned to this item.
- 270 -
(a) Tool path

A drilling tool path can be selected from the following:
(i) [NORMAL]/[DWELL]
(ii) [PECK]
<2> Move the tool to the position "cutting start position - primary cut depth (D1)" at the cutting feedrate
(F).
<4> Move the tool to the position "previous cutting end position + return clearance (U)" in rapid traverse.
<5> Move the tool to the position "previous cutting end position - compensation cut depth (Dn)" at the
cutting feedrate (F).
<6> Repeat steps <3> to <5> until the last cutting end position is reached.
- 271 -
(iii) [H SPED]
<2> Move the tool to the position "cutting start position - primary cut depth (D1)" at the cutting feedrate
(F).
<3> Move the tool to the position "current position + return clearance (U)" in rapid traverse.
<4> Move the tool to cut to the position "previous cutting end position - compensation cut depth (Dn)" at
the cutting feedrate (F).
<5> Repeat steps <3> and <4> until the cutting end position is reached.
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
W MACHINING TYPE [NORMAL] : CW tapping (initial value)
[REVERS] : CCW tapping
R TAP TYPE [FLOAT] : Float tapping
[RIGID] : Rigid tapping (NOTE)
Remark) FLOAT is not displayed when the rigid tapping option is provided and
bit 0 (G84) of parameter No. 5200 is set to 1.
RIGID is not displayed when the rigid tapping option is not provided.
The initial value is FLOAT if the rigid tapping option is not provided;
otherwise, the initial value is RIGID.
D THREAD LEAD Tapping tool lead (radius value, positive value) (COPY)
I REF. PT. MODE See the descriptions about Center drilling: G1000.
C CLEARANCE Distance between the workpiece surface and R position (radius value, positive
value) (COPY)
- 272 -
NOTE
1 When you use rigid tapping mode M code command (bit 0 (G84) of parameter
No.5200 = 0), the system refers to No.5210 or No.5212 as the value of M code.
Therefore, please set No.5210 or No.5212 to suitable value before machining.
(a) Tool path
<3> Stop the spindle.
<4> Rotate the spindle in reverse.
<5> Move the tool to the position "cutting start position + clearance (C)" at the cutting feedrate (F).
<6> Cause the spindle to start rotating normally.
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
W MACHINING TYPE [CUT] : The tool retracts from the hole bottom in cutting feed. (initial
value)
[RAPID] : The tool retracts from the hole bottom in rapid traverse.
[DWELL] : After dwelling at the hole bottom, the tool retracts in cutting feed.
value) (COPY)
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
A* START CUT DEPTH Depth of cut at the start time when the workpiece is cut by changing the
feedrate at the end of cutting
S* START FEED RATE Feedrate at the start time when the workpiece is cut by changing the feedrate
D* END CUT DEPTH Depth of cut applicable when the workpiece is cut by changing the feedrate
E* END FEED RATE Feedrate applicable when the workpiece is cut by changing the feedrate at
the end of cutting
- 273 -
(a) Tool path
<3> Move the tool to the position "cutting start position + clearance (C)" at the returning feedrate (Fr).
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
W MACHINING TYPE [CUT] : The tool retracts from the hole bottom in cutting feed. (initial
value)
[RAPID] : The tool retracts from the hole bottom in rapid traverse.
[DWELL] : After dwelling at the hole bottom, the tool retracts in cutting feed.
value) (COPY)
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
the end of cutting
(a) Tool path
- 274 -
<3> Move the tool to the position "cutting start position + clearance (C)" at the returning feedrate (Fr).
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
Q SHIFT AMOUNT Shift amount (radius value) at the hole bottom after spindle orientation
(COPY)
I REF.PT.MODE See the descriptions about Center drilling: G1000.
value) (COPY)
F FEED RATE Cutting federate (positive value) (COPY)
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
the end of cutting
(a) Tool path
When the end feed rate (E) is entered, tool path is as follows.
<1> Move the tool to the position "cutting start position (Sp) + clearance (C)" in rapid traverse.
<2> Move the tool to the position "cutting end position (Ep) + end cut depth (D)" at the cutting feed rate
(F).
<3> Move the tool to the cutting end position (Ep) at the end feed rate (E).
(Dwell is performed when dwell time is set.)
<5> Spindle orientation is performed.
<6> Move the tool to the position "current position + shift amount (Q)" at the feed rate (F).
<8> Move the tool to the position " current position - clearance (C)" in rapid traverse.
- 275 -
<9> Rotate the spindle in the positive direction.

<10> Move the next hole position and repeat the same motion.
When the end feed rate (E) is empty, tool path is as follows.
<2> Move the tool to the cutting end position (Ep) at the cutting feed rate (F).
(Dwell is performed when dwell time is set.)
<4> Spindle orientation is performed.
<5> Move the tool to the position "current position + shift amount (Q)" in rapid traverse.
<7> Move the tool to the position " current position - clearance (C)" in rapid traverse.
<8> Rotate the spindle in the positive direction.
<9> Move the next hole position and repeat the same motion.
NOTE
Direction of tool rotation is only positive direction.
(7) Input items of back boring (G1006)
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
(COPY)
M CUT DEPTH Cut depth (radius value, negative value)
L DIST. FROM BOTTOM Distance (radius value) at the hole bottom in the lifting direction
K* GO PAST AMOUNT Go-past amount at the hole bottom. If omitted, 0 is assumed. (radius value,
value) (COPY)
P* DWELL TIME Dwell time at the hole bottom after lift machining. If omitted, 0 is assumed.
(units of seconds, positive value) (COPY)
(a) Tool path
<2> The tool is shifted away from the tool tip.
- 276 -
<3> The tool moves to the bottom of the hole (R point) by rapid traverse.
<4> The tool returns by a shift amount toward the tool tip.
<5> The spindle is turned in the normal direction to cut in to the position "K + L" along the tool axis at
the feedrate (F) specified for cut-in.
<6> The spindle is stopped.
<7> After being shifted away from the tool tip, the tool is pulled out from the hole.
4.1.2 Machining Command (Tool Rotation: T Series)

NOTE
1 Hole machining by turning (with the tool rotated) is enabled when bit 1 (MC1) of
parameter No. 27000 = 1.
2 The hole position blocks for hole machining by turning (with the tool rotated) are
the same as those for hole machining by milling.
(1) Input items of center drilling (G1110)

CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
I REF.PT.MODE [INIT-1] : An R position return is made in moving between holes. Finally, a
return is made to the I point. (initial value)
[INITI-2]: All movements between holes, including the last return, are made
as an I point return.
[REF.] : All movements between holes, including the last return, are made
as an R position return.
P* DWELL TIME Dwell time at the hole bottom (units of seconds, positive value). (COPY)
(initial value)

CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
Q* PECKING CUT DEPTH Depth of cut made by one cut (radius value, positive value) (COPY) (Note 1)
K GO PAST AMOUNT Length of the incomplete hole portion at the tool tip (radius value, positive
value) (COPY) (Note 2)
value) (COPY)
- 277 -
NOTE
1 The system refers to the parameter No.5114 as the return amount. Therefore,
please set No.5114 to suitable value before machining.
2 When bit 0 (HL0) of parameter No. 27020 is set to 1, the GO PAST AMOUNT
specification method changes. The GO PATH AMOUNT SET H input item is
displayed instead of GO PAST AMOUNT, and GO PAST AMOUNT is displayed
on the DETAIL tab.
For details, see the meaning of GO PATH AMOUNT SET in drilling (G1001).
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
the end of cutting
If bit 0 (HL0) of parameter No. 27020 is set to 1, when “SETTING” is specified for
GO PATH AMOUNT SET on the CUT COND. tab, TOOL DIAMETER, NOSE ANGLE, and
GO PAST AMOUNT are displayed on the DETAIL tab.
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
K GO PAST AMOUNT When the tool diameter and tool angle are entered then soft key [CALC] is
pressed, an automatically calculated value is assigned to this item.
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
R PECKING CLEARANCE Pecking clearance
When this item is blank, pecking clearance is value of parameter No.5115.
*) If bit 4 of parameter No. 27195, bit 2 of parameter No.5101 are set to 1,

PECKING CLEARANCE is displayed on the DETAIL tab.

CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
W MACHINING TYPE This item is displayed when bit 1 (TRV) of parameter No. 27195 is set to 1.
[NORMAL] : CW tapping (initial value)
[REVERS] : CCW tapping
R TAP TYPE [FLOAT] : Float tapping
[RIGID] : Rigid tapping(NOTE)
Remark) FLOAT is not displayed when the rigid tapping option is provided
and bit 0 (G84) of parameter No. 5200 is set to 1.
RIGID is not displayed when the rigid tapping option is not provided.
The initial value is FLOAT if the rigid tapping option is not provided;
otherwise, the initial value is RIGID.
D THREAD LEAD Tapping tool lead (radius value, positive value) (COPY)
- 278 -
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
NOTE
When you use rigid tapping mode M code command (bit 0 (G84) of parameter
No.5200 = 0), the system refers to No.5210 or No.5212 as the value of M code.
Therefore, please set No.5210 or No.5212 to suitable value before machining.
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
the end of cutting
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
positive value)
- 279 -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
the end of cutting
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
(COPY)
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
the end of cutting
For fine-boring(G1115), the M code for rotating the spindle in the positive direction is set with parameter
No.27210.
NOTE
Direction of tool rotation is only positive direction.
4.1.3 Figure (XY Plane)

(1) Input items of random points (G1210)
HOLE POS-1
Data item Meaning
B BASE POSITION Z coordinate of the workpiece surface
H POINT-1 (X) X coordinate of the first hole
V POINT-1 (Y) Y coordinate of the first hole
A* POINT-2 (X) X coordinate of the second hole
C* POINT-2 (Y) Y coordinate of the second hole
D* POINT-3 (X) X coordinate of the third hole
E* POINT-3 (Y) Y coordinate of the third hole
F* POINT-4 (X) X coordinate of the fourth hole
I* POINT-4 (Y) Y coordinate of the fourth hole
- 280 -
HOLE POS-2
Data item Meaning
J* POINT-5 (X) X coordinate of the fifth hole
K* POINT-5 (Y) Y coordinate of the fifth hole
M* POINT-6 (X) X coordinate of the sixth hole
P* POINT-6 (Y) Y coordinate of the sixth hole
Q* POINT-7 (X) X coordinate of the seventh hole
R* POINT-7 (Y) Y coordinate of the seventh hole
S* POINT-8 (X) X coordinate of the eighth hole
T* POINT-8 (Y) Y coordinate of the eighth hole
NOTE
It is unnecessary to enter values for every hole position. If entered, however,
both X and Y coordinates in a pair must be entered for a hole position.
(2) Input items of linear points (same interval) (G1211)
HOLE POSIT
Data item Meaning
H START POINT (X) X coordinate of the start point (first hole) of a straight line
V START POINT (Y) Y coordinate of the start point (first hole) of a straight line
A ANGLE Angle of a straight line from the X-axis (initial value = 0)
D HOLE POS.TYPE [LENGTH] : Specified with the distance between the first and last holes, and the
number of holes.
[PITCH] : Specified with the distance between two adjacent holes, and the
number of holes.
E LENGTH / PITCH Length : Distance between the first and last holes (if [LENGTH] is selected for
item D)
Pitch : Distance between two adjacent holes (if [PITCH] is selected for item D)
C NUMBER OF HOLE Number of holes
SKIP
Data item Meaning
F* OMITTING POINT 1 Point where no hole is to be made (1)
I* OMITTING POINT 2 Point where no hole is to be made (2)
J* OMITTING POINT 3 Point where no hole is to be made (3)
K* OMITTING POINT 4 Point where no hole is to be made (4)
NOTE
It is unnecessary to enter a value for any item of an omitting point.
Similarly, this applies to G1213 to G1216 described later.
(3) Input items of linear points (different interval) (G1212)
HOLE POS-1
Data item Meaning
A ANGLE Angle of a straight line from the X-axis (initial value = 0)
- 281 -
HOLE POS-2
Data item Meaning
C PITCH WIDTH-1 Distance between the first and second holes (positive or negative value)
D PITCH WIDTH-2 Distance between the second and third holes (positive or negative value)
E* PITCH WIDTH-3 Distance between the third and fourth holes (positive or negative value)
F* PITCH WIDTH-4 Distance between the fourth and fifth holes (positive or negative value)
I* PITCH WIDTH-5 Distance between the fifth and sixth holes (positive or negative value)
J* PITCH WIDTH-6 Distance between the sixth and seventh holes (positive or negative value)
K* PITCH WIDTH-7 Distance between the seventh and eighth holes (positive or negative value)
M* PITCH WIDTH-8 Distance between the eighth and ninth holes (positive or negative value)
P* PITCH WIDTH-9 Distance between the ninth and tenth holes (positive or negative value)
Q* PITCH WIDTH-10 Distance between the tenth and eleventh holes (positive or negative value)
NOTE
It is unnecessary to enter a value for every pitch width data item.
(4) Input items of grid points (G1213)
HOLE POSIT
Data item Meaning
U LENGTH FOR X AXIS Length of the first side of a grid (positive value)
W LENGTH FOR Y AXIS Length of the second side of a grid (positive value)
I NUMBER FOR X AXIS Number of holes on the first side of a grid (positive value)
J NUMBER FOR Y AXIS Number of holes on the second side of a grid (positive value)
K ANGLE FOR X AXIS Angle of the first side of a grid from the X-axis (initial value = 0)
M ANGLE FOR Y AXIS Angle of the second side of a grid from the X-axis (initial value = 90)
SKIP
Data item Meaning
A* OMITTING POINT 1 Point where no hole is to be made (1)
C* OMITTING POINT 2 Point where no hole is to be made (2)
D* OMITTING POINT 3 Point where no hole is to be made (3)
E* OMITTING POINT 4 Point where no hole is to be made (4)
(5) Input items of rectangle points (G1214)
HOLE POSIT
Data item Meaning
U LENGTH FOR X AXIS Length of the first side of a rectangle (positive value)
W LENGTH FOR Y AXIS Length of the second side of a rectangle (positive value)
I NUMBER FOR X AXIS Number of holes on the first side of a rectangle (positive value)
J NUMBER FOR Y AXIS Number of holes on the second side of a rectangle (positive value)
K ANGLE FOR X AXIS Angle of the first side of a rectangle from the X-axis (initial value = 0)
M ANGLE FOR Y AXIS Angle of the second side of a rectangle from the X-axis (initial value = 90)
- 282 -
SKIP
Data item Meaning
(6) Input items of circle points (G1215)
HOLE POINTS
Data item Meaning
H CENTER POINT (X) X coordinate of the center of a circle
V CENTER POINT (Y) Y coordinate of the center of a circle
R RADIUS Radius of a circle (positive value)
A START POINT ANGLE Central angle of the first hole from the X-axis (positive or negative value)
(initial value = 0)
C NUMBER OF HOLE Number of holes to be made (positive value) (maximum value:100)
SKIP
Data item Meaning
(7) Input items of arc points (same interval) (G1216)
HOLE POSIT
Data item Meaning
H CENTER POINT (X) X coordinate of the center of an arc
V CENTER POINT (Y) Y coordinate of the center of an arc
R RADIUS Radius of an arc (positive value)
A START POINT ANGLE Central angle of the first hole from the X-axis (positive or negative value) (initial
value = 0)
C PITCH ANGLE Central angle between two adjacent holes (positive or negative value)
D NUMBER OF HOLE Number of holes to be made (positive value)
SKIP
Data item Meaning
J* OMITTING POINT 4 Point where no hole is to be made (4)
- 283 -
(8) Input items of arc points (different interval) (G1217)
HOLE POS-1
Data item Meaning
H CENTER POINT (X) X coordinate of the center of an arc
V CENTER POINT (Y) Y coordinate of the center of an arc
R RADIUS Radius of an arc (positive value)
A START POINT Central angle of the first hole from the X-axis (positive or negative value) (initial
ANGLE value = 0)
HOLE POS-2
Data item Meaning
C* PITCH ANGLE-1 Central angle between the first and second holes (positive or negative value)
D* PITCH ANGLE-2 Central angle between the second and third holes (positive or negative value)
E* PITCH ANGLE-3 Central angle between the third and fourth holes (positive or negative value)
F* PITCH ANGLE-4 Central angle between the fourth and fifth holes (positive or negative value)
I* PITCH ANGLE-5 Central angle between the fifth and sixth holes (positive or negative value)
J* PITCH ANGLE-6 Central angle between the sixth and seventh holes (positive or negative value)
K* PITCH ANGLE-7 Central angle between the seventh and eighth holes (positive or negative value)
M* PITCH ANGLE-8 Central angle between the eighth and ninth holes (positive or negative value)
P* PITCH ANGLE-9 Central angle between the ninth and tenth holes (positive or negative value)
Q* PITCH ANGLE-10 Central angle between the tenth and eleventh holes (positive or negative value)
4.1.4 Figure (YZ/XC Plane)

YZ plane
The same hole position block types as for the XY plane explained in the previous subsection are available for
the YZ plane. They are provided with the following G codes.
The data to be set for the YZ plane is the same as for the XY plane except that the XY plane is changed to the
YZ plane and that the direction in which the tool moves to cut is changed from the Z-axis to the X-axis.
Random Points : G1310

Linear Points (Same Interval) : G1311
Linear Points (Different Interval) : G1312
Grid Points : G1313
Rectangle Points : G1314
Circle Points : G1315
Arc Points (Same Interval) : G1316
Arc Points (Different Interval) : G1317
XC plane and end face

A menu for selecting a hole position block in which the C-axis is used in making holes is displayed by
selecting the "C-axis Figure" tab from the milling figure menu, using the cursor keys <←> and <→>.
(1) Input items of C axis hole on face (circle points) (G1572)
POS / SIZE
Data item Meaning
X X AXIS POS.(RAD.) X coordinate of a hole position (common to all holes)
A START ANGLE Central angle of the first hole form the C0 axis (positive or negative value)
- 284 -
REPEAT
Data item Meaning
C PITCH ANGLE Amount of movement between two holes along the C-axis (positive or negative
value)
M NUMBER OF HOLE Number of holes to be made (positive value)
(2) Input items of C axis hole on face (random points) (G1573)
HOLE POS-1
Data item Meaning
H X AXIS POS.1(RAD.) X coordinate of the first hole (radius value)
V C AXIS POS.1 C coordinate of the first hole
A* X AXIS POS.2(RAD.) X coordinate of the second hole (radius value)
C* C AXIS POS.2 C coordinate of the second hole
D* X AXIS POS.3(RAD.) X coordinate of the third hole (radius value)
E* C AXIS POS.3 C coordinate of the third hole
F* X AXIS POS.4(RAD.) X coordinate of the fourth hole (radius value)
I* C AXIS POS.4 C coordinate of the fourth hole
HOLE POS-2
Data item Meaning
J* X AXIS POS.5(RAD.) X coordinate of the fifth hole (radius value)
K* C AXIS POS.5 C coordinate of the fifth hole
M* X AXIS POS.6(RAD.) X coordinate of the sixth hole (radius value)
P* C AXIS POS.6 C coordinate of the sixth hole
Q* X AXIS POS.7(RAD.) X coordinate of the seventh hole (radius value)
R* C AXIS POS.7 C coordinate of the seventh hole
S* X AXIS POS.8(RAD.) X coordinate of the eighth hole (radius value)
T* C AXIS POS.8 C coordinate of the eighth hole
(a) ZC plane and cylindrical surface

The same hole position block types as for the XC plane explained in the previous subsection are available for
the ZC plane. They are provided with the following G codes.
The data to be set for the ZC plane is the same as for the XC plane except that the XC plane (blank end face)
is changed to the ZC plane (blank cylindrical surface) and that the direction in which the tool moves to cut is
changed from the Z-axis to the X-axis.
Holes on a cylindrical surface (ZC) figure along the C-axis - Circle Points: G1672
Holes on a cylindrical surface (ZC) figure along the C-axis - Random Points: G1673
(b) XA plane and cylindrical surface

The same hole position block types as for the ZC plane explained in the previous subsection are available for
the XA plane. They are provided with the following G codes.
The data to be set for the XA plane is the same as for the ZC plane except that the ZC plane (blank end face) is
changed to the XA plane (blank cylindrical surface) and that the direction in which the tool moves to cut is
changed from the X-axis to the Z-axis.
Holes on a cylindrical surface (XA) figure along the A-axis - Circle Points: G1772
Holes on a cylindrical surface (XA) figure along the A-axis - Random Points: G1773
- 285 -
NOTE
The following parameter setting is necessary to execute XA plane cycle.
• ML2 (No.27003#2)=1, ML1 (No.27003#1)=0 and ML0 (No.27003#0)=0
4.1.5 Specifying Pecking Clearance / Return Amount of Drill Cycle

for Machining Center in Input Window
(for only Series 30i/31i/32i-A/B, 0i-MF/0i-MD)
(1) G1001 : Drill cycle (tool rotation)
In case of peck drill, pecking clearance R can be specified in input window instead of parameter
No.5115.
Dn Ds C
De
F Fs
F
Fe F R
R Pecking clearance
In case of high-speed peck drill, pecking return amount R can be specified in input window instead
of No.5114.
Dn Ds C
De
F Fs
F
Fe F
R
R Pecking Return amount
4.1.5.1 Parameter setting to use this function

Set the parameter No.27195#4 to 1.
- 286 -
4.1.5.2 Format of drill cycle

(1) G1001 : Drill cycle (tool rotation) input item
The following item is added. Refer to “4.1.1, (2) Input items of drilling(G1001)” about other items.
Detail
Data item Meaning
R PECKING ( In case “PECK DRILL” is inputted in “MACHINING TYPE” )
CLEARANCE / Pecking clearance
PECKING RETURN When this item is blank, pecking clearance is value of parameter No.5115.
AMT. ( In case “HIGH SPEED” is inputted in “MACHINING TYPE” )
Pecking return amount
When this item is blank, pecking return amount is value of parameter No.5114.
4.1.6 C axis Hole on End Face (Random Points) - Cartesian

Coordinates Input Cycle
C axis hole on end face (random points) can be commanded in virtual cartesian coordinate system using
the following command.
C axis hole on end face (random points) - cartesian coordinates input : G1574
4.1.6.1 Input items of C axis hole on end face (random points) -

cartesian coordinates (G1574)
HOLE POS-1
Data item Meaning
B BASE POSITION Z coordinate of the workpiece surface - virtual cartesian coordinate
H X AXIS POS.1(RAD.) X coordinate of the first hole (radius value) - virtual cartesian coordinate
V C AXIS POS.1 C coordinate of the first hole - virtual cartesian coordinate
A X AXIS POS.2(RAD.) X coordinate of the second hole (radius value) - virtual cartesian coordinate
C C AXIS POS.2 C coordinate of the second hole - virtual cartesian coordinate
D X AXIS POS.3(RAD.) X coordinate of the third hole (radius value) - virtual cartesian coordinate
E C AXIS POS.3 C coordinate of the third hole - virtual cartesian coordinate
F X AXIS POS.4(RAD.) X coordinate of the fourth hole (radius value) - virtual cartesian coordinate
I C AXIS POS.4 C coordinate of the fourth hole - virtual cartesian coordinate
HOLE POS-2
Data item Meaning
J X AXIS POS.5(RAD.) X coordinate of the fifth hole (radius value) - virtual cartesian coordinate
K C AXIS POS.5 C coordinate of the fifth hole - virtual cartesian coordinate
M X AXIS POS.6(RAD.) X coordinate of the sixth hole (radius value) - virtual cartesian coordinate
P C AXIS POS.6 C coordinate of the sixth hole - virtual cartesian coordinate
Q X AXIS POS.7(RAD.) X coordinate of the seventh hole (radius value) - virtual cartesian coordinate
R C AXIS POS.7 C coordinate of the seventh hole - virtual cartesian coordinate
S X AXIS POS.8(RAD.) X coordinate of the eighth hole (radius value) - virtual cartesian coordinate
T C AXIS POS.8 C coordinate of the eighth hole - virtual cartesian coordinate
- 287 -
4.1.7 C axis Hole on End face (GRID) - Cartesian Coordinates Input

Cycle (For only Series 30i/31i/32iB, 0i-F/0i-D)
By the following programming format, the hole position cycle of “grid points” on Cartesian coordinate
can be made in XC plane.
C-axis hole on face (grid) - cartesian coordinates input : G1576
G1576 Bb Hh Vv Ss Tt Ii Jj Kk Mm Aa Cc Dd Ee Zz Yy Uu Ww ;
Since this function is enabled when the specifying XC plane is available, set the parameter
MM1(No.27004#1)=1 or MM0-MM3(No.27004#0-#3)=all 0.
4.1.7.1 Input items of C-axis hole on end face (Grid) – cartesian

coordinates (G1576)
HOLE POSIT.
Data item Meaning
H START POINT (X) X coordinate of the start point (first hole) of
a straight line (Input data by the Cartesian coordinate)
V START POINT (C) C coordinate of the start point (first hole) of a straight line (Input data
by the Cartesian coordinate)
S LENGTH FOR X AXIS Length of the first side of a grid
T LENGTH FOR C AXIS Length of the second side of a grid
I NUMBER FOR X AXIS Number of holes on the first side of a grid
J NUMBER FOR C AXIS Number of holes on the second side of
a grid
K ANGLE FOR X AXIS Angle of the first side of a grid from the X-axis
M ANGLE FOR C AXIS Angle of the second side of a grid from the X-axis
SKIP
Data item Meaning
(Omitting Point 1-4 are input by the number from the order of which the hole
is processed.)
- 288 -
Motion of machining
The coordinates position of each hole (Polar coordinates) is calculated from input data (Cartesian
coordinate), and the hole is machined in the following order.
9
8
7
4
5
6
Start 3
C point 2
1
NOTE
1 When the G1576 command is edited directly and executed, alarm might be
generated.
When a necessary address for the G1576 command is deleted or the value is
set to the address of G1576 command outside the range, it becomes the alarm
"NO NECESSARY ADDRESS".
2 When 2 path system of machining center is executed, alarm might be generated.
It becomes the alarm message "UNCOMBINED G-CODE".
4.2 FACING

(1) Input items of ROUGH (G1020)
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
D TOOL DIAMETER Face mill diameter
NOTE
1 Tab ‘TOOL COND.’ is enabled when bit 0 (TLG) of parameter No.27002 = 1.
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
T* THICKNESS Face mill diameter
H* FINISH AMOUNT Finishing allowance in facing
L CUT DEPTH OF RADIUS Depth of cut in the tool radius direction to the next cutting path
J CUT DEPTH OF AXIS Depth of cut in the tool axis direction per cutting operation
F FEED RATE – RADIUS Feedrate applicable when cutting is performed in the tool radius direction
E FEED RATE – AXIS Feedrate applicable when cutting is performed in the tool axis direction
- 289 -
NOTE
If the bit 0 (FC1) of parameter No.27030 = 1, only the menu of perpendicular
directions to “CUTTING DIRECTION” can have been displayed during in case of
selecting “CUT SHIFT DIRECTION”. Thus, the extra selection can be removed.
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
I INITIAL FEED OVERRIDE Feedrate override value for the first cutting. The initial value is 100 (1 to
200, positive value).
W CUTTING METHOD [SINGLE] : Cutting in the tool radius direction is always performed in the
same direction.
[ZIGZAG] : Cutting in the tool radius direction is performed back and forth.
(COPY)
P PATH MOVE METHOD [PULL] : Retracts to point R before moving to the start point of the next
cutting path (in the tool axis direction).
[KEEP] : Moves to the start point of the next cutting path directly without
retracting to point R.
Remark1) This data item is indicated only when [ZIGZAG] is selected for
CUTTING METHOD.
Remark2) This data item is enabled when the bit 0 (FC0) of parameter
No.27030 = 0.
Remark3) In case that the movement is done by 1 axis, tool is kept even if
[PULL] is specified.
Remark4) If [KEEP] is specified, an end point of previous cutting motion is
adjusted in order to enable a tool to move with 1 axis to next
cutting start point
(COPY)
V PATH MOVE FEED RATE Feedrate applicable when the tool moves to the start point of the next
cutting path. In case that the feedrate is set to 0, the tool moves at a rapid
traverse rate.
Remark1) This data item is indicated only when [ZIGZAG] is selected for
CUTTING METHOD.
Remark2) This data item is enabled when the bit 0 (FC0) of parameter
No.27030 = 0.
(COPY)
C CLEARANCE OF AXIS Distance between the surface of a blank being machined and a cutting
start point (point R) in the tool axis direction (radius value)
Remark) By referring to the parameter No.27009 (minimum clamp value),
the system sets the data as Initial value.
M CLERANCE OF RADIUS Distance between the end of a blank being machined and the end of the
tool placed at the retract position (radius value)
- 290 -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
A CUTTING DIRECTION [RIGHT] : Performs cutting rightward as indicated in the illustration. When
both directions are selected, cutting for the first cutting path is
performed rightward.
[LEFT] : Performs cutting leftward as indicated in the illustration. When
performed leftward.
[UP] : Performs cutting upward as indicated in the illustration. When
performed upward.
[DOWN] : Performs cutting downward as indicated in the illustration. When
performed downward.
Remark) The actual cutting direction is determined by the coordinate axis
indicated in the illustration. (COPY)
B CUT DEPTH DIRECTION [RIGHT] : Performs cutting while shifting the cutting path rightward as
indicated in the illustration.
[LEFT] : Performs cutting while shifting the cutting path leftward as
[UP] : Performs cutting while shifting the cutting path upward as
[DOWN] : Performs cutting while shifting the cutting path downward as
Remark) The actual cutting direction is determined by the coordinate axis
indicated in the illustration. (COPY)
(initial value)
[3 AXES] : The tool moves from the current position to the machining
start point in three-axis synchronous operation.
NOTE
When the option for expanding the number of simultaneously controlled axes is
not provided, this input item is not displayed. Similarly, the input item is not
displayed for finishing cycle G1021.
(2) Input items of FINISH (G1021)
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
D TOOL DIAMETER See the descriptions about Roughing: G1020.
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
L CUT DEPTH OF RADIUS See the descriptions about Roughing: G1020.
F FEED RATE – RADIUS -
E FEED RATE – AXIS -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
W CUTTING METHOD See the descriptions about Roughing: G1020.
P PATH MOVE METHOD -
V PATH MOVE FEED RATE -
- 291 -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
C CLEARANCE OF AXIS -
M CLERANCE OF RADIUS -
A CUTTING DIRECTION -
B CUT DEPTH DIRECTION -
Z APPROCH MOTION -
4.2.2 Fixed Form Figure Blocks (XY Plane)

(1) Input items of SQUARE (XY plane) (G1220)
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
T FIGURE TYPE [FACE] : Used as a figure for facing
[CONVEX] : Used as an outer figure for contouring
[CONCAVE] : Used as an inner figure for contouring or as a figure for
pocketing
[GROOVE] : Used as a figure for grooving
Remark) When facing is selected as machining type, be sure to select
[FACE].
B BASE POSITION Z coordinate of the final surface for facing (in the tool axis direction)
H CENTER POINT (X) X coordinate of the center position of a rectangular figure
V CENTER POINT (Y) Y coordinate of the center position of a rectangular figure
U LEBGTH FOR X AXIS Length of the side in the X-axis direction (radius value, positive value)
W LENGTH FOR Y AXIS Length of the side in the Y-axis direction (radius value, positive value)
R* CORNER RADIUS Radius for corner rounding (positive value)
A* ANGLE Inclination angle of a rectangular figure relative to the X-axis (positive or
negative value)
- 292 -
(2) Input items of CIRCLE (XY plane) (G1221)
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
T FIGURE TYPE See the descriptions about SQUARE: G1220.
H CENTER POINT (X) X coordinate of the center position of a circular figure
V CENTER POINT (Y) Y coordinate of the center position of a circular figure
R RADIUS Radius of a circular figure (radius value, positive value)
(3) Input items of TRACK (XY plane) (G1222)
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
H CENTER POINT (X) X coordinate of the center position of the left semicircle
V CENTER POINT (Y) Y coordinate of the center position of the left semicircle
U BETWEEN DISTANCE Distance between the centers of the right and left semicircles (radius value,
positive value)
R RADIUS Radius of the left and right semicircles (radius value, positive value)
A* ANGLE Inclination angle of a track figure relative to the X-axis. The blank is
regarded as 0 degrees. (positive or negative value)
(4) Input items of POLYGON (XY plane) (G1225)

This figure can be specified when bit 2 (P2) of parameter No. 27095 is set to 1.
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
B BASE POSITION
L HEIGHT/DEPTH Not displayed when facing is performed.
H CENTER POINT(X)
V CENTER POINT(X)
E NUMBER OF ANGLE Positive integer ranging from 3 to 99
U INPUT TYPE OF SIZE U1:Polygon radius,U2:Side length, U3: Width across flat
W POLYGON RADIUS / SIDE
LENGTH
A ANGLE Inclination angle of a straight line connecting a vertex and the center with
respect to the 1st axis
D GROOVE WIDTH Specified only when this item is used for grooving.
C CORNER TYPE C1:None、C2:Chamfering、C3:Corner rounding
R CORNER SIZE
Z FACE POSITION Z1:+ end face、Z2:－ end face (*1)
Y ROTATION AXIS NAME (*2)
- 293 -
W
A
(H, V)
R
R
W
(*1) “FACE POSITION” is displayed on a tab added when bit 4 (MC4) of parameter No. 27000 is set to
1.
(*2) “ROTATION AXIS NAME” is displayed on a tab added only for the polar coordinate plane (XC)
when bit 4 (MC4) of parameter No. 27000 is set to 1.
4.2.3 Fixed Form Figure (YZ Plane, XC Plane)

The same fixed-figure block types as for the XY plane explained in the previous subsection are available
for the YZ plane and the XC plane (polar coordinate interpolation plane). They are provided with the
following G codes.
The data to be set for the YZ and XC planes is the same as for the XY plane except that the XY plane is
changed to the YZ or XC plane and that the direction in which the tool moves to cut is changed to the
X-axis (YZ plane) or the Z-axis (XC plane).
Square : G1320 (YZ plane)
Circle : G1321 (YZ plane)
Track : G1322 (YZ plane)
Polygon : G1325 (YZ plane)
Square : G1520 (XC plane, polar coordinate interpolation plane)
Circle : G1521 (XC plane, polar coordinate interpolation plane)
Track : G1522 (XC plane, polar coordinate interpolation plane)
NOTE
When performing machining (polar coordinate interpolation) on the XC plane,
note the following:
(When bit 2 (MC2) of parameter No.27000 = 0)
The mode needs to be switched to the polar coordinate interpolation mode
beforehand.
Specifically, enter G12.1 before the machining type.
Enter G13.1 for canceling polar coordinate interpolation as required.
G12.1 and G13.1 are automatically output before and after cycle machining,
respectively.
- 294 -
4.2.4 Arbitrary Figure (XY Plane)

When an arbitrary figure for facing is input, data such as a figure type and machining reference position is
specified in the start point block. Other data items to be input such as a straight line and arc are exactly the
same as for arbitrary figures of other machining types.
So, this subsection describes only the start point block of an arbitrary figure for facing.
For other arbitrary figures, see Chapter 5, "DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS ABOUT ENTERING
ARBITRARY FIGURES".
(1) Input items of START POINT (XY plane) (G1200)

ELEMENT
Data item Meaning
X START POINT X X coordinate of the start point of an arbitrary figure
Y START POINT Y Y coordinate of the start point of an arbitrary figure
Z BASE POSITION Z coordinate of the final surface for facing (in the tool axis direction)
4.2.5 Arbitrary Figure (YZ/XC/ZC/XA Plane)

The same arbitrary-figure block types as for the XY plane explained in the previous subsection are
available for the YZ plane, the XC plane (polar coordinate interpolation plane), ZC plane and XA plane
(cylindrical surface). Their start points are specified with the following G codes.
The data to be set for the YZ, XC, ZC, and XA planes is the same as for the XY plane except that the XY
plane is changed to the YZ, XC, ZC or XA plane and that the direction in which the tool moves to cut is
changed to the X-axis (YZ and ZC planes) or the Z-axis (XC and XA plane).
Start point : G1300 (YZ plane)

Start point : G1500 (XC plane, polar coordinate interpolation plane)
Start point : G1600 (ZC plane, plane)
Start point : G1700 (XA plane, plane)
NOTE
1 When performing machining (polar coordinate interpolation) on the XC plane,
note the following:
beforehand.
respectively.
2 When performing machining (cylindrical interpolation) on the ZC and XA plane,
note the following:
The mode needs to be switched to the cylindrical coordinate interpolation mode
beforehand.
Specifically, enter G07.1C (cylinder radius) before the machining type.
Enter G07.1C0 for canceling cylindrical interpolation as required.
G07.1C (cylinder radius) and G07.1C0 are automatically output before and
after cycle machining, respectively.
- 295 -
NOTE
3 The following parameter setting is necessary to execute XA plane cycle.
4.3 CONTOURING

(1) Input items of OUTER WALL (ROUGH) (G1060)
Input items of INNER WALL (ROUGH) (G1054)
Input items of PARTIAL (ROUGH) (G1068)
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
NOTE
CUT COND
Data item Meaning
T BOTTOM THICKNESS (*2) Cutting allowance of the bottom in side face machining (radius value,
positive value)
S SIDE THICKNESS (*2) Cutting allowance of the side face (radius value, positive value)
L CUT DEPTH OF RADIUS (*1) Depth of cut per side face machining operation (in the tool radius direction)
J CUT DEPTH OF AXIS (*1) Depth of cut in the tool axis direction per cutting operation (radius value,
positive value)
The default is (bottom surplus thickness - bottom finishing allowance).
K* SIDE FINISH AMOUNT (*1) Finishing allowance on the side face. The blank is regarded as 0. (radius
H* BOTTOM FINISHI AMT. (*1) Finishing allowance at the bottom in side face machining. The blank is
(*1) When bit 5 (RCF) of parameter No. 27002 is set to 1, the displayed order is changed by exchanging
the input items "CUT DEPTH OF RADIUS" and "CUT DEPTH OF AXIS" and the input items
"SIDE FINISH AMOUNT" and "BOTTOM FINISH AMT." so that the items related to workpiece
dimensions are displayed collectively.
(*2) When bit 0 (P0) of parameter No. 27095 is set to 1, the "BOTTOM THICKNESS" and "SIDE
THICKNESS" items can be entered on the figure input screen. In this case, these input items are not
displayed on the cycle input screen.
The advantages of displaying these input items on the figure input screen instead of the cycle input
screen are as follows:
• "BOTTOM THICKNESS" and "SIDE THICKNESS" are closely related to "BASE
POSITION" and "HEIGHT/DEPTH" on the figure input screen. These items can be entered in
the same block.
• A single machining cycle can contain more than one figure block. Therefore, when "BOTTOM
THICKNESS" and "SIDE THICKNESS" are entered in a figure block, thickness values can be
set separately for each machining profile.
- 296 -
NOTE
When a setting is made to use the figure input screen for entering "BOTTOM
THICKNESS" and "SIDE THICKNESS", it is impossible to directly use a
machining program that was created with a setting to enter "BOTTOM
THICKNESS" and "SIDE THICKNESS" on the cycle input screen. The program
needs to partly be modified.
Depending on the setting, the following alarms are issued:
1 When the bottom thickness and side thickness are entered on the figure input
screen (bit 0 (P0) of parameter No. 27095 is set to 1)
<1> A machining type block contains a bottom thickness or side thickness
item
→ Alarm (PS3043(Series 16i/18i/21i),
PS3543(Series 30i/31i/32i) ”WRONG THICKNESS”)
<2> In a machining profile block, a bottom thickness or side thickness is
required, but its argument is not present.
PS3516(Series 30i/31i/32i) ”NO NECESSARY ADDRESS”)
2 When the bottom thickness and side thickness are entered on the cycle input
screen (bit 0 (P0) of parameter No. 27095 is set to 0)
<1> A machining profile block contains a bottom thickness or side thickness
item.
PS3543(Series 30i/31i/32i) ”WRONG THICKNESS”)
* For machining type blocks in which the bottom and side thickness items are
permitted to be omitted, an alarm is not issued even when the bottom or side
thickness item is missing. If the bottom and side thickness items are required
(part of facing and contouring), the alarm “NO NECESSARY ADDRESS” is
issued.
CUT COND
Data item Meaning
F FEED RATE- SING.CUT Feedrate applicable when only the one-side cutter portion of an end mill
is used for cutting. This feedrate is used for cutting in retract operation
and on the side face other than initial cutting.
V FEED RATE- BOTH CUT Feedrate applicable when the entire front side of an end mill is used for
cutting. This feedrate is used for initial cutting.
E FEED RATE – AXIS Feedrate applicable when cutting is performed in the tool axis direction
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
M INITIAL FEED OVERRIDE Feedrate override value for the first cutting. The initial value is 100 (1 to
200, positive value).
W UP CUT/DOWN CUT [UP CUT] : Performs machining in up-cut mode, assuming that the
tool is rotating clockwise.
[DWNCUT] : Performs machining in down-cut mode, assuming that the
(COPY)
start point (point R) in the tool axis direction (radius value, positive value)
Remark) By referring to the parameter No.27009 (minimum clamp
value), the system sets the data as Initial value.
- 297 -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
P APPROACH TYPE [ARC] : Approaches a side face along an arc.
[TANGEN] : Approaches a side face along the straight line tangent to the
first figure in side face cutting.
[VERTIC] : Approaches a side face along the straight line normal to the
(COPY)
R APPROACH RAD./DIST. Radius when [ARC] is specified.
Straight line length when [TANGEN] or [VERTIC] is specified. (radius
A* APPROACH ANGLE Center angle of the arc when [ARC] is specified. The default is 90
degrees. (positive value)
Remark) This data item is indicated only when [ARC] is selected for
APPROACH TYPE.
(COPY)
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
Q ESCAPE TYPE [ARC] : Retracts from a side face along an arc.
[TANGEN] : Retracts from a side face along the straight line tangent to
the last figure in side face cutting.
[VERTIC] : Retracts from a side face along the straight line normal to
the last figure in side face cutting.
(COPY)
X ESCAPE RAD./DIST. Radius when [ARC] is specified.
Y* ESCAPE ANGLE Center angle of the arc when [ARC] is specified. The default is 90
degrees. (positive value)
ESCAPE TYPE.
(COPY)
Z APPROCH MOTION [2 AXES] : When moving from the current position to the machining
start point, the tool first moves in the machining plane in
two-axis synchronous operation and then moves along the
tool axis. (initial value)
Remark) This input item is not displayed when the option for expanding
the number of simultaneously controlled axes is not provided.
- 298 -
(a) Tool path
In-feed machining
in the tool radius
direction
Approach Retract
In-feed machining
in the tool axis
direction
The side-face contour of a machining profile is cut off.

The following tool path is created.
<1> The tool moves to above the approach start point.

<2> The tool moves to the height of the cutting surface.
<3> The tool cuts along the side-face contour of the machining profile.
The tool performs in-feed machining in the tool radius direction until the cutting allowance in the tool
radius direction is removed.
<4> Steps <2> and <3> are repeated until the cutting allowance in the tool axis direction is removed.
<5> The tool retracts.
- 299 -
(i) Approach
First in-feed
machining cycle
in the tool radius
direction
Cutting start point
Approach start point
Clearance Ct in the tool axis direction
Machining profile top

surface height
Amount cut in the Ftm

first in-feed
machining cycle Ft
in the tool axis
direction
<1> The tool moves to the position "machining profile top surface height + clearance (Ct) in the tool axis
direction" by rapid traverse.
<2> The tool moves to the position "amount to be cut in the first in-feed machining cycle in the tool axis
direction - clearance (Ct) in the tool axis direction" at the feedrate (Ftm) specified for movement in
the tool axis direction.
<3> The tool cut in to the position "amount to be cut in the first in-feed machining cycle in the tool axis
direction" at the feedrate (Ft) specified for cutting in the tool axis direction.
<4> The tool approaches, in the tool radius direction, the start point of the first in-feed machining cycle
in the tool radius direction.
(ii) Retraction
Clearance (Ct) in the tool axis direction
Machining profile top surface height
Ftm
<1> The tool moves from the approach end point to the position "machining profile top surface height +
clearance (Ct) in the tool axis direction" at the feedrate (Ftm) specified for movement in the tool axis
direction.
- 300 -
(iii) In-feed machining in the tool radius direction

Finishing
allowance in the
tool radius
direction
Cutting
allowance in the
tool radius
direction
First in-
feed
machining
cycle
Second in-
feed
machining
Third in-feed machining
Amount to be
cut in each in-
feed machining
cycle in the tool
radius direction
Retraction from the wall at

the end of in-feed machining
Feedrate Fr specified for in the tool radius direction
single-edge thread cutting
Feedrate Fd specified for

double-edge thread cutting
Start and end points of the first in-feed machining cycle

(they coincide in this case)
<1> The tool moves to cut along the contour from the first in-feed machining cycle start point to the end
point at the feedrate (Fs) specified for single-edge thread cutting.
<2> The tool approaches, using the following method.
When the in-feed machining start point coincides with the in-feed machining end point:
The tool directly approaches the next in-feed machining start point in the normal direction at the feedrate
(Fd) specified for double-edge thread cutting.
When the in-feed machining start point does not coincide with the in-feed machining end point:
The tool approaches the second in-feed machining start point.
<3> The tool moves to cut along the contour of the machining profile at the feedrate (Fs) specified for
single-edge thread cutting.
<4> Steps <2> and <3> are repeated until the cutting allowance (cutting allowance in the tool radius
direction - finishing allowance) is removed.
- 301 -
(2) Input items of OUTER WALL (BOTTOM FINISH) (G1061)

Input items of INNER WALL (BOTTOM FINISH) (G1065)
Input items of PARTIAL (BOTTOM FINISH) (G1069)
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
CUT COND
Data item Meaning
T BOTTOM THICKNESS See the descriptions about Roughing: G1060.
S SIDE THICKNESS -
K* SIDE FINISH AMOUNT -
H* BOTTOM FINISHI AMT. -
L CUT DEPTH OF RADIUS -
F FEED RATE- SING.CUT -
V FEED RATE- BOTH CUT -
E FEED RATE- AXIS -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
W UP CUT/DOWN CUT See the descriptions about Roughing: G1060.
P APPROACH TYPE -
R APPROACH RAD./DIST. -
A* APPROACH ANGLE -
Q ESCAPE TYPE -
X ESCAPE RAD./DIST. -
Y* ESCAPE ANGLE -
Z APPROCH MOTION -
- 302 -
(a) Tool path

The bottom surface of the side-face contour of the machining profile is finished.
In-feed machining
in the tool radius
direction
Approach Retract
<1> The tool approaches the approach start point of the machining profile.
<2> The tool moves to the bottom surface height of the machining profile.
<3> The tool moves to cut along the side-face contour of the machining profile.
In-feed machining in the tool radius direction is performed until the cutting allowance in the tool radius
direction is removed.
- 303 -
(i) Approach
First in-feed
machining cycle in
the tool radius
direction
Cutting start point

surface height
Ftm
Machining profile
bottom surface
Ft height
<1> The tool moves to the position "machining profile top surface height + clearance (Ct) in the tool axis
<2> The tool moves to the position "machining profile bottom surface + cutting allowance (Vt) in the
tool axis direction + clearance (Ct) in the tool axis direction" at the feedrate (Ftm) specified for
movement in the tool axis direction.
<3> The tool moves to the machining profile bottom surface at the feedrate (Ft) specified for cutting in
the tool axis direction.
<4> The tool approaches, in the tool radius direction, the in-feed machining start point in the tool radius
direction.
(ii) Retraction

surface height
Ftm
- 304 -
<1> The tool moves from the approach end point to the position "machining profile top height +
clearance (Ct) in the tool axis direction" at the feedrate (Ftm) specified for movement in the tool axis
direction.
- In-feed machining in the tool radius direction

This movement is the same as for contouring (roughing).
See descriptions about contouring (roughing) for details.
(3) Input items of OUTER WALL (SIDE FINISH) (G1062)

Input items of INNER WALL (SIDE FINISH) (G1066)
Input items of PARTIAL (SIDE FINISH ) (G1070)
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
I INPUT TYPE [INPUT] : Inputs a cutter compensation value directly.
[REF.] : Inputs a cutter compensation number to read a cutter
compensation value by that number.
M CUTTER COMP.NO. Cutter compensation number of an end mill (positive value)
Remark) This item is indicated only when [REF.] is selected for INPUT
TYPE.
NOTE
Tab ‘TOOL COND.’ is not enabled when bit 3 (CN3) of parameter No. 27040 = 1.
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
S SIDE THICKNESS See the descriptions about Roughing: G1060.
B NUMBER OF FINISHING Number of cuts for finishing (positive value)
Remark) Depth of each cut = (side surplus thickness)/(number of finishing
cuts)
F FEED RATE- SING.CUT Feedrate applicable when only the one-side cutter portion of an end mill is
used for cutting. This feedrate is used for cutting in retract operation and
on the side face other than initial cutting.
V FEED RATE- BOTH.CUT -
E FEED RATE- AXIS -
NOTE
When bit 4 (FSP) of parameter No. 27002 is set to 1 to make it possible to set
the feedrate for side face finishing for each element, a cutting feedrate that is
usually set to "FEED RATE-SINGLE.CUT" specified in the machining type block
is set to “SIDE FIN. FEEDRATE” if it is specified.
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
P APPROACH TYPE -
A* APPROACH ANGLE -
Q ESCAPE TYPE -
- 305 -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
Y* ESCAPE ANGLE -
Z APPROCH MOTION -
(a) Tool path

The side-face contour of the machining profile is finished.
Approach Retract
<1> The tool approaches a point above the approach start point.
<2> The tool moves to the bottom surface of the machining profile.
<3> The tool moves to cut along the side-face contour of the machining profile.
In-feed machining is performed for the cutting allowance (Vt) in the tool radius direction a specified
number of finishing cycles.
- 306 -
(i) Approach
Cutting start point

surface height
Ftm
Ft
<1> The tool moves to the position "machining profile top surface height + clearance (Ct) in the tool
axis direction" by rapid traverse.
<2> The tool moves to the position "machining profile bottom surface + finishing allowance (Tt) in
the tool axis direction + clearance (Ct) in the tool axis direction" at the feedrate (Ftm) specified
for movement in the tool axis direction.
<3> The tool moves to the position "machining profile bottom surface + finishing allowance (Tt) in
the tool axis direction" at the feedrate (Ft) specified for cutting in the machining profile.
<4> The tool approaches, in the tool radius direction, the in-feed machining start point in the tool
radius direction.
(ii) Operation

surface height
Ftm
- 307 -
<1> The tool moves from the approach end point to the position "machining profile top surface
height + clearance (Ct) in the tool axis direction" at the feedrate (Ftm) specified for movement
in the tool axis direction.
Feedrate Fr specified for cutting

in the tool radius direction
Overlapped length
Final finishing cycle
First finishing cycle
Feedrate Frm specified for movement

in the tool radius direction
<1> The tool approaches the cutting start point in the tool radius direction at the feedrate (Fr)
specified for cutting in the tool radius direction.
<2> The tool moves to cut along the contour from the first in-feed machining cycle start point to the
first in-feed machining cycle end point at the feedrate (Fr) specified for cutting in the tool radius
direction.
<3> The tool retracts from the cutting end point in the tool radius direction at the feedrate (Fr)
specified for cutting in the tool radius direction.
<4> The tool approaches the next in-feed machining cycle start point, using the specified [movement
method for in-feed machining].
<5> Steps <2> to <4> are repeated as many times as the required number of finishing cycles.
(4) Input items of OUTER WALL (CHAMFER) (G1063)

Input items of INNER WALL (CHAMFER) (G1067)
Input items of PARTIAL (CHAMFER) (G1071)
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
K TOOL SMALL DIAMETER Diameter of the tip of a chamfering tool (positive value)
NOTE
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
S CHAMFER Chamfer length (radius value, positive value)
H EJECTION STROKE Distance between the tip of a chamfering tool and an actually cut position
in the tool axis direction (radius value, positive value)
- 308 -
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
F FEED RATE- RADIUS Feedrate applicable when cutting is performed in the tool radius direction
E FEED RATE- AXIS Feedrate applicable when cutting is performed in the tool axis direction
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
P APPROACH TYPE -
A* APPROACH ANGLE -
Q ESCAPE TYPE -
Y* ESCAPE ANGLE -
Z APPROCH MOTION -
(a) Tool path
<1> The tool moves to the position "cutting start position + clearance (Cr)" by rapid traverse.
<2> The tool moves to the position "amount to be chamfered (C) + ejection stroke (P)" at the feedrate (F)
specified for cutting.
<3> The tool cuts in to the portion to be chamfered by the cut depth (Dr) in the tool radius direction at
the feedrate (Fd) specified for both-edge thread cutting.
<4> The tool cuts along the contour of the hole machining profile at the feedrate (Fr) specified for
single-edge thread cutting.
<5> Steps <3> and <4> are repeated until only the finishing allowance (Tr) in the tool radius direction is
left uncut.
<6> The tool turns around the finishing allowance (Tr) in the tool radius direction to perform finishing at
the feedrate (Ff) specified for finishing.
<7> The tool moves to the position "cut-in start position + clearance (Cr)" by rapid traverse.
- 309 -
4.3.2 Fixed Form Figure (XY Plane)

POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
pocketing
Remark) When contouring is selected as machining type, select [CONVEX] if
an outer figure is to be machined; if an inner figure is to be
machined, select [CONCAVE].
B BASE POSITION Z coordinate of the top surface or the bottom of the side face of a part to be
subject to contouring (in the tool axis direction)
specify the distance to the bottom of the side face by using a negative value
When the bottom of a side face is selected as the BASE POSITION, specify
the distance to the top surface of the workpiece by using a positive value
(radius value). → Height
U LENGTH FOR X AXIS Length of the side in the X-axis direction (radius value, positive value)
negative value)
When bit 0 (P0) of parameter No. 27095 is set to 1, the "BOTTOM THICKNESS" and "SIDE
THICKNESS" displayed on the cycle input screen are displayed on the THICKNESS tab of the figure
input screen.
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
B BASE POSITION -
L HEIGHT/DEPTH -
When bit 0 (P0) of parameter No. 27095 is set to 1, the “BOTTOM THICKNESS” and “SIDE
THICKNESS” displayed on the cycle input screen are displayed on the THICKNESS tab of the figure
input screen.
- 310 -
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
B BASE POSITION -
L HEIGHT/DEPTH -
positive value)
A* ANGLE Inclination angle of a track figure relative to the X-axis (positive or negative
value)

See Subsection 4.2.2, "Fixed Form Figure Blocks (XY Plane)", in "FACING".
This code cannot be specified for part machining.
4.3.3 Fixed Form Figure (YZ/XC Plane)

following G codes.

Polygon : G1525 (XC plane, polar coordinate interpolation plane)
NOTE
note the following:
beforehand.
respectively.
- 311 -

When an arbitrary figure for contouring is input, data such as a figure type and machining reference position is
So, this subsection describes only the start point block of an arbitrary figure for contouring.
ARBITRARY FIGURES".
ELEMENT
Data item Meaning
[CONCAVE] : Used as an inner figure for contouring and emboss machining or
as a figure for pocketing
[OPEN] : Used when only one side is cut during contouring
Remark) When contouring is specified as a machining type, one of [CONVEX],
[CONCAVE], and [OPEN] must be selected.
Z BASE POSITION Z coordinate of the top surface or the bottom of the side face of a part to be
subject to contouring (tool axis direction)
P FIGURE ATTRIBUTE [RIGHT] : The right side of an entered figure as viewed with respect to the
direction of movement is cut. (initial value)
[LEFT] : The left side of an entered figure as viewed with respect to the
direction of movement is cut. (initial value)
Remark) These items are displayed only when [OPEN] is selected as a figure
type.
(a) Side face finishing feedrate for each figure element

When bit 4 (FSP) of parameter No. 27002 is set to 1, the feedrate for side face finishing can be set
for each element.
When the side face finishing feedrate can be set, the input item for the side face finishing feedrate is
displayed on the “ATTRIBUTE” tab for each of the figure elements that are straight line, arc,
chamfer, and corner rounding elements.
“SIDE FIN. FEEDRATE” is used for every cut when finishing is performed as many times as
specified.
- 312 -
(i) Outputting the side face finishing feedrate to a program

When a figure element is output to a program, the value entered for “SIDE FIN. FEEDRATE” is
output following address F in the format shown below. When “SIDE FIN. FEEDRATE” is a space,
address F is not output.
(Example of straight lines on an XY plane)

G1201 H-10. V-20. K5. C-10. L0. M0. F50. ;
When 0 or a space is set for “SIDE FIN. FEEDRATE” for an element, the element is cut at "FEED
RATE-SING.CUT" set in the machining type block.
(ii) Feedrate applied to a block added during cutting

When an acute-angled figure as shown in the figure below is programmed, a new block may be
added as the tool path for the acute-angle corner during cutting. In such a case, the feedrate specified
for the previous element when the figure was created is applied to the added block. In the following
figure, for example, when f1 is specified as “SIDE FIN. FEEDRATE” for block N1 of a programmed
figure, the feedrate of the added block, n, is assumed also to be f1.
n
f1 f2
Tool path
N2 Programmed figure and

creation direction
N1
(iii) Handling of the side face finishing feedrate at the time of figure copy
When a figure is copied, a space is set for “SIDE FIN. FEEDRATE” of all part elements of a figure
generated by the copy operation. When a value needs to be specified, use soft key [ALTER] on the
arbitrary figure input screen to enter the value.
A figure copy replaces rounded corners with arc elements, and chamfers with straight line elements.
Also in such a case, a space is set for “SIDE FIN. FEEDRATE”.
(iv) Handling of the side face finishing feedrate at the time of NC program
conversion
NC program conversion outputs the value specified for “SIDE FIN. FEEDRATE” following address
F to the cutting block generated as a result of the conversion.
If 0 or a space is set for “SIDE FIN. FEEDRATE”, the value of "FEED RATE-SING.CUT" specified
in the machining type block is output.

The data to be set for the YZ, XC, ZC planes and XA plane is the same as for the XY plane except that
the XY plane is changed to the YZ, XC, ZC XA plane and that the direction in which the tool moves to
cut is changed to the X-axis (YZ and ZC planes) or the Z-axis (XC and XA plane).
- 313 -

Start point : G1600 (ZC plane, cylindrical surface)
Start point : G1700 (XA plane, cylindrical surface)
NOTE
note the following:
beforehand.
respectively.
note the following:
beforehand.
4.4 EMBOSS MACHINING

In the case of the contouring, the tool cuts along the side-face contour of the machining profile and
performs in-feed machining in the tool radius direction. These tool passes sometimes generate many
air-cut movement as the following left figure.
So, the machining called “EMBOSS MACHINING CYCLE” that can reduce the air-cut passes as the
following right figure is prepared.
NOTE
1 This function is available when bit 7 (MC7) of parameter No.27000 = 1.
2 The parameters for the machining conditions for embossing cycles are same
with the parameters for pocketing cycles. (Ex. No.27066)
- 314 -

TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
NOTE
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
T* BOTTOM THICKNESS (*1) Cutting allowance of the bottom in side face machining. The blank is
S* SIDE THICKNESS (*1) Cutting allowance of the side face. The blank is regarded as 0. (radius value,
positive value)
Remark) When both the side surplus thickness and bottom surplus thickness
are omitted, an entire pocket area is cut.
L CUT DEPTH OF RADIUS Depth of cut on the side face (tool radius direction) per cutting operation
(*2) (radius value, positive value)
J CUT DEPTH OF AXIS Depth of cut in the tool axis direction per cutting operation (radius value,
(*2) positive value)
K* SIDE FINISH AMOUNT Finishing allowance on the side face. The blank is regarded as 0. (radius
(*2) value, positive value)
H* BOTTOM FINISHI AMT. Finishing allowance at the bottom in side face machining. The blank is
(*2) regarded as 0. (radius value, positive value)
F FEED RATE- SING.CUT Feedrate applicable when only the one-side cutter portion of an end mill is
used for cutting. This feedrate is used for cutting in retract operation and on
the side face other than initial cutting.
V FEED RATE- BOTH.CUT Feedrate applicable when the entire front side of an end mill is used for
(*1) These items can be entered on the figure input screen. For details, see Subsection 4.3.1, "Machining
Command", in Section 4.3, "CONTOURING".
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
W UP CUT/DOWN CUT [UP CUT] : Performs machining in up-cut mode, assuming that the tool
is rotating clockwise.
(COPY)
- 315 -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
B CLEARANCE OF RADIUS Distance between the side face and a tool retract position in the tool radius
direction (radius value, positive value)
Remark1) When one pocket cutting operation is completed, the tool
performs a retract operation in the tool axis direction from the
side face of the pocket by this clearance amount.
Remark2) By referring to the parameter No.27009 (minimum clamp value),
(initial value)
Remark) This input item is not displayed when the option for expanding the
number of simultaneously controlled axes is not provided.
(2) Input items of BOTTOM FINISH (G1081)

TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
NOTE
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
T* BOTTOM THICKNESS See the descriptions about Roughing: G1080.
E FEED RATE- AXIS -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
B CLEARANCE OF RADIUS -
Z APPROCH MOTION -
- 316 -
(3) Input items of SIDE FINISH (G1082)

TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
I INPUT [INPUT] : Inputs a cutter compensation value directly.
Remark) This item is indicated only when [INPUT] is selected for INPUT.
Remark) This item is indicated only when [REF.] is selected for INPUT.
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
K* SIDE FINISH AMOUNT See the descriptions about Roughing: G1080.
E FEED RATE- AXIS -
NOTE
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
(COPY)
A* APPROACH ANGLE Center angle of the arc when [ARC] is specified. The default is 90 degrees.
(positive value)
APPROACH TYPE. (COPY)
[TANGEN] : Retracts from a side face along the straight line tangent to the
last figure in side face cutting.
[VERTIC] : Retracts from a side face along the straight line normal to the
(COPY)
- 317 -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
Y* ESCAPE ANGLE Center angle of the arc when [ARC] is specified. The default is 90 degrees.
(positive value)
ESCAPE TYPE. (COPY)
(initial value)
(4) Input items of CHAMFER (G1083)

TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
S CHAMFER AMOUNT Chamfer length (radius value, positive value)
F FEED RATE - RADIUS Feedrate applicable when cutting is performed in the tool radius direction
E FEED RATE - AXIS Feedrate applicable when cutting is performed in the tool axis direction
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
P APPROACH TYPE See the descriptions about Side finishing: G1082.
A* APPROACH ANGLE -
Q ESCAPE TYPE -
Y* ESCAPE ANGLE -
Z APPROCH MOTION -

When an arbitrary figure for emboss machining is input, data such as a figure type and machining
reference position is specified in the start point block. Other data items to be input such as a straight line
and arc are exactly the same as for arbitrary figures of other machining types.
So, this subsection describes only the start point block of an arbitrary figure for pocketing.
ARBITRARY FIGURES".
- 318 -
ELEMENT
Data item Meaning
[CONCAVE] : Used as an inner figure for contouring and emboss machining or as a
figure for pocketing
Remark) When emboss machining is selected as machining type, be sure to select
[CONCAVE].
B BASE POSITION Z coordinate of the top surface of a workpiece subject to pocketing or the bottom of
a pocket (in the tool axis direction)
L HEIGHT/DEPTH When the top surface of a workpiece is selected as the BASE POSITION, specify
the distance to the bottom of the side face by using a negative value (radius value).
→ Depth
When the bottom of the side face is selected as the BASE POSITION, specify the
distance to the top surface of the pocket by using a positive value (radius value). →
Height

When bit 4 (FSP) of parameter No. 27002 is set to 1, the feedrate for side face finishing can be set for
each element.
displayed on the “ATTRIBUTE” tab for each of the figure elements that are straight line, arc, chamfer,
and corner rounding elements.
For details, see Subsection 4.3.4, "Arbitrary Figure (XY Plane)", in Section 4.3, "CONTOURING".
4.4.3 Arbitrary Figure (YZ/XC/ZC/XA plane)

The data to be set for the YZ, XC, ZC and XA planes is the same as for the XY plane except that the XY

- 319 -
NOTE
note the following:
beforehand.
respectively.
note the following:
beforehand.
4.5 POCKETING

TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
NOTE
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
T* BOTTOM THICKNESS (*1) Cutting allowance of the bottom in side face machining. The blank is
S* SIDE THICKNESS (*1) Cutting allowance of the side face. The blank is regarded as 0. (radius
Remark) When both the side surplus thickness and bottom surplus
thickness are omitted, an entire pocket area is cut.
L CUT DEPTH OF RADIUS (*2) Depth of cut on the side face (tool radius direction) per cutting operation
- 320 -
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
J CUT DEPTH OF AXIS (*2) Depth of cut in the tool axis direction per cutting operation (radius value,
positive value)
K* SIDE FINISH AMOUNT (*2) Finishing allowance on the side face. The blank is regarded as 0. (radius
H* BOTTOM FINISHI AMT. (*2) Finishing allowance at the bottom in side face machining. The blank is
(*1) These items can be entered on the figure input screen. For details, see Subsection 4.3.1, "Machining
Command", in Section 4.3, "CONTOURING".
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
NOTE
When a non-zero value is input for just one of the data items, side surplus
thickness and bottom surplus thickness, cutting is performed for the input
surplus thickness, and for the omitted surplus thickness, cutting operation is not
performed on the assumption that the omitted surplus thickness is 0.
When non-zero values are input for both the side surplus thickness and bottom
surplus thickness, cutting is performed for each surplus thickness.
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
W UP CUT/DOWN CUT [UP CUT] : Performs machining in up-cut mode, assuming that the
(COPY)
B CLEARANCE OF RADIUS Distance between the wall of a pocket and a tool retract position in the
tool radius direction (radius value, positive value)
Remark1) When one pocket cutting operation is completed, the tool
side face of the pocket by this clearance amount.
Remark2) By referring to the parameter No.27009 (minimum clamp
- 321 -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
X CUT DEPTH METHOD [STRGHT]: Plunging straightly to the pocket area
[HELICAL]: Plunging helically to the pocket area
In the following plane, [HELICAL] can be used.

(1) XY-plane
(2) YZ-plane
In the following plane, [HELICAL] cannot be used,

because helical interpolation function cannot be used.
(1) ZC-plane (cylindrical surface) (C-axis is parallel to Y-axis)
(2) XC-plane (polar coordinate interpolation plane) (C-axis is parallel to
Y-axis )
(3) XA-plane (cylindrical surface) (C-axis is parallel to Y-axis)
A* CUT ANGLE Angle at which the tool cuts into the pocket obliquely or helically. The
blank is regarded as 0 degrees. (in one-degree increments, positive
value) (COPY)
Remark) By performing cutting also using the side face of an end mill, the
load on the tool can be reduced.
R HELICAL RADIUS The radius of helical circle when a tool plunges helically
M HELICAL FEED RATE The feed rate when a tool plunges helically
P* START PT.(1ST AXIS) 1st-axis coordinate of the cutting start point of pocketing. When omitting
this item, also omit the 2nd-axis coordinate. In this case, the coordinates
of the start point are determined automatically.
Remark1) The 1st axis is the X-axis on the XY plane, the Y-axis on the
YZ plane, the X-axis on the XC plane, the Z-axis on the ZC
plane, or the X-axis on the XA plane.
Remark2) This item is enable when the bit 7 (PR7) of parameter No.
27060 = 1.
Q* START PT.(2ND AXIS) 2nd-axis coordinate of the cutting start point of pocketing. When this item
is omitted, the coordinate is determined automatically.
Remark1) The 2nd axis is the Y-axis on the XY plane, the Z-axis on the
YZ plane, the C-axis on the XC plane, the C-axis on the ZC
plane, or the A-axis on the XA plane.
Remark2) This item is enable when the bit 7 (PR7) of parameter No.
27060 = 1.
- 322 -
(a) Tool path

The inside of a pocket machining profile is cut off in a spiral manner.
More than one island machining profile and more than one cavity machining profile can be defined for a
pocket machining profile. The island machining profiles are left uncut.
The cavity machining profiles are detoured so that they will not be cut.
The tool path is created in such a way that an anticipated interference with pocket machining profiles or
island machining profiles can be avoided.
The created tool path is effective because retraction in the tool axis direction is avoided as much as
possible.
For this tool path, in-feed machining in the tool axis direction is possible.
Only specified cutting allowances can be cut off.
The direction of cutting can be either up-cut or down-cut. The direction of cutting is controlled
automatically around islands.
It is possible to cut in from the inside and outside of the machining profile.
If there is a portion left uncut at a corner, it is possible to automatically discriminate the uncut portion and
cut it off.
It is possible to cut in at an arbitrary angle in the tool axis direction.
It is possible to specify an arbitrary position as a cutting start point.
It is possible to determine a cutting start point automatically.
It is possible to select a movement method for tool movement.
It is possible to control automatically a cut-in depth on the island machining profile top surface
automatically.
In the following pocket machining profile, which has a pocket through which the tool can pass, the tool is
lifted automatically to cut only a range that can be cut.
- 323 -
If there is more than one cut in the tool axis direction, each range is cut completely before another.
A contour specified as an open element of a pocket machining profile is cut off as shown below.
In case “HELICAL” is specified in “CUT DEPTH METHOD”, machining motion is as follows.
<1> Tool moves rapidly the position “Start point of the 1st axis (P), Start point of the 2nd axis (Q)” to the
tool radius direction ( If the start points (P,Q) are not specified, start points decided automatically are
used ).
<2> Tool moves rapidly the position “Base position (B) + clearance (C)” to the tool axis direction.
* In case the cutting motion is after the 2nd time, after the <2> motion, tool moves the position “Base
position(B) + Clearance(C) + (Cutting depth to the tool axis direction(J) x (Cutting times -1))”
<3> In case of approaching helically with the cutting feed rate (M), tool moves “Start point of the 1st
axis(P) + Radius of helical(R)” to the tool radius direction, and moves by the “Depth of cutting in 1
helical motion/4” to the tool axis direction.
<4> Tool plunges helically with the cutting feed rate (M) to the position “Base position (B) – (“Cutting
depth to the tool axis direction (J)” x (Cutting times – 1))” with cutting angle (A) and helical radius
(R).
<5> Tool moves the position “Start point of the 1st axis (P), Start point of the 2nd axis (Q)” to the tool
radius direction with the feed rate (V).
<6> Tool moves the initial start point of the pocket area to the tool radius direction with the feed rate (V).
<7> Tool cuts the pocket area to the tool radius direction at the feed rate (F,V) with the cutting depth of
the tool radius direction (L).
- 324 -
<8> After the completion of machining the pocket area, tool escapes the position “Base position (B) +
Clearance (C)” to the tool axis direction with the feed rate (E).
<9> Repeating the step <1> to <8> until the position “Base position (B) + High/Depth (L)”
NOTE
In order to use for specifying helical plunge, the optional function “Helical
interpolation” is needed.
Example) In case of XP-plane
<1>
<4>
<3>
Y <2>
<5>
<6>
<7>
X <8>
<1> <2> <3>

Z <8>
<4>
<6> <5>
X
<7>
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
T* BOTTOM THICKNESS See the descriptions about Roughing: G1040.
E FEED RATE- AXIS -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
Z APPROCH MOTION -
- 325 -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
X CUT DEPTH METHOD [STRGHT]: Plunging straightly to the pocket area
[HELICAL]: Plunging helically to the pocket area
In the following plane, [HELICAL] can be used.

(1) XY-plane
(2) YZ-plane
In the following plane, [HELICAL] cannot be used,

because helical interpolation function cannot be used.
(1) ZC-plane (cylindrical surface) (C-axis is parallel to Y-axis)
(2) XC-plane (polar coordinate interpolation plane) (C-axis is parallel to
Y-axis )
(3) XA-plane (cylindrical surface) (C-axis is parallel to Y-axis)
R HELICAL RADIUS The radius of helical circle when a tool plunges helically
M HELICAL FEED RATE The feed rate when a tool plunges helically
A* CUT ANGLE Angle at which the tool cuts into the pocket obliquely or helically. The
blank is regarded as 0 degrees.
P* START PT.(1ST AXIS) -
Q* START PT.(2ND AXIS) -
(a) Tool path
The bottom surface of a pocket machining profile is finished in a spiral manner.

The tool path for it is the same as for pocketing (roughing).
See descriptions about pocketing (roughing) for details.
No in-feed machining in the tool axis direction is performed, though.
The top surface of island machining profiles is not cut off either.
In case “HELICAL” is specified in “CUT DEPTH METHOD”, machining motion is as follows.
<1> Tool moves rapidly the position “Start point of the 1st axis (P), Start point of the 2nd axis (Q)” to the
tool radius direction ( If the start points (P,Q) are not specified, start points decided automatically
are used ).
<2> Tool moves rapidly the position “Base position (B) + clearance (C)” to the tool axis direction.
<3> In case of approaching helically with the cutting feed rate (M), tool moves “Start point of the 1st
axis (P) + Radius of helical (R)” to the tool radius direction, and moves by the “Depth of cutting in
1 helical motion/4” to the tool axis direction.
- 326 -
<4> Tool plunges helically at cutting feed rate (M) to the position “Base position (B) – Bottom
thickness (T)” with cutting angle (A) and helical radius (R).
<5> Tool moves the position “Start point of the 1st axis (P), Start point of the 2nd axis (Q)” to the tool
radius direction at the feed rate (V).
<6> Tool moves the initial start point of the pocket area to the tool radius direction at the feed rate (V).
<7> Tool cuts the pocket area to the tool radius direction at the feed rate (F,V) with the cutting depth of
the tool radius direction (L).
<8> After the completion of machining the pocket area, tool escapes the position “Base position (B) +
Clearance (C)” to the tool axis direction with the feed rate (E).
<9> Repeating the step <1> to <8> until the position “Base position (B) + High/Depth (L)”
NOTE
In order to use for specifying helical plunge, the optional function “Helical
interpolation” is needed.
Example) In case of XY-plane
<1> <4>
<3>
Y <2>
<5>
<6>
<7>
X <8>
<1> <2>
<3>
Z <8>
<4>
<6> <5>
X <7>
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
NOTE
Tab ‘TOOL COND.’ is not enabled when bit 3 (PF3) of parameter No. 27061 = 1.
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
- 327 -
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
E FEED RATE- AXIS -
NOTE
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
(COPY)
(positive value)
(COPY)
(positive value)
ESCAPE TYPE. (COPY)
(initial value)
- 328 -
(a) Tool path
The side-face contour of pocket and island machining profiles is finished. The tool path for it is the same
as for contouring (side-face finishing).
See descriptions about contouring (side-face finishing) for details.
The specifications for the following points differ in part, though.

No in-feed machining is performed in the tool radius direction or tool axis direction.
Even if it is anticipated that the tool may interfere with a pocket or island machining profile during
finishing, no tool path that can avoid interference is created.
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
A* APPROACH ANGLE -
Q ESCAPE TYPE -
Y* ESCAPE ANGLE -
Z APPROCH MOTION -
- 329 -
(a) Tool path

The top surface of a wall of a pocket is chamfered. The tool path for it is the same as for contouring
(chamfering).
See descriptions about contouring (chamfering) for details.
4.5.2 Improvement of Checking Cutting Condition for

Pocketing (Rough) and Emboss Machining (Rough)
Pocketing (rough) and emboss machining (rough) have the following limitation.
(Limitation)
When the cutting condition (SIDE THICKNESS - SIDE FINISH AMOUNT) ≤ CUT DEPTH OF
RADIUS is given, CLERANCE OF RADIUS is ignored. Then, the tool performs a retract operation
in the tool axis direction when the tool is touching the side face of the pocket.
If the above cutting condition is given, the alarm “WRONG CUTTING DEPTH” can be generated when
cycle machining is executed.
4.5.2.1 PARAMETER
Setting the following parameter to 1 is necessary to use this function.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27061 CDR
[Data format] bit

CDR When Pocketing (rough) and emboss machining (rough) is executed, if the cutting
condition (SIDE THICKNESS - SIDE FINISH AMOUNT) ≤ CUT DEPTH OF RADIUS
is given,
1: An alarm is generated.
0: An alarm isn’t generated.

POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
pocketing
Remark) When pocketing is selected as machining type, be sure to select
[CONCAVE].
B BASE POSITION Z coordinate of the top surface of a workpiece subject to pocketing or the
bottom of a pocket (in the tool axis direction)
specify the distance to the bottom of a pocket by using a negative value
When the bottom of a pocket is selected as the BASE POSITION, specify the
distance to the top surface of the pocket by using a positive value (radius
value). → Height
- 330 -
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
negative value)
When bit 0 (P0) of parameter No. 27095 is set to 1, the “BOTTOM THICKNESS” and “SIDE
THICKNESS” displayed on the cycle input screen are displayed on the THICKNESS tab of the figure
input screen.
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
B BASE POSITION -
L HEIGHT/DEPTH -
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
B BASE POSITION -
L HEIGHT/DEPTH -
positive value)
value)

See Subsection 4.2.2, "Fixed Form Figure Blocks (XY Plane)", in "FACING".

following G codes.

- 331 -

NOTE
note the following:
beforehand.
respectively.

When an arbitrary figure for pocketing is input, data such as a figure type and machining reference
position is specified in the start point block. Other data items to be input such as a straight line and arc are
exactly the same as for arbitrary figures of other machining types.
ARBITRARY FIGURES”.
ELEMENT
Data item Meaning
B BASE POSITION -
L HEIGHT/DEPTH -
(a) Input of Island

After entering the outer wall figure for pocketing, press soft key [CREATE]. Then, the following soft
keys are displayed:
ISLAND NXTFIG OK CANCEL
If there is a island, push the soft-key [ISLAND] in order to input the island figure. The START POINT
screen is displayed.
As to the input data item [FIGURE TYPE] is set “CONVEX” automatically. ( When a outer wall, it is set
“CONCAV”.)
After that, input the island figure as the same of a outer wall figure.
- 332 -
NOTE
As to the soft-key [NXTFIG], it is used in the case of inputting the other pocket
figure one after another.
Side face finishing feedrate for each figure element

each element.

The data to be set for the YZ, XC, ZC and XA planes is the same as for the XY plane except that the XY
plane is changed to the YZ, XC, ZC, or XA plane and that the direction in which the tool moves to cut is
changed to the X-axis (YZ and ZC planes) or the Z-axis (XC and XA plane ).

NOTE
note the following:
beforehand.
respectively.
note the following:
beforehand.
- 333 -
4.5.7 Pocket Residual Machining Cycle

(for only Series 30i/31i/32i-B, 0i-F/0i-D)
4.5.7.1 Outline
It is possible to calculate plural residual areas automatically and machine only residual areas in pocket
roughing cycle.
(Example program)
D1 ;
G1040 L10. F500. V500. E500. W2. B1. C1. Z2. X1. ; ← Pocket roughing cycle
G1220 T3. B0. L-20. H50. V50. U80. W80. R5. ; ← Pocket figure Same figure
D2 ;
G1044 N1. L2. F500. V500. E500. W2. B1. C1. Z2. ; ← Pocket residual machining cycle
G1220 T3. B0. L-20. H50. V50. U80. W80. R5. ; ← Pocket figure
(Residual areas) (Tool path of pocket residual machining cycle)
4.5.7.2 Condition
4.5.7.3 Operation
Method of program creation
When “POCKETING(RESIDUAL)” is selected at the [POCKETING] tab of milling cycle menu screen,
the creation screen of the residual machining cycle is displayed.
- 334 -
It is possible to create the program of residual machining cycle by inputting data according to the
guidance window.
(Example of program)
G1044 Nn Ll Jj Kk Hh Ff Vv Ee Ww Bb Cc Zz;
4.5.7.4 Format of pocket residual machining cycle command

Pocket residual machining cycle is commanded by the following format.
G1044 Dd Nn Pp Ll Jj Kk Hh Ff Vv Ee Ww Bb Cc Zz;
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
D TOOL DIAMETER End mill diameter used for residual machining.
Specify only in case of No.27002#0=1.
CUTTING COND.
Data item Meaning
N LARGE CUTTER Cutter compensation number of the end mill that had been used for pocket
COMP.NO. roughing in previous process of residual machining.
P LARGE TOOL DIAMETER Diameter of the end mill that had been used for pocket roughing in previous
process of residual machining.
L CUT DEPTH OF RADIUS Depth of cut on the side face (tool radius direction) per cutting operation
J* CUT DEPTH OF AXIS Depth of cut in the tool axis direction per cutting operation
K* SIDE FINISH AMOUNT Finishing allowance on the side face. The blank is regarded as 0.
H* BOTTOM FINISHI AMT. Finishing allowance at the bottom in side face machining. The blank is
regarded as 0.
F FEED RATE- SING.CUT Feedrate applicable when only the one-side cutter portion of an end mill is used
for cutting.
V FEED RATE- BOTH.CUT Feedrate applicable when the entire front side of an end mill is used for cutting.
E FEED RATE- AXIS Feedrate applicable when cutting is performed in the tool axis direction toward
the bottom of a side face being machined
- 335 -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
W UP CUT/DOWN CUT [UP CUT] : Performs machining in up-cut mode, assuming that the tool is
rotating clockwise.
[DWNCUT] : Performs machining in down-cut mode, assuming that the tool is
rotating clockwise.
B CLEARANCE OF RADIUS Distance between the wall of a pocket and a tool retract position in the tool
radius direction
point (point R) in the tool axis direction
Z APPROCH MOTION [2 AXES] : When moving from the current position to the machining start point,
the tool first moves in the machining plane in two-axis synchronous
operation and then moves along the tool axis. (initial value)
[3 AXES] : tool moves from the current position to the machining start point
in three-axis synchronous operation.
Remark) This input item is not displayed when the option for expanding the
number of simultaneously controlled axes is not provided.
G1044 is commanded together with figure blocks as follows.
(Example program)
G1044 N1. L2. F500. V500. E500. W2. B1. C1. Z2. ; ← Pocket residual machining cycle
G1220 T3. B0. L-20. H50. V50. U80. W80. R5. ; ← Figure block
The maximum number of definable island figure

The maximum number of definable island figure is 16.
Plane to calculate residual area

Residual areas are calculated based on the bottom surface of a pocket figure.
Residual areas on higher than bottom surface cannot be calculated.
4.5.7.5 Tool path

Residual areas are machined in a spiral manner.
NOTE
If tool cannot machine from the side, change tool for smaller diameter or drill
prepared holes for approach in the tool axis direction.
- 336 -
Island figures inside residual area

It is possible to select the behavior of island figures inside residual area in the following parameter.
(Parameter No.27061#6=0)
Island figures inside residual area are invalidation. (Island figures are machined)
(Parameter No.27061#6=1)
Island figures inside residual area are left.
Maybe time of tool path creation will be long.
4.5.7.6 Restrictions
The following figure cannot be machined.
(1) Generated residual area in island figure with concave arc
(Input figure) (Residual area)
Residual area
Island
(2) Closed residual area by plural island figure
Island Residual area
- 337 -
(3) Residual area width equal to diameter of small diameter tool
The same width as

tool diameter
Residual area
Island
(4) Pocket figure with one or more open elements
(Input figure)
Opening
(Blank element)
(5) Residual area tangent to island figure

Residual area
Island
- 338 -
(6) Generated residual area in between island figure and a corner of pocket figure
Island
Residual area
4.6 GROOVING

TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
NOTE
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
L CUT DEPTH OF RADIUS (*) Depth of cut on the side face (tool radius direction) per cutting operation
J CUT DEPTH OF AXIS (*) Depth of cut in the tool axis direction per cutting operation (radius value,
positive value)
K* SIDE FINISH AMOUNT (*) Finishing allowance on the side face. The blank is regarded as 0. (radius
H* BOTTOM FINISH AMT. (*) Finishing allowance at the bottom in side face machining. The blank is
(*) When bit 5 (RCF) of parameter No. 27002 is set to 1, the displayed order is changed by exchanging
"SIDE FINISH AMOUNT" and "BOTTOM FINISH AMT.".
- 339 -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
W UP CUT/DOWN CUT [UP CUT] : Performs machining in up-cutting mode, assuming that
the tool is rotating clockwise.
[DWNCUT] : Performs machining in down-cutting mode, assuming
that the tool is rotating clockwise.
(COPY)
B CLEARANCE OF RADIUS Distance between the wall of a groove and a tool retract position in the
tool radius direction (radius value, positive value)
Remark1) When one groove cutting operation is completed, the tool
side face of the groove by this clearance amount.
Remark2) By referring to the parameter No.27009 (minimum clamp
start point (point R) in the tool axis direction (radius value, positive
value)
(a) Tool path
- 340 -
The following tool path is created to cut off the inside of a groove machining profile.
In-feed machining in the tool radius direction
Approach Retract
In-feed machining in the

tool axis direction
<1> The tool approaches a point above the cutting start point of a groove machining profile.
<2> The tool cuts in the groove machining profile in the tool radius direction.
<3> The tool cuts in the groove machining profile in the tool axis direction.
<4> Step <2> and <3> are repeated until the cutting allowance is removed.
- 341 -
(i) Approach
Cutting start point
Clearance Ct in the tool

axis direction
Amount to be cut in the first in-feed
Ft machining cycle in the tool axis
direction
Groove machining
profile top surface
height
<1> The tool moves to the position "groove machining profile top surface height + clearance (Ct) in the
tool axis direction" by rapid traverse.
<2> The tool cuts in by the amount to be cut in the first in-feed machining cycle in the tool axis direction
at the feedrate (Ft) specified for cutting in the tool axis direction.
(ii) Retract
Ftm
Clearance Ct in the tool axis

direction
Groove machining profile

bottom surface
heightdirection
<1> The tool retracts from the groove machining profile bottom surface height to the position "groove
machining profile top surface height + clearance (Ct) in the tool axis direction" at the feedrate (Ftm)
specified for movement in the tool axis direction.
- 342 -
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
T* BOTTOM THICKNESS Cutting allowance of the bottom of a groove. The blank is regarded as 0.
E FEED RATE- AXIS -
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
Z APPROCH MOTION -
(a) Tool path
- 343 -
The following tool path is created to cut off the inside of a groove machining profile.
In-feed machining in the tool

radius direction
Approach Retract
<1> The tool approaches a point above the cutting start point of a groove machining profile.
<2> The tool cuts in the groove machining profile in the tool radius direction.
(i) Approach
Cutting start point

direction
Groove Ftm Ct + cutting allowance in the

machining profile tool axis direction
top surface
height Groove machining profile
Ft bottom surface height
<1> The tool moves to the position "groove machining profile top height + clearance (Ct) in the tool axis
- 344 -
<2> The tool moves to the position "groove machining profile bottom surface height + clearance (Ct) in
the tool axis direction" at the feedrate (Ftm) specified for cutting in the tool axis direction.
<3> The tool cuts in to the height of the groove machining profile bottom surface at the feedrate (Ft)
specified for cutting in the tool axis direction.
(ii) Retract

direction
Ftm
Groove machining profile

bottom surface height
<1> The tool retracts from the height of the groove machining profile bottom surface to the position
"groove machining profile top surface height + clearance (Ct) in the tool axis direction" at the
feedrate (Ftm) specified for movement in the tool axis direction.

This operation is the same as grooving (roughing).
See descriptions about grooving (roughing) for details.
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
NOTE
Tab ‘TOOL COND.’ is not enabled when bit 3 (GF3) of parameter No. 27081 = 1.
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
S* SIDE THICKNESS Cutting allowance of the side face. The blank is regarded as 0. (radius
B NUMBER OF FINISHING Number of cuts for finishing (positive value)
Remark) Depth of each cut = (side surplus thickness)/(number of finishing
cuts)
F FEED RATE-SING.CUT See the descriptions about Roughing: G1050.
E FEED RATE- AXIS -
- 345 -
NOTE
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
(COPY)
(positive value)
(COPY)
(positive value)
ESCAPE TYPE.
(COPY)
(initial value)
- 346 -
(a) Tool path
The side-face contour of a groove machining profile is finished.

The tool path for it is the same as for contouring (side-face finishing).
See descriptions about contouring (side-face finishing) for details.
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
A* APPROACH ANGLE -
Q ESCAPE TYPE -
Y* ESCAPE ANGLE -
Z APPROCH MOTION -
(a) Tool path

The top surface of a wall of a groove is chamfered. The tool path for it is the same as for contouring
(chamfering).
See descriptions abut contouring (chamfering) for details.
- 347 -

As fixed form figures for grooving, a "square", "circle", "track", and "radial grooves" are available. When any
of these pattern figures is specified, a groove with a specified width is cut along the contour.
NOTE
Each of a "square", "circle", and "track" is a closed figure. In actual grooving,
sets of a start point and end point are determined, and cutting from the start
point to the end point of a set is repeated.
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
pocketing
Remark) When grooving is selected as machining type, be sure to select
[GROOVE].
B BASE POSITION Z coordinate of the top surface or the bottom of the side face of a part to be
subject to contouring (in the tool axis direction)
negative value)
D GROOVE WIDTH Groove width (radius value, positive value)
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
B BASE POSITION -
L HEIGHT/DEPTH -
- 348 -
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
B BASE POSITION -
L HEIGHT/DEPTH -
H CENTER POINT (X) X coordinate of the center position of a left semicircle
V CENTER POINT (Y) Y coordinate of the center position of a left semicircle
positive value)
value)
(4) Input items of RADIAL GROOVE (XY plane) (G1223)
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
B BASE POSITION See the descriptions about SQUARE: G1220.
L HEIGHT/DEPTH -
H CENTER POINT (X) X coordinate of the center position of a circle where radial grooves are placed
V CENTER POINT (Y) Y coordinate of the center position of a circle where radial grooves are placed
U BETWEEN DISTANCE Distance between the centers of two semicircles along a radial groove (in a
track figure) (radius value, positive value)
D GROOVE WIDTH Width of a radial groove (radius value, positive value)
E* GROOVE ANGLE Groove inclination angle in an arc where radial grooves are placed, in the
radial direction (positive or negative value)
R RADIUS Radius of an arc where radial grooves are placed (radius value, positive
value)
A* START ANGLE Center angle of the first groove position relative to the X-axis (positive or
negative value)
REPEAT
Data item Meaning
C* PITCH ANGLE Center angle formed by two adjacent grooves (positive or negative value)
M* BROOVE NUMBER Number of grooves to be cut (positive value) (maximum value:100)

See Subsection 4.2.2, "Fixed Form Figure Blocks (XY Plane)", in Section 4.2, "FACING".
(6) Input items of LINE (XY plane) (G1224)
REPEAT
Data item Data item
B BASE POSITION See the descriptions about SQUARE: G1220.
L HEIGHT/DEPTH －
P STD PT OF POSITION Position of the X and Y coordinates of the reference position
1:Groove center 2:Groove end 3:Circle center at groove end
H BASE POINT (X) X coordinate value of the reference position
V BASE POINT (Y) Y coordinate value of the reference position
U GROOVE LENGTH Length of a groove
- 349 -
REPEAT
Data item Data item
D GROOVE WIDTH Width of a groove
W CUTTING DIRECTION Cutting direction
A ANGLE Inclination angle with respect to STD PT OF POSITION

following G codes.

Radial groove : G1323 (YZ plane)
Radial groove : G1523 (XC plane, polar coordinate interpolation plane)
NOTE
note the following:
beforehand.
respectively.
- 350 -
4.6.4 XC-plane Circumferential Groove Figure

“XC-PLANE CIRCUMFERENTIAL GROOVE FIGURE” can be selected as the figure for grooving
cycle. By using the figure, it is possible to execute grooving machining on end face with in-feed cutting
in tool radius.
Though the machining figure is same as existing figure “C-AXIS GROOVE ON FACE”, different from
“C-AXIS GROOVE ON FACE”, it is possible to machine the figure with a tool whose radius is smaller
than the groove width.
In-feed cutting in tool radius Tool

Tool path
NOTE
The option “Polar coordinate interpolation” is necessary to use this function.
(1) Cycle Command of XC-Plane Circumferential Grooving

One of following machining command block and circumferential Groove figure must be executed to
XC-plane circumferential grooving is executed.
Grooving
G1050 Roughing
G1053 Chamfering
Fixed-figure block G1526 Circumferential groove
(XC plane, end face)
(2) Selection of XC-plane Circumferential Groove Figure Command

It is possible to select XC-plane circumferential groove figure from the menu of grooving figure.
- 351 -
(3) Input data for XC-Plane Circumferential Grooving

The items of XC-plane circumferential groove figure are followings.
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
B BASE POSITION Z coordinate of the bottom of the groove or the top surface of the
work piece subject to grooving (in the tool axis direction)
L HEIGHT/DEPTH Input by Depth:
When the top surface of the work piece is selected as the
BASE POSITION, then specify the distance to the bottom of
the groove by using a negative value (radius value).
Input by Height:
When the bottom of the groove is selected as the BASE
POSITION, then specify the distance to the top surface of the
groove by using a positive value (radius value).
X X AXIS POS.(RAD.) X coordinate of the center line of the groove (radius value)
Q GROOVE ANGLE Center angle formed by the start point (tool center) and end point
(tool center) of the groove (positive or negative value)
REPEAT
Data item Meaning
C* PITCH ANGLE Center angle formed by the start points (tool centers) of two
adjacent grooves (positive or negative value)
M* GROOVE NUMBER Number of grooves to be cut (positive value) (maximum
value:100)
FACE POSIT
Data item Meaning
Z FACE POSITION [+FACE ]: Refer to the figure below (+ end face).
[-FACE ]: Refer to the figure below (- end face).
(-) Depth Depth (-)
+Z +Z
+ end face - end face
- 352 -
(-) Depth Depth (-)
+Z +Z
ROT. AXIS
Data item Meaning
Y ROTATION AXIS NAME When bit 1 (P1) of parameter No.27001 = 1
[A]: The rotation axis is the A-axis.
[B]: The rotation axis is the B-axis.
[E]: The rotation axis is the E-axis.
NOTE)
If multiple bits of the above parameter are set, then only the greatest
number bit is enabled.
e.g.) If all bits are set, then [C] and [E] are visible.
THICKNESS
Data item Meaning
K BOTTOM THICKNESS Cutting allowance of the bottom in side face machining (radius
S SIDE THICKNESS Cutting allowance of the side face (radius value, positive value)
Note
1 Displaying “FACE POSIT” tab requires setting up parameter No.27000#4 = 1.
2 Displaying “ROT. AXIS” tab requires setting up parameter No.27001#0 = 1.
3 Displaying “THICKNESS” tab requires setting up parameter No.27095#0 = 1.
(3) Tool Path of XC-Plane Circumferential Grooving

If XC circumferential grooving is executed, the followings movements are commanded.
<1> Polar coordinate interpolation start G12.1 is commanded.

<2> The tool moves to the approach position by cutting feed. The XC approach position is the center of
one of the two semicircles of the groove figure. The Z position does not change. The semicircle of
the approach position is the semicircle having its center coinciding with the position specified by the
arguments “X AXIS POS” and “START ANGLE” of G1526.
<3> The tool moves, along Z, to the clearance position by cutting feed.
- 353 -
<4> The workspace is cut in tool axis direction by specified cut depth of axis by cutting feed.
<5> The tool cuts until the center of the other semicircle, moving counterclockwise by Cutting feed.
<6> The workpiece is cut clockwise in tool radius direction by the specified cut depth of radius by cutting
feed.
<7>Steps <2>-<6> are repeated until the tool reaches the commanded groove depth and all material has
been removed. (Cutting feed)
<8> After finished machining of groove figure, the tool moves to the clearance point in cutting feed.
<9> Polar coordinate interpolation end G13.1 is commanded.
<2> <1>
<9> <3>
<8> <6> Z
<5> X
C
<4>
<7>
NOTE
1 The tool paths are same as the case the same groove figure is created by the
XC plane arbitrary figure.
2 G12.1 and G13.1 are commanded, when the parameter No.27000#2 is set to be
1.

When an arbitrary figure for grooving is input, data such as a figure type and machining reference position is
ARBITRARY FIGURES".
When an arbitrary figure is specified for grooving, a groove with a specified width is cut along the arbitrary
figure line.
ELEMENT
Data item Meaning
pocketing
Remark) When grooving is selected as machining type, be sure to select
[GROOVE].
- 354 -
ELEMENT
Data item Meaning
Z BASE POSITION Z coordinate of the bottom of a groove or the top surface of a workpiece
D HEIGHT/DEPTH When the top surface of a workpiece is selected as the BASE POSITION,
value). → Height
W* GROOVE WIDTH Groove width (radius value, positive value)

each element.

The data to be set for the YZ, XC, ZC, XA planes is the same as for the XY plane except that the XY

NOTE
note the following:
beforehand.
respectively.
- 355 -
NOTE
note the following:
beforehand.
4.7 ENGRAVING CYCLE

It is possible to engrave alphanumeric characters and some special character.
Machining example
(Serial number stamps of parts)
4.7.1 Operation
The operations to create an engraving cycle are showed below.
(1) Select "ENGRAVING" on the SPECIAL cycle menu of the milling cycle menu window.
(2) The data input window for Engraving Cycle appears.
(3) There are four tabs in the data input window. Input the data in each tab.
- 356 -
4.7.2 Input Item

Input items of Engraving Cycle are as follows.
(1) [ TOOL COND. ] Tab
TOOL COND.
Data item Meaning
D TOOL DIAMETER Tool diameter of Ball end mill (drill)
NOTE
[TOOL COND.] tab is displayed when the parameter No.27002#0 is 1.
(2) [ CUT COND.] Tab
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
C CLEARANCE Distance between the surface of work and cutting start point in direction of tool
axis
F FEED RATE-RADIUS Feed speed when cutting in direction of tool radius
E FEED RATE-AXIS Feed speed when cutting in direction of tool axis
P PLANE SELECT Cutting plane :
1= XY plane
2= YZ plane
3 =XC plane (Polar coordinate interpolation plane)
4 =ZC plane (Cylinder plane)
NOTE
1 The plane can be selected according to the parameter No.27004.
(3) [ POSITION ] Tab

Each input item of the tab [POSITION] is as follows.
POSITION
Data item Meaning
H START PT.(1ST AXIS) Position of the first character along the first axis (Note1)
V START PT.(2ND AXIS) Position of the first character along the second axis (Note1)
B BASE POSITION Coordinates value of surface of work
L CHAR. DEPTH Depth of the character
U CHAR. SIZE Height of the character (Note2)
A ANGLE Angle of character (Note3)
1=0°, 2=90°, 3=180°, 4=270°
Z FACE POSITION Position for face (Note4)
1= +FACE, 2= -FACE
- 357 -
NOTE
1 The position of beginning character can be specified.
Second axis
ABC
First axis
2 The size of the character can be specified. And height and width of the character
is the same size.
Width
Height
ABC Character size
3 Angle (0°/90°/180°/270°) of the character can be specified. The center of rotation

is the start point of the first character.
ABC
Center of Rotation
ABC First axis First axis

0° 90°
First axis First axis

ABC
180°
270°
4 The input item [face position] is displayed, when all the following conditions are
meet.
(1) (MC4) of parameter No.27000#4 sets 1.
(2) The XY plane or the XC plane is selected by a plane selection of the cutting
condition tab.
(4) [ STRING ] Tab
STRING
Data item Meaning
- STRING String to be engraved (80 characters maximum)
(a) The STRING is input directly from the MDI key.

(b) The characters input with the MDI key are immediately displayed into the guidance window.
- 358 -
4.7.3 Enable Characters

Character which can be engraved are as follows.
• Alphabet : A-Z
• Number : 0-9
• Special Character : ? , @#=*+ /. SP: ‘_“ <>
NOTE
When an incorrect character is inserted into the string, then the warning
message "The format is not correct" appears. The corresponding character is
displayed as red character. All characters, from the beginning of the string until
the incorrect characters, are automatically deleted.
4.7.4 Format of G4 Digit Cycle for Engraving Cycle

The format of Engraving Cycle is as follows. The strings specified in data input window are outputted as
a comment.
G1025 Dd Cc Ff Ee Pp Hh Vv Bb Ll Uu Aa(*************);
4.7.5 Tool Path of Engraving Cycle

The tool paths of Engraving Cycle are as follows.
(1) The tool moves to the start point of the first character in rapid traverse in the direction of the tool
radius.
(2) Next, the tool moves to the position in rapid traverse (base position (B) + clearance (C)) in the
direction of the tool axis.
(3) The tool moves to the position (base position (B) - character depth (L)) in cutting feedrate (E) in the
direction of the tool axis.
(4) One character of the string (*****) is engraved in the direction of the tool radius by cutting feedrate
(F) along the shape of the character. If the tool cannot engrave the character in one stroke, then the
tool escapes at the position (base position (B) + clearance (C)), and moves to another edge of the
character, and continues engraving.
(5) The tool moves to the position (base position (B) + clearance (C)) in cutting feedrate (E) in the
direction of the tool axis after cutting of one character.
(6) Steps from (1) to (5) are repeated for all the characters.
- 359 -
Example) For the XY plane (It is a stamp as for A and B)

size (U) size (U)
(1) (4) (5),(6)

(4)
(1) size (U)
(5), (6)
Y
(2) (3) (2) (3)
X
(1)
(2) (1)
(2) (6)
Z (6)
(3)
(3) (4), (5)
(4), (5)
X
The width of the groove of the character is equal to the tool diameter used to engrave the characters . The
shape of the characters is as follows.
4.7.6 Restrictions
Engraving Cycle has the following restrictions.
(1) The font of the character cannot be changed.

(2) The tools that can be selected with Engraving Cycle are only drilling tool and ball-end-mill tool.
(3) Engraving cycle during DNC operation and Engraving Cycle in a subprogram called from M198
cannot be executed. The following alarm appears.
Series 0i-C and Series 16i/18i/21i-B: “3014 WRONG FIGURE DATA”
Series 0i-F/0i-D and Series 30i/31i/32i: “3514 WRONG FIGURE DATA”
- 360 -
4.8 THREAD MILLING CYCLE

Thread milling cuts a thread by using the Helical interpolation function and moving the tool, called thread
mill cutter, along a spiral.
Thread mill cutter : It’s different from

Tapping tool. Thread is not spiral
like the tapping tool and independent
each other.
Z
Y
Tool moves in spiral by using Helical interpolation.

(Moving to the tool axis direction by thread lead)
Machining Movements of Thread milling cycle
NOTE
This function requires Helical interpolation Optional Function.
4.8.1 Screens and Operations

In case this function is activated, in hole machining TAB of milling cycle menu, thread milling menu is
displayed.
HOLE MACH.
4. REAMING
5. BORING
6. FINE BORING
7. BACK BORING
8. THREAD MILLING
When the menu “THREAD MILLING” is selected, the data input screen of the thread milling cycle is
displayed.
- 361 -
4.8.2 Input Items of Thread Milling

Input items of thread milling cycle (G1010) are as follows.
TOOL CONDITION
Data item Meaning
D TOOL DIAMETER Diameter of thread milling tool
FIGURE
Data item Meaning
U THREAD DIAMETER Thread diameter
M RIGHT HAND /LEFT M=1 Right hand thread
HAND THREAD M=2 Left hand thread
R THREAD TYPE R=1 Metric
R=2 Unified
T THREAD LEAD Tread lead. This item is displayed only in case thread type is “Metric”.
S NUMBER OF THREAD Number of thread. This item is displayed only in case thread type is “Unified”.
CUT COND-1
Data item Meaning
X MACHINING TYPE X=1, one revolution
X=2, the number of revolutions is equal to the number of threads
X=3 multiple revolutions
Y NUMBER OF THREAD Thread Number of tool
OF TOOL This item is displayed in case Machining type X is equal to 3. Set data in order
to satisfy all the following conditions.
Y > Parameter No.27451 overlapped amount
Y > Parameter No.27452 start clearance
ABS(Cut depth(L)) ≧ ( Y x Thread Lead(T) )
I RETURN MODE I=1 I point-1
When the tool moves between the holes, the tool return to R-point position.
Last time, return to I-point.
I=2 I point-2
When the tool moves between the holes, the tool returns to I-point.
I=3 R point
When the tool moves between the holes, the tool returns to R-point.
J I POINT I point position
This item is displayed only in case Return mode is ”I point-1” or “2”
L CUT DEPTH Cut depth of thread milling
In case MACHINING TYPE is ‘THRD REV.’ or ‘MULTI REV.’, set data in order
to satisfy the following condition.
(Number of thread of tool “Y” x Thread lead ”T”) ≦ ABS”L”
C CLEARANCE Clearance amount from work surface.
In case MACHINING TYPE is ‘THRD REV.’ or ‘MULTI REV.’, set data in order
to satisfy the following condition.
C ≧ (Thread lead”T”/4＋Parameter ”start clearance” x Thread lead ”T”)
See “Note” bellow.
V FEED RATE OF TOOL -
AXIS
F FEED RATE OF -
THREADING
Z APPROACH MOTION Z=2 Simultaneous 2 axes
Z=3 Simultaneous 3 axes
- 362 -
Note: Thread Lead
When unified thread is specified in Thread Type, Thread Lead is calculated from the entered
Number of Thread.
CUT COND-2
Data item Meaning
W UP CUT/DOWN CUT W=1 Up cut
W=2 Down cut
K END CLEARANCE -
4.8.3 Specifiable Combinations of Figure

Specifiable combinations of figure and thread milling cycle are as follows.
Kind of figure (Hole pattern) Hole Machining Thread milling cycle

XY plane points ○ ○
XY plane points on the line “Equal intervals” ○ ○
XY plane points on the line ”Not equal intervals” ○ ○
XY plane points on the grid ○ ○
XY plane points on the square ○ ○
XY plane points on the circle ○ ○
XY plane points on the arc “equal intervals” ○ ○
XY plane points on the arc “Not equal intervals” ○ ○
YZ plane points ○ ○
YZ plane points on the line “Equal intervals” ○ ○
YZ plane points on the line “Not Equal intervals” ○ ○
YZ plane points on the grid ○ ○
YZ plane points on the square ○ ○
YZ plane points on the circle ○ ○
YZ plane points on the arc “equal intervals” ○ ○
YZ plane points on the arc “Not equal intervals” ○ ○
C axis hole in End face ”on the arc” ○ ×
C axis hole in End face ”points” ○ ×
C axis hole in Cylinder ”on the arc” ○ ×
C axis hole in Cylinder ”points” ○ ×
A axis hole in Cylinder ”on the arc” ○ ×
A axis hole in Cylinder ”points” ○ ×
B axis hole in Cylinder ”on the arc” ○ ×
B axis hole in Cylinder ”points” ○ ×
4.8.4 Tool Kind

In the thread milling cycle, specify a tapping tool as the Tool Kind.
4.8.5 Basic Motions of Tool

The basic motions of thread milling are the following steps from <1> to <4>.
<1> Approach with tangential arc in Helical interpolation

<2> Thread cutting in Helical interpolation
<3> Cutting end clearance in Helical interpolation
<4> Escape in Helical interpolation
- 363 -
About the amount of tool movement with tool direction in approach arc/ escape
arc
In approach with tangential arc, as the tool approaches from the center of hole along the path of Helical
interpolation for threading, the amount of the tool movement along the tool axis direction is L/4 (L:
thread pitch).
In escape with tangential arc, as the tool escapes to the center of hole along the path of Helical
interpolation, the amount of the tool movement along the tool axis direction is L/4, too.
[Approach] [Cutting thread, [Escape]

End clearance]
<1>
L/4
L: Thread Lead
<2> Thread
Cutting
Z Cutting
End clearance
<3>
<4> L/4
X
<1>
<2>
Y <4>
<3>
X
4.8.6 Machining Type

In thread milling cycle, there are three machining type as follows.
(1) Machining type 1

The cycle is completed by executing one spiral movement only.
The cycle is completed by executing a number of spirals equal to the number of programmed
threads.
Tool moves in parallel to the tool axis by the length of tool. Then, the tool approaches to the wall of
hole and performs threading.
The above motions are repeated until the tool reaches to the bottom of hole.
- 364 -
4.8.7 Pattern of Tool Path

Each machining type has 4 patterns of the tool path according to the combination of the motion of the tool
along the tool axis direction”+/-” and the direction of the tool along the spiral is ”CW/CCW” .
Thread Figure and Cutting Method setting Tool Path

End Face Right Hand Screw Up Cut Movement Movement Direction
Position or or Direction of Tool of Tool Radius
Left Hand Screw Down Cut Axis Direction Direction
Right Hand Screw Up Cut - Direction CW
Left Hand Screw Down Cut - Direction CCW
+ End Face
Right Hand Screw Down Cut + Direction CCW
Left Hand Screw Up Cut + Direction CW
Right Hand Screw Up Cut + Direction CCW
Left Hand Screw Down Cut + Direction CW
- End Face
Right Hand Screw Down Cut - Direction CW
Left Hand Screw Up Cut - Direction CCW
4.8.8 Tool Path (Machining Type 1)

Tool paths in case of machining type 1 generate following movements. The following explanations are in
case that the tool moves to -Z-axis direction in cutting feed rotating CW in helical interpolation.
Tool path of Helical interpolation
<1>
<2>
<9>
Reference position Cut

<8> depth
<3>
Z
Y <3>
<4>
Lead
X ×1/4
<4> Z <5>
<5> Lead
Lead X
End clearance <6>
<7> <6> Lead
<7> ×1/4
<5>
“Lead x1/4” means
the Z-axis distance in <1> <4> <9>
case of approach and
escape motion
<7> <6>
Y
<1> Approach to the I-point of the center of hole

<2> Move to the R-point ”=clearance position” in rapid.
<3> Move to the “Reference position –Cut depth + Lead +(Leadx1/4)” in cutting feed rate.
<4> In order to approach to the start point of thread, move CW in Helical interpolation. And then, move
to the “-Z” direction by “Lead/4”
<5> To execute the threads, the tool moves CW in Helical interpolation and move to the ”-Z” direction
by the lead.
- 365 -
<6> Move CW in Helical interpolation by the amount of the end clearance.

<7> In order to return to the center of hole, the tool moves CW in Helical interpolation and moves to the
“-Z” direction by “Lead/4”.
<8> Move to the I-point or R-point in rapid. In case of movements to the next hole position, the tool
moves to the R-point. In other case, it moves to the I-point.
<9> The tool moves to the next hole position in rapid.

Tool paths in case of machining type 2 generate as follows. The following explanations are in case that
the tool moves to -Z-axis direction in cutting feed with CW in helical interpolation.
Tool path in Helical interpolation
<4> Lead
Start clearance＋α ×1/4
<1> <2> <10>
<3>
<4>
Reference position
Cut depth
Z <5>
Y
<5>
<6> Z ＋
X
<6>
Lead
X
Lead
End clearance
<9>
<8> <8> <7> Lead
<7> ×1/4

<6>
the Z-axis distance in case of
approach and escape motion <4> <10>
Y
<8> <7>
X
<1> Approach to the I-point of the center of hole

<3> Move to the “Reference position +(Start clearance x Lead) + α + (Lead/4)” in cutting feed rate.
Start clearance is used in order to cut fine the thread start point on the work face. Start clearance is
specified by the parameter No.27452.
<4> In order to approach to the position “Reference position + Start clearance + α ” start point of thread,
move CW in Helical interpolation. And then, move to the “-Z” direction by “Lead/4”
<5> To execute the threads, the tool moves CW in Helical interpolation. And then, it moves to the ”-Z”
direction by the lead.
<6> Repeat the motion <5> until tool reaches to the Cut depth.
<7> Move CW in Helical interpolation by the amount of the end clearance.
<9> The tool moves to the I-point or R-point in rapid. In case of movement to the next hole position, the
tool moves to the R-point. In other cases, the tool moves to the I-point.
<10> The tool moves to the next hole position in rapid
- 366 -
On the meaning of α
By cutting from the height of (work surface + α), the tool movement of the tool
axis direction is adjusted in order to position the tool bottom at the position (work
surface - CUT DEPTH) when the tool finishes cutting the last lead of the thread.

Tool paths in case of machining type 3 generate as follows. The following explanations are in case that a
tool moves to -Z-axis direction in cutting feed with rotating CW in helical interpolation.
Tool path in Helical interpolation
Cutting depth
(Lead × Number
of thread)
<1> <3>
<2>
<13>
Cut <4>
<3> <4> Lead
Reference position depth
×1/4
Lead
<5> <5>
<7> <6>
Z
Y <8> Z <6>
<7>
X Lead
X ×1/4
<9>
<12> <8>
<11> End clearance
<10> Lead×1/4
<5>
<1> <4> <13>
the Z-axis distance in case Y <11>
of approach and escape
motion
X
<1> Approach to the I-point of the center of hole.

<3> Move to the “Reference position -(Lead x Number of thread) +Lead+(Start clearance x
Lead)+(Lead/4)” in cutting feed rate.
<4> In order to approach to the start point of thread, move CW in Helical interpolation and move to
the“-Z” direction by “Lead/4”.
<5> To execute the threads, the tool moves CW in Helical interpolation and moves to the”-Z” direction
by the lead.
<7> From the end point of <6> to the “-Z” direction, the tool moves by the amount “Lead x ((number of
thread)-1-(overlapped number of thread))–Lead/4-Lead/4”.
The Number of overlapped of threads depends on the parameter No.27451.
<8> Repeat the motion <4> through <7>.
<9> In the motion <5>, Helical interpolation is performed until tool reaches the cut depth, and then stops
the repetition.
<10> The tool moves CW in Helical interpolation by the amount of end clearance.
- 367 -
<12> The tool moves to the I-point or R-point in rapid. In case of movement to the next hole position, it
moves to the R-point. In other case, it moves to the I-point.
<13> The tool moves to the next hole position in rapid.
NOTE
At the motions <9> and <10>, in case that tool moves over “Cutting depth + End
clearance” as the figure below, the cutting start point of the thread is adjusted so
that the thread is cut correctly.
Cutting depth
End clearance
← Zb
← Za
In case that tool moves to the position “Za” by

rotating 1 revolution, the cutting start point of the
thread is adjusted in order to finish cutting at position
“Zb”.
4.8.11 Machining Simulation Screen

In animated drawing of machining simulation, treads are not displayed on the wall of hole which threads
are cut after threading.
In drawing during machining, tool path of thread milling cycle is displayed in spiral.
4.8.12 Parameters
The following parameters are concerning to this function.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27095 TRM
TRM Thread milling cycle is

0: Not available.
1: Available.
27451 Over lapped amount for thread milling cycle

Set over lapped amount for thread milling cycle.
- 368 -
27452 Start clearance for thread milling cycle
Set start clearance for thread milling cycle.
4.9 OUTER THREAD MILLING CYCLE

The thread can be machined by moving tool along surface of work-piece in helical interpolation.
It’s possible to machine a thread on the work-piece with large radius.

In order to use this function, helical interpolation function is needed.
Helical interpolation function is optional function in FS30i-A/FS30i-B/FS0i-TD.
4.9.1 Machining Types

The following three machining types can be selected.

Tool moves helically 1 revolution along the surface of work-piece. All threads are cut in 1
revolution of tool.

Tool cuts thread as it moves helically revolutions with number of thread along the surface of
work-piece.
- 369 -

<1> Tool moves helically 1 revolution along the surface of work-piece. And, tool cuts threads
equals to the number of tool edge.
<2> Once tool removes from work-piece, tool moves along the tool axis direction by the distance
equal to the length of tool edge.
<3> Again, tool approaches to work-piece. Then continuation of threading <2> is performed.
<4> From <1> through <3> is repeated by the thread length.
4.9.2 Method of Program Creation

In case that this function is available, “OUTER THREAD MILLING” menu is displayed on the
[SPECIAL] tab of milling cycle menu screen.
When the menu “OUTER THREAD MILLING” is selected, the creation screen of the outer thread
milling cycle is displayed.
By inputting data according to the guidance window, the program of thread milling cycle is created.
- 370 -
4.9.3 Outer Thread Milling Cycle Command

Outer thread milling cycle is commanded in the following format.
G1026 Dd Xx Cc Ff Vv Aa Rr Zz Qq Ww Yy Uu Pp Ii Jj Ss Ee Bb Nn Tt Mm Hh Ll
TOOL CONDITION
Input item Meaning
D TOOL DIAMETER Diameter of thread milling tool.
CUTTING CONDITION
Input item Meaning
X MACHINING TYPE Machining type.
X=1: Type1
X=2: Type2
X=3: Type3
C CLEARANCE Clearance amount.
In case of “START PT.(3RD AXIS)” > “END PT.(3 RD AXIS)”,
Specify clearance amount from the position “START PT.(3 RD AXIS)”.
In case of X=2,
Specify clearance amount from the position “START PT.(3RD AXIS) +
RUN-UP)”.
In case of “START PT.(3RD AXIS)” < “END PT.(3RD AXIS)”,
Specify clearance amount from “END PT.(3RD AXIS)”.
F FEED RATE THREAD Feed rate of threading
V MOVE SPEED OF AXIS Speed of moving tool to the tool-axis direction.
In case of specifying 0, Rapid feed rate is set.
A CUTTING START ANGLE Angle of starting threading.
R START/ESC RADIUS Radius of the approach or escape.
Z APROACH MOTION Approach motion of tool,
Z=2: simultaneous 2 axes
Z=3: simultaneous 3 axes
Q OVERRUN ANGLE Angle of OVERRUN.
W RUN-UP Amount of Running up.
Specify the amount from the position START PT.(3RD AXIS).
Specify only in case of X=2 and START PT.(3RD AXIS) > END PT.(3RD
AXIS).
Y THREAD NUM. OF TOOL Thread number of tool.
Specify only in case of X=3.
U MOVE SPEED OF RAD Speed of moving to the tool radius direction.
Specify only in case of X=3.
- 371 -
POSITION
Input item Meaning
P PLANE SELECTION Cutting plane.
P=1 : XY plane
P=2 : YZ plane
I CENTER PT. (1ST AXIS) Center point of threading (1’st axis)
J CENTER PT. (2ND AXIS) Center point of threading (2’nd axis)
S START PT. (3RD AXIS) Start point of threading (3’rd axis)
In case of START PT.(3RD AXIS) < END PT.(3RD AXIS),
Specify the start point included “incorrect thread length”.
E END PT. (3RD AXIS) End point of threading (3’rd axis)
B FACE POS. End face position.
B=1 : +End face
B=2 : -End face
Specify only in case of P=1(XY plane) & the parameter No.27000#4=1.
FIGURE
Input item Meaning
N RIGHT-HAND/LEFT-HAND Figure of threading
THREAD N=1 : Right-hand thread
N=2 : Left-hand thread
T THREAD TYPE Kind of threading
T=1 : Metric thread
T=2 : Unified thread
M THREAD DIAMETER Diameter of threading (Top of thread)
H THREAD DEPTH Depth of threading
L THREAD LEAD Lead of threading
Specify only in case of T=1
THREAD NUMBER Number of threading per 1inch.
Specify only in case of T=2.
4.9.4 Tool Type

In outer thread milling cycle, specify “Tapping Tool” as the tool type.
4.9.5 Machining Simulation

Animated drawing and tool path drawing are displayed as follows.
- 372 -
In animated drawing, machined surface of work-piece is displayed with gray color, and the shape of
thread is not displayed.
Then the motion which tool moves around work-piece is not displayed.
4.9.6 Drawing-During-Machining
The drawing-during-machining is displayed as follows.
4.9.7 Parameters
The following parameters are concerning to this function.
<1> Parameter No.27459

Angle of machining start/escape for outer thread milling cycle
<2> Parameter No.27464
Number of overlapped threads in Machining type 3 for outer thread milling cycle
4.9.8 Alarms
Alarms related to this function are as follows.
Alarm Message Content
No.
0021 ILLEGAL PLANE SELECT Helical interpolation function is not available.
WRONG CUTTING In the cutting condition, there is the following mistake.
CONDITION - In “CUTTING START ANGLE”, the value lower than 0 or grater
than 360 is entered.
- Tool interferes work-piece at the Start point for moving to the
machining start point in arc.
[“Distance from Center point to Start point for moving to the
3507
machining start point in arc”-”TOOL DIAMETER/2.0”] < ”THREAD
DIAMETER/2.0”
- In “RUN-UP”, the value lower than 0 or grater than 99999999.0 is
entered.
- In “OVERRUN ANGLE”, the value lower than 0 or grater than 360
is entered.
NO MACHINING CYCLE Program is incorrect.
3510
BLOCK
3511 UNCOMBINED G-CODE Outer thread milling cycle is not available.
- 373 -

No.
WRONG FIGURE DATA In the figure data, there is the following mistake.
- In “L THREAD/R THREAD”, the value except 1 or 2 is entered.
- Address of “L THREAD/R THREAD” is not entered.
- In “THREAD TYPE”, the value except 1 or 2 is entered.
- Address of “THREAD TYPE” is not entered.
- In “THREAD DEPTH”, the value lower than 0 or grater than
thread diameter is entered.
3514 - In ”START PT.” and “END PT.”, the same value is entered.
- Distance between “START PT.” And “END PT.” Is lower than 1
lead.
- In case of “MACHINING TYPE”=3, the area smaller than
“THREAD NUM. OF TOOL”*”THREAD LEAD” cannot be
machined.
(Distance of [“START PT. – END PT.] < “THREAD NUM. OF
TOOL”*”THREAD LEAD”)
3516 NO NECESSARY ADDRESS Necessary address is not entered.
WRONG PARAMETER In setting parameters, there is following mistake.
SETTING - In the parameter “Angle of machining start/escape”, the value
3525 lower than 0 or grater than 360 is entered.
- In the parameter “Number of overlapped threads”, the value lower
than 0 is entered.
WRONG SELECTING THE In “PLANE SELECTION”, the value except 1 or 2 is entered.
3529
PLANE
WRONG MACHINING TYPE In “MACHINING TYPE”, the value except 1 to 3 is entered or address
3530
of “MCHINING TYPE” is not entered.
WRONG THREADING LEAD In “THREAD LEAD”, the value lower than 0 or grater than 99999999.0
3535
is entered.
3544 WRONG TOOL DIAMETER In “TOOL DIAMETER”, invalid value is entered.
WRONG CLEARANCE In “CLEARANCE”, the value lower than 0 or grater than 99999999.0 is
3548
entered.
WRONG FEED RATE In feed rate, there is the following mistake.
- In “FEED RATE THREAD” or “MOVE SPEED OF RAD”, the
3550 value lower than 0 or grater than 99999999.0 is entered.
- In “MOVE SPEED OF AXIS”, the value lower than 0 or grater
than 99999999.0 is entered.
WRONG APPROACH In the data of approach, there is the following mistake.
SETTING - In “START/ESC RADIUS”, the value lower than 0 or grater than
3552
99999999.0 is entered.
- In “APROACH MOTION”, the value except 2 or 3 is entered.
TOOL DATA IS SHORT The following tool data is short.
3564 - Necessary tool data for executing outer thread milling cycle
- Tool compensation No.
3565 WRONG TOOL TYPE Wrong tool is selected.
WRONG COORDINATE In the position, there is the following mistake.
POSITION - In “CENTER PT.(1st AXIS)”, the value grater than 99999999.0 or
lower than -99999999.0 is entered.
- In “CENTER PT.(2nd AXIS)”, the value grater than 99999999.0 or
3586 lower than -99999999.0 is entered.
- In “START PT.(3rd AXIS)”, the value grater than 99999999.0 or
- In “END PT.(3rd AXIS)”, the value grater than 99999999.0 or
WRONG THREAD/HOLE In “THREAD DIAMETER”, the value lower than 0 or grater than
3590
DIAMETER 99999999.0 is entered.
- 374 -

No.
WRONG THREAD NUMBER In “THREAD NUMBER”, there is the following mistake.
- In case of unified thread, the value lower than 0 or grater than
99999999.0 is entered in the “THREAD NUMBER”
- In “THREAD NUM. OF TOOL”, the value lower than 1 or grater
3591
than 32767 is entered.
- In case of “MACHINING TYPE”=3, the value of “THREAD
NUMBER” lower than the parameter “Number of overlapped
threads” is entered.
3595 WRONG FACE POSITION In “FACE POS.”, the value except 1 or 2 is entered.
4.10 REAR END FACING BY MILLING
4.10.1 Rear End Facing

By setting bit 4 of parameter No. 27000 to 1, the input item "FACE POSITION" is displayed on the
figure menu for milling below. By entering this data, rear end facing is enabled.
(1) Arbitrary-figure (XY plane) - Start point : G1200

(2) Hole position (XY plane) - Random points : G1210
(3) Hole position (XY plane) - Linear points (same interval) : G1211
(4) Hole position (XY plane) - Linear points (different interval) : G1212
(5) Hole position (XY plane) - Grid points : G1213
(6) Hole position (XY plane) - Rectangle points : G1214
(7) Hole position (XY plane) - Circle points : G1215
(8) Hole position (XY plane) - Arc points (same interval): G1216
(9) Hole position (XY plane) - Arc points (different interval) : G1217
(10) Fixed-figure (XY plane) - Rectangle : G1220
(11) Fixed-figure (XY plane) - Circle : G1221
(12) Fixed-figure (XY plane) - Track : G1222
(13) Fixed-figure (XY plane) - Radial groove : G1223
(14) Arbitrary-figure (XC plane) - Start point : G1500
(15) Fixed-figure (XC plane) - Rectangle : G1520
(16) Fixed-figure (XC plane) - Circle : G1521
(17) Fixed-figure (XC plane) - Track : G1522
(18) Fixed-figure (XC plane) - Radial groove : G1523
(19) C-axis groove on the polar coordinate plane: G1570
(20) X-axis groove on the polar coordinate plane : G1571
(21) C-axis hole on the polar coordinate plane (circle points) : G1572
(22) C-axis hole on the polar coordinate plane (random points) : G1573
(1) Input items of XC-C AXIS GROOVE (G1570)
FACE POSIT
Data item Meaning
Z FACE POSITION [+FACE ]: References the figure below (+ end face).
[-FACE ]: References the figure below (- end face).
- 375 -
(-) Depth Depth (-)
+Z +Z
+ end face - end face
(-) Depth Depth (-)
+Z +Z
4.11 MIRROR / ROTATION / SCALING / FIGURE COPY

COMMAND
New menus for mirror, rotation and scaling are added to COORD CONV tab in START window.
REPETITION tab was added to START window, and in this tab, figure copy menu of rotation and linear
movement menus are added.
NOTE
1 These functions are available on 16i/18i/21i-MB. On Series 30i for lathe machine
and G-code system A, scaling and scaling cancel cannot be used.
2 In order to use these functions, milling cycle machining option is needed on
Series 16i/18i/21i-B. On Series 30i, turning or milling cycle machining option is
needed.
3 In order to use these functions, corresponding CNC option for each function is
needed.
- 376 -
4.11.1 Coordinate Conversion (Mirror Image)

COORDINATE CONVERSION
G1980 COORDINATE COBVERSION (MIRROR IMAGE)
G1981 COORDINATE CONVERSION CANCEL (MIRRORIMAGE)
NOTE
1 Coordinate conversion cancel (mirror image) must be done after finishing the
machining using coordinate conversion (mirror image).
2 In order to use this function, set parameters No.27000#6(MC6) to 0.
3 Programmable mirror image option is needed for this function.
COORDINATE CONVERSION (MIRROR IMAGE) : G1980

Mirror image can be set by entering the symmetry axis data.
COORDINATE CONVERSION (MIRROR IMAGE) - INSERT

Data item Meaning
X SYMMETRY AXIS X X coordinate of mirror image symmetry axis
Y SYMMETRY AXIS Y Y coordinate of mirror image symmetry axis
Z SYMMETRY AXIS Z Z coordinate of mirror image symmetry axis
COORDINATE CONVERSION CANCEL (MIRROR IMAGE) : G1981

Cancel mirror image.
COORDINATE CONVERSION CANCEL (MIRROR IMAGE) - INSERT

Data item Meaning
X CANCEL X DO : Cancel mirror image of X-axis
Y CANCEL Y DO : Cancel mirror image of Y-axis
Z CANCEL Z DO : Cancel mirror image of Z-axis
4.11.2 Coordinate Conversion (Rotation)

G1957 COORDINATE CONVERSION (ROTATION)
G1958 COORDINATE CONVERSION CANCEL (ROTATION)
NOTE
1 Coordinate conversion cancel (rotation) must be done after finishing the
machining using coordinate conversion (rotation).
2 In order to use this function, set parameters No.27000#6(MC6) to 0.
3 Coordinate rotation option is needed for this function.
XY PLANE COORDINATE CONVERSION (ROTATION) : G1957

Coordinate rotation on XY plane can be set by entering the center point and angle data.
COORDINATE CONVERSION (ROTATION) - INSERT

Data item Meaning
L PLANE SELECTION Rotation plane (only XY can be set)
X CENTER X OF ROTATION Center point X coordinate of rotation
Y CENTER Y OF ROTATION Center point Y coordinate of rotation
R ANGLE Rotation angle
- 377 -
ZX PLANE COORDINATE CONVERSION (ROTATION) : G1957

Coordinate rotation on ZX plane can be set by entering the center point and angle data.
COORDINATE CONVERSION (ROTATTION) - INSERT

Data item Meaning
L PLANE SELECTION Rotation plane (only ZX can be set)
Z CENTER Z OF ROTATION Center point Z coordinate of rotation
YZ PLANE COORDINATE CONVERSION (ROTATION) : G1957

Coordinate rotation on YZ plane can be set by entering the center point and angle data.
COORDINATE CONVERSION (ROTATTION) - INSERT

Data item Meaning
L PLANE SELECTION Rotation plane (only YZ can be set)
COORDINATE CONVERSION CANCEL (ROTATION) : G1958

Cancel coordinate rotation mode.
COORDINATE CONVERSION CANCEL (ROTATION) - INSERT

Data item Meaning
C CANCEL Cancel coordinate rotation mode
4.11.3 Scaling
G1982 SCALING
G1983 SCALING CANCEL
NOTE
1 Scaling cancel must be done after finishing the machining using coordinate
conversion (rotation).
2 In order to use this function, set parameters No.27000#6(MC6) and
No.27000#2(FGC) to 0.
3 Scaling option is needed for this function.
SCALING : G1982
By selecting ALL AXIS on SCALE TYPE, scaling around the entered center point can be done.
SCALING
Data item Meaning
L SCALE TYPE Type of scaling and ALL axis is selected
X CENTER X Center point X coordinate of scaling
Y CENTER Y Center point Y coordinate of scaling
Z CENTER Z Center point Z coordinate of scaling
P SCALIE Scaling amount for all axis
By selecting EACH AXIS on SCALE TYPE, scaling for each selected axis is done.
- 378 -
SCALING
Data item Meaning
L SCLAE TYPE Type of scaling and EACH AXIS is selected
X CENTER X Center point X coordinate of scaling
Y CENTER Y Center point Y coordinate of scaling
Z CENTER Z Center point Z coordinate of scaling
I SCALE X Scaling amount for X-axis
J SCALE Y Scaling amount for Y-axis
K SCALE Z Scaling amount for Z-axis
NOTE
When EACH AXIS is selected and minus value for axis scale amount, mirror
image becomes available.
SCALING CANCEL : G1983

Cancel scaling.
SCALING
Data item Meaning
C CANCEL Cancel scaling mode
4.11.4 Figure Copy (Rotation Copy/ Parallel Copy)

REPETITION
G72.1 FIGURE COPY (ROTATION COPY)
G72.2 FIGURE COPY (PARALLEL COPY)
NOTE
1 In order to use this function, set parameters No.27000#2(FGC) to 0.
2 Rotational copy option is needed for figure copy (rotation copy), and linear copy
option is needed for figure copy (parallel copy).
3 Specify a plane selection command (G17, G18 or G19) to select the plane on
which the rotation copy is made.
FIGURE COPY (ROTATION COPY) : G72.1

On the plane specified before this command, selected sub-program can be executed with rotating by
entered angle around center point. This operation can be repeated for entered repeating number.
In case of T system and parameter No.27002#3=0

FIGURE COPY (ROTATION COPY) - INSERT
Data item Meaning
P SUB PROGRAM NO. Sub program number to be executed for repetition with rotation
L NUMBER OF REPETITION Number of repetition

Data item Meaning
- 379 -

Data item Meaning
FIGURE COPY (PARALLEL COPY) : G72.2

On the plane specified before this command, selected sub-program can be executed with shifting by
entered shift amount. This operation can be repeated for entered repeating number.

FIGURE COPY (PARALLEL COPY) - INSERT
Data item Meaning
I SHIFT VALUE X Shifting amount of X direction
K SHIFT VALUE Z Shifting amount of Z direction

FIGURE COPY (PARALLEL COPY) - INSERT
Data item Meaning
I SHIFT VALUE X Shifting amount of X direction
J SHIFT VALUE Y Shifting amount of Y direction
K SHIFT VALUE Z Shifting amount of Z direction
4.11.5 Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27000 MC6
MC6 0 : In [START] menu screens, the tab of [COORD CONV] is displayed.

1 : In [START] menu screens, the tab of [COORD CONV] is not displayed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27002 YMN FGC
FGC 0 : In [START] menu screens, the tab of [FIG. COPY] is displayed.

1 : In [START] menu screens, the tab of [FIG. COPY] is not displayed.
YMN 0 : In the cycle menu screen or cycle input screen, the items related to the Y-axis are not
displayed. (Only for the T series CNC system).
1 : In the cycle menu screen or cycle input screen, the items related to the Y-axis are
displayed. (Only for the T series CNC system).
- 380 -
4.12 COORDINATE SYSTEM CONVERSION CYCLE

NOTE
To use slant face machining with MANUAL GUIDE i, the option for the
three-dimensional coordinate conversion function is required.
For details, refer to the relevant manual issued by the machine tool builder.
4.12.1 Supportable Machine Configuration

With MANUAL GUIDE i, slant face machining, which is a mixture of table rotation and tool rotation, can be
specified.
Those parameters that support a machine configuration used must be set beforehand.
(1) Mixture type

This type of machining machines a slant face by workpiece rotation and tool rotation.
Horizontal type
Tool
B
X
X’ Y
Z’
Z X
C
Workpiece
Vertical type Y
X
C
Tool
Z B
Z’
X’
Workpiece
- 381 -
NOTE
It is assumed that the C-axis rotates about the Z-axis, and the rotation center is
on the Z-axis.
Moreover, it is assumed that the B-axis rotates about the Y-axis, and the rotation
center is on the Y-axis.
4.12.2 Slant Face Machining Command (Coordinate Conversion)

When slant face machining is performed with MANUAL GUIDE i, a slant face to be machined must be first
specified with the coordinate conversion command, then a machining program for milling to be performed
must be input.
Upon completion of slant face machining, coordinate conversion cancellation must be specified.
NOTE
Slant face machining can be performed with the following types of milling (all on
the XY plane):
1. Hole machining
2. Facing
3. Contouring
4. Pocketing
5. Grooving
With MANUAL GUIDE i, the G code commands listed below are available to enable coordinate conversion
for slant face machining.
Coordinate conversion
G1952 Direct origin specification (with the rotation center on the Y-axis)
G1953 Indirect origin specification (with the rotation center on the Y-axis)
Command block G1954 Direct origin specification (with the rotation center on the Z-axis)
G1955 Indirect origin specification (with the rotation center on the Z-axis)
G1959 Coordinate conversion cancel
NOTE
G code for coordinate conversion can be selected from the "COORDINATE
CONVERSION" tab on the milling start command menu (displayed by pressing
[START] on the milling menu).
(1) Input items of DIRECT ORIGIN POINT TYPE (ROT.CENTER AXIS-Y)

(G1952)
A machining surface rotates about the point (reference point) that serves as the new workpiece origin of the
slant face.
COORD CONVERSION
Data item Meaning
U NEW WORK ORIGIN X’ X coordinate of the workpiece origin of a slant face
V NEW WORK ORIGIN Y’ Y coordinate of the workpiece origin of a slant face
W NEW WORK ORIGIN Z’ Z coordinate of the workpiece origin of a slant face
R SLANT ANGLE Signed angle relative to the Z-axis. The CW direction viewed from the plus
direction of the rotation axis is positive. (-90≤R≤90).
- 382 -
(2) Input items of INDIRECT ORIGIN POINT TYPE (ROT.CENTER AXIS-Y)

(G1953)
A machining surface rotates about a specified reference point, and the workpiece origin of a slant face, that is,
a new machining surface, is to be specified based on the distance from the reference point (positive/negative
value).
COORD CONVERSION
Data item Meaning
U REF. POINT X X coordinate of a reference point (workpiece coordinate system before
rotation)
W REF. POINT Z Z coordinate of a reference point (workpiece coordinate system before
rotation)
I NEW WORK ORIGIN X’ X coordinate of the workpiece origin of a slant face
J NEW WORK ORIGIN Y’ Y coordinate of the workpiece origin of a slant face
K NEW WORK ORIGIN Z’ Z coordinate of the workpiece origin of a slant face
R SLANT ANGLE Signed angle relative to the Z-axis. The CW direction viewed from the plus
direction of the rotation axis is positive. (-90≤R≤90).
(3) Input items of DIRECT ORIGIN POINT TYPE (ROT.CENTER AXIS-Z)

(G1954)
The machining plane rotates about the new point (reference point) that is to become the workpiece origin
of the XY plane.
COORD CONVERSION
Data item Meaning
U REF. POINT X X coordinate of a new workpiece origin
V REF. POINT Y Y coordinate of a new workpiece origin
W REF. POINT Z Z coordinate of a new workpiece origin
R SLANT ANGLE Signed angle with respect to the X-axis. The CW direction viewed from the
plus rotation axis direction is positive (-90 ≤ R ≤ 90).
(4) Input items of INDIRECT ORIGIN POINT TYPE (ROT.CENTER AXIS-Z)

(G1955)
The machining plane rotates about a specified reference point. Define the workpiece origin of the XY
plane, which is a new machining plane, by specifying the distance (positive/negative value) from the
reference point.
COORD CONVERSION
Data item Meaning
U REF. POINT X X coordinate of a reference point (workpiece coordinate system before
rotation)
W REF. POINT Y Y coordinate of a reference point (workpiece coordinate system before
rotation)
I NEW WORK ORIGIN X’ X coordinate of the workpiece origin of the slant
J NEW WORK ORIGIN Y’ Y coordinate of the workpiece origin of the slant
K NEW WORK ORIGIN Z’ Z coordinate of the workpiece origin of the slant
R SLANT ANGLE Signed angle with respect to the Z-axis. The CW direction viewed from the
plus rotation axis direction is positive (-90 ≤ R ≤ 90).
- 383 -
(5) Input items of COORDINATE CONVERSION CANCEL (G1959)

After coordinate conversion is canceled, the tool moves to the entered end point by rapid traverse. If no
end point is specified, the tool will not move.
CANCEL
Data item Meaning
X* END POINT X X coordinate to which the tool is to move by rapid traverse after coordinate
conversion is canceled. If this data is omitted, the tool will not move.
Y* END POINT Y Y coordinate to which the tool is to move by rapid traverse after coordinate
Z* END POINT Z Z coordinate to which the tool is to move by rapid traverse after coordinate
4.13 TILTED WORKING PLANE INDEXING FUNCTION (FOR

Series 30i/31i, Series 0i-MF/0i-MD)
The following tilted working plane machining cycles are enabled in MANUAL GUIDE i.
(1) Euler’s angle (G1850)

(2) Roll-Pitch-Yaw angle (G1851)
(3) 3 points specification (G1852)
(4) 2 vectors specification (G1853)
(5) Projection angle (G1854)
(6) Tool Axis direction (G1855)
(7) Tilted working plane canceled (G1859)
NOTE
This function requires the following optional functions.
(1) Tilted Working Plane Indexing command (R522)
(2) MANUAL GUIDE i Tilted Working Plane Indexing function (S788)
NOTE
The following software is necessary to use this function in Series 30i /31i –A.
Series G003/G103/G123: Ver.10 or later
4.13.1 Operation
Display tilted working plane function menu screen by the following procedures.
<1> Press the [START] soft key for the milling cycle.
<2> Select “TWP” TAB, then tilted working plane function menu appears.
<3> Move the cursor on a tilted working plane command and press the [SELECT] soft key.
- 384 -
4.13.2 Tilted Working Plane Input Screen by Euler’s Angle

Input items of this cycle G1850 are as follows.
TWP
Data item Meaning
A MULTI TYPE A1: Values of specified data are in work coordinate system.
A2: Values of specified data are in feature coordinate system.
X ORIGIN OF FEATURE Origin X of feature coordinate
COORDINATE
Y ORIGIN OF FEATURE Origin Y of feature coordinate
COORDINATE
Z ORIGIN OF FEATURE Origin Z of feature coordinate
COORDINATE
I EULER’S ANGLE Angle of rotation around Z-axis of original coordinate. The rotated
coordinate becomes coordinate 1.
J EULER’S ANGLE Angle of rotation around X-axis of coordinate 1.The rotated coordinate
becomes coordinate 2.
K EULER’S ANGLE Angle of rotation around Z-axis of coordinate 2.
TL.DIR.CTL
Data item Meaning
T TOOL AXIS DIRECTION T1: none
CONTROL T2: control point hold type
T3: TCP hold type
H TOOL OFFSET NUMBER Tool length offset number
R FROM TCP TO CENTER Distance from tool center point to rotation center
The machining program is created as follows.
(Example)
G1850A1.Q1.X0.Y0. Z0. I0. J0. K90. T1. : Tilted plane machining
G1040L10.F500.V500.E500.W1.B0.3C0.3Z2 : Pocket machining
M98 P1001 : Figure block
G1859 : Tilted plane machining cancel
- 385 -
4.13.3 Tilted Working Plane Input Screen by Roll-Pitch-Yaw

TWP
Data item Meaning
Q ORDER OF ROTATION Order of rotating X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis
Q1: X-axis→Y-axis→Z-axis
Q2: X-axis→Z-axis→Y-axis
Q3: Y-axis→X-axis→Z-axis
Q4: Y-axis→Z-axis→X-axis
Q5: Z-axis→X-axis→Y-axis
Q6: Z-axis→Y-axis→X-axis
COORDINATE
COORDINATE
COORDINATE
I ROTATION ANGLE ABOUT Rotation angle about X
X
J ROTATION ANGLE ABOUT Rotation angle about Y
Y
K ROTATION ANGLE ABOUT Z Rotation angle about Z
TL.DIR.CTL
Data item Meaning
T TOOL AXIS DIRECTION T1: None
CONTROL T2: Control point hold type
T3: TCP hold type
4.13.4 Tilted Working Plane Input Screen by Three Points

TWP
Data item Meaning
B 1ST POINT X Coordinate X of the origin of the new Feature Coordinate System
C 1ST POINT Y Coordinate Y of the origin of the new Feature Coordinate System
D 1ST POINT Z Coordinate Z of the origin of the new Feature coordinate System
E 2ND POINT X Coordinate X of the second point on the tilted plane
F 2ND POINT Y Coordinate Y of the second point on the tilted plane
I 2ND POINT Z Coordinate Z of the second point on the tilted plane
J 3RD POINT X Coordinate X of the third point on the tilted plane
K 3RD POINT Y Coordinate Y of the third point on the tilted plan
L 3RD POINT Z Coordinate Z of the third point on the tilted plan
- 386 -
SFT. ORIG.
Data item Meaning
M SHIFT OF ORIGIN X Shift amount X for 1st point
N SHIFT OF ORIGIN Y Shift amount Y for 1st point
P SHIFT OF ORIGIN Z Shift amount Z for 1st point
Q ROTATION ANGLE ABOUT Rotation angle about Z-axis
Z-AXIS
TL.DIR.CTL
Data item Meaning
T3: TCP hold type
4.13.5 Tilted Working Plane Input Screen by Two Vectors

TWP
Data item Meaning
COORDINATE X
COORDINATE Y
COORDINATE Z
I 1ST VECTOR I The direction of X axis of Feature coordinate system direction on Work
J 1ST VECTOR J coordinate system
K 1ST VECTOR K (1st Vector)
B 2ND VECTOR I The direction of Z axis of Feature coordinate system direction on Work
C 2ND VECTOR J coordinate system (2nd Vector)
D 2ND VECTOR K
TL.DIR.CTL
Data item Meaning
T3: TCP hold type
- 387 -
4.13.6 Tilted Working Plane Input Screen by Projection Angles

TWP
Data item Meaning
COORDINATE X
COORDINATE Y
COORDINATE Z
I 1ST PROJECTION ANGLE Projection angle between X-axis
J 2ND PROJECTION ANGLE Projection angle between Y-axis
K 3RD PROJECTION ANGLE Rotation angle around Z-axis
TL.DIR.CTL
Data item Meaning
T TOOL AXIS DIRECTION T1: none
CONTROL T2: control point hold type
T3: TCP hold type
4.13.7 Tilted Working Plane Input Screen by Tool Axis Direction

TWP
Data item Meaning
A ORIGIN COMMAND OF A1: Feature coordinate is specified.
FEATURE COORDINATE A2: No feature coordinate is specified.
X ORIGIN X OF FEATURE Origin X of feature coordinate in work coordinate system.
COORDINATE
Y ORIGIN Y OF FEATURE Origin Y of feature coordinate in work coordinate system.
COORDINATE
Z ORIGIN Z OF FEATURE Origin Z of feature coordinate in work coordinate system.
COORDINATE
R ROTATION ANGLE AROUND Rotation angle around Z-axis in feature coordinate system
Z-AXIS
4.13.8 Tilted Working Plane Input Screen by Tilted Plane Cancel

TWP
Data item Meaning
C CANCEL Tilted Plane Cancel (Input Disable)
- 388 -
4.13.9 Restriction of Machining Simulation

The restrictions are in the followings.
(1) The machining simulation only works when the mechanical unit type of machine is the table
rotation type and the parameter No.19680 is set to be 12.
(2) The machining simulation works if rotary axes are specified as follows.
A is the rotary master axis;
C is the rotary slave axis;
In all other rotary axis configurations machining simulation does not work.
(3) In case that “Multi type” is “INC”, the machining simulation does not work correctly.
(4) Machining simulation by [SINGLE] soft key does not work correctly.
(5) Set-up Guidance Functions of MANUAL GUIDE i do not work correctly during the tilted
working plane command mode.
4.14 MILLING BY ROTATING A WORKPIECE ABOUT THE

Y-AXIS
The following milling operations are performed by rotating a workpiece about the Y-axis:
• B-axis hole machining on a cylindrical surface (YB)
• B-axis or Y-axis grooving on a cylindrical surface
NOTE
1 The axis number of the B-axis must be assigned to the axis about which the
workpiece is rotated.
2 Turning cycles cannot be used.
3 Polar coordinate interpolation cannot be used.
4 Circular interpolation cannot be used.
5 It is possible to use this function in only horizontal machining center.
4.14.1 Machining Type

(1) Input items of hole machining (B-axis holes on a cylindrical surface)
Same as in Subsection 4.1.1, "Machining Command (Tool Rotation: M Series)".
(2) Input items of grooving (BY axis on a cylindrical surface) (G1054)
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
J CUT DEPTH OF AXIS Depth of cut in the tool axis direction per cutting operation (radius value,
positive value)
C CLEARANCE OF AXIS Distance between the surface of a blank being machined and cutting start
point (point R) in the tool axis distance (radius value, positive value)
- 389 -
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
Z APPROCH MOTION [2 AXES]: When moving from the current position to the machining start
(Initial value)
[3 AXES]: The tool moves from the current position to the machining start
4.14.2 Figure
(1) Input items of B-axis holes (arc points) on a cylindrical surface (YB)
(G1777)
POS / SIZE
Data item Meaning
B BASE POSITION Z-axis coordinate value on the workpiece surface
Z Y AXIS POS. Y-axis coordinate value of the hole position (common to all holes)
A STARTING ANGLE Central angle of the first hole to the B0 axis (positive or negative value)
REPEAT
Data item Meaning
C* PITCH ANGLE Angle between hole positions
M* HOLE NUMBER Number of holes
(2) Input items of B-axis holes (random points) on a cylindrical surface (YB)
(G1778)
HOLE POS-1
Data item Meaning
B BASE POSITION Z-axis coordinate value on the workpiece surface
H Y AXIS POS.1 Y coordinate value of the first hole
V B AXIS POS.1 B coordinate value of the first hole
A* Y AXIS POS.2 Y coordinate value of the second hole
C* B AXIS POS.2 B coordinate value of the second hole
D* Y AXIS POS.3 Y coordinate value of the third hole
E* B AXIS POS.3 B coordinate value of the third hole
F* Y AXIS POS.4 Y coordinate value of the fourth hole
I* B AXIS POS.4 B coordinate value of the fourth hole
HOLE POS-2
Data item Meaning
J* Y AXIS POS.5 Y coordinate value of the fifth hole
K* B AXIS POS.5 B coordinate value of the fifth hole
M* Y AXIS POS.6 Y coordinate value of the sixth hole
P* B AXIS POS.6 B coordinate value of the sixth hole
Q* Y AXIS POS.7 Y coordinate value of the seventh hole
R* B AXIS POS.7 B coordinate value of the seventh hole
S* Y AXIS POS.8 Y coordinate value of the eighth hole
T* B AXIS POS.8 B coordinate value of the eighth hole
- 390 -
NOTE
Values need not be entered for all hole positions, but it is necessary to enter
both the Y and B coordinate values for one hole position.
(3) Input items of B-axis grooves on a cylindrical surface (G1775)
POS / SIZE
Data item Meaning
B BASE POSITION Z-axis coordinate value of the top surface of the workpiece to be grooved
or the groove bottom (in the tool axis direction)
L HEIGHT/DEPTH When the top surface of the workpiece is selected for BASE POSITION,
the distance to the groove bottom is specified with a negative value (radius
value). → Depth
When the groove bottom is selected for BASE POSITION, the distance to
the upper surface of grooves is specified with a positive value (radius
value). → Height
Z Y AXIS POS. Y-axis coordinate value of the center position around which grooves are
placed
Q GROOVE ANGLE Inclination angle of a groove with respect to the radial direction of the arc
along which grooves are placed (positive or negative value)
A STARTING ANGLE Central angle of the first groove position with respect to the B0 axis
REPEAT
Data item Meaning
C* PITCH ANGLE Angle between grooves
C
2nd groove
1st groove
M* GROOVE NUMBER Number of grooves
(4) Input items of Y-axis grooves on a cylindrical surface (G1776)
POS / SIZE
Data item Meaning
B BASE POSITION Z-axis coordinate value of the top surface of the workpiece to be grooved
or the groove bottom (in the tool axis direction)
L HEIGHT/DEPTH When the top surface of the workpiece is selected for BASE POSITION,
the distance to the groove bottom is specified with a negative value (radius
value). → Depth
When the groove bottom is selected for BASE POSITION, the distance to
the upper surface of grooves is specified with a positive value (radius
value). → Height
Z Y AXIS POS. Y-axis coordinate value of the center position around which grooves are
placed
P GROOVE LENGTH Groove length in the Y-axis direction
A STARTING ANGLE Central angle of the first groove position with respect to the B0 axis
- 391 -
REPEAT
Data item Meaning
C* PITCH ANGLE Angle between grooves
C
2nd groove
1st groove
M* GROOVE NUMBER Number of grooves

Milling of a workpiece rotating around the Y-axis can be simulated.
NOTE
1 Turning cannot be simulated.
2 Simulation using polar coordinate interpolation cannot be performed.
3 Simulation using cylindrical interpolation cannot be performed.
4 Because the workpiece rotation axis is determined by parameter setting, it is
impossible to change the workpiece rotation axis during simulation.
5 While rotation of the workpiece about the Y-axis is being simulated, the
coordinate axes are displayed as X, Y, and -Z.
The following types of blank figures rotating about the Y-axis are available:
(1) Column (rotating about the Y-axis) : G1756
(2) Column with a hole (rotating about the Y-axis) : G1757
(3) Prism (rotating about the Y-axis) : G1758
(4) Prism with a hole (rotating about the Y-axis) : G1759
(5) Arbitrary column figure (rotating about the Y-axis)
Start point (rotating about the Y-axis) : G1780
Line (rotating about the Y-axis) : G1781
Arc (CW) (rotating about the Y-axis) : G1782
Arc (CCW) (rotating about the Y-axis) : G1783
Chamfering (rotating about the Y-axis) : G1784
Corner R (rotating about the Y-axis) : G1785
End point (rotating about the Y-axis) : G1786
- 392 -
5.ENTERING ARBITRARY
B-63874EN/11 MACHINING CYCLE FIGURES
5 ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES

This chapter explains how to enter arbitrary figure data.
NOTE
1 When entering arbitrary figures, enter all the data for each figure specified on the
drawing.
If superfluous data is entered, it will not be used in figure calculation; only the
data necessary for figure calculation is used.
2 If all the data necessary for figure calculation is specified on the drawing,
entering it enables figure calculation. If data is insufficient, however, it is
necessary to calculate and enter the necessary figure data separately.
3 If arbitrary-figure calculation according to MANUAL GUIDE i produces more than
one candidate figure, the figure that passes the shortest path will be selected
automatically.
In calculating a contact between an arc and straight line or between two arcs, a
figure that links two figures smoothly is selected automatically.
4 On the program editing screen, after moving the cursor on the sub program call
command (M98 P****) which is composed by the arbitrary figure blocks, pressing
the <INPUT> key displays the window for editing the arbitrary figures to edit
directly.
5 When positioning the cursor on the block of subprogram calling in the
program-editing screen, arbitrary figures of the subprogram are drawn on the
graphic window.
6 Tool path of machining cycle is calculated strictly form input data of free figure.
When input data of free figure has error, an alarm may be occurs, a figure
cannot be machined correctly and so on.
Therefore, input the vale with the least error possible.
5.1 ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURE DATA

In entering arbitrary figures of element “LINE” or “ARC”, the end point can be set as an incremental
programming.
When positioning the cursor on “END POINT”, the soft key [ST.P+I] and [ST.P-I] are displayed.
(1) When the operator pushes the soft key [ST.P+I], “END POINT” is set to
“Start Point of the figure (=End Point of last figure) +”.
And input the increment or decrement in succession. As result of pushing [INPUT] key, the plus
incremental value is set.
(2) When the operator pushes the soft key [ST.P-I], “END POINT” is set to
“Start Point of the figure (=End Point of last figure) -”.
And input the increment or decrement in succession. As result of pushing [INPUT] key, the minus
incremental value is set.
- 393 -
5. ENTERING ARBITRARY
FIGURES MACHINING CYCLE B-63874EN/11
NOTE
1 If the last figure element is “CORNER R” or “CHAMFER”, The point to set as the
start point in this function is as follows.
Start Point Start Point
C
R
Fig1 Last figure is a chamfer. Fig2 Last figure is a corner R.
2 If “END POINT” of the last figure is pending, “END POINT” is not set to the start
point by pressing the software key [ST.P+I] and [ST.P-I]. The warning message
“START POINT IS PENDING.” is displayed.
5.1.1 Arbitrary Figures for the XY Plane

Arbitrary figures in the XY plane can be used in the following types of milling.
<1> Facing
<2> Contouring (Side cutting)
<3> Pocketing
<4> Grooving
<5> Emboss machining
NOTE
1 See Chapter 4, "MILLING" for detailed descriptions about data to be entered for
each type of cycle machining.
2 When entering an arbitrary figure for pocketing, make its end point coincide with
its start point. To put another way, combine parts figures with blank figures in
such a way that a closed curve is created.
Pocketing is carried out in this closed curve.
3 It is possible to specify "PART" and "BLANK" as "ELEMENT TYPE" for an
individual arbitrary figure in pocketing.
If a pocket is open in part, this "BLANK" can be used to enter an arbitrary figure
resembling a blank figure for the open portion, thus carrying out optimum
pocketing.
ELEMENT (INPUT DATA) (Note 1)

Data item Meaning
T FIGURE ATTRIBUTE [FACE] : Used as a figure in facing
(Note 2) [CONVEX] : Used as an outer-perimeter figure in contouring
[CONCAV] : Used as an inner-perimeter figure in contouring and emboss
machining or a figure in pocketing
[GROOVE] : Used as a figure in grooving
Z BASE POSITION Position of the machining surface of an arbitrary figure
- 394 -

Data item Meaning
D HEIGHT/DEPTH Height or Depth from Base position to cutting surface
Remarks) This item is displayed in Contouring, Pocketing, Grooving and
Emboss machining.
W GROOVE WIDTH Groove width
Remarks) This item is displayed in Grooving.
P FIGURE ATTRIBUTE [RIGHT] : The right side of an entered figure as cutting
[LEFT] : The left side of an entered figure as cutting
Remarks) This item is displayed in Open figure of Contouring.
NOTE
2 Select, with a figure type for a start point, which milling operation is to use an
arbitrary figure. Data to be entered for the start point varies depending on what
figure type is selected. For details, see descriptions about the respective milling
types.
When the cursor is placed on BASE POSITION or HEIGHT/DEPTH, the soft key [GUIDE] appears.
When the soft key is pressed, the guidance window for each input item is displayed.
ELEMENT (OUTPUT DATA) (Note 3)

Data item Meaning
T FIGURE ATTRIBUTE [1] : Used as a figure in facing
[2] : Used as an outer-perimeter figure in contouring
[3] : Used as an inner-perimeter figure in contouring and emboss machining
or a figure in pocketing
[4] : Used as a figure in grooving
(input value)
H START POINT X X coordinate of the start point (input value)
V START POINT Y Y coordinate of the start point (input value)
B BASE POSITION Position of the machining surface (input value)
L HEIGHT/DEPTH Height or Depth from Base position to cutting surface (input value)
Remarks) This item is displayed in Contouring, Pocketing, Grooving and
Emboss machining.
D GROOVE WIDTH Groove width (input value)
Remarks) This item is displayed in Grooving.
P FIGURE ATTRIBUTE [1] : The right side of an entered figure as cutting
[2] : The left side of an entered figure as cutting (input value)
Remarks) This item is displayed in Open figure of Contouring.
NOTE
- 395 -
(2) Input items of LINE (XY plane) (G1201)

Data item Meaning
D LINE DIRECTION The direction of a straight line is selected from a menu indicated on a soft key.
X* END POINT X X coordinate of the end point of a straight line
Remarks1) This data may not be displayed depending on the value entered as
the direction of the straight line.
Remarks2) Incremental programming is possible.
Y* END POINT Y Y coordinate of the end point of a straight line
Remarks1) This data may not be displayed depending on the value entered as
A* ANGLE Straight-line angle
Remarks) This data may not be displayed depending on the value entered as
L LAST CONNECTION [TANGNT] : In contact with the immediately preceding figure
[NO SET] : Not in contact with the immediately preceding figure (initial value)
M NEXT CONNECTION [TANGNT] : In contact with the immediately following figure
[NO SET] : Not in contact with the immediately following figure (initial value)
ATTRIBUTE (INPUT DATA)

Data item Meaning
T ELEMENT TYPE [PART] : Cut as parts
[BLANK] : Cut as a blank portion
Remarks) The system sets the last data as an initial value.
ELEMENT & ATTRIBUTE (OUTPUT DATA)

Data item Meaning
V END POINT Y Y coordinate of the end point of a straight line (calculation result)
K LINE DIRECTION The direction of a straight line is selected from a menu indicated on a soft
key. (input value)
C* END POINT X X coordinate of the end point of a straight line (input value)
D* END POINT Y Y coordinate of the end point of a straight line (input value)
L LAST CONNECTION [1] : In contact with the immediately preceding figure
[0] : Not in contact with the immediately preceding figure (input value)
M NEXT CONNECTION [1] : In contact with the immediately following figure
[0] : Not in contact with the immediately following figure (input value)
T ELEMENT TYPE [1] : Cut as parts
[2] : Cut as a blank portion (input value)
(input value)
- 396 -
(3) Input items of ARC (CW) (XY plane) (G1202)

Input items of ARC (CCW) (XY plane) (G1203)

Data item Meaning
X* END POINT X X coordinate of an arc end point
Remarks) Incremental programming is possible.
Y* END POINT Y Y coordinate of an arc end point
R* RADIUS Arc radius
CX* CENTER POINT CX X coordinate of an arc center
CY* CENTER POINT CY Y coordinate of an arc center
[NO SET] : Not in contact with the immediately preceding figure (initial
value)
M NEXT CONNECTION [TANGNT] : In contact with the immediately preceding figure
value)
U ROUTE TYPE [LONG] : An arc with a long route is made
[SHORT] : An arc with a short route is made (initial value)

Data item Meaning

Data item Meaning
V END POINT Y Y coordinate of an arc end point (calculation result)
J CENTER POINT Y Y coordinate of an arc center (calculation result)
D* END POINT Y Y coordinate of an arc end point (input value)
P* CENTER POINT CX X coordinate of an arc center (input value)
Q* CENTER POINT CY Y coordinate of an arc center (input value)
M NEXT CONNECTION [1] : In contact with the immediately preceding figure
U ROUTE TYPE [1] : An arc with a long route is made
[0] : An arc with a short route is made (input value)
(input value)
- 397 -
(4) Input items of CHAMFER (XY plane) (G1204)

Data item Meaning

Data item Meaning
T ELEMENT TYPE [PART] : Cut as parts (initial value)

Data item Meaning
V END POINT Y Y coordinate of the end point of a straight line (calculation result)
C CHAMFER Amount of chamfering (radius value, positive value) (input value)
NOTE
By setting the parameter No.14851#0=1, Corner element between a blank
element and a part element can be created in the opposite direction.
C
C
C
C C
C
Dotted line : blank element
Normal line : part element
(5) Input items of CORNER R (XY plane) (G1205)

Data item Meaning
R CORNER RADIUS Corner rounding (radius value, positive value)

Data item Meaning
- 398 -

Data item Meaning
V END PINT Y Y coordinate of an arc end point (calculation result)
J CENTER POINT Y Y coordinate of an arc center (calculation result)
K ROTATION DIRECTION [2] : clockwise
[3] : counterclockwise
NOTE
By setting the bit 0 (CNR) of parameter No.14851 = 1, Corner element between
a blank element and a part element can be created in the opposite direction.
(6) Input items of END OF ARBITRARY FIGURES (XY plane) (G1206)

This block is output at the end of a series of arbitrary-figure blocks.
NOTE
A series of arbitrary figures must be enclosed between G1200 (start point) and
G1206 (end of arbitrary figures).
5.1.2 Arbitrary Figures for the YZ Plane

Arbitrary figures in the YZ plane can be used in the following types of milling.
<1> Facing
<3> Pocketing
<4> Grooving
NOTE
The data of the G codes of arbitrary figures for the YZ plane given below is the
same as that of the G codes of arbitrary figures for the XY plane except that X
coordinate values are replaced by Z coordinate values. For details, see
Subsection 5.1.1, "Arbitrary Figures for the XY Plane", in Section 5.1,
"ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURE DATA".
The arbitrary figures of the following G codes are the same as the arbitrary figures for the XY plane:
• Start point : G1300 (YZ plane)
• Line : G1301 (YZ plane)
• Arc (CW) : G1302 (YZ plane)
• Arc (CCW) : G1303 (YZ plane)
• Chamfer : G1304 (YZ plane)
• Corner R : G1305 (YZ plane)
• Corner R : G1305 (YZ plane)
• End of arbitrary figures : G1306 (YZ plane)
- 399 -
5.1.3 Arbitrary Figures for the Polar Coordinate Interpolation Plane

(XC Plane)
The following types of milling can be specified also for the polar coordinate interpolation plane (XC
plane), and arbitrary figures in the XC plane can be used in these milling types.
<1> Facing
<3> Pocketing
<4> Grooving
NOTE
1 X coordinate values specified for the XC plane must also be diameters.
2 The data of the G codes of arbitrary figures for the XC plane given below is the
same as that of the G codes of arbitrary figures for the XY plane except that Y
coordinate values are replaced by C coordinate values and that the data of
G1500 includes additional data. For details, see Subsection 5.1.1, "Arbitrary
Figures for the XY Plane", in Section 5.1, "ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURE
DATA".
The additional data of G1500 will be explained in this subsection.
(1) Input items of START POINT (XC plane) (G1500)

Data item Meaning
F FACE POSITION [+FACE] : References the figure (+end face)
[-FACE] : References the figure (-end face)
Remarks) This item is displayed when the bit 4 (MC4) of parameter
No.27000=1.
Y ROTATION AXIS NAME [C] : The rotation axis is the C axis.
[A] : The rotation axis is the A axis (bit 1 (P1) of parameter No.27001 = 1)
[B] : The rotation axis is the B axis (bit 2 (P2) of parameter No.27001 = 1)
[E] : The rotation axis is the E axis (bit 3 (P3) of parameter No.27001 = 1)
Remarks) This item is displayed when the bit 0 (P0) of parameter No.27001
= 1.

Data item Meaning
Y ROTATION AXIS NAME [1] : The rotation axis is the C axis.
[2] : The rotation axis is the A axis (bit 1 (P1) of parameter No.27001 = 1)
[3] : The rotation axis is the B axis (bit 2 (P2) of parameter No.27001 = 1)
[4] : The rotation axis is the E axis (bit 3 (P3) of parameter No.27001 = 1)
(input value)
Z FACE POSITION [1] : References the figure (+end face)
[2] : References the figure (-end face)
(input value)
• Line : G1501 (XC plane)
• Arc (CW) : G1502 (XC plane)
• Arc (CCW) : G1503 (XC plane)
• Chamfer : G1504 (XC plane)
• Corner R : G1505 (XC plane)
- 400 -
• End of arbitrary figures : G1506 (XC plane)
5.1.4 Arbitrary Figures for the Cylindrical Surface (ZC Plane)

The following types of milling can be specified also for the cylindrical surface (ZC plane), and arbitrary
figures in the ZC plane can be used in these milling types.
<1> Facing
<3> Pocketing
<4> Grooving
NOTE
The data of the G codes of arbitrary figures for the YZ plane given below is the
same as that of the G codes of arbitrary figures for the XY plane except that X
coordinate values are replaced by C coordinate values and that the data of
G1600 includes additional data. For details, see Subsection 5.1.1, "Arbitrary
Figures for the XY Plane", in Section 5.1, "ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURE
DATA".
The additional data of G1500 will be explained in this subsection.
(1) Input items of START POINT (ZC plane) (G1600)

Data item Meaning
Y ROTATION AXIS NAME [C] : The rotation axis is the C axis.
[A] : The rotation axis is the A axis (bit 1 (P1) of parameter No.27001 = 1)
[B] : The rotation axis is the B axis (bit 2 (P2) of parameter No.27001 = 1)
[E] : The rotation axis is the E axis (bit 3 (P3) of parameter No.27001 = 1)
Remarks) This item is displayed when the bit 0 (P0) of parameter
No.27001 = 1.

Data item Meaning
Y FACE POSITION [1] : The rotation axis is the C axis.
[2] : The rotation axis is the A axis (bit 1 (P1) of parameter No.27001 = 1)
[3] : The rotation axis is the B axis (bit 2 (P2) of parameter No.27001 = 1)
[4] : The rotation axis is the E axis (bit 3 (P3) of parameter No.27001 = 1)
• Line : G1601 (ZC plane)
• Arc (CW) : G1602 (ZC plane)
• Arc (CCW) : G1603 (ZC plane)
• Chamfer : G1604 (ZC plane)
• Corner R : G1605 (ZC plane)
• End of arbitrary figures : G1606 (ZC plane)
5.1.5 Arbitrary Figures for Turning (ZX Plane)

Arbitrary figures in the ZX plane can be used in turning.
<1> Outer surface rough/semifinish/finish turning
<2> Inner surface rough/semifinish/finish turning
- 401 -
<3> End surface rough/semifinish/finish turning
NOTE
1 See Chapter 2, "Turning," in Part III for detailed descriptions about data to be
entered for each type of cycle machining.
2 When entering an arbitrary figure for turning, make its end point coincide with its
start point. To put another way, combine parts figures with blank figures in such
a way that a closed curve is created.
Turning is carried out in this closed curve.
3 It is possible to specify "PART" and "BLANK" as "ELEMENT TYPE" for an
individual arbitrary figure.
This "BLANK" can be used to enter an arbitrary figure resembling a blank figure
to be actually machined, so any portion other than the blank portion will not be
cut. This way, optimum rough turning can be realized.
(1) Input items of START POINT (ZX plane) (G1450)

Data item Meaning
DX START POINT DX X coordinate of the start point of an arbitrary figure
Z START POINT Z Z coordinate of the start point of an arbitrary figure
NOTE
ELEMENT (OUTPUT DATA) (Note 2)

Data item Meaning
H START POINT X X coordinate of the start point (input value)
V START POINT Z Z coordinate of the start point (input value)
NOTE
(2) Input items of LINE (ZX plane) (G1451)

Data item Meaning
D LINE DIRECTION The direction of a straight line is selected from a menu indicated on a soft
key.
DX* END POINT DX X coordinate of the end point of a straight line
Remarks1) This data may not be displayed depending on the value entered
as the direction of the straight line.
Z* END POINT Z Z coordinate of the end point of a straight line
Remarks1) This data may not be displayed depending on the value entered
as the direction of the straight line.
- 402 -

Data item Meaning
A* ANGLE Straight-line angle
Remarks) This data may not be displayed depending on the value
entered as the direction of the straight line.
value)
[NO SET] : Not in contact with the immediately following figure (initial
value)

Data item Meaning
F FINISH FEEDRATE Cutting feedrate for finishing (positive value)
Remarks) It is possible to set the feedrate to each block on Finishing.

Data item Meaning
V END POINT Z Z coordinate of the end point of a straight line (calculation result)
K LINE DIRECTION The direction of a straight line is selected from a menu indicated on a soft
key. (input value)
C* END POINT DX X coordinate of the end point of a straight line (input value)
D* END POINT Z Z coordinate of the end point of a straight line (input value)
M NEXT CONNECTION [1] : In contact with the immediately following figure
[0] : Not in contact with the immediately following figure (input value)
(input value)
F FINISH FEEDRATE Cutting feedrate for finishing (input value)
(3) Input items of ARC (CW) (ZX plane) (G1452)

Input items of ARC (CCW) (ZX plane) (G1453)

Data item Meaning
DX* END POINT DX X coordinate of an arc end point
Z* END POINT Z Z coordinate of an arc end point
R* RADIUS Arc radius
CDX* CENTER POINT CDX X coordinate of an arc center
CZ* CENTER POINT CZ Z coordinate of an arc center
[NO SET] : Not in contact with the immediately preceding figure (initial value)
- 403 -

Data item Meaning
[NO SET] : Not in contact with the immediately following figure (initial value)

Data item Meaning

Data item Meaning
D* END POINT Z Z coordinate of an arc end point (input value)
P* CENTER POINT CDX X coordinate of an arc center (input value)
Q* CENTER POINT CZ Z coordinate of an arc center (input value)
M NEXT CONNECTION [1] : In contact with the immediately preceding figure
(input value)
(4) Input items of CHAMFER (ZX plane) (G1454)

Data item Meaning

Data item Meaning

Data item Meaning
- 404 -

Data item Meaning
C CHAMFER Amount of chamfering (radius value, positive value) (input value)
NOTE
C
C
C
C C
C
Dotted line : blank element
Normal line : part element
(5) Input items of CORNER R (ZX plane) (G1455)

Data item Meaning
R CORNER RADIUS Corner rounding (radius value, positive value)

Data item Meaning

Data item Meaning
K ROTATION DIRECTION [2] : Clockwise
[3] : Counterclockwise
NOTE
- 405 -
(6) Input items of END OF ARBITRARY FIGURES (ZX plane) (G1456)

This block is output at the end of a series of arbitrary-figure blocks.
NOTE
A series of arbitrary figures must be enclosed between G1450 (start point) and
G1456 (end of arbitrary figures).
(1) DIN509
Pressing the soft key [DIN509] displays the sub-window. By entering necessary data, a neck figure for
DIN509 can be created.
X
w
P(z,x)
r r 15° d
(2) DIN509F
Pressing the soft key [D509-F] displays the sub-window. By entering necessary data, a neck figure for
DIN509-F can be created.
X
L w
8°
P(z, x)
r r 15° d
- 406 -
(3) DIN76
Pressing the soft key [DIN76] displays the sub-window. By entering necessary data, a neck figure for
DIN76 can be created.
X
w
P(z, x)
r=0.6d 30° d
5.2 ARC SPECIFICATION BY CENTRAL ANGLE

In the Arbitrary Figure entering screen it is possible to specify the arcs using their central angle. An
apposite window is provided to the machine operator to insert the necessary data. The arc end point is
automatically calculated by specifying the central angle, the starting point coordinates, and the center
point coordinates.
Starting Point
（INPUT）
Central Angle
（INPUT） End point
(Automatically Calculate)
Center Point
（INPUT）
5.2.1 Operations
<1> If the cursor is located in any of the two input items corresponding to the coordinate of the end point
of an Arc window, then the [AUXCAL] soft key for Auxiliary Calculation is displayed as follows.
AUXCAL ST.P+I ST.P-I CHCURS OK CANCEL
<2> If the [AUXCAL] soft key is pressed, then the Auxiliary Calculation Window is displayed.
<3> The end point are calculated by inputting the arc direction, the start point, the center point, the
central angle of the arc, and finally pressing the [CALC] soft-key.
If the [CANCEL] soft key is pressed, then the Auxiliary Calculation Window is closed and no
calculation is performed.
- 407 -
5.2.2 Input Items

The input items for Auxiliary Calculation Window are as follows
ARC END PT
Data item Meaning
R ARC DIRECTION A circular arc direction is selected with the software key.
[ARC ] : CW
[ARC ] : CCW
X START POINT X X axis coordinates value of circular arc starting point.
Y START POINT Y Y axis coordinates value of circular arc starting point.
CX CENTER POINT CX X axis coordinates value of circular arc center
CY CENTER POINT CY Y axis coordinates value of circular arc center
A ANGLE Circular arc angle
NOTE
If the END POINT values of the previous element are already defined then
START POINT in the Auxiliary Calculation Window is equal to the END POINT of
the previous figure element. If the CENTER POINT values in Arc Window are
already defined then CENTER POINT in the Auxiliary Calculation Window is
equal to the CENTER POINT values in Arc Window.
5.2.3 Enable Arbitrary Figures

The arc can be specified by using the central angle in following machining planes and functions.
(1) XY plane arbitrary figure

(2) YZ plane arbitrary figure
(3) ZX plane arbitrary figure
(4) Polar coordinate interpolation plane (XC plane) arbitrary figure
(5) Cylindrical surface (ZC plane) arbitrary figure
(6) Cylindrical surface (XA plane) arbitrary figure
(7) XY plane contour programming
(8) YZ plane contour programming
(9) ZX plane contour programming
(10) Polar coordinate interpolation plane (XC plane) contour programming
(11) Cylindrical surface (ZC plane) contour programming
(12) Free contour cylinder blank figure (rotating around the Z-axis)
(13) Free contour cylinder blank figure (rotating around the Y-axis)
(14) Free contour cylinder blank figure (rotating around the X-axis)
5.3 ENLARGEMENT AND REDUCTION ON THE ARBITRARY

FIGURE INPUT SCREEN
When bit 1 (GCN) of parameter No. 27310 is set to 0, a drawing figure is enlarged or reduced with
respect to the center position of the drawing window on the screens for entering arbitrary figure data,
machining simulation, and drawing during machining.
When bit 1 (GCN) of parameter No. 27310 is set to 1, enlargement and reduction are performed with
respect to the center of the figure to be drawn, as done conventionally.
- 408 -
5.3.1 Machining Simulation Screen

respect to the center of the drawing window.
<1> Move the part to be enlarged or reduced to the center of the screen by using soft keys such as
[ ←MOVE] and [MOVE→].
<2> When soft key [LARGE] is pressed, enlargement is performed with respect to the center position of
the simulation screen.
<3> When soft key [SMALL] is pressed, reduction is performed with respect to the center position of the
simulation screen.
5.3.2 Arbitrary Figure Input Screen

respect to the center of the drawing window.
<1> Move the part to be enlarged or reduced to the center of the screen by using soft keys such as
[ ←MOVE] and [MOVE→].
<2> When soft key [LARGE] is pressed, enlargement is performed with respect to the center position of
the arbitrary figure drawing window.
<3> When soft key [SMALL] is pressed, reduction is performed with respect to the center position of the
arbitrary figure drawing window.
5.3.3 Screen for Drawing during Machining

Also on the screen for drawing during machining, enlargement and reduction are performed in the same
way as described in Subsection 5.2.1, "Machining Simulation Screen".
5.4 GROUPING ARBITRARY FIGURE PROGRAMS
5.4.1 Group Range Selection Commands

When a pocketing cycle or emboss machining cycle program is used, a pocket figure and island figures
included in the pocket figure are grouped using group range selection commands.
The grouped figures are then assumed to be target figures for the pocketing cycle or emboss machining
cycle.
G1990: Group range selection start command

G1991: Group range selection end command
(Sample program)
G1990 ; (GROUP START) ← Group range selection start command
G1200 Hh Vv Bb Ll Dd ; (POCKET) ←Pocket figure
G1201 Hh Vv Kk Cc Dd Aa Ll Mm Ss ;
G1202 Hh Vv Rr Ii Jj Cc Dd Ee Pp Qq Ll Mm Ss ;
G1206 ;
G1200 Hh Vv Bb Ll Dd ; (ISLAND-1) ←Island figure
- 409 -
G1206 ;
G1200 Hh Vv Bb Ll Dd ; (ISLAND-2) ←Island figure
G1206 ;
G1991 ; (GROUP END) ← Group range selection end command
When a G code for group range selection is specified for other than pocketing and emboss machining, an
alarm (P/S3598 “GROUP SET MISMATCH”) is issued.
5.4.2 Automatic Insertion of Group Range Selection Commands

When arbitrary figures used in a pocketing cycle or emboss machining cycle are created, the G codes for
group range selection commands (G1990 and G1991) are automatically inserted to the program by
pressing soft key [OK] on the [METHOD OF FREE FIGURE CREATION] screen.
5.5 ARBITRARY FIGURE COPY FUNCTIONS

A specified area of figure can be copied (parallel copy, mirror copy, or rotational copy) for addition as a
new figure on the arbitrary figure creation screen or the contour program input screen.
(1) Parallel copy

A specified area of arbitrary figure is copied specified times after the selected area.
(2) Rotational copy
A specified area of arbitrary figure is copied specified times around specified coordinates after the
selected area.
(3) Mirror copy
A specified area of arbitrary figure is mirror-copied relative to a specified symmetry axis.
5.5.1 Selecting an Arbitrary Figure Copy Function

<1> An arbitrary figure copy function can be selected by pressing the [PARAL], [ROTATE], or
[MIRROR] soft key displayed when the [>] soft key is pressed on the arbitrary figure editing screen.
<2> The arbitrary figure editing screen is displayed:
<3> Pressing the rightmost soft key [>] displays the soft keys for arbitrary figure copy operation.
5.5.2 Copy Condition Input Screen

(1) Parallel copy
Pressing the [PARAL] soft key displays a parallel copy screen.
NUMBER OF REPETITIONC :
Enter the number of times a selected figure is to be copied.
(2) Rotational copy
Pressing the [ROTATE] soft key displays a rotational copy screen.
INPUT TYPE :
Select [CENTER] or [RADIUS] to specify the method of condition input.
CENTER POINT CX, CENTER POINT CY :
Enter the X coordinate and Y coordinate of a rotation center around which a rotation is made.
NUMBER OF REPETITIONC :
Enter the number of times a selected figure is to be copied.
- 410 -
When "BY RADIUS" is selected for "INPUT TYPE", the input items for entering a radius and
rotation direction are displayed.
RADIUS :
Enter the distance from the start or end point of a selected figure to the rotation center point.
ROTATION DIRECTION :
Select [CW] or [CCW] to specify the direction of rotation copy operation.
(3) Mirror copy
Pressing the [MIRROR] soft key displays a mirror copy screen.
SPECIFY OF SYMMETRY :
Use the [COORD] or [ANGLE] soft key to select the method for specifying a symmetry axis.
SYMMETRY AXIS X, SYMMETRY AXIS Y :
Enter X and Y coordinates through which the symmetry axis for mirror copying passes. The
symmetry axis should pass through the end point of a specified figure and these X and Y
coordinates.
When "BY ANGLE" is selected for "SPECIFY OF SYMMETRY", the input item for entering an
angle is displayed.
ANGLE :
Enter the angle between a symmetry axis used for mirror copy operation and the horizontal axis.
The plus direction of the horizontal axis represents 0°. Enter a positive value for an angle made
toward the plus vertical axis direction. Enter a negative value for an angle made toward the
minus vertical axis direction.
+Direction
NOTE
Data entered on the parallel copy input screen, rotation copy input screen, or
mirror copy input screen is not output to the program.
Each figure entered by a type of copy operation is automatically expanded as an
arbitrary figure element, so that each figure can be modified. However, the state
before copy operation cannot be automatically resumed.
5.5.3 Executing Arbitrary Figure Copy Operation

Use the operation procedure described below.
(Example)
Parallel copy
<1> Enter the number of repetition on the copy input screen then press the [OK] soft key.
- 411 -
<2> The screen for specifying an area of figure used as a copy source appears. Move the cursor to
the icon of the figure element at the start of the area, then press the [SELECT] soft key.
Pressing the [CANCEL] soft key returns the screen display to the arbitrary figure editing
screen.
NOTE
A selected copy source ranges from the figure where the cursor is placed when
the [SELECT] soft key is pressed to the last figure.
<3> At this time, the graphic window displays a figure produced by executing copy operations
repeatedly. A figure produced by copying is inserted after the selected copy source.
Pressing the [NO] soft key returns the screen display to the previous step.
<4> Pressing [YES] at the end fixes a figure produced by repeated copy operations.
5.5.4 Figure after Arbitrary Figure Copy Execution

When the screen used for entering a copied figure is opened by selecting [ALTER], the set input items
differ from those set for the figure before being copied, as described below.
For a straight line:
Only the input items "LINE DIRECTION" and "END POINT" are set.
For an arc:
Only the input items "RADIUS" and "END POINT " are set.
If a copy source figure includes a corner R and chamfer, the corner R and chamfer are an arc and straight
line, respectively, in a figure produced by copying.
This is because parallel, rotation, or mirror copy operation is performed according to the end point
information of the copy source figure. So, information such as "NEXT CONNECTION" set for a copy
source figure is not reflected in a figure produced by copying.
NOTE
1 A warning is output if the result of expansion based on an attempt for copy
operation exceeds the maximum allowable number of blocks.
2 The end point of the last selected copy source figure needs to be fixed.
3 The element immediately before a selected copy source figure must not be a
corner R or chamfer. Moreover, the starting element and ending element of a
selected copy source figure must not be a corner R and chamfer.
5.6 EDITING AN ARBITRARY FIGURE SUBPROGRAM
5.6.1 Editing
Follow the steps below.
<1> On the program edit screen, position the cursor on a block specifying an arbitrary figure subprogram
call command (M98P xxxx), and press the <INPUT> key or the [ALTER] soft key.
<2> The arbitrary figure edit screen for the subprogram is displayed.
<3> When editing of an arbitrary figure is completed, the screen display is changed as follows:
• When soft key [OK] is pressed, an existing block in program memory is replaced by the figure
block being entered, then the screen display returns to the main program screen. When another
arbitrary figure is present after the arbitrary figure being edited (when an island figure is
present after an arbitrary figure used as a pocket outer wall figure, for example), the edit screen
for the next arbitrary figure is displayed.
- 412 -
• In pocketing, when soft key [ISLAND] is pressed, an existing block in program memory is
replaced by the figure block being entered, then a new arbitrary figure screen (start point) is
displayed, allowing the operator to enter a new island figure.
<4> On the arbitrary figure edit screen, pressing soft key [CANCEL] displays a confirmation screen
asking the operator whether to cancel editing. If soft key [YES] is selected, the edit operation is
canceled, and the screen display returns to the main program display screen.
NOTE
1 In the subprogram edit mode (when a screen for editing an arbitrary figure is
displayed), any of the operations listed below cancels the subprogram edit
mode. At this time, the selected subprogram is maintained.
• A mode change is made during editing in the foreground.
(Example: When the mode is changed from the edit to MEM mode)
• The screen is changed to an NC screen.
• The power is turned off.
2 In this case, the arbitrary figure edit screen is closed. The program displayed in
the program display area is the subprogram.
5.6.2 Warning
During editing of a subprogram, the following warning messages may be displayed:
• “SUBPROGRAM NUMBER IS NOT FOUND.”

The <INPUT> key or soft key [ALTER] is pressed when the cursor is positioned on a block
specifying a subprogram call command, but the program number specified with address P is not
present.
• “PROGRAM IS PROTECTED.”
specifying a subprogram call command, but the program number specified with address P is
protected and therefore cannot be displayed.
• “NOT SUBPROGRAM OF FREE FIGURE.”
specifying a subprogram call command, but the program specified with address P does not contain
an arbitrary figure block.
• “THIS PROGRAM USED AT F.G.”
In the subprogram edit mode in the background editing, soft key [OK] or [CANCEL] is pressed to
display a calling program, but the calling program is already selected in the foreground.
5.7 SAVING SUBPROGRAMS

Arbitrary figures and fixed-form figures can be saved as subprograms.
NOTE
1 This function is available only when the device used is a CNC memory.
When the device is a data server or a memory card, this function cannot be
used.
2 Use of the undo and redo functions cannot restore an overwritten program to its
original state.
- 413 -
5.7.1 Saving a New Subprogram

<1> After creating an arbitrary figure, press soft key [CREATE]. Then, “METHOD OF FREE FIGURE
CREATION” is displayed as follows:
○ INSERT IN CURRENT PROGRAM

SELECT CREATIVE METHOD
<2> As the method for creating an arbitrary figure, select “CREATE AS SUB PROGRAM”.
<3> Enter a subprogram name (O number), then press soft key [OK].
The block M98P xxxx; is then inserted at the current cursor position automatically, and a
subprogram for the entered figure (xxxx) is created automatically.
Remark)
If a subprogram having the same number (name) is already present, the following soft keys are
displayed:
[YES] : The existing subprogram is overwritten.
Upon completion of the overwrite operation, all windows for the arbitrary figure are
closed.
[NO] : The screen display returns to the “METHOD OF FREE FIGURE CREATION”
window.
5.7.2 Saving an Existing Subprogram

<1> Place the cursor on an existing block specifying a subprogram call command (M98P xxxx), then
press soft key [ALTER] to modify a figure.
<2> After modifying the arbitrary figure, press soft key [CREATE]. Then, “METHOD OF FREE
FIGURE CREATION” is displayed as follows:
○ ALTER CURRENT PROGRAM

SELECT CREATIVE METHOD
<3> As the method for creating an arbitrary figure, select “CREATE AS SUB PROGRAM”.
<4> Enter a subprogram name, then press soft key [OK]. A subprogram for the entered figure is created
automatically.
The call number (xxxx) of the block M98P xxxx ; currently at the cursor position is not changed. As
necessary, change the input call number.
- 414 -
5.8 SELECTING A RANGE OF AN ARBITRARY FIGURE

A range of an arbitrary figure can be specified and machined.
A machining area of an arbitrary figure is specified by specifying the first division point and second
division point as shown in the following figure.
1st division point
2nd division point
5.8.1 G Code for Selecting a Range

(1) Format
Information for selecting a range of an arbitrary figure is specified using the following G code:
G1459 Aa Zz Xx Kk Hh Vv;
SELECTING A RANGE OF AN ARBITRARY FIGURE

Data item Meaning
A DIRECTION ANGLE OF FIRST DIVISION Angle of a division direction at the first division point
POINT
Z Z VALUE OF FIRST DIV.POINT Z coordinate value of the first division point
X DX VALUE OF FIRST DIV.POINT DX coordinate value of the first division point
K DIRECTION ANGLE OF SECOND Angle of a division direction at the second division point
DIVISION POINT
H Z VALUE OF SECOND DIV.POINT Z coordinate value of the second division point
V DX VALUE OF SECOND DIV.POINT DX coordinate value of the second division point
(*) All addresses must be entered.

(*) The angle of a division direction is assumed to be positive if the angle is formed in the
counterclockwise direction with respect to the positive Z-axis direction.
- 415 -
(2) Machining program

• Specifying a machining range in an arbitrary figure program being edited
:
G1120 H__V__ . . . ; : G code specifying machining
G1459 A__Z__X__K__H__V__; : G code for selecting range of arbitrary figure
G1450 H__V__; : Arbitrary figure start command Only the arbitrary figure command
G1451 H__V__ . . . ; that appears first since G1459 is
: specified is regarded as the target
G1456; : Arbitrary figure end command figure.
G1450 H__V__; : Arbitrary figure start command
G1451 H__V__ . . . ; This arbitrary figure command is
: ignored.
G1456; : Arbitrary figure end command
• Specifying a machining range in arbitrary figures registered as a subprogram
:
G1120 H__V__ . . . ; : G code specifying machining
G1459 A__Z__X__K__H__V__; : G code for selecting range of arbitrary figure
M98 P2000; : Call of new subprogram
M98 P2010;
Only the arbitrary figure command that appears first
since G1459 is specified is regarded as the target.
Machining commands that can be the target for the range selection command
G code Machining command
1120 Turning (outer surface roughing)
1121 Turning (inner surface roughing)
1122 Turning (end face roughing)
1123 Turning (outer surface semifinishing)
1124 Turning (inner surface semifinishing)
1125 Turning (end face semifinishing)
1126 Turning (outer surface finishing)
1127 Turning (inner surface finishing)
1128 Turning (end face finishing)
5.8.2 Basic Operation

(1) Soft keys for specifying an arbitrary figure range
Soft keys [S AREA] and [D AREA] for the arbitrary figure range selection function are displayed.
<1> Soft key [S AREA]

Enters the range selection mode.
<2> Soft key [D AREA]
Initializes range selection information.
NOTE
1 When an arbitrary figure is newly created, range selection information is
initialized.
2 When bit 2 (ARA) of parameter No. 27100 is set to 1, this function is disabled.
- 416 -
(2) Changing to the arbitrary figure range specification screen

Pressing soft key [S AREA] enters the range specification mode.
When soft key [D AREA] is pressed, the row of soft keys [YES] and [NO] is displayed, and the message
“ARE YOU SURE WANT TO INIT SELECT AREA?” is displayed.
If soft key [YES] is pressed in response to the message, the range selection information is initialized, and
the message “SELECT AREA INITIALIZE” is displayed. If soft key [NO] is pressed, the screen display
returns to the previous screen.
(3) Arbitrary figure range selection screen

When the range selection mode is entered, the title bar message changes to “SELECT AREA”, and soft
keys for range selection are displayed.
The division point being selected is indicated with a yellow arrow, and the other division point not
selected is indicated with a dark gray arrow.
When the arbitrary figure is edited after a selected range is determined, selection information is
initialized.
<1> Soft key [ARROW]

The division direction at the selected division point is specified by pressing an arrow soft key.
<2> Soft key [P1/P2]
Alternately selects the division points to be modified.
The selected division point is indicated on the left side of the coordinate indication.
<3> Soft key [OK]
Determines a selected range and returns to the arbitrary figure creation screen.
<4> Soft key [INIT]
Selects end points of a part element as the first division point and second division point.
The arrow directions are tangent to the part element.
<5> Soft key [FREE P]
Opens an arbitrary point specification window for a selected division point.
<6> Soft key [FREE A]
Opens an arbitrary angle specification window for a selected division point.
<7> Soft key [CANCEL]
Displays the arbitrary figure creation screen without determining a selected range.
<8> Cursor move keys <←><→>
The arrow specifying a division point on the screen is moved by using the MDI cursor move keys
<←> and <→>.
NOTE
If there are same elements which start point and end point is the same in
arbitrary figure, the arrow for specifying division points P1/P2 might not move by
cursors.
(4) Arbitrary point specification window

A division point can be moved to coordinates other than end points of an arbitrary figure element.
Pressing soft key [FREE P] displays the following arbitrary point specification window:
SELECT DIVISION COORD.
DIVISION COORD. DX DX=

DIVISION COORD. Z Z=
INPUT DIVISION POINT
- 417 -
When the window is opened, the coordinates of the current division point are initially displayed.
When a specified point is not present on elements of an arbitrary figure, the cursor is set at a point on an
arbitrary figure element near the specified division point.
<1> Soft key [OK]

Determines an arbitrary point and displays the arbitrary figure range selection screen.
Re-drawing is performed with the arrow specifying the division point aligned to the specified point.
The coordinates of the division point are set as arguments of the G code specifying an arbitrary
figure range.
Displays the arbitrary figure range selection screen without determining an arbitrary point.
(5) Arbitrary angle specification window

An angle can be specified for the division direction of a division point.
Pressing soft key [FREE P] displays a window for specifying an arbitrary angle.
Specify the division angle, assuming that the positive direction is the counterclockwise direction and the
negative direction is the clockwise direction with respect to the positive Z-axis direction set in a
coordinate system setting parameter.
When the window is opened, the angle of the arrow of the current division point is initially displayed.
<1> Soft key [OK]

Determines an arbitrary angle and displays the arbitrary figure range selection screen.
Re-drawing is performed so that the arrow specifying the division point is set at the specified angle.
Displays the arbitrary figure range selection screen without determining an arbitrary angle.
(6) Saving an arbitrary figure

When an arbitrary figure is created on the arbitrary figure creation screen after division point information
is determined, a G code is created.
For the output format, see Subsection 5.8.1, "G Code for Selecting a Range".
(7) Modifying arbitrary figure range selection information

When an arbitrary figure G code or a range selection G code is selected, range selection information can
be modified by pressing soft key [ALTER].
When an arbitrary figure range selection G code and an arbitrary figure G code are defined in separate
locations, the error message “G-CODE FOR SELECT AREA IS WRONG” is displayed.
(8) Drawing of an arbitrary figure

Even when a range selection G code is selected, an arbitrary figure is drawn.
- 418 -
5.8.3 Machining of a Divided Area

(1) Area division direction
Specify area division directions in which a blank element is present.
Part Blank
Part
Blank
Division points
(2) Area division elements

There are two types of element attributes added when areas are divided: the part element and boundary
element.
<1> If a division line is at an end point of a part element (a line segment or arc) and the angle formed by
the part elements adjoining at the division point is smaller than 180°, the added element attribute is
the part element.
Angle
Blank
Division point
<2> If a division point is at an end point of an element (a line segment or arc) of a part element and the
angle formed by the boundary element and the adjoining part element that is included in the cutting
area is 180° or more, the attribute of the added element is the part element.
Angle
Part
Division point Blank
<3> If the two division points match, the attribute of the added element is the part element.
Part Division point
Blank
<4> If a division point is neither <1>, <2>, nor <3> above, the attribute of the added element is the
boundary element.
- 419 -
Part Part
Blank Blank
Division point Division point
<5> If the division direction at an end point of a part element overlaps a blank element, the attribute is the
boundary element as shown.
Blank
Part
Part
Blank
End point of part

element Boundary element
Blank element and
division direction overlap
<6> If the division direction at an end point of a part element does not overlap a blank element, the blank
element remains unchanged as shown.
Part
Part
Blank Blank
End point of part
element
Blank element remains
unchanged.
Blank element and division direction do not overlap
(3) Machining motion for each element

<1> For a blank element, cutting is performed additionally by (clearance + nose radius R).
• If the excessive amount of travel is (clearance + nose radius R) (bit 0 (BLN) of parameter No.
27120= 1)
Blank
element
Clearance
Nose radius R
- 420 -
• If the excessive amount of travel is the nose radius R (bit 0 (BLN) of parameter No. 27120= 0)
Blank
Nose radius R
<2> For a part element, cutting is performed inside the element by (finishing allowance + nose radius R).
Part
element Nose radius R
Finishing allowance
<3> For a boundary element, the nose center is on the boundary, so the actually cut area is outside the
boundary element by the nose radius R.
Boundary
Nose radius R
* In semifinishing and finishing, blank figures are ignored, and cutting is performed along part figures
only. Boundary elements are regarded as part elements.
(4) Settings that disable machining

When the following settings are made, the alarm “G CODE FOR SELECT AREA IS WRONG” is issued.
<1> A division point is defined on a part element, but the division direction is toward the outside of the
arbitrary figure.
(When the division point is not at an end point of a part element)
- 421 -
Part Part Blank

Blank
Division Division
point points
Part
Blank
Division
points
<2> A division point is not on a part element.

Division
point
Division
point
Part Part Blank
Blank
<3> The intersection between the blank element and the first division and the intersection between the
blank element and the second division are at the same point, or the division line drawn from the first
division point and the division line from the second division point intersect (the figure resulting from
the division has no blank element).
Part Part
Blank Blank
Division Division
points points
<4> The division line from the first division point or second division point is toward a part element.
(Cases where the division line from a division point overlaps with a part element are also included.)
Part
Overlapped with
part element Blank
Intersecting with
part element Division
point
(5) Restrictions
<1> When specified division directions from a part figure to blank figure are the same, the two boundary
lines connecting the part and blank are both treated as part elements.
- 422 -
When a range is selected as shown in the following figure, the boundary line is treated as a part, a
tool angle check is made, then part <1> is cut.
Blank
Part
Division points
<1> Boundary
element
Because boundary element is treated

as part element, a tool angle check is
made, and an uncut part is generated.
5.9 BLANK CONTOUR CHANGING FUNCTION OF TURNING

FIGURE
The blank contour of turning figure can be changed on turning figure range selection window.
A turning figure can be machined separately for two or more parts by using together the range selection
function of part.
B
A
A turning figure can be machined separately for A and B.
5.9.1 Usable Cycle

(1) G1120 : Turning cycle (outer surface roughing / without simultaneous end facing)
(2) G1121 : Turning cycle (inner surface roughing / without simultaneous end facing)
(3) G1122 : Turning cycle (end face roughing)
(4) G1123 : Turning cycle (outer surface semifinishing)
(5) G1124 : Turning cycle (inner surface semifinishing)
(6) G1125 : Turning cycle (end face semifinishing)
(7) G1126 : Turning cycle (outer surface finishing)
(8) G1127 : Turning cycle (inner surface finishing)
(9) G1128 : Turning cycle (end face finishing)
- 423 -
5.9.2 Unusable Cycle

(1) If G1459 command is executed for the following machining cycles, the alarm "WRONG RANGE
SELECTION" occurs. And machining cycle stops.
<1> G1120 : Turning cycle (outer surface roughing / with simultaneous end facing)
<2> G1121 : Turning cycle (inner surface roughing / with simultaneous end facing)
<3> G1150 : Turning cycle (outer surface roughing and finishing)
<4> G1151 : Turning cycle (inner surface roughing and finishing)
<5> G1152 : Turning cycle (end face roughing and finishing)
<6> G1129 : Conical Boring cycle
(2) If G1459 command is executed for the following machining cycles, G1459 command is ignored, and
the blank contour is not changed.
<1> G1130 : Turning groove cycle (outer surface roughing)
<2> G1131 : Turning groove cycle (inner surface roughing)
<3> G1132 : Turning groove cycle (end face roughing)
<4> G1133 : Turning groove cycle (outer surface roughing and finishing)
<5> G1134 : Turning groove cycle (inner surface roughing and finishing)
<6> G1135 : Turning groove cycle (end face roughing and finishing)
<7> G1136 : Turning groove cycle (outer surface finishing)
<8> G1137 : Turning groove cycle (inner surface finishing)
<9> G1138 : Turning groove cycle (end face finishing)
5.9.3 Necessary Parameter Setting

Please set parameter ARA(No.27100#2) to 0.
Please set parameter BLK(No.27100#6) to 1.
5.9.4 Operation
5.9.4.1 Window for selection of turning figure range
The range of blank can be selected on window for selection of turning figure range of ZX plane turning
figure.
(1) SELECT AREA(BLANK) window is displayed by pressing soft key [S BLK].

(2) Division point and division angle which were set on SELECT AREA(BLANK) window is deleted
by pressing soft key [D BLK].
5.9.4.2 Window for selection of blank contour range

SELECT AREA(BLANK) window is displayed by pressing soft key [S BLK].
Division point and division angle can be specified by soft key.
- 424 -
The following soft keys are displayed. Operation detail of each soft key is same as range selection of
turning figure. Please refer OPERATOR’S MANUAL(B-63874EN/10)"5.8 SELECTING A RANGE OF
AN ARBITRARY FIGURE" for detail.
Page 1
Page 2
(*) If one division point is the same as end point of part, please set the direction of division angle
on the following conditions.
- Turns outside of blank contour.
- Two division directions of division point of blank element do not intersect.
Division angle(blank)
Two division directions do not intersect Cutting Area
End point of part

Blank element
Part element Part element

Blank element
5.9.4.3 Window for specification of arbitrary point

The following arbitrary point specification window is displayed by pressing soft key [FREE P].
Input position of division point.
5.9.4.4 Window for specification arbitrary angle

The following arbitrary angle specification window is displayed by pressing soft key [FREE A].
Input division angle of division point.
- 425 -
5.9.4.5 Delete of division point and division angle of blank contour

Division point and division angle of blank contour are deleted by pressing soft key [D BLK].
(1) When soft key [YES] is pressed

Division point and division angle of blank element are deleted, and the message "SELECT AREA
INITIALIZE" is displayed.
If the turning figure is saved after division point and division angle are deleted, address of SELECT
AREA(BLANK) are not output into select area G code (G1459).
(2) When soft key [NO] is pressed

Soft key display returns to the previous soft key.
5.9.4.6 Initialize of division point and division angle of blank contour

In cases of the following, division point and division angle of blank contour are initialized.
(1) When SELECT AREA(BLANK) window is opened for the first time, after the arbitrary figure is
newly opened.
(2) When the turning figure element is changed after division point and division angle are set in
SELECT AREA(BLANK) window, and SELECT AREA(BLANK) window is opened again.
(3) When soft key[INIT] is pressed on SELECT AREA(BLANK) window.
(*) When the division points are initialized, the first division point and the second division point
become the edge points of the first element and the final element of the part element.
The arrow directions are tangent to the part element.
5.9.4.7 G-code format of division point and division angle

The division point and the division angle are output to the argument of the G1459 block.
(1) Example
G1459A0.Z-20.X10.K90.H-30.V20.B90.C-20.D10.P0.Q-30.R20.
G1450H0.V0.A0.
G1451H-20.V0.K5.C-20.L0.M0.T2.
：
G1451H0.V0.K7.D0.L0.M0.T2.
G1456
(2) Format
<1> When both the part division and the blank division are output.
G1459 Aa Zz Xx Kk Hh Vv Bb Cc Dd Pp Qq Rr ;
<2> When the part division is output.
G1459 Aa Zz Xx Kk Hh Vv ;
<3> When the blank division is output.

- 426 -
G1459 Bb Cc Dd Pp Qq Rr ;
<4> When neither the part division nor the blank division is set, or when all division point and
division angle are deleted by soft key [D AREA] and [D BLK].G1459 is not output.

DIRECTION ANGLE OF FIRST DIVISION A Angle of a division direction at the first division point
POINT
Z VALUE OF FIRST DIV.POINT Z Z coordinate value of the first division point
DX VALUE OF FIRST DIV.POINT X DX coordinate value of the first division point
DIRECTION ANGLE OF SECOND DIVISION K Angle of a division direction at the second division
POINT point
Z VALUE OF SECOND DIV.POINT H Z coordinate value of the second division point
DX VALUE OF SECOND DIV.POINT V DX coordinate value of the second division point
DIRECTION ANGLE OF FIRST DIVISION B Angle of a division direction at the first division
POINT(BLK) point(BLK)
Z VALUE OF FIRST DIV.POINT(BLK) C Z coordinate value of the first division point(BLK)
DX VALUE OF FIRST DIV.POINT(BLK) D DX coordinate value of the first division point(BLK)
DIRECTION ANGLE OF SECOND DIVISION P Angle of a division direction at the second division
POINT(BLK) point(BLK)
Z VALUE OF SECOND DIV.POINT(BLK) Q Z coordinate value of the second division point(BLK)
DX VALUE OF SECOND DIV.POINT(BLK) R DX coordinate value of the second division point(BLK)
5.9.5 Modification of Cutting Area in Machining Cycle

When the division point and the division angle are specified, the cutting area is modified as follows.
(1) Division of part element

When the division point is specified for turning figure, the part element is divided.
Part element
First division point(blank) Part element
Second division point(blank) Blank element Blank element
(2) Modification of cutting area

When the division angle is specified, the blank element is added from the division point to the blank
contour and the cutting area is modified.
Additional blank element

Cutting area
Blank element
Part element Part element
Blank element
- 427 -
5.9.6 Restriction
Setting of division point has the following restrictions.
(1) The division point cannot be set out of the part element. If the division point was edited on the
program edit screen, the alarm might occur or invalid path might be made.
(2) In this case, the division point on the program doesn't change from the division point before the
turning figure is changed. And the alarm might occur or an illegal path might be made.
- The turning figure is changed by opening the changing window after the division point and the
division angle are set.
- And division point and the division angle of the range selection are not set again by SELECT
AREA(BLANK) window.
(3) If machining cycle is executed on any of the following condition, the alarm "WRONG RANGE
- 428 -
<1> Direction of division turns outside of the turning figure.
Blank Blank
Part Blank
Part
Part
Division point (BLK)

<2> Division point (BLK) is not defined on the part element.

Part
Part Blank
Blank
<3> Division directions intersect.
Part
Blank
<4> Division angles are specified for opposite directions.
Part
Blank
<5> This function is invalid and the arguments of this function are specified.
(4) If machining cycle is executed on the following conditions, the alarm "WRONG RANGE
<1> Both the range selection (part) and the range selections (blank) are set.
- 429 -
<2> Either of the division point of the range selection (part) exists outside of the contour trimmed
by the range selection (blank).
The contour trimmed by the range selection (BLK )
Blank
Part
The division point of the range selection (parts)
(5) In case of turning cycle (with simultaneous end facing), the alarm "WRONG RANGE
SELECTION" occurs . And machining cycle stops.
(6) When the difference of two steps or more exists, the air cutting might be generated.
(Example)
Air cutting
Air cutting
Cutting area Cutting area
- 430 -
(7) when the figure is divided on the range selection of blank, tool path is the same in case that the
divided area was entered on the input screen of free figure. And also, when the figure is divided on
the range selection of blank, the division line is treated as the blank element. In case of the blank
element, by the reason that only “clearance amount + nose radius” is cut too much, there is the case
that part of the figure which was the part element before division is cut.
Division point(BLK)
Part Blank
Part
Blank
Enlarge the part of cutting out
Clearance
Nose radius R
Cut out the part of

original figure
- 431 -
5.10 REUSING ARBITRARY FIGURES

When arbitrary figures for cycle machining are created, an arbitrary figure programmed as a subprogram
can be read for reuse.
5.10.1 Calling an Arbitrary Figure

<1> On the “START POINT - INSERT” screen for an arbitrary figure, press soft key [REUSE].
<2> The following soft keys are displayed:
BLANK SUB PRO RETURN
[BLANK] : Reuses blank figure data included in the currently edited program.
[SUB PRO] : Calls an arbitrary figure defined as a subprogram.
[RETURN] : Returns to the “START POINT - INSERT” screen.
5.10.2 Selecting a Subprogram

When soft key [SUB PRO] is pressed, the “REUSE” window for existing figures is opened, displaying a
list of registered arbitrary figure subprograms. Move the cursor to the subprogram for the arbitrary figure
to be reused.
(1) Items in the REUSE window

(a) CURRENT FOLDER
A list of subprograms stored in the folder of the program currently edited is displayed.
(b) CNC_MEM/USER/LIBRARY
A list of programs stored in a common folder is displayed.
(2) MDI keyboard

<1> Cursor move keys <←><→>
Switches between radio buttons.
<2> Cursor move keys <↑><↓>
Moves the cursor for selecting a subprogram.
(3) Soft keys

<1> Soft key [OK]
Inserts the figure of a selected subprogram, and displays the “START POINT - ALTER”
window.
Cancels a selected subprogram, and returns to the “START POINT - INSERT” window.
NOTE
1 The following subprograms cannot be selected:
• Subprograms containing no arbitrary figure
• Subprograms containing an incomplete arbitrary figure
If such a subprogram is selected, the error message “THERE IS NO FIGURE
CODE TO REUSE.” is displayed.
2 The subprogram including contour program cannot be recycled.
- 432 -
5.11 REUSING A BLANK FIGURE AS AN ARBITRARY FIGURE

On the start point input screen displayed during definition of an arbitrary figure on the ZX plane, an
already programmed blank figure can be called and reused as an arbitrary figure.
5.11.1 Basic Operation

<1> On the start point input screen for a turning figure on the ZX plane, soft key [REUSE] is displayed.
<2> Press soft key [REUSE]. The values of start point coordinates DX and Z are then input automatically.
(Even when values have been entered before soft key [REUSE] is pressed, these values are
overwritten.)
<3> Press soft key [OK]. A blank figure that has been programmed in advance is converted to a blank
element and inserted to the turning figure on the ZX plane.
<4> Add part elements to the inserted blank figure to complete the turning figure on the ZX plane.
NOTE
If there is no turning blank figure, the alarm “BLANK FIGURE IS NOT FOUND.”
is displayed, and the screen display returns to the ZX plane turning figure
insertion screen.
5.11.2 Reusable Blank Figures

Reusable blank figures are listed below.
Only blank figures that are defined with the Z-axis as the center are supported.
(1) Column (G1900)
(2) Column with a hole (G1901)
(3) Prism (G1903)
(4) Prism with a hole (G1904)
(5) Arbitrary column(G1970)
5.11.3 Conditions of Blank Figure Data for Reuse

(1) Recording of blank figure data to be reused
<1> When a target blank figure has been created or edited, then registered, its blank figure data is
internally saved and is used as reuse data on the ZX plane turning figure input screen.
<2> When a machining program is opened using O LIST and so forth, blocks from the beginning of
the program to up to the block set in parameter No. 27118 (SRCHBLNK) are analyzed, and
target blank figure data that is encountered first is internally saved to use it as reuse data on the
machining figure input screen.
<3> When a multipath lathe is used, a blank figure defined in a selected machining program is
internally saved as reuse data for each path.
(2) Initialization of reused blank figure data
<1> Saved blank figure data is cleared when the power is turned off.
<2> If part of blank figure data that is the first target in a block set in parameter No. 27118
(SRCHBLNK) is deleted (for example, only blank width B of a rectangular prism is deleted),
the blank figure data saved for reuse is cleared.
<3> In case of <2> in (1) above, when target blank figure data is not found in blocks from the
beginning of a program to a block set in parameter No. 27118 (SRCHBLNK), the clear
operation is not performed.
- 433 -
* Additional information about internal saving of target blank figure data that is encountered first
When bit 1 (P1) of parameter No. 27095 is set to 1, and bit 3 (USE) of parameter No. 27100 is set to
1, if one machining program contains blank definitions of an free contour cylinder blank figure and
another blank figure (reusable) in this order, the blank data of both figures is internally saved.
If blank definitions of another blank figure (reusable) and an free contour cylinder blank figure are
present in this order, only the former blank figure (reusable) is internally saved.
NOTE
1 The reuse function is enabled when one machining program contains one blank
figure block. If one machining program contains more than one target blank
figure, and a machining figure block for the second or a subsequent target blank
figure is to be edited, the corresponding blank figure block must be registered
again in advance to reuse data correctly.
2 If a block within the range set by parameter No. 27118 (SRCHBLNK) contains a
subprogram, a target blank figure block in it cannot be reused.
5.12 AUTOMATIC BLANK ELEMENT CONNECTION FUNCTION

In figure definition of an arbitrary figure on the ZX plane, the arbitrary figure can be closed by
automatically creating blank elements after part elements are entered.
NOTE
If a problem occurs because the part figure and blank figure overlap as a result
of blank figure connection, editing is required not to prevent the part figure and
blank figure from overlapping.
5.12.1 Blank Element Connection Soft Key

On the fourth page of the arbitrary figure input screen, soft key [BLCONT] is displayed. When this soft
key is pressed, a blank figure line is displayed as a candidate for connecting the blank figure part for a
defined part figure.
NOTE
1 If an arbitrary figure is already closed when soft key [BLCONT] is pressed, the
alarm “ALREADY FIGURE IS CLOSED” is issued, and the screen display
returns to the arbitrary figure input screen.
If only a start point is defined, the alarm “ELEMENT DEFINITION DATA IS
LACK.” is issued. If the end point is not determined, the alarm “END POINT OF
SELECTED FIGURE IS NOT FIXED.” is issued.
2 A candidate blank figure line for connection is connected from the end point to
start point of a part figure in parallel to the Z- or X-axis.
3 When a candidate overlaps with a defined element, the defined figure is
displayed in front.
5.12.2 Soft Keys for Selecting a Blank Connection Figure

For an entered part figure, two blank connection candidates are drawn, and soft keys for selecting one of
the two are displayed.
<1> Select a blank figure “TRGET1” or “TRGET2” to select outer surface machining or inner surface
machining.
- 434 -
<2> After soft key [TRGET1] or [TRGET2] is pressed, the message “SELECT BLANK IS
CONNECTION?” is displayed.
<3> If “YES” is pressed, the blank figure is connected, then the screen display returns to the arbitrary
figure input screen.
<4> If “NO” is pressed, nothing is performed, and the screen display returns to the arbitrary figure input
screen.
5.13 EXPANDED ARBITRARY FIGURE ELEMENT NUMBER

(FOR Series 30i/31i/32i)
The number of elements for arbitrary figures with G-code G1450 to G1456, for Turning operation in XZ
plane, can be extended from 90 elements to 300 elements.
5.13.1 Restrictions
(1) This function is not available in contour programming function.
(2) When arbitrary figures are inserted in the main program or outputted to a subprogram, Undo and
Redo function cannot be used.
5.14 DRAWING OF ARBITRARY FIGURE ON SUB-PROGRAM

LIST SCREEN
The arbitrary figure, stored in a subprogram, can be drawn on the subprogram list screen.
5.14.1 Display Sub-Program List Screen

(1) When the sub-program list screen is opened and parameter No.14855#2=1, then the arbitrary figure
display area and [VIEW] soft key are displayed.
When [VIEW] soft key is pressed during displaying arbitrary figure area, then the arbitrary figure
display area closes and comment display area is displayed all over the window.
arbitrary figure
display area
(2) As soon as the cursor is positioned over a sub-program, the retrieval of the arbitrary figure contained
in the sub-program is started. When there is an arbitrary figure in the sub-program, the message
"NOW DRAWING" is displayed at the center of the arbitrary figure display area during the retrieval.
The retrieval is interrupted by pressing the cursor keys [↑] [↓], and the retrieval of the arbitrary
figure of the next sub-program starts.
- 435 -
(3) After finishing the retrieval, its shape is drawn in the arbitrary figure display area.
NOTE
When the following operations are executed while the message "NOW
DRAWING" is displayed, the behavior by the operation is done after drawing
arbitrary figure.
(1) Changing of NC screen by function key.
(2) Mode switching
(3) Changing of path
(4) Pressing of each soft-key
(5) Short cut operation (MDI key operation) and cursor key operation
(6) Pressing of edit operation key (ALTER, DELETE, and INSERT)
5.14.2 Available Drawing Figure

The available drawing figure is as follows.
(1) When the sub-program contains an arbitrary figure, an free contour cylinder blank figure or a
contour program, then the arbitrary figure is drawn on the arbitrary figure display area.
(2) When there is more than one figure in the sub-program, then only the first figure is drawn. However,
all figures belonging to the same group are drawn together. For example, the island is drawn
together with its corresponding pocket.
(3) When the sub-program does not contain any figure, then no arbitrary figure is drawn.
- 436 -
6.NC PROGRAM CONVERSION
B-63874EN/11 MACHINING CYCLE FUNCTION
6 NC PROGRAM CONVERSION FUNCTION

Pressing the soft key [NC CNV] starts the NC program conversion function.
With the NC program conversion function, a 4-digit G cycle machining command can be dissolved into a
single move command and stored in the part program storage area of the NC.
6.1 OVERVIEW
(1) With the NC program conversion function, only a 4-digit G cycle machining command can be
dissolved into a single move command. Any other types of commands are output without
modification.
(2) The NC program conversion function can be used in the MEM mode only.
(3) Only an executed block becomes an NC program conversion target.
(4) A block containing an M98, M99, or custom macro program is not output to the conversion
destination program.
(5) In the case of multiple paths, NC program conversion is performed for each path.
(6) If there is a loop or conditional branch program of a custom macro program, executed blocks only
are output. A block containing a conditional branch program of a custom macro is not output to the
conversion destination program.
(7) If a loop or conditional branch program of a custom macro program includes a 4-digit G cycle, the
4-digit G cycle is expanded as many times as the number of repeats. A block containing a
conditional branch program of a custom macro is not output to the conversion destination program.
(8) Whether to output a 4-digit G cycle machining command before expansion as a comment can be
chosen using bit 5 (NCC) of parameter No. 14703.
Bit 5 (NCC) of parameter No. 14703 = 0:
Outputs a 4-digit G cycle machining command before expansion as a comment in NC program
conversion.
Bit 5 (NCC) of parameter No. 14703 = 1:
Does not output a 4-digit G cycle machining command before expansion as a comment in NC
program conversion.
(9) In the case of a subprogram call, see the examples below. A block containing M98 or M99 is not
output to the conversion destination program.
(Example 1)
(Before conversion)
O0001
M98 P0002; → O0002
M30; G0 X100. ;
% G0 X200. ;
G0 X300. ;
(After conversion) M99;
O0001 %
G0 X100. ;
G0 X200. ;
G0 X300. ;
M30;
%
(Example 2)
(Before conversion)
O0001
G1128I1.R0.8A95.B80.J3.P3.L3.M0.F0.5X1.Y1.Z10. ;
- 437 -
6. NC PROGRAM
CONVERSION FUNCTION MACHINING CYCLE B-63874EN/11
M98 P0002; →
O0002
M30; G1450H0.V75. ;
% G1451H0.V0.K7.D0.L0.M0.T1. ;
G1451H5.V0.K1.C5.L0.M0.T1. ;
G1451H5.V75.K3.D75.L0.M0.T2. ;
G1456;
(After conversion) M99;
O0001 %
(NC PROGRAM CONVERSION-START);
G01X963Z1616;
G01X896 Z1654;
:
(NC PROGRAM CONVERSION-END);
M30;
%
6.2 BASIC OPERATION

Selecting MEM mode on the machine operator’s panel, and pressing the leftmost soft key [<] or rightmost
soft key [>] several times displays the soft-keys including soft key [NC CNV]
<1> The [CREATE PROGRAM FOR DESTINATION] screen appears. Enter the number of a
conversion destination program, then press the [CREATE] soft key.
CREATE CANCEL
<2> If the program already exists, a message for checking if the program may be overwritten is displayed.
If the program may be overwritten, press soft key [YES]. If you press soft key NO], the screen goes
back to the memory program screen, so press soft key [NC CNV] again and enter other program
number.
<3> Press the soft key [CREATE] soft key. A new program with the entered number is created. The NC
program conversion function screen is displayed, on which the conversion source program window
and the resultant program window are displayed at the same time. Pressing soft key [CANCEL]
switches the screen display from the NC program conversion function screen to the program screen.
<4> The following soft keys appear on the NC program conversion function screen. Press soft key
[START] to start NC program conversion.
DEST. START PROCES SINGLE STOP OPEN REWIND N SRCH RETURN
[DEST.] : Creates a new conversion destination program.

[START] : Starts NC program conversion execution.
[PAUSE] : Stops NC program conversion execution temporarily.
[SINGLE] : Executes NC program conversion block by block.
[STOP] : Stops NC program conversion execution.
[OPEN] : Selects a conversion source program from the program list screen.
- 438 -
[REWIND] : Searches for a conversion source program.
[N SRCH] : Makes an N search for a conversion source program.
[CHPATH] : Displayed only when the multi-path option is specified. This soft key switches between
paths.
[RETURN] : Ends the NC program conversion function and returns the screen display to the ordinary
MEM mode screen.
* When bit 0 (PRC) of parameter No. 27310 = 1, the soft key [PAUSE] is replaced with the soft
key [PROCES].
[PROCES] : Executes NC program conversion process by process.
<5> During executing NC program conversion, the converted part program blocks are displayed in the
destination window.
<6> Confirm that the NC program conversion ends, then press soft key [RETURN].
DEST. START PROCES SINGLE STOP OPEN REWIND N SRCH RETURN
NOTE
In Series 0i-D/30i/31i/32i, the soft key [N SRCH] is not displayed.
6.3 RESTRICTIONS
(1) The NC program conversion function cannot be used during background editing.
(2) Blocks containing the following words are not output to the conversion destination program:
• M98
• M99
• Custom macro conditional branch program
<1> GOTO
<2> IF
<3> THEN
<4> WHILE
<5> END
• Custom macro variable assignment program
#?=~
• Custom macro external output command program
<1> POPEN
<2> PCLOS
<3> BPRNT[~]
<4> DPRNT[~]
(3) If an alarm is issued during NC program conversion, the results of conversion at that time are output
to the conversion destination program.
(4) During NC program conversion, the following soft keys cannot be used:
[DEST.], [START], [OPEN], [REWIND], [SRCH], [CHPATH], [RETURN]
(5) If an execution mode other than MEM mode is set during NC program conversion, the execution of
NC program conversion is terminated forcibly.
(6) During NC program conversion, the screen display cannot be switched to the NC screen.
(7) If only one block is inserted between WHILE programs, blocks as many as the loop count are not
output but only one block is output.
(Before conversion)
WHILE [#1 EQ #2]DO1;
G0 X0. ;
END1 ;
(After conversion) Only one block is output even if three loop operations are performed.
- 439 -
6. NC PROGRAM
G0 X0. ;
(8) In Series 30i/31i/32i, if the is the block of M198, the alarm will occurred.
(9) The NC program conversion function is designed to expand a 4-digit G cycle machining code. So,
NC program conversion is not performed as expected in cases other than the cases indicated below.
(Example 1) When both the machining command and figure command of a cycle are present on the
main program
O0001
G1128I1.R0.8A95.B80.J3.P3.L3.M0.F0.5X1.Y1.Z10. ;
G1450H0.V75. ;
G1451H0.V0.K7.D0.L0.M0.T1. ;
G1451H5.V0.K1.C5.L0.M0.T1. ;
G1451H5.V75.K3.D75.L0.M0.T2. ;
G1456;
M30;
%
(Example 2) When the figure command of a cycle is present on a subprogram

O0001
G1128I1.R0.8A95.B80.J3.P3.L3.M0.F0.5X1.Y1.Z10. ;
M98 P0002; → O0002
M30; G1450H0.V75. ;
% G1451H0.V0.K7.D0.L0.M0.T1. ;
G1451H5.V0.K1.C5.L0.M0.T1. ;
G1451H5.V75.K3.D75.L0.M0.T2. ;
G1456;
M99;
%
* It is assumed that the subprogram includes only the figure command of a cycle.
(10) Executed program blocks are the target of NC statement conversion.

(11) Feedrate command is converted with decimal point
(12) When custom macro block exits before executing stop command (M00, M01, M02, M30, M99),
executing stop command (M00, M01, M02, M30, M99) is not converted.
(13) When M98 block exits before executing stop command (M00, M01, M02, M30, M99), executing
stop command (M00, M01, M02, M30, M99) is not converted.
(14) A block including M198 is not converted.
(15) In order to convert tool radius/tool nose radius compensation (G41,G42) , it is necessary to set
parameters No.27480#0=1 and No.27483#3=1.
(16) The following commands can not be converted.
<G-code command>
Command Function machine control type
G02.4 3-dimensional coordinate system conversion Common to Lathe System

G03.4 CW/CCW / Machining Center System
AI contour control (high-precision contour control
Common to Lathe System
G05 compatible command), High-speed cycle machining,
/ Machining Center System
High-speed binary program operation
AI contour control / Nano smoothing / Smooth Common to Lathe System
G05.1
interpolation / Machining Center System
- 440 -

G05.4 HRV3, 4 on/off
G06.2 NURBS interpolation
AI contour control (advanced preview control
G08 Machining Center System
compatible command)
Tool radius/tool nose radius compensation : Common to Lathe System
G39
corner circular interpolation / Machining Center System
G41.2 3-dimensional cutter compensation : left (type 1)
3-dimensional cutter compensation : leading edge Common to Lathe System
G41.3
offset / Machining Center System
3-dimensional cutter compensation : left (type 1) Common to Lathe System
G41.4
(FS16i-compatible command) / Machining Center System
3-dimensional cutter compensation : left (type 1) Common to Lathe System
G41.5
G41.6 3-dimensional cutter compensation : left (type 2)
G42.2 3-dimensional cutter compensation : right (type 1)
3-dimensional cutter compensation : right (type 1) Common to Lathe System
G42.4
3-dimensional cutter compensation : right (type 1) Common to Lathe System
G42.5
G42.6 3-dimensional cutter compensation : right (type 2)
G43.4 Tool center point control (type 1)
G43.5 Tool center point control (type 2)
G43.7 Tool offset
G44.1 Tool offse conversion
G66 Macro modal call A
G66.1 Macro modal call B
G72.1 Figure copying (rotary copy)
G72.2 Figure copying (linear copy)
G73 Peck drilling cycle Machining Center System
G73.7 Closed loop cutting cycle Machining Center System
G72 Traverse grinding cycle Lathe System
G73 Traverse direct sizing/grinding cycle Lathe System
G74 Oscillation grinding cycle Lathe System
G75 Oscillation direct sizing/grinding cycle Lathe System
- 441 -
6. NC PROGRAM
<Other command>
,C OPTIONAL ANGLE CHAMFERING AND

Machining Center System
,R CORNER ROUNDING
C
CHAMFERING AND CORNER ROUNDING Lathe System
R
,A
,C DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSIONS PROGRAMMING Lathe System
,R
6.4 OMITTING MODAL COMMANDS IN NC PROGRAM

CONVERSION
During NC program conversion, if a command to output is a modal command, its output can be omitted.
6.4.1 Omissible Modal Commands
During NC program conversion, if a command to output is a modal command, it can be omitted.
The following G code commands can be omitted:

G code command: G0 G1 G2 G3
For the G code commands G0, G1, G2, and G3, the following axis addresses and feedrate command can
be omitted:
Axis address : X Y Z A B C E
Feedrate command :F
6.4.2 Specifications for Omitting Modal Commands

When bit 4 (MOT) of parameter No. 14700 is set to 1, the output of a command is suppressed if the
command is a modal command.
Only commands that are output during 4-digt G cycle execution are regarded as the target commands for
modal command omission.
* When F100 has been specified before the execution of a 4-digit G cycle, for example, the first F100
command output during the 4-digit G cycle is not omitted..
When there becomes nothing to specify with a G code as a result of modal command omission, the
G code is not output.
G0 X100;
G1 Y200;
G0 X100;------------<1>
In the above case, G0 X100 in <1> above is omitted as a result of the omission of a modal command
as follows:
G0 X100;
G1 Y200;
When a G code other than G0, G1, G2, and G3 is output, the modal value is cleared.
G0 X100;
G80; ----------------<2>
G0 X100; ----------<3>
In the above case, the modal value X100 is cleared in <2>, so X100 in <3> is not omitted.
- 442 -
Conversion example 1)
Bit 4 (MOT) of parameter No. 14700 = 0
(Modal commands are output during NC program conversion)
(NC PROGRAM CONVERSION-START)

G53
G40
G90
G17
G0X52.495Y-18.015Z5.
G0X52.495Y-18.015Z-5.
G1X52.495Y18.015F1000.
G0Z5.
G0X47.455Y-28.78Z5.
G0Z-5.
G3X47.496Y-27.5I-19.955J1.28F1000.
G1X47.496Y27.5F1000.
G3X47.455Y28.78I-19.996J0.F1000.
G0Z5.
G0X-18.015Y-52.495Z5.
*Commands in boldface denote modal commands.
Conversion example 2)
Bit 4 (MOT) of parameter No. 14700 = 1
(Modal commands are not output during NC program conversion)
(NC PROGRAM CONVERSION-START)

G53
G40
G90
G17
G0X52.495Y-18.015Z5.
Z-5.
G1Y18.015F1000.
G0Z5.
X47.455Y-28.78
Z-5.
G3X47.496Y-27.5I-19.955J1.28
G1Y27.5
G3X47.455Y28.78I-19.996J0.
G0Z5.
X-18.015Y-52.495
6.5 SUPPRESSING SUBPROGRAM EXPANSION IN NC

PROGRAM CONVERSION
When a subprogram call command is executed during NC program conversion, the call command can be
output without expanding subprogram contents.
NOTE
To use this function, set bit 0 (CSP) of parameter No. 27480 to 1.
When CSP is set to 0, the block of G41/G42 is not outputted.
- 443 -
6. NC PROGRAM
Use of this function changes the operation of some commands as well as subprogram call commands
when NC program conversion is performed. The specifications of the function for suppressing expansion
in NC program conversion are explained below.
NC program
NC program
conversion with
conversion with
Conversion target subprogram
subprogram
expansion
expansion
suppressed
4-digit G cycle 4-digit G cycle in main program Output after Output after
conversion conversion
4-digit G cycle in main program Output after Output after
(Editing prohibited and display enabled) conversion conversion
4-digit G cycle not executed 4-digit G command
(Execution is prevented by GOTO statement, etc.) Not output is output without
conversion
4-digit G cycle repeated by macro statement 4-digit G cycle is 4-digit G cycle is
output after output after
converted as many converted as many
times as number of times as number of
times the cycle is times the cycle is
executed, and executed, and
macro statement is macro statement is
not output. also output.
4-digit G cycle 4-digit G cycle in Machining commands are
subprogram specified in main program, Output after Output after
(Subprogram is not and figure commands are conversion conversion
edit-prohibited) specified in subprogram.
Both machining and figure Subprogram call
Output after
commands are specified in command is
conversion
subprogram. output.
4-digit G cycle in Machining commands are
subprogram specified in main program,
(Subprogram is and figure commands are Subprogram call
edit-prohibited and specified in subprogram. Not output command is
cannot be displayed) Both machining and figure output.
commands are specified in
subprogram.
Figure commands and NC statements are 4-digit G 4-digit G
specified in subprogram. commands are commands are
converted and converted and
output, and NC output, and NC
statements are statements are not
also output. output.
Subprogram call Subprogram is not 4-digit G is not present in Subprogram
Call command is
(M98, edit-prohibited. subprogram. contents are
output.
G/M/T code) output.
Subprogram is Call by M98 Subprogram
Call command is
edit-prohibited. contents are
output.
(Display enabled) output.
Call by G/M/T code Subprogram
Call command is
contents are
output.
output.
Subprogram is Call by M98 Call command is
Not output
edit-prohibited. output.
(Display disabled) Call by G/M/T code Call command is Call command is
output. output.
Subprogram call just after 4-digits G cycle Not output. Not output.
Custom macro Macro statement specified between 4-digit G
Not output Not output
statement machining command and figure command
Macro statement in a place other than the above Not output Output
- 444 -
NC program
NC program
conversion with
conversion with
Conversion target subprogram
subprogram
expansion
expansion
suppressed
Finishing cycle (G70) Not output correctly Output correctly
6.5.1 Restriction
Subprogram call or custom macro statement just after 4-digit G machining command or figure command
is not output.
6.6 CONVERSION OF G41/G42 COMMAND BY NC PROGRAM

CONVERSION (WITH SUBPROGRAM DECOMPOSITION)
When NC program conversion is executed with the subprogram decomposition, G41/G42 command can
be converted.
6.6.1 Parameter Setting for Use

(1) Parameter to select whether the subprogram is decomposed or not in NC program conversion
Parameter No.27480#0=0 is set.
(2) Parameter to make this function effective

(3) Parameter to set the number of blocks to be read in the cutter compensation/tool nose radius
compensation mode
Parameter No.19625=0 or 3 ∼ 8 is set.
6.6.2 Restriction
NC program conversion doesn't execute correctly in the following cases.
(Unnecessary block is output or necessary block is not output.)
(1) G41/G42 is executed with offset mode cancel by D0/T0.

(2) G41/G42 is executed as duplication.
(3) G41/G42 is executed at the next block of subprogram call command or macro call command.
[Solution]
Insert empty block (EOB) next to subprogram call command or macro call command.
(4) On the following condition

(Condition)
Number of blocks from G41/G42 to macro statement ≤ Value of parameter No.19625
[Solution]
Insert empty block (EOB) for satisfying the following condition.
(Condition)
Number of blocks from G41/G42 to macro statement > Value of parameter No.19625
- 445 -
6. NC PROGRAM
(Example)
Case of “IF” statement (Parameter No.19625=3)
****** ; ****** ;
G00 G41 X250. Y550. D01; G00 G41 X250. Y550. D01;
G01 Y900. F150 ; G01 Y900. F150 ;
Modify
IF[#4120 EQ 0] GOTO99 ; ;
X450. ; ;
G03 X500. Y1150. R650. F150 ; IF[#4120 EQ 0] GOTO99 ;
****** ; X450. ;
****** ; G03 X500. Y1150. R650. F150 ;
N99 M30; ****** ;
****** ;
N99 M30;
(5) On the following condition

(Condition)
Number of blocks from G41/G42 to command of [list 1] ≤ Value of parameter No.19625
[Solution]
Insert empty block (EOB) for satisfying the following condition.
(Condition)
Number of blocks from G41/G42 to command of [list 1] > Value of parameter No.19625
(Example)
Case of “M98” command (Parameter No.19625=3)
****** ; ****** ;
G00 G41 X250. Y550. D01; G00 G41 X250. Y550. D01;
Modify
G01 Y900. F150 ; G01 Y900. F150 ;
M98 P8000 ; ;
G00 X0. Y0. ; ;
****** ; M98 P8000 ;
G00 X0. Y0. ;
****** ;
[List 1] Command list

Command Function
M98 P**** M98 Subprogram call
M99 Program end
G65 A* B* ~ P**** Simple macro call
G66 A* B* ~ P**** Macro modal call : call after move command
G66.1 A* B* ~ P**** Macro modal call : each block call
G*** A* B* ~ Macro call using G code
M*** A* B* ~ Macro call using M code
M*** Subprogram call using M code
T*** Subprogram call using T code
S*** Subprogram call using S code
B*** Subprogram call using second auxiliary function code
A*** ( B***/ C*** / ~) Subprogram call using specific code
- 446 -
Command Function
G02.3 / G03.3 Exponential interpolation CW/CCW
AI contour control (high-precision contour control compatible
G05
command)
G07.1 / G107 Cylindrical interpolation
G10 Programmable data input
G10.8 Programmable inner data input
G10.9 Programmable switching of diameter/radius specification
G12.1 / G13.1 /G112 / G113 Polar coordinate interpolation mode/ cancer mode
G20 / G70 Inch input
G21 / G71 Metric input
G22 / G23 Stored stroke check function on / off
G25 / G26 Spindle speed fluctuation detection off / on
G28 Automatic return to reference position
G28.2 In-position check disable reference position return
G29 Movement from reference position
G30 2nd, 3rd, and 4th reference position return
G30.1 Floating reference position return
In-position check disable 2nd, 3rd, or 4th reference position
G30.2
Return
G31 Skip function
G31.8 EGB-axis skip
G37 Automatic tool length measurement (M system)
G36 / G37 / G37.1 / G37.2 Automatic tool offset (X axis / Z axis) (T system)
G40 Tool radius/tool nose radius compensation cancel mode
G40.1 Normal direction control cancel mode
G43.4 / G43.5 Tool center point control (type 1/type 2)
G43.4 P1 / G43.5 P1 Tool posture control (type 1 / type 2)
High-speed smooth TCP - rotation axes compensation
G43.4 L1 / G43.5 L1
(type 1 / type 2)
G43.4 P3 / G43.5 P3 High-speed smooth TCP - smooth control (type 1 / type 2)
G43.8 / G43.9 Cutting point command (type 1 / type 2)
G92 Setting for workpiece coordinate system (M system)
G50 / G92 Setting for workpiece coordinate system (T system)
G92.1 Work-piece coordinate system preset (M system)
G50.3 / G92.1 Work-piece coordinate system preset (T system)
G50.2 Polygon milling cancel
G50.2 / G250 Polygon turning cancel (T system)
G51.4 / G50.4 Start synchronous control / cancel
G51.5 / G50.5 Start composite control / cancel
G51.6 / G50.6 Start superimposed control / cancel
G52 Local coordinate system setting
G53 Machine coordinate system setting
G53.1 Tool axis direction control
G53.6 Tool center point retention type tool axis direction control
G54.4 Work setting error compensation
Coordinate system rotation start or 3-dimensional
G68 / G69
coordinate conversion mode on / off (M system)
Coordinate system rotation start or 3-dimensional
G68.1 / G69.1
coordinate conversion mode on / off (T system)
G68.2 Tilted working plane command
G68.3 Tilted working plane specification in tool axis direction
G68.4 Tilted working plane indexing (incremental multi-command)
- 447 -
6. NC PROGRAM
Command Function
G70.7 Finishing cycle (M system)
G71.7 Stock removal in turning (M system)
G72.7 Stock removal in facing (M system)
G73.7 Pattern repeating cycle (M system)
G76.7 Multiple-thread cutting cycle (M system)
G77 Plunge direct sizing/grinding cycle (M system)
G70 / G72 Finishing cycle (T system)
G71 / G73 Stock removal in turning (T system)
G72 / G74 Stock removal in facing (T system)
G73 / G75 Pattern repeating cycle (T system)
G75 / G77 Outer diameter/internal diameter drilling cycle (T system)
G76 / G78 Multiple-thread cutting cycle (T system)
G72 / G73 Traverse direct sizing/grinding cycle (T system)
G80.4 Electronic gear box: synchronization cancellation
G80.5 Electronic gear box 2 pair : synchronization cancellation
G81.1 Chopping
G92 / G78 / G21 Thread cutting cycle (T system)
M00 Program stop
M01 Optional stop
M02 End of program
Tool change
M06
(Tool management function or Tool life management is available）
M30 End of tape
M code preventing buffering
(parameter No.3411 ∼ 3432, No.11290 ∼ No.11299）
M code for tool life count restart
(parameter No.13221)
M code for tool life count restart
(parameter No.6811)
The top number of M code used to turn on each axis workpiece
coordinate system preset signal
(parameter No.11275、No.11276)
M**
M code for turning on the flexible synchronous control mode
(parameter No.5670∼No.5677)
M code for tool life count restart (parameter No.6811)
M code to start arbitrary speed threading mode
(parameter No.11487）
M code to cancel arbitrary speed threading mode
M code for high-speed switching of Cs contour control
T code for Tool management function
T**
T code for Tool life management function
- 448 -
7.ADDRESS R OUTPUT FOR G02/G03
IN MACHINING CYCLE (for Series
B-63874EN/11 MACHINING CYCLE 30i/31i/32i-A/B, 0i-F/0i-D)
7 ADDRESS R OUTPUT FOR G02/G03 IN

MACHINING CYCLE (for Series
30i/31i/32i-A/B, 0i-F/0i-D)
In the functions on the below list, address R can be outputted for G02/G03.
(Target function)
Function
NC program conversion function
Automatic operation
Machining simulation (animated / tool path)
Input data check by simulation
Decomposed cycle display
According to the specifications of CNC, address I,J,K are outputted for G02/G03 as the below list even if
address R output for G02/03 is selected.
(Output format of G02/G03 according to the center angle of arc）

Center angle of arc
CNC type Center angle = 360° (A
Center angle ≤ 180° 180° < Center angle < 360°
round circle)
FS30i-A/FS30i-B/ By address R By address R By address I,J,K
FS0i -MF/FS0i -TF/ (Value of R is negative.)
FS0i-MD
FS0i-TD By address R By address I,J,K By address I,J,K
7.1 CONDITION
In order to use this function, set the following parameter.
Parameter No.27488#0 = 1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27488 #0
#0 In machining cycle,
0 : address I,J,K are outputted for G02/G03.
1 : address R are outputted for G02/G03.
This function can be used in the following MANUAL GUIDE i software:

-BX71/edition 13 and after (Series 30i/31i/32i-B)
-BY70/edition 54 and after (Series 30i/31i/32i-A)
-BX33/edition 01 and after (Series 0i-F)
-BX32/edition 20 and after (Series0i-D)
7.2 RESTRICTIONS
(1) When the distance from the start point of the arc to the center point is very short, address I,J,K are
outputted for G02/G03 even if address R output for G02/03 is selected.
- 449 -
7. ADDRESS R OUTPUT FOR G02/G03
IN MACHINING CYCLE (for Series
30i/31i/32i-A/B, 0i-F/0i-D) MACHINING CYCLE B-63874EN/11
(2) When center angle of an arc is nearly 180°, the calculated center coordinates may contain an error in
the output by address R. In such a case, select the output by address I, J, K.
- 450 -
V. MULTI-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS
(OPTION)
MULTI-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS
B-63874EN/11 (OPTION) 1.OVERVIEW
1 OVERVIEW
Information (coordinates, states, and programs) on all paths can be concurrently displayed and
manipulated on one screen.
Example of the all path display/edit screen
In addition, waiting and transfer can be easily set by listing a complicated multi-path program using the
relationship between the workpiece to be machined (spindle) and the turret to easily understand
processing flow between paths.
Example of the process list screen
NOTE
For setting the parameters, see Appendix A.5.15, "Multi-Path Lathe Parameters"
in Appendix (for Machine Tool Builders).
- 453 -
2.CHANGING BETWEEN PATHS (OPTION) B-63874EN/11
2 CHANGING BETWEEN PATHS

On the MANUAL GUIDE i for multi-path lathe, screens and operations are done on each path
respectively. Soft keys or signals are used to switch between paths.
On its screen, the icon for selected path will be displayed at the upper right part.
The titles of the position display part and program display part of a selected path are displayed in blue.
(The titles of an unselected path are displayed in light blue.)
2.1 CHANGING BY A SOFT-KEY

On the each screen, soft-key [CHPATH] will be displayed.
Press soft-key [CHPATH], the displayed turret will be changed.
In case of 2-path system : turret-1 > turret-2 > turret-1 > …

In case of 3-path system : turret-1 > turret-2 > turret-3 > turret-1 > …
NOTE
When using soft key [CHPATH] of the MANUAL GUIDE i, the reset key on the
MDI panel must be enabled for all paths (bit 0 (RST) of parameter No. 8100 = 0).
If the reset key is enabled for each path (bit 0 of parameter No. 8100 = 1), the
path selected on the NC side is reset regardless of the path selected by the
MANUAL GUIDE i.
2.2 CHANGING BY A SIGNAL

Connected with the path selection signal (HEAD<G063#0>, HEAD2<G062#7>), change the display of
MANUAL GUIDE i.
HEAD <G63.0> HEAD2 <G62.7> Displayed path number

0 0 1
1 0 2
0 1 3
2.3 IMPROVEMENT OF ICON FOR SELECTED PATH

(Series 30i/31i/32i-B, 0i-F/0i-D)
Icons of alphabet “R” and “L” can be displayed for selected path status that is displayed on upper right of
base screen.
2.3.1 Parameter
Set parameter No.27410 ( for first path ), No.27411 ( for second path ) or No.27412 ( for third path ) to
“111” or “112” to use this function.
Icon number 111 112
Icon
- 454 -
3.CONCURRENT DISPLAY
MULTI-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS AND EDIT OF PROGRAMS
B-63874EN/11 (OPTION) OF ALL PATHS
3 CONCURRENT DISPLAY AND EDIT OF

PROGRAMS OF ALL PATHS
Information (coordinates, states, and programs) on all paths can be concurrently displayed and
manipulated on one screen.
NOTE
The function for concurrently displaying and editing the programs of all paths
requires the multi-path lathe function option of the MANUAL GUIDE i.
3.1 SCREEN CONFIGURATION

The screen composition of simultaneously for all path display and edit function is explained.
NOTE
1 For the 10.4-inch LCD, spindle information and feed information are not
displayed on the 3-path concurrent display/edit screen for a limited space.
2 For the 15-inch LCD of the Series 30i/31i, spindle information and feed
information are displayed on the 3-path concurrent display/edit screen.
3 The screen in RMT mode can be displayed in only one path. Make a PMC ladder
so that the path in RMT mode is one path only selected by the PMC signal of
selecting the path.
3.1.1 Display Position of Each Path

The display position of each path is shown below.
(1) 2-path
The display position of each path will be decided according to following parameter.
Bit 2 (MPC) of parameter No.27400 = 0 :
First path : left side
Second path : right side
Bit 2 (MPC) of parameter No.27400 = 1 :
First path : right side
Second path : left side
(2) 3-path
The display position of each path will be decided automatically according to following parameter.
Bit 1 (FSE) of parameter No.14701 : Turret 1 is unavailable (0)/available (1) to spindle 2.
Bit 0 (SME) of parameter No.27401 : Turret 2 is unavailable (0)/available (1) to spindle 1.
Bit 1 (SSE) of parameter No.27401 : Turret 2 is unavailable (0)/available (1) to spindle 2.
Bit 0 (TME) of parameter No.27402 : Turret 3 is unavailable (0)/available (1) to spindle 1.
Bit 1 (TSE) of parameter No.27402 : Turret 3 is unavailable (0)/available (1) to spindle 2.
- 455 -
3. CONCURRENT DISPLAY
AND EDIT OF PROGRAMS MULTI-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS
OF ALL PATHS (OPTION) B-63874EN/11
3.1.2 Status Display Part

The status display part displays the status of each path.
This part is displayed in all operation mode. The display items are shown below.
Icon of displayed path.
Operation mode : MDI, MEM, RMT, EDIT, HND, JOG, TJOG, THND, INC, REF
Alarm status : ALM
Emergency stop status : EMG
Reset status : -RESET-
Automatic operation status : STOP, HOLT, STRT
Axis motion and dwelling status : MTN, DWL
Executing auxiliary functions : FIN
O : Program number (O number)

N : Sequence number (N number)
T : Modal T code commanded data
M : Modal M code commanded data
S : Modal S code commanded data
F : Modal F code commanded data
3.1.3 Current Position Display Part

This screen is displayed out of EDIT mode.
Using [ACTPOS], absolute position, relative position, machine position, and distance to go in turn. (In
case of 2-path, actual spindle speed and actual feed rate are also displayed.)
3.1.4 Program Display Part

This screen will be displayed in all operation mode.
(In case of EDIT mode, this part will be extended because current position part is lost.)
3.1.5 Disabling the Display of a Specified Path (for Loaders)

It is not desirable to display, on the MANUAL GUIDE i screen, information about a path, such as the
multi-path loader path.
In MANUAL GUIDE i, as the information from the 1st path to the specified path (parameter No.14864)
is displayed, the information of the path after the specified path is not displayed.
The corresponding machine configurations are shown below.
- 456 -
3.CONCURRENT DISPLAY
MULTI-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS AND EDIT OF PROGRAMS
B-63874EN/11 (OPTION) OF ALL PATHS
• Series 30i/31i/32i T series 1-path + loader path

(The 2nd loader path is set to an invisible path.)
• Series 30i/31i T series 2-path + loader path
(The 3rd loader path is set to an invisible path.)
• Series 30i/31i T series 3path + loader path
(The 4th loader path is set to an invisible path.)
• Series 30i/31i T series 2path + loader path + loader path
(The 3rd and 4th loader path are set to invisible paths.)
NOTE
Be sure to set the parameter (No. 9071) of each loader path to 0.
The MANUAL GUIDE i screen display for invalid paths is described below.
(1) Path switching by the path selection signal

• Case parameter PSC (No.3208#5)=0
If switching to an invalid path is performed, the screen previously selected for the path appears.
• Case parameter PSC (No.3208#5)=1
If MANUAL GUIDE i screen is set to be displayed up to 2nd path, 1st path is displayed in case
of signal G063.0=0. 2nd path is displayed in case of signal G063.0=1.
If MANUAL GUIDE i screen is set to be displayed up to 3rd path, 1st path is displayed in case
of signal G062.7=0 and G063.0=0. 2nd path is displayed in case of signal G062.7=0 and
G063.0=1. 3rd path is displayed in case of signal G062.7=1.
(2) Path switching by the soft key
When soft key [CHPATH] is pressed, if the next path is an invalid path, information about the next
valid path is displayed on the MANUAL GUIDE i screen.
(3) MANUAL GUIDE i screen display during selection of an invalid path
If MANUAL GUIDE i screen is set to be displayed up to 2nd path, 1st path is displayed in case of
signal G063.0=0. 2nd path is displayed in case of signal G063.0=1.
If MANUAL GUIDE i screen is set to be displayed up to 3rd path, 1st path is displayed in case of
signal G062.7=0 and G063.0=0. 2nd path is displayed in case of signal G062.7=0 and G063.0=1.
3rd path is displayed in case of signal G062.7=1.
(4) Multi-path concurrent display/edit function
The valid paths are concurrently displayed. When only one valid path is present, soft key
[MLTWIN] does not appear.
(5) Process list editing function
The valid paths are displayed in tabular form.
(6) Cycle execution
When a G4-digit cycle in an invalid path program is executed, operation does not proceed from the
G4-digit cycle. When the <RESET> key is pressed in this state, the operation stops as in the case
where the multi-path option is not present.
3.2 BASIC OPERATIONS

Soft key [MLTWIN] is used to switch from the all path display screen.
When soft key [MLTWIN] is pressed, the display mode shifts as shown below.
Single path All path screen
- 457 -
4. PROCESS LIST EDITING MULTI-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS
FUNCTION (OPTION) B-63874EN/11
4 PROCESS LIST EDITING FUNCTION

This function can easily set waiting and transfer by indicating a complicated multi-path program using the
relationship between the workpiece to be machined (spindle) and the turret.
When a machining program for a multi-path lathe is created, the entire machining program can be easily
understood if required processes are created on the process list screen and then machining operation is
created.
The corresponding machine configurations are shown below.
• 2-path lathe CNC

(Lathe with 2 turrets and 2 spindles, and each turret can perform to both of spindle#1 and spindle#2
respectively.)
(Lathe with 3 turrets and 2 spindles, turret#1 can perform to both of spindle#1 and spindle#2,
turret#2 can perform to spinlde#2, and turret#3 can perform to spindle#1.)
(Lathe with 2 spindles, 1 turret can perform to both of spindle#1 and spindle#2.)
NOTE
1 When using the process list editing function, set bit 3 (LST) of parameter No.
14703 to 1.
2 Process list editing is available only at EDIT mode. Under background editing
mode, it is not available.
3 When adding or inserting an optional block skip on the process list editing
screen, specify the optional block skip option and set bit 6 (PCK) of parameter
No. 14701 to 1.
4.1 SCREEN CONFIGURATION

The screen configuration of the process list editing screen is described below.
4.1.1 Cell
Each process is corresponded to the frame in the table which is called a cell.
Only following information is displayed in this frame.
• Sequence number • Comment
Moreover, there are following kinds of cells.

Kind Description Graphic
Normal Cell Cell where the process exists.
There is frame for display, but the
Input Impropriety Cell
process does not exist for it.
- 458 -
MULTI-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS 4.PROCESS LIST EDITING
B-63874EN/11 (OPTION) FUNCTION
4.1.2 Current Cell

The target cell for the operation is shown. It is possible to move with the cursor key. As for the selected
cell, the background color is displayed in yellow.
4.1.3 Spindle
First of all, each process is arranged according to the spindle.
The operator can see the process belongs to which spindle at a glance.
L - SPINDLE R - SPINDLE
UPPER - TURRET LOWER - TURRET UPPER - TURRET LOWER - TURRET
O0500 O0500 O0500 O0500
N10 PREPAIR N10 PREPAIR
N20 FACE ROUGH
N30 FACE FINE
N20 DRILL
N100 TRANS N100 TRANS
N110 FACE ROUGH N110 WAIT
N120 FACE FINE
N130 WAIT N120 DRILL
% % % %
4.1.4 Turret
Each process is arranged further in the spindle according to the turret.
On the sample screen in Section 4.1.3, "Spindle" above, processes are further arranged by the upper turret
and lower turret.
4.1.5 Waiting Line

The line that shows waiting exists is displayed.
- 459 -
4.1.6 Transfer
When transfer exists, that is displayed by blue character.
Waiting lines are arranged at the top and the bottom.
4.2 BASIC OPERATIONS
4.2.1 Starting Process List Editing

To display the process list editing screen, set the CNC to the EDIT mode and press soft key [EDWORK]
in the second line.
When the consistency between G1992 and G1993 is not maintained during startup of the process list
editing function, the number of the line in which a warning occurred and the description of the warning
are displayed at the lower left and the process list editing function is not displayed.
Warning message Description

TOP G1992 IS SHORT. G1993 appears though the first G1992 is absent.
G1993 IS DUPLICATE(P=x/L=xxxx) G1993 is repeated because the middle G1992 is absent.
LAST G1993 IS SHORT. The program terminated though the last G1993 is absent.
G1992 IS DUPLICATE. (P=x/L=xxxx) G19932 is repeated because the middle G1993 is absent.
M CODE IS DUPLICATE. (P=x/L=xxxx) The same M code is repeatedly specified.
WAITING TARGET IS SHORT. (P=x/L=xxxx) The M code is absent in the wait destination specified by P.
ILLEGAL WAITING ORDER. (P=x/L=xxxx) The M code appears in a wrong order.
NO PROGRAM. The selected program is absent.
NO WAITING M CODE. (P=x/L=xxxx) The waiting M code is absent during transfer.
ILELEGAL P COMMAND. (P=x/L=xxxx) The M code is identical, but the value of argument P is different.
The P command of the M code does not include its own path.
ILELEGAL S COMMAND. (P=x/L=xxxx) The spindle number is inappropriate.
WAITING EXIST. (P=x/L=xxxx) For a 1-path lathe, the waiting M code is present.
TRANS. EXIST. (P=x/L=xxxx) For a 1-path lathe, the Q command is present.
4.2.2 Exiting from Process List Editing

To switch to the all path display that appears when soft key [MLTWIN] is pressed in the normal EDIT
mode, press soft key [RETURN].
To switch to the display of another mode, switch between CNC modes.
- 460 -
4.2.3 Moving the Cursor in the Process List

The cursor can be moved on a cell-by-cell basis.
The current cell can be moved up, down, left, or right with the cursor movement keys.
L - SPINDLE R - SPINDLE
UPPER - TURRET LOWER - TURRET UPPER - TURRET LOWER - TURRET
O0500 O0500 O0500 O0500
N10 PREPAIR N10 PREPAIR
N20 FACE ROUGH
N30 FACE FINE
N20 DRILL
N100 TRANS N100 TRANS
N110 FACE ROUGH N110 WAIT
N120 FACE FINE
N130 WAIT N120 DRILL
% % % %
When the cursor is specified to move left in the When the cursor is specified to move
leftmost positioin, it moves to the rightmost right in the rightmost positioin, it
position in the line immediately above. moves to the leftmost position in the
line immediately below.
The page switching key can be used to scroll the whole cell display up or down one page. The cursor can
be moved in the range from the top to the % cell for each column.
4.3 EDITING OPERATIONS

The following operations are available on each cell.
Operation Description
INSCEL Insert process to the upper part of the specified cell.
DELCEL Delete the specified cell.
CPYCEL Copy the specified cell to the specified position.
MOVCEL Move the specified cell to the specified position.
RENAME Modify the comment of the specified cell.
STWAIT Set the waiting to the specified cell. (Note)
CLWAIT Release the specified waiting. (Note)
STTRNS Set the transfer to the specified cell. (Note)
CLTRNS Release the specified transfer. (Note)
ADD / Add the optional block skip. (Note)
DEL / Delete the optional block skip. (Note)
NOTE
These operations require the option of the multi-path lathe function.
(They cannot be used by a 1-path lathe.)
(1) Cell (process) unit

A cell includes the blocks from the process start block to the process end block.
Process start block: G1992 Ss (ABCD) ;
Process end block: G1993 ;
- 461 -
(2) Setting of waiting

The waiting M code and waiting partner P code are inserted into the process start block or process
end block.
Process start block: G1992 Ss (ABCD) Mmm Ppp ;
Process end block: G1993 Mmm Ppp ;
(3) Setting of transfer

The transfer attribute Q code, waiting M code, and waiting partner P code are inserted into the
process start block or the waiting M code and waiting partner P code are inserted into the process
end block.
Process start block: G1992 Ss (ABCD) Q0 Mmm Ppp ;
Process end block: G1993 Mmm Ppp ;
(4) Addition or deletion of an optional block skip

One of "/7", "/8", and "/9" is added to or deleted from the beginning of each block in a cell.
/7 : Spindle 1 process (excluding the transfer process)
/8 : Spindle 2 process (excluding the transfer process)
/9 : Transfer process
The format of a cell is shown below.
G code Argument Description

S Spindle selection : S1 = Spindle 1, S2 = Spindle2
(ABCD) Comment statement
G1992
Q Attribute: Q0 = transfer
Process start
M Waiting M code (NC parameter (No.8110), (No.8111))
P Waiting partner (combination of existing path numbers)
G1993 M Waiting M code (NC parameter (No.8110), (No.8111))
Process end P Waiting partner (combination of existing path numbers: optional）
NOTE
1 Only the M codes present in the same block as the process start tag and
process end tag are recognized.
2 Use in the background editing mode is not allowed.
3 Moving or copying a cell does not modify the program.
4 Of combinations of a slash and a number for an optional block skip, /7, /8, and /9
are reserved for the ADD / function and DEL / function. So, do not use them in
the user program.
5 Waiting setting, waiting release, transfer setting, transfer release, ADD /, and
DEL / cannot be used for 1-path lathes.
6 Path names are not indicated for 1-path lathes.
7 Spindle names are not indicated for 1-path 1-spindle lathes.
8 UNDO and REDO are not possible, if the path is switched by the path selection
signals during displaying the process list.
9 UNDO and REDO soft keys are displayed only the case when the program
selected by a path selection signal is edited on the process list screen.
10 UNDO function restores all editing operations at all paths on the process list
screen at once. REDO is similarly, too.
11 UNDO and REDO are not possible, if the edit operations are executed much
over than the buffer size for UNDO and REDO which memorizes the operations
on the process list.
- 462 -
4.3.1 Insertion of a Cell

This operation adds a cell (process) above the cursor. Follow the steps below.
<1> Move cursor to the cell to be inserted.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N20 FINE N20 TAP
% %
<2> Press soft-key [INSCEL].
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL Cursor moves to the new cell.
MIDDLE N20 TAP (When cancel is pressed, return to
previous state.)
N20 FINE %
%
<3> Press OK, and the process will be inserted.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL The dialog for the process name input is
PROC NAME MIDDLE
displayed.
N20 FINE N20 TAP
Input MIDDLE as an example.
% %
- 463 -
NOTE
1 In case of having waiting in the lower, for not breaking the waiting line, modify the height
of the cell of other row that have the waiting to twice.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2 TURRET 1 TURRET 2

N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N20 FINE N20 TAP N20 TAP Height of
% % Insert N20 FINE cell
becomes
% %
twice.
2 If the new cell is inserted on the cell having the waiting, the waiting do not move to the
new cell. (Transfer is also similar.)
N20 TRANS N20 TRANS Leave
N30 FINE N30 TAP Insert N20 TRANS N20 TRANS transfer
% % N30 FINE N30 TAP as it is.
% %
3 Even if current cell is input impropriety one, insertion of the cell is possible. After
insertion, the entire table is displayed again, as the result, there are some case where
overwriting is executed.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2 TURRET 1 TURRET 2 As the result,
N10 ROUGH CAN’T N10 ROUGH overwrite on
N20 MIDDLE N10 DRILL
the input
impropriety
N30 FINE N20 TAP Insert N30 FINE N20 TAP
cell.
% % % %
4.3.2 Deletion of a Cell

This operation deletes a cell on which the cursor positions. Follow the steps below.
<1> Move cursor to the cell to be deleted.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N20 FINE N20 TAP
% %
<2> Press [DELCEL] soft-key.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
“ARE YOU SURE YOU WANT TO
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
DELETE IT ?” is displayed in the
N20 FINE N20 TAP
% % message display part.
- 464 -
<3> Press [YES], and the process will be deleted.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL The cursor position is left as it is.
% N20 TAP
(In case of “NO”, returns to former
%
NOTE
1 In case of having waiting in the lower line, for not breaking the waiting line by adjusting
after deletion, modify the height of the cell that have the waiting to twice.
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL N10 ROUGH N20 TAP Height of
N20 FINE N20 TAP N20 FINE cell
% % Delete becomes
% %
twice.
2 There is the cell that cannot be deleted.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH Input impropriety cell
N30 FINE N20 TAP
% % % cell
3 When the cell that have waiting, the waiting is released. (Transfer as well. However,
when one of the waiting member among the 3-path is deleted, the rest waiting will not
be released.)
Release the
N20 TRANS N20 TRANS N30 FINE N20 TRANS partner of
N30 FINE N30 TAP Delete % N30 TAP transfer, too.
% % %
4.3.3 Copying of a Cell

This operation copies a specified cell (process) to a specified position. Follow the steps below.
<1> Move the cursor to the source cell.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N20 FINE N20 TAP
% %
<2> Press [CPYCEL] .
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL Add “*” to the top of the source cell.
*N20 FINE N20 TAP
% %
- 465 -
<3> Move cursor to the destination cell.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
Moreover background color of the source
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
cell become green.
*N20 FINE N20 TAP Press soft-key [CPYCEL] or [CANCEL].
% %
<4> Press [CELCPY], overwrite copy will be done if destination process is vacant.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH FINE (When cancel is pressed, return to
N20 FINE N20 TAP previous state.)
% %
NOTE
1 When the destination process is not vacant, it is possible to select overwrite,
insert, and cancel.

N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL N10 ROUGH FINE Insert
& copy
*N20 FINE N20 TAP Select N20 FINE N10 DRILL
% % Insert % N20 TAP
%
2 The following cells cannot be specified as source and destination.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N30 FINE N20 TAP
% % % cell
3 The waiting and transfer will not be copied.

N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL N10 ROUGH N20 TRANS Transfer
*N20 TRANS N20 TRANS N20 TRANS N20 TRANS will not be
copied.
N30 FINE N30 TAP Copy N30 FINE N30 TAP
% % % %
4.3.4 Moving of a Cell

This operation moves a specified cell (process) to a specified position. Follow the steps below.
<1> Move the cursor to the source cell.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N20 FINE N20 TAP
% %
- 466 -
<2> Press [MOV CEL].
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
*N20 FINE N20 TAP Add “*” to the top of the source cell.
% %
<3> Move cursor to the destination cell.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL Moreover background color of the
*N20 FINE N20 TAP source cell become green.
Press [MOV CEL] or [CANCEL].
% %
<4> Press [MOV CEL], overwrite move will be done if destination process is vacant.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N1 0 ROUGH FINE
% N20 TAP (When cancel i s pressed, return to
% previous state.)
NOTE
1 The following cells cannot be specified as source and destination.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N30 FINE N20 TAP
% % % cell
2 The waiting and transfer will not be moved.

N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL N10 ROUGH N10 TRANS Transfer
*N20 TRANS N20 TRANS N30 FINE N20 TRANS will not be
moved.
N30 FINE N30 TAP Move % N30 TAP
% % %
- 467 -
NOTE
3 It is possible to move to input impropriety cell just in case between the same line
and turret.
SPINDLE 1 SPINDLE 2
N10 ROUGH CAN’T CAN’T
N20 TRANS N20 TRANS
N30 FINE *N30 TAP
% % % %
Moving
SPINDLE 1 SPINDLE 2
Moving to
N10 ROUGH N30 TAP
input
N20 TRANS N20 TRANS impropriety
N30 FINE % cell is done.
% % %
4 It is possible to move to input impropriety cell just in case that any cell in the
same line and turret is input impropriety one.
SPINDLE 1 SPINDLE 2
N10 ROUGH *N10 DRILL
N20 TRANS N20 TRANS
N30 FINE N30 TAP
% % % %
Move
SPINDLE 1 SPINDLE 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL Moving to input
N20 TRANS N20 TRANS impropriety cell
is done.
N30 FINE N30 TAP
% % % %
4.3.5 Modification of Process Name

This operation modifies the comment of a specified cell (process). Follow the steps below.
<1> Move the cursor to the cell to be modified.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N20 FINE N20 TAP
% %
- 468 -
<2> Press [RENAME].
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL The dialog for the process name
PROC NAME MIDDLE input is displayed. Input MIDDLE as
N20 FINE N20 TAP
an example.
% %
<3> Press OK, and the process name will be modified.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL (When cancel is pressed, return to
N20 MIDDLE N20 TAP previous state.)
% %
NOTE
The following cells’ name cannot be modified.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N30 FINE N20 TAP
% % % cell
4.3.6 Program Edit

This operation edits a specified cell (process). Specifically, the machining program in which the current
cell is present is opened in the whole screen mode and the cursor is moved to the beginning of the process
in which the current cell is present. Follow the steps below.
<1> Move the cursor to the cell to be edited.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N20 FINE N20 TAP
% %
<2> Press [RETURN].
;
N10 G1992 S1 (ROUGH); The cursor of the edit screen
: automatically moves to the start
: position of the process.
G1993;
;
- 469 -
<3> Do the edit work.

;
N10 G1992 S1 (ROUGH); The Edit work is done with usual
: edit screen. (all screen display by
G1993; the size substitution)
N20 G1992 S1 (FINE);
:
G00X0.Z0.; The following process can be
: similarly edited because of a usual
G1993; edit screen.
<4>Press [EDWORK].
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
The process edited on a usual edit
N20 FINE N20 TAP
screen becomes a current cell.
% %
NOTE
When select head of MANUAL GUIDE i according to path selection signal, it is
necessary to set path selection signal to the head that the target cell belongs to
in advance.
When edit work is started on the input impropriety cell, the next effective process
in the same turret will be opened.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2 ;
N10 ROUGH CAN’T EDIT N10 G1992 S1 (DRILL);
:
:
N30 FINE N20 TAP EDTPRG
G1993;
% % ;
4.3.7 Assign of Waiting

This operation sets waiting between processes. Specifically, the waiting M code is inserted into a cell.
<1> Press [STWAIT]. (Cursor position pretermission)
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N20 FINE N20 TAP The software key array changes into set
% % waiting mode.
<2> Move cursor to the source waiting, and press [SELECT].
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
*N20 FINE N20 TAP Add “*” to the top of the selected cell.
% %
- 470 -
<3> Move cursor to the destination waiting, and press [SELECT].
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
Moreover background color of the
source-waiting cell becomes green.
*N20 FINE N20 TAP
% % Press any one of [SETTOP], [SETEND],
and [STBOTH].
(a) When [SETTOP] is pressed
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH (When finished normally, selected
state will be released automatically.)
N20 FINE N10 DRILL
% N20 TAP
%
(b) When [SETEND] is pressed

TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL (When finished normally, selected state
N20 FINE will be released automatically.)
% N20 TAP
%
(c) When [STBOTH] is pressed

TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH (When finished normally, selected state
N20 FINE N10 DRILL will be released automatically.)
% N20 TAP
%
<4> Press [RETURN], and release set waiting mode.
NOTE
1 There is some cell that cannot be specified as source and destination waiting.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N30 FINE N20 TAP
% % % cell
2 When the waiting has already been set, the waiting cannot be set.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
*N20 WAIT N20 WAIT
N30 FINE N30 TAP Waiting
% % Operation
- 471 -
NOTE
3 In case of shortage of waiting M code, the waiting cannot be set.
It is possible to set the waiting just between upper parts or lower parts.
It is impossible to set waiting across other waiting.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N20 TRANS N20 TRANS
*N30 FINE N30 TAP
Waiting
% %
Operation
4 It is impossible to set waiting between the process in the same path.

TURRET 1 TURRET 2
*N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N20 TRANS N20 TRANS
*N30 FINE N30 TAP
% % Waiting
Operation
4.3.8 Release of Waiting

This operation releases waiting between processes. Specifically, the waiting M code of a cell is deleted.
<1> Press [CLWAIT]. (Cursor position pretermission)
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL The software key array changes into
release waiting mode.
N20 FINE N20 TAP
% %
<2> Move cursor to the cell that have waiting.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N20 FINE N20 TAP Press any one of [CLTOP], [CLEND],
% % and [CLBOTH].
(a) When [CLTOP] is pressed
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
(The opposite waiting will also
N20 FINE N20 TAP
be released.)
% %
- 472 -
(b) When [CLEND] is pressed
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N20 FINE N20 TAP
(The opposite waiting will also be
% % released.)
(c) When [CLBOTH] is pressed
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
(The opposite waiting will also
N20 FINE N20 TAP
be released.)
% %
<3> Press [RETURN], and release waiting mode.
NOTE
The transfer cannot be operated by release waiting.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N20 TRANS N20 TRANS
Release
N30 FINE N30 TAP
Waiting
% % Operation
4.3.9 Assign of Transfer

This operation sets transfer between processes. Specifically, the transfer attribute or waiting M code is
inserted into a cell. Follow the steps below.
<1> Press [STTRNS]. (Cursor position pretermission)
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
The software key array changes
N20 FINE N20 TAP
into set waiting mode.
% %
<2> Move cursor to the source transfer, and press [SELECT].
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
*N20 FINE N20 TAP Add “*” to the top of the selected
% % cell.
<3> Move cursor to the destination transfer, and press [SELECT].
TURRET 1 TURRET 2 Add “*” to the top of the selected

cell.
Moreover background color of the
*N20 FINE N20 TAP source waiting cell become green.
% % Press either [STTRNS] or
[CANCEL].
- 473 -
<4> Press [STTRNS].
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH (When finished normally, selected
N20 FINE N10 DRILL state will be released automatically.)
% N20 TAP
%
<5> Press [RETURN], and release set transfer mode.
NOTE
1 The following cells cannot be specified as source and destination transfer.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N30 FINE N20 TAP
% % % cell
2 When the waiting or transfer has already been set, the transfer cannot be set.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
*N20 WAIT N20 WAIT
N30 FINE N30 TAP Transfer
% % Operation
3 In case of shortage of waiting M code, the waiting cannot be set.

It is possible to set the transfer just between the cells that have no waiting.
It is impossible to set waiting across other waiting and transfer.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N20 TRANS N20 TRANS
*N30 FINE N30 TAP Waiting
% % Operation
4 It is impossible to set transfer between the process in the same path.

TURRET 1 TURRET 2
*N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N20 TRANS N20 TRANS
*N30 FINE N30 TAP
% % Transfer
Operation
- 474 -
4.3.10 Release Transfer

This operation releases transfer between processes. Specifically, the transfer attribute or waiting M code
of a cell is deleted. Follow the steps below.
<1> Press [CLTRNS]. (Cursor position pretermission)
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N20 TRANS N20 TRANS The software key array changes into
N30 FINE N30 TAP
l t f d
% %
<2> Move cursor to the cell that have transfer.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N20 TRANS N20 TRANS
Press either [CLTRNS] or [CANCEL].
N30 FINE N30 TAP
% %
<3> Press [CLTRANS].
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N20 TRANS N20 TRANS
N30 FINE N30 TAP (The opposite transfer will also be
% % released.)
<4> Press [RETURN], and release transfer mode.
NOTE
When the path selection signal is used to switch between screens of paths, the
path selection signal must have been set for the path to which the cell to be
edited belongs. When an attempt is made to edit a cell for which modification is
prohibited, the next valid process in the in the same turret is opened.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N20 TRANS N20 TRANS Release
N30 FINE N30 TAP
Transfer
% %
O ti
- 475 -
4.3.11 Addition of Optional Block Skip

This operation adds an optional block skip. Specifically, the blocks in a cell are preceded by "/7", "/8", or
"/9".
<1> Press [ADD /].

SPINDLE 1 SPINDLE 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N20 TRANS N20 TRANS
N30 FINE N30 TAP
% % % %
Adding of optional block skip
SPINDLE 1 SPINDLE 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N20 TRANS N20 TRANS
N30 FINE N30 TAP
% % % %
NOTE
1 Additional processing is not done for the block which has G1992 and G1993.
G1992 S1; G1992 S1;

T0101; /7 T0101;
G00 X0. Z0.; /7 G00 X0. Z0.;
M01; /7 M01;
G1993; G1993;
2 When optional block skip "/7", "/8", or "/9" is added, "/" not followed by a number
is changed to /1.
G1992 S1; G1992 S1;
/ T0101; /7 /1 T0101;
/ G00 X0. Z0.; /7 /1 G00 X0. Z0.;
/ M01; /7 /1 M01;
G1993; G1993;
3 If any one of “/7”, “/8”, and “/9” has already exists at the top of the target block,
exchange it instead of adding.
G1992 S1; G1992 S1;
/8 T0101; /7 T0101;
/8 G00 X0. Z0.; /7 G00 X0. Z0.;
/8 M01; /7 M01;
G1993; G1993;
- 476 -
4.3.12 Deletion of Optional Block Skip

This operation deletes an optional block skip. Specifically, "/7", "/8", and "/9" at the beginning of each
block in a cell are deleted.
<1> Press [DEL /].

SPINDLE 1 SPINDLE 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N20 TRANS N20 TRANS
N30 FINE N30 TAP
% % % %
Deleting of optional block skip
SPINDLE 1 SPINDLE 2
N10 ROUGH N10 DRILL
N20 TRANS N20 TRANS
N30 FINE N30 TAP
% % % %
NOTE
Deletion processing is not done for the block which has G1992 and G1993.
G1992 S1; G1992 S1;

/7 T0101; T0101;
/7 G00 X0. Z0.; G00 X0. Z0.;
/7 M01; M01;
G1993; G1993;
4.4 MACHINING PROGRAM NOT USING THE PROCESS LIST

EDITING FUNCTION
When a machine program in which the process list editing function is not used is subjected to process list
editing, follow the steps below.
<1> When opening a machine program in which the process list editing function is not used, a message
stating "Process list codes are automatically inserted?" and the following soft keys are displayed.
YES NO
<2> Press [YES], and process list edit function screen will appear.
Then, process start (G1992) and process end (G1993) are automatically inserted into the beginning
and end of the machine program, respectively.
- 477 -
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
O0200 O0200
G1992 S1 (NONECELL); Add G1992 S1 (NONECELL);
(PROC01 : SP-1) (PROC01 : SP-1)
(PROC02 : TRANS) (PROC02 : TRANS)
(PROC03 : SP-2) (PROC03 : SP-2)
G1993; Add G1993;
% %
<3> And then, add (sum of all process – 1) piece cell by inserting cell operation.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
O0200 O0200
G1992 S1 (PROC1); G1992 S1 (PROC1);
(PROC01 : SP-1) (PROC01 : SP-1)
(PROC03 : SP-2) (PROC03 : SP-2)
G1993; G1993;
G1992 S1 (PROC2); Add G1992 S1 (PROC2);
G1993; G1993;
G1992 S2 (PROC3); Add G1992 S2 (PROC3);
G1993; G1993;
% %
<4> Moreover press [RETURN], move the G1993 and G1992 blocks between of processes using cut and
paste in the normal edit screen.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
O0200 O0200
G1992 S1 (PROC1); G1992 S1 (PROC1);
(PROC01 : SP-1) (PROC01 : SP-1)
G1993; Move G1993;
G1992 S1 (PROC2); G1992 S1 (PROC2);
G1993; Move G1993;
G1992 S2 (PROC3); G1992 S2 (PROC3);
(PROC03 : SP-2) (PROC03 : SP-2)
G1993; G1993;
% %
<5> Press [EDWORK] again, and set transfer.

TURRET 1 TURRET 2
O0200 O0200
G1992 S1 (PROC1); G1992 S1 (PROC1);
(PROC01 : SP-1) (PROC01 : SP-1)
G1993; G1993;
G1992 S1 Q0 M200 (PROC2); Change G1992 S1 Q0 M200 (PROC2);
G1993 M201; G1993 M201;
Change
G1992 S2 (PROC3); G1992 S2 (PROC3);
(PROC03 : SP-2) (PROC03 : SP-2)
G1993; G1993;
% %
- 478 -
<6> Finish transition work.
4.5 3 TURRETS SIMULTANEOUS MACHINING

PROGRAMMING FUNCTION (FOR Series 30i/31i/32i)
In the process list editing function, it is possible to create a machining program for a machine that has a
combination of turrets and spindles as the following figure. In this configuration each turret can machine
on each spindle.
This function is enabled when the parameter No.27400#1 is set to 1 in case of 3-path lathe.
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
SPINDLE 1 SPINDLE 2
TURRET 3
NOTE
This function requires MANUAL GUIDE i Multi Path Lathe option (S786).
4.5.1 Process List Editing Screen

When this function is enabled, the [CHSPDL] soft key is displayed on the process list editing screen. If
the [CHSPDL] soft key is pressed, then the spindle, where the selected process has to be executed,
changes.
INSCEL DELCEL CPYCEL MOVCEL CHSPDL RENAME RETURN
When [CHSPDL] soft key is pressed, the selected process changes as follows.
(1) Spindle-1 process changes to Spindle-2 process.
(2) Spindle-2 process changes to Spindle-1 process.
(3) A process, belonging to any of the two central columns (Column #2 or Column #3) of the
Process list, is moved to the other column.
To signal that the process will be machined on the other spindle the symbol ● is displayed on a right
side of the cell of the corresponding process.
(1) If the process belonging to Spindle-1 (Column #1) will be machined on Spindle-2 then the
symbol ● is displayed on a right side of the cell. Refer to process OUTER ROUGHING in
below example.
- 479 -
(2) If the process belonging to Spindle-2 (Column #4) will be machined on Spindle-1 then the
symbol ● is displayed on a right side of the cell. Refer to process M167 P3501 in below
example.
Column #1 Column #2 Column #3 Column #4
: : : :
OUTER ROUGHING ● M166 P1230 INNER ROUGHING
OUTER FINISHING ● TAPPING M8 OUTER THREADING ●
C-AXIS GROOVING DRILLING M4-20 M167 P3501
: : : :
Example of Display Process List
4.5.2 Machining Program

When [CHSPDL] soft key is pressed, the process start block "S"(Spindle selection) is changed to the
other spindle number.
Exp.) When the process in Spindle-1 is altered.

G1992 S1 [CHSPDL] G1992 S2
(ABCD)； (ABCD)；
Exp.) When the process in Spindle-2 is altered.

G1992 S2 [CHSPDL] G1992 S1
(ABCD)； (ABCD)；
4.5.3 Compatible Machine Configurations

This function is available in the following machine configurations.
(1) Machine Configuration Type 1
TURRET 1 TURRET 2
SPINDLE 1 SPINDLE 2
TURRET 3
- 480 -
This process list edit screen is displayed as follows.
SPINDLE 1 SPINDLE 2
TURRET 1 TURRET 3 TURRET 2
TURRET 3
SPINDLE 1 SPINDLE 2
TURRET 1 TURRET 2

SPINDLE 1 SPINDLE 2
TURRET 1 TURRET 3
SPINDLE 1 SPINDLE 2
TURRET 2
- 481 -

SPINDLE 1 SPINDLE 2
TURRET 2
SPINDLE 1 SPINDLE 2
TURRET 1 TURRET 3

SPINDLE 1 SPINDLE 2
TURRET 2 TURRET 3
SPINDLE 1 SPINDLE 2
TURRET 1
- 482 -
SPINDLE 1 SPINDLE 2
TURRET 1
SPINDLE 2
SPINDLE 1
TURRET 2 TURRET 3

SPINDLE 1 SPINDLE 2
TURRET 3 TURRET 2
SPINDLE 1 SPINDLE 2
TURRET 1
- 483 -

SPINDLE 1 SPINDLE 2
TURRET 1
SPINDLE 2
SPINDLE 1
TURRET 3 TURRET 2

SPINDLE 1 SPINDLE 2
NOTE
Each machine configuration sets by the following parameters.
(1) Parameter No.14701#1, #2, #3
(2) Parameter No.27401#0, #1, #2, #3
(3) Parameter No.27402#0, #1, #2, #3
- 484 -

A process belonging to Column #1 and working in Spindle-2 will be not visible in simulation. A process
belonging to Column #4 and working in Spindle-1 will be not visible, too.
Column #1 Column #2 Column #3 Column #4
: : : :
OUTER ROUGHING ● M166 P1230 INNER ROUGHING
OUTER FINISHING ● TAPPING M8 OUTER THREADING
C-AXIS GROOVING DRILLING M4-20 M167 P3501 ●
: : : :
Example of Display Process List
For about the above example, the simulation of the processes ‘OUTER ROUGHING’, ‘OUTER FINISH’
and ‘M167 P3501’ will not be displayed.
- 485 -
5.MACHINING SIMULATION (OPTION) B-63874EN/11
5 MACHINING SIMULATION
Actual machining by a multi-path lathe can be simulated by drawing animation of 2-path simultaneous
machining with the same spindle.
NOTE
1 When performing a machining simulation, set all paths to the MEM mode.
2 When parameters are set to disable the combination of the spindle and turret, no
display is performed.
5.1 DRAWING DURING MACHINING AND MACHINING

SIMULATION (TOOL PATH DRAWING)
In drawing during machining and machining simulation (tool path drawing), the turret currently selected
is drawn.
When switching between paths in midstream, drawing starts in the middle of the state.
If the switching destination path is in a non-MEM mode, the drawing is interrupted.
5.2 MACHINING SIMULATION (ANIMATED)

In machining simulation (animated), each turret is drawn at the same time regardless of the selected turret.
NOTE
Only the machining on the last selected spindle in both paths is displayed in
animated simulation (the machining on the other spindle is not displayed in
animated simulation).
When the tool is placed in the lower position, machining on the opposite side of the material can be
displayed if soft key [REVERS] is pressed during animated simulation
- 486 -
B-63874EN/11 (OPTION) 5.MACHINING SIMULATION
5.3 STARTING UP MACHINING SIMULATION FOR EACH

PATH
In machining simulation by multi-path system MANUAL GUIDE i, only the machining simulation on the
path specified by the signal can be started.
This can be done by setting parameter No. 27309 of each path.
Only the path specified by the signal (first digit: bit, subsequent digits: number R signal) set in parameter
No. 27309 can be started.
For example, when the parameter is set as shown below in a 2-path system:
Parameter No. 27309 for path 1 = 1001
Parameter No. 27309 for path 2 = 2001
Then, when the following is assumed for path 1 and path 2:
R100.1 of path 1 = 1
R200.1 of path 2 = 1
Then, machining simulation is started.
The state of the signal of each path is displayed in the title bar of the animation window. A bootable path
is displayed in green and a unbootable path is displayed in gray.
Example 1)
When the signal of path 1 is on and the signal of path 2 is off in a 2-path system:
SIMULATE-ANIMATE 1 2
Example 2)
When the signal of path 1 is on and the signals of path 2 and path 3 are off in a 3-path system:
SIMULATE-ANIMATE 1 2 3
NOTE
1 When the waiting M code is specified between multiple paths, machining
simulation is set to the stop state during waiting. Accordingly, when simulation is
started on a path-by-path basis in a system using the waiting M code, it is
necessary to create a process for neglecting waiting using the waiting neglect
signal etc. with PMC. (Series 16i/18i/21i-B only)
2 To use this function, the optional MANUAL GUIDE i animation drawing function
is required.
3 In drawing during machining, the R signal set by parameter No. 27309 is invalid.
4 To use this function, it is necessary to set the parameter No. 27309 for all paths.
5 For the NC statement conversion function, the R signal set by parameter No.
27309 is valid. When the signal of the path (only the displayed paths are
subjected to NC statement conversion) to be converted is off, a warning
message stating "Turn on the drawing switch of this path." appears.
6 For the NC statement conversion function, the selection state of the signal of a
path is not displayed.
7 Even when machining simulation is started and then the R signal of the started
path is turned off, the machining simulation continues running.
8 When machining simulation is started and then the R signal of the started path is
turned on, pressing soft key [SINGLE] or [PROCES] does not change the startup
state. That is, pressing the soft key changes the startup state only on the path
where the R signal is on.
- 487 -
5.MACHINING SIMULATION (OPTION) B-63874EN/11
NOTE
9 When soft key [STOP] is pressed or a reset is made during startup of machining
simulation, machining simulation of all paths stops regardless of the state of the
R signal.
10 When any of paths is in the actual operating state, machining simulation cannot
be performed in Series 0i/16i/18i/21i.
11 When performing machining simulation, the path to be displayed must be in the
MEM mode in Series 0i/16i/18i/21i. If switching to a path for which a non-MEM
mode is set is performed during machining simulation, the machining simulation
is interrupted and the drawing window is closed.
12 The material is common to the first path and second path. The material can be
registered on any of the first path and second path. (If the material is registered
on both paths, the last registered one is enabled.)
5.4 WARNING MESSAGE DISPLAY IN MULTI-PATH TURNING

SYSTEM
In case of the multi-path turning system, “(PATH n)” is displayed in the warning message in order to
inform the path where the alarm occurred.
5.5 SPINDLE SELECTION COMMAND AND PROCESS START

COMMAND
In the T series multi-path system, spindle selection command G1998 and process start command G1992
are as described below.
(1) When bit 1 (ACD) of parameter No. 27311 is 1

(a) The spindle to be subjected to machining simulation is specified by only the G1998 command.
(b) The spindle to be subjected to machining simulation is the spindle of G1998 last specified in
one of the paths.
(c) The G1992 or G1998 command specified by the execution path determines the spindle used for
the subsequent machining; when the spindle is identical to the spindle of G1998 last specified,
machining simulation is displayed.
(2) When bit 1 (ACD) of parameter No. 27311 is 0

(a) The spindle to be subjected to machining simulation is specified by the G1992 command and
G1998 command.
(b) The spindle to be subjected to machining simulation is the spindle of G1992 or G1998 last
specified in one of the paths.
(c) The G1992 or G1998 command specified by the execution path determines the spindle used for
the subsequent machining; when the spindle is identical to the spindle of G1992 or G1998 last
specified, machining simulation is displayed.
- 488 -
B-63874EN/11 (OPTION) 5.MACHINING SIMULATION
5.6 MACHINING SIMULATION INFORMATION SETTING

FUNCTION FOR EACH PATH
(for Series 30i/31i/32i-B, 0i-F/0i-D)
This function is that the following data for machining simulation are in each path and automatically they
are used in drawing.
It is convenient when a workpiece different in each path is machined, for example, parallel twin-spindle
lathe is used.
(1) Blank figure
(2) Direction of drawing coordinate
(3) Status of cut display / not cut display
5.6.1 Condition
Make “2 windows machining simulation” invalid to use this function.
5.6.2 Path Switching Operation

When this function is valid, the following blank figure is displayed on the following drawing coordinate
after path switching.
(Blank figure)
The initialized blank figure that is set lastly on the selected path is drawn.
(Drawing coordinate)
The direction is same as one set lastly on the selected path.
5.6.3 Parameter
Set parameter No.27400#3 to 1 to use this function.
- 489 -
6. 4 PATH SYSTEM(for only MULTI-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS
Series 30i/31i-B, 31i-B5) (OPTION) B-63874EN/11
6 4 PATH SYSTEM (for only Series 30i/31i-B,

31i-B5)
6.1 OUTLINE
MANUAL GUIDE i functions that can be used with 2 path and 3 path system of 30i/31i-B, 31i-B5 can be
used with 4 path system except for a part of function.
NOTE
As to a part of function, please refer to “6.5 RESTRICTION”.
6.2 CONDITION
(1) Available machine configuration

2 spindles 4 tool posts
Tool post 1 Tool post 3
Spindle 1 Spindle 2
Tool post 2 Tool post 4
(2) Necessary hardware

- CPU card B2 : A02B-0323-H010
- Display unit : 10.4” LCD or larger
(3) Necessary software

CNC software (30i/31i-B, 31i-B5)
Series : G310/ G311/G410/G411/G430/G431、edition: 34 or later
(4) Necessary optional parameter

MANUAL GUIDE i Multi Path function : S786
(5) Necessary parameter

- Parameter to set effective path of MANUAL GUIDE i (common parameter among paths)
Please set No.14864 to 4.
- Parameter to set the icon number when path is selected (common parameter among paths)
- 490 -
MULTI-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS 6.4 PATH SYSTEM(for only
B-63874EN/11 (OPTION) Series 30i/31i-B, 31i-B5)
Parameter No. Icon No. Icon
101
first path : No.27410
second path : No.27411 102
third path : No.27412
fourth path : No.27413 103
104
- Parameter to set the display position of tool post (common parameter among paths)
(a) Setting of sub-spindle
Please set No.14702 #1 to 1.
(b) Setting of tool post 1
(c) Setting of tool post 2
(d) Setting of tool post 3
(e) Setting of tool post 4
(6) Necessary signal

When you use changing path by a path selection signal, please set the following signals.
Path selection signals : HEAD<G063.0>, HEAD2<G062.7>, HEAD3<G408.1>, HEAD4<G408.2>
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G063.0 HEAD
G062.7 HEAD2
G408.1 HEAD3
G408.2 HEAD4
[Classification] Input signal

[Function] Selection of MDI panel that is used for what path
[Operation] The operation with the MDI panel becomes an operation of the path specified by
combining signals of HEAD, HEAD2, HEAD3 and HEAD4. The relations between the
combination of the path selection signal and the selected path are as follows.
- 491 -
Path selection signal

HEAD4 HEAD3 HEAD2 HEAD Selected path
G408.2 G408.1 G062.7 G063.0
0 0 0 0 First path
0 0 0 1 Second path
0 0 1 0 Third path
0 0 1 1 Fourth path
6.3 SCREENS AND OPERATIONS

On MANUAL GUIDE i for 4 path system, screens and operations of the each function are the same as
2 path or 3 path system except for all path display/edit screen.
6.4 ADDED FUNCTIONS
6.4.1 Changing Between Paths

Changing path to fourth path is possible by the following two operations.
- Changing path by a path selection signal
- Changing path by a soft-key [CHPATH]
(1) Changing path by a path selection signal (No.27400#0 = 1)

Connected with the path selection signal (HEAD, HEAD2, HEAD3, HEAD4), the display of
MANUAL GUIDE i is switched.
(2) Changing path by a soft-key [CHPATH] (No.27400#0 = 1)

Whenever the soft-key [CHPATH] is pressed, the displayed path will be changed to the next path
as follows.
First path > Second path > Third path > Fourth path > First path > …
- 492 -
MULTI-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS 6.4 PATH SYSTEM(for only
B-63874EN/11 (OPTION) Series 30i/31i-B, 31i-B5)
6.4.2 All Path Display / Edit Function

The display unit of 15” LCD or larger is necessary for all path display/edit screen in 4 path system.
The screen of each path is sequentially from the left. (First path / Second path / Third path / Fourth path)
A basic screen composition and the operations are the same as 3 path system.

Machining simulation function applies basically to the specification of 3 path system.
Machining simulation for 4 path system is executable only by the machine configuration that meets
all the following conditions.
(1) The tool post is up to 2 per spindle.
(2) The tool post is upper and lower one by one per spindle.
And the machining simulation only on the path specified by the signal can be started. This can be done by
setting parameter No. 27309 of each path. The state of the signal of each path is displayed in the title bar
of the animation window. A bootable path is displayed in green and an unbootable path is displayed in
gray.
- 493 -
Title bar
6.5 RESTRICTION
The following functions are not available in 4 path system.
(1) Process list editing function
(2) Program coordinate system changing function and Tool offset memory changing function
(3) Setup guidance function (Measurement cycle)
(4) Disabling display of specified path
(5) Program restart of machining cycle
- 494 -
MULTI-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS 7.2 PATH MACHINING CENTER
7 2 PATH MACHINING CENTER FUNCTION

MANUAL GUIDE i is available on 2 path machining center.
NOTE
1 This function is used when 1st and 2nd path should be operated on
MANUAL GUIDE i screen. It is unnecessary to use this function when only 1st
path should be operated.
2 This function can be used on 2, 3, 4 paths machining center. But, only 1st and
2nd path can be operated on MANUAL GUIDE i.
3 MANUAL GUIDE i Multi Path function (S786) is necessary to use this function.
4 Process list editing function is not available.
5 This function can’t be used on the machine with C-axis.
6 This function can be used on only horizontal machining center.
7 Three-dimensional coordinate system conversion is not available.
8 Tool management table can’t be shown on MANUAL GUIDE i screen even if
Tool management function is available.
7.1 CONCURRENT DISPLAY AND EDIT OF PROGRAMS OF

ALL PATHS
Information (position data, modal values, and programs) on all paths can be concurrently displayed on
one screen by pushing [MLTWIN] soft-key.
If the soft key is pushed again, single path information is displayed.
When soft key [MLTWIN] is pressed, the display mode shifts as shown below.
Single path All path screen
7.2 MACHINING SIMULATION
7.2.1 Available Method for Drawing

One of following methods for drawing is available.
1. 1st and 2nd path simultaneous drawing

This drawing method is used when 1st and 2nd path machine a workpiece simultaneously. (Refer
following picture.)
1st path 2nd path
Workpiece
Tool Tool
- 495 -
7. 2 PATH MACHINING MULTI-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS
CENTER FUNCTION (OPTION) B-63874EN/11
2. 1st and 2nd path independent drawing

This drawing method is used when 1st and 2nd path machine each workpiece independently. (Refer
following picture.)
1st path 2nd path

Workpiece
Tool Workpiece Tool
NOTE
When 1st and 2nd path independent drawing is selected, machining simulation
can be executed on only selected path.
7.2.2 Available Coordinate

The following coordinate is available for the simulation function.
1. 1st and 2nd path simultaneous drawing

The simulation function can be used if all the following conditions are met.
(1) Both of 1st and 2nd path have right-handed coordinate system.
(2) The direction of coordinate of 1st path is different from the direction of coordinate of 2nd path.
(3) The direction of coordinate is either the following coordinate.
Right = +Z, up = +Y Right = -Z, up = +Y
Y Y
Z Z
2. 1st and 2nd path independent drawing

The simulation function can be used if all the following conditions are met.
(1) Both of 1st and 2nd path have right-handed coordinate system.
(2) The direction of coordinate is either the following coordinate.
Right = +Z, up = +Y Right = -Z, up = +Y
Y Y
Z Z
7.2.3 Available Method for Executing

The following method for executing can be selected.
1. Single path executing

Machining simulation can be executed on either path.
2. Multi path executing
Machining simulation can be executed on both paths simultaneously.
NOTE
1 The waiting M code is effective during machining simulation only when 1st and
2nd path simultaneous drawing and multi path executing are selected.
- 496 -
MULTI-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS 7.2 PATH MACHINING CENTER
NOTE
2 Set parameter No.27309 to correct value to use machining simulation. Refer to
examination of parameters of operator’s manual to know the meaning.
3 Multi path executing can be selected only when “1st and 2nd path simultaneous
drawing” is selected.
7.2.4 Available Blank Figure

When machining simulation is executed, the following blank figures can be drawn.
1. Rectangular blank figure

The following blank can be drawn. The origin of work coordinate can be set on any points.
And the rotation center of B-axis can be set at any points.
2. Cylinder blank figure, Hollow cylinder blank figure, Prism blank figure, Hollow prism blank figure
and Free contour cylinder blank figure
The following blank can be drawn. The origin of work coordinate can be set on any points.
But the position of rotation center of B-axis is the center of cylinder (an inscribed circle in case of
prism blank figure).
7.2.5 Operation for Executing Machining Simulation

The order of operation for executing machining simulation is following.
1. Setting method of drawing

(1) Push [SETING] soft-key.
(2) “SETTINGS” window is displayed. Select “SIMULATION” tab.
(3) Place the cursor on “SETTING OF GRAPHIC DRAW” and push [SELECT] soft-key.
(4) The window of “SETTING OF GRAPHIC DRAW” is displayed. Place the cursor on the item
“SIMULATION” when the setting for machining simulation should be changed or
“MACHINING DRAWING” when the setting for machining drawing should be changed.
(5) Push “SYNC” soft-key and the method for drawing is set to “1st and 2nd path simultaneous
drawing”. Push “INDEP” soft-key and the method for drawing is set to “1st and 2nd path
independent drawing”.
2. Inserting blank figure command

(1) Push [START] soft-key and “INSERT STARTING COMMAND FOR MILLING” window is
displayed.
(2) Select “BLANK” tab.
(3) Place the cursor on the figure that should be inserted and push [SELECT] soft-key.
(4) The window for inputting blank figure data is displayed. Input figure data.
(5) Push [INSERT] soft-key and blank figure command is inserted.
3. Making program
Make program by inserting fixed form sentences, machining cycle command or the other command.
4. Displaying machining simulation window

Push [SIMLAT] soft-key and simulation window is displayed.
- 497 -
7. 2 PATH MACHINING MULTI-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS
CENTER FUNCTION (OPTION) B-63874EN/11
5. Selecting method for executing

Push [CHRUN] soft-key. Whenever the soft-key is pushed, the method for executing is changed
single path executing or multi path executing.
And executing path mark, that is displayed in the right edge of title bar of machining simulation
window is changed as follows.
(1) In case multi path executing is selected

SIMULATE 1 2
(2) In case single path executing is selected

SIMULATE 1 2
SIMULATE 1 2
6. Starting machining simulation

Push [START] soft-key and machining simulation is started.
7.3 CHANGING BETWEEN PATHS

On the MANUAL GUIDE i for multi-path machining center, each path information can be displayed.
On its screen, the icon for selected path is displayed at the upper right part.
The way to change path is the following.
Connected with the path selection signal (HEAD<G063#0>, HEAD2<G062#7>), change the display of
MANUAL GUIDE i.
HEAD <G63.0> HEAD2 <G62.7> Displayed path number
0 0 1
1 0 2
7.4 PARAMETER SETTING

Set following parameters to use this function.
(1) No.14702#0 = 1
(2) No.14703#3 = 0
(3) No.14705#5 = 0
(4) No.14864 = 0 (In case of 2 path machining center)
No.14864 = 2 (In case of 3 or 4 path machining center)
(5) No.27000#6 = 1
(6) No.27004#0 = 1, No.27004#1 = 0, No.27004#2 = 0, No.27004#3 = 0
No.27004#0 = 1, No.27004#1 = 0, No.27004#2 = 0, No.27004#3 = 1 (With B-axis)
(7) No.27221#4 = 1
(8) No.27309 = R signal for selected path simulation
(9) No.27314#0 = 1
(10) No.27314#1 = 1
(11) No.27334 = 1
- 498 -
VI. HANDLE MACHINING
1.HANDLE MACHINING (For
B-63874EN/11 HANDLE MACHINING only Series 30i/31i/32i-B)
1 HANDLE MACHINING
(For only Series 30i/31i/32i-B)
Handle machining has the following two functions.
(1) Machining by handle

This function enables operators to machine a slanted line or an arc with simultaneous two axes
motion by one handle.
(2) Programming by handle
The handle operation can be memorized as a program, and the tool motion can be played back.
1.1 WORKING CONDITION

Handle machining can be used only by the following conditions.
(1) Necessary optional function

- MANUAL GUIDE i function (S790)
- Handle machining function (S797)
- Manual liner/circular interpolation function (J774)
(2) Machine configurations

- Lathe : One path system 2 axes (X, Z)
- Machining center : One path system 3 axes (X, Y, Z)
(3) Available mode

HND mode, JOG mode, THND mode, and TJOG mode
(4) Available coordinate system for handle machining

- Lathe:
X
Z
Z
X
- Machining center:
Y
- 501 -
1. HANDLE MACHINING (For
only Series 30i/31i/32i-B) HANDLE MACHINING B-63874EN/11
1.2 MACHINING BY HANDLE
1.2.1 Specification of Function

This function enables operators to machine a slanted line or an arc with simultaneous two axes motion by
one handle.
X X
Z Z
X Z Lathe
Y Y
X X
X Y
Machining center
NOTE
If the signals G544 (MHLCn) and G545 (MHUSn) for Approach/Guidance handle
are not set, handle machining function is not available.
Handle and tool motion

There are the following two type of using handle for handle machining.
- Guidance handle: the handle for moving tool in parallel along the target figure
- Approach handle: the handle for moving tool vertically with the target figure
It is possible to machine the line figure and circle figure by Guidance handle and Approach handle.
(1) Line figure

- The tool moves in parallel along the target figure when Guidance handle is moved.
- The tool moves vertically with the target figure when Approach handle is moved.
Target figure Target figure
Tool
Tool
Tool motion by Guidance handle Tool motion by Approach handle
- 502 -
(2) Circle figure

- The tool moves along the circumference of the target figure when Guidance handle is moved.
- The tool moves toward the center of the circle when Approach handle is moved.
Target figure Target figure
Tool
Tool
Tool motion by Guidance handle Tool motion by Approach handle
Limit function
When the limit function is available, the tool is stopped at the position of which a tool touches the target
figure. It is possible to prevent over cutting by using the limit function.
(1) Line figure
Tool Approach
Target figure
Approach direction
direction
Target figure
Tool
(2) Circle figure
Target figure
Approach Tool
Target figure direction
Approach
direction
Tool
1.2.2 Example of Operation

It is an operation example of machining part of the below figure by handle.
Z
Machining area
- 503 -
(1) The software key [HNDL] is pressed on the base screen of any one of HND mode, JOG mode,
THND mode and TJOG mode.
Base screen
(2) After the two point coordinate system data of the target line figure is input on the figure input screen,
the software key [APPLY] is pressed.
Input data of
target figure (line)
Handle machining screen
- 504 -
(3) The following information is displayed on the execution screen of handle machining.
Display of distance between target figure and present tool position
Display of target figure Display of

and tool position (+) target figure data
on graphic window and
state of
limit function
Display of
explanation for
approach/guidance
Handle machining screen handle
(4) When the approach handle is moved, the tool moves vertically with the target figure (line).
When the guidance handle is moved, the tool moves in parallel along the target figure.
And the tool path is displayed on the graphic window.
Graphic window
- 505 -
1.2.3 Handle Machining Screen

The construction of handle machining screen is as follows.
Display part of figure distance
Graphic window Guidance window
Message window
Soft-key
Construction of handle machining screen

Soft-key
Soft-key name Outline
ACTPOS The display of the actual position is switched. Refer to the specification of MANUAL GUIDE i
for details.
DEST. Specification of recorded program
(This item is displayed only for No.14858#3=1.)
RECORD The program making begins.
(This is displayed only for No.14858#3=1.)
STOP The program making is ended.
(This is displayed only for No.14858#3=1.)
LIMIT On/Off of the limit function is switched.
(Impropriety when guidance figure is not determined.)
APPLY The guidance figure is determined by the input value, and the figure is drawn by the value.
HD.END Handle machining function is ended, and it returns to the base screen of MANUAL GUIDE i.
- 506 -
Display part of figure distance

The distance between a target figure and present tool position is displayed in an upper state display
window.
(1) Lathe
The distance from the virtual tip of tool nose to the target figure is displayed.
D: Distance on vertical straight line to target figure from present position
Dx: Distance for X axis direction
Dz: Distance for Z axis direction
Present
position
(2) Machining center

The distance from the center of the tool to the target figure is displayed.
D: Distance on vertical straight line to target figure from present position
Dx: Distance for X axis direction
Dy: Distance for Y axis direction
Present
position
- 507 -
Guidance window
The shape input screen of the steering wheel processing includes three input screens of yen of straight
line-angle of the straight line -2 points. It is possible to switch to each screen by moving the cursor to the
tab, and pressing a right and left cursor key.
(1) Tab [LINE-PT]

Coordinates of two points are specified, and a straight line target figure is input.
Input item
No. Meaning
Lathe Machining center
1 P1 (X1) P1 (X1) X coordinates value of the first point
2 P1 (Z1) P1 (Y1) Z coordinates value / Y coordinates value of the first point
3 P2 (X2) P2 (X2) X coordinates value of the second point
4 P2 (Z2) P2 (Y2) Z coordinates value / Y coordinates value of the second
point
5 NOSE R TOOL DIA. Tool noise radius / Diameter of tool
6 VIRT.TIP - Virtual tip of tool nose (0 - 9)
7 OFFSET NO. OFFSET NO. Offset number (Note 1)
8 FEED RATE FEED RATE Feed rate (Note 2)
(Note 1) Refer to parameter No.14858 #2.
(Note 2) Refer to parameter No.14858 #3. (Used to Programming by handle)
(2) Tab [LINE-ANG]

A straight line target figure is input specifying coordinates of one point and the angle.
Input item
No. Meaning
1 P (X) P (X) X coordinates value of the first point
2 P (Z) P (Y) Z coordinates value / Y coordinates value of the first point
3 ANGLE (A) ANGLE (A) Angle with horizontal axis (Anti-clockwise is positive)
(Note 1) Refer to parameter No.14858 #2.
(Note 2) Refer to parameter No.14858 #3. (Used to Programming by handle)
(3) Tab [CIRCLE]

The target figure of circle is input specifying center coordinates and the radius.
Input item
No. Meaning
1 Center (X) Center (X) X coordinates value of circle center
2 Center (Z) Center (Y) Z coordinates value / Y coordinates value of circle center
3 RADIUS (R) RADIUS (R) Radius of circle
(Note 1) Refer to parameter No.14858 #2
(Note 2) Refer to parameter No.14858 #3 (Used to Programming by handle)
- 508 -
(4) Tab [PROGRAM]

This tab is displayed only for No.14858 #3 = 1, used to Programming by handle.
The recorded program is displayed in this tab.
Graphic window
A target figure and present tool position and tool path are displayed in a left graphic window.
Target figure
Tool path
Present
tool pos ition
(1) Display of target figure

The target figure is displayed in green.
(2) Display of present tool position

A present tool position is displayed in yellow.
The tool position which is displayed by circle or cross, can be switched by setting the parameter
No.14858 #1.
(3) Drawing of tool path

Tool path is displayed in blue.
Lathe: Tool path draws in tracks of the tool where the virtual tip position moves.
Machining center: Tool path draws in tracks of the tool where the tool center moves.
Message window
The guidance, that the movement of the tool and the rotation direction for Approach handle and Guidance
handle is notified, is displayed in a message window.
And the position of guidance follows parameter No.14858 #0.
- For parameter No.14858 #0 = 0
- 509 -
- For parameter No.14858 #0 = 1
NOTE
1 Which handle is considered to be an approach handle or guidance handle is
decided by setting signal G544 (MHLCn) and signal G545 (MHUSn).
2 Guidance message does not display on the guidance window, when the signal of
Approach handle or Guidance handle are not set.
1.3 PROGRAMMING BY HANDLE
1.3.1 Specification of Function

This function can convert handle operation to program, and can record the CNC command into Tape
storage memory.
X
O**** ;
Z
M03 S**** ;
G01 X** Z** F** ;
X Z -- (omission) --
Lathe
G01 X** Z** F** ;
Y
O**** ;
X
M03 S**** ;
G01 X** Y** F** ;
X Y -- (omission) --
Machining center G01 X** Y** F** ;
NOTE
Programming by handle makes the cutting feed command (G01,G02,G03).
When the operator want to change it to the rapid traverse command (G00),
please check the converted program by machining simulation and edit the command
directly.
- 510 -
Handle operation and converted CNC command

The each handle operation is converted to the following CNC command.
Converted CNC
Handle operation command Timing of converting command
(Note 1)
Set up S code S** When the change amount of the actual
(Auxiliary function) spindle speed exceeds a constant
value.
T code T** When the signal corresponding
Spindle rotation M3 to the auxiliary function
Spindle rotation M4 command with the operation
Stopping spindle M5 panel button is turned on.
Coolant ON M8
Coolant OFF M9
Machining of Axis direction G01 X** (Y**) (Z**) F** When the following conditions
workpiece feed handle are meet.
(1axis) (1) When the condition which becomes
Axis direction G01 X** Z** F** the pause (Note2) of the block is
feed handle G01 X** Y** F** meet.
(Simultaneous 2axes) (2) When the soft-key [STOP] is
Approach handle G01 X** Z** F** pushed.
G01 X** Y** F** (3) When the guidance figure is
Guidance handle (Line figure) changed.
G01 X** Z** F**
(Circle figure)
G02/03 X** Z** I** K** F**
G02/03 X** Z** I** J** F**
(Note1)
The following information is input to “**” at the converted command respectively.
S: Actual spindle speed (Feed per minute)
T: Tool information (Lathe : Tool number + Offset number, Machining Center : Tool number)
X, Y, and Z: Present position coordinates when the command is made (absolute coordinates)
I, J, and K: Distance from starting point to circular arc center (with sign)
F: Feed speed input by item [FEED RATE]
(Note 2)
It is time when the condition, which becomes the pause of the block meets either of the following
requirements.
- When the operated handle is switched.
- When the number of operated handle is changed.
- When the sending direction of handle is reversed.
- When the stopping time is longer than given time after the handle is operated.
- When the soft-key [STOP] is pushed.
- When the guidance figure is changed.
Detail of converted movement command

(1) Coordinates value
The coordinates value, which is converted as an end point, is one that is acquired at the pause of the
block.
This coordinates value is a position where the movement stopped temporarily. (The servo delay
amount and the acceleration/deceleration delay amount are 0 at the time.)
Or, it is a position where the direction of the movement was reversed. (Only by using axis direction
feed handle)
- 511 -
This point of the present position is converted as an end point.
(2) Feed speed

Feed speed is converted as the data, which is input to the input item on the guidance input window.
“F?” is instructed when nothing is input to the input item.
(3) The pause of the block

(a) When the kind of the operated handle is switched, it is assumed the pause of the block.
(The coordinate, when the movement stops temporarily, is assumed to be a terminal position.)
(Example 1) (Example 2)
Operation by Axis
direction feed
Operation by Operation by handle (X axis)
Approach handle Guidance handle Operation by Axis
direction feed
handle (Y axis)
(b) When the number of the operated handle is changed, it is assumed the pause of the block.
(The coordinate, when the movement stops temporarily, is assumed to be a terminal position.)
(Example) Operation by two handles
Operation by one handle

Operation by one handle
(c) When sending the direction of one axis is reversed with one axis direction feed handle, it is
assumed the pause of the block.
The coordinate, when sending is reversed, is assumed to be a terminal position.)
(Example)
(d) hen the movement is stopped longer than the fixed time after the handle is operated, it is
assumed the pause of the block.
(Example)
This potion stops longer than the fixed time
(e) hen “STOP” of soft-key is pressed, it is assumed the pause of the block.
The coordinate, when the soft-key [STOP] is pressed, is assumed to be a terminal position.)
(f) hen the data of the guidance figure is changed, it is assumed the pause of the block.
The coordinates when the data of guidance figure is changed, is made the terminal position.)
- 512 -
(Note 1)
The converted movement instruction is an absolute programming. So, when the modal information is
an incremental programming, please specify an absolute instruction (G90).
(Note 2)
The following movement instruction of circle can not be converted.
- one time circle
- circular arc that exceeds 360 °
(Note 3)
Because the terminal position cannot be fixed according to the following timing, the movement
instruction is not converted.
- never the tool does not stop temporarily, and the tool always moves
- when the operator operates two handles at the same time
(Note 4)
When the soft-key [RECORD] is pressed, the movement to start point is converted as the rapid
traverse command (G00), which the terminal coordinate is the present position. The other movement
is converted as the cutting feed command (G01,G02,G03).
Detail of converted auxiliary function command

The auxiliary function command with the button of operation panel is converted by detecting the DI
signal, which is allocated to the switch of operation panel.
CNC G0000 --- PMC X000 --- Machine
F0000 --- Y000 ---
R000 ---
MANUAL GUIDE i Coolant ON/OFF
Program area
M08
M09
(Note)
As to S code command, when accumulated of the change amount for real spindle speed exceeds a
constant value (Set it in parameter No.27462) after pressing the soft-key [RECORD], S code
command is made by real spindle speed.
Command corresponded to auxiliary function command call signal

To call the auxiliary function command, the maximum DI signals (R-signal) of 24 are prepared. The
number of the R-signal is specified by the parameter No.27460.
The text data of command is made with personal computer beforehand, and the made command is
registered on the setting screen of MANUAL GUIDE i with a memory card.
(Refer to “1.3.3 Registration of auxiliary function command” for details.)
- 513 -
1.3.2 Sample of Operation

It is an operation example of programming machining part of the below figure.
Machining area
(1) The setting window of “CREATE PROGRAM FOR DESTINATION” is displayed by pressing the
soft-key [DEST.] on the handle machining screen.

(2) The destination of created program is defined by pressing the soft-key [CREATE] after inputting the
program name on the setting window of recording program.
Setting window of recording program
(3) Recording program mode is tuned on by pressing soft key [RECORD] on the execution screen of
handle machining.
- 514 -
(4) Execute the handle operation that is written in Chapter “1.2.2 Screen and operation”. Handle
operation is converted to CNC command and, the command is recorded into the program. And the
content of converted program can be displayed by switching the tab [PROGRAM].
Display of recording program mode
Display of
recorded program
(5) When the handle operation is finished, turn the recording program mode off by pressing the soft key
[STOP].
Example of converted program is as follows.
(Example of converted program)

O1111
M03 S1000；
G00 X20. Z60.；
G01 X5. Z40. F0.8；
Workpiece
G01 X-20. Z60.；
G01 X-15. Z70.；
G01 X10. Z40.；
G01 X5. Z30.；
G01 X-25. Z60.；
G01 X-20. Z75.；
G01 X15. Z35.；
G01 X5. Z20.；
Handle operation
G01 X-30. Z60.；
1.3.3 Registration of Auxiliary Function Command

The auxiliary function command with the button of operation panel is made as the fixed text data by using
personal computer beforehand, and is registered by reading from the memory card.
Registration of auxiliary function command

The registration of the auxiliary function command becomes the following operations.
- 515 -
(1) The window of "SETTINGS" is displayed by pushing the soft-key [SETING] on the base screen of
MANUAL GUIDE i.
Settings Window
(2) The file directory window, that file is memorized into the memory card, is displayed by pushing the
soft-key [SELECT] after moving cursor to the item of “3. INPUT AUXILIARY FUNCTION”.
File for auxiliary function command
(3) The message of the writing confirmation is displayed by pushing the soft-key [INPUT] after moving
the cursor to the file that made as the auxiliary function command beforehand. And the registration
is executed by pressing the soft-key [YES].
(4) The message of “INPUT COMPLETE” is displayed on the file directory window after finishing the
registration of the auxiliary function.
Making of registration data for auxiliary function command

The format of the auxiliary function command is as follows. Following text format data is made with
personal computer.
<Title>=_,<Code>=_
Title: The registration name of the auxiliary function command is set.
Code: The auxiliary function command is set.
(Example)
<Title>=TOOL CHANGE,<Code>=T?;M06;
<Title>=COOLANT ON,<Code>=M08;
<Title>=COOLANT OFF,<Code>=M09; Maximum 24 auxiliary function
････ commands can be registered.
････
････
- 516 -
(Note)
Please specify “T?” as the T code command. When the T code command is made, “?” is replaced
with the tool number (Head tool number : “HD.T”) which has adhered to a present turret.
In the lathe, the tool number is added the offset number. (Because T code makes “tool selection
number + offset number” assumption, the tool management function cannot be used.)
Addition of ladder program

The maximum 24 call signals are prepared for auxiliary function command, which is allocated to the
switch of operation panel.
Please add to the ladder program to turn on the R-signal when the switch of operation panel is pushed.
MANUAL GUIDE i observes at the cycle of 8 msec. If the R-signal is turning on, MANUAL GUIDE i
turns off the R-signal after acquiring the registered auxiliary function command.
Call signals for auxiliary

Converting command
function command
R***.0 Command of No.1
--- ---
R(***+1).0 Command of No.9
--- ---
--- ---
1.4 PARAMETERS
(1) To use this function, be sure to set the following parameters.
- No.27457 Work coordinate system during handle machining
- No.27458 View coordinate of graphic window for handle machining
- No.27462 Standard value which is assumed that spindle speed is changed (r.p.m)
(2) The relating parameters are as follows.

- No.7106#3 Internal relay (the R-signal) of PMC that uses it with input data in manual
linear/circular interpolation
- No.7106#4 Internal relay (the R-signal) of PMC that uses it with output data in manual
linear/circular interpolation
- No.13541 Head address of the R-signal used by the input data in the manual linear/circular
interpolation
- No.13542 Head address of the R-signal used by the output data in the manual linear/circular
interpolation
- No.14858#0 The position of Guidance message
- No.14858#1 The tool position on the graphic window
- No.14858#2 The tool information
- No.14858#3 Programming by handle
- No.27460 Head address of the R-signal used by the output data for auxiliary function
commands
- No.27461 Time which is assumed that handle machining is stop (msec)
- 517 -
1.5 RELATED SIGNALS

The relating signals are as follows.
(1) Feed axis and direction selection signal +Jg, -Jg, +Ja, -Ja < G086 >

[Function] Select a desired feed axis and direction in jog feed or incremental feed. The sign (+ or -)
in the signal name indicates the feed direction. “Jg” and “Ja” indicates Guidance JOG and
Approach JOG, respectively.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G086 -Ja +Ja -Jg +Jg
(2) Manual linear/circular interpolation signal MHLC1 to MHLC5 < G544.0 to G544.4 >

[Function] Each of these signals selects the manual linear/circular interpolation function for the n-th
manual pulse generator.
[Operation] 0: Manual linear/circular interpolation is disabled. The manual handle is used for axis
direction feed.
1: Manual linear/circular interpolation is enabled. The manual handle is used for the
purpose selection by the usage selection of manual linear/circular interpolation
signal (MHUSn).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G544 MHLC5 MHLC4 MHLC3 MHLC2 MHLC1
(3) Usage selection of manual linear/circular interpolation signal

MHUS1 to MHUS5 < G545.0 to G545.4 >

[Function] Selects the guidance handle or approach handle for the n-th manual pulse generator when
the manual linear/circular interpolation signal (MHLCn) is set to 1 for the manual
linear/circular interpolation function.
[Operation] 0: The manual handle is used as the approach handle.
1: The manual handle is used as the guidance handle.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G545 MHUS5 MHUS4 MHUS3 MHUS2 MHUS1
(4) Auxiliary function command signal AUXF1 to AUFX24 < R***.0 to R(***+2).7 >
The number of R*** is specified by setting the parameter No.27460.

[Function] The auxiliary function command is executed by pushing the button of operation panel.
[Operation] 0: The button of operation panel is not pushed.( The auxiliary function command is not
executed.)
1: The button of operation panel is pushed.
( The auxiliary function command is executed.)
When the button of operation panel is pushed, MTB ladder program set to 1 of signal
AUXFn.
- 518 -
When the signal AUXFn is set to 1, MANUAL GUIDE i sets to 0 of signal AUXFn in
cycles of 8ms.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
R*** AUFX8 AUFX7 AUFX6 AUFX5 AUFX4 AUFX3 AUFX2 AUFX1
R(***+1) AUFX16 AUFX15 AUFX14 AUFX13 AUFX12 AUFX11 AUFX10 AUFX9
R(***+2) AUFX24 AUFX23 AUFX22 AUFX21 AUFX20 AUFX19 AUFX18 AUFX17
- 519 -
VII. OTHER FUNCTIONS
1.PROGRAM COORDINATE SYSTEM
CHANGING FUNCTION AND TOOL OFFSET
B-63874EN/11 OTHER FUNCTIONS MEMORY CHANGING FUNCTION
1 PROGRAM COORDINATE SYSTEM

CHANGING FUNCTION AND TOOL
OFFSET MEMORY CHANGING FUNCTION
1.1 OVERVIEW
Programming, machining simulation and input/output of data which are fit for changing coordinate by
“Program Coordinate System Changing Function” and “Tool Offset Memory Changing Function” can be
executed in MANUAL GUIDE i.
NOTE
The Program Coordinate System Changing Functions of MANUAL GUIDE i can
be used under the following case.
1 The axes, which are possible to reverse the direction by the Program
Coordinate System Changing, must be Z-axis and Y-axis.
2 The right-handed coordinate system must be still used after changing the
program coordinate system.
1.2 PROGRAM COORDINATE SYSTEM CHANGING

FUNCTION
In this paragraph, the way to select program coordinate during operation, executing simulation and
making arbitrary figures is explained.
NOTE
By setting the bit 4 (W12) of parameter No.14851=1, this function becomes
available.
1.2.1 Coordinate System Selection Command

The program coordinate system is selected by Process Start Block G1992.
1.2.1.1 Insert coordinate system selection command

When the cell is inserted on the first spindle side, the following block is inserted.
(Please refer to the section of process list editing function about cell.)
And when this block is executed, the program coordinate system changes to the coordinate system-1.
G1992 S1. W1. (COMMENT) ;
When the cell is inserted on the second spindle side, the following block is inserted. And when this block
is executed, the program coordinate system changes to the coordinate system-2.
G1992 S2. W2. (COMMENT) ;
When the cell is copied or moved between the process list of the different spindles, ‘W1.’ or ‘W2.’ are
automatically changed according to the spindle which the cell is moved to.
- 523 -
1. PROGRAM COORDINATE SYSTEM
OFFSET MEMORY CHANGING FUNCTION OTHER FUNCTIONS B-63874EN/11
NOTE
For details on the process start command and cells, see Chapter 4, "PROCESS
LIST EDITING FUNCTION" in Part V.
1.2.1.2 Executing program

When G1992 block is executed, the program coordinate system can be changed by the followings.
(1) Change by M-code specified in the parameter

Please input M code number to parameter No. 27180 for changing to the coordinate system-1 and to
parameter No. 27181 for changing to the coordinate system-2.
When G1992 S** W** block is executed, the M-code which is specified in the each parameter is
outputted. Thus the program coordinate system changes.
(2) Change by executing P-code macro sub-program specified in the parameter

Please input P-code program number to parameter No. 27184 for changing to the coordinate
system-1, and to parameter No. 27185 for changing to the coordinate system-2.
When G1992 S** W** block is executed, the P-code program which is specified in the each
parameter is outputted. Thus the program coordinate system changes.
If both parameters the above (1) and (2) are specified, the P-code program is called first. And next, the
M-code is output.
1.2.2 Coordinate of Arbitrary Figures (XZ, ZC, ZY Plane)

On the following arbitrary figures entering window, the programming figures are displayed according to
the selected program coordinate system.
(1) Arbitrary Figures for the XZ Plane

(2) Arbitrary Figures for the ZC Plane
(3) Arbitrary Figures for the ZY Plane
1.2.2.1 Select display coordinate system

The display of coordinate system can be selected on the entering window for Start Point.
If “COORD1” is selected, the display of coordinate system changes to the program coordinate system-1.
And if “COORD2” is selected, the display of coordinate system changes to the program coordinate
system-2.

In the case of executing the machining simulation (Tool Path and Animated), the program coordinate
system is changed by the address W1 and W2 of G1992 block.
1.2.4 Status Display

The current program coordinate system displays in the status display window by the icon.
- 524 -
1.PROGRAM COORDINATE SYSTEM
CHANGING FUNCTION AND TOOL OFFSET
B-63874EN/11 OTHER FUNCTIONS MEMORY CHANGING FUNCTION
The display icon, which is described the selected program coordinate system, is specified by the
parameters No.27188 and 27189.
1.3 TOOL OFFSET MEMORY CHANGING FUNCTION

Tool offset, tool data and work shift for program coordinate system 1 and 2 can be inputted separately.
NOTE
The following functions require Tool Offset Memory Changing Function option.
1.3.1 Tool Offset Data Window

It is possible to set the tool offset data for each program coordinate system 1 and 2.
1.3.1.1 Select coordinate system

The display of the data for each coordinate system changes as following by the bit 6 (GCC) of parameter
No.14851.
(1) In the case that bit 6 (GCC) of parameter No.14851 is 0

It is possible to change the display of the tool offset data for each coordinate system by pressing the
[1←→2] soft-key.
ACTPOS MEASUR +INPUT INP.C. CHCURS 1←→2 NO.SRH CLOSE

The display of the tool offset data for each coordinate system changes according to DO-signal GCO
<F0347#X> dynamically.
1.3.1.2 Display selected coordinate system

The symbol for the selected coordinate system is displayed in the title of the window. The symbol is
displayed according to the parameters No.27188 and No.27189.
When the coordinate system-2 is selected.

TOOL OFFSET 2 TAB ←
GEOMETRY OFFSET
WEAR OFFSET TOOL DATA
1.3.1.3 Setting of tool data

When the Tool Offset Memory Changing Function is effective, the maximum tool number which is
possible to set to the tool data base is as follows.
For Program Coordinate System-1 : 150
For Program Coordinate System-2 : 150
- 525 -
1. PROGRAM COORDINATE SYSTEM
OFFSET MEMORY CHANGING FUNCTION OTHER FUNCTIONS B-63874EN/11
The tool data for each program coordinate system are possible to input from and output to the memory
card.
1.3.2 Workpiece Shift Offset Data Window

It is possible to set the workpiece shift offset data for each program coordinate system 1 and 2.
1.3.2.1 Select coordinate system

The display of the data for each coordinate system changes as follows by the bit 6 (GCC) of parameter
No.14851.

It is possible to change the display of workpiece shift data for each coordinate system by pressing
the [1←→2] soft-key.
ACTPOS MEASUR +INPUT CHCURS 1 2 NO.SRH CLOSE

The display of the data for each coordinate system changes according to DO-signal GCO
<F0347#X> dynamically.
1.4 CAUTIONS
If the machining operation is finished at the status of selecting the coordinate system-2 and the machining
operation is started again, the program is executed on the coordinate system-2.
So be sure to insert the coordinate system selection commands to the top of the machining program to
avoid executing machining under the wrong coordinate system.
There are the following restrictions.

• The Program Coordinate System Changing Functions and the Tool Offset Memory Changing
Functions can not be used on turning mode of Series 16i/18i-TB for compound machining function.
- 526 -
2.TOOL MANAGEMENT
B-63874EN/11 OTHER FUNCTIONS FUNCTION
2 TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION

2.1 OVERVIEW
This function manages various tools using tool numbers specific to the MANUAL GUIDE i. The NC
standard tool management function manages tools using tool type numbers, but this function manages
them using tool numbers.
Multiple tool offset numbers can be assigned to each tool number. Therefore, this function is also
available when assigning an offset number for each tool attitude during machining.
NOTE
When using this function, the tool management function option is required.
For details, refer to the manual provided by the machine tool builder.
2.2 ASSOCIATING TOOL NUMBERS WITH OFFSET

NUMBERS
On the screen for associating a tool number with a offset number, set the number of the tool that will use
a offset number. When registered on this screen, the tool number is registered in the tool management
data table, together with the offset number and the tool type.
This screen is effective only if bit 0 (ORT) of parameter No. 14823 is 1.
2.2.1 Selecting the Screen for Associating a Tool Number with an

Offset Number
(1) On the initial screen in each mode, press soft key [SETING]. If soft key [SETING] does not appear,
press the rightmost soft key [>] to display it.
(2) Selecting [SETTING OF OFFSET AND TOOL NO.] on the [SETTINGS] menu selection screen
that appears causes the screen for corresponding between tool offset numbers and tool numbers to
appear.
2.2.2 Screen Display Items
2.2.2.1 Display items

OFS NO.:
You can only view offset numbers, and cannot set new ones.
The range of available offset numbers depends on the setting of parameter No. 14824.
TOOL NO:
To register a new tool number in an empty tool number field, enter a new number and press the
<INPUT> key.
To invalidate an existing tool number, enter 0.
- 527 -
2. TOOL MANAGEMENT
FUNCTION OTHER FUNCTIONS B-63874EN/11
NOTE
When a tool number is entered, the associated offset number is set in the “offset
number” item of the data having that tool number in the tool management data
table.
If the tool management data table does not contain data having that tool number,
the system searches for tool management data having no tool number, and the
offset number associated with the entered tool number is set in that tool
management data.
If a tool number is deleted (0 is entered), all of the tool management data having
that tool number is deleted.
TYPE:
To select the desired one, press the corresponding soft key.
TURN ROTATE OTHERS CHCURS NO.SRH TO MNU
2.3 VIEWING AND SETTING TOOL OFFSET VALUES

In addition to the conventional tool offset setting screen, a screen is available which allows you to view
and set tool offset values using tool numbers and offset types.
This screen is effective only if bit 1 (TOF) of parameter No. 14823 is 1.
2.3.1 Selecting the Tool Number-by-tool Number Tool Offset

Setting Screen
(1) On the initial screen in each mode, press soft key [T-OFS]. If soft key [T-OFS] does not appear,
(2) The tool offset setting screen appears.
(3) Moving the cursor to the “T:GEO-TOL” tab causes the “Turning geometric offset screen (on a tool
number by tool number basis)” to appear.
(4) Moving the cursor to the “T:WER-TOL” tab causes the “Turning wear offset screen (on a tool
number by tool number basis)” to appear.
(5) Moving the cursor to “M:OFS-TOL” tab causes the “Milling offset screen (on a tool number by tool
number basis)” to appear.
2.3.2 Offset Screen (on a Tool Number by Tool Number Basis)

(1) Turning offset screen
TOOL NO.:
Tool numbers are displayed.
TYPE:
Offset types are displayed.
Values ranging from 1 to the “number of offset types” set in parameter No. 14825 are displayed
sequentially.
If the setting of parameter No. 14825 is 0, nothing is displayed in the offset type column.
X-AXIS, Z-AXIS, Y-AXIS, RADIUS, VIRT. TIP:

The offset number corresponding to each combination of tool number and offset type is
determined, and the offset values of the offset number are displayed.
- 528 -
2.TOOL MANAGEMENT
The settings are made in the data for the offset number determined with the combination of tool
number and offset type.
(2) Milling offset screen

The display items are the same as those of the turning offset screen above.
2.4 VIEWING AND SETTING TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA

This screen is effective only if bit 3 (TMG) of parameter No. 14823 is 1.
2.4.1 Selecting the Tool Management Data Setting Screen

(2) Selecting [TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA] on the [SETTINGS] menu selection screen that appears
causes the tool management data setting screen to appear.
2.4.2 Magazine Data Screens (Magazine 1 to 4)

The tool number corresponding to each pot, type, group number, and offset number are displayed.
You can change tool numbers, types, and group numbers.

POT:
Pot numbers are displayed.
NOTE
On the individual magazine data screens, as many pots as the “number of data
items” set in parameters Nos. 13222, 13227, 13232, and 13237 are displayed,
beginning with the “start pot number” set in NC parameters Nos. 13223, 13228,
13233, and 13238.
TOOL NO.:
Set a tool number.
TOOL KIND:
The “tool type” corresponding to each tool number, as determined from the tool management data
table, is displayed.
This item can be set with soft keys.
GROUP:
The “group number” corresponding to each tool number, as determined from the tool management
data table, is displayed.
To set a new one, enter a value.
OFFSET NO.:
The “offset number” corresponding to each tool number, as determined from the tool management
data table, is displayed.
- 529 -
2. TOOL MANAGEMENT
2.4.3 Spindle and Standby Position Tool Display Screen

This screen displays the tools at spindle positions and at subpots (standby positions).
The number of displayed spindle positions and the number of displayed standby positions vary depending
on the settings of
Parameter No. 13250 (number of effective spindles)
Parameter No. 13251 (number of effective standby positions)
The display items are the same as those of the magazine data screen.
2.5 VIEWING AND SETTING LIFE MANAGEMENT DATA

This screen is effective only if bit 4 (TLF) of parameter No. 14823 is 1.
2.5.1 Selecting the Life Management Data Setting Screen

(2) Selecting [TOOL LIFE DATA] on the [SETTINGS] menu selection screen causes the life
management data setting screen to appear.

ORDER:
In the first column for each tool, the value indicating the priority of the tool is displayed.
By positioning the cursor on this item and entering a new value, you can change the priority of that
tool.
GROUP:
The group numbers in the tool management data table are displayed.
COUNT:
The count types (time or number of times of use) in the tool management data table are displayed.
For each group, the life count type (time or number of times of use) can be specified.
Select one of soft keys [TIME] and [COUNT].
TOOL NO.:
The tool numbers with the same group number are displayed.
The numbers are displayed in the order in which the tools will be used.
To register new tool in a group, move the cursor at the bottom (blank portion) of the tool number
column for that group and press [REGIST] or press <INPUT> key. On the contrary, if you want to
delete an existing tool, move the cursor to the number of that tool and press [DELETE].
LIFE:
The lives corresponding to the tool numbers on the tool management table are displayed.
You can set the life of each tool.
By pressing [GRPALL] after entering a value, you can set the same life for all the tools in the group.
In the first row for each group, the sum of the lives of the tools registered with that group is
displayed.
REST LIFE:
The rest of the life of each tool, as determined from the tool management data table, is displayed.
Data can be set by entering values.
In the first row for each group, the sum of the rests of the lives of the tools registered with that group
is displayed.
- 530 -
2.TOOL MANAGEMENT
NOTICE LIFE:
The notice lives (the rest of life after which the notice signal turns on) corresponding to the tool
numbers in the tool management data table are displayed.
Data can be set by entering values.
By pressing [GRPALL] after entering a value, you can set the same announced life for all the tools
in the group.
In the first row for each group, the rest of life after which the life state of that group changes to
“announced” is displayed.
STATE:
The life states (invalid, present, absent, in use, and skipped (tool damaged)) corresponding to the
tool numbers in the tool management data table are displayed.
To select the desired one, press the corresponding soft key.
In the first row for each group, the life state of that group (not announced or announced) is
displayed.
2.5.2 Changing Tool Priority

You can change the priority of the tools in a group.
The procedure for changing the priority is shown below.
(1) Position the cursor on the priority value in the first column for the desired tool and enter a new
value.
(2) Press [ORDER], and the priority of the tool changes to the new value. Those tools that have priority
values greater than the entered new value before the change are assigned their previous values plus
one, respectively.
2.5.3 Updating Life Values Displayed on the Tool Life Data Screen
When the tool life data is changed with operating program, the tool life data is updated.
2.5.4 Group Number List Display

A list of the life states of groups can be displayed. Groups can be sorted in the order of number or life
state.
Pressing [GRPLST] when the life management data screen is displayed displays the GROUP NO. LIST
screen:

"PREVIOUS NOTICE"
"NOTICED" is displayed only for those groups with the Previous Notice Flag set.
"STATE"
When the life states of all tools belonging to a group are "NO-MNG", the life state of the group is
"NO-MNG". In another group, the life state of the group not including a tool with a life state of
"ENABLE" or "USING" is "OVER".
- 531 -
2. TOOL MANAGEMENT
2.5.4.2 Display of groups sorted in the order of number or life state

When [S SORT] is pressed on the group number list screen, the group numbers are displayed in the life
state/previous notice order.
NOTE
When group numbers are displayed in the order of the life state, the following
priority is used.
(1) Groups for which "OVER" is displayed in the "STATE" column
(2) Groups for which "NOTICED" is displayed in the "PREVIOUS NOTICE"
column
(3) Groups other than (1) and (2)
All the groups for which "NO-MNG" is displayed in the "STATE" column are
displayed finally.
Pressing [N SORT] displays groups sorted by group number.
2.5.4.3 Group selection

Place the cursor over a group number to be selected, then press [SELECT]. The life management data
screen of the selected group number appears.
2.5.4.4 Restore group life

Move the cursor to the group of which state is “OVER”, and press [G FILL]. And the life states of the
tools, which belong to the group, change to “ENABLE”, and the rest life value becomes same as the life
value.
The tool life state which is “NO-MNG” or “SKIP” is not updated when [G FILL] is pressed.
2.5.5 Setting the Life Notice Flag

To display the life state ("NOTICED" or "UN-NOTICE") of a group on the life management data screen,
the "Previous Notice Flag" of tool management data needs to be set with the PMC.
The MANUAL GUIDE i system displays "NOTICED" as the state of a group when the "Previous Notice
Flag" is set to the state described below.
If bit 3 (ETE) of parameter No. 13200 = 0

When the "Previous Notice Flag" of one of the tools that belong to a group is set to "NOTICED"
If bit 3 (ETE) of parameter No. 13200 = 1
When the "Previous Notice Flags" of all tools that belong to a group are set to "NOTICED"
- 532 -
2.TOOL MANAGEMENT
2.6 TOOL LIFE DATA LIST SCREEN

The tool life state of all tools can be displayed on the tool life management data list screen.
2.6.1 Selecting the Life Management Data List Screen

(1) On the initial screen in each mode, press soft key [SETTING]. If soft key [SETTING] does not
appear, press the rightmost soft key [>] to display it.
(2) Selecting [TOOL LIFE DATA LIST] on the [SETTINGS] menu selection screen that appears causes
the life management data list screen to appear.
This item is displayed when the bit 5 (LIA) of parameter No.14823 is ’1’.
2.6.2 Life Management Data List Screen

On this screen, you can change the priority of the tools which are belong to the same group with cursor
pointed tool. The action performed by pressing each soft key is the same as that on the conventional life
management data screen.
(1) Selecting TOOL LIFE DATA LIST on the "BASIC" menu selection screen of SETTINGS causes
the TOOL LIFE DATA LIST screen on which group numbers are displayed at the top.
(2) Pressing [GRPLST] displays the list of the life states of groups. Selecting a group number on the
[GROUP NUMBER LIST] screen causes the life management data list screen of the selected group
to appear.
When the tool life data is changed with operating program, the tool life data is updated on the tool life
data list screen.
2.7 MODAL DISPLAY OF OFFSET TYPES

When an offset type is used to specify a tool offset number, the offset type is displayed in the modal
information display position while the offset type is enabled after the offset type is specified.
2.7.1 Screen Display Items

(1) Screen that appears when a offset type is specified (on the lathe)
If bit 7 (STS) of parameter No. 14823 is 1 and the offset type is displayed, the offset type is
displayed after 'T-' in the status display section.
- 533 -
2. TOOL MANAGEMENT
(2) Screen that appears when a offset type is specified (on the milling machine)
If bit 7 (STS) of parameter No. 14823 is 1 and the offset type is displayed, the offset type is
displayed after 'D-' and 'H-' in the status display section.
2.7.2 Displayed Offset Types (Set by the Machine Tool Builder)

In the status display section, offset types are displayed by referencing the following variables:
#90248, D code offset type on the milling machine

#90249, offset type on the lathe and H code offset type on the milling machine
When specifying a tool offset number, the machine tool builder is required to set a offset type in variables
#90248 and #90249 in the called macro program, using T, D, and H codes.
If directly specifying a offset number, instead of specifying a offset type, the machine tool builder is
required to set the above variables to null.
2.8 DISPLAY TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA OF CNC

STANDARD SCREEN
By pressing the soft key displayed on the MANUAL GUIDE i screen, it is possible to change the screen
to the tool management data table on the NC side.
In order to use this feature, it is necessary to set the TLD(No.14823#6).
(1) At the case of the parameter TLD (No.14823#6) setting '1', soft key [TL-MNG] is displayed on the
base screen in the each mode. If soft key [TL-MNG] does not appear, press the rightmost soft key
[>] to display it.
(2) Pressing soft key [TL-MNG] on this screen displays the NC tool management data table screen.
NOTE
Either “Magazine management table screen” or “Tool management data table
screen” is displayed. The screen previously displayed is appeared.
(3) On this screen, if the function keys for startup MANUAL GUIDE i are pressed, the screen returns to
the MANUAL GUIDE i screen.
- 534 -
2.TOOL MANAGEMENT
2.9 OTHERS
2.9.1 Return to Menu Screen

Pressing soft key [TO MNU] on the tool management data table screen returns to the menu selection
screen.
When the bit 2 (RET) of parameter No.14850 is ‘1’, [CLOSE] is displayed instead of [TO MNU].
Pressing [CLOSE] returns to the base screen as before.
2.9.2 Inhibition of Editing Tool Management Data at CNC Standard

Screen
On the tool management data screen of NC side, it is possible to inhabit to edit the tool management data.
In the case of the bit 7 (TME) of parameter No.14851 on, when [EDIT] is pressed on the tool
management data screen, the following warning is displayed. And the tool management data cannot be
altered at NC screen.
“WRITE PROTECTED”
2.9.3 Using Tool Management Data

The following customization data on the tool management data table are used by the tool management
functions for MANUAL GUIDE i.
Therefore MTB can not use these customization items when the tool management functions for
MANUAL GUIDE i is used.
Item Bit Content

Customization item 0 7 Previous Notice Flag
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Customization item 1 TOOL NO.
Customization item 2 OFFSET NO.
Customization item 3 TOOL KIND
Customization item 4 TOOL USING ORDER
NOTE
In order to enable “Tool Using Order”, it is necessary to set the bit 6 (SWC) of
parameter No.13203 to 1 and parameter No.13260 to 4. When these parameters
are 0, the shortest life tool is searched not according to this order.
- 535 -
2. TOOL MANAGEMENT
2.10 WARNING MESSAGES

The following warnings are displayed about the tool management function.
• WRONG VALUE OF PARAMETER NO. 14824 :

When parameter No.l4824 is set to a value other than 1 to 999.
• INVALID INPUT :
When the input value of each input data item falls outside the valid range.
• TOOL NUMBER ALREADY EXISTS :
Displayed if the same tool number as that entered has already been set.
• TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA ACCESS ERROR :
When tool management data such as a tool number, offset number, and group number cannot be read
or written.
• MAGAZINE MANAGEMENT DATA ACCESS ERROR :
When a pot number in the magazine management data table or data number relative to the
spindle/waiting position cannot be read or written normally.
• GROUP LIFE STATE IS NOT 'OVER'. :
When [G FILL] is pressed on the tool life data screen, this warning is displayed if the group state of
the current cursor position is not “OVER”.
- 536 -
3.SPINDLE MOVEMENT
ANIMATION FOR AUTOMATIC
B-63874EN/11 OTHER FUNCTIONS LATHES
3 SPINDLE MOVEMENT ANIMATION FOR

AUTOMATIC LATHES
This is the additional animation function to simulate machining that utilizes movement of spindle for
automatic lathes.
The option of “spindle movement animation for automatic lathe” is necessary to use this function.
NOTE
This function is available for only Series 16i/18i/21i.
3.1 OVERVIEW
If the command that reflects movement of master in movement of slave is entered in program and the
command is executed, slave tool moves too. From this movement, machining that utilizes movement
of spindle will be simulated.
3.2 START COMMAND OF REFLECTION

The “SYNCDRAW” tab will be displayed by pressing [START]. The following window for inputting
start command of reflection will be displayed, after the “SYNCDRAW” tab is selected, the cursor is
placed on “START SYNCHRONIZ-ATION CONTROL” and <INPUT> key is pushed. The reflection in
slave starts by the command.
(1) Input items of start command of reflection (G1994)

Condition
Data item Meaning
P SLAVE TOOL POST Number of slave tool post in which MANUAL GUIDE i reflects movement of
master.
Q MASTER AXIS Number of axis that is reflected (X, Y, Z, or C axis)
R SLAVE AXIS Number of axis in which MANUAL GUIDE i reflects movement of master (X, Y,
Z, or C axis)
S CONTROL MODE [SYNC]:Under synchronization control mode
[NOSYNC]:Not Under synchronization control mode
3.3 END COMMAND OF REFLECTION

The following window for inputting end command of reflection will be displayed, after the cursor is
placed on “END SYNCHRONIZATION CONTROL” in the “SYNCDRAW” tab and <INPUT> key is
pushed. The reflection in slave finishes by the command.
(1) Input items of end command of reflection (G1995)
Condition
Data item Meaning
P SLAVE TOOL POST Number of slave tool post in which MANUAL GUIDE i reflects movement of
master.
- 537 -
3. SPINDLE MOVEMENT
LATHES OTHER FUNCTIONS B-63874EN/11
NOTE
1 Setting the bit 5 (ATL) of parameter No.27310 to “1” is necessary to display
“SYNCDRAW” tab.
3.4 SIMULATION AND ACTUAL WORKING OF THE MACHINE

Between G1994 and G1995, the movement of axis number that is designated at Q is reflected in the
movement of axis that is designated by R. And R is a number of tool post that is designated by P.
Ex1) Working not under synchronous, composite, or superimposed control

Path-1(There is reflect command) Path-1(There isn’t reflect command) Working of actual machine
Not under synchronous, composite, or Not under synchronous, composite, or +X3
superimposed control superimposed control
Path-3
-X3
-Z +Z
-X1
Path-1
+X1
G1994 P3.Q2. R2. S0.;

There isn’t command.
Reflect movement of path-1 second
axis (Z-axis) in movement of path-3
second axis (Z-axis).
[Display in animation] [Display in animation]
Move Z axis Move Z axis

Tool pos is
Tool pos isn’t off and abs Abs pos
off and abs pos doesn’t doesn’t
pos doesn’t change. change.
change.
G1995 P3.;
End reflection in path-3.
- 538 -
3.SPINDLE MOVEMENT
B-63874EN/11 OTHER FUNCTIONS LATHES
Ex2) Working under synchronization control

Path-1(There isn’t reflect command) Path-1(There isn’t reflect command) Working of actual machine
Under synchronization control Under synchronization control +X3
Path-3
-X3
-Z +Z
-X1
Path-1
+X1
G1994 P3.Q2. R2. S1.;

Reflect movement of path-1 second
axis (Z-axis) in movement of path-3
second axis (Z-axis).
[Display in animation] [Display in animation]
Move Z axis Move Z axis
Tool pos isn’t Tool pos is off Abs pos

off and abs and abs pos changes.
pos don’t doesn’t change.
change.
G1995 P3.;
Ex3) Working under composite control or superimposed control

Path-1(There isn’t reflect command) Working of actual machine
+X3
Under composite control or superimposed control
Path-3
-X3
-Z +Z
-X1
Path-1
+X1
G1995 P3.;
[Display in animation]
Move Z axis
Tool pos isn’t off. Abs

pos changes.
Not under composite control or superimposed control
- 539 -
3. SPINDLE MOVEMENT
LATHES OTHER FUNCTIONS B-63874EN/11
NOTE
1 Set bit 1 (ACD) of parameter No.27311 to “1” when this function is used.
2 Master axis must be only basic three axes and C axis. And slave axis must be
the same axis as master.
3 In animation, slave absolute axis isn’t renewed though under Synchronization
control (S1. is commanded in G1994).
4 When machining simulation is finished by reset key as so on, the reflection will
be canceled.
5 Master tool post can’t become slave tool post though G1994 that designates the
tool post as the slave is command from other tool post.
6 During reflecting movement, when second start command of reflection is
executed and control mode that is designated by second command is different
from former one, former start command will be canceled. When control mode is
same as former one, slave axis will be newly added and former command won’t
be canceled.
- 540 -
4.Series 16i-MB 2-PATH
4 Series 16i-MB 2-PATH FUNCTION

4.1 OVERVIEW
This function allows the 2-path machining center CNC to use the MANUAL GUIDE i. However, the
MANUAL GUIDE i can be used only when path 1 is selected.
NOTE
1 The target CNC of this function is the FANUC Series 16i-MB 2CPU2-path
system.
2 When using this function, cancel the multi-path lathe option.
4.2 DISPLAY SCREEN

The MANUAL GUIDE i screen appears only when the path 1 side is selected.
The display items are the same as in the case where it is used with the FANUC Series 16i-MB 1-path
system.
Display screen on the path 2 side

(1) If switching to the path 2 side is performed when the MANUAL GUIDE i screen appears, the NC
screen appears.
(2) If the MANUAL GUIDE i startup function key is pressed when path 2 is selected, the MANUAL
GUIDE i screen does not appear.
- 541 -
5. PROGRAMMABLE
DIAMETER/RADIUS
SWITCHING FUNCTION OTHER FUNCTIONS B-63874EN/11
5 PROGRAMMABLE DIAMETER/RADIUS
SWITCHING FUNCTION
5.1 OVERVIEW
The Series 30i/31i/32i diameter/radius programmable changing function can be used to dynamically
switch between the diameter and the radius.
NOTE
1 This function requires the NC diameter/radius dynamic switching option.
2 The function for dynamically switching between the diameter and the radius is
not supported.
5.2 BASE SCREEN DISPLAY

When the specification method is changed by diameter/radius programmable switching, switching
between diameter values and radius values is performed in the following display.
(1) Absolute coordinates on the base screen

(2) Relative coordinates on the base screen
(3) Machine coordinates on the base screen
(4) Remaining motion amount on the base screen
(5) Next block motion amount on the base screen
Even when switching between diameter values and radius values is performed, the diameter values/radius
values according to bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006 are used in the following display.
(a) Manual handle interrupt amount on base screen

(b) Offset display (including the offset measurement screen and C input screen)
(c) Workpiece coordinate system setting screen (including the measurement screen)
(d) Relative coordinate system preset screen
NOTE
1 To make the display for (1), (2), (4), and (5) support the diameter/radius
switching state, set bit 2 (DPA) of parameter No. 3194 to 0.
2 To make the display for (3) support the diameter/radius switching state, set bit 3
(DPM) of parameter No. 3194 to 1.
- 542 -
5.PROGRAMMABLE
DIAMETER/RADIUS
B-63874EN/11 OTHER FUNCTIONS SWITCHING FUNCTION
5.3 MACHINING CYCLE

1. Machining cycle input data
Use of diameter/radius is always the same on the machining cycle data input screen regardless of the
state of diameter/radius programmable switching.
(1) Turning cycle

Diameter values are used to input X axis values and radius values are used to input data of the
other axes.
(2) Milling cycle
Radius values are used to input data of all axes.
2. Execution of a machining cycle

According to the diameter/radius programmable switching state, a movement command is output
using diameter values during diameter specification or using radius values during radius
specification.
5.4 NC STATEMENT CONVERSION

When the G4 digit cycle is subjected to NC statement conversion, switching between diameter values and
radius values is performed for a specification value to be output according to the diameter/radius
programmable switching state.
- 543 -
6. LATHE/MACHINING CENTER
G CODE SYSTEM SWITCHING
6 LATHE/MACHINING CENTER G CODE

SYSTEM SWITCHING FUNCTION
MANUAL GUIDE i can be used in the compound machine which uses "Lathe/Machining center G code
system function ". Concretely, the following functions can be used. Moreover, this function supports the
lathe or the machining center of one path only.
(1) Display of base screen

(a) The icon, which shows Command mode of the present, is displayed.
(b) Both guidance messages for the lathe and for the machining centre are displayed.
(2) Making of machining cycle

Both machining cycles of MANUAL GUIDE i for the lathe and for the machining centre can be
made regardless of the command mode.
(3) Executing of machining cycle

It is possible to execute machining cycles of MANUAL GUIDE i in the command mode which has
been selected now.
(4) Drawing during machining

It is possible to draw even in each command mode of turning mode/milling mode during machining.
(5) Machining simulation (animated / tool path)

The machining simulation can be done only for EDIT mode even in each command mode of turning
mode/milling mode.
(6) NC program conversion

It is possible to convert machining cycles of MANUAL GUIDE i into the NC program only for
EDIT mode even in each command mode of turning mode/milling mode.
(7) Setting of tool offset information/tool figure information

(a) The tool offset screen for the compound of CNC is switched, and the tool offset data is set on
the screen.
(b) The tool geometry size data screen for the compound of CNC is switched, and the tool figure
data is set on the screen.
NOTE
1 G code system for the lathe and the machining centre can be switched by
M-code of " Lathe/Machining centre G code system switching function" of CNC.
Please refer to the connecting manual of CNC for details of " Lathe/Machining
centre G code system switching function ".
2 When it is switched G code system of the lathe by M-code, the instruction of the
lathe system can be used. The state of CNC at this time is defined, "Turning
mode". Moreover, when it is switched G code system of the machining center by
m-code, the instruction of the machining center system can be used. The state
of CNC at this time is defined, "Milling mode". It will be called "command
mode", calling these "Turning mode" and "Milling mode" generically at the
following.
- 544 -
6.LATHE/MACHINING CENTER
6.1 DISPLAY OF BASE SCREEN

The icon and the guidance message corresponding to the present command mode are displayed.
MANUAL GUIDE i
ACTUAL POS. DIST TO GO SPINDLE O0001

N0001
Command mode
T 01
FEED icon
S 0M0
G00 18 40 54
PROGRAM Modal information

Message window
window
T>
M>
Base screen of MANUAL GUIDE i
(1) Command mode icon (note)

The icon that displays the present command mode is displayed at the modal information window.
Command Vertical / Displayed icon
mode Horizontal
Turning mode Vertical
Horizontal
Milling mode Vertical
Horizontal
(2) Modal information (note)

Modal information is updated at the modal information window according to the present command
mode.
(3) Guidance message

The message window is adjusted to two lines, and the guidance message for turning mode is
displayed on the up line, and the one of the milling mode is displayed on the below line. Moreover,
only the line is displayed for the alarm.
NOTE
1 Even if the command mode is switched, the axis composition such as the axis
order does not change.
2 An icon and modal information on the foreground side are displayed when
machining and editing. On the other hand, those on the background side are
displayed when machining simulation is executed or NC program is converted.
- 545 -
6.2 MAKING OF MACHINING CYCLES

The program of the machining cycles, which include both instructions for lathe/machining center can be
made.
Program example)
Parameter No.13020 = 900 (Switch to the lathe mode with M900)
Parameter No.13021 = 901 (Switch to the milling mode with M901)
O1000(Example Program);
M901 ;
G1000W1.I1.J50.L-2.C3.F120.Z2. ; Milling mode
G1210B-10.H10.V10. ;
M900 ;
G1120P1.Q5.H100.F100.E100.V100.K100.W2.U1.L0.3M0.3Z10. ; Turning mode
- Omission -
NOTE
1 When the command mode is switched, the operator has to cancel a modal G
code such as canned cycles (G80). If the command mode is switched while a
modal G code is effective, alarm message " T/M MODE CAN NOT BE
SWITCHED" is displayed.
2 Even if the command mode is switched, the instruction of diameter/radius is not
switched. So, the operator has to switch diameter/radius according to the
command mode by using Diameter and radius setting switching function.
6.2.1 Command mode that machining cycle can be used

The machining cycle of MANUAL GUIDE i can be used in the following command mode.
(1) Machining cycle

G code Cycle name Command mode which can
be used
G1000 - G1006 Hole machining (tool rotation) M mode
G1110 - G1115 Hole machining (tool rotation) T mode
G1010 - G1015 Thread milling M mode and T mode
G1020 - G1021 Facing M mode and T mode
G1025 Special machining (engraving) M mode and T mode
G1030 - G1033 Contouring M mode and T mode
G1040 - G1045 Pocketing M mode and T mode
G1050 - G1059 Grooving M mode and T mode
G1060 - G1071 Contouring (new) M mode and T mode
G1080 - G1083 Island leave machining M mode and T mode
G1100 - G1105 Hole machining (work rotation) T mode
G1120 - G1129 Turning T mode
G1130 - G1138 Grooving T mode
G1140 - G1142 Threading T mode
G1145 Special machining (polygon machining) T mode
G1160 - G1168 Corner removing T mode
G1200 - G1206 XY plane shape - Arbitrary form M mode and T mode
- 546 -
G code Cycle name Command mode which can

be used
G1210 - G1217 XY plane shape - hole position M mode and T mode
G1220 - G1225 XY plane shape - fixed form M mode and T mode
G1300 - G1306 YZ plane shape - Arbitrary form M mode and T mode
G1310 - G1317 YZ plane shape - hole position M mode and T mode
G1320 - G1325 YZ plane shape - fixed form M mode and T mode
G1450 - G1459 ZX plane shape - turning form T mode
G1460 - G1465 ZX plane shape - screw form T mode
G1470 - G1475 ZX plane shape - turning ditch form T mode
G1500 - G1506 Polar coordinate (XC) - Arbitrary form M mode and T mode
G1520 - G1526 Polar coordinate (XC) - fixed form M mode and T mode
G1570 - G1573 Polar coordinate (XC) - C axis form M mode and T mode
G1575 Polar coordinate (XC) - polygon form M mode and T mode
G1600 - G1606 Cylinder (XC) - Arbitrary form M mode and T mode
G1620 - G1625 Cylinder (XC) - fixed form M mode and T mode
G1670 - G1673 Cylinder (XC) - C axis form M mode and T mode
G1700 - G1706 Cylinder (XA) - Arbitrary form M mode and T mode
G1770 - G1773 Cylinder (XA) - A axis form M mode and T mode
G1775 - G1778 Cylinder (XA) - B axis form M mode and T mode
(2) Others
G code Cycle name Instruction mode which
can be used
G1756 - G1759 Work definition (Y axis rotation) M mode and T mode
G1780 - G1786 Round bar arbitrary work definition M mode and T mode
(Y axis rotation)
(X axis rotation)
G1850 - G1859 Tilted working plane command M mode and T mode
G1900 - G1908 Work definition M mode and T mode
G1910 - G1916 Tool definition - turning tool M mode and T mode
G1920 - G1926 Tool definition - drill tool M mode and T mode
G1930 - G1942 Tool definition – milling tool M mode and T mode
G1950 - G1958 Work coordinate system conversion M mode and T mode
G1980 - G1981 Programmable mirror image M mode and T mode
G1982 - G1983 Scaling M mode and T mode
G1990 - G1991 Group range selection M mode and T mode
6.3 EXECUTING OF MACHINING CYCLES

The program of the machining cycles, which include both instructions for lathe/machining center can be
executed.
However, the alarm message of "WRONG G-CODE" is displayed when the combination of machining
cycle and command mode is inadequate because there is restriction that the command mode is chosen in
the machining cycle, and the execution of machining cycle is discontinued.
6.4 DRAWING DURING MACHINING

The drawing during machining of the machining cycles, which include both instructions for
lathe/machining center can be executed.
- 547 -
6.5 MACHINING SIMULATION (ANIMATED / TOOL PATH)

The machining simulation (animated/tool path) of the machining cycles, which include both instructions
for lathe/machining center can be executed.
(1) Mode to be able to execute machining simulation

The machining simulation can be executed only in the EDIT mode.
(2) About the mode switch during machining simulation

The machining simulation screen is shut when switching to modes other than the EDIT mode during
the machining simulation.
(3) Warning message display

When the soft-key [SIMLAT] is pressed in the state of STOP/HOLD, the warning message of
“EXECUTING” is displayed and machining simulation screen is not opened. Please press the
software key [SIMLAT] after releasing the executing state.
(4) Restart procedure after machining simulation is stopped on the way

Modal information comes to remain after the machining simulation. Therefore, when the program is
rewound after the machining simulation is stopped on the way and the machining simulation is done,
the command mode cannot occasionally be switched because of a modal G code that is not canceled.
For that case, please prepare the program (note) only for initialization by the customer, and initialize
modal information.
NOTE
Please confirm a command mode (system variable #3940) at the present, and
instruct an initialization command such as G80 in suitable for the command
mode.
(5) About the command mode of start in the machining simulation

When the machining simulation screen is opened, the command mode on the background side is sure
to become the same command mode of the foreground side. And the command mode becomes a
command mode on the background side of the first opening when switching to other screens without
shutting the machining simulation screen and returning.
NOTE
The modal information on the foreground side is not maintained. The one of last
time after the machining simulation remains.
(6) About RESET on the way of the machining simulation

(a) Even if the RESET key is pressed during the machining simulation, the command mode on the
foreground side is maintained.
(b) When the RESET key is pressed during the machining simulation, the machining simulation is
stopped and the command mode on the background side becomes the same command mode of
the foreground side.
(7) About the insertion of the machining time

When the soft-key [INSERT] for the insertion of the machining time is pressed, the command mode
on the background side becomes the same command mode of the foreground side.
- 548 -
6.6 NC PROGRAM CONVERSION

The NC program conversion of the machining cycles, which include both instructions for lathe/machining
center can be executed.
(1) Mode to be able to execute NC program conversion

The NC program conversion can be executed only for the EDIT mode.
(2) About the mode switch during NC program conversion

The NC conversion screen is shut when switching to modes other than the EDIT mode during NC
program conversion.
(3) Warning message display

When the soft-key [NC CONV] is pressed in the state of STOP/HOLD, the warning message of
“EXECUTING” is displayed and the screen of NC program conversion is not opened. Please press
the software key [NC CONV] after releasing the executing state.
(4) Restart procedure after NC program conversion is stopped on the way

Modal information comes to remain after the NC program conversion. Therefore, when the program
is rewound after the NC program conversion is stopped on the way and the NC program conversion
is done, the command mode cannot occasionally be switched because of a modal G code that is not
canceled. For that case, please prepare the program (note) only for initialization by the customer, and
initialize modal information.
NOTE
Please confirm a command mode (system variable #3940) at the present, and
instruct an initialization command such as G80 in suitable for the command
mode.
(5) About the command mode of start in the NC program conversion

When the screen of the NC program conversion is opened, the command mode on the background
side is sure to become the same command mode of the foreground side. And the command mode
becomes a command mode on the background side of the first opening when switching to other
screens without shutting the screen of the NC program conversion and returning.
NOTE
The modal information on the foreground side is not maintained. The one of last
time after the NC program conversion remains.
(6) About RESET on the way of the NC program conversion

(a) Even if the RESET key is pressed during the NC program conversion the command mode on
the foreground side is maintained.
(b) When the RESET key is pressed during the NC program conversion, the NC program
conversion is stopped and the command mode on the background side becomes the same
command mode of the foreground side.
- 549 -
6.7 SETTING OF TOOL OFFSET INFORMATION

The input screen for tool offset information uses the tool offset screen for milling and turning of CNC.
And this screen can be switched by pressing soft-key [T-OFS] of MANUAL GUIDE i.
MANUAL GUIDE i
ACTUAL POS. DIST TO GO SPINDLE MODAL
INFO.
FEED
MANUAL GUIDE i
NEXT DIST PROGRAM
Base screen
T-OFS
OFFSET
RELATIVE
CNC ABSOLUTE
Tool offset screen TOOL OFFSET DATA
for compound machine
MACHINE
- 550 -
6.8 SETTING OF TOOL FIGURE INFORMATION

The input screen of the tool figure information uses the tool geometry size data screen of CNC.
And this screen can be displayed by pressing soft-key [TL GEOM SIZE] of the tool offset screen of CNC.
Moreover, please move the cursor to D code which has already been made, and press the soft-key
[ALTER] or MDI-key <INPUT> of MANUAL GUIDE i screen, and the tool geometry size data screen
of CNC is switched.
MANUAL GUIDE i
ACTUAL POS. DIST TO GO SPINDLE MODAL
INFO.
FEED
MANUAL GUIDE i
O1000
Base screen ;
;
D1;
;
ALTER
TOOL GEOMETRY SIZE DATA
CNC
Tool geometry size TOOL GEOMETRY DATA
data screen
NOTE
It is necessary to set the parameter No.14705#7 to 1 in order to switch to the
tool geometry size data screen of CNC by pressing the soft-key [ALTER] or
MDI-key <INPUT>.
- 551 -
6.9 NECESSARY OPTION / PARAMETER
6.9.1 Necessary Option

Setting a necessary option for using this function is as follows.
(1) Lathe/Machining center G code system switching function (R597)

(2) Designation of machine control type (Multiple system) (S838#C)
(3) Tool offset for milling and turning function (R595)
(4) Tool offset memory C (J937)
(5) Tool geometry/wear offset (J931)
(6) Tool geometry size data 100-pairs (R589) or tool geometry size data 300-pairs (R590)
(7) Diameter and radius setting switching function (S630)
6.9.2 Necessary Parameter

Setting a necessary parameter for using this function is as follows.
(1) Parameter of lathe mode switching M code : No.13020

(2) Parameter of milling mode switching M code : No.13021
(3) Parameter which makes extend tool selection function effective : No.5040#3=1
(4) Parameter of display of tool data of MANUAL GUIDE i side : No.14705#5=0
(5) Parameter which makes tool data of CNC side effective : No.14854#4=1
(6) Parameter which invalidates thread repairing : No.27140#7=0
6.10 ALARM
The alarm, which relates to this function is as follows.
Number Massage Description

PS5253 T/M MODE CAN Turning/milling modes cannot be switched in spite of commanding M
NOT BE SWITCHED code for it.
- Modal G codes are not cancelled when M code is commanded.
- The values of parameter No.13020 and No.13021 are same.
- While checking by high-speed program check function.
- While searching by program restart function.
- While interrupting by interruption type custom macro.
MC3511 WRONG G-CODE The combination of machining cycle and command mode is
inadequacies.
- Machining cycle for Lathe is specified in Milling mode.
- Machining cycle for Machining center is specified in Turning mode.
- 552 -
7.ALLOCATION SCREEN ON
SMALL MDI UNIT (FOR Series
B-63874EN/11 OTHER FUNCTIONS 16i/18i/21i)
7 ALLOCATION SCREEN ON SMALL MDI

UNIT (FOR Series 16i/18i/21i)
7.1 OVERVIEW
When the system meets the following all conditions, the screens of MANUAL GUIDE i and
conversational macro can be allocated together to <CUSTOM/GRAPH> key.
(1) Small MDI unit is available.

(2) Conversational macro is available.
(3) MANUAL GUIDE i is available.
(4) The screen of MANUAL GUIDE i is allocated to GRAPH key.
7.2 SCREEN CHANGING

When the <CUSTOM/GRAPH> key is pressed, the screen is changed as the following order.
CUSTOM SCREEN 1
CUSTOM SCREEN 2
CUSTOM SCREEN 3
MANUAL GUIDE i SCREEN
MANUAL GUIDE i SCREEN

(In case machining center)
7.3 NOTES
Please take notice of the followings.
(1) MANUAL GUIDE i Software BX00/BX01 (Series 16i/18i/21i-B) after version 21 is available.
- 553 -
7. ALLOCATION SCREEN ON
SMALL MDI UNIT (FOR Series
16i/18i/21i) OTHER FUNCTIONS B-63874EN/11
(2) During displaying a window of MANUAL GUIDE i, the screen will not be changed when the
<CUSTOM/GRAPH> key is pressed.
(3) In case of machining center, it is necessary that <CUSTOM/GRAPH> key is pressed two times in
order to display the screen of conversational macro after the screen is changed from conversational
macro to MANUAL GUIDE i.
- 554 -
8.USAGE IN 8.4" LCD (For only
Series 30i/31i/32i-B, Series
B-63874EN/11 OTHER FUNCTIONS 0i-F/0i-D)
8 USAGE IN 8.4” LCD

(For only Series 30i/31i/32i-B, Series
0i-F/0i-D)
MANUAL GUIDE i can be used in 8.4” LCD (7 soft-keys).

This function can be used only by the following conditions.

8.4” LCD (7 soft-keys) without touch panel
Please set the following parameters.
- No.14791#3 (SKY) = 1
- No.27481#4 (CSP) = 0
- No.3100#2 (SKY) = 1 ( Series 0i-F/0i-D or small MDI unit in Series 30i-B )
8.2 SCREEN DISPLAY

7 soft-keys (5 operation keys + 2 switch keys for soft-key page) are displayed.
The content displayed on screens other than the soft-key is the same as 10.4” LCD.
- 555 -
8.USAGE IN 8.4" LCD (For only
Series 30i/31i/32i-B, Series
0i-F/0i-D) OTHER FUNCTIONS B-63874EN/11
8.3 RESTRICTION
The following functions cannot be used.
(1) Customizing soft-key (for enhancing customizing and user customizing)

(2) Setting screen for vertical soft-key
Because there is no vertical soft-key in 8.4” LCD, the menu of vertical soft-key is not displayed on
the setting screen.
(3) Help screen
Even if the HELP key is pressed, the help screen is not displayed.
(4) Navigation menu of FANUC standard
In the navigating function, the navigation menu of FANUC standard is not displayed.
- 556 -
9.19" DISPLAY UNIT (FOR
B-63874EN/11 OTHER FUNCTIONS Series 30i/31i/32i ONLY)
9 19” DISPLAY UNIT (FOR Series 30i/31i/32i

ONLY)
MANUAL GUIDE i is available on 19” display unit.
In case of using 19” display unit, MANUAL GUIDE i is able to be displayed as 19 inch display mode,
10.4 inch display mode or 15 inch display mode.
In case of 10.4 inch display mode or 15 inch display mode, CNC screen display function that has smaller
window than display unit is displayed and MANUAL GUIDE i is displayed in it. The contents of screen
are same as in the past.
In 19” display mode, the following screen is displayed.
256 dots
FANUC MANUAL GUIDE i
ACTUAL POS DIST TO GO SPINDLE FEED Program

name etc.
768 dots
Program
The screen is divided to upper section sized 256 dots and lower section sized 768 dots. In upper section,
user application made by machine tool builder is displayed and MANUAL GUIDE i is displayed in lower
section. Refer to the manual provided by the machine tool builder about the detail of user application.
NOTE
1 Only PANEL i supports 19” display unit.
2 The option “19 inch display” is necessary to display the screen of 19 inch mode.
3 It is necessary to set parameter 13114#0=0 and #1=1 to display the screen of 19
inch mode.
4 The following software is necessary to display the screen of 19 inch mode.
MANUAL GUIDE i : System BY70 version 32 or later
CNC screen display function : version 3.3 or later
- 557 -
9. 19" DISPLAY UNIT (FOR
Series 30i/31i/32i ONLY) OTHER FUNCTIONS B-63874EN/11
9.1 19 INCH MODE DISPLAY OF MANUAL GUIDE i

The screen of 19” display mode was improved from the screen of 15” mode about following points.
(1) Enlarging the width of the “MANUAL GUIDE i” title part
(2) Enlarging characters of distance to go and next distance (*)
(3) Enlarging characters of program name and sequence number in upper and right part of the screen
(4) Enlarging the width of graphic window
(5) Enlarging the width of program window
(6) Enlarging the width of current machining (*)
(7) Enlarging the width of key-in buffer
(8) Enlarging the width of the message area
(9) Enlarging the width of the cell in the process list
(*) Information of MDI / MEM / HND / JOG / TJOG / THND / INC / REF / RMT mode
NOTE
1 When the CNC displays 7 axes or more, the characters of distance to go and
next distance are not enlarged.
2 The characters of next distance are not enlarged during machining drawing.
3 The characters of distance to go, next distance, program name and sequence
number are not enlarged during concurrent display and edit of programs of all
paths.
4 When the characters of program name are 13 or more, they not enlarged.
5 The size of pop up windows is same as past.
9.2 APPLICATION SELECTION TO WORK MDI KEYS AND

SOFT-KEYS
When MDI key or soft-key is pushed, only being selected application can react the input.
Thus, MANUAL GUIDE i must be selected when the operator want to operate MANUAL GUIDE i. And
user application must be selected when the operator want to operate the user application.
It is possible to select either by doing one of following three ways.
(1) Selecting by pointing device ( Selecting by left button click )

(2) Selecting by “KEY SERVER” that is optional software offered by FANUC ( Selecting by
soft-keys )
(3) Selecting by user application
The details of each way are followings.
(1) Application selection by pointing device

After a pointer (arrow) used in personal computer is moved on the window of either application by
pointing device, if left button is clicked, the application is selected.
- 558 -
9.19" DISPLAY UNIT (FOR
B-63874EN/11 OTHER FUNCTIONS Series 30i/31i/32i ONLY)
Pointing device
(2) Application selection by key server

“KEY SERVER” is a optional tool software that controls selecting application and it can be used in
only 19” display unit. ”KEY SERVER” makes user application selected if the soft-keys of <1> are
pushed. And it makes MANUAL GUIDE i selected if the soft-keys of <2> are pushed.
<1> For user application

Left side soft-keys
Right side soft-keys
ACTUAL DIST TO GO
SPINDLE FEED Program
POS
name etc.
Program
<2> For MANUAL GUIDE i
(
Horizontal soft-keys
(3) Application selection by user application

User application can switch selection freely.
NOTE
1 It is not indicated which MANUAL GUIDE i is being selected or not.
2 MANUAL GUIDE i can’t be controlled while user application is selected.
- 559 -
9. 19" DISPLAY UNIT (FOR
Series 30i/31i/32i ONLY) OTHER FUNCTIONS B-63874EN/11
9.3 PARAMETER
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
13114 P19 P15
P15 When the screen is displayed using the CNC screen display function, the 15-inch mode is
0: Not used.
1: Used.
P19 When the screen is displayed using the CNC screen display function, the 19-inch mode is
0: Not used.
1: Used.
P15 P19 Screen mode

0 0 10.4”
1 0 15”
0 1 19”
- 560 -
10.SETTING OF PROGRAM
COORDINATE SYSTEM FOR
B-63874EN/11 OTHER FUNCTIONS EACH PATH
10 SETTING OF PROGRAM COORDINATE

SYSTEM FOR EACH PATH
In the following functions, the programming is enabled in a program coordinate system different in each
path.
(1) Arbitrary figure data input function

(2) Free contour cylinder blank figure data input function
(3) Contour programming function
(4) Drawing function of arbitrary figure on base screen and subprogram list screen (Note)
NOTE
An arbitrary figure of the machining program is displayed in a graphic window
according to the program coordinate system in each path.
10.1 AVAILABLE PROGRAM COORDINATE SYSTEM

It is possibly to set the following program coordinate system by the parameter No.27454, No.27455 and
No.27456.
Program coordinate
Plane Parameter Setting data
system
+Z
+X 1
+Z
3
+X
+X
ZX plane No.27454 5
+Z
+Z
6
+X
+X
7
+Z
+Z
1
+C
+Z
ZC plane No.27455 3
+C
+Z
6
+C
+C
5
+X
XC plane No.27456
+C
7
+X
- 561 -
EACH PATH OTHER FUNCTIONS B-63874EN/11
10.2 SETTING OF VIRTUAL TOOL CHIP FOR EACH PROGRAM

COORDINATE SYSTEM
It is necessary to specify the suitable virtual tool tip for each program coordinate system in order to
execute the program made in a program coordinate system different in each path. A virtual tool tip for
each path can be specified by setting the following parameter.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14857 IN3 IN2 IN1 IN0
[Data type] Bit type

[Standard value] 00000000
[System attribute] Independent parameter between paths
[Power supply re-turning on]
Unnecessary
IN3~IN0 The icon of the virtual tool tip which is displayed on the tool offset screen is selected.
Coordinate
IN3 IN2 IN1 IN0 Icon of displayed virtual tip of the blade software key
system
0 0 0 0 Specified by bit 0 (MT1) of parameter No.14702 (= 0 vertical --
type: 5, = 1 horizontal type: 1)
0 0 0 1 X
Z
0 0 1 0 X
0 0 1 1 Z
X
0 1 0 0 Z
X
0 1 0 1 Z
X
0 1 1 0 Z
0 1 1 1 X
Z
1 0 0 0 X
Z
1 1 1 1
The icon is not displayed. --
Note) The axis composition of the above-mentioned is right hand all coordinate system.
- 562 -
10.3 SETTING TOOL FOR ATTACHMENT POSITION

The attachment position is set according to the guide tool figure as follows. Moreover, the coordinate
system at the tool position displayed in the guide tool figure is a coordinate system specified by parameter
No.14706.
Concretely, the following coordinate systems are possible.
Parameter No. No.14706

Setting data 16 17 18 19 20 21
+X +X +Z +Z +Z +Z
Coordinate
system +Z +X +X +X
+Z +X
10.4 PROGRAM COORDINATE SYSTEM FOR PROGRAM

COORDINATE SYSTEM CHANGING FUNCTION
The program coordinate system for the program coordinate system changing function is as follows.
Moreover, the program coordinates changing function can be used by the following functions.
(a) Arbitrary figure data input function

(b) Free contour cylinder blank figure data input function
(c) Contour programming function
(1) ZX plane

Setting data 1 3 5 6 7
+Z +Z +X +Z +X
Coordinate system
1 +X +X +Z +Z
+X
+X +X +X +Z +X
Coordinate system
2 +Z +Z +X +Z
+Z
- 563 -
(2) ZC plane

Setting data 1 3 6
+Z +Z +Z
Coordinate system
1 +C +C +C
Coordinate system +C +Z +Z
2 +Z +C +C
10.5 ICON FOR REPRESENTING SELECTED PATH

The icon for representing selected path can be displayed by setting the value in parameter No.27410 (1
path), No.27411 (2 path), and No.27412 (3 path). There is a kind of the following icons.
Setting data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Icon
Setting data 10 11 12 13 14 15
Icon
Setting data 21 22 23 24 25 26
Icon
Setting data 31 32 33 34 35 36
Icon
Moreover, the following parameter commands are added for the machine configuration which cannot be
expressed with the above-mentioned icon.
Setting data 101 102 103
Icon
- 564 -
10.6 PARAMETER
10.6.1 Added New Parameter

27454 Program coordinate of ZX plane
[Data type] Two word type

[Standard value] 0
[Power supply re-turning on] Necessary
Program coordinate of ZX plane
0 : The setting of program coordinate system for paths is invalid.
1 : Right-handed coordinate system, right = +X, up = +Z
2 : Right-handed coordinate system, right = +X, up = -Z (unsupported)
3 : Right-handed coordinate system, right = -X, up = +Z
4 : Right-handed coordinate system, right = -X, up = -Z (unsupported)
5 : Right-handed coordinate system, right = +Z, up = +X
6 : Right-handed coordinate system, right = +Z, up = -X
7 : Right-handed coordinate system, right = -Z, up = +X
8 : Right-handed coordinate system, right = -Z, up = -X (unsupported)
27455 Program coordinate of ZC plane

[Standard value] 0
Program coordinate of ZC plane
1 : Right-handed coordinate system, right = +C, up = +Z
2 : Right-handed coordinate system, right = +C, up = -Z (unsupported)
3 : Right-handed coordinate system, right = -C, up = +Z
4 : Right-handed coordinate system, right = -C, up = -Z (unsupported)
5 : Right-handed coordinate system, right = +Z, up = +C (unsupported)
6 : Right-handed coordinate system, right = +Z, up = -C
7 : Right-handed coordinate system, right = -Z, up = +C (unsupported)
8 : Right-handed coordinate system, right = -Z, up = -C (unsupported)
27456 Program coordinates of XC plane

[Standard value] 0
Program coordinate of XC plane
1 : Right-handed coordinate system, right = +C, up = +X (unsupported)
2 : Right-handed coordinate system, right = +C, up = -X (unsupported)
3 : Right-handed coordinate system, right = -C, up = +X (unsupported)
4 : Right-handed coordinate system, right = -C, up = -X (unsupported)
5 : Right-handed coordinate system, right = +X, up = +C
6 : Right-handed coordinate system, right = +X, up = -C (unsupported)
7 : Right-handed coordinate system, right = -X, up = +C
- 565 -
8: Right-handed coordinate system, right = -X, up = -C (unsupported)
NOTE
1 Parameter No.27454, No.27455, and No.27456 can set the program
coordinate system even in one path environment.
2 In the parameters No.27454, No.27455, and No.27456 of all paths, when
the values other than the value of 1 - 8 (It is not include the unsupported
value) are set, the setting of program coordinate system for paths
becomes invalid.
3 When the setting of program coordinate system for paths is invalid, the
parameter No.14840 and No.14841 become effective. (Also, all
parameter No.27454, No.27455, and No.27456 become invalid.)
10.6.2 Relating Parameter

(1) No.14706 : Number of workpiece coordinate for main spindle
(2) No.14851 #5 : Display of "PROGRAM COORDINATE" input item on the arbitrary figure
editing screen
(3) No.14857 #3-#0 : ICON displayed on the virtual tool tip data input soft key on the tool offset screen
for program coordinate system 1.
(4) No.14859 #0 : Forward rotation direction of the C axis (workpiece rotation axis)
(5) No.27000 #0 : G02/G03 revered selection in cycle of the ZC plane and the XA plane
(6) No.27190# 3-#0 : ICON displayed on the virtual tool tip data input soft key on the tool offset screen
for program coordinate system 2.
(7) No.27410 : ICON number when path-1 is selected.
- 566 -
11.USE WITH PERIPHERAL
AXIS CONTROL(for only Series
B-63874EN/11 OTHER FUNCTIONS 0i-F/30i/31i/32i-B)
11 USE WITH PERIPHERAL AXIS CONTROL

(for only Series 0i-F/30i/31i/32i-B)
11.1 OUTLINE
MANUAL GUIDE i can be used together with peripheral axis control.
11.2 CONDITION
(1) Necessary option

Peripheral axis control: R725

Please set parameter CSP(No.27480#0) to 1.
(Method of NC program conversion)

Commands of
Subprogram Commands in Finishing cycle
CSP Custom macro peripheral axis
calling subprogram (G70)
control
0 × ○ × ×(*) ×
1 ○ × ○ ○ ○
○ : Output
× : No output
(*) Figure commands to be executed G70 are output.
(3) Necessary setting of peripheral axis

Setting of peripheral axis meets the following conditions.
- Peripheral axis is the linear axis.
- Peripheral axis is any of A-axis, B-axis, C-axis, E-axis, U-axis, V-axis or W-axis.
11.3 MACHINING SIMULATION

Commands of peripheral axis control are ignored.
- 567 -
11.USE WITH PERIPHERAL AXIS
CONTROL(for only Series
0i-F/30i/31i/32i-B) OTHER FUNCTIONS B-63874EN/11
11.4 RESTRICTION
(1) Set-up guidance function cannot be used.
(2) Lathe/Machining center G code system switching function cannot be used.
(3) Machining cycles cannot be used in peripheral axis control program.
(Example)
O1234 ;
:
G101 ; Start of registration of peripheral axis control
×G1001 W1. I1. J2. L-10. K0. C2. F10. Z2. ;
Can not command
×G1210 B0. H100. V100. ;
G100 ; End of registration of peripheral axis control
:
M100 ;
:
- 568 -
12. WARNING MESSAGE DISPLAY
WHEN RESET KEY IS PUSHED (for
B-63874EN/11 OTHER FUNCTIONS only Series 30i/31i/32i-B, 31i-B5)
12 WARNING MESSAGE DISPLAY WHEN

RESET KEY IS PUSHED (for only Series
0i-F/30i/31i/32i-B, 31i-B5)
When address G, F, H, D, T, S, M, and B(Secondary Auxiliary Function) are changed by pushing the key
<RESET> during automatic operation, the warning of "MODAL DATA IS CHANGED BY BLOCK
STOP" can be displayed on the message display part of MANUAL GUIDE i screen.
Warning "MODAL DATA IS CHANGED BY BLOCK STOP" is cleared by the following operations.
(1) Key operation
(2) Reset
12.1 NECESSARY SOFTWARE

CNC software (Series 30i/31i/32i-B, 31i-B5)
Series: G301/G311/G401/G411/G421/G431/G501/G511, edition: 37 or later
CNC software (Series 0i-F)
Series: D6G1/D4G1, edition: 01 or later
12.2 NECESSARY PARAMETER

Please set parameter WMD(No.10334#1) to 1.
12.3 RESTRICTIONS
(1) If the CNC is reset by reset and rewind signal RRW<Gn008.6>, this warning is not displayed.
(2) Even if this warning is cleared on MANUAL GUIDE i screen, this warning is not cleared on CNC
screen.
(3) Even if CNC is reset in waiting of the balance cutting, this warning is not displayed because waiting
of the balance cutting is not the middle of a block.
(4) The display and cancellation of warning doesn't depend on the path.
(i) Even if the operator selects the path of which modal data has not changed, this warning is
displayed in the case that modal data is changed by resetting of MDI key in other path.
(ii) Even if the operator selects the path of which this warning is not issued, this warning is cleared
by key operation and resetting.
- 569 -
13.DISABLING MANUAL GUIDE i OTHER FUNCTIONS B-63874EN/11
13 DISABLING MANUAL GUIDE i

This function can disable all functions of MANUAL GUIDE i .
Please set parameter No.14836#7 to 1.
* This function perform the same operation as in the case where the option of MANUAL GUIDE
i is disabled.
- 570 -
14.EXTENDED AXIS NAME
14 EXTENDED AXIS NAME FUNCTION

The extended axis name can be used on MANUAL GUIDE i screen.
14.1 CONDITIONS TO USE THIS FUNCTION

This function requires the following all conditions.
(1) The option “MANUAL GUIDE i extended axis name function” is valid.
(2) Extended axis name is applied for linear axis other than basic three axis or rotary axis of workpiece
rotation.
(3) Extended axis name is composed 2 characters. (Ex. B2, CS)
(4) Set-up guidance function is invalid.
14.2 AXIS NAME DISPLAY

Extended axis name can be displayed in the following screens.
(1) Base screen

(2) Relative coordinates presetting screen
(3) Workpiece coordinate data screen
(4) Machining simulation screen
NOTE
1 In “CALCULATE OFFSET(MEASURE)” screen of workpiece coordinate data
screen, extended axis name is not displayed.
2 In “CALCULATE OFFSET(+INPUT)” screen of workpiece coordinate data
14.3 PROGRAM DISPLAY AND EDITING FUNCTION

A program included the extended axis name can be displayed and edited.
And when the command of “axis name” + ”=number” (ex. C2=100.) is edited, the command is regarded
as a word.
- 571 -
14.4 MACHINING CYCLE

When the name of workpiece rotation axis is extended, the following MANUAL GUIDE i machining
cycles can be used.
(Available machining cycles)

Type of Machining cycle Available figure
Hole machining C axis hole on face (arc points) G1572
C axis hole on face (random points) G1573
C axis hole on cylinder (arc points) G1672
C axis hole on cylinder (random points) G1673
Facing Polar coordinate plane Square fixed form figure G1520
Polar coordinate plane Circle fixed form figure G1521
Polar coordinate plane Track fixed form figure G1522
Polar coordinate plane Polygon fixed form figure G1525
Polar coordinate plane Arbitrary figure G1500 - G1506
Cylindrical Surface Arbitrary figure G1600 - G1606
Contouring Polar coordinate plane Square fixed form figure G1520
Emboss machining Polar coordinate plane Arbitrary figure G1500 - G1506
Pocketing Polar coordinate plane Square fixed form figure G1520
Grooving Polar coordinate plane Square fixed form figure G1520
Radial groove on the polar coordinate plane G1523
C-axis groove on the polar coordinate plane G1570
X-axis groove on the polar coordinate plane G1571
C-axis groove on the cylindrical surface G1670
X-axis groove on the cylindrical surface G1671
Engraving (*) Nothing
(*) When XC plane or ZC plane is selected
- 572 -
14.5 SELECTING ROTATION AXIS IN FIGURE DATA INPUT

SCREEN OF MACHINING CYCLE
Workpiece rotation axis that works while executing machining cycle can be selected in “ROT.AXIS” tab
of figure data input screen by pressing soft-key [C] or [A].
(1) In case soft-key [C] is pressed

The axis whose axis number is lower 2 digits of parameter No.27453 works.
(2) In case soft-key [A] is pressed
The axis whose axis number is upper 2 digits of parameter No.27453 works.
NOTE
1 Set the bit 0 of parameter No.27001 to 1 to display “ROT.AXIS” tab.
2 Soft-key [C] or [A] might be changed to actual name of workpiece rotation axis.
(Ex. [C]→[C1], [A]→[C2])
14.6 METHOD OF CHANGE TO EXTENDED AXIS NAME IN

FIGURE DATA INPUT SCREEN OF MACHINING CYCLE
When the bit 0 and bit 1 of parameter No.27001 are set to 1, rotation axis name is displayed in the
“ROT.AXIS” tab of figure data input screen of machining cycle. It is possible to change the name to
extended axis name by the following method.
( Method )
(1) Change of soft-key name
Change the messages of number 322 and 323 in customization definition file dlgmsg*u.txt.
( Ex. )
322,C,Y1. → 322,C1,Y1.
323,A,Y2. → 323,C2,Y2.
(2) Change of rotation axis name selected in the tab “ROT.AXIS” of the window “START POINT -
INSERT”
Change the messages of number 55 and 56 in customization definition file keymsg*u.txt.
( Ex. )
55, C → 55, C1
56, A → 56, C2
14.7 PARAMETER SETTING FOR EXTENDING AXIS NAME OF

WORKPIECE ROTATION
Set the following parameters when the axis name of workpiece rotation is extended.
Parameter 27453 = Axis number of rotation axis

Parameter 27001#0, #1 = 1
Parameter 27001#4 = 0
- 573 -
15.DYNAMIC AXIS NAME
CHANGING(For only Series
30i/31i/32i-B) OTHER FUNCTIONS B-63874EN/11
15 DYNAMIC AXIS NAME CHANGING (For

only Series 30i/31i/32i-B)
The display of axis name can be dynamically changed by changing the axis name (parameter No.1020
and No.1022) with the programmable parameter input (G10L52 command). When this function is used,
please set the parameter No.14791#1 to 1.
The following functions are available.
(1) The axis name can be dynamically changed in the following screen and the window of MANUAL
GUIDE i.
(a) Base screen
(b) Machining simulation screen (animation drawing / tool path drawing)
(c) Drawing during machining screen
(d) NC program conversion screen
(e) Workpiece coordinate data window
(f) Relative coordinates presetting window
(2) The machining cycle of MANUAL GUIDE i can be executed in the axis composition changed
by the programmable parameter input (G10L52 command).

This function can be used only by the following conditions.
(1) Necessary optional function

Lathe/Machining center G code system switching function (R597)
NOTE
1 The axis name that can be dynamically changed is only an alphabetic character
of one character such as "X", "Y", and "Z".
2 The enhancing axis name cannot be dynamically changed.
15.2 BASE SCREEN

The display of the following axis names of the base screen can be dynamically changed according to the
change in the parameter No.1020 and No.1022.
Axis names
Axis name of actual position
(Absolute coordinate, Relative coordinate, Machine coordinate, Manual handle interruption(input unit),
Manual handle interruption (output unit))
Axis name of distance to go
Axis name of next distance
Axis name of feed
(Load meter display of each axis for 15” LCD and 19” LCD)
- 574 -
B-63874EN/11 OTHER FUNCTIONS 30i/31i/32i-B)
Base screen (Milling mode) Base screen (Turning mode)
15.3 MACHINING SIMULATION SCREEN

When this function is used, please set the parameter No.27482 # 2 and # 1 to 1.
Machining simulation is done only during Milling mode (#3940=1) of Lathe/Machining center G code
system switching function, and Machining simulation is not done for Turning mode (#3940=0).
15.4 DRAWING DURING MACHINING SCREEN

When this function is used, please set No.27482 # 1 to 1.
Drawing during machining is done only during Milling mode (#3940=1) of Lathe/Machining center G
code system switching function, and Drawing during machining is not done for Turning mode (#3940=0).
15.5 NC PROGRAM CONVERSION SCREEN

When this function is used, please set the parameter No.27482 # 2 to 1.
15.6 WORKPIECE COORDINATE DATA WINDOW

The display of the following axis names of the workpiece coordinate data window can be dynamically
changed according to the change in the parameter No.1020 and No.1022.
It follows the axis name when the window opens.
Axis names
Axis name of workpiece coordinate data window
Axis name of calculate offset (measure) window
Axis name of calculate offset (+input) window
- 575 -
30i/31i/32i-B) OTHER FUNCTIONS B-63874EN/11
Workpiece coordinate
data window
Base screen ( Milling mode)
When it meets all following conditions (1) and (2), the data cannot be input during operation (automatic
operation start-up state, feed hold state, automatic operation stop state, tool retract & recover operation,
repositioning or manual numerical command operation).
< Condition >

(1) Setting that assumes dynamic change of axis name to be effective (parameter No.14791#1=1)
(2) Setting that prohibits data entry on the workpiece origin offset setting screen during operation
(parameter No.14704#1=1)
Moreover, it is not possible to input the data after operation end until the window is displayed again.
15.7 RELATIVE COORDINATES PRESETTING WINDOW

The display of the axis names of the relative coordinates presetting window can be dynamically changed
according to the change in the parameter No.1020 and No.1022.
It follows the axis name when the window opens.
Relative coordinates
presetting window
Base screen ( Milling mode)
When it meets the following conditions, presetting cannot be done during operation (automatic operation
start-up state, feed hold state, automatic operation stop state, tool retract & recover operation,
repositioning or manual numerical command operation).
- 576 -
B-63874EN/11 OTHER FUNCTIONS 30i/31i/32i-B)
< Condition >

(1) Setting that assumes dynamic change of axis name to be effective (parameter No.14791#1=1)
Moreover, presetting cannot be done after operation end until the window is displayed again.
- 577 -
16.HIGH SPEED PROGRAM
MANAGEMENT(For only Series
0i-F/30i/31i/32i-A, B) OTHER FUNCTIONS B-63874EN/11
16 HIGH SPEED PROGRAM MANAGEMENT

(For only Series 0i-F/30i/31i/32i-A, B)
In case high speed program management is available, programs can be saved on MANUAL GUIDE i
screen.
NOTE
1 Refer to the operator’s manual (B-64484EN/05, B-64604EN/01) of CNC, the
section ”High speed program management” of chapter “Operation” for details of
high speed program management.
2 Set bit 7 of parameter No.11354 to 1 to use this function.
3 If this function is available, registering program speed or deleting program speed
is faster. But the alterations of programs are canceled if programs are not saved.
16.1 OPERATION OF SAVING PROGRAMS

Programs can be saved by the following operation on EDIT mode.
(1) Push [O LIST] soft-key and the program list is displayed.

(2) Push [<] or [>] soft-key and the following soft-keys are displayed.
RENAME TIME A-SAVE CONDEN DETAIL WRPROT DEVICE OPEN CLOSE
(3) Push [A-SAVE] soft-key and message “SAVE PROGRAMS?” is displayed.

(4) Push [YES] soft-key and programs are saved.
16.2 STATUS DISPLAY

In the following case, the status is displayed on the left lower of MANUAL GUIDE i screen.
1. The case while saving programs

The status “ALLSAVE” is displayed.
2. The case that programs haven’t saved yet after altering programs
The status “NOTSAVE” is displayed.
NOTE
Set bit 5 of parameter No.11370 to 1 to display “NOTSAVE”.
- 578 -
B-63874EN/11 OTHER FUNCTIONS 17.THREAD REPAIRING
17 THREAD REPAIRING
A damaged thread can be repaired by re-machining it in phase with the original thread. Before this
function can be used, bit 7 (TRP) of parameter No. 27140 must be set to 1 and bit 2 (TRN) of parameter
No. 14856 must be set to 0.
17.1 OVERVIEW
(1) Operation flow

<1> In JOG, HND, TJOG, or THND mode, soft key [REPAIR] is displayed on the base screen.
<2> Press soft key [REPAIR]. The thread re-machining menu screen is then displayed.
<3> Select an item from the thread re-machining menu, and press soft key [SELECT]. A re-machining
screen corresponding to the selected thread type is displayed.
First, the orientation tab screen is displayed.
<4> Press soft key [OT STA] to perform spindle orientation.
After spindle orientation is completed, selecting the SYNC tab displays the synchronization tab
screen for measuring the thread synchronization position (where the root of the thread is
synchronized with the one-rotation signal).
<5> Align the tool to the root of the thread, then press soft key [MEASUR] to read the thread
synchronization position.
Next, select the CUT COND. tab to display the cutting condition tab screen for entering cutting
conditions.
<6> Enter cutting condition data, and select the DETAIL tab then the POS./SIZE tab to enter necessary
data for machining on each tab screen.
After completing data entry, select the EXECUTE tab to display the execution tab screen.
<7> Retract the tool from the root of the thread, press soft key [OT OFF] to cancel orientation. Next,
press soft key [START]. Thread re-machining is then performed.
(2) Supported thread types

This function supports the following types of outer and inner surface threads:
<1> ZX plane general-purpose thread
<2> ZX plane metric thread
<3> ZX plane unified thread
<4> ZX plane PT thread
<5> ZX plane PF thread
A multi-start thread can be re-machined by re-machining a single start as many times as the number of the
starts the multi-start thread has.
17.2 TOOL PATH

The tool path is the same as for normal threading. For the tool path in normal threading, see Subsection
2.4.1, "Machining Command".
(1) Retract motion

The retract motion is the same as for normal threading. For the retract motion in normal threading, see
Remarks, "Cycle retract motions", in Chapter 2, "TURNING CYCLE".
- 579 -
17. THREAD REPAIRING OTHER FUNCTIONS B-63874EN/11
(2) Saving and restoring modal information

Modal information is saved and restored in the same way as for normal threading.
17.3 DETAILS OF THE THREAD REPAIRING SCREEN AND

OPERATION
On the base screen in a manual mode (JOG, HND, TJOG, or THND mode), pressing soft key [REPAIR]
displays the thread repairing menu screen.
NOTE
1 In a multipath system, when soft key [REPAIR] is pressed while automatic
operation is being performed for a path other than a selected path, a warning
“DURING AUTOMATIC OPERATION IN A PATH” is issued, and thread repairing
cannot be performed.
2 The spindle to be used must be selected before this menu screen is displayed.
17.3.1 Re-Machining Screen for Outer Surface General-Purpose

Threads and Operation
In the OUTER tab of the thread re-machining menu, select “ZX-THREAD(GENERAL)”, and press soft
key [SELECT]. The outer surface general-purpose thread re-machining screen is then displayed.
SYNC
Data item Meaning
V SYNC. POS
CUT COND.
Data item Meaning
W CUTTING METHOD
B THREADING DIRECTION (*1) B1:-Z direction
B2:+Z direction
Displayed when bit 1 (TCD) of parameter No. 27140 is set to 1.
C FINISH AMOUNT (*2)
K NUMBER OF FINISHING (*2)
S CUT TYPE S1: Number of cuts
S2: Depth of cut
P CUT NUMBER (*2) Displayed only when S1 is selected.
Q CUT DEPTH (*2) Displayed only when S2 is selected.
A NOSE ANGLE Not displayed when the tool database is used.
DETAIL
Data item Meaning
Z APPROCH MOTION
D SURFACE CLEARANCE (*2)
L ENTRANCE CLEARANCE (*2)
M EXIT CLEARANCE (*2)
Y CUT SHIFT DIRECTION Y1: -X direction
Y2: +X direction
Displayed when bit 0 (TC0) of parameter No. 27100 is set to 1.
- 580 -
POS./SIZE
Data item Meaning
X START POINT (X) “BASE POINT1 (X)” when a threading direction can be
specified
Z START POINT (Z) “BASE POINT1 (Z)” when a threading direction can be
specified
Ranges of lead sizes that can be specified.
*Metric input : 0.001 to 500.000 mm
*Inch input : 0.0001 to 9.9999 inch
(Minimum input value is according to the incremental
system)
H THREAD DEPTH
A END POINT (X) “BASE POINT2 (X)” when a threading direction can be
specified
B END POINT (Z) “BASE POINT2 (Z)” when a threading direction can be
specified
(*1) Data of the outer surface threading cycle (G1140) created most recently is used as the initial value.
(*2) Data of the threading cycle (G1140 or G1141) created most recently is used as the initial values.
Remarks
1 The meanings of the input items on the CUT COND. tab and DETAIL tab are the
same as those on the cycle input screen for the outer surface threading cycle
(G1140).
2 The meanings of the input items on the POS./SIZE tab are the same as those on
the cycle input screen for ZX plane general-purpose thread figures (G1460).
(1) Operation procedure

Follow the steps below to perform thread re-machining:
<1> On the ORIENT tab, press soft key [OT STA] to perform spindle orientation. In spindle orientation,
a spindle orientation M code is specified, placing the system in the spindle orientation mode.
During spindle orientation, the message “NOW SPINDLE ORIENTATION...” is displayed.
Upon completion of spindle orientation, the message “SPINDLE ORIENTATION IS
COMPLETED” is displayed.
NOTE
If bit 6 (FSP) of parameter No. 27140 is set to 1, soft key [OT STA] is not
displayed. Perform spindle orientation separately.
<2> On the SYNC tab, move the tool to the synchronization position (the root of the thread).
<3> Press soft key [MEASUR] to set the Z-axis coordinate value of the current tool position in the
synchronization position edit box.
Alternatively, enter a value directly in the SYNC. POS edit box.
<4> Retract the tool from the workpiece to a safe position.
<5> On the CUT COND. tab, enter necessary data for machining.
<6> On the DETAIL tab, enter necessary data for machining.
<7> On the POS./SIZE tab, enter necessary data for machining.
<8> On the EXECUTE tab, press soft key [OT OFF] to cancel the spindle orientation mode. When the
spindle orientation mode is canceled, a spindle positioning mode cancel M code is specified.
- 581 -
17. THREAD REPAIRING OTHER FUNCTIONS B-63874EN/11
NOTE
If bit 6 (FSP) of parameter No. 27140 is set to 1, soft key [OT OFF] is not
displayed. Cancel spindle orientation separately.
<9> On the EXECUTE tab, press soft key [START] to start thread re-machining.
<10>When thread re-machining ends, press soft key [CLOSE] to close the outer surface general-purpose
thread re-machining screen and return to the base screen.
(2) Notes on operation

<1> When spindle orientation has been performed, the spindle orientation mode must be canceled before
re-machining is started.
Unless a setting is made to allow a press of soft key [START] to automatically cancel the spindle
orientation mode, when soft key [START] is pressed without canceling the spindle orientation mode
by using soft key [OT OFF], the warning message “SPINDLE ORIENTATION MODE IS NOT
CANCELED.” is issued.
If a setting has been made to automatically cancel spindle orientation, thread re-machining starts
after the spindle orientation mode is canceled automatically.
<2> If the tool is not in a safety position (where the tool is positioned apart from the workpiece by at
least the thread depth) when soft key [OT OFF] is pressed, the warning message “REMOVE TOOL
FROM WORKPIECE” is displayed, and spindle orientation cannot be canceled.
<3> If the tool is not in a safety position (where the tool is positioned apart from the workpiece by at
least the thread depth) when soft key [START] is pressed, the warning message “REMOVE TOOL
FROM WORKPIECE” is displayed, and thread re-machining does not start.
<4> If soft key [OT STA] is pressed in the spindle orientation mode, nothing is performed.
<5> If soft key [OT OFF] is pressed in the spindle orientation mode, nothing is performed.
<6> If the <RESET> key is pressed while processing listed below is in progress, the processing stops.
The thread re-machining screen does not close.
• Spindle orientation
• Cancellation of spindle orientation
• Thread re-machining
<7> During spindle orientation, the system does not accept any key except the <RESET> key.
When a function key is pressed, however, the screen display changes to the NC screen after spindle
orientation is completed.
<8> During thread re-machining, the system does not accept any key except the <RESET> key.
When a function key is pressed, however, the screen display changes to the NC screen after thread
re-machining is completed.
<9> When one of the following operations is performed while the thread re-machining screen is
displayed, the screen closes:
• Pressing a function key
• Changing the path by path switch signal
• Changing the mode
Subsequently, when an attempt is made to display this screen again, the confirmation message
“RESTORE THE LAST INPUTTED DATA ?” is displayed on the thread re-machining menu screen.
If soft key [YES] is pressed, this screen is displayed, with data entered before this screen was closed
appearing in the edit box.
If soft key [NO] is pressed, this screen is opened with normal initial values set (nothing is set for
input items that do not have an initial value).
17.3.2 Re-machining Screen for Other Threads and Operation

The description for outer surface general-purpose threads also applies to other threads (outer surface
metric, unified, PT, and PF threads, and inner surface general-purpose, metric, unified, PT, and PF
threads). So, see the description for outer surface general-purpose threads.
- 582 -
17.4 NOTES
17.4.1 Note On Emergency Stop

(1) When an emergency stop is made during processing listed below, the processing stops. The thread
re-machining screen does not close.
<1> Spindle orientation
<2> Cancellation of spindle orientation
<3> Thread re-machining
17.4.2 Notes on Changing Modes (Such as MEM, EDIT, and MDI)

(1) When the mode is changed during the following processing, the processing stops.
(2) When the mode is changed on the thread re-machining screen, the screen closes. If the mode set at
this time is the spindle orientation mode, it becomes necessary to cancel the spindle orientation
mode manually or display the thread re-machining screen again to cancel the orientation mode.
17.4.3 Notes on Switching to the NC Screen

(1) When an attempt is made to change the screen display to the NC screen during the following
processing, the screen display does not change until the processing ends.
Thread re-machining
(2) When an attempt is made to change the screen display to the NC screen while the thread
re-machining screen is displayed, the screen closes. If the mode set at this time is the spindle
orientation mode, it becomes necessary to cancel the spindle orientation mode manually or display
the thread re-machining screen again to cancel the orientation mode.
17.4.4 Notes on Switching Between Paths

(1) When an attempt is made to switch between paths during the following processing, path switching
does not take place until the processing ends.
(2) When an attempt is made to switch between paths while the thread re-machining screen is displayed,
the screen closes. If the mode set at this time is the spindle orientation mode, it becomes necessary to
cancel the spindle orientation mode manually or display the thread re-machining screen again to
cancel the orientation mode.
17.4.5 Notes on Use Wrong Operation Prevention Functions

Set the "START FROM MIDDLE OF PROGRAM" box to disable in the wrong operation prevention
functions setting screen.
- 583 -
APPENDIX
A.EXAMPLES OF CREATING
PROGRAMS FOR THE
B-63874EN/11 APPENDIX MACHINING CENTER
A EXAMPLES OF CREATING PROGRAMS

FOR THE MACHINING CENTER
WARNING
All data described in this Part such as parameter, offset data and part program
cannot be used for actual machining. Actual data varies from one machine model
to another. Refer to the applicable manual supplied by the respective machine
tool builders for details.
If the set data does not match the characteristic of a specific machine, the tool
may bump against the workpiece, and the machine may be forced to perform
unnatural machining, possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine, and
even injuries.
The part program made by using MANUAL GUIDE i has a form of ISO-code program with G-code and
so on.
You must enter the program used for such as tool changing, tool offset, spindle rotation, approaching and
releasing in the form of ISO-code program.
In addition to those actions, you can enter the part program for complicated machining motions, which
are usually difficult to make by ISO-code form, as a “Machining cycle” by using menu programming
method. This machining cycle is made in form of a block including G-4digits and necessary data items.
In the following explanations, the contents of a square frame mean the actual operations, and each
operation are described as follows.
[NEWPRG] : Push a soft key

12345 : Enter numeric data
INPUT : Push an <INPUT> key
↓↑→← : Push a cursor move key
⇓⇑ : Push a page change key
(CREATE NEW PROG) : Name of Window or Data item
<START> : Name of Tab
<<1.CYLINDER>> : Menu item
Example) Outer wall contouring, Pocketing, Drilling
Workpiece : 90×130×30
1st Process : Outer wall contouring by Flat end mill (T01)

2nd Process : Pocket roughing by Flat end mill (T01)
3rd Process : Pocket finishing by Flat end mill (T02) (side, bottom)
4th Process : Drilling by Drill tool (T03)
- 587 -
A. EXAMPLES OF CREATING
PROGRAMS FOR THE
MACHINING CENTER APPENDIX B-63874EN/11
φ4
R30
R15
70 80
15
30
35
55
110
120
10
20
A.1 SETTING OF TOOL LENGTH OFFSET DATA

WARNING
1 Operation of tool offset setting varies from one machine model to another. So
operations described in this section may differ from those ion actual machine.
As to the actual operation of tool offset setting on the actual machine, refer to the
applicable manual supplied by the respective machine tool builders for details.
even injuries.
2 As to the operations on a machine described in this chapter, refer to the
If the operation does not match the characteristic of a specific machine, the tool
even injuries.
Assume that the Z=0 position of the workpiece coordinate is the surface of the workpiece, while the Z=0
position of the machine coordinate is the machine origin.
By setting the distance between these 2 points to the tool length offset data, workpiece coordinate of
Z-axis can be defined.
Tool length is different between each tool for the actual machining, so set the offset data respectively.
The tool length offset value is the relative coordinate value of Z-axis at the point where the tool tip is
touched to the surface of the workpiece.
- 588 -
PROGRAMS FOR THE
<1> Select the tool used for actual machining by switch on the machine operator’s panel.
<2> Execute the machine reference position return of Z-axis.
<3> Press soft key [ACTPOS] and make the relative coordinate data display.
<4> Press soft key [PRESET], then press soft key [ALL 0], and press soft key [ALTER], then the relative
coordinate value of all axes are reset to 0. But, the Z-axis coordinate only is used for measuring.
<5> Press soft key [T-OFS] and make the tool offset widow open.
<6> Make the tool tip touch at the surface of the workpiece by JOG or Manual handwheel. Then, the
distance from the machine origin is displayed as the Z-axis relative coordinate value.
<7> Select the tool length compensation column of the tool used for measuring by moving the cursor by
cursor key.
<8> Pressing soft key [INP.C.] displays the window of INPUT RELATIVE COORD. window, then
move the cursor to the Z-axis.
INPUT RELATIVE COORD
X-AXIS 0.000
Y-AXIS 0.000
Z-AXIS -10.000
A-AXIS 0.000
SELECT INPUT ITEM.
<9> Pressing soft key [INPUT] makes the Z-axis relative coordinate value enter as the tool offset length
data.
Z=0 (Machine coordinate)
The tool used

for actual
machining
This distance is set as the tool
length offset value
Z=0 (Workpiece
coordinate)
Workpiece
- 589 -
PROGRAMS FOR THE
NOTE
There is a case such as using a sensor called base master instead of touching
the tool to the workpiece surface, so into details and actual operations, refer to
the manual made by machine tool builder.
A.2 SETTING OF WORKPIECE ORIGIN OFFSET VALUE

After setting the geometry offset data for necessary tools, set the workpiece origin on the actual
workpiece used for machining.
In order to carry out the actual machining by using the part program made on the workpiece coordinate,
set the distance between machine coordinate and workpiece coordinate to the workpiece coordinate
system as the workpiece origin offset value.
In this section, operations, of which setting the center of the workpiece (90×130) as the workpiece origin
of X/Y/Z-axis by using standard too with the radius 5mm, are described.
And, G54 is used as the workpiece coordinate system.
<1> Select the standard tool by using the switch on the machine operator’s panel. There is a case of using
special tool such as the centering lever as the standard tool for easy operations and high precision
accuracy, so refer to the manual made by machine tool builder for actual operations.
<2> After then, for safety, take measure to keep fully safety such as closing the machine door.
<3> Select the manual handwheel mode on the machine operator’s panel, and make the standard tool
touch to the right side of the workpiece (A-position in the drawing) by referencing the following
drawing. At this time, make a spindle rotate by fully safety speed if necessary, then you can avoid
over-cutting by stopping the tool moving at the position the tool begins cutting. As to actual
operations, refer to the manual made by the machine tool builder.
Y Standard tool
65
45 A
5 Y-axis
direction
B 5 X-axis direction 90mm
130mm
<4> Pressing soft key [WK SET] displays the window of the workpiece coordinate system.
<5> Select the G54 X-axis data by moving the cursor. When other tab is displayed in the window, the
cursor motion type might be the tab transition type, so press soft key [CHCURS] for changing to
item transition type of cursor.
<6> Pressing soft key [MEASUR] displays the window of offset calculating.
CALCULATE OFFSET(MEASURE)
MACHINE COORD. WORK COORD.
CURRENT TARGET RESULT
X 277.500 －X = X 277.500
INPUT TARGET ON WORK COORD.
- 590 -
PROGRAMS FOR THE
<7> When the tool touches to the right side of the workpiece, the X-axis position should be X=70.0mm,
65mm of the right side position + 5mm of the tool radius, so enter 70.0 to the target workpiece
coordinate value. Then, the calculation result value is displayed at the RESULT column, so confirm
the result is correct.
<8> Pressing soft key [INPUT] sets the above calculated value to the workpiece origin offset data.
NO. WRK CO X
00 EXT 0.000
01 G54 207.500
02 G55 0.000
03 G56 0.000
04 G57 0.000
05 G58 0.000
06 G59 0.000
<9> Release the tool from the workpiece once, and set the Y-axis workpiece origin offset data by similar
operations of <3> to <8>. In this case, touch the point B in the drawing and the entering target value
is Y=-50.0mm.
A.3 PREPARING OF THE FIXED FORM SENTENCE MENU

As to the fixed form sentence, machine tool builder usually sets the suitable menu for specified respective
machine. But, you can enter his own menu on the MANUAL GUIDE i screen by yourself. The procedure
is as follows.
Enter the fixed form sentence menu which will be called by the soft key [FIXFRM] in the soft key group
for milling.
Enter programs for START and END.
[SETTING]
(SETTING)
<BASIC>
↓
<<1. REGISTER FIXED FORM SENTENCE FOR MILLING>>
[SELECT]
(REGISTER FIXED FORM SENTENCE FOR MILLING)
<FORM 1>
[NEW]
(CREATE NEW FIXED FORM SENTENCE)
<REGISTERED NAME : >
MILLING START INPUT
<REGISTERED SENTENCE : >
G28 G91 Z0. ; G28 X0. Y0. ; T? M06 ; D? ; M03 S? ; G00 G90 G54 X0. Y0.; G43
Z100. H? ;
[ADD]
→
<FORM5>
[NEW]
<REGISTERED NAME : >
PROGRAM END INPUT
M05. ; G00 G90 Z100. ; G28 G91 Z0, ; M06 T0 ;M30 ;
[ADD]
[TO MNU]
- 591 -
PROGRAMS FOR THE
A.4 SETTING OF THE TOOL DATA

Set the necessary tool data. These tool data are used for displaying tool form of animation and calculation
of cutting angle in the machining cycle.
The tool length offset data were already set in Appendix A.1, “SETTING OF TOOL LENGTH OFFSET
DATA”.
T01 : Flat end mill for roughing
T02 : Flat end mill for finishing
T03 : Drill
Display “TOOL OFFSET” window by [T-OFS]
TOOL OFFSET
NO. TOOL LENGTH. COMP. CUTTER COMPENSATOIN
GEOMETRY WEAR GEOMETRY WEAR
001 Measured value 0.000 4.000 0.000
002 Measured value 0.000 3.000 0.000
003 Measured value 0.000 2.000 0.000
NOTE
1 The above offset data are just an example, and they cannot be used for actual
machining.
2 The above offset number 003 is used for drilling tool, and if you use it for
animation, you must set the radius amount of the drill to radius offset data.
3 There is a case that the above offset screen might not be displayed depending
on the attached optional function. Into details, refer to the manual made by
machine tool builder.
Display “TOOL DATA” tab by cursor key <→>
TOOL DATA
NO. TOOL SET
001 F END 1
002 F END 1
003 DRILL 1 140.0
TOOL OFFSET
TOOL OFFSET TOOL DATA
NO. TOOL SET
001 F END 1
002 F END 1
003 DRILL 1 140.0
004 F END 2
005 F END 2
006 F END 1
007
SELECT SOFT KEY.
A.5 CREATING OF PART PROGRAM

In the MANUAL GUIDE i , background editing can be used, but in this section, part program creating
operations are described by using foreground editing on the EDIT mode.
- 592 -
PROGRAMS FOR THE
A.5.1 Creating New Part Program

Create a new part program of O1234.
(1) In case of creating a new part program directly

Select EDIT mode by using a mode-selecting switch on a machine-operating panel
[NEWPRG]
(CREATE NEW PROGRAM)
1234 [CREATE] (NEW PROGRAM NO.)
(2) In case of creating a new part program on the program list window
[O-LIST]
(OPEN PROGRAM)
[NEW]
Select the newly entered program by ↓
[OPEN]
A.5.2 Operations of “START” Menu

By pressing soft key [START] in the soft key menu for milling, the window “INSERT STARTING
COMMAND FOR MILLING” with the following tabs is displayed.
<START> : Fixed form sentence menu used for the top of part program or each machining
process.
<COORD CONV> : Coordinate conversion menu, which is necessary for the machine on the inclined
surface, this is not used in this section.
<BLANK> : Blank form menu, which is necessary for animation.
A.5.2.1 Entering blank form data

By selecting a tab <BLANK> by cursor key, blank form menu is displayed.
(INSERT STARTING COMMAND FOR MILLING)

<BLANK>
↓
<<1. RECTANGULAR BLANK FIGURE>>
[SELECT]
Enter blank form data as a round bar.

(RECTANGULAR BLANK FIGURE - INSERT)
130 INPUT (WIDTH)
90 INPUT (LENGTH)
30 INPUT (HEIGHT)
65 INPUT (WORK ORIGIN X)
45 INPUT (WORK ORIGIN Y)
0 INPUT (WORK PROGIN Z)
[INSERT]
- 593 -
PROGRAMS FOR THE
RECTANGULAR BLANK - INSERT
W ORK
W IDTH B= 130.
LENG TH D= 90.
HEIG HT H= 30.
W ORK O RIG IN X I= 65.
W ORK O RIG IN Y J=
W ORK O RIG IN Z K= 0.
KEY IN NUM ERALS.（ MM ,INCH）
A.5.3 Entering Tool Changing and Spindle Rotating Blocks for

Roughing Flat End Mill
A.5.3.1 Entering in ISO-code form directly
It is difficult to define the action of tool changing, spindle rotation, approaching and releasing generally
because there are many difference depending on machine configuration. So, using ISO-code form
program can realize more flexible and safety part program.
G28 G91 Z0. ; INSERT (Z-axis reference position return)

G28 G91 X0. Y0. ; INSERT (X/Y-axis reference position return)
T01 M06 ; INSERT (Tool change)
D1 ; INSERT (Selecting tool data)
M03 S1000 ; INSERT (Spindle rotation)
G00 G90 G54 X0. Y0. ; INSERT (X/Y-axis approaching)
G43 Z100. H1 ; INSERT (Z-axis approaching)
A.5.3.2 Entering by fixed form sentence menu

ISO-code form part program can be entered from the fixed form sentence menu. But, in such a case,
proper fixed form sentence must be prepared in advance.
(Soft-key group for milling cycle menu)

[START]
<START>
↓
<<3.MILLING START>>
[INSERT]
NOTE
There may be a case that undefined value is entered by “?” in the fixed form
sentence menu, so in this case, you need to replace the “?” by proper value can
be used in actual machining.
Place the cursor to the address with “?”, enter numeric data, then press
<ALTER> key.
After altering the data, return the cursor to the EOB at the end of the program.
- 594 -
PROGRAMS FOR THE
A.5.4 Entering Outer Wall Contouring Process
A.5.4.1 Entering outer wall contouring (rough) cycle block

Enter the 1st process : outer wall contouring process by the roughing flat endmill (T01).
Enter machining type, cutting condition and so on.
(Soft-key menu for milling cycle menu)

[CYCLE]
(INSERT MILLING CYCLE)
→
<CONTOURING>
↓
<<1.OUTER WALL CONTOURING(ROUGH)>>
[SELECT]
(OUTER WALL CONTOURING(ROUGH) - INSERT)
<CUT COND.>
20 INPUT (BOTTOM THICKNESS)
5 INPUT (SIDE THICKNESS)
3 INPUT (CUT DEPTH OF RADIUS)
10 INPUT (CUT DEPTH OF AXIS)
0 INPUT (SIDE FINISH AMOUNT)
0 INPUT (BOTTOM FINISH AMOUNT)
500 INPUT (FEED RATE - SING.CUT)
300 INPUT (FEED RATE - BOTH CUT)
200 INPUT (FEED RATE - AXIS)
[INSERT]
O UTER W ALL CONTOURING(ROUG H) - INSERT CHAR← →
CUT COND. DETAIL

BOTTOM THICKNESS T= 20.
SIDE THICKNESS S= 5.
CUT DEPTH OF RADIUS L= 3.
CUT DEPTH OF AXIS J= 10.
SIDE FINISH AMOUNT K= 0. ＊
BOTTOM FINISH AMT. H= 0. ＊
FEED RATE-SING.CUT F= 500.
FEED RATE-BOTH.CUT V= 300.
FEED RATE-AXIS E=
KEY IN NUM ERALS.（ MM /INCH， MM /REV， INCH/M IN， INCH/REV）
NOTE
1 In the machining cycle data menu window, all data excepting cutting condition
data are set automatically. However, the data entered at previously entered
cycle of same kind are copied, so you must enter the data if you have not
entered the same kind of cycle.
2 In the machining cycle data menu window, 2 tabs, <CUT COND.> and
<DETAIL>, are displayed.
In the <CUT COND.>, all data must be set. In the <DETAIL>, all data are
automatically set, so check those data and modify them if necessary only
- 595 -
PROGRAMS FOR THE
A.5.4.2 Entering figure for outer wall contouring (rough)

By inserting the machining cycle block, the window of contouring figure menu is displayed, so select the
XY-SQUARE CONVEX
(INSERT MILLING FIGURE)
<CONT. FIG.>
<<1.XY-SQUARE CONVEX>>
[SELECT]
(XY-SQUARE - INSERT)
<POS./SIZE>
[CONVEX] (FIGURE TYPE)
0 INPUT (BASE POSITION)
-20 INPUT (HEIGHT/DEPTH)
0 INPUT (CENTER POINT (X))
0 INPUT (CENTER POINT (Y))
120 INPUT (LENGTH FOR X AXIS)
80 INPUT (LENGTH FOR Y AXIS)
[INSERT]
XY-SQUARE - INSERT
POS./SIZE
FIGURE TYPE T= CONVEX
BASE POSITION B= 0.
HEIGHT/DEPTH L= -20.
CENTER POINT（ X） H= 0.
CENTER POINT（ Y） V= 0.
LENGTH FOR X AXIS U= 120.
LENGTH FOR Y AXIS W= 00.
CORNER RADIUS R= ＊
ANGLE A= ＊
KEY IN NUM ERALS.（ MM ,INCH）
A.5.5 Entering Pocket Roughing Process
A.5.5.1 Entering pocket roughing cycle block

Enter the 2nd process : pocket roughing by a roughing flat endmill (T01).
Since same tool with the 1st process is used, tool changing blocks are not necessary.
- 596 -
PROGRAMS FOR THE
(Soft-key group for Milling cycle menu)

[CYCLE]
→
<POCKETING>
↓
<<1.POCKETING(ROUGH)>>
[SELECT]
(POCKETING(ROUGH) - INSERT)
<CUT COND.>
INPUT (BOTTOM THICKNESS)
INPUT (SIDE THICKNESS)
10 INPUT (CUT DEPTH OF AXIS)
0.5 INPUT (SIDE FINISH AMOUNT)
0.5 INPUT (BOTTOM FINISH AMOUNT)
300 INPUT (FED RATE - BOTH CUT)
[INSERT]
POCKETING(ROUGH) - INSERT CHAR ← →
CUT COND. DETAIL

BOTTOM THICKNESS T= ＊
SIDE THICKNESS S= ＊
CUT DEPTH OF RADIUS L=
CUT DEPTH OF AXIS J= 10. ＊
SIDE FINISH AMOUNT K= 0.5 ＊
BOTTOM FINISH AMT. H= 0.5 ＊
FEED RATE-AXIS E= 200.
KEY IN NUM ERALS.（ MM ， INCH）
NOTE
A.5.5.2 Entering figure for pocket roughing

By inserting the machining cycle block, the window of pocketing figure menu, so select the XY-FREE
CONCAVE FIGURE.
- 597 -
PROGRAMS FOR THE

<POCKET FIG>
↓
<<4.XY-FREE CONCAVE FIGURE>>
[SELECT]
(XY PLANE FREE FIGURE - INSERT)
(START POINT - INSERT)
INPUT (FIGURE TYPE)
-50 INPUT (START POINT X)
0 INPUT (START POINT Y)
-10 INPUT (HEIGHT/DEPTH)
[OK]
[ARC ]
(ARC (CW) - INSERT)
INPUT (END POINT X)
INPUT (END POINT Y)
INPUT (RADIUS)
-35 INPUT (CENTER POINT CX)
0 INPUT (CENTER POINT CY)
INPUT (LAST CONNECTION)
[TANGNT] (NEXT CONNECTION)
[OK]
[LINE]
(LINE - INSERT)
[R-UP] (LINE DIRECTION)
INPUT (END POINT X)
INPUT (END POINT Y)
INPUT (ANGLE)
[OK]
[ARC ]
(ARC (CW) - INSERT)
INPUT (END POINT X)
INPUT (END POINT Y)
30 INPUT (RADIUS)
0 INPUT (CENTER POINT CX)
[OK]
[LINE]
(LINE - INSERT)
[R-DOWN] (KINE DIRECTION)
INPUT (END POINT X)
INPUT (END POINT Y)
INPUT (ANGLE)
[OK]
- 598 -
PROGRAMS FOR THE
[ARC ]
(ARC (CW) - INSERT)
INPUT (END POINT X)
INPUT (END POINT Y)
15 INPUT (RADIUS)
[OK]
[LINE]
(LINE - INSERT)
[L-DOWN] (LINE DIRECTION)
INPUT (END POINT X)
INPUT (END POINT Y)
INPUT (ANGLE)
[OK]
[ARC ]
(ARC (CW) - INSERT)
INPUT (END POINT X)
INPUT (END POINT Y)
30 INPUT (RADIUS)
[OK]
[LINBE]
(LINE - INSERT)
[L-UP] (LINE DIRECTION)
INPUT (END POINT X)
INPUT (END POINT Y)
INPUT (ANGLE)
[OK]
[ARC ]
(ARC (CW) - INSERT)
-50 INPUT (END POINT X)
0 INPUT (END POINT Y)
15 INPUT (RADIUS)
-35 INPUT (CENTER POINT CX)
INPUT (NEXT CONNECTION)
[OK]
- 599 -
PROGRAMS FOR THE
Figure blocks can be registered into the current part program directly, and also can be registered as
another sub program.
Registered figure blocks can be used also for finishing, so in this example, register them as a sub
program.
[CREATE]
(METHOD OF FREE FIGURE CREATION)
↓
<CREATE AS SUB PROGRAM>
8200 INPUT (SUBPRO NO.)
POCKET FIGURE (FIGURE NAME)
[ISLAND]

INSERT IN CURRENT PROGRAM
CREATE AS SUB PROGRAM
SUBPRO NO.: 8200
FIGURE NAME: POCKET FIGURE
INPUT SUBPRO NO. AND FIGURE NAME.
There is an island in a pocket, so enter island figure continuously.

INPUT (FIGURE TYPE)
-15 INPUT (START POINT X)
-7.5 INPUT (START POINT Y)
-10 INPUT (HEIGHT / DEPTH)
[OK]
[LINE]
(LINE - INSERT)
[UP] (LINE DIRETION)
7.5 INPUT (END POINT Y)
[OK]
[LINE]
(LINE - INSERT)
[RIGHT] (LINE DIRECTION)
15 INPUT (END POINT X)
[OK]
[LINE]
(LINE - INSERT)
[DOWN] (LINE DIRECTION)
-7.5 INPUT (END POINT Y)
[OK]
[LINE]
(LINE - INSERT)
[LEFT] (LINE DIRECTION)
-15 INPUT (END POINT X)
[OK]
- 600 -
PROGRAMS FOR THE
Entered figure blocks were already defined to make as a subprogram, so check the contents of them and
create it as a subprogram by pressing soft key [OK]

[CREATE]
[OK]

SUBPRO NO.: 8200
FIGURE NAME: POCKET FIGURE
NOTE
Registered sub program can be displayed in a figure menu tab,
“SUBPROGRAM”.
In this case, set the parameters No14720 to 14723 in advance.
For this example, set those parameters as follow.
No.14720=8000 (Minimum program number of sub programs displayed in the
turning machining sub program menu)
No.14721=8499 (Maximum program number of sub programs displayed in the
milling machining sub program menu)

Finishing Flat End Mill
For pocket finishing, enter commands for operations including changing tools, specifying the spindle, and
approaching the machining start point.
- 601 -
PROGRAMS FOR THE


ISO-code form part program can be entered from the fixed form sentence menu. The already prepared
fixed form sentence as 3.MILLING START was made with entering undefined data as “?”, so it can be
used also for finishing.
[START]
<START>
↓
<<3.MILLING START>>
[INSERT]
NOTE
<ALTER> key.
A.5.7 Entering Pocket Bottom and Side Finishing Process

A.5.7.1 Entering pocket bottom finishing cycle block
Enter 3rd process : pocket bottom finishing process by the roughing flat end mill (T01).

[CYCLE]
→
<POCKETING>
↓
<<2.POCKETING (BOTTOM FINISH)>>
[SELECT]
(POCKETING (BOTTOM FINISH) - INSERT)
<CUT COND.>
INPUT (BOTTOM THICKNESS)
0.5 INPUT (SIDE FINISH AMOUNT)
INPUT (BOTTOM FINISH AMT.)
200 INPUT (FEED RATE - BOTH.CUT)
[INSERT]
- 602 -
PROGRAMS FOR THE
POCKETING(BOTTOM FINISH) - INSERT CHAR ← →
CUT COND. DETAIL

BOTTOM THICKNESS T= ＊
SIDE FINISH AMOUNT K= 0.5 ＊
BOTTOM FINISH AMT. H= ＊
CUT DEPTH OF RADIUS L= 3.
NOTE
2 When you select the machining cycle type form machining cycle menu, instead
of selecting by the cursor, you can use direct inputting of item number and
<INPUT> key. (In this case, enter 2 INPUT)
A.5.7.2 Entering figure for pocket bottom finishing

By inserting the cycle block, the window of pocketing figure is displayed, so enter the figure for finishing.
But, the former registered figure blocks for roughing can be used, so select from the subprogram menu.

→
<SUBPROGRAM>
↓
<<08200: POCKET FIGURE>>
[SELECT]
A.5.7.3 Entering pocket side finishing cycle block

Enter 3rd process : pocket side and bottom finishing process by the roughing flat end mill (T01).
- 603 -
PROGRAMS FOR THE

[CYCLE]
→
<POCKETING>
↓
<<3.POCKETING (SIDE FINISH)>>
[SELECT]
(POCKETING (SIDE FINISH) - INSERT)
<CUT COND.>
INPUT (SIDE FINISH AMOUNT)
INPUT (BOTTOM FINISH AMT.)
200 INPUT (FEED RATE - BOTH.CUT)
[INSERT]
POCKETING(SIDE FINISH) - INSERT CHAR ← →
CUT COND. DETAIL

SIDE FINISH AMOUNT K= ＊
BOTTOM FINISH AMT. H= ＊
NOTE
A.5.7.4 Entering figure for pocket side finishing

By inserting the cycle block, the window of pocketing figure is displayed, so enter the figure for finishing.
But, the former registered figure blocks for roughing can be used, so select from the subprogram menu.

→
<SUBPROGRAM>
↓
<<08200: POCKET FIGURE>>
[SELECT]
- 604 -
PROGRAMS FOR THE

Drilling
For drilling, enter commands for operations including changing tools, specifying the spindle, and
approaching the machining start point.


ISO-code form part program can be entered from the fixed form sentence menu. The already prepared
fixed form sentence as 3.MILLING START was made with entering undefined data as “?”, so it can be
used also for finishing.

[START]
<START>
↓
<<3.MILLING START>>
[INSERT]
NOTE
<ALTER> key.
A.5.9 Entering Drilling Process
A.5.9.1 Entering drilling cycle block

Enter 4th process : Drilling by drill (T0303).
- 605 -
PROGRAMS FOR THE

[CYCLE]
<HOLE MACH.>
↓
<<2.DRILLING>>
[SELECT]
(DRILLING - INSERT)
<CUT COND.>
INPUT (MACHINING TYPE)
INPUT (REF.PT.MODE)
100 INPUT (I POINT)
-20 INPUT (CUT DEPTH)
2 INPUT (GO PAST AMOUNT)
5 INPUT (CLEARANCE)
100 INPUT (FEED RATE)
[INSERT]
DRILLING － INSERT
CUT CON D.
MACHINING TYPE W= NORM AL
REF. PT. MODE I= INIT. POS-1

I POINT J= 100.
CUT DEPTH L= -20.
GO PAST AMOUNT K= 2.
CLEARANCE C= 5.
FEED RATE F= 100.
APROCH MOTION Z= 2AXES MOV
SELECT SOFT KEY.
NOTE
A.5.9.2 Entering hole position block

By inserting the drilling cycle block, the window of hole position menu is displayed, so select the
“YY-RECTANGLE POINTS” item.
- 606 -
PROGRAMS FOR THE

<HOLE POSI.>
↓
↓
<<5.XY-RECTANGLE POINTS>>
[SELECT]
(XY-RECTANGLE POINTS - INSERT)
<HOLE POSIT>
-55 INPUT (START POINT (X))
-35 INPUT (START POINT (Y))
110 INPUT (LENGTH FOR X AXIS)
70 INPUT (LENGTH FOR Y AXIS)
3 INPUT (NUMBER FOR X AXIS)
3 INPUT (NUMBER FOR Y AXIS)
0 INPUT (ANGLE FOR A AXIS)
90 INPUT (ANGLE FOR Y AXIS)
[INSERT]
XY － RECTANGLE POINTS － INSERT CHAR ← →
HOLE POSIT SKIP

BASE POSITION B= 0.
START POINT(X) H= -55.
START POINT(Y) V= -35.
LENGTH FOR X AXIS U= 110.
LENGTH FOR Y AXIS W= 70.
NUMBER FOR X AXIS I= 3.
NUMBER FOR Y AXIS J= 3.
ANGLE FOR X AXIS K= 0.
ANGLE FOR Y AXIS M=
KEY IN NUM BERS. (° )
A.5.10 Operations in the “END” Menu

All necessary machining program have been entered, so enter end procedure.

Enter blocks for spindle stop, releasing and end M-code in ISO-code form with G-code and son on.
M05. ; INSERT (Spindle stop)

G00 G90 Z100.. ; INSERT (Releasing motion)
G28 G91 Z0. ; INSERT (Reference position return)
M06 T0 ; INSERT (Tool changing)
M30 ; INSERT (End M-code)

- 607 -
PROGRAMS FOR THE

[END]
<END>
↓
<<1.END OF PROGRAM>>
[INSERT]
NOTE
A.6 CHECKING OF THE PART PROGRAM

You can check the entered part program by animation.
A.6.1 Checking by Animation

Select MEM mode by using a mode-selecting switch on a machine-operating panel
[SIMLAT]
(SIMULATE - ANIMATE)
[REWIND]
[START]
NOTE
After checking by animation, in order to do other operation, you must close the
animation window by pressing soft key [GRPOFF] always.
- 608 -
B.EXAMPLES OF CREATING
PART PROGRAMS FOR
B-63874EN/11 APPENDIX LATHES
B EXAMPLES OF CREATING PART

PROGRAMS FOR LATHES
Example) Outer Roughing/Finishing, C-axis drilling
Workpiece : Round bar (φ100×80)
1st Process : Outer roughing by General purpose tool for roughing (T0101)
2nd Process : Outer finishing by General purpose tool for finishing (T0202)
3rd Process : C-axis end face drilling by Drill (T0303)
R3
80°
R3
C2
60°
φ100 φ60 φ35 φ31 φ22
20
30
50
80
- 609 -
B. EXAMPLES OF CREATING
PART PROGRAMS FOR
LATHES APPENDIX B-63874EN/11
B.1 SETTING TOOL OFFSET DATA

WARNING
1 Operation of tool offset setting varies from one machine model to another. So
operations described in this section may differ from those ion actual machine.
As to the actual operation of tool offset setting on the actual machine, refer to the
even injuries.
2 As to the operations on a machine described in this chapter, refer to the
If the operation does not match the characteristic of a specific machine, the tool
even injuries.
B.1.1 Setting of Z-axis Offset Data

<1> Set a standard workpiece on a chuck of lathe. After then, for safety, take measure to keep fully safety
such as closing the machine door.
<2> Execute the machine reference position return of X-and Z-axis.
<3> Output T-code in MDI mode, and select the tool for measuring.
<4> Make a spindle rotate by fully safety speed.
<5> Cut surface A of the following drawing in manual mode with a actual tool.
Chuck +X
Surface B
α Surface A
+Z
Workpiece origin
<6> Release the tool in X-axis direction only, without moving Z-axis.
<8> Measure distance β from the zero point in the workpiece coordinate system to surface A.
Operate as follows on the MANUAL GUIDE i screen.
- 610 -
PART PROGRAMS FOR
[T-OFS]
(TOOL OFFSET)
<GEOMETRY OFFSET>
[CHCURS]
(ITEM <--> will be displayed on the right upper part of the window)
→
<<Z-AXIS>>
↓
<<Offset number for the used tool>>
[MEASUR]
(CALCULATE OFFSET(MEASURE))
β INPUT (Z WORK COORD.TARGET)
Check the result of calculation displayed in the (RESULT)
[INPUT]
(GEOMTERY OFFSET)
CALCULATE OFFSET (MEASURE)

ABSOLUTE WORK COORD.
CURRENT TARGET RESULT
Z 2.000 －Z = Z 2.000
B.1.2 Setting of X-axis Offset Data

Continuously after setting of Z-axis offset data, set the X-axis offset data as follows.

<2> Cut surface B of the following drawing in manual mode with a actual tool.
<3> Release the tool in Z-axis direction only, without moving X-axis.
<4> Measure the diameter α of surface B. Set this value as the measured value for X-axis in the desired
offset No.
(TOOL OFFSET)
<GEOMETRY OFFSET>
←
<<X-AXIS>>
↓
<<Offset number for the used tool>>
[MEASUR]
α INPUT (X WORK COORD.TARGET)
[INPUT]
(GEOMTERY OFFSET)
Repeat the above procedure of Z-axis and X-axis offset data measurement operations for necessary tools.
NOTE
1 Always measure the axis of diameter specification in terms of diameter value.
2 When the measured value is input as the geometry offset value by soft key
[MEASUR], the corresponding wear offset value is set 0.
3 Wear offset data is used for offsetting the error measured on the machined
product or worn down amount of a tool.
- 611 -
PART PROGRAMS FOR
B.2 SETTING OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM SHIFT

DATA
After setting the geometry offset data for necessary tools, set the workpiece origin on the actual
workpiece used for machining.
On the lathe, the rotating center line of a workpiece is usually set to workpiece origin of X-axis. So, the
workpiece origin of X-axis need not be set again for new workpiece.
For Z-axis workpiece origin,, you must set again for new workpiece when you change to new one.
In this section, operations for setting the workpiece end surface to the workpiece origin are described.
<1> Set the actually machined workpiece on a chuck of lathe. After then, for safety, take measure to keep
fully safety such as closing the machine door.
<2> Execute the machine reference position return of X-and Z-axis.
<3> Output T-code in MDI mode, and select the tool for measuring.
<5> Cut surface A of the following drawing in manual mode with a actual tool.
Chuck +X
Surface A
+Z
Workpiece origin
<6> Release the tool in X-axis direction only, without moving Z-axis.
<8> Define the end surface amount β.
Operate as follows on the MANUAL GUIDE i screen.
[WK SET]
(WORK CORRDINATE SYSTEM)
<WORKPIECE ORIGIN>
(TAB <--> will be displayed on the right upper part of the window)
→
<WORKPIECE SHIFT>
[CHCURS]
→
<<Z>>
[MEASUR]
β INPUT (WORK COORD.TARGET)
[INPUT]
(WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM)
As the result of the above operations, confirm that the absolute coordinate of the Z-axis is changed to the
value of entered β value.
- 612 -
PART PROGRAMS FOR
CALCULATE OFFSET (MEASURE)
ABSOLUTE WORK COORD.
CURRENT CURRENT TARGET RESULT
Z -1148.920 －Z 2.000 +Z = Z -1150.920
B.3 PREPARING OF THE FIXED FORM SENTENCE MENU

As to the fixed form sentence, machine tool builder usually sets the suitable menu for specified respective
machine. But, you can enter his own menu on the MANUAL GUIDE i screen by yourself.
B.3.1 Entering the Fixed Form Sentence for Turning Machining

Enter the fixed form sentence menu which will be called by the soft key soft key [FIXFRM] in the soft
key group for turning machining.
[SETTING]
(SETTING)
<BASIC>
↓
<<2.REGISTER FIXED FORM SENTENCE FOR TURNING>>
[SELECT]
(REGISTER FIXED FORM SENTENCE FOR TURNING)
<FORM1>
[NEW]
<SENTENCE NAME : >
START PROCEDURE INPUT
G28 U0 W0 ; T? ; G99 G96 S? ; M03 ; G00 X120. Z20. ;
[INSERT]
[CLOSE]
- 613 -
PART PROGRAMS FOR
B.3.2 Entering of the Fixed Form Sentence for Milling Machining

Enter the fixed form sentence menu which will be called by the soft key [FIXFRM] in the soft key group
for milling machining.
Enter data for the program for milling starting procedure and program end procedure.
[SETTING]
(SETTING)
<BASIC>
↓
<<1.REGISTER FIXED FORM SENTENCE FOR MILLING>>
[SELECT]
(REGISTER FIXED FORM SENTENCE FOR MILLING)
<FORM1>
[NEW]
<SENTENCE NAME : >
C-AXIS MILLING START INPUT
M21. ; T? ; G98 G97 ; M03 S? ; G00 X120. Z20. ;
[INSERT]
→
<FORM5>
[NEW]
<SENTENCE NAME : >
PROGRAM END INPUT
M05. ; G00 X200. ; G28 U0 W0 ; M02 ;
[INSERT]
[CLOSE]
B.4 SETTING OF TOOL DATA

Set the necessary tool data. These tool data are used for displaying tool form of animation and calculation
of cutting angle in the machining cycle.
T0101 : General purpose roughing tool

T0202 : General purpose finishing tool
T0303 : Drilling tool
Display “TOOL OFFSET” window by soft key [T-OFS]
GEOMETRY OFFSET
NO. X-AXIS Z-AXIS RADIUS VIRT.TIP
001 -200.000 -300.000 0.800 3
002 -210.000 -310.000 0.400 3
003 -220.000 -330.000 3.000 0
- 614 -
PART PROGRAMS FOR
NOTE
1 The above offset data are just an example, and they cannot be used for actual
machining.
2 The above offset number 003 is used for drilling tool, and if you use it for
animation, you must set the radius amount of the drill to radius offset data.
Display “TOOL DATA” tab by pressing cursor key <→>

TOOL DATA
NO. TOOL SET CUT AN NOS AN
001 GENERAL 1 90.0 80.0
002 GENERAL 1 90.0 80.0
003 DRILL 2 140.0
TOOL OFFSET TAB ← →

GEOMETRY OFFSET WEAR OFFSET TOOL DATA
NO. TOOL SET CUT AN NOS AN

001 GENERAL 1 90.0 80.0
002 GENERAL 1 90.0 60.0
003 DRILL 2 140.0
004
005
006
007
SELECT SOFT KEY.
B.5 CREATING OF PART PROGRAM

In the MANUAL GUIDE i , background editing can be used, but in this section, part program creating
operations are described by using foreground editing.
B.5.1 Creating New Part Program

Create a new part program of O1234.
1. In case of creating a new part program directly

[NEWPRG]
2. In case of creating a new part program on the program list window

[O-LIST]
(OPEN PROGRAM)
[NEW]
Select the newly entered program by ↓
[OPEN]
- 615 -
PART PROGRAMS FOR
B.5.2 Operations of “START” Menu

By pressing soft key [START] in the soft key menu for turning machining, the window “INSERT
STARTING COMMAND FOR TURNING” with the following tabs is displayed.
<START> : Fixed form sentence menu used for the top of part program or each machining process.
<BLANK> : Blank form menu, which is necessary for animation.
B.5.2.1 Entering blank form data

By selecting a tab <BLANK> by cursor key, blank form menu is displayed.
(INSERT STARTING COMMAND FOR TURNING)
<BLANK>
↓
<<2.CYLINDER BLANK FIGURE>>
[SELECT]
Enter blank form data as a round bar.
(CYLINDER BLANK)
100 INPUT (DIAMETER)
80 INPUT (LENGTH)
0 INPUT (WORK ORIGIN)
[INSERT]
CYLINDER BLANK － INSERT
W ORK
DIAMETER D= 100.
LENGTH L= 80.
WORK ORIGIN Z K=
KEY IN NUM ERALS. (M M , INCH)
B.5.3 Entering Tool Changing and Spindle Rotating Blocks for

Turning Machining
B.5.3.1 Entering in ISO-code form directly
It is difficult to define the action of tool changing, spindle rotation, approaching and releasing generally
because there are many difference depending on machine configuration. So, using ISO-code form
program can realize more flexible and safety part program.
G28 U0 W0 ; INSERT (Reference position return)

T0101 ; INSERT (Tool change)
G99 G96 S150 ; INSERT (Constant surface speed control, mm/rev mode)
M03 ; INSERT (Spindle rotation)
G00 X120. Z20. ; INSERT (Approaching)
- 616 -
PART PROGRAMS FOR
B.5.3.2 Entering by fixed form sentence menu

(Soft-key group for Turning cycle menu)
[START]
(Insert Starting Command For Turning)
<START>
↓
<<1.START PROCEDURE>>
[INSERT]
NOTE
<ALTER> key.
B.5.4 Entering Outer Roughing Process

B.5.4.1 Entering outer roughing cycle block
Enter the 1st process : outer roughing by a general purpose roughing tool (T0101).

[CYCLE]
→
<TURNING>
↓
<<1.TURNING(OUTER ROUGH)>>
[SELECT]
(TURNING(OUTER ROUGH) - INSERT)
<CUT COND.>
[-Z] (CUTTING DIRECTION)
2 INPUT (CUT DEPTH)
INPUT (RATE OF CUT DEPTH %)
.5 INPUT (X-AXIS FINISH AMT.)
.5 INPUT (Z-AXIS FINISH AMT.)
.3 INPUT (CUT DIRC. FEEDRATE)
.5 INPUT (CUT DEPTH FEEDRATE)
.5 INPUT (CUT RISE FEEDRATE)
[INSERT]
- 617 -
PART PROGRAMS FOR
TURNING(OUTER RO UGH) － INSERT TAB← →
CUT COND. DETAIL

CUTTING DIRECTION P= -Z
CUT DEPTH Q= 2.
RATE OF CUT DEPTH ％ H= 100.
X-AXIS FINISH AMT. C= 0.5
Z-AXIS FINISH AMT. D= 0.5 ＊
CUT DIRC. FEEDRATE F= 0.3 ＊
CUT DEPTH FEEDRATE E= 0.5
CUT RISE FEEDRATE V= 0.5 ＊
SELECT SOFT KEY.
NOTE
B.5.4.2 Entering figure for outer roughing

By inserting the outer roughing machining cycle block, the window of free form entering is displayed, so
enter the final figure of machining.
- 618 -
PART PROGRAMS FOR
(ZX PLANE TURNING FIGURE - INSERT)
31 INPUT (START POINT DX)
0 INPUT (START POINT Z)
[OK]
[LINE]
(LINE - INSERT)
35 INPUT (END POINT DX)
INPUT (END POINT Z)
45 INPUT (ANGLE)
[OK]
[LINE]
(LINE - INSERT)
[OK]
[CR]
(CORNER R - INSERT)
3 INPUT (CORNER RADIUS)
[OK]
[LINE]
(LINE - INSERT)
-30 INPUT (END POINT Z)
60 INPUT (ANGLE)
[OK]
[LINE]
(LINE - INSERT)
[OK]
[CR]
(CORNER R - INSERT)
3 INPUT (CORNER RADIUS)
[OK]
[LINE]
(LINE - INSERT)
-50 INPUT (END POINT Z)
80 INPUT (ANGLE)
[OK]
After entering all the part figures for machining target, enter blank figure. When you use a preformed
workpiece such like an cast iron, the most suitable cutting path can be made by entering the blank figure
of the preformed workpiece.
In this programming example, round bar workpiece is used. So, enter the blank figure as follows.

[LINE]
(LINE - INSERT)
[RIGHT] (LINE DIRECTION)
0 INPUT (END POINT Z)
→
<ATTRIBUTE>
[BLANK] (ELEMENT TYPE)
[OK]
[LINE]
(LINE - INSERT)
[DOWN] (LINE DIRECTION)
[OK]
- 619 -
PART PROGRAMS FOR
Part figures are displayed in blue line, blank figures are displayed in green line, and the currently selected
figure is displayed in yellow line.
Check the entered part figures and blank figures are correct by comparing with the blue print, then
register them as figure blocks into CNC memory finally.
Figure blocks can be registered into the current part program directly, and also can be registered as
another sub program.
Registered figure blocks can be used also for finishing, so in this example, register them as a sub
program.

[CREATE]
↓
<CREATE AS SUB PROGRAM>
8100 INPUT (SUBPRO NO.)
OUTER TURNING (FIGURE NAME)
[OK]

SUBPRO NO. : 8100
FIGURE NAME: OUTER TURNING
NOTE
Registered sub program can be displayed in a figure menu tab,
“SUBPROGRAM”.
In this case, set the parameters No14720 to 14723 in advance.
For this example, set those parameters as follow.
- 620 -
PART PROGRAMS FOR
B.5.5 Entering Tool Changing and Spindle Rotation Blocks for

Outer Finishing in ISO-code Form
Before starting the 2nd process of outer finishing, change tool to the finishing tool (T0202), spindle
rotation, and other necessary blocks in ISO-code form with G-code and so on.
G99 G96 S300 ; INSERT (Constant surface speed control, mm/rev mode)
M03 ; INSERT (Spindle rotation)
Otherwise, you can enter them from the fixed form sentence menu.
[START]
(Insert Starting Command For Turning)
<START>
↓
<<1.START PROCEDURE>>
[INSERT]
NOTE
B.5.6 Entering Outer Finishing Machining Cycle Process
B.5.6.1 Entering figure for outer finishing cycle block

Enter the 2nd process : outer finishing by a general purpose finishing tool (T0202).
[CYCLE]
(Insert Turning Cycle)
→
<TURNING>
↓
↓
<<7.TURNING(OUTER FINISH)>>
[SELECT]
(TURNING(OUTER FINISH) - INSERT)
<CUT COND.>
[-Z] (CUTTING DIRECTION)
.1 INPUT (FEEDRATE)
[INSERT]
- 621 -
PART PROGRAMS FOR
TURNING(OUTER FINISH) － INSERT
CUT COND.
CUTTING DIRECTION P= -Z
FEED RATE F= 0.1
X-AXIS CLEARANCE L= 0.
Z-AXIS CLEARANCE M= 2.
APROCH MOTION Z= Z->X M OV
CUT DEPTH DIRECTION S= -X
POCKET CUTTING X= CUTTING
OVERHANG CUTTING Y= CUTTING
KEY IN NUM ERALS. (M M /M IN, MM /REV, INCH/M IN, INCH/REV)
NOTE
B.5.6.2 Entering figure for outer finishing

By inserting the outer finishing machining cycle block, the window for free form entering is displayed, so
enter the final figure of machining. But, the former registered figure blocks for roughing can be used, so
press soft key [CANCEL] and go back to the turning figure menu window, then select from the sub
program menu.

[CANCEL]
(INSERT TURNING FIGURE)
→
<SUBPROGRAM>
↓
<<08100: OUTER TURNING>>
[SELECT]
INSERT TURNING FIGURE
TURNING FI SUBPROGRAM
O8000:
O8001:
O8002:
O8100: OUTER TURNING
O8400: OUTER TURNING
SELECT CALLING SUB PROGRAM AND PUSH [SELECT].
- 622 -
PART PROGRAMS FOR
B.5.6.3 Entering releasing motion blocks in ISO-code form

After outer finishing, return the tool to safety area before the next C-axis drilling process.
Enter these motion blocks in form of ISO-code with such as G-code.
G00 X200. ; INSERT (Releasing motion)
M05 ; INSERT (Spindle stop)
B.5.7 Entering Tool Changing and Spindle Rotating Blocks for

C-axis Drilling
Enter blocks of tool changing, C-axis mode changing spindle rotation approaching and releasing for
C-axis drilling. You can enter these blocks using ISO-code form.
M21 ; INSERT (Change to C-axis mode)
G98 G97 ; INSERT (mm/min mode)

[START]
<START>
↓
<<2.C-AXIS MILLING START>>
[INSERT]
NOTE
- 623 -
PART PROGRAMS FOR
B.5.8 Entering C-axis Drilling Process
B.5.8.1 Entering C-axis drilling cycle block

Enter the 3rd process : C-axis end face drilling by the drilling tool (T0303).

[CYCLE]
(Insert Milling Cycle)
<HOLE MACH.>
↓
<<2.DRILLING>>
[SELECT]
(DRILLING - INSERT)
<CUT COND.>
5 INPUT (PECKING CUT DEPTH)
INPUT (REF.PT.MODE)
10 INPUT (I POINT)
-20 INPUT (CUT DEPTH)
2 INPUT (GO PAST AMOUNT)
2 INPUT (CLEARANCE)
100 INPUT (FEEDRATE)
.5 INPUT (DWELL TIME)
[INSERT]
NOTE
In the machining cycle data menu window, all data excepting cutting condition
DRILLING － INSERT
CUT COND.
PECKING CUT DEPTH Q= 5. ＊
REF. PT. MODE I= INIT.POS-1
I POINT J= 10.
CUT DEPTH L= -20.
GO PAST AMOUNT K= 2. ＊
CLEARANCE C= 2.
FEED RATE F= 100.
DWELL TIME P= 0.5 ＊
APROCH MOTION Z= X->Z M OV
SELECT SOFT KEY.
- 624 -
PART PROGRAMS FOR
B.5.8.2 Entering hole position block

By inserting the drilling cycle block, the window of hole position menu is displayed, so select the “Arc
point” item.
<HOLE POSI.>
↓
↓
<<17.C-AXIS HOLE ON FACE (ARC POINTS)>>
[SELECT]
(XC-C AXIS HOLE (ARC POINTS) - INSERT)
<POS./SIZE>
11 INPUT (X AXIS POS.(RAD.))
0 INPUT (START ANGLE)
→
<REPEAT>
90 INPUT (PITCH ANGLE)
4 INPUT (NUMBER OF HOLE)
[INSERT]
XC-C AXIS HOLE (ARC POINT) － INSERT CHAR← →
POS./SIZE REPEAT
PITH ANGLE C= 90. ＊
NUMBER OF HOLE M= ＊
KEY IN NUM ERALS.
B.5.9 Operations in the “END” Menu

All necessary machining program have been entered, so enter end procedure.
Enter blocks for spindle stop, releasing and end M-code in ISO-code form with G-code and son on.
M05 ; INSERT (Spindle stop)

G00 X200. ; INSERT (Releasing motion)
M02 ; INSERT (End M-code)
- 625 -
PART PROGRAMS FOR


[END]
<END>
↓
<<1.PROGRAM END>>
[INSERT]
NOTE
B.6 CHECKING OF THE PART PROGRAM

You can check the entered part program by animation.
B.6.1 Checking by Animation

Select MEM mode by using a mode-selecting switch on a machine-operating panel
[SIMLAT]
(SIMULATE - ANIMATE)
[REWIND]
[START]
NOTE
After checking by animation, in order to do other operation, you must close the
animation window by pressing soft key [GRPOFF] always.
SIMULATE-ANIMATE
加工シミュレーション(アニメ)
- 626 -
B-63874EN/11 APPENDIX C.ALARMS
C ALARMS
If the input program or one or more parameter settings are not correct, the following P/S alarms are
raised.
When an alarm other than the following P/S alarms is raised, refer to the relevant NC operator's manual.
NOTE
In Series 0i-F/0i -D/30i/31i/32i, the alarm is not P/S, but MC.
Alarm
Series Series
Description
0i-C/ 0i-F/0i-D/
16i/18i/21i 30i/31i /32i
There is no area that can be machined. The tool is too large for the
Cause
3003 3503 specified machining area.
Action Modify the machining program to use a smaller tool.
Cause The number of cuts has exceeded the limit.
3004 3504 Modify the machining program to reduce the number of cuts by, for
Action
example, dividing the machining profile.
Cause The machining start point is invalid.
3005 3505 Either change the machining start point to a normal one or modify the
Action
machining program to automatically decide the point.
Cause The machining area is invalid.
3006 3506 Modify the machining program to specify a correct machining area, such as
Action
a part figure and a blank figure in a machining profile.
Cause The cutting conditions are invalid.
3007 3507 Modify the machining program to specify normal cutting conditions such as
Action
the feedrate.
Cause Finishing is not possible under the specified conditions.
3008 3508
Action Review the finishing program.
An interference occurred. For example, the tool path may interfere with the
Cause
opposite machining area.
3009 3509
For example, the cutter radius may be too large for the machining area.
Action
Modify the machining program.
No machining cycle is found. No machining type block is found; only a
Cause
figure block is specified.
3010 3510
Modify the machining program by, for example, adding the necessary
Action
machining type block.
Cause No machining cycle is found. An unavailable machining cycle is specified.
3011 3511
Action Necessary options may not be added. Contact the machine tool builder.
G codes that cannot be combined together. A figure block not available to
Cause
the machining type block is specified.
3012 3512
Modify the machining program to specify a correct combination of
Action
machining type block and figure block.
Cause The arbitrary figure is invalid.
3013 3513
Action Modify the machining program to specify a correct arbitrary figure.
Cause The figure data is invalid.
3014 3514
Action Modify the machining program to specify correct figure data.
Cause The tool offset cannot be read correctly.
Necessary options, such as the number of offset sets, may not be set.
3015 3515
Action Modify the machining program by, for example, changing the offset number
to an available one.
- 627 -
C.ALARMS APPENDIX B-63874EN/11
Alarm
Series Series
Description
0i-C/ 0i-F/0i-D/
16i/18i/21i 30i/31i /32i
With a cycle machining command or other 4-digit G commands, necessary
Cause
arguments are not entered.
3016 3516
Modify the machining program by, for example, adding necessary
Action
arguments.
Cause The parameter setting is invalid.
3025 3525
Action Check the parameter setting.
Cause Spiral plunge of pocket machining cannot be used on ZC, XC or XA plane.
3029 3529
Action Use plunge in line on ZC, XC or XA plane.
Cause The machining type specification is invalid.
3030 3530
Action Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate machining type.
Cause The return mode is invalid.
3031 3531
Action Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate return mode.
Cause The I point coordinate specification is invalid.
3032 3532
Action Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate I point coordinates.
Cause The dwell time specification is invalid.
3033 3533 For example, a negative value may be entered as the dwell time. Modify the
Action
machining program to specify an appropriate dwell time.
Cause The overrun specification is invalid.
3034 3534 For example, a negative value may be entered as the overrun. Modify the
Action
machining program to specify an appropriate overrun.
Cause The thread lead specification is invalid.
3035 3535 For example, a negative value may be entered as the thread lead. Modify
Action
the machining program to specify an appropriate thread lead.
Cause The shift specification is invalid.
3036 3536 For example, a negative value may be entered as the shift. Modify the
Action
machining program to specify an appropriate shift.
Cause The cutting method specification is invalid.
3037 3537 A value not specifiable as threading or other cutting methods is entered.
Action
Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate cutting method.
Cause The cutting direction specification is invalid.
3038 3538 A value not specifiable as turning or other cutting directions is entered.
Action
Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate cutting direction.
Cause The cut direction specification is invalid.
3039 3539 A value not specifiable as turning or other cut directions is entered. Modify
Action
the machining program to specify an appropriate cut direction.
Cause The movement method specification is invalid.
3040 3540 A value not specifiable as facing or other movement methods is entered.
Action
Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate movement method.
Cause The chamfer amount specification is invalid.
A value not specifiable as chamfering or other chamfer amounts is entered,
3041 3541
Action such as a negative value. Modify the machining program to specify an
appropriate chamfer amount.
Cause The ejection amount specification is invalid.
A value not specifiable as chamfering or other face ejection amounts is
3042 3542
Action entered, such as a negative value. Modify the machining program to specify
an appropriate ejection amount.
Cause The surplus thickness specification is invalid.
A value not specifiable as pocketing or other surplus thicknesses is entered,
3043 3543
Action such as a negative value. Modify the machining program to specify an
appropriate surplus thickness.
- 628 -
Alarm
Series Series
Description
0i-C/ 0i-F/0i-D/
16i/18i/21i 30i/31i /32i
Cause The cutter radius is invalid.
A value not specifiable as a cutter radius is entered, such as a negative
3044 3544
Action value. Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate cutter
radius.
Cause The depth of cut is invalid.
3045 3545 A value not specifiable as a depth of cut is entered, such as a negative
Action
value. Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate depth of cut.
Cause The cutting angle is invalid.
3046 3546 A value not specifiable as a cutting angle is entered. Modify the machining
Action
program to specify an appropriate cutting angle.
Cause The cut angle is invalid.
3047 3547 A value not specifiable as pocketing or other cut angles is entered. Modify
Action
the machining program to specify an appropriate cut angle.
Cause The clearance is invalid.
3048 3548 A value not specifiable as a clearance is entered, such as a negative value.
Action
Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate clearance.
Cause The finishing allowance is invalid.
A value not specifiable as a finishing allowance is entered, such as a
3049 3549
Action negative value. Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate
finishing allowance.
Cause The feedrate is invalid.
3050 3550 A value not specifiable as a feedrate is entered, such as zero. Modify the
Action
machining program to specify an appropriate feedrate.
Cause The number of finishing operations is invalid.
A value not specifiable as the number of threading or other finishing
3051 3551
Action operations is entered, such as 0. Modify the machining program to specify
an appropriate number of finishing operations.
Cause The approach specification is invalid.
3052 3552 A value not specifiable as contouring or other approaches is entered.
Action
Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate approach.
Cause The escape specification is invalid.
3053 3553 A value not specifiable as contouring or other escapes is entered. Modify
Action
the machining program to specify an appropriate escape.
Cause The compensation number is invalid.
A value not specifiable as contour finishing or other compensation numbers
3054 3554
Action is entered. Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate
compensation number.
Cause The radius of the tool nose is invalid.
3055 3555 A value not specifiable as turning or other tool nose radii is entered. Modify
Action
the machining program to specify an appropriate radius of the tool nose.
Cause The cutting edge angle/tool angle is invalid.
A value not specifiable as turning or other cutting edge angles or tool
3056 3556
Action angles is entered. Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate
value.
Cause The virtual tool tip position is invalid.
A value not specifiable as turning or other virtual tool tip positions is
3057 3557
Action entered. Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate virtual tool
tip position.
Cause The depth-of-cut change ratio is invalid.
3058 3558 A value not specifiable as turning or other depth-of-cut change ratios is
Action
entered. Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate value.
- 629 -
Alarm
Series Series
Description
0i-C/ 0i-F/0i-D/
16i/18i/21i 30i/31i /32i
Cause The return clearance is invalid.
3059 3559 A value not specifiable as turning or other return clearances is entered.
Action
Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate value.
Cause The tool width is invalid.
3060 3560 A value not specifiable as turning and grooving or other tool widths is
Action
Cause The pecking is invalid.
3061 3561 A value not specifiable as turning and grooving or other peckings is
Action
Cause The first feed override is invalid.
3062 3562 A value not specifiable as turning or other first feed overrides is entered.
Action
Cause The spindle speed is invalid.
3063 3563 A value not specifiable as the spindle speed, for example 0, is entered.
Action
Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate spindle speed.
Cause Tool data aren’t enough to execute cycle.
3064 3564
Action Set tool data in offset window or tool condition in machining blocks.
Cause Tool type doesn’t fit the cycle type.
3065 3565
Action Modify tool data in offset window or the cycle type in machining program.
Cause Program coordinate system changing function is invalid.
3066 3566 Necessary options or parameters concerning with program coordinate
Action
system changing function may not be set. Confirm these setting.
Cause Modal can’t be sheltered and restored.
3070 3570
Action Command G00, G01, G02 or G03 before the cycle is executed.
3071 3571
Action Command G40 before the cycle is executed.
3072 3572
Action Command G80 before the cycle is executed.
In reverse tapping cycle, SPINDLE Q is not specified in case of using plural
Cause
3073 3573 spindles.
Action Specify the entry data item SPINDLE Q.
In reverse tapping cycle, parameters for M code to be specified before
Cause
reverse tapping are not set.
3074 3574
Set the parameters No.27197, 27199, 27201 and 27209 for M code to be
Action
specified before reverse tapping.
Cause The figure type is invalid.
3075 3575 A type not specifiable as the figure type of a figure block is selected. Modify
Action
the machining program to specify an appropriate type.
Cause The reference position is invalid.
3076 3576 A value not specifiable as the reference position of a figure block is entered.
Action
Cause The height/depth is invalid.
3077 3577 A value not specifiable as the height/depth of a figure block is entered.
Action
Cause The figure length is invalid.
3078 3578 A value not specifiable as the length of a figure block is entered. Modify the
Action
machining program to specify an appropriate value.
Cause The corner rounding specification is invalid.
3079 3579 A value not specifiable as the corner rounding of a figure block is entered.
Action
- 630 -
Alarm
Series Series
Description
0i-C/ 0i-F/0i-D/
16i/18i/21i 30i/31i /32i
Cause The figure angle specification is invalid.
3080 3580 A value not specifiable as the angle of a figure block is entered. Modify the
Action
machining program to specify an appropriate value.
Cause The groove width specification is invalid.
3081 3581 A value not specifiable as the groove width of a figure block is entered.
Action
Cause The figure radius specification is invalid.
3082 3582 A value not specifiable as the arc radius of a figure block is entered. Modify
Action
the machining program to specify an appropriate value.
Cause The center-to-center distance specification is invalid.
A value not specifiable as the center-to-center distance of track or other
3083 3583
Action figures is entered. Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate
value.
Cause The pitch specification is invalid.
3084 3584 A value not specifiable as the pitch angle of a figure block is entered.
Action
Cause The number of holes/grooves specification is invalid.
3085 3585 A value not specifiable as the number of holes or grooves in a figure block
Action
is entered. Modify the machining program to specify an appropriate value.
Cause The coordinate specification is invalid.
3086 3586 A value not specifiable as a coordinate of a figure block is entered. Modify
Action
the machining program to specify an appropriate value.
Cause The groove depth specification is invalid.
3087 3587 A value not specifiable as the groove depth of a figure block is entered.
Action
Cause In selecting a range of arbitrary figures, the selected range is wrong.
Select a correct range. Concerning the details, refer “Settings that disable
3088 3588
Action machining” in chapter “Machining of a Divided Area” of Selecting a Range
of Arbitrary Figures.
Cause The groove bottom specification is invalid.
3089 3589 A value not specifiable as the groove bottom of a figure block for grooving is
Action
Cause The thread/hole diameter specification is invalid.
3090 3590 A value not specifiable as a thread or hole diameter in a figure block is
Action
Cause The number-of-threads specification is invalid.
A value not specifiable as the number of threads in a figure block to be
3091 3591
Action threaded is entered. Modify the machining program to specify an
appropriate value.
Cause An arbitrary figure is not closed.
An arbitrary figure entered for facing, pocketing, or turning is not closed.
3092 3592
Action Modify the machining program to specify a closed figure that uses the same
point both as the start and end points.
Cause All figure elements of an arbitrary figure are specified as parts.
All figure elements of an arbitrary figure entered for turning are specified as
3093 3593
Action "parts." Modify the machining program to specify the figure elements
corresponding to actual blanks as "blanks."
Cause The end face specification is invalid.
3094 3594 A value not specifiable as the end face of the cycle machining is entered.
Action
- 631 -
Alarm
Series Series
Description
0i-C/ 0i-F/0i-D/
16i/18i/21i 30i/31i /32i
Cause The arbitrary figure group specification is not correct.
3095 3595 In the group specification used in, for example, pocketing with islands,
Action
either the start or end block is not entered. Enter an appropriate block.
Cause The arbitrary figure group specification is not correct.
3098 3598 In the group specification used in, for example, pocketing with islands,
Action
either the start or end block is not entered. Enter an appropriate block.
NOTE
Alarm numbers 3503 through 3598 for the Series 30i/31i/32i are changed to
0503 through 0598 when bit 1 (MCA) of parameter No. 6008 is 1.
- 632 -
B-63874EN/11 APPENDIX D.MACHINING CYCLE PARAMETERS
D MACHINING CYCLE PARAMETERS

WARNING
Be sure to use the parameters set by the machine tool builder.
If you change the setting of a parameter, the machining program may not work
correctly.
If the machining program does not work correctly, the tool may bump against the
workpiece, and the machine may be forced to perform unnatural machining,
possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine, and even injuries.
Appendix D, “MACHINING CYCLE PARAMETERS”, consists of:
D.1 PARAMETERS FOR MILLING CYCLE........................................................................................633

D.1.1 Parameters Common to Milling Cycles .............................................................................633
D.1.2 Parameters for Facing Cycles.............................................................................................639
D.1.3 Parameters for Contouring Cycles .....................................................................................639
D.1.4 Parameters for Pocketing Cycles........................................................................................641
D.1.5 Parameters for Grooving Cycles ........................................................................................645
D.1.6 Parameters for Hole Machining Cycles..............................................................................647
D.2 PARAMETERS FOR TURNING CYCLE.......................................................................................649
D.2.1 Parameters Common to Turning Cycles ............................................................................649
D.2.2 Parameters for Turning Cycles...........................................................................................651
D.2.3 Parameters for Threading Cycles .......................................................................................654
D.2.4 Parameters for Thread Repairing Cycles............................................................................657
D.2.5 Parameter for Grooving Cycles..........................................................................................658
D.2.6 Parameters for Hole Machining Cycles..............................................................................660
D.1 PARAMETERS FOR MILLING CYCLE
D.1.1 Parameters Common to Milling Cycles

These parameters are for the settings common to Milling cycles.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27000 MC7 MC6 MC5 MC4 MC3 MC2 MC1 MC0
MC0 0 : In ZC or XA plane cycle output, G02/G03 are inverted.

1 : In ZC or XA plane cycle output, G02/G03 are not inverted.
MC1 0 : The hole machining menu has hole machining items for M.
1 : The hole machining menu has hole machining items for T.
MC2 0 : In XC plane cycle output, G12.1/G13.1 are not output.
1 : In XC plane cycle output, G12.1/G13.1 are output.
Remark) Refer to the paragraph of XC plane figure of Facing, Contouring, Pocketing or
Grooving.
MC3 0 : In ZC or XA plane cycle output, G07.1 is not output.
1 : In ZC or XA plane cycle output, G07.1 is output.
Remark) Refer to the paragraph of ZC plane figure of Facing, Contouring, Pocketing or
Grooving.
- 633 -
D.MACHINING CYCLE PARAMETERS APPENDIX B-63874EN/11
MC4 0 : In cycle input screens, the tab of [FACE POSIT] for end face position is not
displayed.
1 : In cycle input screens, the tab of [FACE POSIT] for end face position is displayed.
Remark) Refer to Section 4.7, “REAR END FACING BY MILLING” in the Part IV.
MC5 0 : In the soft-key of [START],[CYCLE],[END] and [FIGURE], the icons for Milling
are displayed.
1 : In the soft-key of [START],[CYCLE],[END] and [FIGURE], the icons for Turning
are displayed.
MC6 0 : In [START] menu screens, the tab of [COORD CONV] is displayed.
1 : In [START] menu screens, the tab of [COORD CONV] is not displayed.
Remark) Refer to Section 4.12, “COORDINATE SYSTEM CONVERSION CYCLE” in
the Part IV.
MC7 0 : The tab of [EMBOSSING] is not displayed on the cycle machining menu.
1 : The tab of [EMBOSSING] is displayed on the cycle machining menu.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27001 P4 P3 P2 P1 P0
P0 0 : The tab of [ROT. AXIS] for rotation axis names are not displayed.
1: The tab of [ROT. AXIS] for rotation axis names are displayed.
P1 0 : Rotation axis name selection soft keys are disabled.
1: Rotation axis name selection soft keys [C] and [A] are used.
(It is necessary to set P0 to 1.)
1 : Rotation axis name selection soft keys [C] and [B] are used.
1 : Rotation axis name selection soft keys [C] and [E] are used.
Remark) Refer to Section 4.12, “COORDINATE SYSTEM CONVERSION CYCLE” in
the Part IV.
P4 0 : When A, B, or E is specified as a rotation axis name in a figure command, A, B, or
E is output on a tool path.
1 : When A, B, or E is specified as a rotation axis name in a figure command, C is
output on a tool path.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27002 ESC MDL RCF FSP YMN FGC TYP TLG
TLG 0 : In Milling cycle menu, the tab of [TOOL COND.] is not displayed.
1: In Milling cycle menu, the tab of [TOOL COND.] is displayed.
TYP 0 : When the data input window for a milling figure block is opened for modification,
the item "FIGURE TYPE" displays all figure types.
1: When the data input window for a milling figure block is opened for modification,
the item "FIGURE TYPE" displays only the figure type that is applicable to the
immediately preceding machining process.
FGC 0 : In [START] menu screens, the tab of [FIG. COPY] is displayed.
1: In [START] menu screens, the tab of [FIG. COPY] is not displayed.
YMN 0 : In the cycle menu screen or cycle input screen, the items related to the Y-axis are not
displayed.
1: In the cycle menu screen or cycle input screen, the items related to the Y-axis are
displayed. (Only for the T series CNC system)
- 634 -
FSP 0 : In the arbitrary figure creation screen, the input item for the finishing feedrate is not
displayed.
1: In the arbitrary figure creation screen, the input item for the finishing feedrate is
displayed.
RCF 0 : In the pocketing, embossing, contouring, or grooving cycle input screen, the depth
of a tool cut and the finishing allowance are shown in conventional order.
1: In the pocketing, embossing, contouring, or grooving cycle input screen, the depth
of a tool cut and the finishing allowance are shown in reverse order.
MDL 0 : In Milling cycles, after completing the whole cycle motions, the modal will be
returned to the state of beginning cycle.
1: In Milling cycles, after completing the whole cycle motions, the modal will not be
ESC 0 : In Milling cycles, after completing the whole cycle motions, the tool will go back to
the point where machining cycle started.
1: In Milling cycles, after completing the whole cycle motions, the tool will not go
back to the point where machining cycle started.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27003 ML3 ML2 ML1 ML0
By setting this parameter, the optimum cycle menus can be displayed on the screen. Please set 1 bit only
according to the machine configuration.
ML0 0 : The machining center machine does not include the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis
1: The machining center machine includes the X-axis, Y-axis, and Z-axis
ML1 0 : The machining center machine does not include the X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis, C-axis,
and B-axis (axis around which the tool swivels).
1: The machining center machine includes the X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis, C-axis, and
B-axis (axis around which the tool swivels).
ML2 0 : The machining center machine does not include the X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis, , and A
-axis (workpiece rotation axis).
1: The machining center machine includes the X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis, , and A -axis
(workpiece rotation axis).
ML3 0 : The machining center machine does not includes the X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis, and
B-axis (workpiece rotation axis).
1: The machining center machine includes the X-axis, Y-axis, Z-axis, and B-axis
(workpiece rotation axis).
NOTE
1 When the parameter No.27003 is set, please be sure to push [F]
key on NOW LOADING screen after Power ON. The necessary
parameters are set automatically. (When the necessary parameters
are set, the message of “NOW SETTING PARAMETERS” is
displayed on the left side of NOW LOADING screen.)
2 When bit 2 (ML2) of the parameter No.27003 is set to 1, please be
sure to set bit0 of the parameter No.27003 to 1, bit0 of the
parameter No.27001 to 0 and bit3 of the parameter No.27001 to 0.
3 In case of machines other than vertical machining center, please
set bit 2 of the parameter No.27003 to 0.
- 635 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27004 MM2 MM1 MM0
If the machine configuration does not meet the parameter No.27003 or No.27103, this parameter is used
to display the optimum menu on the screen.
MM0 0 : Hole machining, facing, contouring, pocketing, grooving, and XY plane figures are
not displayed.
1: Hole machining, facing, contouring, pocketing, grooving, and XY plane figures are
displayed.
MM1 0 : Hole machining, facing, contouring, pocketing, grooving, C-axis grooving, polar
coordinate (XC) surface figures, and cylindrical (ZC) surface figures are not
displayed.
1: Hole machining, facing, contouring, pocketing, grooving, C-axis grooving, polar
coordinate (XC) surface figures, and cylindrical (ZC) surface figures are displayed.
MM2 0 : Cylindrical (XA) surface figures are not displayed.
1: Cylindrical (XA) surface figures are displayed. (Only when MM0 = 1)
MM3 0 : Hole machining, facing, contouring, pocketing, grooving, B-axis grooving, polar
coordinate (XC) surface figures, and cylindrical (YB) surface figures are not
displayed.
1: Hole machining, facing, contouring, pocketing, grooving, B-axis grooving, polar
coordinate (XC) surface figures, and cylindrical (YB) surface figures are displayed.
NOTE
1 When these parameter are all 0, the all milling cycle menu except
the menu of XA plame are displayed on the screen
2 When the parameter No.27003 or No.27103 is set, this parameter
are initialize at the power ON and pushing “F” key.
27005 CLMPM
CLMPM =0 : M code for Main spindle C-axis clamping is not output.

≠0 : M code for Main spindle C-axis clamping.
(Path-specific parameter)
27006 UCLMPM
UCLMPM =0 : M code for Main spindle C-axis unclamping is not output.

≠0 : M code for Main spindle C-axis unclamping.
27007 CFCODM
CFCODM : Feedrate to replace all rapid traverse feedrate during C-axis machining for feed per
minute.
If 0 is set, the feedrate is assumed 2000 (mm/min) or 78.7 (inch/min) .
[Unit of data] For metric input (INI (No.0000#2)=0) : 1(mm/min)
For inch input (INI (No.0000#2)=1) : 0.01(inch/min)
- 636 -
NOTE
In XC plane, Polar coordinate interpolation is used. That is, it is
impossible to use G0 command. Therefore, parameter No.27007
is used instead of rapid traverse.
27008 CFCODR
CFCODR : Feedrate to replace all rapid traverse feedrate during C-axis machining for feed per
revolution.
If 0 is set, the feedrate is assumed 2 (mm/min) or 0.0787 (inch/min).
[Unit of data] For metric input (INI (No.0000#2)=0) : 0.0001(mm/rev)
For inch input (INI (No.0000#2)=1) : 0.000001(inch/rev)
NOTE
In XC plane, Polar coordinate interpolation is used. That is, it is
impossible to use G0 command. Therefore, No.27008 is used
instead of rapid traverse.
27009 CLERCLMP
CLERCLMP : Minimum Clump value of the clearance for Milling cycles.

[Unit of data] For metric input (INI (No.0000#2)=0) : 0.001(mm)
For inch input (INI (No.0000#2)=1) : 0.0001(inch)
27010 APESCLMP
APESCLMP : Minimum Clump value of Radius or Distance of Approach or Escape for Milling cycles.
27011 CLMPMS
CLMPMS =0 : M code for Sub spindle C-axis clamping is not output.

≠0 : M code for Sub spindle C-axis clamping.
Remark) Refer to “III-1.10 C-axis Clamping M code Output”.
27012 UCLMPMS
UCLMPMS =0 : M code for Sub spindle C-axis unclamping is not output.

≠0 : M code for Sub spindle C-axis unclamping.
Remark) refer to “1.10 C-axis Clamping M code Output”.
27013 MSTOP
MSTOP =0 : M05 is output as an M code for stopping the spindle.

≠0 : The number of an M code for stopping the spindle is set.
27014 MORIE
MORIE =0 : M19 is output as an M code for spindle orientation.

- 637 -
≠0 : The number of an M code for spindle orientation is set.

27018 SRCHBLNK
SRCHBLNK Block number when searching a blank form block.

When a standard value is (=0), block number to search is 100.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27095 P6 P4 P2 P1 P0
P0 0 : The surplus thickness for the side and bottom is entered in the cycle input screen.
1: The surplus thickness for the side and bottom is entered in the figure input screen.
P1 0 : Blank figure data is not reused as machining profile data.
1: Blank figure data is reused as machining profile data.
P2 0 : A polygon figure pattern is not displayed in a fixed form figure.
1: A polygon figure pattern is displayed in a fixed form figure.
P4 0 : In the milling cycle figure input screen, a soft key is not used to select a clamping
method. (Conventional specifications)
1: In the milling cycle figure input screen, a soft key is used to select a clamping
method. (New specifications)
P6 0 : At the end of drilling, cutting is performed at a time by the depth of a cut.
(Conventional specifications)
1: At the end of drilling, pecking is performed by the depth of a cut. (New
specifications)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27096 #5 #4 WRA GCP
GCP 0 : The program for cylindrical interpolation on G18 plane is generated in contour
programming window of ZC plane.
1: The program for cylindrical interpolation on G19 plane is generated in contour
programming window of ZC plane.
WRA 0 : In cycle retract motions of milling machining operations, workpiece rotation axis is
returned to the start point of machining cycle.
1: In cycle retract motions of milling machining operations, workpiece rotation axis is
not returned to the start point of machining cycle.
NOTE
Workpiece rotation axis means that the parameter No.1006#0 of
axis is set to 1.
This parameter is available when the parameter No.27002#7 is set
to 0.
#4 0 : Outer thread milling cycle is not available.

1: Outer thread milling cycle is available.
#5 0 : Pocket residual machining cycle is available.
1: Pocket residual machining cycle is not available.
- 638 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27140 TML
TML 0 : Thread milling is disabled.

1: Thread milling is enabled.
27453 ROTEXAXIS
ROTEXAXIS : Axis numbers of rotation axes that are used during machining cycle after the soft-key [A]
or [C] is selected in figure data input screen when the rotation axis names are extended.
The each axis number has 2 digits that are specified by the followings.
“**¥¥” (** : Axis number that is used when [A] is selected, ¥¥ : Axis number that is used
when [C] is selected)
(The example of setting)

The setting to meet following conditions : 603
(1) When soft-key [C] is selected, the 3rd axis should be used.
(2) When soft-key [A] is selected, the 6th axis should be used.
27459 Angle of machining start/escape for outer thread milling cycle
If 0 is set, 90 degrees are set as default value.
27464 Number of overlapped threads in Machining type 3 for outer thread milling cycle
D.1.2 Parameters for Facing Cycles

These parameters are for the settings of facing cycles.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27030 FC1 FC0
FC0 0 : The input data item of [PATH MOVE METHOD] and [PATH MOVE FEED
RATE] are displayed on Facing cycle menu.
1: The input data item of [PATH MOVE METHOD] and [PATH MOVE FEED
RATE] are not displayed on Facing cycle menu.
FC1 0 : all menu is displayed in “CUT SHIFT DIRECTION”.
1: only the perpendicular direction to “CUTTING DIRECTION” is displayed in “CUT
SHIFT DIRECTION”.
D.1.3 Parameters for Contouring Cycles

These parameters are for the settings of contouring cycles.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27040 CN6 CN4 CN3 CN2 CN1 CN0
CN0 0 : During in-feed in Roughing, the tool moves by retracting to the height of the top
workpiece surface plus the clearance.
1: During in-feed in Roughing, the tool moves by retracting to the height of the
machining surface plus the clearance.
- 639 -
CN1 0 : In Roughing, the tool moves at a hollow by retracting to the height of the top
workpiece surface plus the clearance.
1: In Roughing, the tool moves at a hollow by retracting to the height of the machining
surface plus the clearance.
CN2 0 : In Roughing, the tool moves at an opening by retracting to the height of the top
workpiece surface plus the clearance..
1: In Roughing, the tool moves at an opening by retracting to the height of the
CN3 0 : In side finishing, NC does not perform cutter compensation.
1: In side finishing, NC performs cutter compensation.
Remark) Tool path is not calculated with Cutter compensation in inside, but G41 or
G42 is outputted directly.
CN4 0 : The system performs an interference check.
1: The system does not perform an interference check.
CN6 0 : In Roughing, when the cutting start point is equal to the end point, the tool cuts
directly without escape to the radius direction.
1: In Roughing, when the cutting start point is equal to the end point, the tool cuts with
escape to the radius direction.
27045 COFSW
COFSW : Offset method for side finishing and chamfering in contouring.

=0 : Corner cut interpolation.
=1 : Circular interpolation.
=2 : Extended straight line.
0 1 2
27046 CMVFR
CMVFR : Feedrate during movement in the cutter radius direction in contouring.

For feed per minute.
If 0 is set, the feedrate is assumed Rapid traverse feedrate.
Remark) Feedrate during movement in the cutter radius direction is ‘Frm’ as the
following illustration.
- 640 -
27047 CMVFT
CMVFT : Feedrate during movement in the tool axis direction in contouring.

For feed per minute.
Remark) Feedrate during movement in the tool axis direction is ‘Ftm’ as the above
illustration.
27048 CVOVL
CVOVL : Amount of overlapping for an approach/escape during contouring.

CVOVL
27049 CMVFR
CMVFR : Feedrate during movement in the cutter radius direction in contouring for feed per
revolution.
Remark) Refer to parameter No.27046.
27050 CMVFT
CMVFT : Feedrate during movement in the tool axis direction in contouring for feed per revolution.
D.1.4 Parameters for Pocketing Cycles

These parameters are for the settings of pocketing cycles.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27060 PR7 PR6 PR5 PR4 PR3 PR2 PR1 PR0
PR0 0 : Machining starts on the inside during roughing and bottom finishing.
1: Machining starts on the outside during roughing and bottom finishing.
PR1 0 : The top of an island is not machined during roughing and bottom finishing.
1: Machining is performed by controlling the depth of cut during roughing and bottom
finishing.
- 641 -
PR1 = 0 PR1 = 1
PR2 0 : Method of interpolation during roughing and bottom finishing (interpolation of
elements with arcs).
1: Method of interpolation during roughing and bottom finishing (interpolation of
elements by extending them).
PR2 = 0 PR2 = 1
PR3 0 : Method of machining portions left uncut during roughing and bottom finishing (no
machining of portions left uncut).
1: Method of machining portions left uncut during roughing and bottom finishing
(machining of portions left uncut).
UNCUT
PR4 0 : The tool moves by retracting to the height of the top workpiece surface plus the
clearance at an opening during roughing and bottom finishing.
1: The tool moves by retracting to the height of the machining surface plus the
clearance at an opening during roughing and bottom finishing.
PR5 0 : Paths for all material elements are created with an island reference during roughing
and bottom finishing.
1: Paths for all material elements are created with a pocket reference during roughing
and bottom finishing.
PR5 = 0 PR5 = 1
PR6 0 : The tool moves by retracting to the height of the top workpiece surface plus the
clearance during movement in the tool axis direction during roughing and bottom
finishing.
1: The tool moves by retracting to the height of the machining surface plus the
clearance during movement in the tool axis direction during roughing and bottom
finishing.
- 642 -
PR7 0 : The input data item of [START PT.(1st AXIS)] and [START PT.(2nd AXIS)] are
not displayed on the Pocketing cycle menu..
1: The input data item of [START PT.(1st AXIS)] and [START PT.(2nd AXIS)] are
displayed on the Pocketing cycle menu..
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27061 CDR #6 PF5 PF4 PF3 PF2 PF1 PF0
PF0 0 : During in-feed in side finishing and chamfering, the tool moves by retracting to the
height of the top workpiece surface plus the clearance.
1 : During in-feed in side finishing and chamfering, the tool moves by retracting to the
height of the machining surface plus the clearance.
PF1 0 : In side finishing and chamfering, the tool moves at a hollow by retracting to the
1 : In side finishing and chamfering, the tool moves at a hollow by retracting to the
PF2 0 : In side finishing and chamfering, the tool moves at an opening by retracting to the
1 : In side finishing and chamfering, the tool moves at an opening by retracting to the
PF3 0 : In side finishing, NC does not perform cutter compensation.
1 : In side finishing, NC performs cutter compensation.
Remark) Tool path is not calculated with Cutter compensation in inside, but G41 or G42
is outputted directly.
PF4 0 : The system performs an interference check.
1 : The system does not perform an interference check.
PF5 0 : A cutting angle is displayed.
1 : A cutting angle is not displayed.
#6 0 : Island figures inside residual area are invalidation. (Island figures are machined)
1 : Island figures inside residual area are left. Maybe time of tool path creation will be
long.
CDR 0 : When Pocketing (rough) and emboss machining (rough) is executed, if the cutting
condition (SIDE THICKNESS - SIDE FINISH AMOUNT) ≤ CUT DEPTH OF
RADIUS is given, an alarm is generated.
1 : When Pocketing (rough) and emboss machining (rough) is executed, if the cutting
condition (SIDE THICKNESS - SIDE FINISH AMOUNT) ≤ CUT DEPTH OF
RADIUS is given, an alarm isn’t generated.
27065 POFSW
POFSW : Offset method for side finishing and chamfering in pocketing.

= 0 : Corner cut interpolation.
= 1 : Circular interpolation.
= 2 : Extended straight line.
0 1 2
- 643 -
27066 PKTFR
PKTFR : Feedrate during movement in the cutter radius direction in in-feed for feed per minute.
27067 PKTFT
PKTFT : Feedrate during movement in the tool axis direction in in-feed for feed per minute.
illustration.
27068 PKOVL
PKOVL : Amount of overlapping for an approach/escape during side finishing and chamfering.
PKOVL
27069 OPNCR
OPNCR : Clearance for an open portion in pocketing

(When OPNCR = 0)
For metric input (INI (No.0000#2)=0), the clearance for the open portion is assumed
to be 3 mm.
For inch input (INI (No.0000#2)=1), the clearance for the open portion is assumed
to be 0.3 inch.
OPNCR
- 644 -
27070 PKTFR
PKTFR : Feedrate during movement in the cutter radius direction in in-feed for feed per revolution.
27071 PKTFT
PKTFT : Feedrate during movement in the tool axis direction in in-feed for feed per revolution.
D.1.5 Parameters for Grooving Cycles

These parameters are for the settings of grooving cycles.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27080 GR2 GR1 GR0
GR0 0 : During roughing and bottom finishing, in-feed in the cutter radius direction is
performed with a uniform depth of cut.
(A uniform depth is the calculated depth automatically.)
1: During roughing and bottom finishing, in-feed in the cutter radius direction is
performed with [CUT DEPTH OF RADIUS].
GR1 0 : During roughing and bottom finishing, in-feed in the tool axis direction is performed
with a uniform depth of cut.
(A uniform depth is the calculated depth automatically.)
1: During roughing and bottom finishing, in-feed in the tool axis direction is performed
with [CUT DEPTH OF AXIS].
GR2 0 : During roughing and bottom finishing, tool retracts to the top workpiece surface
plus the clearance..
1: During roughing and bottom finishing, the tool retracts to the position of the
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27081 GF4 GF3 GF2 GF1 GF0
GF0 0 : During in-feed in side finishing and chamfering, the tool moves by retracting to the
1: During in-feed in side finishing and chamfering, the tool moves by retracting to the
GF1 0 : In side finishing and chamfering, the tool moves at a hollow by retracting to the
1: In side finishing and chamfering, the tool moves at a hollow by retracting to the
GF2 0 : In side finishing and chamfering, the tool moves at an opening by retracting to the
1: In side finishing and chamfering, the tool moves at an opening by retracting to the
GF3 0 : In side finishing, NC does not perform cutter compensation.
1: In side finishing, NC performs cutter compensation.
- 645 -
Remark) The NC outputs G41/G42 rather than calculating the tool path through internal
cutter compensation. When the finishing count is specified, cutter
compensation is performed with G41/G42 only during the last in-feed.
Otherwise, cutter compensation by the MANUAL GUIDE i is used.
GF4 0 : The system performs an interference check.
1 : The system does not perform an interference check.
27085 GOFSW
GOFSW : Offset method for groove finishing paths.

=0: Corner cut interpolation.
=1: Circular interpolation.
=2: Extended straight line.
0 1 2
27086 GMVFR
GMVFR : Feedrate during movement in the cutter radius direction in grooving for feed per minute.
27087 GMVFT
GMVFT : Feedrate during movement in the tool axis direction in contouring for feed per minute.
illustration.
- 646 -
27088 GVOVL
GVOVL : Amount of overlapping for an approach/escape during side finishing and chamfering.
GVOVL
27089 GMVFR
GMVFR : Feedrate during movement in the cutter radius direction in grooving for feed per
revolution.
27090 GMVFT
GMVFT : Feedrate during movement in the tool axis direction in contouring for feed per revolution.
D.1.6 Parameters for Hole Machining Cycles

These parameters are for the settings of hole machining cycles.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27020 HL7 HL6 HL2 HL1 HL0
HL0 0 : In the drilling input screen, the input item "GO PATH AMOUNT SET" is not
displayed.
1: In the drilling input screen, the input item "GO PATH AMOUNT SET" is displayed.
HL1 0 : An alarm is issued when the tool database function is used and a hole machining
cycle is executed with the chamfering tool and end mill tool.
1: An alarm is not issued when the tool database function is used and a hole machining
HL2 0 : The type of a tool is not checked when the tool database function is used and a hole
machining cycle is executed.
1: The type of a tool is checked when the tool database function is used and a hole
HL7 0 : Before rigid tapping is specified, "M_ S_ ;" or "S_ ;" is specified.
1: Before rigid tapping is specified, "G65 P_ M_ S_ ;" is specified (when bit 0 (G84)
of parameter No. 5200 is 0) or "G65 P_ S_ ;" is specified (when bit 0 (G84) of
parameter No. 5200 is 1).
(The argument of address P is a value set in parameter No.27021.)
- 647 -
27013 MSTOP
FBSTOP M code for stopping the spindle in fine boring

=0 : M05 is output as an M code for stopping the spindle.
This parameter is valid for the following cycle:

• Machining center fine boring (G1005), for which "END FEED RATE" is set
27014 MORIE
FBORIENT M code for spindle orientation in fine boring

=0 :M19 is output as an M code for spindle orientation.

• Machining center fine boring (G1005), for which "END FEED RATE" is set
27021 G65PROGNO
CLERCLMP The number of a P code program to be called by G65 (refer to bit 7 (HL7) of parameter
No. 27020)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27195 PCR TRV WRV
WRV 0 : Disabled counter tapping by work rotation.

1 : Enabled counter tapping by work rotation.
TRV 0 : Disabled counter tapping by rotating tool.
1 : Enabled counter tapping by rotating tool.
PCR On drill cycle, pecking clearance of peck drill and pecking return amount of high-speed
peck drill is specified
0 : In parameter.
1 : In input window.
27451 THRDMOVL
THRDMOVL Over lap amount for thread milling cycle

[Unit of data] 0～99999999
27452 THRDMSCL
THRDMSCL Start clearance for thread milling cycle

[Unit of data] 0～99999999
- 648 -
D.2 PARAMETERS FOR TURNING CYCLE
D.2.1 Parameters Common to Turning Cycles

These parameters are used for settings common to Turning cycles.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27100 WAR BLK TC4 USE ARA TC1 TC0
TC0 0 : (1) For turning (outer surface, inner surface), grooving (outer surface, inner
surface), or threading (outer surface, inner surface), the input item [CUT
DEPTH DIRECTION S] is not displayed.
(2) For conical boring, the input item [CUT DEPTH DIRECTION S] is not
displayed.
1: (1) For turning (outer surface, inner surface), grooving (outer surface, inner
surface), or threading (outer surface, inner surface), the input item [CUT
DEPTH DIRECTION S] is displayed.
(2) For conical boring, the input item [CUT DEPTH DIRECTION S] is displayed.
TC1 0 : The input item of [POCKET CUTTING] and [OVERHANG CUTTING] are not
displayed.
1: The input item of [POCKET CUTTING] and [OVERHANG CUTTING] are
displayed.
ARA 0 : In the turning figure input screen, the soft key [S AREA] is displayed.
1: In the turning figure input screen, the soft key [S AREA] is not displayed.
USE 0 : Blank figure data is not reused as figure data during machining. (In the ZX plane
turning figure input screen, the reuse soft key is not displayed.)
1: Blank figure data is reused as figure data during machining. (In the ZX plane turning
figure input screen, the reuse soft key is displayed.)
TC4 0 : (1) For hole machining, the tab of [FACE POSIT] is not displayed.
(2) For turning (end face) or grooving (end face), the tab of [FACE POSIT] is not
displayed.
(3) For a turning groove figure (end face), the input item [DEPTH DIRECTION P]
is not displayed.
(4) The backward DIN soft keys are not displayed.
1: (1) For hole machining, the tab of [FACE POSIT] is displayed.
(2) For turning (end face) or grooving (end face), the tab of [FACE POSIT] is
displayed.
(3) For a turning groove figure (end face), the input item [DEPTH DIRECTION P]
is displayed.
(4) The backward DIN soft keys are displayed. ([DIN509], [D509-F], [DIN76],
[DIN76I])
BLK 0 : In the turning figure input screen, the soft key [S BLK] is not displayed.
1: In the turning figure input screen, the soft key [S BLK] is displayed.
WAR 0 : In turning or in turning and grooving, an alarm is not displayed when a part element
and blank element overlap each other.
1: In turning or in turning and grooving, an alarm is displayed when a part element and
blank element overlap each other.
- 649 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27101 GC1 GC0
GC0, GC1 The G code system for user macros is specified.

(This parameter is available only for Series 16i/ 18i/21i-TB and Series 0i-TC)
G code system GC1 GC0

A 0 0
B 0 1
C 1 0
C 1 1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27102 ESC MDL MFN GRD LOC TYP TLG
TLG 0 : In Turning cycle menu, the tab of [TOOL COND.] is not displayed.
1: In Turning cycle menu, the tab of [TOOL COND.] is displayed.
TYP 0 : When the data input window for a turning figure block is opened for modification,
the item "FIGURE TYPE" displays all figure types.
1: When the data input window for a turning figure block is opened for modification,
the item "FIGURE TYPE" displays only the figure type that is applicable to the
immediately preceding machining process.
LOC 0 : The turning cycle menu lists "HOLE MACHINING", "TURNING", "GROOVING",
and "THREADING" in this order
1: The turning cycle menu lists "TURNING", "GROOVING", "THREADING", and
"HOLE MACHINING" in this order.
GRD 0 : In the turning figure creation screen, the input item for the grinding allowance is not
displayed.
1: In the turning figure creation screen, the input item for the grinding allowance is
displayed.
MFN 0 : In the turning figure creation screen, the input item for the semifinishing feedrate is
not displayed.
1: In the turning figure creation screen, the input item for the semifinishing feedrate is
displayed.
MDL 0 : In Turning cycles, after completing the whole cycle motions, the modal will be
1: In Turning cycles, after completing the whole cycle motions, the modal will not be
ESC 0 : In Turning cycles, after completing the whole cycle motions, the tool will go back to
the point where machining cycle started.
1: In Turning cycles, after completing the whole cycle motions, the tool will not go
back to the point where machining cycle started.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27103 LT7 LT3 LT2 LT1 LT0
By setting this parameter, the optimum cycle menus can be displayed on the screen. Please set 1 bit only
according to the machine configuration. (Except for LT7)
LT0 0 : The lathe does not include the X-axis and Z-axis.
1: The lathe includes the X-axis and Z-axis.
LT1 0 : The lathe does not include the X-axis, Z-axis, and C-axis.
1: The lathe includes the X-axis, Z-axis, and C-axis.
LT2 0 : The lathe does not include the X-axis, Z-axis, C-axis, and Y-axis.
1: The lathe includes the X-axis, Z-axis, C-axis, and Y-axis.
- 650 -
LT3 0 : The lathe does not include the X-axis, Z-axis, C-axis, Y-axis, and B-axis (axis
around which the tool swivels).
1: The lathe includes the X-axis, Z-axis, C-axis, Y-axis, and B-axis (axis around which
the tool swivels).
LT7 0 : The lathe does not include axes with sub-spindles.
1: The lathe includes axes with sub-spindles.
(This LT7 is used together with LT0 to LT3.)
NOTE
When the parameter No.27103 is set, please sure to push [F] key
on NOW LOADING screen after Power ON. The necessary
parameters are set automatically. (When the necessary parameters
are set, the message of “NOW SETTING PARAMETERS” is
displayed on the left side of NOW LOADING screen.)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27104 POL
POL 0 : Enable polygon turning cycle.

1 : Disable polygon turning cycle.
(This parameter is available only for Series 0i-F/0i-D)
27118 SRCHBLNK
SRCHBLNK: Block number when searching a ZX blank form block.

When a standard value is (=0), block number to search is 100.
D.2.2 Parameters for Turning Cycles

These parameters are for the settings of turning cycles.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27120 CEF G41 ANG OCA EFA EFM CNR BLN
BLN 0 : When the tool advances in the cutting direction, the excessive amount of travel of
the tool is nose radius R if the attribute of the figure across which the tool moves is
the blank element.
1: When the tool advances in the cutting direction, the excessive amount of travel of
the tool is [clearance + nose radius R if the attribute of the figure across which the
tool moves is the blank element (conventional specifications).
CNR 0 : In the turning cycle input screen, the tab of [RESID MACH] is not displayed.
1: In the turning cycle input screen, the tab of [RESID MACH] is displayed.
EFM 0 : For turning (outer surface, inner surface), the tab of [END FACE MC] is not
displayed.
1: For turning (outer surface, inner surface), the tab of [END FACE MC] is displayed.
EFA 0 : In simultaneous end facing of outer roughing or inner roughing, end face part can be
machined with finish amount.
1: In simultaneous end facing of outer roughing or inner roughing, end face part can be
machined without finish amount.
OCA 0 : When an end face is cut up to X0 during end facing, the go-past amount is the tool
nose radius.
1: When an end face is cut up to X0 during end facing, the go-past amount is specified
in accordance with the conventional specifications (clearance + tool-nose diameter).
- 651 -
ANG 0 : Inner surface rough cutting in an oblique cutting direction is disabled.

1: Inner surface rough cutting in an oblique cutting direction is enabled.
G41 0 : In finishing for turning, G41 and G42 are not used. (Conventional specifications)
1: In finishing for turning, G41 and G42 are used.
CEF 0 : When a tool cuts to the center of work in end face semifinishing / finishing cycle,
Go past amount is tool radius. (New specifications)
1: When a tool cuts to the center of work in end face semifinishing / finishing cycle,
Go past amount is clearance + (tool radius * 2). (Conventional specifications)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27121 #7 ZXC IOT RAF
RAF 0 : Turning (roughing and finishing) is available.

1 : Turning (roughing and finishing) is not available.
IOT When the all following conditions are satisfied,
0 : The tool cuts a workpiece to the position that the center of nose R intersects with a
blank element. (Conventional specification)
1 : If the following condition is satisfied, the tool cuts a workpiece along the end of
parts. (New specification. If the following condition is not satisfied, The tool does
the same movement as the movement of IOT=0.)
(Condition)
<1> Finishing turning (except roughing and semifinishing)
<2> The arbitrary figure range selection function is not performed.
<3> Parameter No.27120#0=0
ZXC 0 : The function to remove the following restriction is disabled. (Conventional

specifications)
1 : The function to remove the following restriction is enabled.
(Restriction)
Turning cycle might not be executed if input values of Z-axis and X-axis clearances
are different.
#7 0 : Finish amounts of residual machining cycle are not dispensed with. (conventional
specifications)
1 : Finish amounts of residual machining cycle are dispensed with.
In case of changing the setting of parameter #7, turn on the power again before the
new settings can take effect.
27125 PTANG
PTANG : Cutting edge protection angle.

[Unit of data] 1 deg
PTANG PTANG
27126 DCLMP
DCLMP : clamping value of ‘CUT DEPTH’ in Turning, Turning grooving and Threading
[Unit of data] For metric input (INI (No.0000#2)=0) : 0.001 mm
- 652 -
For inch input (INI (No.0000#2)=1) : 0.0001 inch
When DCLMP = 0, the depth-of-cut clamping value is assumed to be one-tenth of a

specified depth of cut.
27127 CUANG
CUANG Cut rise angle

[Unit of data] 1°
27128 ESCPCLMP
ESCPCLMP : Minimum clump value of ESCAPE AMOUNT for Turning Cycle.

27129 XAXSCLMP
XAXSCLMP : Minimum clump value of X-AXIS CLEARANCE for Turning Cycle.

27130 ZAXSCLMP
ZAXSCLMP : Minimum clump value of Z-AXIS CLEARANCE for Turning Cycle.

27131 CUTDPTHOVR
CUTDPTHOVR Override for the depth of a cut into an end face during simultaneous end facing
[Unit of data] 1％ (Va1id data range: 1 to 200%)
(When 0 is set, it is assumed to be 100%.)
27132 CUTFEEDOVR
CUTFEEDOVR Override for the feedrate in cutting an end face during simultaneous end facing
[Unit of data] 1％ (Va1id data range: 1 to 200%)
(When 0 is set, it is assumed to be 100%.)
27133 G41DST
G41DST Travel distance when startup and cancellation are specified by G41 and G42 in finishing
for turning or finishing for residual machining
[Unit of data] For metric input (INI (No.0000#2)=0) : 0.001 (mm)
For inch input (INI (No.0000#2)=1) : 0.0001 (inch)
27186 DETOUR
DETOUR Amount of back rash removal movement when approaching again after direction of
cutting changes by optimization.
- 653 -
D.2.3 Parameters for Threading Cycles

These parameters are for the settings of threading cycles.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27140 MLT TCD THO
THO 0 : In threading, output is specified by G92.

1: In threading, output is specified by G32.
TCD 0 : "THREADING DIRECTION" is not displayed.
1: "THREADING DIRECTION" is displayed.
MLT 0 : Multi-start threading is performed with the starting position Z shifted.
1: Multi-start threading is performed with the threading starting angle specified.
27145 TDMIN
TDMIN : Minimum depth of cut during threading.

27150 TGNOUT
TGNOUT : Thread height factor for general-purpose threads (for outside diameters). The value 0 is
regards as 0.6495.
[Unit of data] 0.0001
NOTE
Parameter No.27150 is used to calculate [THREAD DEPTH] in
general-purpose threads (for outside diameters).
The formula is as follows.
(Thread Depth for Outside)
= (Parameter No.27150) × (Lead)
27151 TGNIN
TGNIN : Thread height factor for general-purpose threads (for inside diameters). The value 0 is
regards as 0.6495.
NOTE
Parameter No.27151 is used to calculate [THREAD DEPTH] in
general-purpose threads (for inside diameters).
(Thread Depth for Inside)
= (Parameter No.27151) × (Lead)
27152 TMTOUT
TMTOUT : Thread height factor for metric and unified threads (for outside diameters). The value 0 is
regards as 0.6495.
- 654 -
NOTE
1 Parameter No.27152 is used to calculate [THREAD DEPTH] in
metric threads (for outside diameters).
(Thread Depth for Outside) = (Parameter No.27152) × (Lead)
unified threads (for outside diameters).
(Thread Depth for Outside) (mm)
= ((Parameter No.27152) ÷ (Thread Number)) × 25.4
(Thread Depth for Outside) (inch)
= (Parameter No.27152) ÷ (Thread Number)
27153 TMTIN
TMTIN : Thread height factor for metric and unified threads (for inside diameters). The value 0 is
regards as 0.6495.
NOTE
metric threads (for Inside diameters).
(Thread Depth for Inside) = (Parameter No.27153) × (Lead)
unified threads (for Inside diameters).
(Thread Depth for Inside) (mm)
(Thread Depth for Inside) (inch)
27154 TPTOUT
TPTOUT : Thread height factor for PT and PF threads (for outside diameters).
The value 0 is regards as 0.6403.
NOTE
Parameter No.27154 is used to calculate [THREAD DEPTH] in PT
and PF threads (for outside diameters).
(Thread Depth for Outside) (mm)
(Thread Depth for Outside) (inch)
- 655 -
27155 TPTIN
TPTIN : Thread height factor for PT and PF threads (for inside diameters).
The value 0 is regards as 0.6403.
NOTE
Parameter No.27155 is used to calculate [THREAD DEPTH] in PT
and PF threads (for Inside diameters).
(Thread Depth for Inside) (mm)
(Thread Depth for Inside) (inch)
27156 SURFSCLMP
SURFCLMP : Minimum clump value of SURFACE CLEARANCE for Threading Cycle.

NOTE
This parameter is referred at the time of programming of a
threading cycle. It is not referred at the time of executing threading
cycle.
27157 ENTRCLMP
ENTRCLMP : Minimum clump value of ENTRANCE CLEARANCE for Threading Cycle.

NOTE
cycle.
27158 EXITSCLMP
EXITCLMP : Minimum clump value of EXIT CLEARANCE for Threading Cycle.

NOTE
cycle.
- 656 -
D.2.4 Parameters for Thread Repairing Cycles

These parameters are for the settings of thread repairing cycles.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27140 TRP FSP OCN TCD THO
THO 0 : In threading, output is specified by G92.

1: In threading, output is specified by G32.
TCD 0 : "THREADING DIRECTION" is not displayed.
1: "THREADING DIRECTION" is displayed.
OCN 0 : Thread repairing is not automatically canceled when it is started in spindle
orientation mode.
1: Thread repairing is automatically canceled when it is started in spindle orientation
mode.
FSP 0 : The FANUC spindle is used.
1: The FANUC spindle is not used.
TRP 0 : Thread repairing is disabled.
1: Thread repairing is enabled.
14496 SPLANGQ
SPLANGQ Angle of displacement (C) between the zero position after completion of spindle
orientation (P0) and position of detecting the one-rotation position signal (P1)
Set a measured value Q (0 to 359.999) in this parameter. If P0 and P1 are the same
position, set 0 in this parameter.
[Unit of data] 0.001°
[Valid data range] 0 to 359999
[Path attribute] Specific to a path
P0
P1 P0: Zero position after completion of spindle
orientation
P1: Position of detecting the one-rotation position
270 90 signal
CW Qz: P1 angle (absolute angle position of 0 to
359.999, measured from P0 at 0 in a
180 clockwise direction)
Spindle
NOTE
This is a required parameter. To use thread repairing, be sure to
set the parameter.
14847 SPLANGQ
SPLANGQ R signal address of the PMC for use in thread repairing

[Unit of data] Integer
[Path attribute] Common to paths
- 657 -
D.2.5 Parameter for Grooving Cycles

This parameter is for the setting of grooving cycles.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27170 #4 #3 LAY GTY GCW
GCW 0 : For grooving, (rough cutting), the input data item "CUT DEPTH FOR WIDTH" is
not displayed.
In this case, the actual depth of a cut in the width direction Qa is determined as
described below.
(1) The number of cuts in the width direction N is calculated as shown below.
Number of cuts in the width direction N = [groove width/(tool width - tool nose
radius × 2)]
The number of cuts in the width direction N is an integer (decimal places are
rounded up).
(2) The depth of a cut in the width direction Qa is calculated as shown below.
Depth of a cut in the width direction Qa = groove width/number of cuts in the
width direction N
1: For grooving, (rough cutting), the input data item "CUT DEPTH FOR WIDTH" is
displayed.
In this case, the actual depth of a cut in the width direction Qa is determined as
described below.
(1) The number of cuts in the width direction N is calculated as shown below.
Number of cuts in the width direction N = [groove width/(value of the input
item "CUT DEPTH FOR WIDTH")]
The number of cuts in the width direction N is an integer (decimal places are
rounded up).
(2) The depth of a cut in the width direction Qa is calculated as shown below.
Depth of a cut in the width direction Qa = groove width/number of cuts in the
width direction N
GTY 0 : For grooving, roughing methods are not displayed.
1: For grooving, roughing methods are displayed. (Roughing can be performed with
the multifunction tool.)
LAY 0 : For grooving (rough cutting), the method of machining each layer is displayed.
1: For grooving (rough cutting), the method of machining each layer is not displayed.
#3 0 : When tool is likely to interfere for turning grooving cycle, escape amount is adjusted
automatically.
1: When tool is likely to interfere for turning grooving cycle, escape amount is not
adjusted automatically. (Conventional specifications)
#4 0 : In Groove turning cycle, specifying “BOTTOM WIDTH” to bottom type of
trapezoidal groove figure is not available. (conventional specifications)
1 : In Groove turning cycle, specifying “BOTTOM WIDTH” to bottom type of
trapezoidal groove figure is available.
NOTE
Even though you change the settings of parameter No.27170#4, the
alarm PW0000, "POWER MUST BE OFF" is not issued. You must
however turn on the power again before the new settings can take effect.
27175 GDMIN
GDMIN : Minimum depth of cut in grooving (rough cutting).

- 658 -
When GDMIN = 0, the minimum depth of cut is assumed to be one-tenth of a specified

depth of cut.
27176 CLRECLMP
CLRECLMP : Minimum clump value of CLEARANCE for Grooving Cycle.

27177 ESCPCLMP
ESCPCLMP : Minimum clump value of ESCAPE CLEARANCE for Grooving Cycle.

27178 CUTDEPTH
CUTDEPTH Minimum depth of a cut in the depth direction for Grooving (rough cutting) with the
multifunction tool
- 659 -
D.2.6 Parameters for Hole Machining Cycles

These parameters are for the settings of hole machining cycles.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27020 HL7 HL6 HL5 HL4 HL3 HL2 HL1 HL0
HL0 0 : In the drilling input screen, the input item "GO PATH AMOUNT SET" is not
displayed.
1 : In the drilling input screen, the input item "GO PATH AMOUNT SET" is displayed.
HL1 0 : An alarm is issued when the tool database function is used and a hole machining
1 : An alarm is not issued when the tool database function is used and a hole machining
HL2 0 : The type of a tool is not checked when the tool database function is used and a hole
1 : The type of a tool is checked when the tool database function is used and a hole
HL3 0 : During fine boring (G1115) in hole machining by milling for lathes (with the tool
rotated) or during fine boring (G1105) in hole machining by turning for lathes (with
the workpiece rotated), the M code for stopping the spindle is output before spindle
orientation is performed.
1 : During fine boring (G1115) in hole machining by milling for lathes (with the tool
rotated) or during fine boring (G1105) in hole machining by turning for lathes (with
the workpiece rotated), the M code for stopping the spindle is not output.
HL4, HL5 Direction in which the tool retracts during fine boring (G1115) in hole machining by
milling for lathes (with the tool rotated)
HL5 HL4 G17 G18 G19
0 0 +X +Z +Y
0 1 -X -Z -Y
1 0 +Y +X +Z
1 1 -Y -X -Z
HL6 0 : During fine boring (G1105) in hole machining by turning for lathes (with the
workpiece rotated), the tool retracts in the +X direction.
1: During fine boring (G1105) in hole machining by turning for lathes (with the
workpiece rotated), the tool retracts in the -X direction.
HL7 0 : Before rigid tapping is specified, "M_ S_ ;" or "S_ ;" is specified.
1: Before rigid tapping is specified, "G65 P_ M_ S_ ;" is specified (when bit 0 (G84)
of parameter No. 5200 is 0) or "G65 P_ S_ ;" is specified (when bit 0 (G84) of
parameter No. 5200 is 1).
(The argument of address P is a value set in parameter No.27021.)
27013 MSTOP
FBSTOP M code for stopping the spindle in fine boring

=0 : M05 is output as an M code for stopping the spindle.

• Fine boring (G1105) in hole machining by turning for lathes (with the workpiece
rotated)
• Fine boring (G1115) in hole machining by milling for lathes (with the tool rotated)
- 660 -
27014 MORIE
FBORIENT M code for spindle orientation in fine boring

=0 : M19 is output as an M code for spindle orientation.

• Fine boring (G1115) in hole machining by milling for lathes (with the tool rotated)
27021 G65PROGNO
CLERCLMP The number of a P-CODE program to be called by G65 (refer to bit 7 (HL7) of parameter
No. 27020)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27195 PCR SPM1 TRV WRV
WRV 0 : Reverse tapping by workpiece rotation is disabled.

1: Reverse tapping by workpiece rotation is enabled.
TRV 0 : Reverse tapping by the rotating tool is disabled.
1: Reverse tapping by the rotating tool is enabled.
SPM 0 : In fine boring (G1105) in hole machining by turning for lathes (with the workpiece
rotated), setting value for parameter No.27013 is output as an M code for stopping
the spindle.
1 : In fine boring (G1105) in hole machining by turning for lathes (with the workpiece
rotated), M05 is output as an M code for stopping the spindle.
PCR On drill cycle, pecking clearance of peck drill and pecking return amount of high-speed
peck drill is specified
0 : In parameter.
1 : In input window.
Parameters No. 27196 to No. 27210 below are valid only when either or both of bits 0
(WRV) and 1 (TRV ) of parameter No. 27195 are 1. In a mutlipath system, this data is set
separately for each tool post (path).
27196 S1TTMN
S1TTMN M code command before the normal tapping of spindle 1
No output when 0 is set.
[Unit of data] 0 to 65535
27197 S1TTMR
S1TTMR M code to be specified before reverse tapping by turning with spindle 1
Nothing is output when 0 is set.
27199 S2TTMR
- 661 -
27201 S3TTMR
27202 S1TMLM
S1TMLM M code for turning spindle 1 in the normal direction
M3 is output when 0 is set.
27204 S2NMLM
S2NMLM M code for turning spindle 2 in the normal direction
27206 S3NMLM
S3NMLM M code for turning spindle 3 in the normal direction
27209 MILTMR
MILTMR M code to be specified before reverse tapping by the rotating tool
27210 MLNMLM
MLNMLM M code for turning the rotating tool in the normal direction
- 662 -
APPENDIX
(FOR MACHINE TOOL BUILDER)
APPENDIX A.MANUAL GUIDE i SETUP
B-63874EN/11 (FOR MACHINE TOOL BUILDER) PROCEDURE
A MANUAL GUIDE i SETUP PROCEDURE

Appendix A, “MANUAL GUIDE i SETUP PROCEDURE”, consists of:
A.1 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................666

A.2 NECESSARY HARDWARE ...........................................................................................................666
A.3 NECESSARY SOFTWARE .............................................................................................................666
A.3.1 Machining Center (Series 0i)................................................................................................666
A.3.2 Machining Center (Series 16i/18i/21i) .................................................................................667
A.3.3 Machining Center (Series 30i/31i/32i) .................................................................................668
A.3.4 Lathe (Series 0i)....................................................................................................................669
A.3.5 Lathe (Series 16i/18i/21i) .....................................................................................................670
A.3.6 Lathe (Series 30i/31i/32i) .....................................................................................................672
A.3.7 Lathe with Compound Machining Function (Series 16i/18i/21i) .........................................673
A.3.8 Note.......................................................................................................................................673
A.4 SETTING THE MANDATORY PARAMETERS ...........................................................................673
A.5 SETTING THE BASIC PARAMETERS .........................................................................................675
A.5.1 Parameters related to the Allocation of Startup Function Keys .........................................676
A.5.2 Parameters Related to the Display Language.....................................................................678
A.5.3 Parameters Related to Current Position Display ................................................................679
A.5.4 Parameters Related to Load Meter .....................................................................................680
A.5.5 Parameters Related to Spindle Status Display ...................................................................681
A.5.6 Parameters Related to Subprogram Selection Screens .......................................................681
A.5.7 Parameters Related to Arbitrary Figures ............................................................................682
A.5.8 Parameters Related to Operations in General.....................................................................683
A.5.9 Parameters Related to Graphic Display..............................................................................692
A.5.10 Parameters Related to Tool Drawing .................................................................................693
A.5.11 Parameters Related to Machining Simulation (Tool Path Drawing)..................................699
A.5.12 Parameters Related to Machining Simulation (Animation Drawing) ................................700
A.5.12.1 Parameters related to AXIS of animation drawing .............................................700
A.5.12.2 Parameters related to animation drawing in general ...........................................703
A.5.12.3 Parameters related to machining time display ....................................................709
A.5.12.4 Parameters related to color of animation drawing ..............................................710
A.5.12.5 Settings for Programmable data input.................................................................710
A.5.12.6 Parameter related to alarms about overlap with parts or blanks .........................711
A.5.12.7 Parameter related to the T0 command during animation drawing ......................711
A.5.13 Parameters Related to Program Coordinate System Switching and Offset Memory
Switching............................................................................................................................712
A.5.14 Parameters Related to Tool Management Functions..........................................................714
A.5.15 Parameters Related to Multi-path Lathe.............................................................................716
A.5.16 Parameters Related to the Color Palette .............................................................................716
A.5.16.1 Parameters related to the color palette for screen display...................................720
A.5.16.2 Parameters related to the color palette for icon display ......................................722
A.5.16.3 Parameters related to the color palette for guidance display ..............................723
A.5.17 Other Parameters ................................................................................................................726
A.6 PARAMETER SETTINGS DEPENDING ON THE MACHINE TYPE .........................................730
A.6.1 Machining Center...............................................................................................................730
A.6.2 Other Machines ..................................................................................................................734
A.6.3 Lathe...................................................................................................................................734
A.7 M CODE OUTPUT IN CYCLE EXECUTING................................................................................739
A.7.1 M code for Rigid Tapping ....................................................................................................739
A.7.2 M code for Clamping and Unclamping Rotate Axis as “C” .................................................739
- 665 -
A. MANUAL GUIDE i SETUP APPENDIX
PROCEDURE (FOR MACHINE TOOL BUILDER) B-63874EN/11
A.1 GENERAL
In this chapter, the fundamental procedure of starting up MANUAL GUIDE i is described. If it is already
installed and running correctly, you need not the following operations.
A.2 NECESSARY HARDWARE

The configuration of hardware for running MANUAL GUIDE i is determined according to the
combination of other CNC functions ordered. In this manual, it is assumed that the necessary hardware is
completed.
A.3 NECESSARY SOFTWARE

Software described below is necessary for MANUAL GUIDE i.
A.3.1 Machining Center (Series 0i)

In case of using MANUAL GUIDE i (S790), following software is necessary. Select a machine
configuration file depending on the machine configuration. Select one or more language files as
necessary.
(1) In case of Series 0i-C
File name Note

BX24*_S1.MEM Control software
BX24*_MH.MEM Machine configuration file (for horizontal milling)
BX24*_MV.MEM Machine configuration file (for vertical milling)
BX24*_L1.MEM Language file 1
BX24*_L2.MEM Language file 2 (Note)
BJ25*.MEM Macro software (for milling)
NOTE
Language file 1: English, Japanese, German, French, Italian, Spanish, Dutch
Language file 2: English, Swedish, Portuguese, Polish, Czech, Russian,
Hungarian
Language file 3: English, Chinese (Simplified characters), Chinese (Traditional
characters), Korean, Turkish
- 666 -
(2) In case of Series 0i-D
File name Note

BX32*_MH.MEM Machine configuration file (for horizontal milling)
BX32*_MV.MEM Machine configuration file (for vertical milling)
NOTE
Hungarian
Language file 3: English, Chinese (Simplified characters), Chinese
(Traditional characters), Korean, Turkish, Bulgarian, Romanian
A.3.2 Machining Center (Series 16i/18i/21i)

(1) In case of using MANUAL GUIDE i (S780), following software is necessary. Select a machine
configuration software file depending on the machine configuration. Select one or more language
software files as necessary.
File name Note

BX00*_S1.MEM or BXA0*_S1.MEM(Note1) Control software
BX00*_MH.MEM or BXA0*_MH.MEM(Note1) Machine configuration file (for horizontal milling)
BX00*_MV.MEM or BXA0*_MV.MEM(Note1) Machine configuration file (for vertical milling)
BX00*_L1.MEM or BXA0*_L1.MEM(Note1) Language file 1
BX00*_L2.MEM or BXA0*_L2.MEM(Note1) Language file 2 (Note2)
BJ00*.MEM or BJA0*.MEM(Note1) Macro software (for milling)
NOTE
1 When BX00*_S1.MEM is used for Control software, BX00*_*.MEM is used for
Machine configuration file and Language file. When BXA0*_S1.MEM is used,
BXA0*_*.MEM is used.
2 For option languages, it is necessary to specify NC language options in addition
to the following language files.
Hungarian
(2) When using the MANUAL GUIDE i (S777) for the multi C executor, the following software is
necessary in place of the control software shown in (1).
File name Note

- 667 -
NOTE
When BX01*_S1.MEM is used for Control software, BX00*_*.MEM is used for
Machine configuration file and Language file. When BXA1*_S1.MEM is used,
A.3.3 Machining Center (Series 30i/31i/32i)

necessary.
(1) In case of Series 30i/31i/32i-A
File name Note

BY70*.MEM Control software
BY82*.MEM Machine configuration file (for horizontal milling)
BY83*.MEM Machine configuration file (for vertical milling)
BY95*.MEM Language file 1
BY96*.MEM Language file 2 (Note)
Graphic software is required for the 60VA series.
NOTE
For option languages, it is necessary to specify NC language options in addition
Hungarian
(2) In case of Series 30i/31i/32i-B
File name Note

BX71*BS.MEM Control software
BX71*MH.MEM Machine configuration file (for horizontal milling)
BX71*MV.MEM Machine configuration file (for vertical milling)
BX71*L1.MEM Language file 1
BX71*L2.MEM Language file 2 (Note)
BX71*MM.MEM Macro software (for milling)
- 668 -
NOTE
Hungarian
characters), Korean, Turkish, Bulgarian, Romanian
A.3.4 Lathe (Series 0i)

(1) In case of Series 0i-C
1-path lathe
necessary.
File name Note

BX24*_TH.MEM Machine configuration file (for horizontal lathes)
BX24*_TV.MEM Machine configuration file (for vertical lathes)
BH25*.MEM Macro software (for lathes)
NOTE
Language file 1: English, Japanese, German, French, Italian, Spanish
Hungarian
2-path lathe
When using the MANUAL GUIDE i (S780) and multi-path lathe (S786), the following software is
necessary. Select a machine configuration software file depending on the machine configuration. Select
one or more language software files as necessary.
File name Note

BH25*.MEM Macro software (for 1-path)
BH26*.MEM Macro software (for 2-path)
- 669 -
(2) In case of Series 0i-D

necessary.
File name Note

BH32*.MEM Macro software (for lathes)
NOTE
Hungarian
A.3.5 Lathe (Series 16i/18i/21i)

1-path lathe
(1) In case of using MANUAL GUIDE i (S780), following software is necessary. Select a machine
File name Note

BX00*_TH.MEM or
Machine configuration file (for horizontal lathes)
BXA0*_TH.MEM(Note1)
Machine configuration file (for vertical lathes)
BX00*_TV.MEM or BXA0*_TV.MEM(Note1)
BX00*_L2.MEM or BXA0*_L2.MEM(Note1) Language file 2 (Note2)
BH00*.MEM or BHA0*.MEM Macro software (for 1-path)
NOTE
1 When BX00*_S*.MEM is used for Control software, BX00*_*.MEM is used for
Machine configuration file and Language file. When BXA0*_S*.MEM is used,
2 For option languages, it is necessary to specify NC language options in addition
Language file 1: English, Japanese, German, French, Italian, Spanish
Hungarian
- 670 -
(2) When using the MANUAL GUIDE i (S777) for the multi C executor, the following software is
necessary for the 2-path lathe in place of the control software shown in (1).
File name Note

BX01*_S1.MEM or BXA1*_S1.MEM Control software
NOTE
When BX01*_S*.MEM is used for Control software, BX00*_*.MEM is used for
Machine configuration file and Language file. When BXA1*_S*.MEM is used,
2-path lathe
(1) When using the MANUAL GUIDE i (S780) and multi-path lathe (S786), the following software is
necessary. Select a machine configuration software file depending on the machine configuration.
Select one or more language software files as necessary.
File name Note

BX00*_S2.MEM or BXA0*_S2.MEM(Note1) Control software 2
BX00*_TH.MEM or
BXA0*_TH.MEM(Note1)
(2) When using the MANUAL GUIDE i (S777) for the multi C executor and the multi-path lathe (S786),
the following software is necessary in place of the control software shown in (1) and control
software 2.
File name Note

3-path lathe
(1) When using the MANUAL GUIDE i (S780) and multi-path lathe (S786), the following software is
necessary. Select a machine configuration software file depending on the machine configuration.
Select one or more language software files as necessary.
File name Note

BX00*_TH.MEM or
BXA0*_TH.MEM(Note1)
- 671 -
(2) When using MANUAL GUIDE i (S777) for the multi C executor and the multi-path lathe (S786),
the following software is necessary in place of the control software shown in (1) and control
software 3.
File name Note

A.3.6 Lathe (Series 30i/31i/32i)

necessary.
(1) In case of Series 30i/31i/32i-A
File name Note

BY70*.MEM Control software
BY80*.MEM Machine configuration file (for horizontal lathes)
BY81*.MEM Machine configuration file (for vertical lathes)
BY96*.MEM Language file 2 (Note)
BH11*.MEM Macro software (for lathe)
Graphic software is required for the 60VA series.
NOTE
Hungarian
(2) In case of Series 30i/31i/32i-B
File name Note

BX71*BS.MEM Control software
BX71*TH.MEM Machine configuration file (for horizontal lathes)
BX71*TV.MEM Machine configuration file (for vertical lathes)
BX71*L2.MEM Language file 2 (Note)
BX71*TM.MEM Macro software (for lathe)
- 672 -
NOTE
Hungarian
A.3.7 Lathe with Compound Machining Function (Series 16i/18i/21i)

File name Note

BY40*_1.MEM Control software
BY43*_2.MEM / BY43*_3.MEM Machine configuration file (for horizontal lathes)
BY44*_2.MEM / BY44*_3.MEM Machine configuration file (for horizontal lathes)
BH10*.MEM Macro software (for lathe)
A.3.8 Note
Some functions of MANUAL GUIDE i may not work if CNC and Graphic (*) software are old, because
MANUAL GUIDE i uses the CNC and Graphic functions. So it is recommended to install the latest
version of those software.
* In case of Personal computer function with WindowsCE, CNC screen display function corresponds
to graphic software.
A.4 SETTING THE MANDATORY PARAMETERS

NOTE
The following parameters are set by the machine tool builder. Do not change the
parameters. Otherwise, the machine may operates incorrectly.
To use MANUAL GUIDE i, be sure to set the following parameters:
(1) Parameter No.8701#4 = 1

Read of “vacant” P code macro variables is enabled.
(In Series 0i-F/0i-D/30i/31i/32i, this parameter is not necessary.)
(2) Parameter No.3201#6 (NPE) = 1
Program registration does not end with M end codes (M02, M30, and M99).
(3) Parameter No.8650#0 (RSK) = 1
When the <RESET> key is pressed, C-EXE passes a key code to an application program.
(4) Parameter No.8701#6 (CTV) = 1
When the TV check is set to ON, edit operations are not regarded as errors.
- 673 -
(5) Parameter No.3112#0 (SGD) = 0

This parameter enables or disables servo waveform display. When this parameter is set to 1, other
graphic functions become unavailable.
(6) Parameter No.9000#0 (SQN) = 0
This parameter is for debugging machining macro program.
And if this parameter is set to 1, MANUAL GUIDE i does not work correctly.
(7) Parameter No.3206#6 (DWB) = 1
The function of C language executor refers to this parameter. Bit 6 (DAK) of parameter No.3106,
position display change for 3D conversion mode, is effective in MANUAL GUIDE i screen
* The system checks this parameter in the case that three-dimensional coordinate conversion is
available.)
(8) Parameter No.8650#1 (CNA) = 1
During display of the screen of C language executor, Alarm screen is not changed when the alarm
occurs.
(9) Parameter No.9000#7 (L2R) = 0
If this bit is set, MANUAL GUIDE i does not update the screen display at the time of operation, and
cycle execution is not performed normally.
(10) Parameter No.8650#2 (EKY) = 1
When the standard MDI key for Series 0i-F/0i-D/30i/31i/32i, please sure to set to ON.
(In Series 0i-C/16i/18i/21i, this parameter is not necessary.)
(11) Parameter No.14853#7 (PDP) = 1
The program window screen in machining based on the new specifications is used. (Series
16i/18i/21i: Scroll bar is displayed)
(12) Parameter No.9071 ≠ 0
This parameter is set to P-CODE Macro number of MANUAL GUIDE i as follows.
Machining Center := 90
Lathe := 91
(13) Parameter No.9072 ≠ 0
This parameter is set to the block number for dealing with Macro sentence continuously in Execute
Macro program. MANUAL GUIDE i recommend it to 20 for Series 30i/31i/32i or 40 for Series
0i-F/0i-D.
(In Series 0i-C/16i/18i/21i, this parameter is not necessary. The setting of 20 may not be appropriate
for the multi-path system, so it needs to be adjusted.)
(14) Parameter No.0001#1 (FCV) = 0

Program format is Series 16 standard format.
The following parameters are necessary for machining simulation.
(15) Parameter No.14706≠0

Directions of the three basic axes of spindle 1
Conditions)
• One-path T series, M series, and CNCs for complex machining
• Two-path T series
(a) For path 1, always set this parameter.
(b) For path 2
When bit 0 (SME) of parameter No. 27401 is set to 1
• Three-path T series
(a) For path 1, always set this parameter.
- 674 -
(b) For path 2
When bit 0 (SME) of parameter No. 27401 is set to 1
(c) For path 3
When bit 0 (TME) of parameter No. 27402 is set to 1
(16) Parameter No.14707≠0
Directions of the three basic axes of spindle 2
Conditions)
When bit 1 (SUB) of parameter No. 14702 is set to 1 (A sub-spindle is provided.) :
• For the one-path T series, always set this parameter.
• For the two-path T series:
(a) For path 1
When bit 1 (FSE) of parameter No. 14701 is set to 1
(b) For path 2
When bit 1 (SSE) of parameter No. 27401 is set to 1
• For the three-path T series:
(a) For path 1
When bit 1 (FSE) of parameter No. 14701 is set to 1
(b) For path 2
When bit 1 (SSE) of parameter No. 27401 is set to 1
(c) For path 3
When bit 1 (TSE) of parameter No. 27402 is set to 1.
(17) Parameter No.5209#2 (DWP) = 1

When a dwell command (address P) is not included in case of lathe-system rigid tapping, the dwell
command (address P) specified in the block for drilling is valid.
(In Series 0i-C/16i/18i/21i, this parameter is not necessary. In machining center, this parameter is not
necessary.)
NOTE
Make sure that the number of CNC control axes is correctly set in parameter
No.1010. For details on parameter No.1010, refer to the parameter manual of
the CNC.
Please the following parameters are set for using small MDI unit.
(18) Parameter No.3100#2 (SKY) = 1

Small MDI unit is used.
Please set the following parameter when AI contour control or Advanced preview control(APC) is used in
FS0i-D.
(19) Parameter No.13104#0 (AS3) = 1

The return value of FOCAS2 function, “cnc_staticinfo()” and “cnc_statinfo2()”, in edit is compatible
with FS16i/FS0i-C/FS30i.
Set the following parameters when FS31iA CPU card A6 or FS32i-A CPU card C6 is used.
Turn on CNC after modification of parameter.
(20) P9072=20 Execution block number of the execution macro program.

P14791#0=1 Enable the special function of machining cycle.
P14793=800 Maximum execution time of the special function of machining cycle.
(In case machining cycle is executed when AI contour control I and AI contour control II is off)
- 675 -
P14499=5 Execution block number of the execution macro program when machining cycle is
executed.
(In case machining cycle is executed when AI contour control I and AI contour control II is on)
P14499=2 Execution block number of the execution macro program when machining cycle is
executed.
Adjust parameter P14499 if the performance of machining cycle is not satisfied.

(Criterion of adjustment)
(a) Machining cycle don’t stop between block and block when machining cycle is executed.
(b) Time of changing from CNC screen to MANUAL GUIDE i screen is not long when machining
cycle is executed.
A.5 SETTING THE BASIC PARAMETERS

NOTE
The following parameters are set by the machine tool builder. Do not change the
parameters. Otherwise, the machine may operates incorrectly.
A.5.1 Parameters related to the Allocation of Startup Function Keys

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14794 GRP MES SYS OFS PRG POS
<1> <2> <3>
POS PROG OFFSET
SETTING
SYSTEM MESAGE GRAPH
<4> <5> <6>
POS 0 : The MANUAL GUIDE i does not start when function key <1> is pressed.
1: The MANUAL GUIDE i starts when function key <1> is pressed.
PRG 0 : The MANUAL GUIDE i does not start when function key <2> is pressed.
OFS 0 : The MANUAL GUIDE i does not start when function key <3> is pressed.
SYS 0 : The MANUAL GUIDE i does not start when function key <4> is pressed.
MES 0 : The MANUAL GUIDE i does not start when function key <5> is pressed.
GRP 0 : The MANUAL GUIDE i does not start when function key <6> is pressed.
- 676 -
NOTE
For the Series 30i/31i/32i multi-path systems, POS, PRG, OFS,
SYS, MES, and GRP cannot be set to different values for each
path. Follow the settings of path 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14795 FPT CS3 CS2 CS1
For Series 16i For Series 30i

<1> <1>
OFFSET CUSTOM OFFSET CUSTOM1
POS PROG POS PROG
SETTING SETTING
SYSTEM MESAGE GRAPH SYSTEM MESAGE GRAPH CUSTOM2
<2> <1>
CS1 0 : The MANUAL GUIDE i does not start on CRT_CST_AUX screen (Series 0i-C,
Series 16i/18i/21i) or CEXE screen (Series 0i-F/0i-D, Series 30i/31i/32i) when
function key <1> is pressed.
1: The MANUAL GUIDE i starts on CRT_CST_AUX screen (Series 0i-C, Series
16i/18i/21i) or CEXE screen (Series 0i-F/0i-D, Series 30i/31i/32i) when function
key <1> is pressed.
NOTE
1 The CRT_CST_AUX screen and CEXE screen appear when function
key <1> is pressed once.
2 When the conversational macro screen is not present in the Series
0i-C, Series 16i/18i/21i, set bit 5 (CMEC1) of parameter No.8652 to 1.
3 For the Series 0i-F/0i-D, Series 30i/31i/32i multi-path system, different
settings cannot be used for each path. Follow the settings of path 1.
CS2 0 : The MANUAL GUIDE i does not start on CRT_CST_MCR screen (Series 0i-C,
Series 16i/18i/21i) or CEXE2 screen (Series 0i-F/0i-D, Series 30i/31i/32i) when
1: The MANUAL GUIDE i starts on CRT_CST_MCR screen (Series 0i-C, Series
16i/18i/21i) or CEXE2 screen (Series 0i-F/0i-D, Series 30i/31i/32i) when function
key <1> is pressed.
NOTE
1 The CRT_CST_MCR screen and CEXE2 screen appear when function
key <1> is pressed twice.
3 For the Series 0i-F/0i-D, Series 30i/31i/32i multi-path system, different
- 677 -
CS3 0 : The MANUAL GUIDE i does not start on CRT_CST_MENU screen (Series 0i-C,
Series 16i/18i/21i) or CEXE3 screen (Series 0i-F/0i-D, Series 30i/31i/32i) when
1: The MANUAL GUIDE i starts on CRT_CST_MENU screen (Series 0i-C, Series
16i/18i/21i) or CEXE3 screen (Series 0i-F/0i-D, Series 30i/31i/32i) when function
key <1> is pressed.
NOTE
1 The CRT_CST_MENU screen and CEXE3 screen appear when
function key <1> is pressed three times.
3 For the Series 0i-F/0i-D, 30i/31i/32i multi-path system, different
FPT 0 : The MANUAL GUIDE i does not start FAPT screen (Series 0i-C, Series
16i/18i/21i) or CEXE screen (Series 0i-F/0i-D, Series 30i/31i/32i) when function
key <2> is pressed.
1: The MANUAL GUIDE i starts on FAPT screen (Series 0i-C, Series 16i/18i/21i) or
CEXE screen (Series 0i-F/0i-D, Series 30i/31i/32i) when function key <2> is
pressed.
NOTE
1 In the Series 0i-C, Series 16i/18i/21i, set bit 4 (CMECF) of parameter
No.8652 to 1.
2 For the Series 0i-F/0i-D, 30i/31i/32i multi-path system, different
A.5.2 Parameters Related to the Display Language

This parameter sets the display language on the MANUAL GUIDE i screen.
14712 MSGLANG
(FANUC standard settings = 0)
MSGLANG 0 : The setting of language which NC displays is assumed. When the MANUAL
GUIDE i does not support the language, English is assumed to be the display
language.
1: English
2: Japanese
3: German
4: French
5: Italian
6: Spanish
7: Swedish
8: Czech
9: Portuguese
10 : Polish
11 : Chinese (Simplified characters)
12 : Chinese (Traditional characters)
13 : Korean
14 : Russian
15 : Turkish
16 : Dutch (Dutch is not used in FS16i/18i/21i-TB, FS0i-TC.)
- 678 -
17 : Hungarian
18 : Bulgarian (Bulgarian can be used in only FS0i-F/0i-D, FS30i/31i/32i-B.)
19 : Romanian (Romanian can be used in only FS0i-F/0i-D, FS30i/31i/32i-B.)
except above : English
NOTE
1 Language file 1 is necessary to display Japanese, German, French,
Italian, Spanish, or Dutch.
Language file 2 is necessary to display Swedish, Czech, Portuguese,
Polish, Russian or Hungarian.
Language file 3 is necessary to display Chinese (Simplified
characters), Chinese (Traditional characters), Korean, Turkish,
Bulgarian, or Romanian.
2 When the display language for the MANUAL GUIDE i screen is
simplified Chinese, Korean, Bulgarian, or Romanian, alarm messages
are displayed in English during execution of the MANUAL GUIDE i.
When the display language for the MANUAL GUIDE i screen is
simplified Chinese and the display language for screens on the NC
side is not simplified Chinese, the display language for the MANUAL
GUIDE i screen is English.
A.5.3 Parameters Related to Current Position Display

14799 DS1AXS
DS1AXS =0 : The first controlled axis is displayed in display area 1.

≠0 : Number of the controlled axis to be displayed in display area 1.
14800 DS2AXS
DS2AXS =0 : The second controlled axis is displayed in display area 2.

14801 DS3AXS
DS3AXS =0 : The third controlled axis is displayed in display area 3.

14802 DS4AXS
DS4AXS =0 : The fourth controlled axis is displayed in display area 4.

14803 DS5AXS
DS5AXS =0 : The fifth controlled axis is displayed in display area 5.

14804 DS6AXS
DS6AXS =0 : The sixth controlled axis is displayed in display area 6.

- 679 -
14805 DS7AXS
DS7AXS =0 : The seventh controlled axis is displayed in display area 7.

14806 DS8AXS
DS8AXS =0 : The eighth controlled axis is displayed in display area 8.

A.5.4 Parameters Related to Load Meter

These parameters are used to compensate a CNC controlled axis to which load is applied constantly, such
as a vertical axis, for that load, using the load meter.
14815 ELOFS1
ELOFS1 : Value of the load current of the first CNC controlled axis in the steady status, as
converted into a digital value.
[Valid data range] -6554 to +6554
14816 ELOFS2
ELOFS2 : Value of the load current of the second CNC controlled axis in the steady status, as
14817 ELOFS3
ELOFS3 : Value of the load current of the third CNC controlled axis in the steady status, as
14818 ELOFS4
ELOFS4 : Value of the load current of the fourth CNC controlled axis in the steady status, as
14819 ELOFS5
ELOFS5 : Value of the load current of the fifth CNC controlled axis in the steady status, as
14820 ELOFS6
ELOFS6 : Value of the load current of the sixth CNC controlled axis in the steady status, as
14821 ELOFS7
ELOFS7 : Value of the load current of the seventh CNC controlled axis in the steady status, as
- 680 -
14822 ELOFS8
ELOFS8 : Value of the load current of the eighth CNC controlled axis in the steady status, as
A.5.5 Parameters Related to Spindle Status Display

These parameters set spindle status display on the base screen.
14710 AST
AST =0 : When a CNC unit for complex machining is used, actual spindle speed/spindle load
ratio/spindle status display on the base screen is not automatically switched in
turning mode.
≠0 : Spindle number: When a CNC unit for complex machining is used, actual spindle
speed/spindle load ratio/spindle status display on the base screen is automatically
switched to the display for a specified spindle number in turning mode.
14711 ASM
ASM =0 : When a CNC unit for complex machining is used, actual spindle speed/spindle load
ratio/spindle status display on the base screen is not automatically switched in
milling mode.
≠0 : Spindle number: When a CNC unit for complex machining is used, actual spindle
speed/spindle load ratio/spindle status display on the base screen is automatically
switched to the display for a specified spindle number in milling mode.
A.5.6 Parameters Related to Subprogram Selection Screens

These parameters set the registration start/end numbers of subprogram selection screens.
14720 TFIGSNO
TFIGSNO : Registration start number of the turning subprogram selection screen.
14721 TFIGENO
TFIGENO : Registration end number of the turning subprogram selection screen.
14722 MFIGSNO
MFIGSNO : Registration start number of the milling subprogram selection screen.
14723 MFIGENO
MFIGENO : Registration end number of the milling subprogram selection screen.
- 681 -
A.5.7 Parameters Related to Arbitrary Figures

These parameters are for the settings for arbitrary figures.
14840 DSPCRDZX
DSPCRDZX : Drawing coordinates when an arbitrary ZX figure is programmed.

= 0 : Same effect as that of setting 5.
= 1 : Plan view, horizontal axis = +X, vertical axis = +Z
= 5 : Plan view, horizontal axis = +Z, vertical axis = +X
= 6 : Plan view, horizontal axis = +Z, vertical axis = -X
Z X Z
X Z X
1 5 6
14841 DSPCRDZC
DSPCRDZC : Drawing coordinates when an arbitrary ZC figure is programmed.

= 1 : Plan view, horizontal axis = +C, vertical axis = +Z
= 6 : Plan view, horizontal axis = +Z, vertical axis = -C
Z Z
C
C
1 6
14842 DSPCRDYZ
DSPCRDYZ : Drawing coordinates when an arbitrary YZ figure is programmed.

= 1 : Plan view, horizontal axis = + Y, vertical axis = +Z
= 6 : Plan view, horizontal axis = +Z, vertical axis = -Y
Z Z
Y
Y
1 6
14862 DSPCRDXA
DSPCRDXA : Drawing coordinates when an arbitrary XA figure is programmed.

= 1 : Plan view, horizontal axis = +A, vertical axis = +X
= 5 : Plan view, horizontal axis = +X, vertical axis = +A
= 6 : Plan view, horizontal axis = +X, vertical axis = -A
X A X
X A
A
5 6
1
- 682 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27104 #6
#6 0: Maximum digit number of output value of arbitrary figure program is 8 digits

(Normal).
1: Maximum Digit number of output value of arbitrary figure program is 9 digits
(Extended).
Bit parameter #6 is available in Series 30i and Series 0i-F/0i-D. And it is available in
milling system, too.
A.5.8 Parameters Related to Operations in General

These parameters set operations in general.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14700 MGI LDP MOT CS2 CS1 PWD
PWD 0 : When the power is turned on, the system is not switched to the MANUAL GUIDE i
screen.
1: When the power is turned on, the system is switched to the MANUAL GUIDE i
screen.
NOTE
1 When using a C language executor application created by the
machine tool builder in the Series 0i-F/0i-D/30i/31i/32i, PWD
assumes the following values:
PWD 0: Settings are disabled.
1: In the initialization (first processing executed after
power-on) of a C language executor application created
by the machine tool builder, the screen displayed
immediately after power-on is changed by the
crt_cncscrn() function.
2 In a multi application, in case of displaying MANUAL GUIDE i
screen at the power on, it is necessary to set the parameter
No.14854#7 to 0.
CS1= 0, CS2 = 0 : When the power is turned on, the custom screen is not displayed.
CS1= 1, CS2 = 0 : When the power is turned on, Custom Screen 1 (AUX) is displayed.
CS1= 0, CS2 = 1 : When the power is turned on, Custom Screen 3 (MCR) is displayed.
CS1= 1, CS2 = 1 : When the power is turned on, Custom Screen 2 (MENU) is displayed.
MOT 0 : The modal command is output in NC statement conversion.
1: The modal command is not output in NC statement conversion.
LDP 0 : Line numbers are displayed during power-on.
1: Line numbers are not displayed during power-on.
MGI 0 : MANUAL GUIDE i is enabled.
1: MANUAL GUIDE i is disabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14701 ALE PCK CLP2 CLP1 FSP FMP FSE
FSE 0 : Tool post 1 cannot be used with spindle 2.

1: Tool post 1 can be used with spindle 2.
- 683 -
NOTE
FSE is available in the case of bit 1 (SUB) of parameter No.14702
= 1 only.
FMP 0 : Tool post 1 is placed above spindle 1.

1: Tool post 1 is placed under spindle 1.
FSP 0 : Tool post 1 is placed above spindle 2.
FMP=0, FSP=0
1 2
FMP=1, FSP=1
NOTE
FSP is available in the case of bit 1 (SUB) of parameter No.14702
= 1 and bit 1 (FSE) of parameter No.14701 = 1 only.
CLP1= 0, CLP2 = 0 The size of the clipboard is set to 1024 bytes.

CLP1= 1, CLP 2 = 1 The size of the clipboard is set to 8192 bytes.
PCK 0 : Process List Editing Function : The soft-key [ADD /] and [DEL /] for program
check function for each spindle are not displayed.
1: Process List Editing Function : The soft-key [ADD /] and [DEL /] for program
check function for each spindle are displayed.
ALE 0 : When the alarm (PW0000 "POWER MUST BE OFF") occurs, the screen display of
the MANUAL GUIDE i is disabled.
1: When the alarm (PW0000 "POWER MUST BE OFF") occurs, the screen display of
the MANUAL GUIDE i is not disabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14702 SFA SFB SFC SFD SUB MT1
MT1 0 : Vertical.
1: Horizontal (chuck located on the left side).
SUB 0 : No sub-spindle is provided.
1: A sub-spindle is provided.
SFD 0 : Normal rotation is assumed if SFRD <G266#5>=0 and SRVD <G266#4>=1
Reverse rotation is assumed if SFRD <G266#5>=1 and SRVD <G266#4>=0
1: Normal rotation is assumed if SFRD <G266#5>=1 and SRVD <G266#4>=0
Reverse rotation is assumed if SFRD <G266#5>=0 and SRVD <G266#4>=1
SFC 0 : Normal rotation is assumed if SFRC <G204#5>=0 and SRVC <G204#4>=1
Reverse rotation is assumed if SFRC <G204#5>=1 and SRVC <G204#4>=0
1: Normal rotation is assumed if SFRC <G204#5>=1 and SRVC <G204#4>=0
Reverse rotation is assumed if SFRC <G204#5>=0 and SRVC <G204#4>=1
SFB 0 : Normal rotation is assumed if SFRB <G074#5>=0 and SRVB <G074#4>=1
Reverse rotation is assumed if SFRB <G074#5>=1 and SRVB <G074#4>=0
1: Normal rotation is assumed if SFRB <G074#5>=1 and SRVB <G074#4>=0
Reverse rotation is assumed if SFRB <G074#5>=0 and SRVB <G074#4>=1
- 684 -
SFA 0 : Normal rotation is assumed if SFRA <G070#5>=0 and SRVA <G070#4>=1
Reverse rotation is assumed if SFRA <G070#5>=1 and SRVA <G070#4>=0
1: Normal rotation is assumed if SFRA <G070#5>=1 and SRVA <G070#4>=0
Reverse rotation is assumed if SFRA <G070#5>=0 and SRVA <G070#4>=1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14703 ALP G62 NCC TAB LST GDM SFN FDS
FDS 0 : During feed per revolution, actual feedrate is displayed as that of feed per minute on
the base screen.
1: During feed per revolution, actual feedrate is displayed as that of feed per revolution
on the base screen. (Refer to Chapter 1, “BASIC SCREEN” in the Part II.)
SFN 0 : In lower part of the soft keys, shortcut numbers are not displayed.
1: In lower part of the soft keys, shortcut numbers are displayed.
GDM 0 : When the CNC is a CNC for complex machining, just one guidance message is
displayed according to the T or M mode.
1: When the CNC is a CNC for complex machining, guidance messages for the T and
M modes are both displayed regardless of the mode set. (Refer to Chapter 1,
“BASIC SCREEN” in the Part II.)
LST 0 : The soft-key [EDTCEL] is not displayed.
1: The soft-key [EDTCEL] is displayed.
TAB 0 : On the multiple-tab screen, the cursor does not automatically move to the next tab
when <INPUT> key is pressed in the lowermost edit box.
1: On the multiple-tab screen, the cursor automatically moves to the next tab when
<INPUT> key is pressed in the lowermost edit box.
NCC 0 : In NC statement conversion, 4-digit G code cycle machining commands before
expansion are output as comments. (only for the Series 30i/31i/32i)
1: In NC statement conversion, 4-digit G code cycle machining commands before
expansion are not output as comments. (only for the Series 30i/31i/32i)
G62 0 : The capability of allowing the G62.4 signal to make the screen display visible or
invisible is disabled.
1: The capability of allowing the G62.4 signal to make the screen display visible or
invisible is enabled. (only for the Series 0i/16i/18i/21i)
ALP 0 : The function for reusing existing figures is enabled on the arbitrary figure screen.
1: The function for reusing existing figures is disabled on the arbitrary figure screen.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14704 DXC DZX DXY IJK LDM SLM PWO PTO
PTO 0 : During operation, data entry is prohibited on the tool offset setting screen.
1: During operation, data entry is not prohibited on the tool offset setting screen.
PWO 0 : During operation, data entry is prohibited on the workpiece origin offset setting
screen.
1: During operation, data entry is not prohibited on the workpiece origin offset setting
screen.
SLM 0 : The spindle load meter is displayed.
1: The spindle load meter is not displayed.
LDM 0 : The servo load meter is displayed.
1: The servo load meter is not displayed.
IJK 0 : The arc command in a contour program is output in IJK format.
1: The arc command in a contour program is output in R format.
(Refer to Chapter 1, “CONTOUR PROGRAMMING” in the Part III.)
DXY 0 : The X coordinate in the XY plane contour program is output as a radius value.
1: The X coordinate in the XY plane contour program is output as a diameter value.
DZX 0 : The X coordinate in the ZX plane contour program is output as a radius value.
- 685 -
1: The X coordinate in the ZX plane contour program is output as a diameter value.

DXC 0 : The X coordinate in the XC plane contour program is output as a radius value.
1: The X coordinate in the XC plane contour program is output as a diameter value.
NOTE
When Diameter programming is used in the lathe, please be sure
to set DXY (No.14704#5), DZX (No.14704#6), and DXC
(No.14704#7) to 1.
(The above case is the bit 3 (DIA) of parameter No.1006 = 1.)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14705 TLJ OSH TOL TOF CEB SHT
SHT 0 : The shortcut of number + input and the shortcut of shift + number on the base screen
are enabled.
1: The shortcut of number + input and the shortcut of shift + number on the base screen
are disabled.
CEB 0 : When a specified range is copied to the clipboard with soft key [COPY] during
while a program is edited, the cursor returns to the start block of the specified range
after the copying.
1: When a specified range is copied to the clipboard with soft key [COPY] while a
program is edited, the cursor remains in the end block of the specified range after the
copying.
TOF 0 : Soft key [T-OFS] is displayed.
1: Soft key [T-OFS] is not displayed.
TOL 0 : Soft key [TOOL] is not displayed.
1: Soft key [TOOL] is displayed.
OSH 0 : Enabled soft key operation by numeric keys on program list window.
1: Disabled soft key operation by numeric keys on program list window.
TJL 0 : The function for jumping to the tool database and the tool icon display function are
disabled.
1: The function for jumping to the tool database and the tool icon display function are
enabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14836 NMG STK LOS MSD NCO
NCO 0 : The NC statement conversion function is enabled.

1: The NC statement conversion function is disabled.
MSD 0 : The function for displaying the number of revolutions of the milling axis by the
servo motor is disabled.
1: The function for displaying the number of revolutions of the milling axis by the
servo motor is enabled.
LOS 0 : The new display (support for output switching control) of load meter of the spindle
is enabled.
1: The new display (support for output switching control) of load meter of the spindle
is disabled.
STK 0 : In arbitrary figure input / free contour cylinder blank figure input / contour program
input, input method of direction by numeric keys of MDI unit is along the layout of
soft keys.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
- 686 -
1: In arbitrary figure input / free contour cylinder blank figure input / contour program
input, input method of direction by numeric keys of MDI unit is along the layout of
MDI unit.
After setting this parameter, please power on again
NMG 0 : MANUAL GUIDE i is enabled

1: MANUAL GUIDE i is disabled. (This parameter perform the same operation as in
the case where the option of MANUAL GUIDE i is disabled)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14850 RDA SWH CHK MCD PRT RET CUR TOL
TOL 0 : The [TOOL DATA] tab is displayed in the tool offset window.
1: The [TOOL DATA] tab is not displayed in the tool offset window.
CUR 0 : Soft key [CHCURS] is displayed ([TAB] is hidden) in the tool offset window and
workpiece coordinate system setting window.
1: Soft key [TAB] is displayed ([CHCURS] is hidden) in the tool offset window and
workpiece coordinate system setting window.
RET 0 : The menu selection screen appears when soft key [CLOSE] is pressed.
1: The base screen appears when soft key [CLOSE] is pressed.
PRT 0 : The fixed form statement is not protected from being edited by the memory
protection key.
1: The fixed form statement is protected from being edited by the memory protection
key.
MCD 0 : Soft key [M CODE] is displayed.
1: Soft key [M CODE] is not displayed.
CHK 0 : Invalid characters are not checked when the program is opened.
1: Invalid characters are checked when the program is opened. (When bit 5 is set to 1,
it takes longer time to open the program.)
SWH 0 : When the MANUAL GUIDE i is used with function key <PROG>, the following
switching is performed in mode switching: MGi screen → NC screen → MGi
screen.
1: When the MANUAL GUIDE i is used with function key <PROG>, the following
switching is not performed in mode switching: MGi screen → NC screen → MGi
screen.
RDA 0 : During switching from the NC screen to the MANUAL GUIDE i screen, the
program is not reloaded if the size and time stamp (minutes) are not changed.
1: During switching from the NC screen to the MANUAL GUIDE i screen, the
program is always reloaded.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14851 TME GCC PWK W12 FS2 FS1 SBP CNR
CNR 0 : When an arbitrary figure is created, the corner element sandwiched between the
material element and the part element is not the reverse connection corner element.
1: When an arbitrary figure is created, the corner element sandwiched between the
material element and the part element is the reverse connection corner element.
- 687 -
SBP 0 : When soft key [INSERT] is pressed on the fixed figure input screen, the selection
screen for output to a subprogram is not displayed.
1: When soft key [INSERT] is pressed on the fixed figure input screen, the selection
screen for output to a subprogram is displayed.
FS1 0 : In a ZX plane turning figure, when there are two selectable arcs, the arc with the
shortest route is automatically selected.
1: In a ZX plane turning figure, when there are two selectable arcs, the selection screen
prompts the operator to select one of them.
FS2 0 : In an arbitrary figure other than the ZX plane turning figure, when there are two
selectable arcs, the selection screen prompts the operator to select one of them.
1: In an arbitrary figure other than the ZX plane turning figure, when there are two
selectable arcs, the arc with the shortest route is automatically selected.
W12 0 : In an editing operation on the process editing screen, W1 or W2 is not output to the
argument of the process start command (G1992).
1: In an editing operation on the process editing screen, W1 or W2 is output to the
argument of the process start command (G1992).
PWK 0 : The "PROGRAM COORDINATE" input item is not displayed on the arbitrary
figure editing screen.
1: The "PROGRAM COORDINATE" input item is displayed on the arbitrary figure
editing screen.
GCC 0 : When the offset memory switching function is enabled on the tool offset screen or
work shift screen, switching between coordinate systems in which data is displayed
is performed by soft keys.
1: When the offset memory switching function is enabled on the tool offset screen or
work shift screen, switching between coordinate systems in which data is displayed
is performed by coordinate system selection signal GCC.
TME 0 : Editing of data is not prohibited on the NC tool management data screen.
1: Editing of data is prohibited on the NC tool management data screen.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14852 TDA OPH CFF EQU C4E NTC DFM
DFM 0 : When the cursor is moved to an arbitrary figure block, figure drawing is performed.
1: When the cursor is moved to an arbitrary figure block, figure drawing is not
performed.
NTC 0 : In drawing during machining, tool compensation is considered (only for the Series
0i-C/16i/18i/21i).
1: In drawing during machining, tool compensation is not considered (only for the
Series 0i-C/16i/18i/21i).
G4E 0 : When the cursor is located on an argument in the G4-digit block, a warning is not
displayed when an attempt is made to insert the an NC statement.
1: When the cursor is located on an argument in the G4-digit block, a warning is
displayed when an attempt is made to insert the an NC statement.
EQU 0 : When the difference between the values before and after rounding exceeds a
tolerance of 0.00001 on the arbitrary figure creation screen, a warning message is
not displayed.
1: When the difference between the values before and after rounding exceeds a
tolerance of 0.00001 on the arbitrary figure creation screen, a warning message is
displayed.
CFF 0 : The number of registered characters of a fixed form statement is 128. (The
maximum number of fixed form statements for each tab is 10.).
1: The number of registered characters of a fixed form statement is 256. (The
maximum number of fixed form statements for each tab is 5.).
OPH 0 : The operation history function is enabled.
1: The operation history function is disabled.
- 688 -
TDA 0 : The tool data access function is not used.
1: The tool data access function is used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14853 PDP ONV MDO NTC OSH PRG PLT
PLT 0 : The program list screen in the new specification is used. (only for the Series
30i/31i/32i)
1: The program list screen in the old specification is used. (only for the Series
30i/31i/32i)
PRG 0 : When function key <PROG> is pressed, the NC program screen and program list
screen are displayed alternately. (only for the Series 0i-F/0i-D/30i/31i/32i)
1: When function key <PROG> is pressed, the NC program screen is always displayed.
(only for the Series 0i-F/0i-D/30i/31i/32i)
OSH 0 : If [O SRCH] is executed when the key-in buffer is empty, program numbers are
searched. (only for the Series 0i-F/0i-D/30i/31i/32i)
1: If [O SRCH] is executed when the key-in buffer is empty, program numbers are not
searched. (only for the Series 0i-F/0i-D/30i/31i/32i)
NTC 0 : Tool compensation is considered in drawing during machining. (only for the Series
0i-F/0i-D/30i/31i/32i)
1: Tool compensation is not considered in drawing during machining. (only for the
Series 0i-F/0i-D/30i/31i/32i)
MDO 0 : Program input/output between the memory card and the data server is disabled.
(only for the Series 0i-F/30i/31i/32i)
1: Program input/output between the memory card and the data server is enabled. (only
for the Series 0i-F/30i/31i/32i)
ONV 0 : Operation navigating function is not available.
1: Operation navigating function is available.
PDP 0 : A running program is displayed in the old specification (Series 30i/31i/32i: without
the scrollbar). (only for the Series 30i/31i/32i)
1: A running program is displayed in the new specification (Series 30i/31i/32i: with the
scrollbar). (only for the Series 30i/31i/32i)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14854 MLT BGO FDP TDM MTN SPD USB
(Only for Series 0i-F/0i-D)

USB 0 : The usb memory input/output function is not available.
1 : The usb memory input/output function is available.
* This parameter can be set to 1, when all the following requirements is satisfied.
• The main board which supports the USB interface is used.
• The NC basic software which supports the USB interface is used
• Manual guide i software which supports the USB memory input/output function is
used.
SPD 0 : The actual number of revolutions of the spindle is displayed in spindle information
on the base screen.
1 : The specified value (modal value) is displayed in spindle information on the base
screen.
MTN 0 : The "MAINTE" tab is not displayed in the "SETTINGS" window.
1 : The "MAINTE" tab is displayed in the "SETTINGS" window.
TDM 0 : The tool data specific to the MANUAL GUIDE i is used.
1 : The tool data on the NC side is used.
- 689 -
FDP 0 : "JOGF" and "DRY RUN F" are not displayed.

1: "JOGF" and "DRY RUN F" are displayed.
(This parameter is followed regardless of the setting of bit 7 (JSP) of NC parameter
No. 3108 with the same function.)
BGO 0 : Program input/output is disabled in BG editing (conventional specification).
1: Program input/output is enabled in BG editing.
MLT 0 : The MANUAL GUIDE i performs screen display control immediately after
power-on in a multi-application.
1: The MANUAL GUIDE i does not perform screen display control immediately after
power-on in a multi-application. (Screen display control is performed in the
application of the machine tool builder)
NOTE
In a multi application, in case of displaying MANUAL GUIDE i
screen at the power on, it is necessary to set the parameter
No.14854#7 to 0.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14855 198 PRC FFD TLM YOF
YOF 0 : The Y axis offset value is displayed in the tool offset window.
1: The Y axis offset value is not displayed in the tool offset window.
NOTE
Bit 0 (YOF) of parameter No. 14855 requires the display option of
the Y axis tool offset.
TLM 0 : The tool management screen and magazine management screen are not displayed on
1 : The tool management screen and magazine management screen are displayed on the
MANUAL GUIDE i screen.
FFD 0 : The shape drawing is not displayed on subprogram list screen (specification in the
past).
1 : The shape drawing is displayed on subprogram list screen.
PRC 0 : When the program coordinate system switching function is enabled, the spindle 1
side is program coordinate system 1 and the spindle 2 side is program coordinate
system 2.
1: When the program coordinate system switching function is enabled, the spindle 1
side is program coordinate system 2 and the spindle 2 side is program coordinate
system 1.
198 0 : The position display ignorance function by PMC signal <G198> is disabled.
1: The position display ignorance function by PMC signal <G198> is enabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14856 MIL TRN ANM GID
GID 0 : The setup function is enabled.
1: The setup function is disabled.
ANM 0 : The animation function is enabled.
1: The animation function is disabled.
TRN 0 : The turning cycle function is enabled.
1: The turning cycle function is disabled.
MIL 0 : The milling cycle function is enabled.
1: The milling cycle function is disabled.
- 690 -
NOTE
Even though you change the settings of bits 0 (GID) and 1 (ANM)
and 2(TRN) and 3(MIL) of parameter No. 14856, the alarm
PW0000, "POWER MUST BE OFF" is not issued.
You must however turn on the power again before the new settings
can take effect.
14870 NAVIGROUP
NAVIGROUP : Group ID number of navigation which starts when [NAVI] soft-key is pushed.
When this parameter is set to 0 or the group ID is not specified in definition file,
“SELECT NAVIGATION” window is displayed.
[Valid data range] 0 to 127.
NOTE
When operation navigating should start by first method of start, set
parameter No.14870 to 0.
When operation navigating should start by second method of start,
set parameter No.14870 to a number more than 0.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27480 AFM OFI TID CSP
CSP This bit selects method of NC program conversion when the following commands are
executed.
(Method of NC program conversion)

Commands of
Subprogram Commands in Finishing cycle
CSP Custom macro peripheral axis
calling subprogram (G70)
control
0 × ○ × ×(*) ×
1 ○ × ○ ○ ○
○: Output
×: No output
(*) Figure commands to be executed G70 are outputted.
TID 0 : Tool information is displayed when machining cycle is executed.
1 : Tool information is displayed when T-code or D-code is commanded.
OFI 0 : Offset data can be inputted / outputted.
1 : Offset data can’t be inputted / outputted.
AFM 0 : The maximum number of elements is 90 on the screen for entering arbitrary figure. .
1 : The maximum number of elements is 300 on the screen for entering arbitrary figure.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27481 CSP NMA
NMA 0 : The alarm occurs when M198 command is executed in NC statement conversion.
1: The alarm does not occur when M198 command is executed in NC statement
conversion.
CSP 0 : 3-dimensional interference check status display position and other status display
positions are made the past position. (existing specification)
1: 3-dimensional interference check status display position and other status display
positions are made the lower right of the screen.
- 691 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27483 #7 G41 #1 #0
#0 0 : Automatic operation after changing to MANUAL GUIDE i screen from user

application is disabled.
1: Automatic operation after changing to MANUAL GUIDE i screen from user
application is enabled.
#1 0 : Change to user application screen after closing MAUAL GUIDE i window is
disabled.
1: Change to user application screen after closing MAUAL GUIDE i window is
enabled.
NOTE
When bit 1 of parameter No.27483 to 1, setting the bit 7 of
parameter No.27483 to “1” is necessary.
G41 0 : In NC program conversion, G41/G42 command can not be converted.

1: In NC program conversion, G41/G42 command can be converted.
NOTE
It is effective only at parameter No.27480#0=0.
#7 0 : Change to menu window when blank figure input window is closed by softkey
[CANCEL]
1: Change to base window when blank figure input window is closed by softkey
[CANCEL]
A.5.9 Parameters Related to Graphic Display

These parameters set graphic display.
14713 GRPSCALE
GRPSCALE : Scaling unit for graphic enlargement and reduction.
[Scaling unit] 64/GRPSCALE
[Valid data range] 0 to 255. (If 0 is set, 64 is assumed.)
14714 GRPMOVEH
GRPMOVEH : Graphic horizontal movement unit (dots)
[Valid data range] 0 to 255. (If 0 is set, 64 dots is assumed.)
14715 GRPMOVEV
GRPMOVEV : Graphic vertical movement unit (dots)
[Valid data range] 0 to 255. (If 0 is set, 35 dots is assumed.)
14716 GRPROTA
GRPROTA : Graphic rotation direction movement unit (angle)
[Valid data range] 0 to 255. (If 0 is set, 10 degrees is assumed.)
- 692 -
A.5.10 Parameters Related to Tool Drawing

The following tool drawing data needs to be defined to perform machining simulation.
(1) Tool drawing data for turning systems

Tool type General Screw Groove Round nose Straight tool
Data 1 Chip position Chip position Chip position Chip position Chip position
Data 2 Cutting edge length Cutting edge width Holder length Holder length Cutting edge length
Data 3 Holder length Holder length Holder width Holder width Holder length
Data 4 Holder width Holder width Holder width
Data 5 Holder length 2 Holder length 2
Data 6 Holder width 2 Holder width 2
(2) Tool drawing data for milling systems

Tool type Drill Chamfer Flat end mill Ball end mill
Data 1 Tool length Tool length Tool length Tool length
Data 2 Cutter length
Data 3 Shank length
Data 4 Shank diameter
Tool type Tap Reamer Boring Face mill

Data 1 Tool length Tool length Tool length Tool length
The tool drawing data is defined by parameters No. 27350 to 27383 below. When these parameters are set
to no values, simulation is performed by automatically inserting a constant value for each item.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27350 GTP
GTP 0 : When animate general tool, Tip position is in front
1: When animate general tool, Tip position is in rear
27351 GENR TIP LENGTH

(2-word type, FANUC standard settings=0)
GENR TIP LENGTH : Cutter length of general tool for animated drawing
[Unit of data] mm input (INI (No.0000#2)=0) : 0.001(mm)
inch input (INI (No.0000#2)=1) : 0.0001(inch)
Remarks)
If 0 is set in case of metric input (INI (No.0000#2)=0), default data will be 12mm. If
0 is set in case of inch input(INI (No.0000#2)=1), default data will be 0.4724inch.
27352 GENR HOLD LENGTH

GENR HOLD LENGTH : Holder length of general tool for animated drawing
Remarks)
- 693 -
27353 GENR HOLD WIDTH

GENR HOLD WIDTH : Holder width of general tool for animated drawing
Remarks)
27354 GENR HOLD LENGTH2

GENR HOLD LENGTH2 : Holder length2 of general tool for animated drawing
27355 GENR HOLD WIDTH2

GENR HOLD WIDTH2 : Holder width2 of general tool for animated drawing
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27356 TTP
TTP 0 : When animate threading tool, tip position is in front
1: When animate threading tool, tip position is in rear
27357 THREAD TIP WIDTH

THREAD TIP WIDTH : Tip width of threading tool for animated drawing
Remarks)
27358 THREAD HOLD LENGTH

THREAD HOLD LENGTH :Holder length of threading tool for animated drawing
Remarks)
27359 THREAD HOLD WIDTH

THREAD HOLD WIDTH : Holder width of threading tool for animated drawing
Remarks)
- 694 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27360 GVP
GVP 0 : When animate grooving tool tip position is in front
1: When animate grooving tool tip position is in rear
27361 GROOVE HOLD LENGTH

GROOVE HOLD LENGTH : Holder length of grooving tool for animated drawing
Remarks)
27362 GROOVE HOLD WIDTH

GROOVE HOLD WIDTH : Holder width of grooving tool for animated drawing
Remarks)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27363 BTP
BTP 0 : When animate button turning tool tip position is in front
1 : When animate button turning tool tip position is in rear
27364 BUTTON HOLD LENGTH

BUTTON HOLD LENGTH :Holder width of button turning tool for animated drawing
Remarks)
27365 BUTTON HOLD WIDTH

BUTTON HOLD WIDTH : Holder width of button turning tool for animated drawing
Remarks)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27366 STP
STP 0 : When animate straight tool, tip position is in front
1: When animate straight tool, tip position is in rear
- 695 -
27367 STRAI TIP LENGTH

STRAI TIP LENGTH : Tip length of straight tool for animated drawing
Remarks)
27368 STRAI HOLD LENGTH

STRAI HOLD LENGTH : Holder length of straight tool for animated drawing
Remarks)
27369 STRAI HOLD WIDTH

STRAI HOLD WIDTH : Holder width of straight tool for animated drawing
Remarks)
27370 STRAI HOLD LENGTH2

STRAI HOLD LENGTH2 : Holder length 2 of straight tool for animated drawing
27371 STRAI HOLD WIDTH2

STRAI HOLD WIDTH2 : Holder width 2 of straight tool for animated drawing
27372 DRILL TIP LENGTH

DRILL TIP LENGTH : Holder width of straight tool for animated drawing
Remarks)
27373 F E MIL TIP LENGTH

F E MIL TIP LENGTH : Tip length of flat end mill tool for animated drawing
Remarks)
- 696 -
27374 TAP TIP LENGTH
TAP TIP LENGTH : Tip length of tapping tool for animated drawing
Remarks)
27375 CHANFER CUTTER ANG

CHANFER CUTTER ANG Tool angle when a chamfering tool is drawn in animation
[Unit of data] 0.001°
27376 C SINK TIP LENGTH

C SINK TIP LENGTH : Tip length of counter sink tool for animated drawing
Remarks)
27377 C SINK CUT LENGTH

C SINK CUT LENGTH : Cutter length of counter sink tool for animated drawing
Remarks)
27378 C SINK SHANK LENGTH

C SINK SHANK LENGTH : Shank length of counter sink tool for animated drawing
Remarks)
If 0 is set in case of metric input (INI (No.0000#2)=0), default data will be 130mm.
If 0 is set in case of inch input(INI (No.0000#2)=1), default data will be 5.1181inch.
27379 C SINK SHANK DIA

C SINK SHANK DIA : Shank diameter of counter sink tool for animated drawing
Remarks)
- 697 -
27380 B E MIL TIP LENGTH

B E MIL TIP LENGTH : Shank diameter of counter sink tool for animated drawing
Remarks)
0 is set in case of inch input (INI (No.0000#2)=1), default data will be 1.9685inch.
27381 REAM TIP LENGTH

REAM TIP LENGTH : Tip length of reamer tool for animated drawing
Remarks)
27382 BORING TIP LENGTH

BORING TIP LENGTH : Tip length of boring tool for animated drawing
Remarks)
27383 F MIL TIP LENGTH

F MIL TIP LENGTH : Tip length of face mill tool for animated drawing
Remarks)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27384 VRP
(FANUC standard settings=00000000)
VRP 0 : The chip position is set on the front face when the multifunction tool is drawn in
animated drawing.
1: The chip position is set on the rear face when the multifunction tool is drawn in
animated drawing.
27385 HOLDER LENGTH

HOLDER LENGTH Holder length of the multifunction tool for animated drawing
Remarks)
- 698 -
27386 HOLDER WIDTH
HOLDER WIDTH Holder width of the multifunction tool for animated drawing
Remarks)
A.5.11 Parameters Related to Machining Simulation (Tool Path

Drawing)
These parameters set the colors used during tool path drawing.
• Specify color setting data with a 6-digit number in the format of “xxyyzz”.
(xx:Value for red, yy:Value for green, zz:Value for blue)
• The valid data range of each color value is 0 to 63. A value greater than 63 is interpreted as 63.
• For a number with less than six digits, all the unspecified digits are interpreted as high-order ones
and are all assumed 0.
• If these parameters are set to 0, their standard colors are assumed.
14772 PARTCOLOR
PARTCOLOR Color of a part figure during tool path drawing.
14773 BLANKCOLOR
BLANKCOLOR Color of blank figure during tool path drawing.
14774 PATHCOLOR
PATHCOLOR Color of a tool path during tool path drawing.
14775 AXISCOLOR
AXISCOLOR Color of a coordinate axis during tool path drawing.
14776 BACKCOLOR
BACKCOLOR Background color during tool path drawing.
14785 PATHCOL1
PATHCOL1 : Color of the path of a rapid traverse tool during tool path drawing.
14786 PATHCOL2
PATHCOL2 : Color of the path of a cutting feed tool during tool path drawing.
14787 PATHCOL3
PATHCOL3 : Color of the path of a threading tool during tool path drawing.
- 699 -
A.5.12 Parameters Related to Machining Simulation (Animation

Drawing)
A.5.12.1 Parameters related to AXIS of animation drawing
These parameters set the axial configuration of the machine.
14706 DRCTS1
(FANUC standard settings = 20 or 16)
DRCTS1 Number of Workpiece coordinate for main spindle

18 : Right-handed coordinate system, right = -Z, up = -X
X X Z Z Z
Z Z X X
X
16 17 18 19 20
FANUC standard settings = 20 :Vertical machining center/vertical lathe

FANUC standard settings = 16 :Horizontal machining center/horizontal lathe
14707 DRCTS2
(FANUC standard settings = 0 : Not use)
DRCTS 2 Number of Workpiece coordinate for sub spindle if existing

18 : Right-handed coordinate system, right = -Z, up = -X
These parameters set machining simulation.
14717 SMLCNO
SMLCNO : Rotate (Cs) axis number
[Valid data range] From 0 to the number of controlled axes
NOTE
1 In case of one Cs axis of main spindle, please be sure to set
parameter No.14717 only. If no Cs axis or Animation option, it is
unnecessary to set.
2 In case of two Cs axis with main and sub spindle, please be sure to
set parameters No.27301, No.27302 and No.27312 #0 (SPA). And
parameter No.14717 is used as working number for Cs axis, as
follows.
- 700 -
NOTE
3 When parameter No.27312#0 (SPA) = 1, parameter No. 14717 is
rewritten to the value of parameter No.27301 or No.27302 by a
spindle selection command (G1998). Therefore, in the case of
parameter No.27312 #0=1, please be sure to specify Spindle
selection command (G1998) before Milling cycles.
4 As to Spindle selection command (G1998), please refer to Section
3.5, “SETTING OF DATA FOR MACHINING SIMULATION” in the
Part II.
5 Please be sure to set the intra-path relative axis number.
14718 SMLRTNO
SMLRTNO : Rotate (Cs) axis number, which tilts tool head or table
[Valid data range] From 0 to the number of controlled axes
NOTE
Parameter No.14718 is used in Simulation or Turning cycles.
Therefore, if the machine has a rotate axis which tilts tool head or
table, please sure to set this parameter.
If no such axis or animation option, it is not necessary to set.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27001 TPC
TPC When "A", "B", or "E" is set in the "ROTATION AXIS NAME" item on the "ROT.
AXIS" tab on the cycle figure data input screen:
0 : Address "A", "B", or "E" is output as the tool path.
1 : Address "C" is output as the tool path.
NOTE
The MANUAL GUIDE i identifies the main spindle or subspindle
according to the axis name entered in the "ROTATION AXIS
NAME" item on the "ROT. AXIS" tab displayed on the cycle figure
data input screen: More specifically, it identifies the main spindle
when the rotation axis name is set to "C" or the subspindle when
the rotation axis name is set to "A", "B", or "E". When the
"ROTATION AXIS NAME" item is set to the name on the
subspindle side, those on the subspindle side set by parameter No.
27011 and 27012 are output as the C axis clamp/unclamp M codes
and address "C" is output as the tool path.
27301 ROTATE AXIS NO. (SP1)

(Byte type, FANUC standard settings = 0)
Rotation axis (Cs axis) number of Main spindle
[Related parameters] No.14717, No.27312#0 (SPA), #1 (INA), #2 (INS), No.27302
NOTE
1 Please be sure to specify Spindle selection command (G1998 S1)
before each Milling cycles.
- 701 -
NOTE
2 In case of one Cs axis of main spindle, please be sure to set
parameter No.14717 only. If no Cs axis or Animation option, it is
unnecessary to set.
3 In case of two Cs axis with main and sub spindle, please be sure to
set parameters No.27301, No.27302 and No.27312 #0 (SPA). And
parameter No.14717 is used as working number for Cs axis, as
follows.
4 When parameter No.27312#0 (SPA) = 1, parameter No. 14717 is
rewritten to the value of parameter No.27301 or No.27302 by a
spindle selection command (G1998). Therefore, in the case of
parameter No.27312 #0=1, please be sure to specify Spindle
selection command (G1998) before Milling cycles.
5 As to Spindle selection command (G1998), please refer to Section
3.5, “SETTING OF DATA FOR MACHINING SIMULATION” in the
Part II.
27302 ROTATE AXIS NO. (SP2)

Rotation axis (Cs axis) number of Sub spindle
[Related parameters] No.14717, No.27312#0 (SPA), #1 (INA), #2 (INS), No.27301
NOTE
1 Please be sure to specify Spindle selection command (G1998 S2)
before each Milling cycles.
27303 MTYPE
MTYPE : Type of machine mechanism
Type Controlled rotary axis Parameter setting for the axis

Without a rotary axis
0 Or Parameter No.14178 is a tool rotary axis.
With a tool rotary axis
Parameter No.14178 is a workpiece table
1 With a workpiece table rotary axis
rotary axis.
[Related parameters] No.27301, No.27305, No.27307
NOTE
1 No. of workpiece rotated axis (usually C-axis) is set to the
parameter No.14717. In the case of machine mechanism type=1,
this parameter must not be set to workpiece table rotary axis No.
2 Drawing of machining simulation is not available for a machine
which takes a tool rotary axis with a workpiece table rotary axis.
3 Drawing of machining simulation is not available for a machine
which has the rotary axis slant for the basic three axis.
4 Machine mechanism type=2(With a workpiece table rotary axis) is
not available with multi-path system or with a subspindle.
- 702 -
NOTE
5 The axis to set to the parameter No.14718 is only a rotary axis
about Y axis.
27332 QUILAXIS
MINMOV Axis number of the quill axis of the boring facing-and-drilling machine (for machining
simulation) (only for the Series 30i/31i/32i)
[Unit of data] Integer
27333 CENTAXIS
MINMOV Axis number of the boring axis of the boring facing-and-drilling machine (for machining
simulation) (only for the Series 30i/31i/32i)
[Unit of data] Integer (1 to 3)
NOTE
1 Set any of the three basic axes in parameter No. 27333.
2 In parameter No. 27332, you can set an axis parallel to the axis set
in parameter No. 27333.
3 The axes set in parameter Nos. 27332 and 27333 must use the
same increment system (IS-A/B/C/D/E and diameter/radius).
4 If the setting of parameter No. 27332 or No. 27333 is not greater
than 0 or exceeds the maximum number of axes, quill axis drawing
is not performed.
5 Changes to parameter Nos. 27332 and 27333 take effect only after
the power is turned on the next time. When you change any of their
settings, you should turn the power off and then back on.
27334 RECTAXIS
RECTAXIS Center axis for rotation of the workpiece in rectangular solid material (for machining
simulation)
0 : Z axis
1 : Y axis
A.5.12.2 Parameters related to animation drawing in general

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14859 CR2 CR1
CR1 0 : The forward rotation direction of the C axis (workpiece rotation axis) is defined as
the direction from the +X axis to the +Y axis about the Z axis in machining
simulation on spindle 1.
1: The forward rotation direction of the C axis (workpiece rotation axis) is defined as
the direction from the +X axis to the -Y axis about the Z axis in machining
CR2 0 : The forward rotation direction of the C axis (workpiece rotation axis) is defined as
the direction from the +X axis to the +Y axis about the Z axis in machining
1: The forward rotation direction of the C axis (workpiece rotation axis) is defined as
the direction from the +X axis to the -Y axis about the Z axis in machining
- 703 -
27300 SCALE OF THE BLANK

Scale magnification for automatic scaling in the machining simulation function
[Unit of data] 10 %
[Valid data range] 0 to 20 (When 0 is set, 100% is assumed.)
27305 TBLDISTX
(2-word type, FANUC standard settings = 0)
TBLDISTX : In the case that type of machine mechanism is type 1(With a workpiece table rotary axis),
distance (X-axis) from the rotary center point to the rotary standard point of drawing
blank figure. The direction of + X axis is “+” for this data.
27307 TBLDISTZ
TBLDISTZ : In the case that type of machine mechanism is type 1(With a workpiece table rotary axis),
distance (Z-axis) from the rotary center point to the rotary standard point of drawing
blank figure. The direction of - Z-axis is “+” for this data.
Column blank form Rectangular solid blank form
Z WORK ORIGIN Z Z
REMOVAL K
X
Height of blank
X
Length of blank
Parameter No.27307
WORK ORIGIN X
Center point of rotary table
Parameter No.27307
Parameter No.27305
Center point of rotary table
Parameter No.27305
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27310 ERA TLD ATL WOK G10 AXN GCN PRC
PRC 0 : The soft-key of [PAUSE] is displayed on the animation soft-key row.

1: The soft-key of [PROCES] is displayed instead of the soft-key [PAUSE].
GCN 0 : The reference position for enlargement and reduction is the center of the graphic
screen (new specification).
1: The reference position for enlargement and reduction is the center of a figure to be
drawn (conventional specification).
(This setting is valid for drawing during machining, machining simulation, and
arbitrary figure drawing.)
AXN 0 : The coordinate axis name of animation drawing is not displayed (conventional
specification).
1: The coordinate axis name of animation drawing is displayed (new specification).
- 704 -
G10 0 : When the pitch error compensation data input (G10L50), three-dimensional error
compensation data input (G10L51), or programmable parameter input (G10L52) is
specified during machining simulation, machining simulation is stopped (only for
the Series 30i/31i/32i, Series0i-F/0i-D).
1: Even when the pitch error compensation data input (G10L50), three-dimensional
error compensation data input (G10L51), or programmable parameter input
(G10L52) is specified during machining simulation, machining simulation is not
stopped and the command is ignored (only for the Series 30i/31i/32i, Series0i-F/0i-
D).
WOK 0 : A blank figure is displayed on the tool path drawing screen or the machining drawing
screen when the drawing screen is opened.
1: A blank figure is displayed on the tool path drawing screen or the machining
drawing screen when a G code for blank figure definition is executed.
ATL 0 : The synchronous drawing tab in the machining start window is not displayed.
1: The synchronous drawing tab in the machining start window is displayed.
TLD 0 : The tool definition tab in the machining start command window is not displayed.
1: The tool definition tab in the machining start command window is displayed.
ERA 0 : In machining simulation (tool path), the tool path is deleted after enlargement,
reduction, movement, or rotation. (conventional specification)
1: In machining simulation (tool path), the tool path is not deleted after enlargement,
reduction, movement, or rotation. (new specification) (only for the Series
30i/31i/32i-A/B, 0i-F/0i-D. About the Series 30i/31i/31i-A, it’s available in BY70
software/edition 20 and after.)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27311 BDT BD2 SPD DRC TOC COL ACD ITF
ITF 0 : Animated simulation continues even when the interference check function issues an
interference alarm.
1: Animated simulation is stopped temporarily even when the interference check
function issues an interference alarm.
NOTE
Parameters No. 27310 and No. 27311 can not be used in some
editions.
ACD 0 : Even If the workpiece coordinate is changed in performing machining simulation,

the drawing is performed on the same workpiece coordinate as one on the top of
simulation.(The workpiece coordinate by drawing definition of blank form block is
same as the continuous-state workpiece coordinate on the top of simulation.)
1: If the workpiece coordinate is changed in performing machining simulation, the
drawing is performed on it.
NOTE
1 This parameter is available only in drawing of machining simulation.
Drawing during machining is always performed on the same
workpiece coordinate as the top of machining.
2 In multi-paths system, this parameter is a common parameter at all
paths.
- 705 -
NOTE
3 In the case of bit 1 (ACD) of parameter No.27311 = 1, spindle at
which animated simulation is performed is the last commanded by
G1998 command at one of paths. In the case of bit 1 (ACD) of
parameter No.27311 = 0, spindle at which animated simulation is
performed is the last commanded by G1992 or G1998 command at
one of paths.
COL 0 : The color of a tool path is not changed even when the tool is changed.
1: The color of a tool path is changed each time the tool is changed.
TOC 0 : Tool drawing is not cleared when the T0 command is issued.
1: Tool drawing is cleared when the T0 command is issued.
DRC 0 : Checking of Y≠0 is not done before Turning cycle in Machining simulation.
1: Checking of Y≠0 is done before Turning cycle in Machining simulation. (only for
the Series 30i/31i/32i)
SPD 0 : Anime simulation with the following tools is executed by the speed priority
1 : Anime simulation with the following tools is executed by the cutting off priority.
- Drill
- Chamfering
- Flat end mill
- Ball end mill
- Tap
- Reamer
- Boring
- Face mill
NOTE
When setting as SPD=1, anime simulation with the
above-mentioned tool is done by the cutting off priority. In this
case, it executes so as not to generate the residual work, and the
interference alarm is not generated.
BDT, BD2 Optional block signal BDTn is enabled or disabled as shown below in machining
simulation (only for the Series 30i/31i/32i).
The optional block skip addition function is an optional function.
BDT=0 BDT=1
BD2=0 All disabled All enabled
BD2=1 BDT7/BDT8/BDT9 are enabled. All enabled
NOTE
1 This parameter is enabled only in machining simulation.
2 If BDTn is enabled in machining simulation, the same signal is used
in actual operation and machining simulation. Accordingly, when
using BDTn in machining simulation, make sure that an optional
skip is not used in actual operation and exercise extreme care
when using it.
- 706 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27312 WCA BRT INS INA SPA
SPA 0 : The rotation axis number for simulation based on spindle 1 or spindle 2 with a
subspindle attached is not switched by a spindle selection command.
1 : The rotation axis number for simulation based on spindle 1 or spindle 2 with a
subspindle attached is switched by a spindle selection command.
<Related parameters : No.14717, No.27312#1, #2, No.27301, No.27302>
NOTE
When bit 0 (SPA) of parameter No.27312 = 1, No. 14717 is
rewritten to the value of No.27301 (in the case of G1998 S1) or
No.27302 (in the case of G1998 S2) by a spindle selection
command (G1998). So, please be sure to specify a spindle
selection command when bit 0 (SPA) of parameter No.27312 = 1.
INA 0 : Bit 2 (INS) of parameter No.27312 is not available.

1: Bit 2 (INS) of parameter No.27312 is available.
NOTE
It is necessary to set bit 0 (SPA) of parameter No.27312 to 1.
INS 0 : After animated simulation, No.14717 (the rotation axis number for simulation) is
rewritten to the value of No.27301 (axis number of Main spindle).
1: After animated simulation, No.14717 (the rotation axis number for simulation) is
rewritten to the value of No.27302 (axis number of Sub spindle).
NOTE
It is necessary to set bits 0 (SPA) and 1 (INA) of parameter
No.27312 to 1.
BRT 0: Clockwise is treated as positive rotation direction of the axis specified in the
parameter No.14718.
1: Counterclockwise is treated as positive rotation direction of the axis specified in the
parameter No.14718.
WCA 0: Cannot be changed (disabled) the beginning angle for the blank cutout display.
1: Can be changed (enabled) the beginning angle for the blank cutout display.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27314 #7 #5 #4 #3 SDY SDZ
(FANUC standard settings=00000000)
SDZ 0 : The material figure about the Z axis is displayed on the material definition screen.
1: The material figure about the Z axis is not displayed on the material definition
screen.
SDY 0 : The material figure about the Y axis is not displayed on the material definition
screen.
1: The material figure about the Y axis is displayed on the material definition screen.
#3 0 : 2 windows machining simulation is not available.
1: 2 windows machining simulation is available.
After setting this parameter, please power on again to make this function available.
#4 0 : Main spindle is displayed on the left side.
1: Sub spindle is displayed on the left side.
- 707 -
#5 0 : Main spindle is displayed on the right side.

1: Sub spindle is displayed on the right side.
Available combination of the parameter No.27314#4 and #5 is as follows.
No.27314#4 No.27314#5 Setting

0 1 OK
1 0 OK
1 1 NG
0 0 NG
One of the following hardware is necessary to use parameters #3,#4,#5.

(1) CNC with 15”color LCD
#7 0 : Large window display function of animated drawing is not available.

1: Large window display function of animated drawing is available.
One of the following hardware is necessary to use parameters #7.

(1) CNC with 15”color LCD or 10” color LCD B
27320 BLOCKNO
BLOCKNO Number of blocks in which macro statements in the execution macro program are
continuously processed during execution of a G4-digit command of the MANUAL
GUIDE i in machining simulation. (only for the Series 0i-F/0i-D, 30i/31i/32i)
[Unit of data] Integer (0 to 20)
(A value of 0 or 20 or greater is assumed to be 20.)
27323 MINMOV
MINMOV : Least command increment for the tool in machining simulation
[Unit of data] 1 [dot]
27335 Number of speed steps for the machining simulation speed level
(Byte type, FANUC standard settings=0)
The number of speed steps for the machining simulation speed level can be specified
between 2 and 9.
Example) If you want to have 3 levels of simulation speed , then set parameter No.27335
to 3.
NOTE
If 0, 1, or a negative value is set in parameter No.27335, then the
function is disabled. If a value bigger than nine is set in parameter
No.27335, then it is equivalent to set parameter No.27335 to 9.
- 708 -
27336 Waiting time betw een blocks at low est speed of simulation
[Unit of data] 8msec
Waiting time between each block at the lowest speed of simulation. A value from 1
(8msec) to 127 (1016msec) can be specified as the waiting time between blocks at the
lowest speed
NOTE
When 0 or a negative value is set in parameter No.27336 then it is
equivalent to set parameter No.27336 to 64(512msc).
If the machining simulation is executed at the highest speed, then the waiting time
between blocks becomes “0”. It is the same execution speed as if the function is disabled.
If the machining simulation is executed at the lowest speed, then the waiting time
becomes blocks specified by the parameter No.27336.
If the machining simulation is executed in an interval between the minimum and the
maximum speed, then the waiting time is adjusted according to the selected speed step.
NOTE
If the setting value of the parameter No.27335 is bigger than the
value of the parameter No.27336, then the number of speed steps
for the machining simulation speed level is equivalent to be the
same value with the setting in No.27336.
A.5.12.3 Parameters related to machining time display

27390 M-CODE AVERAGE TIME
M-CODE AVERAGE TIME Execution time of averaged M code
This parameter is used for calculating machining time.
[Unit of data] 10(msec)
27391 S-CODE AVERAGE TIME

S-CODE AVERAGE TIME Execution time of averaged S code
27392 T-CODE AVERAGE TIME

T-CODE AVERAGE TIME Execution time of averaged T code
- 709 -
A.5.12.4 Parameters related to color of animation drawing

These parameters set machining simulation animation colors.
14777 ANMCOL1
ANMCOL1 : Color of part figures during animation.
14778 ANMCOL2
ANMCOL2 : Color of material cut-off portions during animation.
14779 ANMCOL3
ANMCOL3 : Color of the tool during animation.
14780 ANMCOL4
ANMCOL4 : Color of the coordinate axes during animation.
14781 ANMCOL5
ANMCOL5 : Color of the background during animation.
If these parameters are set to 0, their standard colors are assumed.
A.5.12.5 Settings for Programmable data input

Machining simulation in the Series 0i-F/0i-D, Series 30i/31i/32iis performed in the background.
Therefore, data input by the following G10 commands is prohibited during machining simulation and, if
the data input is specified, the stop state is entered.
• Pitch error compensation data input(G10L50)
• 3-dimensional error compensation data input(G10L51)
• Programmable parameter input(G10L52)
If this parameter is set, the following G10 commands specified during machining simulation can be
ignored.
• Pitch error compensation data input(G10L50)
• 3-dimensional error compensation data input(G10L51)
• Programmable parameter input(G10L52)
Accordingly, if the custom macro (#3010) determines whether animation drawing is in progress, the G10
command specified during machining simulation can be ignored without the processing for skipping the
G10 command being specified in the program.
- 710 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27310 G10
G10 0 : When the pitch error compensation data input (G10L50), three-dimensional error
compensation data input (G10L51), or programmable parameter input (G10L52) is
specified during machining simulation, machining simulation is stopped (only for
the Series 30i/31i/32i, Series0i-F/0i-D).
1: Even when the pitch error compensation data input (G10L50), three-dimensional
error compensation data input (G10L51), or programmable parameter input
(G10L52) is specified during machining simulation, machining simulation is not
stopped and the command is ignored (only for the Series 30i/31i/32i,
Series0i-F/0i-D).
A.5.12.6 Parameter related to alarms about overlap with parts or

blanks
If this parameter is set, a warning can be issued when an arbitrarily-shaped part element and blank
element overlap one another in turning or grooving with turning during machining simulation. The related
machining types are shown below.
(1) Turning
Outer surface rough cutting (G1120), inner surface rough cutting (G1121), end face rough cutting
(G1122)
Outer surface semifinishing (G1123), inner surface semifinishing (G1124), end face semifinishing
(G1125)
Outer surface finishing (G1126), inner surface finishing (G1127), end face finishing (G1128)
(2) Grooving with turning

Outer surface rough cutting (G1130), inner surface rough cutting (G1131), end face rough cutting
(G1132)
Outer surface rough grinding finishing (G1133), inner surface rough grinding finishing (G1134), end
face rough grinding finishing (G1135)
Outer surface finishing (G1136), inner surface finishing (G1137), end face finishing (G1138)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27100 OVE
OVE 0 : When a part element and blank element overlap in turning or grooving with turning,
no alarm is issued.
1: When a part element and blank element overlap in turning or grooving with turning,
alarm is issued.
A.5.12.7 Parameter related to the T0 command during animation

drawing
When offset cancellation is executed concurrently with the T0 command during execution of the
operation of machining simulation (animation), the tool moves to a position not including the offset
value.
Since the tool does not originally move during execution of offset cancellation, delete the tool at the
timing of T0 command to prevent tool drawing from being performed at an invalid position.
- 711 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27311 TOC
TOC 0 : Tool drawing is not deleted at offset number 0 (T0).

1: Tool drawing is deleted at offset number 0 (T0).
The specifications of machining simulation are described below.
(1) For machining simulation (animation)

<a> Tool drawing is deleted.
When offset number 0 (T0) is detected, tool drawing is deleted.
<b> Tool drawing is restarted.
When the next offset number execution, the tool is displayed from the program
specification point in the workpiece coordinate system.
(2) For machining simulation (tool path)

<a> Tool path is stopped.
When offset number 0 (T0) is detected, the tool path is not displayed.
<b> Tool path is restarted.
When the next move command execution, The tool path is displayed from the
program specification point in the workpiece coordinate system.
A.5.13 Parameters Related to Program Coordinate System Switching

and Offset Memory Switching
Settings related to program coordinate system switching and offset memory switching are made.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14855 PRC
PRC 0 : When the Program Coordinate System Changing Function is enabled, the coordinate
system on the first spindle side is the program coordinate system-1 and the
coordinate system on the second spindle side is the program coordinate system-2.
1: When the Program Coordinate System Changing Function is enabled, the coordinate
system on the first spindle side is the program coordinate system-2 and the
coordinate system on the second spindle side is the program coordinate system-1.
27180 G1992W1M
G1992W1M : The M-code output to change to the program coordinate system-1 when G1992 S** W1
block is executed.
27181 G1992W2M
G1992W2M : The M-code output to change to the program coordinate system-2 when G1992 S** W2
block is executed.
27184 G1992W1O
G1992W1O : The P-code macro program number called to change to the program coordinate system-1
when G1992 S** W1 block is executed.
- 712 -
27185 G1992W2O
G1992W2O : The P-code macro program number called to change to the program coordinate system-2
when G1992 S** W2 block is executed.
27188 PGC1IC
PGC1IC : Icon number for program coordinate system-1. (Each Path)

27189 PGC2IC
PGC1IC : Icon number for program coordinate system-2. (Each Path)

The values set to parameters No.27188 and No.27189 must be selected from the following table.
Icon number 11 12 13 14
Icon
Icon
Icon
If the icon number which does not exist the above table is set to the parameter, the icon for selected
coordinate system is not displayed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14857 PN3 PN2 PN1 PN0
PN0 to PN3 These bits select an icon displayed on the virtual tool tip data input soft key on the tool
offset screen for program coordinate system 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27190 PN3 PN2 PN1 PN0
PN0 to PN3 These bits select an icon displayed on the virtual tool tip data input soft key on the tool
offset screen for program coordinate system 2.
PN3 PN2 PN1 PN0 Number of the icon to be displayed
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1 1
0 0 1 0 2
0 0 1 1 3
0 1 0 0 4
0 1 0 1 5
0 1 1 0 6
0 1 1 1 7
1 0 0 0 8
1 1 1 1 15
When a combination other than the above is selected, an icon number of 0 is assumed.
Number Icons of virtual tool tip soft keys to be displayed Reference
Specified by bit 0 (MT1) of parameter No.14702 (= 0 vertical type: 5, = 1
0
horizontal type: 1)
- 713 -
Number Icons of virtual tool tip soft keys to be displayed Reference

X
1
Z
X
2
Z
Z
3
X
Z
4
X
Z
5
X
Z
6
X
X
7
Z
X
8
Z
15 No icons are displayed.
A.5.14 Parameters Related to Tool Management Functions

These parameters are for the settings for tool management functions.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14823 STS TLD LIA LIF TMG MSR TOF ORT
ORT 0 : The screen for associating a tool number with a compensation number is not
displayed.
1: The screen for associating a tool number with a compensation number is displayed.
TOF 0 : The per-tool-number tool offset setting screen is not displayed.
1: The per-tool-number tool offset setting screen is displayed.
MSR 0 : The compensation type, tool number, and group number input fields are not
displayed on the measurement screen.
1: The compensation type, tool number, and group number input fields are displayed
on the measurement screen.
TMG 0 : The tool management data setting screen is not displayed.
1: The tool management data setting screen is displayed.
LIF 0 : The tool life management data setting screen is not displayed.
1: The tool life management data setting screen is displayed.
LIA 0 : The screen of Tool Life Data List is not displayed.
1: The screen of Tool Life Data List is displayed.
- 714 -
TLD 0 : The soft-key for changing screen from MANUAL GUIDE i to Tool Management
Data Table is not displayed.
1: The soft-key for changing screen from MANUAL GUIDE i to Tool Management
Data Table is displayed.
STS 0 : When a compensation type is specified, the compensation type is not displayed in
the status display area.
1: When a compensation type is specified, the compensation type is displayed in the
status display area.
14824 OFSRELTL
OFSRELTL : Start compensation number to be associated with a tool number.

A warning is issued when this parameter is set to 0 or when an attempt is made to
establish the correspondence between compensation numbers and tool numbers.
14825 OFSTYPNO
OFSTYPO : Number of compensation types (0 to 9)

14845 TABORDER1
TABORDER1 Number representing the order in which the tabs on the tool management screen are
displayed
The order in which the tool management data, magazine information, tool offset, and tool
information tabs are displayed can be changed.
Set a number from 1 to 4 that represents the order in which the tabs are displayed. This
parameter needs to be set together with parameter No. 14846.
Place Corresponding tab

Ones place Tool management data tab
Tens place Magazine information tab
Hundreds place Tool offset tab
Thousands place Tool information tab
The default value is 4321.
14846 TABORDER2
TABORDER2 Number representing the order in which the tabs on the tool management screen are
displayed
The order in which the tool figure data, tool attachment history, and tool detachment
history tabs are displayed can be changed.
Set a number from 5 to 7 that represents the order in which the tabs are displayed. This
parameter needs to be set together with parameter No. 14845.
Place Corresponding tab

Ones place Tool figure data tab
Tens place Tool attachment history tab
Hundreds place Tool detachment history tab
The default value is 765.
- 715 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14855 TLM
TLM 0 : The tool management data and magazine management data screens are not displayed
on the MANUAL GUIDE i screen.
1: The tool management data and magazine management data screens are displayed on
A.5.15 Parameters Related to Multi-path Lathe

These parameters make settings about multi-path lathes in general.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14702 SUB
SUB 0 : No sub-spindle is provided.

1: A sub-spindle is provided.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14701 FSP FMP FSE
FSE 0 : Tool post 1 cannot be used with spindle 2.

NOTE
FSE is available in the case of bit 1 (SUB) of parameter No.14702
= 1 only.
FMP 0 : Tool post 1 is placed above spindle 1.

FSP 0 : Tool post 1 is placed above spindle 2.
NOTE
FSP is available in the case of bit 1 (SUB) of parameter No.14702
= 1 and bit 1 (FSE) of parameter No.14701 = 1 only.
14864 VOIDPATH
VOIDPATH Setting of an invalid path number

The paths from 1 to the path number set by this parameter are enabled and their
exceptional paths are prevented from being displayed on the MANUAL GUIDE i screen.
When this parameter is set to 0, all paths are enabled.
VOIDPATH Enabled path

3 Paths 1 to 3 are enabled.
2 Paths 1 and 2 are enabled.
1 Only path 1 (single path) is enabled.
Others All paths are enabled.
27309 DATA
DATA : R signal for selected path simulation in Multi path lathe function
(The first figure is “bit” and other figure is the R signal number.)
- 716 -
In the multi-path lathe, the machining simulation is performed only at the selected path by
R signal that is set at this parameter.
For example, with 2 paths system
- At Path 1, the parameter No.27309=1237 (R123.7 is 1)
- At Path 2, the parameter No.27309=11237 (R1123.7 is 1)
The waiting M codes in all paths are ignored, if any signal of all paths is not ON.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27400 MPV MPC CSP SPT
SPT 0 : Tool post is selection by the software key
1: Tool post is selection by the HEAD switch signal
(common parameter among paths)
CSP 0 : 3 turrets simultaneous machining programming function is ineffective.
1 : 3 turrets simultaneous machining programming function is effective.
NOTE
This function requires MANUAL GUIDE i Multi Path Lathe option
(S786).
MPC 0 : Data of first path is displayed on the left ,Data of second path is displayed on the right,
in all path concurrent display screen for 2 path system.
1 : Data of first path is displayed on the right ,Data of second path is displayed on the left,
in all path concurrent display screen for 2 path system.
MPV 0 : The following data for machining simulation aren’t in each path.
1 : The following data for machining simulation are in each path.
(1) Blank figure
(2) Direction of drawing coordinate
(3) Status of cut display / not cut display
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27401 SSP SMP SSE SME
SME 0 : Tool post 2 cannot be used with spindle 1.
SSE 0 : Tool post 2 cannot be used with spindle 2.
NOTE
SSE is available in the case of bit 1 (SUB) of parameter No.14702
= 1 only.
SMP 0 : Tool post 2 is placed above spindle 1.

NOTE
SMP is available in the case of bit 0 (SME) of parameter No.27401
= 1 only.
SSP 0 : Tool post 2 is placed above spindle 2.

- 717 -
NOTE
SSP is available in the case of bit 1 (SUB) of parameter No.14702
= 1 and bit 1 (SSE) of parameter No.27401 = 1 only.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27402 TSP TMP TSE TME
TME 0 : Tool post 3 cannot be used with spindle 1.
TSE 0 : Tool post 3 cannot be used with spindle 2.
NOTE
TSE is available in the case of bit 1 (SUB) of parameter No.14702
= 1 only.
TMP 0 : Tool post 3 is placed above spindle 1.

NOTE
TMP is available in the case of bit 0 (TME) of parameter No.27402
= 1 only.
TSP 0 : Tool post 3 is placed above spindle 2.

1 : Tool post 3 is placed under spindle 2.
NOTE
TSP is available in the case of bit 1 (SUB) of parameter No.14702
= 1 and bit 1 (TSE) of parameter No.27402 = 1 only.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27403 4SP 4MP 4SE 4ME
4ME 0 : Tool post 4 cannot be used with spindle 1.
4SE 0 : Tool post 4 cannot be used with spindle 2.
NOTE
4SE is available in the case of bit 1 (SUB) of parameter No.14702
= 1 only.
4MP 0 : Tool post 4 is placed above spindle 1.

NOTE
4MP is available in the case of bit 0 (4ME) of parameter No.27403
= 1 only.
4SP 0 : Tool post 4 is placed above spindle 2.

- 718 -
NOTE
4SP is available in the case of bit 1 (SUB) of parameter No.14702
= 1 and bit 1 (4SE) of parameter No.27403 = 1 only.
27410 P1ICON
P1ICON : ICON number when path-1 is selected
27411 P2ICON
27412 P3ICON
27413 P4ICON
=0: nothing
=1: path-1 with lower direction and opposite to another (2 path system)
=2: path-1 with upper direction and opposite to another (2 path system)
=3: path-2 with upper direction and opposite to another (2 path system)
=4: path-2 with lower direction and opposite to another (2 path system)
=5: path-2 with upper direction and parallel to another (2 path system)
=6: path-2 with lower direction and parallel to another (2 path system)
=10: single path-1 with lower direction (3 path system)
=11: right side path-1 with upper direction (3 path system)
=12: left side path-1 with upper direction (3 path system)
=13: single path-1 with upper direction (3 path system)
=14: right side path-1 with lower direction (3 path system)
=15: left side path-1 with lower direction (3 path system)
=22: single side path-2 with lower direction (3 path system)
=32: single side path-3 with lower direction (3 path system)
=101: 1
=102: 2
=103: 3
=104: 4
=111: R
- 719 -
=112: L
Icon number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6
Icon
Icon number 10 11 12 13 14 15
Icon
Icon number 20 21 22 23 24 25
Icon
Icon number 30 31 32 33 34 35
Icon
Icon number 101 102 103 104 111 112
Icon
A.5.16 Parameters Related to the Color Palette
A.5.16.1 Parameters related to the color palette for screen display

These parameters set the colors used to display screen components.
Color setting data for a screen display color number* (1 to 16)
14480 DSPCOL0
DSPCOL0 : Color of the special character.

If the value is 0, the color of the special character is red (630000).
14724 DSPCOL1
DSPCOL1 : Color of the cursor in the program display section on the base screen.
14725 DSPCOL2
DSPCOL2 : Used to display alarms in the system title display section.
14726 DSPCOL3
DSPCOL3 : Used to display the mode and line number in the system title display section.
- 720 -
14727 DSPCOL4
DSPCOL4 : Used to display the background of the alarm indication and the load meter.
14728 DSPCOL5
DSPCOL5 : Used to display the background of the title in the status display section, soft key
characters, item name characters, and the scroll box of the scroll bar.
14729 DSPCOL6
DSPCOL6 : Used to display the serial numbers of selection screens.
14730 DSPCOL7
DSPCOL7 : Used to display the background of the system title display section.
14731 DSPCOL8
DSPCOL8 : Used to display characters in the title section.
14732 DSPCOL9
DSPCOL9 : Used to display the mode on the base screen and the material elements of arbitrary
figures.
14733 DSPCOL10
DSPCOL10 : Used to display frames.
14734 DSPCOL11
DSPCOL11 : Used to display cells that cannot be edited by the process list edit function.
14735 DSPCOL12
DSPCOL12 : Used to display the background of the status display section.
14736 DSPCOL13
DSPCOL13 : Used to display the bar of the load meter.
14737 DSPCOL14
DSPCOL14 : Used to display the background of the cursor mode.
14738 DSPCOL15
DSPCOL15 : Used to display window shadows.
14739 DSPCOL16
DSPCOL16 : Used to display the background of the base screen.
- 721 -
If these parameters are set to 0, the following values are used as their respective initial
values.
Parameter No.14724 = 636300 Yellow

Parameter No.14725 = 630000 Red
Parameter No.14726 = 003200 Green
Parameter No.14728 = 000063 Blue
Parameter No.14729 = 420042 Purple (pinkish)
Parameter No.14730 = 323260 Light ultramarine
Parameter No.14731 = 636363 White
Parameter No.14732 = 163616 Bright green
Parameter No.14733 = 000000 Black
Parameter No.14734 = 121212 Very dark gray
Parameter No.14735 = 484848 Bright gray
Parameter No.14736 = 006363 Bright, light blue
Parameter No.14737 = 202060 Light ultramarine
Parameter No.14738 = 242424 Dark gray
Parameter No.14739 = 404040 Rather bright gray
A.5.16.2 Parameters related to the color palette for icon display

These parameters set the color palette colors used to display icons.
Color setting data for an ICOCOL* screen display color number* (1 to 16)
14740 ICOCOL1
14741 ICOCOL2
14742 ICOCOL3
14743 ICOCOL4
14744 ICOCOL5
14745 ICOCOL6
14746 ICOCOL7
14747 ICOCOL8
14748 ICOCOL9
14749 ICOCOL10
14750 ICOCOL11
14751 ICOCOL12
- 722 -
14752 ICOCOL13
14753 ICOCOL14
14754 ICOCOL15
14755 ICOCOL16
values.

Parameter No.14744 = 323260 Light purple
Parameter No.14745 = 480040 Dark pink
Parameter No.14747 = 164016 Bright green
Parameter No.14749 = 006060 Bright, light blue
Parameter No.14751 = 121224 Navy blue
Parameter No.14752 = 320000 Dark red
A.5.16.3 Parameters related to the color palette for guidance display

These parameters set the colors used to display guides.
Color setting data for a GIDCOL* screen display color* (1 to 16)
14756 GIDCOL1
GIDCOL 1 : Material color.
14757 GIDCOL2
GIDCOL2 : Material frame color.
14758 GIDCOL3
GIDCOL3 : Tool color.
14759 GIDCOL4
GIDCOL4 : Tool frame color.
- 723 -
14760 GIDCOL5
GIDCOL5 : Tool path (cutting feed).
14761 GIDCOL6
GIDCOL6 : Tool path (rapid traverse).
14762 GIDCOL7
GIDCOL7 : Dimensional line.
14763 GIDCOL8
GIDCOL8 : Character color (unselected character).
14764 GIDCOL9
GIDCOL9 : Character color (selected character).
14765 GIDCOL10
GIDCOL10 : Portion to be cut.
14766 GIDCOL11
GIDCOL11 : Finishing allowance.
14767 GIDCOL12
GIDCOL12 : Reserved.
14768 GIDCOL13
GIDCOL13 : Reserved.
14769 GIDCOL14
GIDCOL14 : Explanation of measurement (static sentence)
14770 GIDCOL15
GIDCOL15 : Explanation of measurement (dynamic sentence)
14771 GIDCOL16
GIDCOL16 : Background color.
values.

Parameter No.14759 = 006060 Light blue
- 724 -
Parameter No.14767 = 000000 Black (reserved)
Parameter No.14768 = 000000 Black (reserved)
A.5.17 Parameters Related to Handle Machining

These parameters are for the settings for handle machining.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14858 PBH TST TLD HDP
HDP The position of Guidance message is as follows.

0 : Approach handle is displayed at the left side, and Guidance handle is displayed at
the right side.
1 : Approach handle is displayed at the right side, and Guidance handle is displayed at
the left side.
TLD 0 : The tool position on the graphic window is displayed as a cross.
1 : The tool position on the graphic window is displayed as a circle. (Note)
NOTE
The radius is a tool nose radius (Lathe) or a tool radius (Machining
center).
TST 0 : The tool information is specified by [NOSE R] and [VIRT.TIP] (Lathe), or [TOOL
DIA.] (Machining center).
1 : The tool information is specified by [OFFSET NO.].
PBH 0 : Programming by handle is available.
1 : Programming by handle is not available.
27457 Work coordinate system during handle machining
Work coordinate system during handle machining is specified as follows.

6 : Right-handed coordinate system, right = +X, up = +Y
27458 View coordinate of graphic window for handle machining
View coordinate system of graphic window for handle machining is specified as follows.
6 : Right-handed coordinate system, right = +X, up = +Y
- 725 -
27460 Head address of the R-signal used by the output data for auxiliary function commands
The head address of the internal relay (R-signal) of the PMC used by the output data for
auxiliary function commands is set. In output data, the data area in 2 bytes from the
address, which is set to this parameter is needed. This parameter is valid when the value is
set to 0.
27461 Time which is assumed that handle machining is stop (msec)
When the movement is stopped longer than the specified time after the handle is operated,
it is assumed the pause of the block. This parameter is valid when the value is set to 0.
27462 Standard value which is assumed that spindle speed is changed (r.p.m)
When the variation of spindle speed goes over to the specified value, the real spindle
speed is outputted automatically. This parameter is assumed to 1 when the value is set to
0.
A.5.18 Other Parameters

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3100 SKY
SKY 0 : MANUAL GUIDE i is used excluding a small MDI unit.

1: MANUAL GUIDE i is used with a small MDI unit.
NOTE
Because 8.4” LCD of Series 0i-D is a small MDI unit, please set
No.3100#2 to 1.
Only when it uses a small MDI unit in Series 0i-F/30i-B, please set
No.3100#2 to 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11354 HPM
HPM 0 : High speed program management is disabled.

1: High speed program management is enabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11370 DHS
DHS 0 : In case that a program data is not saved in High speed program management, the
warning is not displayed on the status display.
1: In case that a program data is not saved in High speed program management, the
warning is displayed on the status display.
14489 STARTSIG
STARTSIG R signal used for the application activating signal is set.

The first digit is bit, and the second digit or more are the numbers of R signal.
- 726 -
Setting example) Parameter No.14489=1237 is bit 7 of signal R123.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14791 IFF SKY ANC
ANC 0 : Dynamic axis name changing is not available.

1: Dynamic axis name changing is available.
SKY 0 : 12 numbers of horizontal soft-key are displayed on the screen of MANUAL GUIDE
i.
1: 7 numbers of horizontal soft-key are displayed on the screen of MANUAL GUIDE
i.
IFF 0 : Registering number of fixed form sentences is specified by bit 4 of parameter
No.14852.
1: Registering number of fixed form sentences is as follows. The maximum number of
tabs is 7, the maximum number of fixed form sentences per tab is 10, and the
maximum number of characters per fixed form sentence is 256.
14843 SUBPROJUDG
SUBPROJUDG Number of blocks which is used to judge if a subprogram calling “M98 P****” is
arbitrary figure data when a cursor is on the block of the subprogram calling in the
program-editing screen.
= 0 All of the subprogram
= -1 None of the subprogram (The arbitrary figures of the subprogram are not drawn.)
14844 HISTORYTIME
HISTORYTIME A cycle time when the date and the time are recorded in an operating history.
The date and the time are recorded in an operating history every the set time. If the setting
value is 0, it is treated as 10 minutes. However, the date and the time are not recorded if
there is no operating data in the time.
[Unit of data] 1 [min]
14860 SPCLCHAR
SPCLCHAR Special character for search function in the program display window on the base screen.
Please set the decimal number of ASCII.
If the value is 0, the special character is assumed to be “?”.
Special characters are used with the following functions:
(1) In program display, the color of special characters is changed for display.
(2) If a fixed form sentence to be inserted includes special characters, a warning
message is indicated.
14861 UNDOBUF
UNDOBUF : Specify the total size of the buffer for use with the redo and undo functions.
If 0 is input, 5 KB of buffer space is allocated. If a negative value is input, the redo and
undo functions cannot be used.
[Valid data range] -127 to 127
[Unit of data] 1 [KB]
- 727 -
14863 PAGETIME
PAGETIME Hold time for cursor movement keys <↑> and <↓>
When cursor movement key <↑> or <↓> is pressed during program editing, the cursor
moves one line down. When cursor movement key <↑> or <↓> is pressed and held for a
certain period of time, however, the cursor moves on a page-by-page basis.
The time period for which <↑> or <↓> is held before the cursor is moved on a
page-by-page basis is set by this parameter.
[Valid data range] -128 to 127
[Unit of data] Second
When this parameter is set to 0 or -128 to -2, the hold time is set to 1 second. When this
parameter is set to -1, pressing and holding <↑> or <↓> does not enter the page feed
mode.
14866 ANMPNTBF
ANMPNTBF Minimum time (in units of 32 ms only, only for the Series 30i/31i/32i) within which
coordinates for drawing can be obtained in drawing during machining. When the time
period is less than this value, coordinates for drawing are not obtained.
[Valid data range] 1 to 20: Once every 32 × ANMPNTBF ms at the maximum
20 or greater: Once every 640 ms at the maximum
NOTE
As internal processing during operation is heavy, this minimum
time becomes much smaller than the maximum time.
14868 MILLSDSP
MILLSDSP This parameter specifies the subscript that follows S when the milling axis rpm display
function by the servo motor is enabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27313 ANM HLP IDC DCM DUC
DUC 0 : Decomposed cycle display function is available

1: Decomposed cycle display function is not available.
DCM 0 : On the window of decomposed cycle display, the command with the same value as
the previous command is not displayed by omission.
1: On the window of decomposed cycle display, all of the command is displayed.
(Example of display in case of parameter No.27313#1=0)

G1 X10. Z-20. F30. ;
X40. Z-50. ;
G0 Z60. ;
(Example of display in case of parameter No.27313#1=1)

G1 X10. Z-20. F30. ;
G1 X40. Z-50. F30. ;
G0 X40. Z60. ;
IDC 0 : Input data check by simulation is available.

1: Input data check by simulation is not available.
- 728 -
HLP 0 : Help window function according to each screen is not available.
1: Help window function according to each screen is available.
(*) If the display unit is not PANEL i, please set this parameter to 0. If the
parameter is set to 1, a problem such as the display speed slows might occur.
ANM 0 : Cooperation with animated software that is operated with PANEL i is not available.
1: Cooperation with animated software that is operated with PANEL i is available.
27453 Rotation axis numbers whose name is extended
Axis numbers of rotation axes that are used for machining cycles in case the soft-key [A]
or [C] is selected in figure data input screen when the rotation axis names are extended.
The each axis number has 2 digits that are specified by the followings.
“**¥¥” (** : Axis number that is used when [A] is selected, ¥¥ : Axis number that is used
when [C] is selected)
(The example of setting)

Set No.27453 = 603 under the following all conditions.
(1) When soft-key [C] is selected, the 3rd axis should be used.
(2) When soft-key [A] is selected, the 6th axis should be used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27482 CMW PPI PTE
PTE 0 : In Lathe/Machining center G code system switching function, tool path is drawn
during Turning mode.
1: In Lathe/Machining center G code system switching function, tool path is not drawn
during Turning mode.
PPI 0 : When the programmable parameter input (G10L52 command) is executed during
Machining simulation or NC program conversion,The parameter is not rewrote.
1: When the programmable parameter input (G10L52 command) is executed during
Machining simulation or NC program conversion,The parameter is rewrote.
CMW 0 : Calculation methods of workpiece origin offset value specifications of MANUAL
GUIDE i (conventional specifications).
1: Calculation methods of workpiece origin offset value the same specifications as the
NC screen.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27488 #0
#0 0: In machining cycle, address I,J,K are outputted for G02/G03.
1: In machining cycle, address R are outputted for G02/G03.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27500 FSV
FSV In the case of using “Controlling conversational macro function screens” (#8510) in a
Macro executor which is made by MTB, if #8510 is set in displaying a window screen of
MANUAL GUIDE i
0 : #8510 is stored and when the window display is closed, #8510 setting is restored.
1 : #8510 is disregarded.
(Parameter common to paths: Enabled only for the Series 16i/18i/21i)
- 729 -
A.6 PARAMETER SETTINGS DEPENDING ON THE MACHINE

TYPE
A.6.1 Machining Center

(1) Set following parameters for MANUAL GUIDE i.
No. Value Note

<Series 0i-C/16i/18i/21i>
In SINGLE BLOCK OPERATION, it enables to display distance data
of the block to be executed next.
It simultaneously enables to buffer 1 block. So if you stop the
In Series 0i-C/ execution by SINGLE BLOCK signal, then edit the next block and
16i/18i/21i, re-start, the block before editing is executed.
set to 1 <Series 0i-F/0i-D/30i/31i/32i>
3106#2 (SBK) The distance data of the block to be executed next for SINGLE
In Series 0i-D/ BLOCK OPERATION is displayed as the distance data of the current
30i/ 31i/32i, block regardless of the presence of buffering block to be executed
set to 0 next.
However, only when the block to be executed next is buffered and it is
immediately after switching from continuous operation to SINGLE
BLOCK OPERATION, the distance data of the block to be next block
is displayed.
Bit 6 (DAK) of parameter No.3106, position display change for 3D
3206#6 1 conversion mode, is effective in MANUAL GUIDE i screen
(It is unnecessary in Series 0i-F/0i -D/30i/31i/32i.)
Servo wave display is not available
3112#0 (SGD) 0
3201#6 (NPE) 1 M02,M30,M99 are not regarded as the end of resister
SRAM size for application’s backup variables (40KB) (It is unnecessary in
8661 40
Series 0i-F/0i -D/30i/31i/32i.)
SRAM size for application’s backup (23KB)
8662 23
SRAM size used by the MANUAL GUIDE i as the variable area (40KB)
This parameter is set when multi C executor and the MANUAL GUIDE i.
8664 40
(NOTE: Set parameter No.8661 to 0. It is unnecessary in Series 0i-F/0i
-D/30i/31i/32i.)
SRAM size used by the MANUAL GUIDE i as the disk area (23KB)
8665 23
-D/30i/31i/32i.)
not switched to alarm screen automatically during displaying C executor
8650#1 (CNA) 1
screen
8650#0 (RSK) 1 C executor transfer <RESET> key code to application
TV check is skipped during edit operation
8701#6 (CTV) 1
Vacant value of P code variables can be read.
8701#4 1
DRAM size for user program of C executor must be zero (It is
8781 0
unnecessary in Series 0i-F/0i -D/30i/31i/32i.)
9000#0 (SQN) 0 Debug parameter for macro program must be zero
14700#7 (MGI) 0 Enable to run MANUAL GUIDE i
14794-14795 (Note) Assign function key for start MANUAL GUIDE i
- 730 -
No. Value Note

P code number for MANUAL GUIDE i
9071 90
(It is necessary in Series 0i-F/0i -D/30i/31i/32i.)
Block number for dealing with Macro sentence continuously in Execute
20 Macro program for MANUAL GUIDE i.
9072 or (It is necessary in Series 0i-F/0i -D/30i/31i/32i.)
40 Recommended value of Series 30i/31i/32i = 20
Recommended value of Series 0i-F/0i-D = 40
NOTE
Parameter No.14794
#0=1: The MANUAL GUIDE i is started by the <POS> key.
#1=1: The MANUAL GUIDE i is started by the <PRG> key.
#2=1: The MANUAL GUIDE i is started by the <OFS> key.
#3=1: The MANUAL GUIDE i is started by the <SYS> key.
#4=1: The MANUAL GUIDE i is started by the <MES> key.
#5=1: The MANUAL GUIDE i is started by the <GRP> key.
Parameter No.14795
#0=1: The MANUAL GUIDE i is started by the <CUSTOM> key (AUX screen)
(When the macro screen is not present, set bit 5 (CM1) of parameter No.
8652 to 1).
#1=1: The MANUAL GUIDE i is started by the <CUSTOM> key (MCR screen)
8652 to 1).
#2=1: The MANUAL GUIDE i is started by the <CUSTOM> key (MENU screen)
8652 to 1).
#3=1: The MANUAL GUIDE i is started by the blank key.
(Set bit 4 (CMF) of parameter No.8652 to 1)
(2) Set following parameters for displaying load meter. Following parameters depend on machining
configuration. Refer to Parameter Manual (B-63530EN) for detail.
No. Value Note

1023 ≠0 Servo axis number of control axis
2086 ≠0 regular current parameter
2165 ≠0 maximum value of amplifier current
3151-3158 ≠0 Axis number to display load meter (Note)
4127 ≠0 Displayed value in maximum load
NOTE
In Series 0i-F/0i-D/30i/31i/32i, there are not the parameters from No.3154 to
No.3158.
(3) Set following parameters for optimizing cycle menu and icons of Turning Cycle and Milling Cycle
functions according to machine configuration.
No. Value Note

14702#0 (MT1) → 0:Vertical, 1:Horizontal for icons
- 731 -
No. Value Note

27003 #3 (ML3) to xxxx0001: 3 axes (XYZ) Machining Center
→
#0 (ML0) xxxx0010: 5 axes (XYZCB) Machining Center
27103#7 (LT7), #3
0xxx0000 0xxx0000: Machining Center
(LT3) to #0 (LT0)
NOTE
1 In case parameters No.27003= xxxx0000 & No.27103=0xxx0000, all of cycle
menu is displayed
2 When the parameters No.27003 or No.27103 is set, please sure to push [F] key
on NOW LOADING screen after Power ON. The necessary parameters are set
automatically. (When the necessary parameters are set, the message of “NOW
SETTING PARAMETERS” is displayed on the left below of NOW LOADING
screen.)
(4) Set following parameters for output of polar coordinate interpolation command (G12.1) and
cylindrical interpolation command (G7.1) in cycle motion. In case of no Cs axis, it is unnecessary to
set.
No. Value Note

0: G12.1/G13.1 are not output in cycle motion on XC plane
27000#2 (MC2) →
1: G12.1/G13.1 are automatically output in cycle motion on XC plane
0: G7.1Cxx/G7.1C0 are not output in cycle motion on ZC plane
27000#3 (MC3) → 1: G7.1Cxx/G7.1C0 are automatically
output in cycle motion on ZC plane
(5) Set following parameters for adapting tool motion to workpiece coordinate in MANUAL GUIDE i
Animation function.
No. Value Note

14706 (Note) Workpiece coordinate *
- 732 -
NOTE
Setting value for parameters No.14706
16: Right hand coordinate, right =+Z and upper =+X
X
17: Right hand coordinate, right =-Z and upper =+X

X
18: Right hand coordinate, right =-Z and upper =-X

Z
19: Right hand coordinate, right =+Z and upper =-X

Z
20: Right hand coordinate, right =+X and upper =+Z

Z
(6) Set following parameters for adapting rotate (Cs) axis motion to workpiece coordinate. If no Cs axis,
it is unnecessary to set.
No. Value Note

14717 → Cs axis number
(7) Set following parameters for adapting rotate axis motion, which tilts tool head or table, to workpiece
coordinate. If no such axis or Animation option, it is unnecessary to set.
No. Value Note

14718 → Rotate axis number, which tilts tool head or table
(8) To support the function for switching spindle motor output characteristics (winding), set the
following parameter to 0.
No. Value Note

The load meter new display (support for output switching control) of the
14836#2 (LOS) =0 0
spindle is enabled.
NOTE
This function is supported only for the Series 30i/31i/32i.
- 733 -
A.6.2 Other Machines

Refer to Lathe or Machining Center, which is closer to your machine.
A.6.3 Lathe
Set the parameters of the cells in the first path and set those of cells in each path in
case of multi path lathe.
(1) Set following parameters for using MANUAL GUIDE i.

No. Value Note
<Series 0i-C/16i/18i/21i>
In SINGLE BLOCK OPERATION, it enables to display distance data
of the block to be executed next.
In Series 0i-C/ It simultaneously enables to buffer 1 block. So if you stop the
16i/18i/21i, execution by SINGLE BLOCK signal, then edit the next block and
set to 1 re-start, the block before editing is executed.
<Series 0i-F/0i-D/30i/31i/32i>
3106#2 (SBK) In Series The distance data of the block to be executed next for SINGLE
0i-F/0i-D/30i/ BLOCK OPERATION is displayed as the distance data of the current
31i/32i, block regardless of the presence of buffering block to be executed
set to 0 next.
However, only when the block to be executed next is buffered and it is
immediately after switching from continuous operation to SINGLE
BLOCK OPERATION, the distance data of the block to be next block
is displayed.
Bit 6 (DAK) of parameter No.3106#6, position display change for 3D
3206#6 1 conversion mode, is effective in MANUAL GUIDE i screen
Servo wave display is not available
3112#0 (SGD) 0
3201#6 (NPE) 1 M02,M30,M99 are not regarded as the end of resister
SRAM size for application’s backup variables (40KB)
8661 40
SRAM size for application’s backup (23KB)
8662 23
SRAM size used by the MANUAL GUIDE i as the variable area (40KB)
8664 40
-D/30i/31i/32i.)
SRAM size used by the MANUAL GUIDE i as the disk area (23KB)
8665 23
-D/30i/31i/32i.)
Not switched to alarm screen automatically during displaying C executor
8650#1 (CNA) 1
screen
8650#0 (RSK) 1 C executor transfer <RESET> key code to application
TV check is skipped during edit operation
8701#6 (CTV) 1
Vacant value of P code variables can be read.
8701#4 1
DRAM size for user program of C executor must be zero
8781 0
9000#0 (SQN) 0 Debug parameter for macro program must be zero
14700#7 (MGI)=0 0 Enable to run MANUAL GUIDE i
14794-14795 (Note) Assign function key for start MANUAL GUIDE i
- 734 -
No. Value Note

P code number for MANUAL GUIDE i
9071 90
(It is necessary in Series 0i-F/0i -D/30i/31i/32i.)
Block number for dealing with Macro sentence continuously in Execute
20 Macro program for MANUAL GUIDE i.
9072 or (It is necessary in Series 0i-F/0i -D/30i/31i/32i.)
40 Recommended value of Series 30i/31i/32i =20
Recommended value of Series 0i-F/0i-D =40
When a dwell command (address P) is not included in case of
lathe-system rigid tapping, the dwell command (address P) specified in
5209#2 (DWP) 1
the block for drilling is valid.
(It is unnecessary in Series 0i -C/16i/18i/21i.)
NOTE
Parameter No.14794
#0=1: The MANUAL GUIDE i is started by the <POS> key.
#1=1: The MANUAL GUIDE i is started by the <PRG> key.
#2=1: The MANUAL GUIDE i is started by the <OFS> key.
#3=1: The MANUAL GUIDE i is started by the <SYS> key.
#4=1: The MANUAL GUIDE i is started by the <MES> key.
#5=1: The MANUAL GUIDE i is started by the <GRP> key.
Parameter No.14795
#0=1: The MANUAL GUIDE i is started by the <CUSTOM> key (AUX screen)
8652 to 1).
#1=1: The MANUAL GUIDE i is started by the <CUSTOM> key (MCR screen)
8652 to 1).
#2=1: The MANUAL GUIDE i is started by the <CUSTOM> key (MENU screen)
8652 to 1).
#3=1: The MANUAL GUIDE i is started by the blank key.
(Set bit 4 (CMF) of parameter No.8652 to 1)
(2) Set following parameters for displaying load meter. Following parameters depend on machining
configuration. Refer to Parameter Manual (B-63530EN) for detail.
No. Value Note

1023 ≠0 Servo axis number of control axis
2086 ≠0 regular current parameter
2165 ≠0 maximum value of amplifier current
3151-3158 ≠0 Axis number to display load meter (Note)
4127 ≠0 Displayed value in maximum load
NOTE
In Series 0i-F/0i-D/30i/31i/32i, there are not the parameters from No.3154 to
No.3158.
(3) Set following parameters for optimizing cycle menu and icons of Turning Cycle and Milling Cycle
functions according to machine configuration.
- 735 -
No. Value Note

14702#0 (MT1) → 0:Vertical, 1:Horizontal for icons
27003 #3 (ML3) to #0
xxxx0000 xxxx0000:Lathe (Note)
(ML0)
0xxx0001: 2 axes (XZ) lathe
0xxx0010: 3 axes (XZC) lathe
0xxx0100: 4 axes (XZCY) lathe
27103#7 (LT7), #3 0xxx1000: 5 axes (XZCYB) lathe
→
(LT3) to #0 (LT0) 1xxx0001: 2 axes (XZ) lathe with sub spindle
1xxx0010: 3 axes (XZC) lathe with sub spindle
1xxx0100: 4 axes (XZCY) lathe with sub spindle
1xxx1000: 5 axes (XZCYB) lathe with sub spindle
NOTE
1 In case parameters No.27003= xxxx0000 & No.27103=0xxx0000, all of cycle
menu is displayed
2 When the parameters No.27003 or No.27103 is set, please sure to push [F] key
on NOW LOADING screen after Power ON. The necessary parameters are set
automatically. (When the necessary parameters are set, the message of “NOW
SETTING PARAMETERS” is displayed on the left below of NOW LOADING
screen.)
(4) Set following parameters for output of polar coordinate interpolation command (G12.1) and
cylindrical interpolation command (G7.1) in cycle motion. In case of no Cs axis, it is unnecessary to
set.
No. Value Note

0: G12.1/G13.1 are not output in cycle motion on XC plane
27000#2 (MC2) →
1: G12.1/G13.1 are automatically output in cycle motion on XC plane
0: G7.1Cxx/G7.1C0 are not output in cycle motion on ZC plane
27000#3 (MC3) → 1: G7.1Cxx/G7.1C0 are automatically
output in cycle motion on ZC plane
(5) Set following parameters for optimizing C axis figure data input screen, if two rotate (Cs) axes in
main and sub spindle exist and have different axis name.
No. Value Note

xxxx0011: Tab for C or A axis selection is displayed in figure data input
screen
27001#3 (P3) to #0 xxxx0101: Tab for C or B axis selection is displayed in figure data input
→
(P0) screen
xxxx1001: Tab for C or E axis selection is displayed in figure data input
screen
(6) Set following parameters for adapting tool motion to workpiece coordinate in MANUAL GUIDE i
Animation function.
No. Value Note

14706 (Note) Workpiece coordinate for main spindle
14707 (Note) Workpiece coordinate for sub spindle if existing
- 736 -
NOTE
Setting value for parameters No.14706 and No.14707
16: Right hand coordinate, right =+Z and upper =+X
X
17: Right hand coordinate, right =-Z and upper =+X

X
18: Right hand coordinate, right =-Z and upper =-X

Z
19: Right hand coordinate, right =+Z and upper =-X

Z
20: Right hand coordinate, right =+X and upper =+Z

Z
(7) Set following parameters for adapting rotate (Cs) axis motion to workpiece coordinate. If no Cs axis,
it is unnecessary to set.
In case of one Cs axis of main spindle
No. Value Note

14717 → Cs axis number
In case of two Cs axis with main and sub spindle
No. Value Note

27301 → Cs axis number of main spindle
27302 → Cs axis number of sub spindle
switch Cs axis number by spindle selection command for animation,
27312 xxxxxxx1
“G1998 S__;” .
NOTE
14717 is used as working number for Cs axis.
(8) Set following parameters for adapting rotate axis motion, which tilts tool head or table, to workpiece
coordinate. If no such axis or Animation option, it is unnecessary to set.
- 737 -
No. Value Note

14718 → rotate axis number, which tilts tool head or table
(9) To support the function for switching spindle motor output characteristics (winding), set the
following parameter to 0.
No. Value Note

The load meter new display (support for output switching control) of the
14836#2 (LOS) =0 0
spindle is enabled.
NOTE
This function is supported only for the Series 30i/31i/32i.
(10) Set following parameters for Multi Path Lathe function. If no Multi Path Lathe option, it is
unnecessary to set.
No. Value Note

The <RESET> key on the MDI panel is enabled for all paths.
When the <RESET> key is enabled for each path (8100#0 (RST) =1),
8100#0 (RST) 0
the path selected on the NC side is reset regardless of the path selected
by the MANUAL GUIDE i.
14703#3 (LST) 1 Process list editing is available
0:Softkey switches the display for each path
27400#0 (SPT) →
1:Head select signal switches the display for each path
0:Head#1 can not machine with spindle#2
14701#1 (FSE) →
1:Head#1 can machine with spindle#2
0:Head#1 machines upper part of spindle#1
14701#2 (FMP) →
1:Head#1 machines lower part of spindle#1
14701#3 (FSP) →
27401#0 (SME) →
27401#1 (SSE) →
27401#2 (SMP) →
27401#3 (SSP) →
27402#0 (TME) →
27402#1 (TSE) →
27402#2 (TMP) →
27402#3 (TSP) →
27410 (Note) Icon number for path 1 display
- 738 -
NOTE
Icon number
See descriptions of parameter No. 27412, provided in Appendix A.5.15,
"Parameters Related to Multi-Path Lathe".
A.7 M CODE OUTPUT IN CYCLE EXECUTING

Following M code is output in milling cycle
• M code for rigid tapping

• M code for clamping and unclamping rotate axis as “C”
A.7.1 M code for Rigid Tapping

(1) M code is output in following cycles in case that rigid tap is specified and parameter No.5200#0 is
zero.
G1002 (Tapping Cycle for Machining Center by live tool)

G1112 (Tapping Cycle for Lathe by live tool)
G1102 (Tapping Cycle for Lathe by rotating work)
(2) M code is output in following timing

G90
G00 X(x1) Y(y1) Z(I point)
G99
M29 S(spindle) (Note)
G84 Z(depth) R(R point) P(dwell) F(feed)
X(x2) Y(y2)
X(x3) Y(y3)
G80
G00 Z(I point)
NOTE
M code value depends on parameters No.5210 and No.5212.
A.7.2 M code for Clamping and Unclamping Rotate Axis as “C”

(1) M code is automatically output in C axis, which position C axis in the cycle motion.
In Hole Machining Cycles combined with following figures, C axis clamping and unclamping M
(a) C-axis hole on the polar coordinate plane (circle points): G1572
(b) C-axis hole on the polar coordinate plane (random points): G1573
(c) C-axis hole on the cylindrical surface (circle points): G1672
(d) C-axis hole on the cylindrical surface (random points): G1673
In Grooving Cycles combined with following figures, C axis clamping and unclamping M codes are
automatically output.
(e) X-axis groove on the polar coordinate plane: G1571
(f) Z-axis groove on the cylindrical surface: G1671
- 739 -
(2) M code is output in following timing

In case of Hole Machining Cycles
G90
G17
Mb (Note)
G00 X(x1) C(c1) Z(I point)
G99
G81 Z(depth) R(R point) F(feed) Ma (Note)
Mb
X(x2) C(c2) Ma (Note)
Mb
X(x3) C(c3) Ma (Note)
Mb
G80
G00 Z(I point)
NOTE
Ma means C axis clamping M code, Mb means C axis unclamping one.
M code value depends on parameters No.27005, No.27006, No.27011 and
No.27012
In case of Grooving Cycles
Mb (Note)
G17
G0 X 80. C0.
G0 Z2.
Ma (Note)
G1Z-10.F100.
G1 X40. F100.
G1Z2.F100.
Mb (Note)
G17
G0 X80. C120.
G0 Z2.
Ma (Note)
G1Z-10.F100.
G1 X40. F100.
G1Z2.F100.
Mb (Note)
NOTE
Ma means C axis clamping M code, Mb means C axis unclamping one.
M code value depends on parameters No.27005, No.27006, No.27011 and
No.27012
- 740 -
A.8 SETTING FOR START-UP WHEN CNC PARAMETER IS

UNSET (Only Series 0i-C/16i/18i/21i-B)
Please set up by the following methods when the CNC parameter is unset.
<1> The numerical control unit is started while pressing “M”+”0” key.
<2> After it starts, the following parameter is set.
No.8661 = 40
(This parameter sets the size of the static variable area that can share among each task for using
in MANUAL GUIDE i.(40KB))
No.8662 = 23
(This parameter sets the size of the SRAM disk for using in MANUAL GUIDE i.(23KB))
<3> The numerical control unit is rebooted.
- 741 -
B. LADDER PROGRAM APPENDIX
CREATION (FOR MACHINE TOOL BUILDER) B-63874EN/11
B LADDER PROGRAM CREATION

To perform thread repairing or reverse tap cycles in lathe tapping (tapping with workpiece rotation and a
rotating tool), a ladder program needs to be created.
Appendix B, “LADDER PROGRAM CREATION”, consists of:
B.1 REVERSE TAP CYCLE ..................................................................................................................742

B.2 THREAD REPAIRING CYCLE ......................................................................................................744
B.3 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT DATA.............................................................................................746
B.1 REVERSE TAP CYCLE

In a reverse tap cycle, the M code for reporting reverse rotation is output as shown below. Reverse
rotation of the spindle is performed by use of the M code under control of the PMC.
Pre-reverse-tapping M code command (Output during float tapping)
Forward spindle rotation M code (Output during float tapping)
Actually, rotating on the

PMC side in the direction
Move to the drilling position opposite to the specified
direction
Move to the approach point (R point)
(Pre-reverse-tapping M code command) (Output during rigid tapping)
(Rigid tapping M, S output) (Output during rigid tapping)
Tapping (G84/88 command)

<1> Forward spindle rotation (during rigid)
<2> Reverse spindle rotation at hole bottom Actually, rotating
<3> Forward spindle rotation after returning to the R on the PMC side in
point (stopping during rigid) the direction
opposite to the
specified direction
(Move to the next drilling position and perform drilling)
Drilling complete (G80)
NOTE
The values of the pre-reverse-tapping M code and forward spindle rotation M
code are the values of parameters No. 27197 to 27210.
- 742 -
APPENDIX B.LADDER PROGRAM
B-63874EN/11 (FOR MACHINE TOOL BUILDER) CREATION
In lathe tap cycle G84, the forward spindle command at the hole bottom always outputs M04 in both
forward tapping and reverse tapping. Similarly, when the tool returns to the R point, M03 is output. (In
rigid tapping, M03 is output after moving to the R point, M05 is output at the hole bottom, and M05 is
output after returning to the R point).
As shown above, the same M code is output from the NC in both forward tapping and reverse tapping, so
reverse the actual spindle rotation command on the PMC side in the case of reverse tapping.
On the PMC side, when the above M code receives, it is necessary to provide a signal for reversing the
subsequent spindle rotation commands and reverse the spindle rotation commands by detecting the signal.
The new signal needs to be canceled by processing, for example, at the trailing edge of the TAP signal
(TAP <F0002#5>), to be added to the PMC ladder. The ladder sequence is shown below.
(REV_new is a temporary signal for reversing the spindle rotation.)
Timing chart
Mmm1: F10 - F13

Pre-reverse-tapping M
code
(CNC → PMC)
REV_new
(Temporary signal)
TAP: F01#5
(CNC → PMC)
Point R
Mmm2: F10 - F13

Forward spindle M code
(CNC → PMC) Hole bottom
M04: F10 – F13

(CNC → PMC)
Hole bottom Point R
M05: F10 – F13

(CNC → PMC)
Reverse spindle rotation

(PMC → MT)
Forward spindle rotation

(PMC → MT)
- 743 -
B.2 THREAD REPAIRING CYCLE

A thread repairing cycle is achieved by internal execution of a macro program. Accordingly, the ladder
program needs to include the following processes.
B.2.1 Starting Thread Repairing

To execute a spindle orientation ([OT STA]), release a spindle orientation ([OT OFF]), or start thread
repairing, set the mode to the MEM mode internally and activate the automatic operation start signal
(ST).
To do this, it is necessary to add processing for the ON/OFF or mode changes of the following ST signal
and R signal specified by parameter No.14847.
GST (Thread repairing start flag)

= R bit of parameter No.14847 is 0
GERS(PMC side completion notification flag)

The processing must be the following:

(1) When the GST signal is set to 1, the PMC needs to change the mode to the MEM mode and activate
the automatic operation start signal (ST).
(2) When the M02 or M30 command is completed or the resetting signal (RST) is activated, the PMC
needs to activate the GERS signal.
(3) When M02/M30 is output at the end of execution macro of thread repair, set the external reset
signal(G08#7:ERS) “1”.
(4) When the GST signal is set to 0, the PCM needs to set the mode to the original mode and deactivate
the GERS signal.
WARNING
When activating the ST signal without changing this sequence, the program in
the CNC memory, not the machining program, may be executed, probably
causing unexpected operation. As a result, the tool hits the workpiece or
machine, probably causing the tool or machine to be broken or injury to the
operator.
- 744 -
APPENDIX B.LADDER PROGRAM
B-63874EN/11 (FOR MACHINE TOOL BUILDER) CREATION
Timing chart
(MGi = MANUAL GUIDE i )
Cycle start button
GST
(MGi → PMC)
MD1-3 : MEM mode

(PMC → CNC)
ST
(PMC → CNC)
GERS M02, M30, RST

(PMC → MGi)
B.2.2 Setting the Spindle Orientation Mode

The following processing of the R signal is necessary to check the state of a spindle orientation in thread
repairing.
ORT (spindle orientation flag)
The processing must be the following:
(1) When the signal (Mmm3) of the spindle orientation M code (parameter No. 4960) is set to 1, the
PMC needs to activate the ORT signal.
(2) When the signal (Mmm4) of the spindle orientation release M code (parameter No. 4961) is set to 1,
the PMC needs to deactivate the ORT signal.
Timing chart
Mmm3: F10-F13 (MGi = MANUAL GUIDE i)
Spindle orientation M
code
(CNC → PMC)
Mmm4: F10-F13
Spindle orientation
release M code
(CNC → PMC)
ORT
(PMC → MGi)
- 745 -
B.3 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT DATA

Modify the ladder program so that the tool management data "Previous Notice Flag" of the tool being
used is set to 1 ("NOTICED") when the NC outputs a tool life arrival notice signal.
For the "Previous Notice Flag" of tool management data, bit 7 of customization item 0 is used.
Item Bit Meaning Description of data

7 Previous Notice Flag 0:UN-NOTICE 1:NOTICED
6
5
4
Customization item 0
3
2
1
0
- 746 -
APPENDIX
B-63874EN/11 (FOR MACHINE TOOL BUILDER) C.CUSTOMIZATION
C CUSTOMIZATION
Appendix C describes the method of customizing the MANUAL GUIDE i to suit the specifications of the
machine tool builder.
Appendix C, “CUSTOMIZATION”, consists of:
C.1 DISPLAYING VERTICAL SOFT KEYS FOR THE 15-INCH LCD .............................................747
C.2 TOOL DATABASE ACCESS FUNCTION.....................................................................................750
C.3 CREATING A P-CODE USER MODULE ......................................................................................752
C.4 SOFT KEY IDS TO BE OPEN TO USERS.....................................................................................756
C.5 MESSAGE FILES ............................................................................................................................760
C.6 CHANGING THE CUSTOMIZE DEFINITION FILE DURING USE OF RETHREADING........761
C.7 SOFT-KEY CUSTOMIZATION FUNCTION.................................................................................762
C.8 MANUAL GUIDE i WINDOW CALL FUNCTION (for only Series 30i/31i/32i-B, Series
0i-F)....................................................................................................................................................764
C.9 DISPLAY OF SIMPLIFIED CHINESE CHARACTERS ALARM OF USER MACRO (for Series
30i/31i/32i-B, 0i-F/0i-D)........................... ........................................................................................782
C.10 EXTENDED AXIS NAME FUNCTION FOR 8.4” /10.4” DISPLAY (for only Series 30i/31i/32i-B,
Series 0i-F)..…………………………………………………………………………………...……783
C.11 MANUAL GUIDE i CUSTOMIZATION (for only Series 30i/31i/32i-B, 0i-F/0i-D)......................785
C.12 OPERATION NAVIGATING CUSTOMIZATION FUNCTION…………………………………794
C.1 DISPLAYING VERTICAL SOFT KEYS FOR THE 15-INCH

LCD
The horizontal soft keys that are frequently used can be displayed on each screen as vertical soft keys.
This function can be used only for the CNC with a 15-inch LCD display of the Series 30i/31i/32i.
C.1.1 Displaying the Setting Screen

Press soft key [SETING] to open the screen for setting various types of data and select "SETTING OF
VERTICAL SOFT KEY" on the basic setting tab. Then, the vertical soft key setting screen appears.
C.1.2 Operations
On this screen, a vertical soft key can be added or changed. The result is saved and recorded even after the
power is turned off and back on again.
• Screens on which vertical soft keys can be used
(a) Base screen in the EDIT mode
(b) Base screen in the MEM mode
(c) Base screen in the MDI mode
(d) Machining simulation screen (animation)
(e) Machining simulation screen (path drawing)
(f) Drawing during machining screen
(g) Arbitrary figure input screen
(h) Process list screen (only when using the multi-path lathe function)
(1) Selecting the setting screen
Select the screen on which a vertical soft key is added or changed by switching between tabs.
- 747 -
APPENDIX
C.CUSTOMIZATION (FOR MACHINE TOOL BUILDER) B-63874EN/11
(2) Selecting the position in which a soft key is added or changed

Select the position of a soft key to be added or changed from the soft key page items.
(3) Restoring the standard settings
Restore the standard settings of vertical soft keys on all screens as described below.
Press soft key [STAND.] to display the confirmation messages and soft keys in the figure below.
When soft key [YES] is pressed, the standard settings of vertical soft keys are restored.
When soft key [NO] is pressed, the changes are canceled.
The standard settings are loaded from the definition file in the system.
(4) Changing the cursor state
Press soft key [CHCURS] to switch between cursor states.
(a) The cursor state is switched as shown below.
TAB CHCURS
(b) The following text is displayed on the screen title.

TAB:
SETTING OF VERTICAL SOFT KEY TAB ←→
CHCURS:
SETTING OF VERTICAL SOFT KEY CHCURS ←→
(5) Finishing settings

If soft key [TO MNU] is pressed when bit 2 (RET) of parameter No. 14850 is 0, the setting screen is
closed and the various data setting screen appears.
ALTER STAND. CHCURS OUTPUT INPUT TO MNU
When bit 2 (RET) of parameter No. 14850 is 1, soft key [CLOSE] appears in place of soft key [TO
MNU]. When soft key [CLOSE] is pressed, the various data setting screen does not appear after the
setting screen is closed.
ALTER STAND. CHCURS OUTPUT INPUT CLOSE
C.1.3 Changing Soft Keys

When soft key [ALTER] is pressed on the vertical soft key setting screen, the vertical soft key selection
screen appears. The items of the vertical soft keys are displayed in the list on the screen of the selected tab.
When an item is selected from the list and soft key [SELECT] is pressed, the soft key position on the
selected screen. is replaced.
When (NONE) is selected from the list and soft key [SELECT] is pressed, the soft key position on the
selected screen is replaced with (NONE)
C.1.4 Memory Card Input/Output

The settings of vertical soft keys can be output to or input from the outside. In the MDI, MEM, or RMT
mode, however, the settings cannot be output or input.
- 748 -
APPENDIX
(1) Output
When soft key [OUTPUT] is pressed, the name of an output file is entered, and soft key [OUTPUT]
is pressed, the settings of vertical soft keys are output. While the settings are output, a message
indicating the progress appears and key-in is disabled.
The output file name is VSKEY.DAT by default.
(2) File name

The file name to be input during external output to a memory card must observe the following rules.
When an extension is present, a file name is 12 characters long or less (including a period and
extension). When an extension is not present, a file name is eight characters long or less.
An extension is three characters or less.
If a file name falls outside the range, an alarm message stating "Invalid file name" appears and no
output can be performed.
The characters used as a name is the same as those of a program file.
(3) Input
When soft key [INPUT] is pressed, the name of an input file is selected from the list, and soft key
[INPUT] is pressed, the settings of vertical soft keys are output. While the settings are input, a
message indicating the progress appears and key-in is disabled.
C.1.5 File Format

The format of a definition file and memory card input/output file is given below.
(1) Definition file name

The definition file name used on the vertical soft key setting screen is shown below.
Definition file name : VSKMKUPF.TXT
(2) File format

The file format is given below.
<EDIT> ← Setting screen

P1=SET(1,ID100),SET(2,ID200) ← Soft key setting
• "Setting Screen" is a screen on which vertical soft keys are set.

• "Soft key Setting" includes the number of pages to be set and soft key information.
• When duplicate soft key settings are defined, the latest setting takes effects.
• A soft key in an undefined position is set to the vacant state.
(3) Setting screens

Setting screens are defined as follows.
<EDIT> Setting screens ← (Character string)
• Setting screens are described with a character string specified in < >.
• The setting screens are represented by the following character strings.
EDIT : EDIT mode screen
MEM : MEM mode screen
MDI : MDI mode screen
ANIME : Machining simulation screen (animation)
TOOLPATH : Machining simulation screen (path drawing)
DRAWING : Drawing during machining screen
FREEFIG : Arbitrary figure input screen
- 749 -
APPENDIX
PRCLAT : Process list screen

MULTIEDIT: definition format of multi part program editing function screen
(4) Soft key setting

The arrangement of a vertical soft key is defined as follow.
P1=SET(1,ID100),SET(2,ID200)
Soft key ID (ID + value)

Soft key position (value)
Soft key page (P + value)
• A soft key page consists of character P followed by a page number.

The page number ranges from 1 to 2.
• A soft key ID consists of a character ID followed by a soft key ID number. When a soft key ID
of ID0 is specified, a vacant soft key is displayed.
• The soft key positions are 1 to 8, from the top to the bottom.
C.2 TOOL DATABASE ACCESS FUNCTION

The tool database access function reads or writes the tool database registered in the MANUAL GUIDE i
from a custom macro. This function can be used to access tool data from a program. In addition to
read/write operation, tool data can be initialized or tool data with a certain offset number can be copied to
tool data with another offset number.
C.2.1 Basic Specifications

The following data can be read and written.
(1) Tool type

(2) Mounting
(3) Tool data 1 (e.g. Cutting edge angle)
(4) Tool data 2 (e.g. Tool angle)
NOTE
1 The tool name cannot be read or written.
2 This function requires the custom macro B option.
3 The read/write operation can be performed only from a custom macro and
execution macro.
4 Bit 6 (TDA) of parameter No. 14852 must be set to 1 for this function to take
effect.
The following functions can be used in addition to read/write operation.

(a) Copying tool data
All tool data (including the tool name) for one tool can be copied by specifying the offset number of
the copy source and copy destination.
(b) Initializing tool data
One or all of tool data items can be initialized.
C.2.2 System Variables

Data access between a custom macro and the MANUAL GUIDE i is performed through system variables
#5750 to #5756. When accessing tool data, input appropriate values to these system variables.
- 750 -
APPENDIX
When the MANUAL GUIDE i detects an input value, it accesses tool data.
The system variables are described below.
#5750 : This parameter determines the operation of the tool database access function.
The MANUAL GUIDE i reads or writes a system variable when detecting the value of the variable.
When an invalid value is input, a value of 3 is returned to the result variable. These valuables are
automatically initialized when tool data is accessed.
This variable assumes the following values.
0 : No operation is performed.
1 : Read operation is performed.
2 : Write operation is performed.
3 : The tool data of copy source is copied to the copy destination.
4 : The tool data with the specified offset number is initialized.
5 : All tool data is initialized.
#5751 : Result value

This variable assumes the following values.
0 : Idling
1 : Normal end
2 : The number of registered tools exceeds the limit.
3 : The specified operation is incorrect.
4 : The specified offset number is incorrect.
5 : The specified tool type is incorrect. (only in writing)
6 : The mounting specification is incorrect. (only in writing)
7 : Data 1 is incorrectly specified. (only in writing)
8 : Data 2 is incorrectly specified. (only in writing)
#5752 : Specification of an offset number to be read or written or specification of the offset number of the
copy destination.
When an incorrect value is input, a value of 4 is returned to the result variable during write or
read operation.
#5753 : Specification of the tool type to be written or the tool type obtained by read operation. It specifies
the offset number of the copy source.
When an incorrect value is input, a value of 5 is returned to the result variable during write
operation. This variable assumes the following values.
10 : General tool
11 : Threading tool
12 : Grooving tool
13 : Round-nose tool
14 : Straight tool
15 : Versatile tool
20 : Drilling tool
21 : Chamfering tool
22 : Flat end mill tool
23 : Ball end mill tool
24 : Tapping tool
25 : Reamer tool
26 : Boring tool B
27 : Face mill tool
#5754 : Specification of the mount to be written or the mount obtained as a result of read operation. When
an incorrect value is input, a value of 6 is returned during write operation.
#5755 : Specification of data 1 to be written or data 1 obtained as a result of read operation. When an
incorrect value is input, a value of 7 is returned to the result variable during write operation.
- 751 -
APPENDIX
#5756 : Specification of data 2 to be written or data 2 obtained as a result of read operation. When an
incorrect value is input, a value of 8 is returned to the result variable during write operation.
C.2.3 Read
To read tool data, set #5752 to the offset number of tool data to be read and #5750 to 1. The tool data is
output to #5753, #5754, #5755, and #5756.
C.2.4 Write
To write tool data, set #5752 to the offset number of tool data to be written and #5753, #5754, #5755, and
#5756 to the tool data. Set #5750 to 2. The tool data is stored in the data storage area of the MANUAL
GUIDE i.
C.2.5 Copy
To make a copy, set #5752 to the offset number of the copy destination, #5753 to the offset number of the
copy source, and #5750 to 3. The tool data of the copy source is copied to the copy destination.
C.2.6 Initialization
To initialize tool data, set #5752 to the offset number of the tool data to be initialized and #5750 to 4. The
tool data with this offset number is deleted from the data storage area of the MANUAL GUIDE i.
C.2.7 Initializing All Tool Data

To initialize all tool data, set #5750 to 5. All tool data is initialized.
For multi-path systems, however, only the tool data of the path for which a custom macro is executed is
initialized.
For combined machines, only the tool data of the mode (turning side or milling side) for which a custom
macro is executed is initialized.
C.3 CREATING A P-CODE USER MODULE

This section describes the method of creating a P-code macro user module when the MANUAL GUIDE i
is used.
The method of creating a P-code macro user module of T series depends on the series and edition, as
shown below.
- 752 -
APPENDIX
Series/edition Creation method

• MANUAL GUIDE i for 16i /18i /21i -TB Creation method 1
BY40/01 to 10
• MANUAL GUIDE i for 16i /18I /21i -TB
BX00/01 to 16A
• MANUAL GUIDE i for 16i /18I /21i-TB(For multi C executor)
BX01/01 to 16A
• MANUAL GUIDE i for 0i -TC
BX25/01 to 12A
• MANUAL GUIDE i for 0i-TD
BX32/01 or later
• MANUAL GUIDE i for 0i-TF
BX33/01 or later
• MANUAL GUIDE i for 30i /31i /32i-A /31i-A5
BY70/01 or later
• MANUAL GUIDE i for 30i /31i /32i-B /31i-B5
BX71/01 or later
• MANUAL GUIDE i for 16i /18I /21i -TB Creation method 2
BX00/16B or later
• MANUAL GUIDE i for 16i /18I /21i-TB(For multi C executor)
BX01/16B or later
• MANUAL GUIDE i for 0i –TC
BX25/12B or later, BX24/01 or later
• MANUAL GUIDE i for 0i –TTC
BX26/01 or later
C.3.1 Creation Method 1

Be sure to use G-code system A to create a P-code macro user module.
Method of creating a P-code macro user module using G-code system A:
Set compile parameters SP_G_B(9004#0) and SP_G_C(9004#1) to 0 and create a user macro module.
NOTE
In creation with G-code system B or C, the threading cycle in the MANUAL
GUIDE i cannot be executed correctly.
When a threading cycle is specified by G92 (bit 0 of parameter 27140 is 0), the
workpiece coordinate system setting command is executed in stead of the
threading command.
When a threading cycle is specified by G32 (bit 0 of parameter No. 27140 is 1),
the alarm (PS010 "IMPROPER G-CODE") occurs.
C.3.2 Creation Method 2

A P-code macro user module can be created using G-code system A, B, or C.
Set the following parameter to the G-code system used to create a P-code macro user module. (Set the
same value as that of compile parameters SP_G_B and SP_G_C.)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27101 GC1 GC0
GC0, GC1 These bits specify the G-code system of a P-code macro user module.
(This parameter is available only for Series 16i/ 18i/21i-TB and Series 0i-TC )
- 753 -
APPENDIX
G code system GC1 GC0

A 0 0
B 0 1
C 1 0
C 1 1
NOTE
When using the Set-up Guidance Functions of the MANUAL
GUIDE i, be sure to use G-code system A for creation. A P-code
macro user module created with G-code system B or C cannot be
used.
C.3.3 Creation Procedure

The files used to create a user module are shown below.
(1) Link files

Link files used to create a user module
• BJ00_U1.LNK For FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i-MB
• BH00_U1.LNK For FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i-TB
Link files used to create user module 1 for a 1-path system
For a multi-path system, the files are used to create user module 1 for path 1.
BH01_U1.LNK Link file used to create user module 1 for path 2
• BJ25_U1.LNK For FANUC Series 0i-MC
• BH25_U1.LNK For FANUC Series 0i-TC/TTC
Link files used to create user module 1 for a 1-path system
For a 2-path system, the files are used to create user module 1 for path 1.
(2) Header files

Header files used to create a user module
• F16IMP1M.MEX For FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i-MB
• F16ITP1.MEX For FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i-TB
Header files used to create user module 1
• F0IMP1M.MEX For FANUC Series 0i-MC
• F0ITP1.MEX For FANUC Series 0i-TC/TTC
Header files used to create user module 1
(3) Sample macro source file SAMPLE.SRC
This is a sample macro source file, which is not needed when you actually create a user module.
The model-specific procedure for creating a user module is as follows.
C.3.3.1 For the FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i-MB

(1) Change the following items of BJ00_U1.LNK.
(a) Compile parameter
P9000 => Set the bits according to the size of a file to be created.
If the compile parameter needs to be set for reasons of the user macro, set it.
(b) File name of a macro program to be incorporated
Replace "FILE=sample" with the file name of a macro program to be incorporated by the user.
(c) Series and edition
- 754 -
APPENDIX
SERN =USR1
VERN =00ZZ
If the above lines are changed, the series and edition displayed on the SYSTEM configuration
screen can be changed.
(2) Compile the macro program to be incorporated using MCOMP0.
(3) Link the compile object in BJ00_U1.LNK using MLINK.
(4) Create a user module (MEM file) using MMCARD.
(5) Install the user module in FROM using BOOTSYSTEM.
C.3.3.2 For the FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i-TB

(1) Change the following items of BH0?_U1.LNK.
Replace “FILE=sample” with the file name of a macro program to be incorporated by the user.
SERN =USR1
VERN =00ZZ
(2) Compile the macro program to be incorporated using MCOMP0.
(3) Link the compile object in BH0?_U1.LNK using MLINK.
C.3.3.3 For the FANUC Series 0i-MC

(1) Change the following items of BJ25_U1.LNK.
SERN =USR1
VERN =00ZZ
(2) Compile the macro program to be incorporated using MCOMP.
(3) Link the compile object in BJ25_U1.LNK using MLINK.
C.3.3.4 For the FANUC Series 0i-TC/TTC

(1) Change the following items of BH2?_U1.LNK.
- 755 -
APPENDIX
SERN =USR1
VERN =00ZZ
(2) Compile the macro program to be incorporated using MCOMP.
(3) Link the compile object in BH2?_U1.LNK using MLINK.
C.3.3.5 For the FANUC Series 0i-F/0i-D/30i/31i/32i

As it is the same method to make in standard macro executer, refer to the programming manual of Macro
Compiler/Executer for Series 0i-F/0i-D or Series 30i/31i/32i.
C.3.4 Notes on Creation
C.3.4.1 For the FANUC Series 0i-MC,16i/18i/21i-MB

(1) Set the "Custom software size" option (J738) as necessary.
(2) Since the range from O1000 to O3999 is used by cycle machining etc., it cannot be used by a user
macro.
(3) Common variables can be used by a user macro.
C.3.4.2 For the FANUC Series 0i-TC,16i/18i/21i-TB

(1) Set the "Custom software size" option (J738) as necessary.
macro.
(3) Common variables can be used by a user macro.
(4) A user macro must be created with G-code system A. The compile parameter must also be set to
G-code system A.
P9004=00000000 => #0, #1 G code system A
C.3.4.3 For the FANUC Series 0i-F/0i-D/30i/31i/32i

macro.
C.4 SOFT KEY IDS TO BE OPEN TO USERS

The following soft keys become available.
<Soft key ID:30000>
(1) For new creation

GENERA METRIC UNIFY PIPE T PIPE F INSERT CANCEL
(2) For modification

GENERA METRIC UNIFY PIPE T PIPE F ALTER CANCEL
• Address output as an argument of the G code: [R]

- 756 -
APPENDIX
• Candidates for input:

English
[GENERAL，R1]
[METRIC，R2]
[UNIFY，R3]
[PIPE T，R4]
[PIPE F，R5]
• KeyMsg ID:
[GENERA]:No.10000
[METRIC]:No.10001
[UNIFY]:No.10002
[PIPE T]:No.10003
[PIPE F]:No.10004
[INSERT]:No.10005
[CANCEL]:No.10006
[ALTER]:No.10021
<Soft key ID:30001>

MALE FEMALE INSERT CANCEL

MALE FEMALE ALTER CANCEL
• Address output as an argument of the G code: [W]

English
[MALE SCREW，W1]
[FEMALE SCR，W2]
• KeyMsg ID:
[MALE]:No.10007
[FEMALE]:No.10008
[INSERT]:No.10005
[CANCEL]:No.10006
[ALTER]:No.10021
<Soft key ID:30002>

FORWRD REVERS INSERT CANCEL

FORWRD REVERS ALTER CANCEL
• Address output as an argument of the G code: [M]

English
[FORWRD，M1]
[REVERSE，M2]
- 757 -
APPENDIX
• KeyMsg ID:
[FORWRD]:No.10009
[REVERS]:No.10010
[INSERT]:No.10005
[CANCEL]:No.10006
[ALTER]:No.10021
<Soft key ID:30002>

STOP ORIENT INSERT CANCEL

STOP ORIENT ALTER CANCEL
* This soft key ID has no icons.

• Address output as an argument of the G code: [V]
English
[STOP，V1]
[ORIENT，V2]
• KeyMsg ID:
[STOP]:No.10011
[ORIENT]:No.10012
[INSERT]:No.10005
[CANCEL]:No.10006
[ALTER]:No.10021
<Soft key ID:30004>

CSS RPM INSERT CANCEL

CSS RPM ALTER CANCEL

• Address output as an argument of the G code: [D]
English
[CSS，D1]
[RPM，D2]
• KeyMsg ID:
[CSS]:No.10013
[RPM]:No.10014
[INSERT]:No.10004
[CANCEL]:No.10005
[ALTER]:No.10021
<Soft key ID:30005>
- 758 -
APPENDIX
ON SECOND OFF INSERT CANCEL

ON SECOND OFF ALTER CANCEL

• Address output as an argument of the G code: [C]
English
[ON，C1]
[SECOND，C2]
[OFF，C3]
• KeyMsg ID:
[ON]:No.10015
[SECOND]:No.10017
[OFF]:No.10016
[INSERT]:No.10005
[CANCEL]:No.10006
[ALTER]:No.10021
<Soft key ID:30006>

ON O-STOP OFF INSERT CANCEL

ON O-STOP OFF ALTER CANCEL

• Address output as an argument of the G code: [B]
English
[ON，B1]
[O-STOP，B2]
[OFF，B3]
• KeyMsg ID:
[ON]:No.10018 ( = No.538 [ON] )
[O-STOP]:No.10020
[OFF]:No.10019
[INSERT]:No.10005
[CANCEL]:No.10006
[ALTER]:No.10021
<Soft key ID:30007>

ON OFF INSERT CANCEL
- 759 -
APPENDIX

ON OFF ALTER CANCEL

• Address output as an argument of the G code: [H]
English
[ON，H1]
[OFF，H2]
• KeyMsg ID:
[ON]:No.10018
[OFF]:No.10019
[INSERT]:No.10005
[CANCEL]:No.10006
[ALTER]:No.10021
C.5 MESSAGE FILES

It was necessary to create a customize file for each language to display user-specific messages, but
messages in another language became available. For example, customized English messages can be used
in place of Swedish messages.
(1) Language-specific data management files

The language-specific data management file manages the locations of customize files used for individual
languages.
(Example)
The language-specific data management file, localu.txt, for customize files includes the following.
0,CEX3DATU
1,CEX3DATU
2,CEX3DATU
3,CEX3DATU
4,CEX3DATU
5,CEX3DATU
6,CEX3DATU
7,CEX3DATU
8,CEX3DATU
9,CEX3DATU
B,CEX3DATU
C,CEX3DATU
D,CEX3DATU
E,CEX3DATU
F,CEX3DATU
G,CEX3DATU
Names of files in which customized files are stored

Language identification number
(2) Addition of new format

A new format has been added to the formats of localu.txt.
To display a message in a language for which no customize file is crated using a specified language, make
settings as shown below.
- 760 -
APPENDIX
(a) Format
Language identification number, Language identification number
(b) Language identification number

Language identification number Language
0 English
1 Japanese
2 German
3 French
4 Italian
5 Spanish
6 Swedish
7 Czech
8 Portuguese
9 Polish
A Russian
B Chinese (Traditional characters)
C Chinese (Simplified characters)
D Korean
E Turkish
F Dutch
G Hungarian
H Bulgarian
I Romanian
(Example)
A customized English message is displayed in place of a Swedish message.
6,0 Language identification number of the language of the

customized message used instead
Language identification number
0,CEX3DATU
1,CEX3DATU
2,CEX3DATU
3,CEX3DATU
4,CEX3DATU
5,CEX3DATU
6,0 Set 0 (language number of
7,CEX3DATU English).
8,CEX3DATU
9,CEX3DATU
C.6 CHANGING THE CUSTOMIZE DEFINITION FILE DURING

USE OF RETHREADING
When cyclst.txt was customized, cyclst.txt that corresponds to thread repairing needs to be customized
again or the following definitions need to be added to the conventional file.
Definitions for cyclst.txt for enabling thread repairing

- 761 -
APPENDIX
<THRD-REPAIR>
<TAB1=1307>
1,1004,491,140,F=0,
1,1005,492,141,F=0,
1,1006,493,142,F=0,
1,1007,494,143,F=0,
1,1008,495,144,F=0,
<TAB2=1308>
1,1004,491,145,F=0,
1,1005,492,146,F=0,
1,1006,493,147,F=0,
1,1007,494,148,F=0,
1,1008,495,149,F=0
C.7 SOFT-KEY CUSTOMIZATION FUNCTION

It is possible to replace the soft key position by using user customize data file.
C.7.1 Structure of Customize Data File

The structure of the customize file for replace the soft keys is in the following.
File Name : SKCSTMU.TXT
C.7.2 Format
The structure of the customize data file is as follows.
<EDIT>
(Example)
P1=SET(1,ID100), SET(2,ID200)
Set sentence.
Soft key page number

Specify the page number of replaced soft keys in the ‘Soft key Page Number’.
See sentence
The format of set sentence as follows.
SET(Soft key Position, Soft key ID)
Soft key ID (ID + Number)

Soft key Position (1 to 10)
If there is no Set sentence, the default soft key is displayed
- 762 -
APPENDIX
1) Soft Key Position
The soft key specified in ‘Soft Key Position’ is replaced.
If ‘Soft key Position’ is not specified, the standard soft key is displayed in this position.
The soft key position is counted from left side.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2) Soft key ID
Soft key ID can be specified by ‘ID+number’.
If ‘0’ is specified as the number, the soft key is not displayed in specified position.
The numbers of Soft key ID are described in “Soft key ID List”.
（Examples）
P1=SET(1,ID100)
P2=SET(1,ID200), SET(2,ID0)
Soft key is not displayed.

Replace to the ID200 soft key
C.7.3 Note
• The soft keys which are displayed in the base screen in EIDT mode are only possible to customize.
• Don’t specify the soft key which can not be used because of the optional function. If these soft keys
are specified, the system doesn’t work correctly.
C.7.4 Soft Key ID List

The following soft-key ID can be used.
ID KEY ID KEY
0 [ ] （Not Display） 126 [FIXFRM]（M）
444 [NEWPRG] 249 [ALTER]
498 [O LIST] 232 [M CODE]
27 [SEARCH BACKWARD] 45 [REWIND]
28 [SEARCH FORWARD] 74 [CHSIZE]
26 [O SRCH] 73 [LINENO]
23 [COPY] 888 [EDWORK]
22 [CUT] 1117 [MLT WIN]
24 [DELETE] 811 [CH PATH]
121 [KEYPST] 16 [G-CONT]
69 [PASTE] 1166 [UNDO]
260 [START]（T） 1167 [REDO]
233 [CYCLE]（T） 845 [WK SET]
261 [END]（T） 846 [T-OFS]
262 [MESCYC]（T） 1116 [TL MNG]
123 [FIGURE]（T） 9 [SETING]
105 [FIXFRM]（T） 48 [BG END]
122 [START]（M）
17 [CYCLE]（M）
124 [END]（M）
420 [MESCYC]（M）
234 [FIGURE]（M）
- 763 -
APPENDIX
C.8 MANUAL GUIDE i WINDOW CALL FUNCTION (for only

Series 30i/31i/32i-B, Series 0i-F)
C.8.1 Outline
User application made by C language executer can call the following MANUAL GUIDE i windows.
(1) Blank figure selection window

(2) Blank figure data input window ( Fixed form and arbitrary free figure )
(3) Free figure input window (Free figure creation window and range selection window)
(4) Machining simulation window
(5) NC program conversion window
C.8.1.1 Available display

This function is available on the following display.
(1) 10.4” size display

(2) 15” size display (Including the mode of enlarging 10.4” display)
(3) 19” size display (Including the mode of enlarging 15” display)
C.8.1.2 Necessary option

All the following options are necessary.
(1) MANUAL GUIDE i window call function : S779

(2) Macro executor + C language executor : J734
C.8.1.3 Necessary parameter setting

Set one of the following parameters when MANUAL GUIDE i window call function is used, and prohibit
to use standard screen of MANUAL GUDIE i.
(1) Parameter No.14794#0 - #7 = 0 and parameter No.14795#0 - #7 = 0

(2) Parameter No.14703#6 = 1 and signal G62.4 = 0
C.8.2 Method of Calling

User application calls MANUAL GUIDE i window by the following function.
[Syntax]
#include <oscall.h>
unsigned short ret = os_chng_appstr( long info, char *str_info );
[Arguments]
info Information to be transmitted.
str_info The start address of string information to be transmitted.
(Note) The maximum number of string characters is 256 including a NULL character at the end.
[Return]
ret = 0 Success.
= EC_TSKID( 2) MANUAL GUIDE i doesn’t exist.
- 764 -
APPENDIX
[Description]
When this function is called, screen control is switched to MANUAL GUIDE i .
And user application can transmit information to MANUAL GUIDE i .
Set values of info and str_info are different from the kind of windows to be called.
(Refer after next chapter about details.)
[Example of code]
unsigned short ret;
long info;
char str_info[256];
info = -1000100;
memset(str_info, '¥0', sizeof(str_info));
strcpy(str_info, “B=25836,S=O1001”);
ret = os_chng_appstr( info, &str_info );
C.8.2.1 Blank figure selection window

Specify the following info and str_info in case of calling blank figure selection window.
Specifying value of argument info

Specify one of the following values in a table to argument info.
(1) Method of output when free contour cylinder blank figure window is selected
info value Method of output
-1000100 Select method of output on free figure data input window of MANUAL GUIDE i .
(In case of EDIT mode)
G code is inserted to the current program.
-1000200
(In case of MEM mode)
G code is inserted to the specified main program.
M98 code is inserted to the current program and G code is inserted to the specified
subprogram that is newly made in the same folder of the current program.
-1000300
M98 code is inserted to the specified main program and G code is inserted to the specified
subprogram that is newly made in the same folder of the main program.
subprogram that is newly made in the common program folder.
-1000400
Specifying value of argument info_str

(1) In case of EDIT mode
Link the string characters <1> and <2> with a comma (,) between them.
And specify start address of the linked string characters to info_str.
<1> B=?????
These are string characters to specify a block number where G code or M98 is inserted.
????? are string characters that specify a previous block number to insert G code or M98.
And it is impossible to insert G code or M98 to top of program.
- 765 -
APPENDIX
<2> S=!!!!!
These are string characters to specify a subprogram name if G code is inserted to a subprogram.
!!!!! are string characters of the subprogram name.
(Example of specifying)
str_info = “B=25836,S=O1001”
(2) In case of MEM mode

Link the string characters <1>, <2> and <3> with a comma (,) between them.
<1> B=?????
Same as EDIT mode.
<2> S=!!!!!
Same as EDIT mode.
<3> P=XXXXX
These are string characters to specify a program name to insert G code or M98 code.
XXXXX is main program name of full path format.
str_info = “B=25836,S=O1001,P=//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH1/O1000”
C.8.2.2 Blank figure data input window (Fixed form and arbitrary free
figure)
Specify the following info and str_info in case of calling blank figure data input window.

(1) Kind of figure

info value Kind of figure
-2000*00 Kind of figure isn’t selected (For displaying a window to alter blank figure)
-2000*01 Rectangular
-2000*02 Cylinder (around Z)
-2000*03 Hollow Cylinder (around Z)
-2000*04 Prism (around Z)
-2000*05 Hollow prism (around Z)
-2000*12 Cylinder (around X)
-2000*13 Hollow cylinder (around X)
-2000*14 Prism (around X)
-2000*15 Hollow prism (around X)
-2000*22 Cylinder (around Y)
-2000*23 Hollow cylinder (around Y)
-2000*24 Prism (around Y)
-2000*25 Hollow prism (around Y)
-2000*50 Free contour cylinder (around Z)
-2000*51 Free contour cylinder (around X)
-2000*52 Free contour cylinder (around Y)
(“*” in upper table indicates a arbitrary number of 0 - 9)
- 766 -
APPENDIX
(2) Method of output when free contour cylinder blank figure window is selected
-20001** Select method of output on free figure data input window of MANUAL GUIDE i .
-20002**
-20003**
subprogram that is made in the common program folder.
-20004**

(In case of displaying a window to newly create)
Same as blank figure selection window.
(In case of displaying a window to alter)

<1> B=?????
These are string characters to specify a block number of G code to alter.
????? are string characters of a block number G code or M98 exists.
<2> S=!!!!!
str_info = “B=25836,S=O1001”

<1> B=?????
Same as EDIT mode.
<2> S=!!!!!
Same as EDIT mode.
<3> P=XXXXX
- 767 -
APPENDIX
C.8.2.3 Free figure input window (Free figure creation window and
range selection window)
Specify the following info and str_info in case of calling free figure input window.

(1) Kind of figure

This is specified by first and second figure of info.
In first figure, specify figure type.
info value Kind of figure
-3000**0 Figure type isn’t selected (For displaying a window to alter free figure)
-3000**1 Figure for turning
-3000**2 Face
-3000**3 Convex
-3000**4 Concave
-3000**5 Groove
-3000**6 Open
-3000**7 Figure for pocket machining
-3000**8 Figure for emboss machining
In second figure, specify kind of plane

Figure for turning cycle/
info value Kind of plane
milling cycle
-3000*00 Kind of plane isn’t selected
(For displaying a window to alter free figure)
-3000210 Kind of plane isn’t selected
(For displaying a window to alter range selection) Figure for turning cycle
-3000*21 ZX plane
-3000*3* XY plane
-3000*4* YZ plane
-3000*5* XC plane figure (Using interpolation) Figure for milling cycle
-3000*6* ZC plane figure (Using interpolation)
-3000*7* XA plane figure (Using interpolation)
(2) Method of output when free figure input window is selected

-30001** Select method of output on free figure data input window of MANUAL GUIDE i .
-30002**
M98 code is inserted to the current program and G code is inserted the specified
-30003**
- 768 -
APPENDIX

-30004**

(In case of displaying a window to newly create)
<1> B=?????
These are string characters to specify a block number where G code or M98 is inserted.
????? are string characters that specify a previous block number to insert G code or M98.
And it is impossible to insert G code or M98 to top of program.
<2> S=!!!!!
These are string characters to specify a subprogram name if G code is inserted a
subprogram.
!!!!! are string characters of the subprogram.
str_info = “B=25836,S=O1001”

<1> B=?????
Same as EDIT mode.
<2> S=!!!!!
Same as EDIT mode.
<3> P=XXXXX
These are string characters to specify a program name to insert G code or M98 code.
XXXXX is main program name of full path format.
(In case of displaying a window to alter)

<1> B=?????
These are string characters to specify a block number of G code to alter.
????? are string characters of a block number of G code or M98.
<2> S=!!!!!
str_info = “B=25836,S=O1001”
- 769 -
APPENDIX

<1> B=?????
Same as EDIT mode.
<2> S=!!!!!
Same as EDIT mode.
<3> P=XXXXX
C.8.2.4 Machining simulation window

Specify the following info and str_info in case of calling machining simulation window.

Specify info = -4000000.

<1> P1=?????
These are string characters to specify a default program to simulate (for first path).
????? is a program name of full path format.
If the address isn’t specified, current program is a default program to simulate.
<2> P2=!!!!!
These are string characters to specify a default program to simulate (for second path).
The method of specifying !!!!! is same as first path.
<3> P3=XXXXX
These are string characters to specify a default program to simulate (for third path).
The method of specifying !!!!! is same as first path.
str_info = “P1=//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH1/O1000,P2=//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH2/O1000”
(Note)
User application can specify default programs for simulating by switching current programs.
C.8.2.5 NC program conversion window

Specify the following info and str_info in case of calling machining simulation window.

Specify info = -5000000.

Make string characters <1>, and specify a start address of them.
<1> P=?????
These are string characters to specify a default destination.
????? is a program name of full path format. If the address isn’t specified, specify it on MANUAL
GUIDE i sreen.
- 770 -
APPENDIX
str_info = “P=//CNC_MEM/USER/PATH1/O2000”
C.8.2.6 Number of string characters to be transmitted is 256 or more

If the number of string characters to be transmitted is 256 or more, because all of characters can’t be
transmitted by only one time, transmit the information by switching screen control from user application
to MANUAL GUIDE i (3 times is maximum).
Specify the following info and str_info in this case.

(1) Case of left string characters to be transmitted to MANUAL GUIDE i is 256 or more
Specify info=-99000000.
(2) Case of left string characters to be transmitted to MANUAL GUIDE i is less than 256
Specify the above-mentioned number corresponding to called window.

(1) Case of left string characters to be transmitted to MANUAL GUIDE i is 256 or more
Divide string characters to be transmitted to MANUAL GUIDE i to 255 string characters and left
string characters, and specify the start address of first 255 string characters to argument info_str.
(2) Case of left string characters to be transmitted to MANUAL GUIDE i is less than 256.
Specify start address of the left string characters to argument info_str.
Specifying value of argument info after specifying a part of string characters

If user application specifies info=-99000000, MANUAL GUIDE i returns screen control to user
application after getting the string characters. After this, specify info=-99000000 if 256 or more string
characters should be transmitted again. Specify the above-mentioned number corresponding to called
window if less than 256 string characters should be transmitted.
C.8.3 Method to get return information from MANUAL GUIDE i

When called window is closed by an operation or the method of calling is wrong, screen control is
returned to user application. When screen control is returned to user application, get return information
(ret_info) from MANUAL GUIDE i by the following function. User application redraws the screen or a
message according to ret_info.
[Syntax]
#include <oscall.h>
long ret_info = os_get_chngappstr( char *str_info );
[Arguments]
str_info Don’t use.
[Return]
ret_info Return information from MANUAL GUIDE i .
But when NC screen is displayed before calling this function,0 is returned.
[Description]
User application gets information from MANUAL GUIDE i .
- 771 -
APPENDIX
[Example of code]
long ret_info;
char str_info[256];
ret_info = os_get_chngappstr( &str_info );

(1) “ret_info” value when MANUAL GUIDE i window is called normally
ret_info Meaning
-10000 G4 digit code is inserted normally.
-10001 [CANCEL] soft-key is pushed.
-10002 The mode is switched.
-10003 The mode is switched during output of program. The output is interrupted.
-10004 Path selection signal is switched.
-10005 Path selection signal is switched during output of program. The output is interrupted.
-10006 [POSITION] function key is pushed.
-10007 [PROGRAM] function key is pushed.
-10008 [OFFSET/SETTING] function key is pushed.
-10009 [SYSTEM] function key is pushed.
-10010 [MESSAGE] function key is pushed.
-10011 [GRAPH] function key is pushed.
-10012 [CUSTOM1] function key is pushed.
-10013 [COSTOM2] function key is pushed.
-10014 Unexpected error occurred on MANUAL GUIDE i.
(2) “ret_info” value when MANUAL GUIDE i window isn’t called normally
ret_info Meaning
-10101 An alarm is issued.
-10102 The emergency stop state is present.
-10103 The mode isn’t correct. (Other than EDIT or MEM)
-10104 The seventh digit of “info” aren’t within the range. (Other than 1-5 or 99)
-10106 Specified program name to output G code is not correct.
-10107 Main program name isn’t specified. (On only MEM mode)
-10108 MEM mode : Specified program doesn’t exist.
EDIT mode : No program is selected.
-10109 The specified main program is being operated. (On only MEM mode)
-10110 The specified main program is protected. (On only MEM mode)
-10111 The specified main program is selected as FG program. (On only MEM mode)
-10112 Block number isn’t specified.
-10113 The block number doesn’t exist in the program to be edited.
-10114 A character that isn’t digit is used in block number.
-10115 Subprogram name isn’t specified.
-10116 Subprogram name isn’t correct.
-10117 A program that has same name as specified subprogram already exists.
-10118 The specified program number is protected.
-10119 Subprogram can’t be made because the number of program is maximum.
- 772 -
APPENDIX
figure) and Free figure input window (Free figure creation
window and range selection window)
ret_info Meaning
-10000 G4 digit code is inserted normally.
-10001 [CANCEL] soft-key is pushed.
-10003 The mode is switched during output of program. The output is interrupted.
-10004 Path selection signal is switched.
-10005 Path selection signal is switched during output of program. The output is interrupted.
-10014 Unexpected error occurred on MANUAL GUIDE i .
ret_info Meaning
-10105 The specified kind of figure isn’t correct.
-10106 Specified program name to output G code is not correct.
-10107 Main program name isn’t specified. (On only MEM mode)
-10108 MEM mode : Specified program doesn’t exist.
EDIT mode : No program is selected.
-10109 The specified main program is being operated. (On only MEM mode)
-10110 The specified main program is protected. (On only MEM mode)
-10111 The specified main program is selected as FG program. (On only MEM mode)
-10112 Block number isn’t specified.
-10113 The block number doesn’t exist in the program to be edited.
-10114 A character that isn’t digit is used in block number.
-10115 Subprogram name isn’t specified.
-10116 Subprogram name isn’t correct.
-10117 A program that has same name as specified subprogram already exists.
-10118 The specified program number is protected.
-10119 Subprogram can’t be made because the number of program is maximum.
-10120 The specified code doesn’t exist in the specified position. (On only alteration)
-10121 The format of figure command to be altered isn’t correct. (On only alteration)
-10122 The element number of arbitrary figure to be altered exceeds 90 or 300. (On only alteration)
- 773 -
APPENDIX

ret_info Meaning
-10001 [GRPOFF] soft-key is pushed.
-10002 The mode is switched. (other than EDIT or MEM)
-10014 Unexpected error occurred on MANUAL GUIDE i.
ret_info Meaning
-10123 A program to be simulated doesn’t exist.
-10124 A program to be simulated already specified on other path.

ret_info Meaning
-10001 [RETURN] soft-key is pushed.
-10014 Unexpected error occurred on MANUAL GUIDE i .
- 774 -
APPENDIX
ret_info Meaning
-10123 A program to be simulated doesn’t exist.
-10125 The program name of destination isn’t correct.
-10126 A program that has same name as program of destination already exists.
-10127 The number of program specified as destination is protected.
-10128 A program of destination can’t be made because the number of program is maximum.
-10129 NC is executing operation.
C.8.3.5 Number of string characters to be transmitted is 256 or more

“ret_info” value when MANUAL GUIDE i window isn’t called normally
ret_info Meaning
-10100 255 characters are given.
C.8.4 Display and Operation

(1) Background display ( Excluding soft-keys )
The background that user application drew before calling MANUAL GUIDE i window is left.
(2) Operation to return screen control to user application

When one of the following operations is done, MANUAL GUIDE i window is closed and screen
control is returned to user application.
<1> Push one of the following soft-keys after blank figure is selected, figure data is inputted and G
code is inserted to program.
(a) [CREATE] soft-key in free contour cylinder blank figure window
(b) [OK] soft-key in “METHOD OF FREE FIGURE CREATION” window
(c) [INSERT] soft-key in blank figure data input window for fixed form
<2> Push Soft-key [CANCEL].
<3> Change the mode.
<4> Change the path selection signal.
<5> Push one of the function keys.
- 775 -
APPENDIX
(3) Example of blank figure selection window
figure)

<1> Push one of the following soft-keys after figure data is inputted and G code is inserted to
program.
(a) [CREATE] soft-key in free contour cylinder blank figure window
<2> Push soft-key [CANCEL].
(3) Note of inserting G code

G code is not outputted to a subprogram if fixed form input screen is called.
In case of EDIT mode, G code is inserted to the current program. In case of MEM mode, G code is
inserted to the selected main program.
- 776 -
APPENDIX
(4) Example of blank figure selection window
<1> Example of free contour cylinder blank figure data input window
<2> Example of fixed form blank figure data input window
C.8.4.3 Free figure input window (Free figure creation window, range
selection window)

<1> Push one of the following soft-keys and G code is inputted or edited.
(a) [CREATE] soft-key in free figure creation window
<2> Push soft-key [CANCEL].
- 777 -
APPENDIX

(3) Note of operating free figure creation window

Though [NXTFIG] soft-key can be used on standard screen, it can’t be used when the window is
called.
In case plural figures must be inserted continuously, call figure input window again after screen
(4) Example of range selection window

<1> Push soft-key [GRPOFF].

<2> Change the mode to other than EDIT or MEM.
- 778 -
APPENDIX
(2) Example of machining simulation window

<1> Push soft-key [RETURN].

(2) Operation for displaying NC program conversion window

<1> When user application didn’t specify default program name of destination
The window “CREATE PROGRAM FOR DESTINATION” is displayed. Input program name
and NC program conversion window is displayed.
<2> When user application specified default program name of destination
NC program conversion window is displayed. (The window “CREATE PROGRAM FOR
DESTINATION” is not displayed.)
(3) Example of NC program conversion window
- 779 -
APPENDIX
C.8.5 Method of Making User Application

When this function is used, call the function “os_chng_appstr” and “os_get_chngappstr” as follows.
User application
Draw background for MANUAL GUIDE i

window call.
Execute “ret = os_chng_appstr”

and MANUAL GUIDE i window is called.
MANUAL GUIDE i window

Call
While MANUAL GUIDE i

window is called, the maintask
of user application is stopped.
Screen control is returned.
Execute “ret_info = os_get_chngappstr”

and get return information from
MANUAL GUIDE i .
Redraw user application screen

according to ret_info.
END
C.8.6 Method of Color Pallet Setting

Set graphic of user application to VGA if this function is used. And, because color pallet must be set to the
same as MANUAL GUIDE i , set color pallet of user application as follows.
(1) When the set value of “Parameter Number” in the following table is other than 0
Set value of parameter to “Index of color pallet”.
(2) When the set value of “Parameter Number” in the following table is 0
Set “Color value” to “Index of color pallet”.
- 780 -
APPENDIX
When the value of parameter is 0

Index of color pallet Parameter Number
Color value Color
16 14724 0x00003F3F Yellow
17 14725 0x0000003F Red
18 14726 0x00002000 Green
19 14727 0x00003F3F Yellow
20 14728 0x003F0000 Blue
21 14729 0x002A002A Purple
22 14730 0x003F3F3F White
23 14731 0x003F3F3F White
24 14732 0x00003F00 Light green
25 14733 0x00000000 Black
26 14734 0x00121212 Dark grey
27 14735 0x00303030 Bright grey
28 14736 0x003F3F00 Sky blue
29 14737 0x003C2020 Dark sky blue
30 14738 0x00181818 Grey
31 14739 0x00282828 Light grey
32 14740 0x0000003F Red
33 14741 0x00002000 Green
34 14742 0x00003F3F Yellow
35 14743 0x003F0000 Blue
36 14744 0x003C2020 Light purple
37 14745 0x00280030 Dark pink
38 14746 0x003F3F3F White
39 14747 0x00102810 Light green
40 14748 0x00000000 Black
41 14749 0x003C3C00 Sky blue
42 14750 0x00303030 Bright grey
43 14751 0x00180C0C Navy blue
44 14752 0x00000020 Dark red
45 14753 0x00101010 Dark grey
46 14754 0x00282828 Light grey
47 14755 0x00000000 Black
48 14756 0x00002000 Green
49 14757 0x003F0000 Blue
50 14758 0x003F0000 Blue
51 14759 0x003C3C00 Sky blue
52 14760 0x003C3C00 Sky blue
53 14761 0x0000003C Red
54 14762 0x003F0000 Blue
55 14763 0x003F0000 Blue
56 14764 0x00003F3F Yellow
57 14765 0x00303030 Bright grey
- 781 -
APPENDIX
When the value of parameter is 0

Index of color pallet Parameter Number
Color value Color
58 14766 0x00282828 Light grey
59 14767 0x00000000 Black
60 14768 0x00000000 Black
61 14769 0x003F3F3F White
62 14770 0x003C3C00 Sky blue
63 14771 0x00181818 Grey
64 14780 0x0000003F Red
C.8.7 Restriction
Help window isn’t displayed while a MANUAL GUIDE i window is being called.
C.9 DISPLAY OF SIMPLIFIED CHINESE CHARACTERS

ALARM OF USER MACRO
(for Series 30i/31i/32i-B, 0i-F/0i-D)
Simplified Chinese characters alarm message occurred in user macro can be displayed.
C.9.1 Setting for Use

(1) In case of Series 30i/31i/32i-B, Enable one of the following options.
(a) Multi-language display Chinese (simplified characters) (S829)
(b) Selection of five optional language (R521)
(2) Set the following parameters.

(When simplified Chinese characters display function is used)
(a) Parameter No.3281=15 (Language of CNC is simplified Chinese characters)
(b) Parameter No.14712=0 or 12
0: Language of MANUAL GUIDE i is the same as language of CNC.
12: Language of MANUAL GUIDE i is simplified Chinese characters.
(When selection of five optional language function is used)

(a) Parameter No.3281=15 (Language of CNC is simplified Chinese characters)
(b) Parameter No.3282#4=1 (Simplified Chinese characters is available in selection of five
optional language)
(c) Parameter No.14712=0 or 12
0: Language of MANUAL GUIDE i is the same as language of CNC.
12: Language of MANUAL GUIDE i is simplified Chinese characters.
(3) Define the alarm message of simplified Chinese characters of user macro by using the direct
language specification function of macro executor.
- 782 -
APPENDIX
C.10 EXTENDED AXIS NAME FUNCTION FOR 8.4” /10.4”

DISPLAY (for only Series 30i/31i/32i-B, Series 0i-F)
The extended axis name can be used on MANUAL GUIDE i screen for 8.4” /10.4” display unit.
C.10.1 Conditions to Use This Function

This function requires the following all conditions.
(1) The option “MANUAL GUIDE i extended axis name function”

(2) 8.4” or 10.4” display unit
(3) Extended axis name is one of following axes.
<1> Linear axis other than basic three axis
<2> Rotary axis of workpiece rotation
<3> Live tool axis
(4) Extended axis name of 2 characters (Example : C2, ZS)
(5) Set-up guidance function is invalid.
C.10.2 Displaying Extended Axis Name

Extended axis name can be displayed on the following screens.
(1) Base screen

(2) Relative coordinates presetting screen
(3) Workpiece coordinate data screen
(4) Machining simulation screen
NOTE
1. In “CALCULATE OFFSET(MEASURE)” screen of workpiece coordinate data
2. In “CALCULATE OFFSET(+INPUT)” screen of workpiece coordinate data
3. The second character of axis name is not displayed but “-” (a minus sign) is
displayed in “ACTUAL POS”, “DIST TO GO” and “NEXT DIST” of base screen
under all the following conditions.
<1>The axis name size is standard.
<2>The values of “ACTUAL POS”, “DIST TO GO” and “NEXT DIST” is negative
number that has 8 digits.
( Example )
Usual :
Under the conditions :
- 783 -
APPENDIX
C.10.3 Editing a Program Including Extended Axis Name

A program including extended axis name can be edited.
(1) Case of extended axis name + value

<1> Selecting a word by the cursor
The whole of a word is selected by the cursor.
( Example )
<2> Deleting a word

The whole of a word is deleted.
( Example )
→
<3> Replacing a word
The whole of a word is replaced.
( Example )
→
<4> Replacing the value of a word
Only the value of a word is replaced.
( Example )
→
(2) Case of extended axis name + ”=” + command value

<1> Selecting a word by the cursor
The whole of a word is selected by the cursor.
( Example )
<2> Deleting a word

The whole of a word is deleted.
( Example )
→
<3> Replacing a word
The whole of a word is replaced.
( Example )
→
<4> Replacing the value of a word
Only the value of a word is replaced.
( Example )
→
- 784 -
APPENDIX
C.11 MANUAL GUIDE i CUSTOMIZATION

C.11.1 Automatic Operation After Changing to MANUAL GUIDE i

Screen from User Application
(1) Explanation of function
After changing to MANUAL GUIDE i screen from the user application, the MDI key and the softkey
can be automatically operated by using “os_chng_appstr()” function.
(2) Parameter setting for use

(3) Specification of os_chng_appstr () function

Call “os_chng_appstr ()” function with the following arguments in the user application.
os_chng_appstr ( -3, “operation command” )
- First argument : -3
- Second argument : operation command
(List of operation command)

Operation command Explanation
0∼9 Push number 0 ∼ 9
- Push sign “-“ (hyphen)
. Push sign “.” (period)
SKEY01 ∼ SKEY10 Push soft-key1∼ soft-key10
SKEY-R Push soft-key [>]
SKEY-L Push soft-key [<]
INPUT Push key [INPUT]
CR Push key [→]
CL Push key [←]
CD Push key [↓]
CU Push key [↑]
PAGE-D Push key [PAGE DOWN]
PAGE-U Push key [PAGE UP]
WAIT0.1 ∼ WAIT3276.7 Waiting of 0.1(sec) ∼ 3276.7(sec)
(4) Attention when operation command is specified

(a) It is possible to specify operation command up to 255 characters.
(b) When there are plural operation commands, delimit it with the space “ “.
(c) Set waiting time without putting space after "WAIT".
(5) Example
When you want to display the cylinder blank figure input window, call “os_chng_appstr ()” function
as follows.
os_chng_appstr ( -3, "SKEY-L SKEY01 WAIT1.5 CR CD SKEY09" )

(a) (b) (c) (d) (e) (f)
(Explanation of operation command)

(a) Push key : push softkey [<]
(b) Push key : push softkey [START] of first from the left
- 785 -
APPENDIX
(c) Temporary stop : wait for 1.5 seconds

(d) Push key : push softkey [→]
(e) Push key : push softkey [↓]
(f) Push key : push softkey [START] of ninth from the left
C.11.2 Change to User Application Screen After Closing MAUAL

GUIDE i Window
The user application screen is changed on the following conditions.
(a) When the window of MANUAL GUIDE i of window ID list is closed

(b) When the following operation is done
- Push softkey [INSERT]
- Push softkey [OK]
- Push softkey [ALTER]
- Push softkey [CANCELI]
- Switch mode
- Switch path
- Push function key

(3) Specification of function

After it changes to the user application, window ID of MANUAL GUIDE i that is closed at the end
can be acquired in the return value of “os_get_chngappinfo ()” function.
Window ID = os_get_chngappinfo()
Window ID is expressed by the figure of six digits.

Two first digits means the method for closing the window, and four digits in the under means
the input window as follows.
Window ID : - AABBBB
- AA = methods for closing window

- BBBB = input window
- 786 -
APPENDIX
(List of methods for closing window)
Window ID Method of closing window
-10 Push soft-key [INSERT] or [OK] or [ALTER]
-20 Push soft-key [CANCEL] / Switching mode or path
-30 Push function-key [SYSTEM]
-31 Push function-key [POSITION]
-32 Push function-key [PROGRAM]
-33 Push function-key [OFFSET/SETTING]
-34 Push function-key [MESSAGE]
-35 Push function-key [GRAPH]
-36 Push function-key [CUSTOM1]
-37 Push function-key [CUSTOM2]
(List of window ID for cycle input, blank input figure)

Window ID Title G code
-**0001 Center drilling G1000
-**0002 Drilling G1001
-**0003 Tapping G1002
-**0004 Reaming G1003
-**0005 Boring G1004
-**0006 Fine boring G1005
-**0007 Back boring G1006
-**0008 Tapping G1002
-**0010 Emboss machining roughing G1080
-**0011 Emboss machining bottom finishing G1081
-**0012 Emboss machining side finishing G1082
-**0013 Emboss machining chamfering G1083
-**0020 Facing roughing G1020
-**0021 Facing finishing G1021
-**0026 Pocketing roughing G1040
-**0027 Pocketing bottom finishing G1041
-**0028 Pocketing side finishing G1042
-**0029 Pocketing chamfering G1043
-**0032 Grooving roughing G1050
-**0033 Grooving bottom finishing G1051
-**0034 Grooving side finishing G1052
-**0035 Grooving chamfering G1053
-**0038 C-axis grooving G1056
-**0039 A-axis grooving G1058
-**0040 B-axis grooving G1054
-**0041 Thread milling G1010
-**0042 Outer thread milling G1026
-**0049 Engraving G1025
-**0052 Tapping G1102
-**0053 Reaming G1103
-**0054 Boring G1104
-**0055 Tapping G1102
- 787 -
APPENDIX

-**0062 Tapping G1112
-**0063 Reaming G1113
-**0064 Boring G1114
-**0065 Tapping G1112
-**0070 Outer surface roughing G1120
-**0071 Inner surface roughing G1121
-**0072 End face roughing G1122
-**0073 Outer surface semi-finishing G1123
-**0074 Inner surface semi-finishing G1124
-**0075 End face semi-finishing G1125
-**0076 Outer surface finishing G1126
-**0077 Inner surface finishing G1127
-**0078 End face finishing G1128
-**0079 Conical boring G1129
-**0080 Turning groove outer surface roughing G1130
-**0081 Turning groove inner surface roughing G1131
-**0082 Turning groove end face roughing G1132
-**0083 Turning groove outer surface roughing and finishing G1133
-**0084 Turning groove inner surface roughing and finishing G1134
-**0085 Turning groove end face roughing and finishing G1135
-**0086 Turning groove outer surface finishing G1136
-**0087 Turning groove inner surface finishing G1137
-**0088 Turning groove end face finishing G1138
-**0090 Turning groove threading outer surface G1140
-**0091 Turning groove threading inner surface G1141
-**0094 Turning groove outer surface roughing G1130
-**0095 Turning groove inner surface roughing G1131
-**0096 Turning groove end face roughing G1132
-**0097 Turning groove outer surface roughing and finishing G1133
-**0098 Turning groove inner surface roughing and finishing G1134
-**0099 Turning groove end face roughing and finishing G1135
-**0100 XY plane random points G1210
-**0101 XY plane linear points (same interval) G1211
-**0102 XY plane linear points (different interval) G1212
-**0103 XY plane grid points G1213
-**0104 XY plane rectangle points G1214
-**0105 XY plane circle points G1215
-**0106 XY plane arc points (same interval) G1216
-**0107 XY plane arc points (different interval) G1217
-**0110 XY plane rectangle G1220
-**0111 XY plane circle G1221
-**0112 XY plane track G1222
-**0113 XY plane radial groove G1223
-**0114 XY plane Straight line G1224
- 788 -
APPENDIX

-**0115 XY plane polygon G1225
-**0120 YZ plane random points G1310
-**0121 YZ plane linear points (same interval) G1311
-**0122 YZ plane linear points (different interval) G1312
-**0123 YZ plane grid points G1313
-**0124 YZ plane rectangle points G1314
-**0125 YZ plane circle points G1315
-**0126 YZ plane arc points (same interval) G1316
-**0127 YZ plane arc points (different interval) G1317
-**0130 YZ plane rectangle G1320
-**0131 YZ plane circle G1321
-**0132 YZ plane track G1322
-**0133 YZ plane radial groove G1323
-**0134 YZ plane polygon G1325
-**0135 Polygon figure G1575
-**0150 ZX plane general-purpose thread G1460
-**0151 ZX plane metric thread G1461
-**0152 ZX plane unified thread G1462
-**0153 ZX plane PT thread G1463
-**0154 ZX plane PF thread G1464
-**0156 ZX plane outer normal groove G1470
-**0157 ZX plane outer trapezoidal groove G1471
-**0158 ZX plane inner normal groove G1472
-**0159 ZX plane inner trapezoidal groove G1473
-**0160 ZX plane end face normal groove G1474
-**0161 ZX plane end face trapezoidal groove G1475
-**0169 ZC plane C-axis hole -random points- orthogonal G1574
-**0170 XC plane rectangle G1520
-**0171 XC plane circle G1521
-**0172 XC plane track G1522
-**0173 XC plane radial groove G1523
-**0174 XC plane C axis groove G1570
-**0175 XC plane X axis groove G1571
-**0176 XC plane C-axis hole -circle points G1572
-**0177 XC plane C-axis hole -random points G1573
-**0178 XC plane polygon G1525
-**0179 XC plane circle groove G1526
-**0180 ZC plane C axis groove G1670
-**0181 ZC plane X axis groove G1671
-**0182 ZC plane C-axis hole -circle points G1672
-**0183 ZC plane C-axis hole -random points G1673
-**0190 ZC plane A axis groove G1770
-**0191 ZC plane X axis groove G1771
-**0192 ZC plane A-axis hole -circle points G1772
-**0193 ZC plane A-axis hole -random points G1773
-**0194 YB plane B axis groove G1775
-**0195 YB plane X axis groove G1776
-**0196 YB plane B-axis hole -circle points G1777
- 789 -
APPENDIX

-**0197 YB plane Y B-axis hole -random points G1778
-**0200 Contouring outer wall roughing G1060
-**0201 Contouring outer wall bottom finishing G1061
-**0202 Contouring outer wall side finishing G1062
-**0203 Contouring outer wall chamfering G1063
-**0204 Contouring Inner wall roughing G1064
-**0205 Contouring inner wall bottom finishing G1065
-**0206 Contouring inner wall side finishing G1066
-**0207 Contouring inner wall chamfering G1067
-**0208 Contouring partial roughing G1068
-**0209 Contouring partial bottom finishing G1069
-**0210 Contouring Partial Side finishing G1070
-**0211 Contouring Partial Chamfering G1071
-**0212 Outer surface residual roughing G1160
-**0213 Inner surface residual roughing G1161
-**0214 End face residual roughing G1162
-**0215 Outer surface residual semi-finishing G1163
-**0216 Inner surface residual semi-finishing G1164
-**0217 End face residual semi-finishing G1165
-**0218 Outer surface residual finishing G1166
-**0219 Inner surface residual finishing G1167
-**0220 End face residual finishing G1168
-**0221 Polygon turning G1145
-**0222 Tilted working plane with Euler’s angle G1850
-**0223 Tilted working plane with roll-pitch-yaw angle G1851
-**0224 Tilted working plane with 3 point G1852
-**0225 Tilted working plane with 2 vectors G1853
-**0226 Tilted working plane with projection angle G1854
-**0227 Tilted working plane with tool axis direction G1855
-**0228 Tilted working plane cancel G1859
-**0286 Stylus ball diameter calibration (Z axis) G2062
-**0287 Stylus offsets calibration-A (Z axis) G2063
-**0288 Stylus offsets calibration-B (Z axis) G2064
-**0289 Outside diameter work-set (Z axis) G2073
-**0290 Inside diameter work-set (Z axis) G2074
-**0291 Outside diameter measure (Z axis) G2083
-**0292 Inside diameter measure (Z axis) G2084
-**0293 Stylus ball diameter calibration (X axis) G2162
-**0294 Stylus offsets calibration-A (X axis) G2163
-**0295 Stylus offsets calibration-B (X axis) G2164
-**0296 Outside diameter work-set (X axis) G2173
-**0297 Inside diameter work-set (X axis) G2174
-**0298 Outside diameter measure (X axis) G2183
-**0299 Inside diameter measure (X axis) G2184
-**0300 Touch sensor position calibration (Z axis) G2000
-**0301 Probe length calibration (Z axis) G2001
-**0302 Stylus ball diameter calibration (Z axis) G2002
-**0303 Stylus offsets calibration-A (Z axis) G2003
- 790 -
APPENDIX

-**0304 Stylus offsets calibration-B (Z axis) G2004
-**0305 Stylus ball diameter calibration (work rotation -Z axis) G2005
-**0306 Stylus offsets calibration-A (work rotation -Z axis) G2006
-**0307 Stylus offsets calibration-B (work rotation -Z axis) G2007
-**0310 Touch sensor position calibration (X axis) G2100
-**0311 Probe length calibration (X axis) G2101
-**0312 Stylus ball diameter calibration (X axis) G2102
-**0313 Stylus offsets calibration-A (X axis) G2103
-**0314 Stylus offsets calibration-B (X axis) G2104
-**0315 Stylus ball diameter calibration (work rotation –X axis) G2105
-**0316 Stylus offsets calibration-A (work rotation –X axis) G2106
-**0317 Stylus offsets calibration-B (work rotation -X axis) G2107
-**0318 Measure for rotate-axis position calibration G2890
-**0319 rotate-axis position calibration G2891
-**0320 Milling tool measure (Z axis) G2010
-**0321 Turning tool measure (Z axis) G2011
-**0322 Milling tool measure (X axis) G2110
-**0323 Turning tool measure (X axis) G2111
-**0324 Milling tool measure (Z axis – non touch) G2012
-**0325 Turning tool measure (Z axis– non touch) G2112
-**0326 Work-piece setting error (XY plane) G2035
-**0327 Work-piece setting error (YZ plane) G2036
-**0328 Work-piece setting error (ZX plane) G2037
-**0329 Work-piece setting error (set - work) G2038
-**0330 End-face work-set Z axis direct. (Z axis) G2022
-**0331 End-face work-set X axis direct. (Z axis) G2020
-**0332 End-face work-set Y axis direct. (Z axis) G2021
-**0333 Outside diameter work-set (Z axis) G2023
-**0334 Inside diameter work-set G2024
-**0335 Outside width work-set (Z axis) G2025
-**0336 Inside width work-set (Z axis) G2026
-**0337 TWP measurement indexing cycle G2047
-**0341 Outside corner measure (Z axis) G2027
-**0342 Inside corner measure (Z axis) G2028
-**0343 Outside corner measure (X axis) G2127
-**0344 Inside corner measure (X axis) G2128
-**0345 C axis outside width work-set (Z axis) G2031
-**0346 C axis inside width work-set (Z axis) G2032
-**0347 Work-piece setting error outside-corner (Z axis) G2033
-**0348 Work-piece setting error outside-corner (X axis) G2133
-**0351 End-face work-set X-axis direct. (X axis) G2120
-**0352 End-face work-set Y-axis direct. (X axis) G2121
-**0353 Outside diameter work-set (X axis) G2123
-**0354 Inside diameter work-set (X axis) G2124
-**0355 Outside width work-set (X axis) G2125
-**0356 Inside width work-set (X axis) G2126
-**0365 C-axis Outside width work-set (X axis) G2131
-**0366 C-axis inside width work-set (X axis) G2132
- 791 -
APPENDIX

-**0367 Angle of slanted work-piece work-set (Z axis) G2029
-**0368 Angle of slanted work-piece work-set (X axis) G2129
-**0370 End-face measure Z-axis direct. (Z axis) G2042
-**0371 End-face measure X-axis direct. (Z axis) G2040
-**0372 End-face measure Y-axis direct. (Z axis) G2041
-**0375 Outside width measure (Z axis) G2045
-**0376 Inside width measure (Z axis) G2046
-**0377 Outside diameter measure (work rot. - Z axis) G2053
-**0378 Inside diameter measure (work rot. - Z axis) G2054
-**0380 End-face measure Z-axis direct. (X axis) G2142
-**0381 End-face measure X-axis direct. (X axis) G2140
-**0382 End-face measure Y-axis direct. (X axis) G2141
-**0385 Outside width measure (Z axis) G2145
-**0386 Inside width measure (Z axis) G2146
-**0387 Outside diameter measure (work rot. - X axis) G2153
-**0388 Inside diameter measure (work rot.- X axis) G2154
-**0390 Blank form Column G1900
-**0391 Blank form Column with a hole G1901
-**0392 Blank form Rectangular solid G1902
-**0394 General-purpose tool G1910
-**0395 Threading tool G1911
-**0396 Grooving tool G1912
-**0397 Round-nose tool G1913
-**0398 Point nose straight tool G1914
-**0399 Drill tool G1921
-**0400 Counter sink tool G1931
-**0401 Flat end mill tool G1932
-**0402 Ball end mill tool G1933
-**0403 Tap tool G1922
-**0404 Reamer tool G1923
-**0405 Boring tool G1924
-**0406 Face mill tool G1930
-**0407 Blank form Polygon G1903
-**0408 Blank form polygon with a hole G1904
-**0409 Blank form column (around X) G1906
-**0410 Blank form column with a hole (around X) G1907
-**0411 Blank form column (around Y) G1756
-**0412 Blank form column with a hole (around Y) G1757
-**0413 Blank form polygon (around Y) G1758
-**0414 Blank form polygon with a hole (around Y) G1759
-**0450 Work coordinate conversion direct (Y) G1952
-**0451 Work coordinate conversion indirect (Y) G1953
-**0452 Work coordinate conversion cancel G1959
-**0453 Work coordinate conversion direct (Z) G1954
- 792 -
APPENDIX

-**0454 Work coordinate conversion indirect (Z) G1955
-**0460 Spindle change G1998
-**0461 Start synchronization drawing G1994
-**0462 Stop synchronization drawing G1995
-**0470 Coordinate conversion (mirror image) G1980
-**0471 Coordinate conversion cancel (mirror image) G1981
-**0472 Coordinate conversion (rotation) G1957
-**0473 Rotate copy G72.1
-**0474 Scaling G1982
-**0475 Parallel copy G72.2
-**0476 Coordinate conversion cancel (rotation) G1958
-**0477 Scaling cancel G1983
-**0478 Turning outer surface roughing and finishing G1150
-**0479 Turning inner surface roughing and finishing G1151
-**0480 Turning end face roughing and finishing G1152
-**0481 Blank form rectangular solid G1902
-**0482 Cylinder blank figure (around Y) G1756
-**0483 Hollow cylinder blank figure (around Y) G1757
-**0484 Prism blank figure (around Y) G1758
-**0485 Hollow prism blank figure (around Y) G1759
(List of window ID for arbitrary figure, free cylinder figure, G contouring input)
-**1100 XY plane arbitrary figure G1200 ∼ G1206
-**1200 YZ plane arbitrary figure G1300 ∼ G1306
-**1400 XC plane end face arbitrary figure G1500 ∼ G1506
-**1500 ZC plane cylindrical surface arbitrary figure G1600 ∼ G1606
-**1600 ZX plane turning figure G1450 ∼ G1456
-**1700 Free cylinder figure G1970 ∼ G1976
-**1800 XA plane cylindrical surface arbitrary figure G1700 ∼ G1706
-**1900 Free cylinder figure (around X) G1790 ∼ G1796
-**2000 Free cylinder figure (around Y) G1780 ∼ G1786
-**2100 XY plane contouring program G1200 ∼ G1206
-**2200 YZ plane contouring program G1300 ∼ G1306
-**2300 ZX plane contouring program G1400 ∼ G1406
-**2400 XC plane end face contouring program G1500 ∼ G1506
-**2500 ZC plane cylindrical surface contouring program G1600 ∼ G1606
-**5000 Milling machining start menu -
-**5001 Milling machining menu -
-**5002 Milling machining figure menu -
-**5010 Turning machining start menu -
-**5011 Turning machining menu -
-**5012 Turning machining figure menu -
-**5020 G contouring menu -
-**5030 Measure menu -
- 793 -
APPENDIX
C.11.3 Unchange to Menu Window When Blank Figure Input Window

is Closed by Softkey [CANCEL]
The base screen is changed without changing to menu window after softkey [CANCEL] is pushed on
the following blank figure input windows.
Blank figure input window G code

Cylinder blank figure G1900
Hollow cylinder blank figure G1901
Rectangular blank figure G1902
Prism blank figure G1903
Hollow prism blank figure G1904
Cylinder blank figure (around X) G1906
Hollow cylinder blank figure (around X) G1907
Cylinder blank figure (around Y) G1756
Hollow cylinder blank figure (around Y) G1757
Prism blank figure (around Y) G1758
Hollow prism blank figure (around Y) G1759
Free cylinder figure G1970 ∼ G1976
Free cylinder figure (around X) G1790 ∼ G1796
Free cylinder figure (around Y) G1780 ∼ G1786

C.12 OPERATION NAVIGATING CUSTOMIZATION FUNCTION

Create the following 3 definition files to customize operation navigating.
vgamsg1u.txt
…
…
20001,TURNING
20002,CREATE NEW PROG.
…
navilstu.txt
<TAB=20001>
20002,-1,1,
20003,-1,2,
<TAB=20011>
20012,-1,11,
20013,-1,12,
…
- 794 -
APPENDIX
navidatu.txt
<ID=1>
<MAIN=0,SUB=-1>
<TB=-1,SK=-1>
KEY SKEY-L
KEY SKEY08
<MAIN =11,SUB=1>
<TB=-1,SK=09>
KEY SKEY-R
KEY SKEY01
KEY CR
NAVIOFF
<TB=-1,SK=10>
NAVIOFF
<ID=2>
…
…
C.12.1 Window Message Definition File ( vgamsg*u.txt )

This file is for defining characters displayed in title and so on of “SELECT NAVIGATION” window.
This file is unnecessary in case second method of start is used.

vgamsg*u.txt
( “*” is language number. )
(2) Defined data

[1] Characters displayed in tab title
[2] Characters displayed in item title
(3) Data structure

Characters ID number 1 Characters 1
Characters ID number 2 Characters 2
NOTE
Characters ID number machine tool builder can use are from 20000 to 29999.
- 795 -
APPENDIX
C.12.2 Operation Navigating Selection Window Definition File

( navilstu.txt )
This file is for defining title name and so on of “SELECT NAVIGATION” window.
This file is unnecessary in case second method of start is used.

navilstu.txt
(2) Defined data

[1] Characters ID number of tab title
[2] Characters ID number of item title
[3] Icon ID number that is displayed next to item title on the left
[4] ID number of navigation that is executed when the item is selected (*1)
(*1) After this sentence, [4] is called “group ID”.
(3) Data structure

Tab title 1
Item title 1, Icon ID number 1, group ID 1
Tab title 2
C.12.2.1 Specifying tab title

Specify tab title by the following form.
<TAB=Tab title ID[,SERIES=Series No.][,PARM=parameter No.,bit, 0/1]>
[Details]
(1) TAB=tab title ID
This item is for specifying tab title. Specify title name and ID number in “vgamsg*u.txt” and
specify the ID number in the right side of the equation.
The number of displayed tab is same as the number of this form. But the maximum number is 5.
(2) SERIES=Series No. (This item can be omitted.)

Specify one of following numbers ID in the right side of the equation when appearing or
disappearing tab should be controlled according to CNC series.
No. CNC series to appear tab Specifying value of Series ID
1 FS0i-D 09
2 FS30i-A, FS30i-B, FS0i-F 39
3 FS30i-A, FS30i-B, FS0i-F, FS0i-D, 30
- 796 -
APPENDIX
(3) PARM=parameter No.,bit, 0/1 (This item can be omitted.)
Specify this equation when appearing or disappearing tab should be controlled according to bit
type parameter setting.
If “0/1” is set to 0, the tab appears when the parameter that is specified by “parameter No” and
“bit” is set to 0. If “0/1” is set to 1, the tab appears when the parameter is set to 1.
But the maximum number of this equation is 8.
C.12.2.2 Specifying item title and group ID

Specify item title and group ID by the following form.
Item title ID,Icon ID,Group ID[,P=parameter No.,bit, 0/1],
[Details]
(1) Item title
This item is for specifying item title. Specify title name and ID number in “vgamsg*u.txt” and
specify the ID number.
The number of displayed title is same as the number of this form. But the maximum number is
20. And the maximum number that can be displayed in a tab is 10.
(2) Icon ID
Specify ID number that is written in chapter “Available icons” when icons should be displayed
next to items. Specify “-1” when icons should not be displayed.
(3) Group ID
This item is for specifying assignment of group ID to each items.
If navigation that is selected in “SELECT NAVIGATION” window starts, Navi operation codes
that each group ID has are executed.
Navi operation codes are defined in “navidatu.txt”.
Specify an unique ID number to each items. Only the numbers from 1 to 127 can be used.
(4) P=parameter No.,bit, 0/1

Specify numbers only when appearing or disappearing items should be controlled according to
bit type parameters.
If “0/1” is set to 0, the item appears only when the parameter that is specified by “parameter
No” and “bit” is set to 0. If “0/1” is set to 1, the item appears only when the parameter is set to
1.
But the maximum number of this equation is 8.
C.12.3 Operation Navigating Execution Definition File ( navidatu.txt )

The operation navigating function is realized by the method that MANUAL GUIDE i automatically
pushes the keys (*2) that are specified in definition files. And, the automatic key pushing is executed after
a window (*3) is closed when an operator pushes a soft-key (*4).
This file is for defining the automatic key pushing and so on.
(*2) After this sentence, the key data are called “Navi operation code”.
(*3) After this sentence, the data for specifying this window are called “Navi window data”.
(*4) After this sentence, the data for specifying this soft-key are called “Navi trigger data”.

navidatu.txt
- 797 -
APPENDIX
(2) Defined data

[1] Navi window data
[2] Navi trigger data
[3] Navi operation code
(3) Data structure

Group 1
Navi window data 1
Navi trigger data 1
Navi operation code 1

…
Navi trigger data 2

…
…
Navi window data 2
Navi trigger data 1

…
Group 2
Navi window data 1
Navi trigger data 1

…
C.12.3.1 Specifying group ID

Specify group ID by the following form.
<ID=group ID>
[Details]
ID=group ID
This item is for specifying group ID. The numbers from 1 to 127 can be used.
This item links group ID that is specified by “navilstu.txt” or parameter 14870.
The automatic operations after selecting group of this ID are specified in “navidatu.txt”.
The maximum number of this equation is 20.
C.12.3.2 Specifying Navi window data

Specify Navi window data by the following form.
<MAIN=main window ID,SUB=subwindow ID>
[Details]
Navigation starts if trigger soft-key is pushed while the window specified by the form is displayed.
The maximum number of this form per 1 group is 20.
- 798 -
APPENDIX
(1) MAIN=main window ID

Specify one of following window ID numbers.
Main
Window Note
Window ID
0 “SELECT NAVIGATION” window just after
selecting a navigation item
1 WORK COORDINATE SYSTEM
2 TOOL OFFSET
4 CYCLE DATA INPUT Specify details of window by subwindow ID.
6 INSERT MILLING CYCLE
7 INSERT MILLING FIGURE
8 INSERT TURNING CYCLE
9 INSERT TURNING FIGURE
11 CREATING NEW PROGRAM WINDOW Specify details of window by subwindow ID.
12 INSERT M-CODE
13 INSERT STARTING COMMAND FOR
MILLING
14 INSERT FIXED FORM SENTENCE FOR
MILLING
16 INSERT ENDING COMMAND FOR
MILLING
17 INSERT STARTING COMMAND FOR
TURNING
18 INSERT FIXED FORM SENTENCE FOR
TURNING
20 INSERT ENDING COMMAND FOR
TURNING
24 METHOD OF FREE FIGURE CREATION
( This window is for selecting “INSERT IN
CURRENT PROGRAM” or “CREATE AS
SUB PROGRAM”. )
40 INSERT CONTOUR PROGRAM FOR
MILLING
41 INSERT CONTOUR PROGRAM ( without
milling cycle in lathe machine )
50 MACHINING SIMULATION WINDOW Specify details of window by subwindow ID.
66 INSERT CONTOUR PROGRAM
76 PROGRAM LIST Specify details of window by subwindow ID.
Specify window ID number “0” when second method of start is used and operation navigating
starts.
- 799 -
APPENDIX
(2) SUB=subwindow ID
Specify one of following subwindow ID numbers.
Main Sub-
Window Note
Window ID window ID
4 (*) CYCLE INPUT WINDOW
11 1 CREATE NEW PROGRAM OR NEW FOLDER For FS30i-A, FS30i-B or
FS0i-F
2 CREATE NEW PROGRAM For FS0i-D
24 1 METHOD OF FREE FIGURE CREATION
(BLANK)
(TURNING)
(MILLING)
(G CONTOUR)
50 2 TOOLPATH
3 ANIMATION
76 1 OPEN PROGRAM For FS0i-D
7 PROGRAM LIST For FS30i-A, FS30i-B or
FS0i-F
ID other -1
-
than upper
(*) Specify window ID defined in the following definition files.

dlgmkupu.txt ( User customization file )
cntmkupu.txt ( User customization file )
The window ID is displayed by the tool “ScreenDesigner“.
Window ID
- 800 -
APPENDIX
Or following window ID is specified.
Sub-window ID Details
-1 All window
-100 All fixed form blank data input window (For turning)
-101 All coordinate conversation window (For turning)
-102 All cutting condition data input window for turning cycle
-103 All fixed form figure data input window for turning cycle
-200 All fixed form blank data input window (For milling)
-201 All coordinate conversation window (For milling)
-202 All cutting condition data input window for milling cycle
-203 All fixed form figure data input window for milling cycle
C.12.3.3 Specifying Navi trigger data

Specify Navi trigger data by the following form.
<TB=tab number,SK=soft-key number>
[Details]
A navigation starts when specified tab is selected and specified soft-key is pushed.
The maximum number of trigger is 10 per 1 Navi window data.
(1) TB=tab number

Specify tab number that is numbered as 1, 2, 3... in order from left edge tab.
But, specify “TB=-1” in case of the followings.
- In case window that has no tab is displayed
- In case “SELECT NAVIGATION” window is displayed ( Parameter No.14870 = 0 )
- In case window isn’t displayed ( When parameter No.14870 is set to a number more than 0
and operation navigating starts )
(2) SK=soft-key number

Specify soft-key number that is numbered as 1, 2, …, 10 in order from soft-key on left edge.
But, specify “SK=-1” in case main window ID of Navi window data is 0.
And, it is impossible to set vertical soft-keys as trigger.
C.12.3.4 Specifying Navi operation code

Specify the following codes in order of automatic key pushing and other operation.
The maximum number of Navi operation code is 20 per 1 Navi trigger data.
And incorrect Navi operation codes aren’t executed. Operation navigating is executed by a code just
before the incorrect one.
Navi operation code Detail

KEY key code Key code for input. The details are written in ( Details of key information ).
WAIT waittime Temporary stop code. Specify following figure.
0.1 - 3276.7
SIMWAIT The code when MANUAL GUIDE i should wait by end of simulation.
(Note)
This code might not work if there is not a WAIT code before SIMWAIT.
NAVIOFF Specify the code when navigation should be ended.
- 801 -
APPENDIX
< Details of key information >

Key information Code
0-9, A-Z 0-9, A-Z
1-10 SKEY01-SKEY10
Horizontal soft-key right SKEY-R
Horizontal soft-key left SKEY-L
CAN CAN
EOB EOB
INPUT INPUT
Cursor right CR
Cursor left CL
Cursor down CD
Cursor up CU
PAGE down PAGE-D
PAGE up PAGE-U
INSERT INSERT
DELETE DELETE
ALTER ALTER
HELP HELP
SHIFT + CAN SHIFT-CAN
SHIFT + → SHIFT-CR
SHIFT + ← SHIFT-CL
SHIFT + DELETE SHIFT-DEL
SHIFT + 0 SHIFT-0
SHIFT + 1 SHIFT-1
SHIFT + 2 SHIFT-2
SHIFT + 3 SHIFT-3
SHIFT + 4 SHIFT-4
SHIFT + 5 SHIFT-5
SHIFT + 6 SHIFT-6
SHIFT + 7 SHIFT-7
SHIFT + 8 SHIFT-8
SHIFT + 9 SHIFT-9
C.12.4 Examples of Definition Files

For example, the contents of definition files are shown in case the following navigation are given.
(1) “TURNING” tab is displayed in “SELECT NAVIGATION” window.

(2) “CREATE NEW PROG.” item is displayed in upper tab. No icon is displayed.
(3) After navigation of upper item starts, “CREATE NEW PROGRAM OR NEW FOLDER” window is
displayed.
(4) Program name is inputted and [CREATE] soft-key is pushed, “BLANK” tab in “INSERT
STARTING COMMAND FOR TURNING” window is displayed. And, operation navigating mode is
released.
(5) When [CANCEL] soft-key is pushed during the state of (3), operation navigating mode is released.
vgamsg1u.txt
…
…
20001,TURNING Tab name
20002,CREATE NEW PROG. Item name.
…
- 802 -
APPENDIX
navilstu.txt
<TAB=20001> “TURNING” tab is displayed.
20002,-1,1, “CREATE NEW PROG.” item is displayed.
20003,-1,2, ( Group ID is numbered as 1. )
<TAB=20011>
20012,-1,11, Specify these sentences if more item and tab are displayed.
20013,-1,12,
…
navidatu.txt
<ID=1> 1 is specified as group ID.
<MAIN=0,SUB=-1> The screen just after starting navigation is specified.
<TB=-1,SK=-1> The trigger just after starting navigation is specified.
KEY SKEY-L The soft-key page is turned by pushing [<] soft-key.
KEY SKEY08 [NEWPRG] soft-key is pushed.
<MAIN =11,SUB=1> “CREATE NEW PROGRAM…” is specified for start.
<TB=-1,SK=09> [CREATE] soft-key is specified as trigger.
KEY SKEY-R The soft-key page is turned by pushing [>] soft-key.
KEY SKEY01 [START] soft-key is pushed.
KEY CR [->] key is pushed to display “BLANK” tab.
NAVIOFF Operation navigating mode is released.
<TB=-1,SK=10> [CANCEL] soft-key is specified as trigger.
NAVIOFF Operation navigating mode is released.
<ID=2>
… The data for other group ID is specified.
…
C.12.5 Restriction of Customization

Customization of operation navigating function has following restrictions.
(1) Only soft-keys that are displayed in the same line of [GRPOFF] soft-key are specified as trigger
while simulation window is displayed.
(2) Only soft-keys that are displayed in the same line of [CLOSE] soft-key are specified as trigger while
tool offset window is displayed.
- 803 -
APPENDIX
C.12.6 Available Icons

Available icons and their ID number are the followings.
- 804 -
APPENDIX
- 805 -
APPENDIX
- 806 -
APPENDIX
C.12.7 Condition to Use Standard Operation Navigating Data

Available icons and their ID number are the followings.
The standard Operation Navigating data are available when the following conditions are met.
(1) The order of tab of “INSERT STARTING COMMAND FOR TURNING” window or “INSERT
STARTING COMMAND FOR MILLING” window is “START” and “BLANK” from left edge.
(2) Parameter 14853#6 is set to 1.
(3) Parameter 14870 is set to 0.
(4) When MTB makes customization data, it is necessary to select an item that has a group ID “-1”.
- 807 -
APPENDIX
D.SCREEN HARD COPY (FOR MACHINE TOOL BUILDER) B-63874EN/11
D SCREEN HARD COPY

In order to make a copy to memory card of the screen of MANUAL GUIDE i, you need to operate as
follows.
(1) Setting of parameters

In addition to the parameter for hard copy of standard CNC screen, bit 7 (HDC) of parameter
No.3301= 1, setting of the parameter for C executor, bit 4 (CKM) of parameter No.8650 = 1, is
necessary.
And furthermore, you need to set the parameter for memory card, No.20 = 4.
(2) Operations
Mount a memory card and display a necessary screen, then push <SHIFT> key more than 5 seconds.
Release <SHIFT> key after checking the clock display on the screen stops. The clock display will
move again when copying the screen completes.
(3) Created File

By the above operations, new file with name of “Hdcpy***.bmp” is created in the memory card. ***
is the serial number and numbered as 001, 002. However, once the CNC power is turned off, this
number is initialized to 000 from the next time of creating hard copy file.
NOTE
For an explanation of how a screen displayed by the CNC screen display
function of the CNC in case of Personal computer function with WindowsCE can
be copied to a memory card, refer to Section 2.10, "SCREEN COPY (is
SERIES)" in "FANUC OPEN CNC - CNC SCREEN DISPLAY FUNCTION
OPERATOR'S MANUAL" (B-63164EN).
- 808 -
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
Addition to FANUC MANUAL GUIDE i
Common to Lathe System / Machining Center System
OPERATOR'S MANUAL
1. Type of applied technical documents

Name Common to Lathe System / Machining Center System
OPERATOR'S MANUAL
Spec. No.／Ed. B-63874EN/11
2. Summary of Change
New, Add,
Applicable
Group Name／Outline Correct,
Date
Delete
Basic
Function The new functions are added to PART VIII. Add Immediately
Optional
Function
Unit
Maintenance
Parts
Notice
Correction
Another

Name Common to Lathe system / Machining
Center System OPERATOR’S MANUAL
01 2015.8.28 Newly Designed Draw. B-63874EN/11-01
Ed. Date Design Description Page 1/40

VIII. SUPPLEMENTAL INSTRUCTIONS
1. Addition of new input item with trapezoidal groove turning cycle……………………...… 3

2. Addition of C axis hole on end face (GRID) cycle in XC plane…………………………...… 6
3. Deep hole drilling cycle with graduated decreased infeed…………………………...…...… 15
4. Switching to NC screen with soft-key……………..………………………………………...… 20
5. Multi-path PMC function in MANUAL GUIDE i……………...………..……………………… 25
6. Function for loader control in MANUAL GUIDE i……………………....…………………… 27
7. Soft-key customization function in memory mode…………...…………………………...… 29
8. Addition of cycle menu in soft-key customization function….…………………………...… 32

Draw. B-63874EN/11-01

1 Addition of new input item with trapezoidal
groove turning cycle
(for Series 30i/31i/32i-B, 0i-F/D)
1.1 Outline
The item of "BOTTOM WIDTH " is able to be added newly, and to specify the trapezoidal groove figure
by the width of the bottom in trapezoidal groove turning cycle.
1.2 Condition
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27170 #4
[Re-power on] Necessary
#4 In Groove turning cycle, specifying “BOTTOM WIDTH” to bottom type of trapezoidal
groove figure is
0 ：not available. (conventional specifications)
1 ：available.
NOTE
Even though you change the settings of parameter No.27170#4, the alarm PW0000,
"POWER MUST BE OFF" is not issued. You must however turn on the power again
before the new settings can take effect.
1.3 Machining cycle

This function is available in the following groove figure cycles.
(1) ZX plane groove figure cycle (Outer trapezoidal) : G1471

(2) ZX plane groove figure cycle (Inner trapezoidal) : G1473
(3) ZX plane groove figure cycle (End face trapezoidal) : G1475

Draw. B-63874EN/11-01

1.4 Input items
When this function is enabled, “BOT. WIDTH” is able to specify to the bottom type (H).
If “BOT. WIDTH” is specified, the item of “BOTTOM WIDTH (N)” is newly displayed.
Data item Address Mandatory Detail Note

BOTTOM TYPE H No Z coordinate of the workpiece surface
[WIDTH] : Difference between entry width
and bottom width
[ANGLE] : Angle of side face
[BOT. WIDTH] : Bottom width (new)
BOTTOM WIDTH N Yes Bottom width ( radius value, positive value) (*1)
(new)
(*1) This data item is enabled when the parameter No.27140#4=1.

The groove figure is specified with WIDTH (D), DEPTH (L) and BOTTOM WIDTH (N).
The width of the bottom is centered for width in the opening.
WIDTH (D)
DEPTH (L)
BOTTOM WIDTH (N)

Draw. B-63874EN/11-01

1.5 Format of trapezoidal groove figure cycle command
When this function is enabled, the format of trapezoidal groove figure cycle command is follows.
< Command format >

When Address H (bottom type) is 3 (bottom width), address D (bottom width) is added.
(1) ZX plane groove figure cycle (Outer trapezoidal) : G471 U_ X_ … H3… D_ … ;

(2) ZX plane groove figure cycle (Inner trapezoidal) : G473 U_ X_ … H3… D_ … ;
(3) ZX plane groove figure cycle (End face trapezoidal) : G475 U_ X_ … H3… D_ … ;
1.6 Alarm
When the size specified for bottom width is larger than the size of width or negative value, the following
alarm message is displayed.
“WRONG GROOVE BOTTOM”

Draw. B-63874EN/11-01

2 Addition of C axis hole on end face (GRID)
cycle in XC plane
2.1 Outline
The hole position cycle of “grid points” on Cartesian coordinate can be made in XC plane.
2.2 Condition
This function is enabled when the specifying XC plane is available.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27004 #7 MM1
MM1 Hole machining, facing, contouring, pocketing, grooving, C-axis grooving, polar
coordinate (XC) surface figures, and cylindrical (ZC) surface figures are
0 ：not displayed.
1 ：displayed.
NOTE
Even though the parameter No.27004 #0 - #3 is all 0, this function becomes effective
because the figure menu of all XY plane, YZ plane and XC plane are displayed.
2.3 Figure cycle

This function is available in the following figure cycle.
C axis hole on face (grid) - Cartesian coordinate : G1576

Draw. B-63874EN/11-01

2.4 Format of C axis hole on end face (grid) cycle command
The format of C axis hole on end face (grid) cycle command is as follows.
G1576 Bb Hh Vv Ss Tt Ii Jj Kk Mm Aa Cc Dd Ee Zz Yy Uu Ww ;
Address Data item Meaning

V START POINT (C) C coordinate of the start point (first hole) of a straight line
S LENGTH FOR X AXIS Length of the first side of a grid
T LENGTH FOR C AXIS Length of the second side of a grid
I NUMBER FOR X AXIS Number of holes on the first side of a grid
J NUMBER FOR C AXIS Number of holes on the second side of a grid
K ANGLE FOR X AXIS Angle of the first side of a grid from the X-axis
M ANGLE FOR C AXIS Angle of the second side of a grid from the C-axis
A OMITTING POINT 1 Point where no hole is to be made (1)
C OMITTING POINT 2 Point where no hole is to be made (2)
D OMITTING POINT 3 Point where no hole is to be made (3)
E OMITTING POINT 4 Point where no hole is to be made (4)
Z FACE POSITION Position of the face
Y ROTATION AXIS NAME Name of rotation axis
U CLUMP METHOD Clamping method
W SPINDLE NUMBER Specifying the spindle

Draw. B-63874EN/11-01

2.5 Screen and operation
To make C axis hole shape (grid) cycle, “C AXIS HOLE ON FACE(GRID PT.)-CARTESIAN” of the
hole positional menu window is selected.
When “C AXIS HOLE ON FACE(GRID PT.)-CARTESIAN” is selected, the following data input
window is displayed.
There are 6 tabs in the input data window. It explains the input item in each tab as follows.

Draw. B-63874EN/11-01

2.5.1 Tab [HOLE POSIT]
The data items of tab [HOLE POSIT] are as follows.

BASE POSITION B Yes Z coordinate of the workpiece surface
START POINT (X) H Yes X coordinate of the start point (first hole) of
a straight line (*1)
START POINT (C) V Yes C coordinate of the start point (first hole) of
a straight line
LENGTH FOR X AXIS S Yes Length of the first side of a grid
LENGTH FOR C AXIS T Yes Length of the second side of a grid
NUMBER FOR X AXIS I Yes Number of holes on the first side of a grid
NUMBER FOR C AXIS J Yes Number of holes on the second side of
a grid
ANGLE FOR X AXIS K Yes Angle of the first side of a grid from the
X-axis
ANGLE FOR C AXIS M Yes Angle of the second side of a grid from the
X-axis
(*1) The value of C axis for rotation axis is input with Cartesian coordinate.
2.5.2 Tab [SKIP]

The data items of tab [SKIP] are as follows.

OMITTING POINT 1 A No Point where no hole is to be made (1)
OMITTING POINT 2 C No Point where no hole is to be made (2) (*1)
OMITTING POINT 3 D No Point where no hole is to be made (3)
OMITTING POINT 4 E No Point where no hole is to be made (4)
(*1) The omission point is input by the number from the order of which the hole is processed.
2.5.3 Tab [FACE POSIT]

The data item of tab [FACE POSIT] is as follows.

FACE POSITION Z Yes Position of the face
[+FACE] : Sett position to plus (*1)
[-FACE] : Sett position to minus

Draw. B-63874EN/11-01

2.5.4 Tab [ROT. AXIS]
The data item of tab [ROT. AXIS] is as follows.

ROTATION AXIS Y No Name of rotation axis
NAME [C]: Rotation axis is C-axis (*1)
[A] : Rotation axis is A-axis (No.27001#1=1)
[B] : Rotation axis is B-axis (No.27001#2=1)
[E] : Rotation axis is E-axis (No.27001#3=1)
(*1) This data item is enabled when the parameter No.27001#0=1. And the axis name can be changed
according to the parameter No.27001#1,#2,#3.
2.5.5 Tab [CLAMP METHOD]

The data item of tab [CLAMP METHOD] is as follows.

CLUMP METHOD U No Clamping method
[U1]: Hard clamping (*1)
[U2]: Soft clamping
[U3]: Output suppressed
2.5.6 Tab [DETAIL]

The data item of tab [DETAIL] is as follows.

SPINDLE NUMBER W Yes Specifying the spindle
[W1]: Spindle number 1 (*1)
[W2]: Spindle number 2

Draw. B-63874EN/11-01

2.6 Motion of machining
The coordinates position of each hole (Polar coordinates) is calculated from input data (Cartesian
coordinate), and the hole is machined in the following order.
9
8
7
4
5
6
Start 3
C point 2
1

Draw. B-63874EN/11-01

2.7 Format of outputted NC command
2.7.1 Format
G40
G90
G17
(1) Operation before machining
G0 X** C**
G0 Z**
G99
G8* Z** R** F** (2) Canned cycle or blocks that

X** C** resolved with G0, G1
X** C**
X** C**
X** C** (3) hole position
X** C**
G80
G0 Z**
G0 X** C**
G0 G17 G90 (4) Operation after machining
G98
F**

Draw. B-63874EN/11-01

2.7.2 Detail of NC command
(1) Operation before machining
G40 → Cancel of tool radius and tool nose radius compensation (Output of modal data
for machining cycle)
G90 → Absolute programming (Output of modal data for machining cycle)
G17 → XY plane selection (Only milling) (Output of modal data for machining cycle)
G0X** C** → Positioning (machining start point)
G0Z** → Approach motion
G99 → Canned cycle of return to R point level (Only milling)
(2) Canned cycle

Canned cycle for hole machining or blocks that resolved with G0 or G1 are outputted.
Canned cycle for hole machining

< Lathe>
Code
G code system Function
A B C
G83 G83 G83 Cycle for face drilling
G83.5 G83.5 G83.5 High-speed peck drilling cycle
G83.6 G83.6 G83.6 Peck drilling cycle
G84 G84 G84 Cycle for face tapping
G85 G85 G85 Cycle for face boring
< Machining center >

コード Function
G82 Drilling cycle or counter boring cycle
G83 Peck drilling cycle
G84 Tapping cycle
G85 Boring cycle
G86 Boring cycle
G87 Back boring cycle
G88 Boring cycle
G89 Boring cycle

Draw. B-63874EN/11-01

(3) Hole position
The position in which the hole is machined is specified.
(4) Operation after machining
G80 → Canned cycle cancel

G0Z** → Retract motion
G0X** C** → Restoration of tool position
G90/G91 → Absolute / incremental programming (Restoration of modal data)
G17/G18/G19 → Plane selection (Only milling) (Restoration of modal data)
G98 → Canned cycle of return to initial level (Only milling)
(Restoration of modal data)
2.8 Alarm
When executing it at the cycle, the following alarms might be generated.
(1) When the G1576 command is edited directly and executed
When a necessary address for the G1576 command is deleted or the value is set to the address of
G1576 command outside the range, it becomes the alarm "NO NECESSARY ADDRESS".
(2) When 2 path system of machining center is executed
It becomes the alarm message "UNCOMBINED G-CODE".

Draw. B-63874EN/11-01

3 Deep hole drilling cycle with graduated
decreased infeed
3.1 Outline
In deep hole drilling cycle, the data item of “CUT DPT DECREMENT %” and “CUT FEED
DECREMENT %” are newly added into input data screen, and the pecking cut depth and feed rate can be
decreased gradually each pecking with Percentage.
3.2 Condition
(1) Parameter to be enabled this function
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2195 #5
[Re-power on] Unnecessary
#5 Graduated decrease of pecking cut depth and feed rate are
0 ：not available.
1 ：available.
(2) Parameter to clamp pecking cut depth
14873 CUTCLMP
[Data type] Byte

[System attribute] Common to paths
[Valid data range] 0 - 100
CUTCLMP Clamped pecking cut depth is set as the percentage of an initial value (Inputted value of
“PECKING CUT DEPTH”:Q) It is considered 100% in case of 0. (A decrease of
pecking cut depth is not done).

Draw. B-63874EN/11-01

(3) Parameter to clamp feed rate
14874 FEEDCLMP
[Data type] Byte

[Valid data range] 0 - 100
FEEDCLMP Clamped Pecking feed rate is set as the percentage of an initial value (Inputted value of
“FEED RATE”:F) It is considered 100% in case of 0. (A decrease of feed rate is not
done).
3.3 Machining cycle

This function is available in the following machining cycle.
(1) Hole machining (tool rotation for milling) Drilling : G1001

(2) Hole machining (workpiece rotation for turning) Drilling : G1101
(3) Hole machining (tool rotation for turning) Drilling : G1111
3.4 Input item

The input items of “CUT DPT DECREMENT % (N)” and “CUT FEED DECREMENT % (T)” can be
specified in the cycle input data screen when this function is available.

CUT DPT DECREMENT % N No Rate of pecking cut depth decrement
(%) 0 ≤ N≤ 99 (*1)
CUT FED DECREMENT % T No Rate of cut feed decrement (%) (*2)
0 ≤ T≤ 99
(*1) These data items are displayed when the parameter No.27915#5=1.
(*2) In the case of G1001, these data items are displayed when the machining type (W) is Peck
drilling or High-speed peck drilling..

Draw. B-63874EN/11-01

Fig.1 Input data screen of Deep hole drilling
3.5 Format of deep hole drilling command

The format of deep hole drilling command is as follows.
( Command format )
Address - N (Cut depth decrement) and address - T (Cut feed decrement) are newly added.
(1) Hole machining (Tool rotation for milling) Drilling : G1001 W_ …N_ …T_ …;
(2) Hole machining (Workpiece rotation for turning) Drilling : G1101 Q_ N_ …T_ …;
(3) Hole machining (Tool rotation for turning) Drilling : G1111 Q_ N_ …T_ …;

Draw. B-63874EN/11-01

3.6 Motion of machining
When this function is effective, the cycle is executed by decreasing the pecking cut depth and feed rate
each pecking with Percentage.
R point
Ds Fs
Q1
F1
Q2 F2
Q3 F3
De Fe
Fig. 2 Machining motion of Deep hole drilling
Ds : Start cut depth

Fs : Start feed rate → Not decreased gradually
Q1 : Pecking cut depth

F1: : Cut feed rate
Q2 = Q1 × ((100 - Cut depth decrement) ÷ 100)1 (*1)

Q3 = Q1 × ((100 - Cut depth decrement) ÷ 100)2 (*1)
F2 = F1 × ((100 - Cut feed decrement) ÷ 100)1 (*2)

F3 = F1 × ((100 - Cut feed decrement)) ÷ 100)2 (*2)
De : End cut depth

→ Not decreased gradually
Fe : End feed rate
(*1) When the pecking cut depth is smaller than (No.14873 ÷ 100) × Q1, the pecking cut depth
is clamped it.
(*2) When the feed rate is smaller than (No.14874 ÷ 100) × F1, the feed rate is clamped it.

Draw. B-63874EN/11-01

< An example of cut depth decrement >
(1) CUT DEPTH (L) + GO PAST AMOUNT (K) = 62mm

(2) PECKING CUT DEPTH (Q) = 10mm
(3) CUT DEPTH DECREMENT (N) = 10%
(4) CLUMP value of pecking cut depth (No.14873) = 50% (Minimum pecking cut depth = 5mm)
When data is the above mentioned, the pecking cut depth is decreased gradually as follows.
Q1 = 10mm , Q2 = 9mm , Q3 = 8.1mm , Q4 = 7.29mm , Q5 = 6.56mm , Q6 = 5.9mm ,

Q7 = 5.31mm , Q8 = 5mm, Q9 =4.84mm
< An example of cut feed decrement >
(1) CUT DEPTH (L) + GO PAST AMOUNT (K) = 62mm

(2) FEED RATE (F) = 50mm/min
(3) CUT FEED DECREMENT (N) = 10%
(4) CLUMP value of feed rate (No.14874) = 60% (Minimum feed rate = 30mm/min)
When data is the above mentioned, the feed rate is decreased gradually as follows.
F1 = 50mm/min, F2 = 45 mm/min, F3 = 40.5mm/min, F4 = 36.45mm/min, F5 = 32.80mm/min,

F6 = 30mm/min, F7 = 30mm/min, F8 = 30mm/min, F9 = 30mm/min, F10 = 30mm/min
3.7 Alarm
When executing it at the cycle, the following alarms might be generated.
Alarm number Description

Message WRONG CUTTING CONDITION
Cause A negative value or the value that exceeds 99 is input to the pecking cut depth
decrement (%) or the cut feed decrement (%).
The value of parameter No.14873 or No.14874 is a negative value or the value that
3507 exceeds 100.
Action Please confirm whether the correct value is input to the pecking cut depth
decrement (%) or the cut feed decrement (%) on the cycle input data screen.
Please confirm whether the value of parameter No.14873 and No.14874 is set.

Draw. B-63874EN/11-01

4 Switching to NC screen with soft-key
4.1 Outline
It can switch from MANUAL GUIDE i screen to NC screen with pressing the following soft-keys
(1) Switch to the tool life management screen on NC side with [TL-LIF] soft-key
(2) Switch to the tool offset screen on NC side with [TL-OFS] soft-key
4.2 Condition
(1) Parameter to switch to the tool life management screen
Set 1 to the parameter No.14823#6 is set to 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14823 TLD
TLD The switch function from MANUAL GUIDE i screen to Tool management data screen or
Tool life management screen with soft-key
0 ：is not available.
1 ：is available.
(Note) The following option is necessary to display Tool management data screen or Tool life
management screen.
(In FS0i-D/F, Tool life management function is included into each package.)
• Tool management function
• Tool life management function

Draw. B-63874EN/11-01

(2) Parameter to switch to the tool offset screen
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
27483 #2
TLD The switch function from MANUAL GUIDE i screen to Tool offset screen with soft-key
0 ：is not available.
1 ：available.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14854 #4
TLD The tool data uses
0 ：MANUAL GUIDE i side.
1 ：NC side. (note)
(Note) Tool geometry size data 100/300-pairs function is necessary.

Draw. B-63874EN/11-01

4.3 Operation and screen
(1) Switch to the tool life management screen
It changes to the tool life management screen of NC by pressing [TL-LIF] soft key at parameter
No.14823#6=1.

Draw. B-63874EN/11-01

(2) Switch to the tool offset screen
It changes to the tool offset screen of NC by pressing [TL-OFS] soft key at parameter
No.27483#2=1.

Draw. B-63874EN/11-01

4.4 Note
It is necessary to set the following parameters in order to display the tool life management screen.
(1) Parameter to set maximum number of groups in tool life management
Set the parameter No.6813 to 8 or more.
6813 Maximum number of groups in tool life management
[Data type] 2 word

[Standard value] 0
[System attribute] Each path
NOTE
This parameter sets the maximum number of groups to be used for each path. As the
maximum number of groups, set a multiple of eight. When the tool life management
function is not used, 0 must be set. Set this parameter so that the total number of groups
in all paths does not exceed the total number of groups in the entire system.
Total number of entire system

• FS30i-B, FS0i-F : 256 set
• FS0i-D : 128 set
(2) Parameter to make the tool life management function effective (Only FS0i-F and FS0i-D)
Set the parameter No.8132#0 to 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8132 TLF
TLF The tool life management function
0 ：is not used.
1 ：is used.

Draw. B-63874EN/11-01

5 Multi-path PMC function in MANUAL
GUIDE i (for Series 30i/31i/32i-B, 0i-F)
5.1 Outline
Multi-path PMC function is newly available in FS0i-F/FS30i-B of MANUAL GUIDE i.

MANUAL GUID i can be used with the allocated PMC system of each path.
The allocation of multi-path PMC system is set to parameter No.11920 - No.11923.
5.2 Condition
(1) Parameter for allocation of multi-path PMC system to each path
Set to the allocation of the interface between CNC-PMC for each system.
11920 Input / output addresses of NC-PMC interface 1
[Standard value] 0
[Valid data range] 0, 100 to 109, 200 to 209, 300 to 309, 400 to 409, 500 to 509
Each of these parameters assigns PMC F/G addresses to CNC F/G addresses.
MANUAL GUIDE i is supported up to 4 paths or less.

As for parameter No.11920-11929, only the parameter of existing NC paths becomes effective.
Even if parameters other than the path are set, it is disregarded.

Draw. B-63874EN/11-01

5.3 Note
When multi-path PMC function is used, R address can be used only the first PMC system in the following
functions.
• Handle machining function

• Set-up guidance function
• Thread repairing cycle function
• Extended soft key function for customizing

Draw. B-63874EN/11-01

6 Function for loader control in MANUAL
GUIDE i (for Series 30i/31i/32i-B, 0i-D/F)
6.1 Outline
Function for loader control is newly available in FS30i-B/ FS0i-D/ FS0i-F of MANUAL GUIDE i.
When the path of loader system is selected, MANUAL GUIDE i screen is not displayed.
6.2 Condition
(1) Parameter for invalid path
Because this parameter is not used, set the parameter No.14864 to 0.
14864 Setting of valid path number
[Standard value] 0
(2) Parameter for P-CODE macro number of second execution macro in loader system
Set the parameter No.9071 to 0.
9071 P-CODE macro number of an second execution macro (MANUAL GUIDE i)
[Standard value] 0
[System attribute] Each path

Draw. B-63874EN/11-01

6.3 Detail
(1) Method of selecting loader path
There are two methods of selecting loader path as follows.
• Selection of loader control selection signal (G251.1, G251.2)

• Selection by MDI key [SHIFT] + [HELP]
(2) Display of MANUAL GUIDE i screen in loader path
MANUAL GUIDE i screen is not displayed even if it switches with the function key in the case of
selecting loader path on the CNC screen.
When it is switched to loader path while displaying MANUAL GUIDE i screen, the following NC
screen is switched.
• Present position display screen, when no switching to loader path after power ON
• CNC screen displayed in loader path before, when switching even once in loader path after
power ON
6.4 Note
(1) Inputting / outputting memory card
When it is switched to loader path while inputting and outputting to the memory card on MANUAL
GUIDE i screen, CNC screen of loader path is displayed after I/O is completed.
(2) MANUAL GUIDE i window call function
The CNC screen is not displayed even if it switches to loader path in the case of calling MANUAL
GUIDE i screen from the screen of customer's application program. (It comes to remaining the call of
MANUAL GUIDE i screen.)
After the following screen is closed, it switched into the CNC screen of loader system.
• Window for selection of blank figure

• Window for input of blank figure (Fixed figure, Arbitrary figure)
• Window for arbitrary figure
• Window for machining simulation
• Window for NC program conversion

Draw. B-63874EN/11-01

7 Soft-key customization function in memory
mode (for Series 30i/31i/32i-B, 0i-F/D)
7.1 Outline
It is possible to replace the soft key position of MANUAL GUIDE i screen by using user customize data
file in memory mode.
7.2 Condition
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14705 CSF
CSF When a soft key is customized,
0 ：customized soft key row is displayed.
1 ：standard soft key row is displayed.
7.3 Name of Customize file
The name of customize file for replacing soft keys is as following.
File Name : SKCSTMU.TXT

Draw. B-63874EN/11-01

7.4 Format of Customize data
The format of the customize data file is as follows.
<MEM> Soft key definition sentence following the following

is applied at the MEM
P1=SET(1,ID100), SET(2,ID200)
Set sentence
• Specify page number of replaced soft keys in the ‘Soft key Page Number’.
• The set sentence is specified for the part of the change type.
• If there is no set sentence, the default soft key is displayed.
Detail of set sentence :
The format of set sentence as follows.
SET(Soft key position, Soft key ID)
Soft key ID (ID + Number)

Soft key Position (1 to 10)
1) Soft Key Position

The soft key position is counted from left side.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2) Soft key ID
Soft key ID can be specified by ‘ID + number’.
If ‘ID0’ is specified as the number, the soft key is not displayed in specified position.
The numbers of Soft key ID are described in “Soft key ID list”.

Draw. B-63874EN/11-01

（Examples）
P1=SET(1,ID100)
P2=SET(1,ID200), SET(2,ID0)
Soft key is not displayed.

Replace to the ID200 soft key
Soft key ID list
Soft key ID that can be used is as follows.
Soft key name Soft key ID

REWIND ID45
O LIST ID477
BGEDIT ID46
N SRCH ID44
O SRCH ID26
ACTPOS ID120
PRESET ID385
MCHDRW ID1008
MESLST ID365
SIMLAT ID1175
NC CNV ID1025
RESTRT ID1092
P TYPE ID0192
Q TYPE ID1093
COORD ID845
T-OFS ID846
TOOL ID1226
MODAL ID1612
TL-MNG ID1116
TL-LIF ID1116
SET ID9
MLTWIN ID1117
CHPATH ID811
7.5 Note
(1) The soft keys which are displayed in the base screen in EIDT / MEM mode are only possible to
customize.
(2) Don’t specify the soft key which can not be used because of the optional function. If these soft keys
are specified, the system doesn’t work correctly.

Draw. B-63874EN/11-01

8 Addition of cycle menu in soft-key
customization function
8.1 Outline
MTB original cycle menu can be added by soft-key customization function. Menu window for MTB
original cycle can be activated by customizing soft-key and can be displayed on the screen. The operator
can select the cycle at MTB original cycle menu window.
An added soft-key to open original cycle menu window
Soft-key row which is added soft-key rows

of EDIT mode by MTB
Press
Cycle menu window which is added

for customizing by MTB
Select a cycle, and press
Cycle input window which is added for

customizing by MTB

Draw. B-63874EN/11-01

8.2 Condition
This function is enabled when parameter No.14705#2 is set to 0.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14705 CSF
CSF In customizing soft-keys,
= 0 : customized soft-keys are displayed.
= 1 : normal soft-keys are displayed.

Draw. B-63874EN/11-01

8.3 Customization
Customize as follows to add an original cycle menu.
List 1 Customize definition file for contents of customization

Subsection
Contents of customization Customize definition file
No.
(1) Cycle menu window cyclstu.txt, vgamsg?u.txt, errmsg?u.txt
1.2.1
(2) Cycle input window dlgmkupu.txt
1.2.2 Addition of soft-key row skcstmu.txt
1.2.3 Addition of a soft-key skcstmu.txt , keymsg1u.txt
Extended soft-key for
(1) extskeyu.txt
customization
dlgmkupu.txt, cntmkupu.txt, navidatu.txt,
1.2.4 (2) Operation navigating function
navilstu.txt
Customization of MANUAL
(3) -
GUIDE i
Refer to each subsection for detail.
8.3.1 Addition of cycle menu window and cycle input window

(1) Cycle menu window
(ii) Title (i) Cycle menu window
(iii) Guidance message

Draw. B-63874EN/11-01

(i) Display of cycle menu window
Specify to cyclstu.txt by the following form.
Cycle menu can be added up to three.
List 2 Form of cycle menu

Form Menu window
<USER1-CYC> Original cycle menu 1
<M-START>
<TAB1=10,SERIES=39,COND=C7487,3,1,PARM=27000,6,0>
1,1001,528,450,F=0,C=C7511,4,1,
1,1002,529,451,F=0,C=C7511,4,1,
・
・
・ Definition of cycle menu 1
<USER1-CYC>
<TAB1=92>
1,626,156,26,F=4,
1,627,157,27,F=4,
1,628,158,28,F=4,
1,629,159,29,F=4,
<TAB2=96> Definition of tabs displayed on cycle menu 1
1,632,160,32,F=24,
1,633,161,33,F=24,
1,634,162,34,F=24,
1,635,163,35,F=24,
・
・
・
(ii) Title of cycle menu window

Specify to vgamsg?u.txt by the following ID number of each cycle menu.
List 3 Title message ID of Cycle menu window

Displayed message without
Cycle menu window Message ID
definition
Original cycle menu 1 1441 USER1

Draw. B-63874EN/11-01

(iii) Guidance message of cycle menu window
Specify to errmsg?u.txt by the following ID number of each cycle menu.
List 4 Guidance message ID of cycle menu window

Displayed message without
Menu window Message ID
definition
Original cycle menu 1 584
SELECT CYCLE YOU WANT TO
INSERT.PUSH [SELECT].
(2) Cycle input window

The number of items in which the default value can be set is enhanced from 30 to 100 in the original
cycle input window.
Default value in displaying cycle input window
List 5 SRAM ID of item in which the default value is set

Setting of default value SRAM ID
Current setting 10000 - 10029
Added setting 10030 - 10099

Draw. B-63874EN/11-01

8.3.2 Addition of soft-key row for opening cycle menu window
Use blank setting by function of replacing soft-key position of EDIT mode, and you can add a soft-key
row for opening cycle menu window.
Create skcstmu.txt as follows.
<EDIT,BLKn> n：the number of soft-key rows before customizing +a

(“a” is number of added soft-key rows. The maximum is 3.）
P1= …
:
Px= … (Information of 1st soft-key row)
: Specify information of the added soft-key
Py= … (Information of 2nd soft-key row) row to a place of original soft-key rows
: where you want to display.
Pz= … (Information of 3rd soft-key row)
:
Pn= …
After adding the soft-key row, soft-key rows are numbered in ascending order.
(Example : skcstmu.txt of the case where a new soft-key row is added to the 4th soft-key row
of a compound lathe which has 5 soft-key rows.)
<EDIT,BLK6>
P1=SET(1,ID444),SET(2,ID498),SET(3,ID27),SET(4,ID28),SET(5,ID26),SET(6,ID23),SET(7,ID22),SET(8,ID24),SET(9,I
D121),SET(10,ID69)
P2=SET(1,ID260),SET(2,ID233),SET(3,ID261),SET(5,ID262),SET(6,ID249),SET(7,ID123),SET(8,ID1818),SET(9,ID232
),SET(10,ID105)
P3=SET(1,ID122),SET(2,ID17),SET(3,ID124),SET(5,ID420),SET(6,ID249),SET(7,ID234),SET(8,ID1819),SET(9,ID232),
SET(10,ID126) (*)
P4=SET(2,ID1892,970,11)
),SET(9,ID1117),SET(10,ID811)
612),SET(9,ID1116),SET(10,ID9)・
(*) A soft-key, ID1892, which opens an original cycle menu 1 is specified to the 2nd soft-key from left of the
4th soft-key row. Soft-key of key message ID970 and icon ID 11 is displayed.

Draw. B-63874EN/11-01

8.3.3 Addition of a soft-key for opening cycle menu window
Soft-key ID for added soft-key are as follows.
List 6 Soft-key ID to open original cycle menu window

Soft-key Soft-key ID
Use 970 to 999, which are for MTB, as key message ID of soft-key.
8.3.4 Using with other functions

(1) Extended soft-key for customization
This function can be used with soft-key rows customized by “Extended soft-key for customization”
function (extskeyu.txt). The customized soft-key rows are displayed at the last soft-key row.
(Example: In case where a new soft-key row is added at 4th soft-key row of compound machine
function, which has 5 soft-key rows, and a customized soft-key is displayed.)
Soft-key row to open an

original cycle menu window
Extended soft-key for

customization

Draw. B-63874EN/11-01

(2) Operation navigating function
This function can be used with operation navigating function. Main screen ID and sub screen ID of
each menu window are as follows.
List 7 ID number of operation navigating function

Soft-key Main screen ID Sub screen ID
Original cycle menu 1 103 (-1304) (*)
(*) is screen ID which is specified in the following cycle input definition file. It is displayed by
the PC tool “ScreenDesigner”.
- dlgmkupu.txt
- cntmkupu.txt
To execute navigation evenly at a time, ID mentioned within () can be used instead of sub screen
ID which is specified on ScreenDesigner.
(3) MANUAL GUIDE i customization

The function that can be used and the function that cannot be used with “MANUAL GUIDE i
customization” function are as follows.
List 8 Use with “MANUAL GUIDE i customization” function

Usable/
No Function
Unusable
Automatic changing to the specified input window after soft-key [INSERT] is pressed in
1 Usable
user application
Informing user application about which cycle menu window or which input window an
2 Usable
operator closes after changing to the specified input window
Informing user application about by which of the following operations cycle menu
window or input window is closed by an operator after changing to the input window
3 - Pressing soft-key [INSERT], [OK] or [ALTER] Usable
- Pressing soft-key [CANCEL], changing mode or changing path
- Pressing function-key
Not changing to cycle menu window when the following input window is closed by
soft-key [CANCEL]
4 Unusable
- Blank figure data input window
- Free contour blank figure input window

Draw. B-63874EN/11-01

8.4 Restrictions
This function has the following restrictions.
(1) A same input window cannot be called from plural cycle menus.
(2) Original cycle menu created by this function cannot be called in MANUAL GUIDE i window call
function.
(3) This function cannot be used in 8.4” LCD.

Draw. B-63874EN/11-01

B-63874EN/11 INDEX
INDEX
AUTOMATIC BLANK ELEMENT CONNECTION
<Number> FUNCTION..............................................................434
19 INCH MODE DISPLAY OF MANUAL GUIDE i .558 Automatic Insertion of Group Range Selection
19” DISPLAY UNIT (FOR Series 30i/31i/32i ONLY)557 Commands................................................................410
2 PATH MACHINING CENTER FUNCTION...........495 Automatic Operation After Changing to MANUAL
2 WINDOWS MACHINING SIMULATION (For only GUIDE i Screen from User Application...................785
Series 0i-F/30i/31i/32i–B) ..........................................65 Available Blank Figure ................................................497
3 TURRETS SIMULTANEOUS MACHINING Available Blank Figures for Blank Cutout Display .......62
PROGRAMMING FUNCTION (FOR Series Available Coordinate ...................................................496
30i/31i/32i) ...............................................................479 Available display .........................................................764
4 PATH SYSTEM (for only Series 30i/31i-B, 31i-B5)490 Available Drawing Figure............................................436
Available Icons ............................................................804
<A> Available Method for Drawing ....................................495
A WARNING MESSAGE WHEN A RESIDUAL Available Method for Executing ..................................496
CUTTING PART REMAINS.....................................60 AVAILABLE PROGRAM COORDINATE SYSTEM561
About the “SPINDLE” Display Block ...........................74 Available Screen ..........................................................136
About the Maintenance of Displayed Program AXIS NAME DISPLAY..............................................571
Information.................................................................26
ABSOLUTE VALUE ..................................................121 <B>
ADDED FUNCTIONS.................................................492 BACKGROUND EDITING ..........................................32
Added New Parameter .................................................565 BASE SCREEN ...........................................................574
Addition of Optional Block Skip..................................476 BASE SCREEN DISPLAY .........................................542
ADDRESS R OUTPUT FOR G02/G03 IN BASIC EDITING OPERATIONS OF PART
MACHINING CYCLE (for Series 30i/31i/32i-A/B, PROGRAM ................................................................14
0i-F/0i-D) .................................................................449 Basic Motions of Tool..................................................363
ADVANCED GUIDANCE FUNCTION (for only Basic Operation.............................................. 416,433,438
Series 0i-F/30i/31i/32i-B).........................................134 BASIC OPERATIONS ......................................... 457,460
ALARM .......................................................................552 BASIC SCREEN..............................................................7
Alarms...................................................................373,627 Basic Specifications .....................................................750
All Path Display / Edit Function ..................................493 BLANK CONTOUR CHANGING FUNCTION OF
ALLOCATION SCREEN ON SMALL MDI UNIT TURNING FIGURE.................................................423
(FOR Series 16i/18i/21i) ..........................................553 BLANK CUTOUT DISPLAY IN ANIMATED
APPLICATION SELECTION TO WORK MDI KEYS SIMULATION ...........................................................62
AND SOFT-KEYS ...................................................558 Blank Element Connection Soft Key ...........................434
APPLICATIONS .........................................................120 Blank figure data input window (Fixed form and
Arbitrary Figure (XY Plane) ............ 295,312,318,332,354 arbitrary free figure) .......................................... 766,776
Arbitrary Figure (YZ/XC/ZC/XA Plane) Blank figure data input window (Fixed form and
...................................................... 295,313,319,333,355 arbitrary free figure) and Free figure input window
Arbitrary Figure (ZX Plane).........................................187 (Free figure creation window and range selection
ARBITRARY FIGURE COPY FUNCTIONS.............410 window)....................................................................773
Arbitrary Figure Input Screen ......................................409 Blank figure selection window....................... 765,772,775
Arbitrary Figures for the Cylindrical Surface (ZC Plane)
..................................................................................401 <C>
Arbitrary Figures for the Polar Coordinate Interpolation C axis Hole on End face (GRID) - Cartesian
Plane (XC Plane) ......................................................400 Coordinates Input Cycle (For only Series
Arbitrary Figures for the XY Plane..............................394 30i/31i/32iB, 0i-F/0i-D) ...........................................288
Arbitrary Figures for the YZ Plane ..............................399 C axis Hole on End Face (Random Points) - Cartesian
Arbitrary Figures for Turning (ZX Plane)....................401 Coordinates Input Cycle...........................................287
ARC SPECIFICATION BY CENTRAL ANGLE .......407 CALCULATING METHOD OF MEASURING OF
Assign of Transfer........................................................473 SETTING WORKPIECE COORDINATE DATA
Assign of Waiting ........................................................470 (for Series 0i-F/0i-D/30i/31i/32i) ...............................89
ASSOCIATING TOOL NUMBERS WITH OFFSET CALCULATION METHODS .....................................120
NUMBERS...............................................................527 CALCULATOR FUNCTION......................................120
Automatic Adjustment of Escape Amount for Turning Calling an Arbitrary Figure..........................................432
Grooving Cycle ........................................................223 CAUTIONS .................................................................526
i-1
INDEX B-63874EN/11
C-AXIS AND A-AXIS CLAMPING M CODE COPY......................................................................18,752

OUTPUT ..................................................................255 Copy Condition Input Screen.......................................410
C-AXIS AND A-AXIS GROOVING ..........................249 Copying of a Cell .........................................................465
C-AXIS AND A-AXIS MACHINING CYCLE ..........248 CREATING A P-CODE USER MODULE .................752
C-AXIS MACHINING WITH ROTATION AXIS......254 CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS.....................10
Cell...............................................................................458 Creating New Part Program .................................. 593,615
Change to User Application Screen After Closing CREATING OF PART PROGRAM..................... 592,615
MAUAL GUIDE i Window .....................................786 Creation Method 1 .......................................................753
CHANGING BETWEEN PATHS .................454,492,498 Creation Method 2 .......................................................753
CHANGING BY A SIGNAL.......................................454 Creation Procedure.......................................................754
CHANGING BY A SOFT-KEY ..................................454 Current Cell..................................................................459
CHANGING MACHINING CYCLE AND FIGURE Current Position Display Part.......................................456
DATA.......................................................................152 “CURRENT POSITION” Display Block.......................79
Changing search mode ...................................................16 CUSTOMIZATION.....................................................747
Changing Soft Keys .....................................................748 Customization data.......................................................100
CHANGING THE CURRENT POSITION DISPLAY..72 Customizing Tool Management Data Displays............100
CHANGING THE CUSTOMIZE DEFINITION FILE CUT ...............................................................................17
DURING USE OF RETHREADING.......................761 Cutting Edge Angle........................................................95
Changing the Program Number (ALTER key)...............15 Cycle Input Screen.......................................................237
Changing Tool Priority ................................................531 CYCLE RETRACT MOTION.....................................254
Changing Window of Machining Simulation.................65 Cycle Selection Screen ................................................237
Changing Window Size of Machining Simulation
(Animated Drawing)...................................................64 <D>
Changing Workpiece Coordinate During Machining Data Format .................................................................110
Simulation (Animation, Tool Path Drawing)..............58 Data Handled during Machining Simulation (for Series
CHECK Y AXIS VALUE AT THE MACHINING 0i-F/0i-D/ 30i/31i/32i)................................................56
SIMULATION OF THE TURNING CYCLE............60 DECOMPOSED CYCLE DISPLAY ...........................134
Checking by Animation ........................................608,626 DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND
CHECKING OF THE PART PROGRAM............608,626 NOTE ........................................................................ s-1
CIRCLE RATIO ..........................................................122 DELETE ........................................................................18
COMBINING A TOOL DATABASE WITH THE Delete of division point and division angle of blank
TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION.......................98 contour .....................................................................426
Command mode that machining cycle can be used......546 Deleting a Block (<DELETE> key)...............................15
COMMENT DISPLAY DURING MACHINING .........83 Deleting a Fixed Form Sentence ....................................31
Compatible Machine Configurations ...........................480 Deleting a Word (<DELETE> key) ...............................15
CONCURRENT DISPLAY AND EDIT OF Deletion of a Cell .........................................................464
PROGRAMS OF ALL PATHS.........................455,495 Deletion of Optional Block Skip..................................477
Condition..................... 135,136,139,334,449,489,490,567 DETAIL .........................................................................82
Condition that this function is enabled.........................204 Details of Actual Rotation Speed Shown in the
Condition to Use Standard Operation Navigating Data807 SPINDLE Display Block............................................79
Conditions for Using This Function ...............................74 Details of Load Ratio (%) Shown in the SPINDLE
Conditions of Blank Figure Data for Reuse .................433 Display Block.............................................................80
CONDITIONS TO USE THIS FUNCTION .........571,783 DETAILS OF THE THREAD REPAIRING SCREEN
Conical Boring Cycle...................................................189 AND OPERATION..................................................580
Continuous Machining of Roughing and Finishing......203 Direction of Imaginary Tool Nose Setting ...................247
CONTOUR PROGRAMMING ...................................105 DISABLING MANUAL GUIDE i ..............................570
CONTOURING ...........................................................296 Disabling the Display of a Specified Path (for Loaders)456
CONVERSION OF G41/G42 COMMAND BY NC DISCARDING .............................................................122
PROGRAM CONVERSION (WITH Display and Operation .................................................775
SUBPROGRAM DECOMPOSITION) (for only Display items .......................................... 527,529,530,531
Series 30i/31i/32i-B, 0i-F/0i-D) ...............................445 Display Machining Time ...............................................64
COOPERATION WITH ANIMATED SOFTWARE DISPLAY OF BASE SCREEN ...................................545
THAT IS OPERATED WITH PANEL i ..................139 Display of groups sorted in the order of number or life
Coordinate Conversion (Mirror Image)........................377 state ..........................................................................532
Coordinate Conversion (Rotation) ...............................377 Display of Multi Part Program Editing Screen ..............23
Coordinate of Arbitrary Figures (XZ, ZC, ZY Plane) ..524 DISPLAY OF SIMPLIFIED CHINESE
COORDINATE SYSTEM CONVERSION CYCLE...381 CHARACTERS ALARM OF USER MACRO (for
Coordinate System Selection Command ......................523 Series 30i/31i/32i-B, 0i-F/0i-D) ...............................782
i-2
B-63874EN/11 INDEX
Display Position of Each Path......................................455 Ending Background Editing...........................................32
DISPLAY SCREEN.....................................................541 ENGRAVING CYCLE ................................................356
Display selected coordinate system..............................525 ENLARGEMENT AND REDUCTION ON THE
Display Sub-Program List Screen ................................435 ARBITRARY FIGURE INPUT SCREEN...............408
DISPLAY TOOL MANAGEMENT DATA OF CNC Entering a Word (<INSERT> key) ................................14
STANDARD SCREEN ............................................534 ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURE DATA........ 150,393
Displayed Offset Types (Set by the Machine Tool ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES ........................393
Builder).....................................................................534 Entering blank form data....................................... 593,616
DISPLAYING 3-DIMENSIONAL INTERFERENCE Entering by fixed form sentence menu
CHECK STATUS (FOR Series 0i-F/30i/31i/32i ........................................ 594,602,605,607,617,623,626
ONLY) .......................................................................73 Entering C-axis drilling cycle block ............................624
Displaying Extended Axis Name .................................783 Entering C-axis Drilling Process..................................624
DISPLAYING MACHINING TIME .............................63 Entering drilling cycle block........................................605
Displaying Screen ..........................................................97 Entering Drilling Process .............................................605
DISPLAYING THE Entering figure for outer finishing ...............................622
DRAWING-DURING-MACHINING........................69 Entering figure for outer finishing cycle block ............621
DISPLAYING THE ROTATION SPEED OF A Entering figure for outer roughing ...............................618
SERVO MOTOR-DRIVEN MILLING AXIS ...........73 Entering figure for outer wall contouring (rough)........596
Displaying the Setting Screen ......................................747 Entering figure for pocket bottom finishing.................603
DISPLAYING THE SPINDLE-POSITION AND Entering figure for pocket roughing.............................597
STANDBY-POSITION TOOL NUMBERS (FOR Entering figure for pocket side finishing......................604
Series 30i/31i/32i ONLY) ..........................................81 ENTERING FIXED FORM FIGURE DATA..............149
Displaying the Spindle-Position Tool Number ..............81 Entering hole position block ................................. 606,625
Displaying the Standby-Position Tool Number..............81 Entering in ISO-code form directly
Displaying Tool Icons ....................................................96 ........................................ 594,601,605,607,616,623,625
DISPLAYING VERTICAL SOFT KEYS FOR THE ENTERING MACHINING CYCLE DATA................146
15-INCH LCD..........................................................747 Entering of the Fixed Form Sentence for Milling
Distinction between Main and Sub Spindle .................256 Machining ................................................................614
DRAWING DURING MACHINING ..........................547 Entering Outer Finishing Machining Cycle Process ....621
DRAWING DURING MACHINING AND Entering outer roughing cycle block ............................617
MACHINING SIMULATION (TOOL PATH Entering Outer Roughing Process ................................617
DRAWING) .............................................................486 Entering outer wall contouring (rough) cycle block.....595
DRAWING DURING MACHINING SCREEN ..........575 Entering Outer Wall Contouring Process.....................595
DRAWING OF ARBITRARY FIGURE ON Entering Pocket Bottom and Side Finishing Process ...602
SUB-PROGRAM LIST SCREEN............................435 Entering pocket bottom finishing cycle block..............602
Drawing-During-Machining.........................................373 Entering pocket roughing cycle block..........................596
DYNAMIC AXIS NAME CHANGING (For only Entering Pocket Roughing Process ..............................596
Series 30i/31i/32i-B) ................................................574 Entering pocket side finishing cycle block ..................603
Entering releasing motion blocks in ISO-code form ....623
<E> Entering the Fixed Form Sentence for Turning
Editing..........................................................................412 Machining ................................................................613
Editing a Program Including Extended Axis Name .....784 Entering Tool Changing and Spindle Rotating Blocks
EDITING AN ARBITRARY FIGURE for C-axis Drilling ....................................................623
SUBPROGRAM.......................................................412 Entering Tool Changing and Spindle Rotating Blocks
EDITING AND OPERATION OF MDI PROGRAMS .86 for Drilling ...............................................................605
Editing Function during Single Block Stop....................84 Entering Tool Changing and Spindle Rotating Blocks
EDITING IN A PROGRAM LIST.................................11 for Finishing Flat End Mill.......................................601
Editing of Tool Name.....................................................94 Entering Tool Changing and Spindle Rotating Blocks
EDITING OPERATIONS............................................461 for Roughing Flat End Mill ......................................594
EDITING PROGRAMS.................................................10 Entering Tool Changing and Spindle Rotating Blocks
EDITING WITH THE PROGRAM LIST......................34 for Turning Machining .............................................616
EMBOSS MACHINING..............................................314 Entering Tool Changing and Spindle Rotation Blocks
Enable Arbitrary Figures..............................................408 for Outer Finishing in ISO-code Form .....................621
Enable Characters ........................................................359 Example of machining .................................................204
End Command................................................................29 Example of Operation ..................................................503
END COMMAND OF REFLECTION ........................537 EXAMPLES OF CREATING PART PROGRAMS
End of Multi Part Program Editing Function of FOR LATHES..........................................................609
Programs.....................................................................25
i-3
INDEX B-63874EN/11
EXAMPLES OF CREATING PROGRAMS FOR THE Free figure input window (Free figure creation window
MACHINING CENTER ..........................................587 and range selection window) ....................................768
Examples of Definition Files........................................802 Free figure input window (Free figure creation window,
Execute simultaneous string search of multi programs ..17 range selection window)...........................................777
Executing Arbitrary Figure Copy Operation................411 Functions Operating Differently between Machining
EXECUTING OF MACHINING CYCLES.................547 Simulation and Automatic Operation (for Series
Executing program .......................................................524 0i-F/0i-D/ 30i/31i/32i)................................................57
Execution Range of Input Data Check by Simulation..137 Functions that can be used for machining simulation (M
Exiting from Process List Editing ................................460 series) .........................................................................58
EXPANDED ARBITRARY FIGURE ELEMENT Functions that cannot be used for machining simulation57
NUMBER (FOR Series 30i/31i/32i).........................435
EXPONENTIAL FUNCTIONS...................................121 <G>
EXTENDED AXIS NAME FUNCTION.....................571 G Code for Selecting a Range......................................415
EXTENDED AXIS NAME FUNCTION FOR 8.4” G54.4 MODAL DISPLAY ............................................81
/10.4” DISPLAY (for only Series 30i/31i/32i-B, G-code format of division point and division angle .....426
Series 0i-F) ...............................................................783 GENERAL...................................................................666
Extension of Fixed Form Sentences (For only Series General Notes on Machining Programs .........................33
30i/31i/32i-B, Series 0i-F/0i-D) .................................32 GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS ............... s-1
Go past amount in End Face Finishing ........................202
<F> GROOVING ................................................................339
FACING.......................................................................289 Group Number List Display.........................................531
“FEED” Display Block ..................................................79 Group Range Selection Commands .............................409
FEEDRATE DISPLAY..................................................73 Group selection ............................................................532
Figure ...........................................................................390 GROUPING ARBITRARY FIGURE PROGRAMS ...409
Figure (XY Plane) ........................................................280
Figure (YZ/XC Plane)..................................................284 <H>
Figure after Arbitrary Figure Copy Execution .............412 HANDLE MACHINING (For only Series
Figure Blocks for C-axis and A-axis Grooving............250 30i/31i/32i-B) ...........................................................501
Figure Copy (Rotation Copy/ Parallel Copy)...............379 Handle Machining Screen ............................................506
File Format...................................................................749 HELP SCREEN ...........................................................130
File Format Allowed for Memory Card Input/Output ..109 HELP WINDOW ACCORDING TO EACH SCREEN138
File Format Allowed for USB Memory Input/Output ..116 HIGH SPEED PROGRAM MANAGEMENT (For only
Finish Turning Using G41/G42....................................242 Series 0i-F/30i/31i/32i-A, B)....................................578
First Method of Start (“SELECT NAVIGATION” HOLE MACHINING...................................................269
window is displayed)................................................131 HOLE MACHINING (WORKPIECE ROTATION) ...157
Fixed Form Figure........................................................229 How to specify icons......................................................91
Fixed Form Figure (XY Plane) ......................310,330,348
Fixed Form Figure (YZ Plane, XC Plane)....................294 <I>
Fixed Form Figure (YZ/XC Plane) ................311,331,350 ICON FOR REPRESENTING SELECTED PATH.....564
Fixed Form Figure (ZX Plane).....................................217 If program coordinate system/offset memory switching
Fixed Form Figure Blocks (XY Plane) ........................292 is enabled....................................................................92
Fixed Form Sentence......................................................27 Improvement of Checking Cutting Condition for
FIXED FORM SENTENCE INSERTION.....................27 Pocketing (Rough) and Emboss Machining (Rough)330
For the FANUC Series 0i-F/0i-D/30i/31i/32i...............756 Improvement of Excessive Amount of Travel in Turning
For the FANUC Series 0i-MC......................................755 Cycle ........................................................................204
For the FANUC Series 0i-MC,16i/18i/21i-MB............756 IMPROVEMENT OF ICON FOR SELECTED PATH
For the FANUC Series 0i-TC,16i/18i/21i-TB..............756 (Series 30i/31i/32i-B, 0i-F/0i-D) ..............................454
For the FANUC Series 0i-TC/TTC ..............................755 In case of Series 0i-D .....................................................89
For the FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i-MB .......................754 In case of Series 0i-F/30i/31i/32i-A/B ...........................90
For the FANUC Series 16i/18i/21i-TB ........................755 Inhibition of Editing Tool Management Data at CNC
Format ..........................................................................762 Standard Screen........................................................535
Format of Comment Display G code G2900..................83 Initialization .................................................................752
Format of drill cycle..............................................163,287 Initialization to Standard Fixed Form Sentences............31
Format of Fixed Form Sentences .................................113 Initialize of division point and division angle of blank
Format of G4 Digit Cycle for Engraving Cycle ...........359 contour .....................................................................426
Format of Machining Time Data....................................63 Initializing All Tool Data.............................................752
Format of pocket residual machining cycle command .335 Initializing of Tool Data.................................................96
FORMAT OF PROGRAMS TO BE USED..................s-3 INPUT DATA CHECK BY SIMULATION ...............135
i-4
B-63874EN/11 INDEX
Input Item.....................................................................357 Machining Program......................................................480
Input Items ...................................................................408 MACHINING PROGRAM NOT USING THE
Input items of C axis hole on end face (random points) - PROCESS LIST EDITING FUNCTION .................477
cartesian coordinates (G1574) ..................................287 MACHINING SIMULATION
Input items of C-axis hole on end face (Grid) – cartesian ............................ 34,372,392,485,486,493,495,524,567
coordinates (G1576) .................................................288 MACHINING SIMULATION (ANIMATED / TOOL
Input Items of Polygon Turning Cycle.........................243 PATH) ......................................................................548
Input Items of Thread Milling ......................................362 Machining Simulation (Animated Drawing) (FOR
INPUT OF DIRECTION ALONG THE LAYOUT OF Series 0i-C /16i/18i/21i) .............................................50
NUMERIC KEYS ....................................................129 Machining Simulation (Animated Drawing) (for Series
Input Operation ............................................................112 0i-F/0i-D/ 30i/31i/32i)................................................55
Input Operation for Fixed Form Sentences ..................113 MACHINING SIMULATION (ANIMATED) ............486
Inputting Tool Management Data from the Memory Machining Simulation (Tool Path Drawing) (for Series
Card ..........................................................................101 0i-F/0i-D/ 30i/31i/32i)................................................52
Insert coordinate system selection command ...............523 Machining Simulation (Tool Path) (for Series
Inserting Polygon Turning Cycle Command................244 0i-C/16i/18i/21i).........................................................48
Insertion of a Cell.........................................................463 Machining simulation and NC statement conversion
INVALIDATION OF SHORTCUT KEY windows (10.4-inch screen)........................................78
OPERATIONS .........................................................125 Machining simulation and NC statement conversion
windows (15-inch screen)...........................................78
<K> MACHINING SIMULATION DISPLAY .....................48
KEY-IN PASTE.............................................................18 MACHINING SIMULATION INFORMATION
SETTING FUNCTION FOR EACH PATH (for
<L> Series 30i/31i/32i-B, 0i-F/0i-D) ...............................489
LADDER PROGRAM CREATION ............................742 Machining Simulation Screen ........................ 368,409,575
LARGE WINDOW DISPLAY OF MACHINING Machining Simulation Screen on 15 inch LCD (Tool
SIMULATION (ANIMATED DRAWING) (For Path) (for Series 30i/31i/32i, Series 0i-F)...................59
Series 30i/31i/32i–B only)..........................................64 MACHINING SIMULATION SPEED CHANGE
Lathe ............................................................................734 FUNCTION................................................................60
Lathe (Series 0i) ...........................................................669 Machining simulation window....................... 770,774,778
Lathe (Series 16i/18i/21i).............................................670 Machining Type .................................................... 364,389
Lathe (Series 30i/31i/32i).............................................672 Machining Types .........................................................369
Lathe with Compound Machining Function (Series Magazine Data Screens (Magazine 1 to 4)...................529
16i/18i/21i) ...............................................................673 Magazine Management Table Tab...............................100
LATHE/MACHINING CENTER G CODE SYSTEM MAIN FEATURES OF MANUAL GUIDE i ..................3
SWITCHING FUNCTION.......................................544 MAKING OF MACHINING CYCLES .......................546
Life Management Data List Screen..............................533 Managing Program List Folder (for Series 30i/31i/32i
LOGARITHMIC FUNCTIONS (COMMON Only) ..........................................................................12
LOGARITHM, NATURAL LOGARITHM) ...........121 MANUAL GUIDE i CUSTOMIZATION (for only
Series 30i/31i/32i-B, 0i-F/0i-D) ...............................785
<M> MANUAL GUIDE i SETUP PROCEDURE ...............665
M code for Clamping and Unclamping Rotate Axis as MANUAL GUIDE i WINDOW CALL FUNCTION
“C”............................................................................739 (for only Series 30i/31i/32i-B, Series 0i-F) ..............764
M code for Rigid Tapping............................................739 MANUAL OPERATION...............................................87
M CODE OUTPUT IN CYCLE EXECUTING ...........739 M-CODE MENU ...........................................................26
MACHINING BY HANDLE.......................................502 Memory Card Input Operation for Program.................108
Machining Center.........................................................730 Memory Card Input Operation for Tool Data ..............110
Machining Center (Series 0i) .......................................666 Memory Card Input/Output..........................................748
Machining Center (Series 16i/18i/21i) .........................667 MEMORY CARD INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION .....106
Machining Center (Series 30i/31i/32i) .........................668 MEMORY CARD INPUT/OUTPUT OF FIXED
Machining Command FORM SENTENCES ...............................................112
.......................... 157,164,225,249,289,296,315,320,339 MEMORY CARD INPUT/OUTPUT OF OFFSET
Machining Command (Tool Rotation: M Series).........269 DATA (FOR Series 16i/18i/21i/30i/31i/32i)............111
Machining Command (Tool Rotation: T Series) ..........277 MEMORY CARD INPUT/OUTPUT OF PROGRAM 106
Machining Cycle ............................................207,543,572 MEMORY CARD INPUT/OUTPUT OF TOOL DATA
MACHINING CYCLE PARAMETERS .....................633 ..................................................................................110
Machining cycles .........................................................223 Memory Card Input/Output Screen of Fixed Form
Machining of a Divided Area.......................................419 Sentences..................................................................112
i-5
INDEX B-63874EN/11
Memory Card Input/Output Screen of Program ...........106 Notes on Machining Simulation.....................................66

Memory Card Input/Output Screen of Tool Data.........110 Notes on Switching Between Paths..............................583
Memory Card Output Operation for Program ..............107 Notes on Switching to the NC Screen ..........................583
Memory Card Output Operation for Tool Data............110 Notes on Use Wrong Operation Prevention Functions.583
MESSAGE FILES .......................................................760 Notes when Commanding Offset Number by D Code ...98
Method of Calling ........................................................764 Number of string characters to be transmitted is 256 or
METHOD OF CHANGE TO EXTENDED AXIS more .................................................................. 771,775
NAME IN FIGURE DATA INPUT SCREEN OF
MACHINING CYCLE.............................................573 <O>
Method of Color Pallet Setting.....................................780 Offset Screen (on a Tool Number by Tool Number
Method of Displaying the Decomposed Cycle Display Basis)........................................................................528
Screen .......................................................................134 Omissible Modal Commands .......................................442
Method of Making User Application ...........................780 OMITTING MODAL COMMANDS IN NC
Method of Program Creation........................................370 PROGRAM CONVERSION....................................442
Method to get return information from MANUAL Opening and Shutting of Program Window ...................24
GUIDE i ...................................................................771 Operation .................................... 62,141,334,356,384,424
MILLING.....................................................................261 Operation for Executing Machining Simulation ..........497
MILLING BY ROTATING A WORKPIECE ABOUT Operation for Inserting Machining Time .......................63
THE Y-AXIS............................................................389 OPERATION NAVIGATING CUSTOMIZATION
MIRROR / ROTATION / SCALING / FIGURE COPY FUNCTION..............................................................794
COMMAND.............................................................376 Operation Navigating Execution Definition File
MODAL DISPLAY OF OFFSET TYPES ...................533 ( navidatu.txt ) ..........................................................797
Mode to use this function ...............................................16 OPERATION NAVIGATING FUNCTION ................131
Modification of Cutting Area in Machining Cycle ......427 Operation Navigating Selection Window Definition File
Modification of Process Name .....................................468 ( navilstu.txt ) ...........................................................796
Modifying a Block (<ALTER> key)..............................15 Operation of Changing Mode.........................................26
Modifying a Fixed Form Sentence.................................30 Operation of Changing Path...........................................25
Modifying a Word (<ALTER> key) ..............................15 Operation of Display Program Selection........................22
Modifying the Numeric Value of a Word (<ALTER> OPERATION OF SAVING PROGRAMS ..................578
key).............................................................................15 Operation of Shortcut Key ...........................................125
Motion of Machining Other than Outer Surface Operation of Switching to CNC Screen .........................25
Residual Roughing (G1160) .....................................242 Operation on Machining Simulation Screen ..................60
Motion of Outer Surface Residual Roughing (G1160).238 OPERATION RESTART CONFIRMATION
Moving of a Cell ..........................................................466 FUNCIOTN AFTER EDITING PROGRAM (FOR
Moving the Cursor in the Process List .........................461 Series 30i/31i/32i) ......................................................84
MULTI PART PROGRAM EDITING FUNCTION Operation Restart Confirmation in Multi Path System ..85
(For only Series30i /31i /32i /0i-F/0i-D) ...................22 Operation Restart Confirmation Screen .........................84
OPERATION WHEN STANDARD OPERATION
<N> NAVIGATING DATA ARE USED ........................132
NC PROGRAM CONVERSION .................................549 OPERATION WHILE NAVIGATION IS EFFECTIVE
NC PROGRAM CONVERSION FUNCTION ............437 ..................................................................................132
NC PROGRAM CONVERSION SCREEN .................575 Operational Procedure..................................................136
NC program conversion window....................770,774,779 Operations ............................................................. 407,747
NC STATEMENT CONVERSION .............................543 Operations added to the program list window................13
NECESSARY HARDWARE.......................................666 Operations at drawing during machining screen ............59
Necessary Option ..................................................552,764 Operations at machining simulation screen....................59
NECESSARY OPTION / PARAMETER ....................552 Operations During Background Editing.........................33
Necessary Parameter .............................................552,569 Operations in the “END” Menu ............................ 607,625
Necessary Parameter Setting.................................424,764 Operations of “START” Menu ............................. 593,616
NECESSARY SOFTWARE .................................569,666 Optimization of the Cutting Direction in Finish Turning
NEXT-BLOCK DISPLAY FUNCTION........................72 ..................................................................................196
Note.............................................................21,82,673,763 Other Machines............................................................734
Note On Emergency Stop.............................................583 Other Parameters..........................................................726
NOTES................................... 66,84,109,112,117,553,583 OTHERS ......................................................................535
Notes on Changing Modes (Such as MEM, EDIT, and OUTER THREAD MILLING CYCLE........................369
MDI).........................................................................583 Outer Thread Milling Cycle Command .......................371
NOTES ON CREATING PROGRAMS .................33,152 Outline .......................... 89,138,139,255,334,490,567,764
Notes on Creation.........................................................756 Outline of the Residual Machining Cycle ....................236
i-6
B-63874EN/11 INDEX
Output Operation..........................................................111 Parameters related to the color palette for screen display
Output Operation for Fixed Form Sentences................113 ..................................................................................720
Outputting Tool Management Data to the Memory Card Parameters Related to the Display Language...............678
..................................................................................101 Parameters Related to Tool Drawing ...........................693
OVERVIEW OF THIS MANUAL ...............................s-2 Parameters Related to Tool Management Functions....714
PASTE ...........................................................................18
<P> Path 1 display window (10.4-inch screen) .....................74
Parameter ........................ 32,85,330,380,454,489,560,565 Path 1 display window (15-inch screen) ........................75
Parameter for Grooving Cycles....................................658 Path Switching Operation ............................................489
Parameter related to alarms about overlap with parts or Pattern of Tool Path .....................................................365
blanks .......................................................................711 Pocket Residual Machining Cycle (for only Series
Parameter related to the T0 command during animation 30i/31i/32i-B, 0i-F/0i-D) ..........................................334
drawing.....................................................................711 POCKETING ...............................................................320
Parameter Setting ....................................................90,498 POLYGON TURNING CYCLE..................................243
PARAMETER SETTING FOR EXTENDING AXIS Position of M Code Output (When Hard Clamping is
NAME OF WORKPIECE ROTATION...................573 Selected)...................................................................256
Parameter Setting for Use ............................................445 Position of M Code Output (When Soft Clamping is
Parameter setting to use this function....................163,286 Selected)...................................................................259
PARAMETER SETTINGS DEPENDING ON THE Position of M Code Output (When Suppression of
MACHINE TYPE ....................................................730 Clamp Output is Selected)........................................260
Parameters......................................................368,373,517 PREFACE .................................................................... p-1
Parameters Common to Milling Cycles .......................633 PREPARING OF THE FIXED FORM SENTENCE
Parameters Common to Turning Cycles.......................649 MENU ............................................................... 591,613
Parameters for Contouring Cycles ...............................639 PRESETTING RELATIVE COORDINATES ..............72
Parameters for Facing Cycles.......................................639 PROCESS LIST EDITING FUNCTION .....................458
Parameters for Grooving Cycles ..................................645 Process List Editing Screen..........................................479
Parameters for Hole Machining Cycles.................647,660 PROGRAM COORDINATE SYSTEM CHANGING
PARAMETERS FOR MILLING CYCLE ...................633 FUNCTION..............................................................523
Parameters for Pocketing Cycles..................................641 PROGRAM COORDINATE SYSTEM CHANGING
Parameters for Thread Repairing Cycles......................657 FUNCTION AND TOOL OFFSET MEMORY
Parameters for Threading Cycles .................................654 CHANGING FUNCTION........................................523
PARAMETERS FOR TURNING CYCLE ..................649 PROGRAM COORDINATE SYSTEM FOR
Parameters for Turning Cycles.....................................651 PROGRAM COORDINATE SYSTEM CHANGING
Parameters related to animation drawing in general ....703 FUNCTION..............................................................563
Parameters Related to Arbitrary Figures ......................682 PROGRAM DISPLAY AND EDITING FUNCTION.571
Parameters related to AXIS of animation drawing.......700 Program Display Part ...................................................456
Parameters related to color of animation drawing........710 Program Edit ................................................................469
Parameters Related to Current Position Display ..........679 PROGRAM NUMBER O8-DIGIT FUNCTION ...........14
Parameters Related to Graphic Display........................692 PROGRAM OPERATION ............................................68
Parameters Related to Handle Machining ....................725 PROGRAM RESTART FUNCTION ..........................118
Parameters Related to Load Meter ...............................680 PROGRAM RESTART IN MACHINING CYCLE (For
Parameters Related to Machining Simulation only Series30i/31i/32i-A/B, 0i-F/0i-D) ....................119
(Animation Drawing) ...............................................700 Program Selection Operation and Other Operations in
Parameters Related to Machining Simulation (Tool Path Drawing during Machining ........................................70
Drawing)...................................................................699 PROGRAM WINDOW AND EDITING .......................10
Parameters related to machining time display..............709 Program window where search is executed....................16
Parameters Related to Multi-path Lathe.......................716 PROGRAMMABLE DIAMETER/RADIUS
Parameters Related to Operations in General...............683 SWITCHING FUNCTION.......................................542
Parameters Related to Program Coordinate System PROGRAMMING BY HANDLE................................510
Switching and Offset Memory Switching ................712
Parameters Related to Spindle Status Display..............681 <R>
Parameters Related to Subprogram Selection Screens .681 Read .............................................................................752
Parameters related to the Allocation of Startup Function Rear End Facing...........................................................375
Keys..........................................................................676 REAR END FACING BY MILLING..........................375
Parameters Related to the Color Palette .......................720 REAR END FACING BY TURNING.........................235
Parameters related to the color palette for guidance Registering a New Fixed Form Sentence .......................30
display ......................................................................723 REGISTERING FIXED FORM SENTENCES .............29
Parameters related to the color palette for icon display722 Registration of Auxiliary Function Command .............515
i-7
INDEX B-63874EN/11
RELATED SIGNALS..................................................518 Select display coordinate system .................................524

Relating Parameter .......................................................566 SELECTING A MACHINING CYCLE TYPE ...........145
RELATIVE COORDINATES PRESETTING SELECTING A PROGRAM FOR MACHINING
WINDOW ................................................................576 SIMULATION ...........................................................35
Release of Waiting .......................................................472 SELECTING A PROGRAM FOR OPERATION .........68
Release Transfer...........................................................475 SELECTING A RANGE OF AN ARBITRARY
Re-machining Screen for Other Threads and Operation582 FIGURE ...................................................................415
Re-Machining Screen for Outer Surface Selecting a Subprogram ...............................................432
General-Purpose Threads and Operation..................580 Selecting Active Window ..............................................66
Replace All Words .........................................................19 Selecting an Arbitrary Figure Copy Function ..............410
Replaced Words .............................................................20 SELECTING FIGURES ..............................................147
Replacing a Word...........................................................19 SELECTING ROTATION AXIS IN FIGURE DATA
REPLACING WORD ....................................................19 INPUT SCREEN OF MACHINING CYCLE..........573
RESIDUAL MACHINING BY TURNING.................236 Selecting the Life Management Data List Screen ........533
RESTART METHOD ..................................................118 Selecting the Life Management Data Setting Screen ...530
Restore group life.........................................................532 Selecting the Screen for Associating a Tool Number
Restriction ............ 135,139,142,428,445,494,556,568,782 with an Offset Number .............................................527
Restriction of Customization........................................803 Selecting the Tool Management Data Setting Screen ..529
Restriction of Machining Simulation ...........................389 Selecting the Tool Number-by-tool Number Tool Offset
Restrictions.................... 26,205,337,360,435,439,449,569 Setting Screen...........................................................528
Restrictions on 2 Windows Display ...............................66 Selecting Whether to Display the Tool Path or Not in
Restrictions on Large Window Display .........................65 Drawing during Machining ........................................70
Restrictions on Target Figures .....................................216 Series 16i-MB 2-PATH FUNCTION...........................541
Re-threading window .....................................................78 SETTING FOR START-UP WHEN CNC
Return to Menu Screen.................................................535 PARAMETER IS UNSET (Only Series
Reusable Blank Figures................................................433 0i-C/16i/18i/21i-B)...................................................741
REUSING A BLANK FIGURE AS AN ARBITRARY Setting for Use .............................................................782
FIGURE ...................................................................433 SETTING OF DATA FOR MACHINING
REUSING ARBITRARY FIGURES ...........................432 SIMULATION ...........................................................35
REVERSE TAP CYCLE .............................................742 SETTING OF PROGRAM COORDINATE SYSTEM
REWINDING A PROGRAM ...................................35,68 FOR EACH PATH...................................................561
ROUNDING ................................................................122 SETTING OF THE TOOL DATA...............................592
Setting of Tool Data......................................... 94,525,614
<S> SETTING OF TOOL FIGURE INFORMATION .......551
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ...........................................s-1 SETTING OF TOOL LENGTH OFFSET DATA .......588
Sample of Operation ....................................................514 SETTING OF TOOL OFFSET INFORMATION .......550
Saving a New Subprogram...........................................414 Setting of Tool Set .........................................................94
Saving an Existing Subprogram ...................................414 Setting of Tool Type ......................................................93
SAVING SUBPROGRAMS ........................................413 SETTING OF VIRTUAL TOOL CHIP FOR EACH
Scaling..........................................................................378 PROGRAM COORDINATE SYSTEM...................562
Scaling, movement, and other operations........50,52,55,56 SETTING OF WORKPIECE COORDINATE
Scaling, Movement, and Other Operations in Drawing SYSTEM SHIFT DATA ..........................................612
during Machining .......................................................70 SETTING OF WORKPIECE ORIGIN OFFSET
SCREEN CHANGING ................................................553 VALUE ....................................................................590
SCREEN CONFIGURATION..............................455,458 Setting of X-axis Offset Data .......................................611
SCREEN DISPLAY.....................................................555 Setting of Z-axis Offset Data .......................................610
Screen Display Items.............................................527,533 SETTING THE BASIC PARAMETERS ....................676
Screen for Drawing during Machining.........................409 Setting the Life Notice Flag .........................................532
SCREEN HARD COPY...............................................808 SETTING THE MANDATORY PARAMETERS ......673
Screens and Operations .........................................361,492 Setting the Spindle Orientation Mode ..........................745
SEARCH (FORWARD AND BACKWARD) ...............15 SETTING THE WORKPIECE COORDINATE DATA88
SEARCHING FOR A MACHINING PROGRAM TO SETTING TOOL FOR ATTACHMENT POSITION..563
BE EDITED ...............................................................14 SETTING TOOL OFFSET DATA .........................91,610
SEARCHING FOR A SEQUENCE NUMBER IN A Settings for Programmable data input ..........................710
PROGRAM ................................................................35 SETTINGS RELATED TO TOOLS..............................91
Second Method of Start (“SELECT NAVIGATION” SHORTCUT FOR STARTING THE CYCLE
window isn’t displayed) ...........................................131 CHANGE SCREEN .................................................124
Select coordinate system .......................................525,526
i-8
B-63874EN/11 INDEX
SHORTCUT FOR THE MANUAL MEASUREMENT Soft Key [INP.C.] ..........................................................92
SCREEN...................................................................127 SOFT KEY [MEASUR]............................................88,92
SHORTCUT FOR THE MEASUREMENT RESULT Soft Key ID List...........................................................763
SCREEN...................................................................127 SOFT KEY IDS TO BE OPEN TO USERS ................756
SHORTCUT FOR THE TOOL OFFSET SETTING Soft Keys for Selecting a Blank Connection Figure ....434
SCREEN...................................................................126 Soft-key [P TYPE] .......................................................118
SHORTCUT FOR THE WORKPIECE COORDINATE Soft-key [Q TYPE] ......................................................119
SYSTEM SETTING SCREEN.................................126 SOFT-KEY CUSTOMIZATION FUNCTION............762
SHORTCUT FOR VARIOUS SETTING SCREENS..127 Softkeys Icons for the Direction of the Imaginary Tool
SHORTCUT KEY OPERATIONS ..............................123 Nose ...........................................................................91
Shortcut to the Tool Figure Dimension Data Setting Specifiable Combinations of Figure.............................363
Window ......................................................................97 Specification of Function ...................................... 502,510
SHORTCUTS FOR COPY OPERATION...................123 Specifications for Omitting Modal Commands............442
SHORTCUTS FOR CUT OPERATION......................123 Specifying group ID.....................................................798
SHORTCUTS FOR RANGE SELECTION.................123 Specifying item title and group ID...............................797
SHORTCUTS FOR THE ALTER SCREEN FOR Specifying Navi operation code ...................................801
REGULAR PROGRAM REGISTRATION.............126 Specifying Navi trigger data ........................................801
SHORTCUTS FOR THE BASE SCREEN SOFT KEYS Specifying Navi window data ......................................798
..................................................................................123 Specifying Pecking Clearance / Return Amount of Drill
SHORTCUTS FOR THE COMMENT EDITING Cycle for Machining Center in Input Window (for
SCREEN...................................................................125 only Series 30i/31i/32i-A/B, 0i-MF/0i-MD) ............286
SHORTCUTS FOR THE CREATION SCREEN FOR Specifying Pecking Clearance of Drill Cycle for Lathe
REGULAR PROGRAM REGISTRATION.............126 in Input Window (for only Series 30i/31i/32i-A/B,
SHORTCUTS FOR THE CYCLE INPUT SCREEN ..125 0i-TF/0i-TD) ............................................................163
SHORTCUTS FOR THE FREE FIGURE CREATION Specifying tab title .......................................................796
SCREEN...................................................................128 Specifying the Clamping Method ................................256
SHORTCUTS FOR THE FREE FIGURE INPUT SPECIFYING TOOL FIGURE DIMENSION DATA...93
SCREEN...................................................................127 Spindle .........................................................................459
SHORTCUTS FOR THE FREE FIGURE MAIN Spindle and Standby Position Tool Display Screen .....530
SCREEN...................................................................127 SPINDLE MOVEMENT ANIMATION FOR
SHORTCUTS FOR THE M CODE INSERTION AUTOMATIC LATHES..........................................537
SCREEN...................................................................124 Spindle rotation speed and feedrate ...............................99
SHORTCUTS FOR THE MENU SELECTION SPINDLE SELECTION COMMAND AND PROCESS
SCREEN...................................................................124 START COMMAND ...............................................488
SHORTCUTS FOR THE PRESET SCREEN..............127 SQUARE ROOT..........................................................121
SHORTCUTS FOR THE PROGRAM CREATION Start Command ..............................................................28
SCREEN...................................................................125 START COMMAND OF REFLECTION....................537
SHORTCUTS FOR THE PROGRAM LIST SCREEN124 START METHOD FOR OPERATION NAVIGATING
SHORTCUTS FOR THE REGULAR PROGRAM ..................................................................................131
INSERTION SCREEN.............................................124 Start of Multi Part Program Editing Function ................22
SHORTCUTS FOR THE REGULAR PROGRAM Starting and stopping machining simulation ........ 51,54,55
REGISTRATION SCREEN.....................................126 Starting and stopping simulation....................................49
SHORTCUTS FOR THE SEARCH SCREEN ............125 Starting Background Editing..........................................32
SHORTCUTS FOR VARIOUS CONFIRMATION Starting Process List Editing........................................460
OPERATIONS .........................................................123 Starting Thread Repairing ............................................744
SIMULATION AND ACTUAL WORKING OF THE STARTING UP MACHINING SIMULATION FOR
MACHINE ...............................................................538 EACH PATH............................................................487
Simulation during Polygon Turning Cycle...................247 Status Display ....................................................... 524,578
Simultaneous Deletion of Multiple Programs ................12 Status Display Part .......................................................456
Simultaneous multipath display window (10.4-inch Structure of Customize Data File .................................762
screen) ........................................................................76 Support for C-Axis Machining with Rotation Axis......254
Simultaneous multipath display window (15-inch Supportable Machine Configuration ............................381
screen) ........................................................................77 Supporting data server operations ..................................13
Simultaneous String Search Function of Multi Programs SUPPRESSING SUBPROGRAM EXPANSION IN NC
....................................................................................16 PROGRAM CONVERSION....................................443
Slant Face Machining Command (Coordinate Switching Target of Editing Program ............................24
Conversion) ..............................................................382 SYMBOLS USED ........................................................ s-3
SOFT KEY [+INPUT] ..............................................88,92 System Variables .........................................................750
i-9
INDEX B-63874EN/11
<T> <U>
Target machining cycle ................................................204 Unchange to Menu Window When Blank Figure Input
THE METHOD TO FINISH OPERATION Window is Closed by Softkey [CANCEL]...............794
NAVIGATING.........................................................132 UNDO, REDO ...............................................................22
The Restriction of Turning Cycle When Input Values of Unusable Cycle ............................................................424
Z-axis and X-axis Clearances are Different..............205 Updating Life Values Displayed on the Tool Life Data
THREAD MILLING CYCLE......................................361 Screen.......................................................................531
THREAD REPAIRING ...............................................579 Usable Cycle ................................................................423
THREAD REPAIRING CYCLE .................................744 USAGE IN 8.4” LCD (For only Series 30i/31i/32i-B,
THREADING ..............................................................225 Series 0i-F/0i-D).......................................................555
TILTED WORKING PLANE INDEXING FUNCTION USB Memory Input Operation for Program.................116
(FOR Series 30i/31i, Series 0i-MF/0i-MD) ..............384 USB MEMORY INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION (for
Tilted Working Plane Input Screen by Euler’s Angle ..385 Series 0i-F/0i-D, 30i/31i/32i-B) ...............................114
Tilted Working Plane Input Screen by Projection USB MEMORY INPUT/OUTPUT OF PROGRAM ...114
Angles.......................................................................388 USB Memory Input/Output Screen of Program ...........114
Tilted Working Plane Input Screen by Roll-Pitch-Yaw386 USB Memory Output Operation for Program ..............115
Tilted Working Plane Input Screen by Three Points....386 USE WITH PERIPHERAL AXIS CONTROL (for only
Tilted Working Plane Input Screen by Tilted Plane Series 0i-F/30i/31i/32i-B).........................................567
Cancel.......................................................................388 Using Tool Management Data .....................................535
Tilted Working Plane Input Screen by Tool Axis
Direction...................................................................388 <V>
Tilted Working Plane Input Screen by Two Vectors ...387 Value of M Code Output..............................................256
TOOL DATABASE ACCESS FUNCTION ................750 VIEWING AND SETTING LIFE MANAGEMENT
TOOL INFORMATION DISPLAY..........................97,98 DATA.......................................................................530
Tool Information Tab ...................................................101 VIEWING AND SETTING TOOL MANAGEMENT
Tool Kind .....................................................................363 DATA.......................................................................529
Tool Kind Setting.........................................................247 VIEWING AND SETTING TOOL OFFSET VALUES
TOOL LIFE DATA LIST SCREEN ............................533 ..................................................................................528
TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT DATA ........................746
Tool management data ...................................................99 <W>
Tool Management Data Tab...........................................99 Waiting Line ................................................................459
Tool Management Data Window ...................................98 Warning .......................................................................413
TOOL MANAGEMENT FUNCTION ........................527 WARNING MESSAGE DISPLAY IN MULTI-PATH
Tool offset ....................................................................100 TURNING SYSTEM ...............................................488
Tool Offset Data Window ............................................525 WARNING MESSAGE DISPLAY WHEN RESET
TOOL OFFSET MEMORY CHANGING FUNCTION KEY IS PUSHED (for only Series 0i-F/30i/31i/32i-B,
..................................................................................525 31i-B5) .....................................................................569
Tool Offset Tab ............................................................101 WARNING MESSAGES.............................................536
Tool path ........................................................224,336,579 What is displayed in the program list? ...........................12
Tool Path (Machining Type 1) .....................................365 WHAT IS MANUAL GUIDE i? .....................................3
Tool Path (Machining Type 2) .....................................366 Window for selection of blank contour range ..............424
Tool Path (Machining Type 3) .....................................367 Window for selection of turning figure range ..............424
Tool Path of Engraving Cycle......................................359 Window for specification arbitrary angle.....................425
Tool Path of Polygon Turning......................................245 Window for specification of arbitrary point.................425
Tool size in Machining Simulation ................................67 Window Message Definition File ( vgamsg*u.txt ) .....795
Tool Type.....................................................................372 WORKING CONDITION ............................. 501,555,574
Transfer ........................................................................460 WORKPIECE COORDINATE DATA WINDOW .....575
TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS (SINE, COSINE, Workpiece Shift Offset Data Window .........................526
TANGENT, ARCSINE, ARCCOSINE, Write ............................................................................752
ARCTANGENT)......................................................120
TURNING....................................................................164 <X>
TURNING CYCLE......................................................154 XC-plane Circumferential Groove Figure....................351
Turning Groove Cycle by Using Button Tool..............223
TURNING GROOVING..............................................207
Turret............................................................................459
i-10
B-63874EN/11 REVISION RECORD
REVISION RECORD
Edition Date Contents
• Addition of explanation for Series 0i-F
• Addition of following items
Notes on Machining simulation, Calculation method of measuring of setting workpiece
coordinate data(apply for Series 0i-F/30i/31i/32i), Address R output for G02/G03 in
11 May,2015
machining cycle, Omitting of Finish amount in Residual machining cycle, Specifying of
Bottom width in trapezoidal groove of turning, C axis Hole on END face(GRID)-Cartesian
coordinates input cycle
• Correction of errors
2 windows machining simulation, 2 path machining center function, Simultaneous string
search function of multi programs, Handle machining, C axis hole on end face (random
points) - cartesian coordinates input cycle, Outer thread milling cycle, Disabling MANUAL
GUIDE i, Extended axis name function, Dynamic axis name changing, Improvement of
excessive amount of travel in Turning cycle, The restriction of turning cycle when input
values of Z-axis and X-axis clearances are different, High speed program management,
Program restart in machining cycle, Usage in 8.4” LCD, Input of direction along the layout of
numeric keys, Extension of fixed form sentences, Automatic adjustment of escape amount
for turning grooving cycle, Operation Navigating Function, Advanced guidance function,
10 Dec., 2013
Calculating method of measuring of setting workpiece coordinate data, Use with peripheral
axis control, MANUAL GUIDE i window call function, Machining simulation information
setting function for each path, Improvement of icon for selected path, 4 path system,
Specifying pecking clearance of drill cycle for lathe in input window, Specifying pecking
clearance / return amount of drill cycle for machining center in input window, Warning
message display when reset key is pushed, Display of simplified chinese characters alarm
of user macro, Pocket residual machining cycle, Blank contour changing function of turning
figure, Extended axis name function for 8.4” /10.4” display, MANUAL GUIDE i
customization, Conversion of G41/G42 command by NC program conversion
• Addition of explanation for Series 30i/31i/32i-B
09 Nov., 2011
USB Memory Input/Output function, Setting of program coordinate system for each path
Multi part program editing function, Machining simulation speed change function, Check Y
axis value at machining simulation of turning cycle, Blank cutout display in animated
simulation, Comment display during machining, G54.4 modal display, Operation restart
confirmation function after editing program, Memory card input/output of offset data,
Conical boring cycle, Turning groove cycle by using button tool, Polygon turning cycle,
08 Apr., 2010 XC-plane circumferential groove figure, Engraving cycle, Thread milling cycle,
Mirror/Rotation/Scaling/Figure copy command, Tilted working plane machining, Arc
specification by central angle, Drawing of arbitrary figure on sub-program list screen,
Expanded arbitrary figure element number, Lathe/Machining center G code system
switching function, Turrets simultaneous machining programming function, 19" display
units, Soft-key customization function
07 May, 2008 • Addition of explanation for Series0i-D
r-1
REVISION RECORD B-63874EN/11
Edition Date Contents

• Change of the configuration of the manual
• Addition of the following items
Displaying 3-dimensional interference check status, Displaying the rotation speed of a
servo motor-driven milling axis, Displaying the spindle-position and standby-position tool
numbers, Thread re-machining, Residual machining by turning, Milling by rotating a
workpiece about the y-axis, Selecting a range of an arbitrary figure, Reusing arbitrary
06 May, 2007
figures, Reusing a blank figure as an arbitrary figure, Series 16i-MB 2-path function,
Customization
• Deletion of the following items
MANUAL GUIDE i Simulator for PC
• Addition of parameters
05 Jul., 2004 Machining time display, Prism blank figure, XA plane, MANUAL GUIDE i Simulator for PC
• Addition of descriptions for Series 30i
Notes on creating programs, Undo and redo, Arbitrary figure copy functions, Editing a fixed
04 Dec., 2003 form figure subprogram, Program restart function, Accessing tool data base function,
Memory card input/output of fixed form sentences, Spindle movement animation for
automatic lathes, Support for folder management
• It is changed to the contents that the whole of the manual is often understood drastically.
• Changing work coordinate during machining simulation, Tool data base function, Editing of
03 Jul., 2003
free figure of subprogram form, Multi-path lathe functions, Modal display of offset types,
Example of programming, and MANUAL GUIDE i setup method
• Displaying the drawing-during-machining window, BG editing, NC statement conversion,
Next-block display function, Operations in background editing, Operations with the NC
statement conversion function, Shortcut key operations, Help screen, Memory card
input/output function, Handling large programs, Fixed-point format calculation function,
02 Jan., 2003
Automatic setting of initial value data, Rear end facing by milling, Subspindle-based c-axis
machining, Rear end facing by turning hole machining (workpiece rotation), Required
parameters, Parameters common to lathing cycles, Parameters for machining simulation
(animated)
01 Aug., 2002
r-2
B-63874EN/11
* B- 6 3 8 7 4 EN/ 1 1 . 0 1 *

B-63874en 11

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

B-63874en 11

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

B-63874en 11

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the purpose of this manual?

What is the purpose of this manual?

What safety precautions should be observed when using machines with FANUC MANUAL GUIDE i?

What safety precautions should be observed when using machines with FANUC MANUAL GUIDE i?

FANUC MANUAL GUIDE +

Common to Lathe System/Machining Center System

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE.........................................................................s-1

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

- Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

OVERVIEW OF THIS MANUAL

Cursor move keys INPUT key

FORMAT OF PROGRAMS TO BE USED

Explanations about the document contents

- FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A

- FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL B

- FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is-MODEL B

- FANUC Series 0i–MODEL F

- FANUC Series 0i–MODEL D

- FANUC Series 0i–MODEL C

- Manuals related to FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL A

- Manuals related to FANUC Series 30i/31i/32i-MODEL B

- Manuals related to FANUC Series 16i/18i/160i/180i/160is/180is-MODEL B

- Manuals related to FANUC Series 0i–MODEL F

- Manuals related to FANUC Series 0i–MODEL D

- Manuals related to FANUC Series 0i–MODEL C

Manual name Specification Number

I. WHAT IS MANUAL GUIDE i?

II. BASIC SCREEN AND OPERATION

2.12 KEY-IN PASTE ............................................................................................ 18

4.3.3 Scaling, Movement, and Other Operations in Drawing during Machining............70

5 EDITING AND OPERATION OF MDI PROGRAMS.............................. 86

8 SETTINGS RELATED TO TOOLS........................................................ 91

III. CONVENIENT FUNCTIONS

2.2.3 Memory Card Input Operation for Tool Data ......................................................110

3 USB MEMORY INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION (for Series 0i-F/0i-D,

4 PROGRAM RESTART FUNCTION..................................................... 118

5 CALCULATOR FUNCTION ................................................................ 120

6.7 SHORTCUTS FOR THE MENU SELECTION SCREEN ........................... 124

10.2.2 Operational Procedure ..........................................................................................136

IV. MACHINING CYCLE

3 C-AXIS AND A-AXIS MACHINING CYCLE........................................ 248

4 MILLING .............................................................................................. 261

4.2 FACING ..................................................................................................... 289

5 ENTERING ARBITRARY FIGURES ................................................... 393

5.3 ENLARGEMENT AND REDUCTION ON THE ARBITRARY FIGURE

6 NC PROGRAM CONVERSION FUNCTION ....................................... 437

7 ADDRESS R OUTPUT FOR G02/G03 IN MACHINING CYCLE

V. MULTI-PATH LATHE FUNCTIONS (OPTION)

3 CONCURRENT DISPLAY AND EDIT OF PROGRAMS OF ALL

4.1.5 Waiting Line.........................................................................................................459

5 MACHINING SIMULATION................................................................. 486

6 4 PATH SYSTEM (for only Series 30i/31i-B, 31i-B5)....................... 490

7 2 PATH MACHINING CENTER FUNCTION ....................................... 495

VI. HANDLE MACHINING

VII. OTHER FUNCTIONS

6 LATHE/MACHINING CENTER G CODE SYSTEM SWITCHING

11 USE WITH PERIPHERAL AXIS CONTROL

11.1 OUTLINE ................................................................................................... 567